HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640 Series

HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87650 Series

HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87660 Series

Service Manual

www.hp.com/videos/laserjet
www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfp
www.hp.com/support/colorljE87640mfp
 HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640,
E87650, E87660 -Service Manual

SUMMARY

Learn about theory of operation, remove and replace, troubleshooting on the printer. Parts are either customer-self repair
(CSR) replaceable, or field replaceable units (FRUs) which require installation by a trained field-service technician. Use the
provided parts diagrams and tables to identify the required part.
Legal information
Copyright and License

© Copyright 2022 HP Development Company,

L.P.

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without

prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under the copyright laws.

The information contained herein is subject to

change without notice.

The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be construed
as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or
omissions contained herein.

Edition 18, 7/2022

Revision History

View a list of document revisions.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing
herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial
errors or omissions contained herein.

Table Revision History

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

18.0 July 2022 Changed the part number for the "Bridge unit" from JC90-01401B to JC90-01772B.

17.0 June 2022 Changed the life span of the Z8W51A Flow ADF rollers from 100,000 to 200,000 pages.

16.0 February 2022 Removed the Automatically Straighten menu item from the Scan menu table in the "Control panel
menus" section, as that option is not available.

15.0 January 2022 Updated the exploded view diagram for the 3K sHCI frame to indicate that part #14 (Assy - frame
latch sensor front) is orderable.

Updated the exploded view diagram for the 3K sHCI main 1 to include a new part (callout #17), and
updated the 3K sHCI main 1 parts list (table) to include the new item #17 (Latch bracket frame) and
an accompanying footnote.

14.0 October 2021 Updated Removal and replacement: Fuser unit on page 225.

13.0 April 2021 Part number updates and general edits.

12.0 May 2020 Part number updates and general edits.

11.0 April 2020 SRM migration to SDL Tridion Docs.

Part number updates and general edits.

Updated SSBM sections to current HPPK content. See Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM) on
page 1272.

10.0 January 2020 Updated Setting standard tone in image quality problems and solutions. See Setting standard tone
on page 1194.

Added Red/Magenta hue printouts to image quality problems and solutions. See Red/Magenta hue
printouts on page 1196.

Added electrical-mechanical diagrams content. See Electrical-mechanical relationships diagrams on

page 1212

iii
 Table Revision History (continued)

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

9.0 June 2019 Updated all inner finisher content. See Inner finisher on page 2482.

Updated developer unit remove and replace procedure. See Removal and replacement: Developer
unit on page 173.

Added right door dampener kit remove and replace. See Removal and replacement: Right door
dampener and lever kit on page 443.

Added high-voltage rail remove and replace procedure. See Removal and replacement: High-voltage
rail assembly on page 460.

6.0 December 2018 Added/updated E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series content.

Added or updated repair topics for the E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series:

● Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX) on page 707

● Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) jam access cover (LX) on page 712

● Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) input tray (LX) on page 715

● Removal and replacement: Contact image sensor (CIS) on page 720

● Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX) on page 730

● Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller assembly (LX) on page 738

● Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner (LX) on page 742

● Removal and replacement: Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX) on page 750

● Removal and replacement: Document feeder feed motor (LX) on page 756

● Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX) on page 207

● Removal and replacement: Accelerator board (GX ADF only) on page 256

● Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD; du models) on page 259

● Removal and replacement: Formatter hard disk drive (HDD; du models) on page 265

● Removal and replacement: Formatter (du models) on page 271

5.0 September 2018 Added E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series content.

4.0 July 2018 Updated parts numbers throughout document to remove "SAM-" prefix and updated new part
numbers as identified.

Minor content edits (including graphics)

iv Revision History
Table Revision History (continued)

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

3.0 November 2017 Added formatter cabling content

Added Scan in Low remove and replace procedure

Updated code data for Diagnostics and Service Functions

Replaced Product Overview with the UG-style Printer Views and removed the previous "Machine
external view" section.

Updated R&R TOC level to 1.

Replaced references to SAW with WISE and removed QR codes.

Replaced Samsung Paper Jam content with the UG content

Moved specifications out of the appendix to the Product Specifications chapter

Added additional specification content to the Product Specifications chapter from the UG

Removed the lists of tables and figures and the alphabetical and numerical lists of parts

Replaced the glossary with the updated glossary from Topaz

Placed ESD cautions at the beginning of the R&R sections for the main printer and both finishers.

Removed the Samsung precaution sections

Updated variable list items to refer only to Diamond

Updated part numbers, part descriptions, diagrams, and photos

Reorganized remove and replace chapter (blended into parts and diagrams)

Integrated over 250 new edits into existing content, including updated video links and part numbers.
Reformatted tables and resource pages, added xrefs, and changed critical terminology.

2.0 July 2017 Updated TOC to only consist of 3 levels

Add error code and CPMD overview

Added “How to search for documentation” section.

Updated toner average yield data

Remove all occurrences of ITB

Changed all occurrences of #2 Phillips to #2 JIS

1.0 April 2017 Service manual initial release

v
 Conventions used in this guide

Learn about the conventions used in this publication.

TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product.

WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.

vi Conventions used in this guide

Table of contents

1 Product specifications and description....................................................................................................................................................1

Printer views ...........................................................................................................................................................................................1
Printer front view ..........................................................................................................................................................................1
Printer back view...........................................................................................................................................................................2
Interface ports ...............................................................................................................................................................................3
Control-panel view........................................................................................................................................................................3
Inner finisher view.........................................................................................................................................................................5
Stapler/stacker finisher view .......................................................................................................................................................5
Booklet finisher view ....................................................................................................................................................................5
Specifications..........................................................................................................................................................................................6
Technical specifications................................................................................................................................................................6
Supported operating systems ................................................................................................................................................. 11
Mobile printing solutions .......................................................................................................................................................... 13
Printer dimensions..................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ............................................................................ 14
Operating-environment range................................................................................................................................................. 14
General specifications ............................................................................................................................................................... 15
Print specifications..................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Scan specifications..................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Copy specifications..................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Supplies ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Maintenance parts ..................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Paper handling specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 28
Network and software specifications ..................................................................................................................................... 33
Options......................................................................................................................................................................................... 37
Feeding system ................................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Feeding system overview ......................................................................................................................................................... 44
Main components and functions ............................................................................................................................................. 45
Cassette....................................................................................................................................................................................... 50
Pickup Assembly ........................................................................................................................................................................ 51
Registration unit......................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Tray 1 feed assembly ................................................................................................................................................................ 52
Fuser unit.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 53
Fuser unit overview.................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Fuser unit drive........................................................................................................................................................................... 55
Fuser unit temperature control ............................................................................................................................................... 55

vii
 Loop control................................................................................................................................................................................ 56
Image creation..................................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Printing process overview......................................................................................................................................................... 57
Imaging unit ................................................................................................................................................................................ 58
Toner cartridge ........................................................................................................................................................................... 62
Dynamic security........................................................................................................................................................................ 63
Intermediate transfer belt unit................................................................................................................................................. 64
Toner reservoir unit.................................................................................................................................................................... 66
Laser scanner unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 67
Laser scanner assembly overview .......................................................................................................................................... 67
Laser scanning optical path...................................................................................................................................................... 68
Laser synchronizing detectors................................................................................................................................................. 69
Automatic CPR adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................... 70
Drive system ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 73
Pickup and cassette lift drive ................................................................................................................................................... 73
Feed drive.................................................................................................................................................................................... 74
Registration drive ....................................................................................................................................................................... 75
Fuser release/exit drive ............................................................................................................................................................. 76
Drive motors ............................................................................................................................................................................... 77
Main drive unit motors .............................................................................................................................................................. 79
Toner supply/reservoir drive .................................................................................................................................................... 79
Engage transfer roller drive...................................................................................................................................................... 80
Toner collection unit (TCU) drive .............................................................................................................................................. 81
Flatbed Scanner System .................................................................................................................................................................... 81
Flatbed scanner system overview........................................................................................................................................... 81
Scanning system components................................................................................................................................................. 84
Caution for moving the scanner .............................................................................................................................................. 90
Document feeder LX (du models) .................................................................................................................................................... 91
Document feeder LX overview................................................................................................................................................. 91
Document feeder LX electrical parts ...................................................................................................................................... 92
Document feeder LX registration ............................................................................................................................................ 93
Document feeder LX drive system.......................................................................................................................................... 93
Document feeder LX scanning position ................................................................................................................................. 95
Document feeder LX specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 96
Flow document feeder dn/z models (GX and sGX)........................................................................................................................ 96
Flow document feeder overview ............................................................................................................................................. 96
Flow document feeder sensors ............................................................................................................................................... 97
Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor .............................................................................................. 99
Flow document feeder drive system ...................................................................................................................................... 99
Flow document feeder specifications...................................................................................................................................101
Flow document feeder registration ......................................................................................................................................102
Flow document feeder scanning position............................................................................................................................102
Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor .................................................................................................103
Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method .......................................................................................................104
Flow ADF z bundles (GX) .........................................................................................................................................................105
Hardware configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................105
Main controller..........................................................................................................................................................................107

viii
 Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5H) ...............................................................................................................117
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 3R) for GX/sGX only ..................................................................................119
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) ..................................................................................................................121
Fuser drive assembly...............................................................................................................................................................123
High voltage power supply (HVPS) board ............................................................................................................................124
Eraser PCA.................................................................................................................................................................................127
Fuser PCA ..................................................................................................................................................................................128
Waste Sensor PCA....................................................................................................................................................................128
Paper Size sensor PCA ............................................................................................................................................................129
Flow document feeder PCA ....................................................................................................................................................129
Scan joint PCA ...........................................................................................................................................................................130
CCDM PCA ..................................................................................................................................................................................131
WLED IF PCA..............................................................................................................................................................................132
WLED PCA..................................................................................................................................................................................132
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) ..............................................................................................................................................................132
High capacity input tray (HCI) ..........................................................................................................................................................136
Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) ................................................................................................................................................140

2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ......................................................................................................................................144

HP service and support ....................................................................................................................................................................144
Order parts by authorized service providers ................................................................................................................................145
Ordering.....................................................................................................................................................................................145
Orderable parts ........................................................................................................................................................................146
How to use parts lists and diagrams .............................................................................................................................................146
ESD precautions ................................................................................................................................................................................146
Service approach...............................................................................................................................................................................146
Precautions when replacing parts.........................................................................................................................................146
Before performing service......................................................................................................................................................147
After performing service.........................................................................................................................................................148
Post-service test ......................................................................................................................................................................148
Maintenance.......................................................................................................................................................................................149
Cleaning the paper dust stick.................................................................................................................................................149
Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX).......................................................................................................151
Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX)..............................................................................................152
Cleaning the scanner glass.....................................................................................................................................................153
Main parts...........................................................................................................................................................................................154
Main assemblies.......................................................................................................................................................................154
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................387
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................390
Exit assemblies.........................................................................................................................................................................392
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................412
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................413
Cassettes tray 2/3....................................................................................................................................................................413
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................415
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................416
Main frame assembly ..............................................................................................................................................................416

ix
 Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................479
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................480
Drive system .............................................................................................................................................................................480
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................482
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................483
Drive system .............................................................................................................................................................................483
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................493
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................494
Rear frame assembly ..............................................................................................................................................................494
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................498
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................499
Drive system .............................................................................................................................................................................499
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................554
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................555
Main frame pickup 1 and 2 .....................................................................................................................................................555
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................591
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................592
Main (sub) frame pickup..........................................................................................................................................................592
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................598
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................599
Covers ........................................................................................................................................................................................599
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................632
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................633
Right door..................................................................................................................................................................................633
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................678
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................679
Tray 1 .........................................................................................................................................................................................679
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................696
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................697
Right door guide.......................................................................................................................................................................697
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................699
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................700
Right door exit and takeaway ................................................................................................................................................700
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................702
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................703
Drive system .............................................................................................................................................................................703
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................705
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................706
ADF (LX models).......................................................................................................................................................................706
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................736
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................737
ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)............................................................................................................................737
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................747
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................748
ADF main frame assembly (LX models) ...............................................................................................................................748
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................761
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................762
Flow ADF (GX/sGX) ...................................................................................................................................................................762
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................779

x
 Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................780
Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX) ..............................................................................................................................................780
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................789
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................790
Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX) ...........................................................................................................................................790
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................797
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................798
Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) .....................................................................................................................................................798
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................807
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................808
Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX) .............................................................................................................................................808
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................860
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................861
Image scanner ..........................................................................................................................................................................861
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................875
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................876
Image scanner, lower...............................................................................................................................................................876
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................889
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................890
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) ..............................................................................................................................................................891
DCF main ...................................................................................................................................................................................891
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................914
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................915
DCF frame..................................................................................................................................................................................915
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................920
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................921
DCF rear frame .........................................................................................................................................................................921
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................925
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................926
Opt feed drive ...........................................................................................................................................................................927
DCF second pickup ...................................................................................................................................................................928
2000-sheet HCI (department) ........................................................................................................................................................929
2K HCI main...............................................................................................................................................................................929
2K HCI drive ...............................................................................................................................................................................930
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................943
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................944
2K HCI cassette.........................................................................................................................................................................945
2K HCI frame .............................................................................................................................................................................946
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................950
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................951
2K HCI main pickup ..................................................................................................................................................................952
3000-sheet sHCI (department; E82540/50/60 and E87640/50/60 only) .............................................................................953
3K sHCI main 1..........................................................................................................................................................................953
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................961
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................962
3K sHCI main 3..........................................................................................................................................................................962
Alphabetical parts list..............................................................................................................................................................976
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................977

xi
 3K sHCI main 5..........................................................................................................................................................................978
3K sHCI main 6..........................................................................................................................................................................979
Pickup cover unit ......................................................................................................................................................................980
3K sHCI frame ...........................................................................................................................................................................982

3 Problem solving .....................................................................................................................................................................................983

Control panel messages document (CPMD) .................................................................................................................................983
Error codes (types and structure)..........................................................................................................................................983
How to search for printer documentation............................................................................................................................985
Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................................................................988
Determine the problem source..............................................................................................................................................988
Tools for troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................................................999
Problem-solving checklist ......................................................................................................................................................999
Print menu map..................................................................................................................................................................... 1001
Print current settings pages................................................................................................................................................ 1001
Print event log ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1002
Pre-boot menu options........................................................................................................................................................ 1002
Control panel menus ............................................................................................................................................................ 1020
Clear paper jams............................................................................................................................................................................. 1124
Paper jam locations .............................................................................................................................................................. 1124
13.A1 tray 1 paper jam ........................................................................................................................................................ 1124
13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam ............................................................................................................................... 1125
Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI ................................................................................................................................... 1128
Service mode (tech mode; du models)....................................................................................................................................... 1129
Entering service mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 1129
Service mode menu tree...................................................................................................................................................... 1130
Information ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1134
Maintenance counts.............................................................................................................................................................. 1136
Diagnostics............................................................................................................................................................................. 1137
Service functions................................................................................................................................................................... 1174
Print quality troubleshooting guide ............................................................................................................................................ 1176
Image quality problems and solutions .............................................................................................................................. 1176
Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models)............................................................................................................................. 1196
Adjusting the Flow ADF skew ....................................................................................................................................................... 1199

4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams ....................................................................................................................................................... 1205

Connection diagrams..................................................................................................................................................................... 1205
Connection Diagram (FUSER/EXIT/DUPLEX/TONER) ...................................................................................................... 1205
Connection Diagram (Scanner) ........................................................................................................................................... 1206
Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB) ............................................................................................ 1207
Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup)............................................................................................. 1208
Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock)....................................................................................................................... 1210
Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB)............................................................................................................................. 1212
Electrical-mechanical relationships diagrams........................................................................................................................... 1212
Main drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)............................................................................................................... 1212
T1 drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)................................................................................................................... 1214
WTB drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) ............................................................................................................... 1216

xii
 Pickup drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)............................................................................................................ 1218
Registration unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific).................................................................................................... 1220
Pickup unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) ............................................................................................................. 1220
ACR unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) .................................................................................................................. 1222
Exit unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)................................................................... 1222
Fuser exit drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) ...................................................... 1224
Registration drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared).................................................. 1224
Feed drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)............................................................... 1225
Pickup drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)............................................................ 1226
MP unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared).................................................................... 1227
Side unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared).................................................................. 1229
Right door guide (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared).................................................... 1231
Right door output takeaway (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) ............................... 1233
Front unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)................................................................ 1235
Pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover open sensor (DCF/HCI) ................................................................................ 1237
Paper empty and limit-2 sensors (DCF/HCI) ..................................................................................................................... 1239
Paper empty, path, limit-1, and path sensors (DCF/HCI) ................................................................................................ 1240
Paper size sensors (DCF/HCI) .............................................................................................................................................. 1240
HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI) ............................................................................................................................................ 1241
Cover open sensor, cassette installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, and shift motor
(DCF/HCI)................................................................................................................................................................................. 1243
Limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed sensor, main limit and empty sensors (DCF/HCI) ................................................ 1245
Level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid home sensor, and solenoid (DCF/HCI)........................................................... 1246
Home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and empty sensor (DCF/HCI) ...................................................................................... 1247
Limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor (DCF/HCI) ...................................... 1248
Pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and feed motor (DCF/HCI)............................................................................................... 1248
Upper/lower paper low sensors (DCF/HCI)........................................................................................................................ 1249
Front/rear home sensors and tray open sensor (DCF/HCI) ............................................................................................ 1250
Main PCAs (SSBM) ................................................................................................................................................................. 1251
Paper detection sensor (SSBM) .......................................................................................................................................... 1252
Entrance motors A/B, end fence motor, buffer motor and sensor, and diverter close sensor (SSBM).................... 1253
Top-beam out sensor, stack motor, and SKU motor (SSBM) .......................................................................................... 1254
Curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert home sensor, and guide home sensor (SSBM) ................................................... 1255
Feed entrance sensor (SSBM) ............................................................................................................................................. 1256
Press home sensor, tamper home sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press motor, and feed motor
(SSBM)..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1258
Top-exit path and compile-exit path sensors (SSBM)..................................................................................................... 1260
Knife motor, stopper home sensor, and stopper solenoid and motor (SSBM) ............................................................ 1261
Top door sensor, fold motor, and knife home position sensor (SSBM)......................................................................... 1262
Operational panel button PCA and entrance path sensor (SSBM) ................................................................................ 1263
Exit cam home sensor, main paddle home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor (SSBM) ....................................... 1264
Front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper home sensors, and end-fence home sensor (SSBM)..................... 1266
Tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out sensors (SSBM)......................... 1268
Bridge motor, bridge middle sensor, and bridge guide sensor (SSBM)......................................................................... 1269
Bridge entrance path sensor (SSBM) ................................................................................................................................. 1270

5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM) .................................................................................................................................... 1272

Product specification and description......................................................................................................................................... 1272
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher view .......................................................................................................... 1272

xiii
 Detailed Specifications ......................................................................................................................................................... 1275
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system ...................................................................................................... 1280
Service approach............................................................................................................................................................................ 1351
Precautions when replacing parts...................................................................................................................................... 1351
Before performing service................................................................................................................................................... 1353
ESD precautions .................................................................................................................................................................... 1353
After performing service...................................................................................................................................................... 1353
Post-service test ................................................................................................................................................................... 1354
Order parts by authorized service providers .................................................................................................................... 1354
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and booklet finishers) ......................................................... 1355
Parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker) ....................................................................................................................................... 1355
Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher) ...................................................................................................................................... 1389
Bridge unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1409
Covers ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1431
Entrance unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1497
Punch unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1502
Tray diverter unit................................................................................................................................................................... 1508
Top exit unit............................................................................................................................................................................ 1535
Top output tray unit .............................................................................................................................................................. 1561
Main exit unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1574
Paddle unit ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1599
End fence unit........................................................................................................................................................................ 1630
Tamper unit............................................................................................................................................................................ 1664
Stapler unit............................................................................................................................................................................. 1816
Ejector unit ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1896
Main output tray unit ............................................................................................................................................................ 2047
Paper holding unit................................................................................................................................................................. 2104
Buffer unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 2160
Booklet maker ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2173
Booklet entrance unit ........................................................................................................................................................... 2183
Booklet paddle unit............................................................................................................................................................... 2200
Booklet end fence unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 2212
Booklet presser unit.............................................................................................................................................................. 2233
Booklet tamper unit.............................................................................................................................................................. 2254
Booklet stapler unit .............................................................................................................................................................. 2308
Booklet fold unit .................................................................................................................................................................... 2326
Booklet diverter unit ............................................................................................................................................................. 2406
Booklet exit unit .................................................................................................................................................................... 2429
Booklet output tray unit....................................................................................................................................................... 2447
PCA .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2450
Problem solving.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2467
Control panel message document (CPMD) ....................................................................................................................... 2467
Clear paper jams.................................................................................................................................................................... 2467
Finisher system diagram............................................................................................................................................................... 2480

6 Inner finisher........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2482

Product specification and description......................................................................................................................................... 2482
Inner finisher view................................................................................................................................................................. 2482

xiv
 Detailed specifications.......................................................................................................................................................... 2483
Inner finisher system ............................................................................................................................................................ 2488
Service approach............................................................................................................................................................................ 2525
Precautions when replacing parts...................................................................................................................................... 2525
Before performing service................................................................................................................................................... 2527
ESD precautions .................................................................................................................................................................... 2527
After performing service...................................................................................................................................................... 2527
Post-service test ................................................................................................................................................................... 2528
Order parts by authorized service providers .................................................................................................................... 2528
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher).................................................................................................... 2529
Parts and diagrams (inner finisher).................................................................................................................................... 2530
Covers ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2540
Entrance unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2562
Exit unit................................................................................................................................................................................... 2577
Paper support unit ................................................................................................................................................................ 2596
Paddle unit ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2681
Tamper unit............................................................................................................................................................................ 2702
Stapler unit............................................................................................................................................................................. 2811
Ejector unit ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2837
End fence unit........................................................................................................................................................................ 2903
Output tray unit ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2913
Paper holding unit................................................................................................................................................................. 2974
Punch unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 3019
Problem solving.............................................................................................................................................................................. 3032
Control panel message document (CPMD) ....................................................................................................................... 3032
Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher)......................................................................................................................... 3033
Punch waste full sensor....................................................................................................................................................... 3033
Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor.................................................................................................... 3034
Entrance motor ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3035
Exit sensor.............................................................................................................................................................................. 3036
Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and paper holding solenoid ...... 3037
Paper support motor & home sensor................................................................................................................................ 3038
Front tamper motor and home sensor ............................................................................................................................. 3039
Rear tamper motor and home sensor............................................................................................................................... 3040
End fence sensor................................................................................................................................................................... 3041
Stapler position motor and sensor .................................................................................................................................... 3042
Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor .............................................. 3043
Output tray motor and sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 3044
Output tray top of stack sensor.......................................................................................................................................... 3045
Top cover switch.................................................................................................................................................................... 3046
Front cover switch................................................................................................................................................................. 3047

Appendix A Certificate of Volatility....................................................................................................................................................... 3049

Certificate of Volatility ................................................................................................................................................................... 3049

Glossary of terms.......................................................................................................................................................................................0

Index.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3053

xv
1 Product specifications and description

You will learn more about the following sub sections:

Printer views
Learn more specifically about the different views of the printer.

Printer front view

Learn about the printer components (front view).

Figure 1-1 Printer front view

1 2
3
17 4
16 5
6
7
15 8
9 10

12

13
14 11

Product specifications and description 1

 Item Description

1 Automatic document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)

2 Automatic document feeder width guides

3 Automatic document feeder input tray

4 Automatic document feeder output tray

5 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)

6 Physical keyboard (Flow models only). Pull the keyboard straight out to use it. (NOTE: Close the keyboard when it is
not in use.)

7 Right door (access for clearing jams)

8 On/off button

9 Tray 1

10 Power switch

11 Power connection

12 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)

13 Tray 2

14 Tray 3

15 Output bin

16 Easy-access USB port. Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer, or to update the printer
firmware. (NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.)

17 Hardware integration pocket (for connecting accessory and third-party devices)

Printer back view

Learn about the printer components (back view).

Figure 1-2 Printer rear view

2 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Item Description

1 Formatter cover

2 Interface ports

3 Serial number and product number label

Interface ports
Learn about the printer components (interface ports).

Figure 1-3 Interface ports

Item Description

1 USB port for connecting external USB devices (NOTE: For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port near the
control panel.)

2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet network port

3 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port

Control-panel view
Learn about the printer components (control-panel).

NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.

The Home screen provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.

Return to the Home screen at any time by touching the Home button on the printer control panel.

NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer configuration.

Interface ports 3
 Figure 1-4 Printer control panel
2 3 4 5

6
1

Item Button Description

1 Home button Touch the Home button to return to the Home screen.

2 Reset button The Reset button returns the printer to default settings and is always present if users
are not logged in. The Reset button is not present when the Sign Out button is present.
Touch the Reset button to resume and release jobs from the previous pause state and
interrupt mode, reset the quick copy count in the copy count field, exit special modes,
reset the display language and the keyboard layout.

3 Sign In or Sign Out button Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.

Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The printer restores all options to
the default settings.

NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has configured the printer to
require permission for access to features.

4 Information button Touch the information button to access a screen that provides access to several types
of printer information. Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen for the following
information:

● Display Language: Change the language setting for the current user session.

● Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.

● Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect directly to the printer using a
phone, tablet, or other device with Wi-Fi.

● Wireless: View or change wireless connection settings (only when an optional

wireless accessory is installed).

● Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection settings.

● HP Web Services: View information to connect and print to the printer using
HP Web Services (ePrint).

4 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Item Button Description

5 Help button Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.

The status line provides information about the overall printer status.

6 Applications area Touch any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the screen sideways to access
more applications.

NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The administrator can configure
which applications appear and the order in which they appear.

7 Start Copy button Touch the Start Copy button to start a copy job.

8 Home-screen page Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in an application. The current
indicator page is highlighted. Swipe the screen sideways to scroll between pages.

Inner finisher view

Learn about the printer components (inner finisher).

Stapler/stacker finisher view

Learn about the printer components (stapler/stacker finisher).

Booklet finisher view

Learn about the printer components (booklet finisher).

Inner finisher view 5

 Specifications
Learn about the specifications.

Technical specifications
Learn technical specifications for model bundles.

NOTE: Hole punch accessories are optional for the stapler/stacker, inner finisher, and booklet maker
accessories.

Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z

Model number Item E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z

Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A

Paper handling Tray 1 (100-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
capacity)

Tray 2 (520-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

capacity)

Tray 3 (520-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

capacity)

2 x 520-sheet dual Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

cassette feeder

2,000-sheet high- Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

capacity input tray

3,000-sheet side- Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

mount high-capacity
input tray

Printer cabinet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Stapler/stacker Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finishing accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)

6 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z (continued)

Model number Item E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z

Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A

Booklet maker Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finishing accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)

Inner finisher Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory (hole
punch accessories
are optional)

2/3 hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory (hole
punch accessories
are optional)

2/4 hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory (hole
punch accessories
are optional)

Swedish hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory (hole
punch accessories
are optional)

HP Job separator Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Automatic duplex Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

printing

Connectivity 10/100/1000 Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Ethernet LAN
connection with IPv4
and IPv6

Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Easy-access USB Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

port for printing
without a computer
and upgrading the
firmware

Hardware Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Integration Pocket
for connecting
accessory and third-
party devices

Memory 7 GB base memory Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Mass storage 2 x 320 GB Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

HP Secure High-
Performance Hard
Disk

Security HP Trusted Platform Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Module

Control-panel Color touchscreen Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

display control panel

Technical specifications 7
 Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z (continued)

Model number Item E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z

Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A

Retractable Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

keyboard supported supported supported

Print Prints 40 pages per Supported Supported Not Not Not Not
minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported supported
and on letter-size
paper.

Prints 50 pages per Not Not Supported Supported Not Not

minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported supported
and on letter-size
paper

Prints 60 pages per Not Not Not Not Supported Supported

minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported supported
and on letter-size
paper

Easy-access USB Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

printing (no
computer required)

Fax Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Copy and Scan Scans 90 pages per Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not
minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported
and letter-size paper

Scans 120 pages Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

per minute (ppm) on supported supported supported
A4 and letter-size
paper

250-page document Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

feeder with dual-
head scanning
for single-pass
duplex copying and
scanning

HP EveryPage Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

Technologies supported supported supported
including ultrasonic
multi-feed detection

Embedded Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

optical character supported supported supported
recognition (OCR)
provides the ability
to convert printed
pages into text that
can be edited or
searched using a
computer

SMART Label feature Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

provides paper-edge supported supported supported
detection for
automatic page
cropping

8 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z (continued)

Model number Item E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z

Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A

Automatic page Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

orientation for supported supported supported
pages that have at
least 100 characters
of text

Automatic tone Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

adjustment sets supported supported supported
contrast, brightness,
and background
removal for each
page

Digital Send Send documents to Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
E-mail, USB, and
shared folders on a
network

Send documents to Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

SharePoint® supported supported supported

Table 1-2 E87640du, E87650du, , E87660du

Model number Item E87640du E87650du E87660du

Product number 5CM64A 5CM65A 5CM66A

Paper handling Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity) Supported Supported Supported

Tray 2 (520-sheet capacity) Supported Supported Supported

Tray 3 (520-sheet capacity) Supported Supported Supported

2 x 520-sheet dual cassette Optional Optional Optional

feeder

2,000-sheet high-capacity input Optional Optional Optional

tray

3,000-sheet side-mount high- Optional Optional Optional

capacity input tray

Printer cabinet Optional Optional Optional

Stapler/stacker finishing Optional Optional Optional

accessory (hole punch
accessories are optional)

Booklet maker finishing Optional Optional Optional

accessory (hole punch
accessories are optional)

Inner finisher accessory (hole Optional Optional Optional

punch accessories are optional)

2/3 hole punch accessory (hole Optional Optional Optional

punch accessories are optional)

2/4 hole punch accessory (hole Optional Optional Optional

punch accessories are optional)

Technical specifications 9
 Table 1-2 E87640du, E87650du, , E87660du (continued)

Model number Item E87640du E87650du E87660du

Product number 5CM64A 5CM65A 5CM66A

Swedish hole punch accessory Optional Optional Optional

(hole punch accessories are
optional)

HP Job separator Optional Optional Optional

Automatic duplex printing Supported Supported Supported

Connectivity 10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN Supported Supported Supported

connection with IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Supported Supported Supported

Easy-access USB port for Supported Supported Supported

printing without a computer and
upgrading the firmware

Hardware Integration Pocket for Supported Supported Supported

connecting accessory and third-
party devices

Memory 7 GB base memory Supported Supported Supported

Mass storage 2 x 320 GB HP Secure High- Supported Supported Supported

Performance Hard Disk

Security HP Trusted Platform Module Supported Supported Supported

Control-panel display Color touchscreen control panel Supported Supported Supported

Retractable keyboard Not supported Not supported Not supported

Print Prints 40 pages per minute Supported Not supported Not supported
(ppm) on A4 and on letter-size
paper.

Prints 50 pages per minute Not supported Supported Not supported

(ppm) on A4 and on letter-size
paper

Prints 60 pages per minute Not supported Not supported Supported

(ppm) on A4 and on letter-size
paper

Easy-access USB printing (no Supported Supported Supported

computer required)

Fax Optional Optional Optional

Copy and Scan Scans 90 pages per minute Supported Supported Supported
(ppm) on A4 and letter-size
paper

Scans 80-simplex/160-duplex Supported Supported Supported

images per minute (ipm) on A4
and letter-size paper (LX du
models only)

100-page document feeder Supported Supported Supported

with dual-head scanning for
single-pass duplex copying and
scanning

10 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-2 E87640du, E87650du, , E87660du (continued)

Model number Item E87640du E87650du E87660du

Product number 5CM64A 5CM65A 5CM66A

HP EveryPage Technologies Not supported Not supported Not supported

including ultrasonic multi-feed
detection

Embedded optical character Not supported Not supported Not supported

recognition (OCR) provides the
ability to convert printed pages
into text that can be edited or
searched using a computer

SMART Label feature provides Not supported Not supported Not supported
paper-edge detection for
automatic page cropping

Automatic page orientation for Not supported Not supported Not supported
pages that have at least 100
characters of text

Automatic tone adjustment Not supported Not supported Not supported

sets contrast, brightness, and
background removal for each
page

Digital Send Send documents to E-mail, USB, Supported Supported Supported

and shared folders on a network

Send documents to SharePoint® Not supported Not supported Not supported

Supported operating systems

Learn about supported operating systems.

The following information applies to the printer-specific Windows PCL 6 and HP print drivers for macOS and to
the software installer.

Windows: The HP Software Installer can be downloaded from the printer support website for this printer and
installs the "HP PCL.6" version 3 print driver, the "HP PCL 6" version 3 print driver, or the "HP PCL-6" version 4
print driver, depending on the Windows operating system, along with optional software when using the software
installer.

Download the "HP PCL.6" version 3 print driver, the "HP PCL 6" version 3 print driver, and the "HP PCL-6"
version 4 print driver from the printer-support website for this printer: www.hp.com/support/ljE87600mfp or
www.hp.com/support/ljE87640mfp.

macOS: Mac computers are supported with this printer. Download HP Easy Start either from 123.hp.com/
LaserJet or from the Printer Support page, and then use HP Easy Start to install the HP print driver. HP Easy Start
is not included in the HP Software Installer.

1. Go to 123.hp.com/LaserJet.

2. Follow the steps provided to download the printer software.

Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.

UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX®, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.

Supported operating systems 11

 Table 1-3 Supported operating systems and print drivers

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on the web) Notes

Windows® XP SP3, 32-bit The "HP PCL.6" printer-specific print driver is installed Microsoft retired mainstream support for Windows XP
for this operating system as part of the software in April 2009. HP will continue to provide best effort
installation. support for the discontinued XP operating system.
Some features and page sizes in the print driver are
not supported.

Windows Vista®, 32-bit The "HP PCL.6" printer-specific print driver is installed Microsoft retired mainstream support for Windows
for this operating system as part of the software Vista in April 2012. HP will continue to provide best
installation. effort support for the discontinued Vista operating
system. Some features and page sizes in the print
driver are not supported.

Windows Server 2003 The "HP PCL.6" printer-specific print driver is available Microsoft retired mainstream support for Windows
SP2, 32-bit for download from the printer-support website. Server 2003 in July 2010. HP will continue to provide
Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add best effort support for the discontinued Server 2003
Printer tool to install it. operating system. Some features and page sizes in
the print driver are not supported.

Windows 7 SP1, 32-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is installed
and 64-bit for this operating system as part of the software
installation.

Windows 8, 32-bit and The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is installed Windows 8 RT support is provided through Microsoft
64-bit for this operating system as part of the software IN OS Version 4, 32- bit driver.
installation.

Windows 8.1, 32-bit and The "HP PCL-6" V4 printer-specific print driver is Windows 8.1 RT support is provided through
64-bit installed for this operating system as part of the Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit driver.
software installation.

Windows 10, 32-bit and The "HP PCL-6" V4 printer-specific print driver is
64-bit installed for this operating system as part of the
software installation.

Windows Server 2008 The "HP PCL.6" printer-specific print driver is available Microsoft retired mainstream support for Windows
SP2, 32-bit for download from the printer-support website. Server 2008 in January 2015. HP will continue to
Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add provide best effort support for the discontinued
Printer tool to install it. Server 2008 operating system. Some features and
page sizes in the print driver are not supported.

Windows Server 2008 The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is available
SP2, 64-bit for download from the printer-support website.
Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add
Printer tool to install it.

Windows Server 2008 The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is available
R2, SP 1, 64-bit for download from the printer-support website.
Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add
Printer tool to install it.

Windows Server 2012, The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is available

64-bit for download from the printer-support website.
Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add
Printer tool to install it.

Windows Server 2012 The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is available

R2, 64-bit for download from the printer-support website.
Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add
Printer tool to install it.

12 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-3 Supported operating systems and print drivers (continued)

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on the web) Notes

macOS 10.12 (Sierra), To install the print driver, download HP Easy Start
macOS 10.11 (El from 123.hp.com/LaserJet.
Capitan), and macOS
10.10 (Yosemite) Follow the steps provided to install the printer
software and print driver.

NOTE: Supported operating systems can change. For a current list of supported operating systems, go to
www.hp.com/support/ljE87600mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljE87640mfp for HP's all-inclusive help for the
printer.

NOTE: For details on client and server operating systems and for HP UPD driver support for this printer, go to
www.hp.com/go/upd. Under Additional information, click the links.

Table 1-4 Minimum system requirements

Windows macOS

● An Internet connection ● Internet connection

● Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network connection ● 1 GB of available hard-disk space

● 2 GB of available hard-disk space

Mobile printing solutions

Learn what HP offers for mobile printing solutions.

HP offers multiple mobile and ePrint solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device. To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to HP Customer
Support - Knowledge Base.

● Wi-Fi Direct

● HP ePrint via email (Requires HP Web Services to be enabled and the printer to be registered with
HP Connected)

● HP ePrint app (Available for Android, iOS, and Blackberry)

● HP All-in-One Remote app for iOS and Android devices

● HP ePrint software

● Google Cloud Print

● AirPrint

● Android Printing

Printer dimensions
Learn about printer dimensions.

NOTE: A color printer model is shown in the figure below. However, the dimension information applies to
mono and color printers.

Mobile printing solutions 13

 1

2
3 2
3

Table 1-5 Printer dimensions

Item Normal operating dimensions Maximum operating dimensions

Height 932.2 mm (36.7 in) 1389.4 mm (54.7 in)

Depth 771.1 mm (30.3 in) 1676 mm (66 in)

Width 585 mm (23 in) 1134 mm (47 in)

Weight Mono models (82XXX series): 95.6 kg

(210.8 lb)

Color models (87XXX series): 113.1 kg

(249.3 lb)

NOTE: HP recommends that 30 mm (1.81 in) be added to the printer dimensions provided in this chapter to
make sure there is sufficient space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper ventilation.

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions

In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain power specifications.

See www.hp.com/support/ljE87600mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljE87640mfp for current information.

CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert
operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.

Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specifications.

Table 1-6 Operating-environment specifications

Environment Recommended Storage

Temperature 15° to 30°C (59° to 86°F) Not available

Relative humidity 20% to 80% relative humidity (RH) Not available

14 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

General specifications
Learn about the general specifications.

Table 1-7 General specifications

Item Description Specification

Processor CPU 1.5 GHz (Quad Core)

User Interface Operational Panel 8 inch touch screen

LED 2 (Power/Status)

Key/Button 1 (Power)

Memory Total 7 GB (3 GB Formatter + 4 GB)

Storage Standard 320 GB HDD

Interface USB (Host) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 3.0, 2.0)

USB (Device) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 3.0, 2.0)

USB (EDI) N/A

Wired LAN Standard (Ethernet 10/100/1G Base TX)

Additional Wired LAN Support Yes (optional)

Wireless LAN/NFC ● Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n + NFC

Active Type)

● Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n/ac + BLE +

NFC Active Type)

Warmup Time From Power off (power on to ready) 23 sec

From Sleep 12 sec

Power Consumption Ready Less than 30 W

Normal operation Less than 900 W

Max/Peak Less than 1300 W

Sleep/Low Power Mode Less than 2.0 W

TEC (Default Mode) ● E87640: 2.1 kWh

● E87650: 2.717 kWh

● E87660: 3.05 kWh

Power Requirement ● Input voltage (Europe): AC 220–240 V (±6%)

● Input voltage (USA): AC 110–127 V (±10%)

● Input voltage (AP): AC 220–240 V (±6%)

● Rated frequency: 50/60 Hz (±2Hz)

General specifications 15
 Table 1-7 General specifications (continued)

Item Description Specification

Acoustic Noise Level (Sound Power/ Printing Mode

Pressure)
Simplex

● E87640, E87650

– Tray 2: Less than 54 dBA

– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than

56 dBA

● E87660

– Tray 2: Less than 57 dBA

– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than

59 dBA

Duplex

● E87640, E87650

– Tray 2: Less than 57 dBA

– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than

59 dBA

● E87660

– Tray 2: Less than 59 dBA

– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than

61 dBA

Copying Mode

Simplex

● E87640

– Tray 2: Less than 58 dBA

– Tray 1 (MP)/Optional trays: Less

than 60 dBA

● E87650, E87660

– Tray 2: Less than 59 dBA

– Tray 1 (MP)/Optional trays: Less

than 61 dBA

Duplex

● E87640

– Tray 2: Less than 60 dBA

– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than

62 dBA

● E87650

– Tray 2: Less than 61 dBA

– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than

63 dBA
16 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ● E87660

– Tray 2: Less than 61 dBA

 Table 1-7 General specifications (continued)

Item Description Specification

Dimensions (W x D x H) Set (without stand) ● 585 x 771.1 x 932.2 mm (23 x 30.3 x

36.7 in)

Weight Set (with supplies) ● 113.1 kg (249.3 lb)

Recommended Monthly Print Volume ● E87640: 40,000 pages

● E87650: 45,000 pages

● E87660: 50,000 pages

Max Monthly Duty Cycle ● E87640: 200,000 pages

● E87650: 250,000 pages

● E87660: 330,000 pages

Print specifications
Learn about the print specifications.

Print specifications 17
 Table 1-8 Print specifications

Item Specification

Print speed Simplex ● E87640

– Up to 40 ppm in A4 (40 ppm in

Letter)

– Up to 21 ppm in A3 (21 ppm in

11x17)

● E87650

– Up to 50 ppm in A4 (50 ppm in

Letter)

– Up to 26 ppm in A3 (26 ppm in

11x17)

● E87660

– Up to 60 ppm in A4 (50 ppm in

Letter)

– Up to 31 ppm in A3 (31 ppm in

11x17)

Duplex (Simplex to Duplex) ● E87640

– Up to 40 ipm in A4 (40 ipm in

Letter)

– Up to 21 ipm in A3 (21 ipm in

11x17)

● E87650

– Up to 50 ipm in A4 (50 ipm in

Letter)

– Up to 26 ipm in A3 (26 ipm in

11x17)

● E87660

– Up to 60 ipm in A4 (50 ipm in

Letter)

– Up to 31 ipm in A3 (31 ipm in

11x17)

FPOT From Ready ● E87640: as fast as 9.9 s

● E87650: as fast as 8.9 s

● E87660: as fast as 8.3 s

From Sleep ● E87640: as fast as 21.9 s

● E87650: as fast as 20.9 s

● E87660: as fast as 20.3 s

Resolution 1200 x 1200 dpi (Full Speed)

Printer Language PCL5/PCL6(XL)/PostScript Level 3/PDF v1.7

18 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-8 Print specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Font PCL 95 scalable fonts (including OCR-A/OCR-

B)/1 Bitmap

PostScript 3 136 scalable fonts

Supporting Operating Systems Windows ● Windows XP (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Windows 2003 Server (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Windows Vista (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Windows 2008 Server (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Windows 7 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Windows 2008 Server R2 (64-bit)

● Windows 8 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Windows 8.1 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Windows Server 2012 (64-bit)

● Windows Server 2012 R2 (64-bit)

Linux ● Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, 6 (32-bit,

64-bit)

● Fedora 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,

20 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● OpenSuSE 11.2, 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2,

12.3, 13.1 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Ubuntu 10.04, 11.04, 11.10, 12.04,

12.10, 13.04, 13.10, 14.04 (32-bit,
64-bit)

● SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11

(32-bit, 64-bit)

● Debian 6, 7 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Mint 13, 14, 15, 16 (32-bit, 64-bit)

Mac OS Mac OS X 10.6-10.10

Direct Print PRN/PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS

Print specifications 19
 Table 1-8 Print specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Print Features ● WSD print

● Secure print

● Stored print

● Booklet

● N-up

● Cover page

● Barcode

● Eco

● Poster

● Glossy

● Watermark

● Tray priority setting

● Auto tray setting

● Tray protection

● USB print

● Secure PDF print

● Google Cloud print

Scan specifications
Learn about the scan specifications.

Table 1-9 Scan specifications

Item Specification

Scan Speed Scan to folder speeds DN bundles (black and white,

(hardware) gray scale, and color)

● Simplex: 90 ipm @ 300

DPI

● 80/160 ipm (du models

only)

● Duplex: 180 ipm @ 300

DPI

Z bundles (black and white,

gray scale, and color)

● Simplex: 120 ipm @ 300

DPI

● Duplex: 240 ipm @ 300

DPI

20 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-9 Scan specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Color Mode Mono/Gray/Color

Compatibility Network TWAIN/Network

SANE

Scan Method MMT

File Formats ● PDF

● Searchable PDF

● Compact PDF

● PDF Encryption

● Digital Signature in PDF

● PDF/A

● Single-Page PDF

● Multi-page PDF

● TIFF

● Single-Page TIFF

● Multi-page TIFF

● XPS

● Single-Page XPS

● Multi-page XPS

● JPEG

Resolution Optical (ADF) Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Optical (Image Scanner) Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Enhanced (ADF) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi

Enhanced (Image Scanner) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi

Scan Destinations ● Email

● FTP

● SMB

● HDD

● USB

● WSD

● PC

● Internet FAX

Multi-destinations Yes

Scan specifications 21
 Table 1-9 Scan specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Communication Protocol ● SMTP (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/

TLS)

● POP3 (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/

TLS)

● FTP (IPv4, IPv6)

● SMB (IPv4, IPv6)

● WSD

● T4Net

Scan ADF ● Min. A6 SEF 105 mm x

Size 148 mm (4.13 in x 5.83)

● Max. 297 mm x 437 mm

(11.7 in x 17.2 in)

Image Scanner Max. 297 mm x 437 mm

(11.7 in x 17.2 in)

Scan Original Types Text/Text & Photo/Photo

Copy specifications
Learn about the copy specifications.

22 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-10 Copy specifications

Item Specification

Copy Speed Single Document Multiple Copy (SDMC) ● E87640

– Up to 40 cpm in A4

● E87650

– Up to 50 cpm in A4

● E87660

– Up to 60 cpm in A4

Multiple Document Multiple Copy (MDMC) ● E87640

– Simplex to Simplex: Up to 40
cpm in A4/Letter

– Duplex to Simplex: Up to 40 ipm

in A4/Letter

● E87650

– Simplex to Simplex: Up to 50
cpm in A4/Letter

– Duplex to Simplex: Up to 50 ipm

in A4/Letter

● E87660

– Simplex to Simplex: Up to 60
cpm in A4/Letter

– Duplex to Simplex: Up to 60 ipm

in A4/Letter

FCOT From Ready ● E87640: 6.1 s

● E87650: 5.1 s

● E87660: 4.5 s

Resolution Flow ADF ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi

● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi

Image Scanner ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi

● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi

Reduce/Enlarge Flow ADF 25–400% in 1% increments

Image Scanner 25–400% in 1% increments

Preset 25% / 50% A3→A5 / 61% A3→B5 /

64% Ledger→Letter / 70% A3→A4 |
B4→B5 | A4→A5 / 77% Ledger→Legal /
78% Legal→Letter / 81% B4→A4 |
B5→A5 / 86% A3→B4 | A4→B5 / 104%
Executive→Letter / 115% B4→A3 / 121%
Legal→Ledger / 122% A4→B4 / 129%
Letter→Ledger / 141% A4→A3 | A5→A4 /
150% / 200% A5→A3 / 400%

Darkness Control 11 levels

Copy specifications 23
 Table 1-10 Copy specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Contrast Control 11 levels

Multi Copy 1–9,999

Duplex Copy Built-in

Copy Original Type ● Text

● Text and Printed Photo

● Text and Glossy Photo

● Newspaper

● Printed Photo

● Glossy Photo

● Copied Original

● Map

● Light Original

Copy Features ● ID Copy

● N-up

● Booklet

● Image Repeat

● Auto Fit

● Book Copy

● Watermark

● Image Overlay

● Stamp

● Covers

● Job Build

● Preview

● Erase Edge

● Image Shift

● Image Adjustment

● Background Adjustment

Supplies
Learn about the required toner cartridges and TCU.

24 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-11 Supplies

Item Product number Service part number Average yield

Black toner cartridge1 W9050MC X3A92-67904 Approx. 54,400 pages

Standard HP Black Managed LJ Toner

Cartridge

Black toner cartridge2 W9050MS Not applicable Approx. 12,000 pages

Introductory

Cyan toner cartridge1 W9051MC X3A92-67901 Approx. 52,000 pages

Standard HP Cyan Managed LJ Toner

Cartridge

Cyan toner cartridge2 W9051MS Not applicable Approx. 10,000 pages

Introductory

Magenta toner cartridge1 W9053MC X3A92-67902 Approx. 52,000 pages

Standard HP Magenta Managed LJ Toner

Cartridge

Magenta toner cartridge2 W9053MS Not applicable Approx. 10,000 pages

Introductory

Yellow toner cartridge1 W9052MC X3A92-67903 Approx. 52,000 pages

Standard HP Yellow Managed LJ Toner

Cartridge

Yellow toner cartridge2 W9052MS Not applicable Approx. 10,000 pages

Introductory

YMCK kit W5059MS

Introductory

TCU W9058MC Approx. 71,000 pages

1Print cartridge life is approximate, based on average A4 /Letter-size page count with ISO coverage. Declared
cartridge yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Actual yields vary considerably based on images printed
and other factors. For more information, visit www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.
2Available in APJ countries/regions only.

NOTE: Depending on the print pattern and job mode used, the lifespan of the consumable can vary.

IMPORTANT: Toner cartridges or other supplies must be purchased in the same country/region as the printer
being used. Otherwise, new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with the printer. This is due
to differing configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the conditions of a specific
country/region.

Maintenance parts
Learn about the printer maintenance parts.

Maintenance parts 25
 HP recommends replacing the following maintenance parts at specific intervals to make sure the printer
produces quality copies and to extend the service life of the printer.

Some of the printer parts have a shorter lifespan than the life of the printer.

Table 1-12 Maintenance parts

Item Product number Life Remark

Developer unit cyan Z7Y69A 720,000 pages

Developer unit magenta Z7Y72A 720,000 pages

Developer unit yellow Z7Y73A 720,000 pages

Developer unit black Z7Y68A 720,000 pages

OPC drum unit cyan W9055MC Approx. 140,000pages

OPC drum unit magenta

OPC drum unit yellow

OPC drum unit black W9054MC Approx. 160,000pages

Fuser unit (220V) Z7Y76A 360,000 pages

Fuser unit (1100V) Z7Y75A 360,000 pages

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) Z7Y78A 430,000 pages Clean the CPR sensor after
replacing the ITB.

ITB cleaner Z7Y80A 180,000 pages

Transfer roller assembly Z7Y90A 360,000 pages

Pick/Feed/Reverse (separation) Z9M01A 360,000 pages

roller (for Tray 2-X)

Tray 1 (MP) Pick/Feed/Reverse Z7Y88A 200,000 pages

(separation) Roller

Flow ADF pick roller assembly Z8W50A 200,000 pages

(GX and sGX z/dn models)

Flow ADF reverse (separation) Z8W51A 200,000 pages

roller assembly (GX and sGX
z/dn models)

ADF pick roller assy (LX du Z7Y64A 200,000

models)

ADF reverse (separation) roller Z7Y65A 100,000

assy (LX du models)

NOTE: Depending on print patterns and the job mode used, maintenance part lifespans vary. See Replacing
the maintenance part for further instructions.

Table 1-13 Maintenance intervals

Device Item 100K 120K 200K 360K PM Note

Paper Path—Set Pickup Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(PH) (Tray1(MP)) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

26 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-13 Maintenance intervals (continued)

Device Item 100K 120K 200K 360K PM Note

Paper Path—Set Forward Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(PH) (Tray1(MP)) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path—Set Retard Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(PH) (Tray1(MP)) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path—Set Pickup Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(PH) (Tray2,3) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path—Set Forward Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(PH) (Tray2,3) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path—Set Retard Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(PH) (Tray2,3) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path—Set Feed Roller (1,2,3) Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(PH) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path—Set Regi Roller Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(PH) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path—Set Duplex (1,2,3) Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(PH) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path—Set EXIT Roller (1,2) Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(PH) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path—Set Pre-Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
(PH) (Tray 2,3) dust.

Paper Path—Set Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
(PH) dust.

Paper Path—Set Regi Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
(PH) dust.

Paper Path—Set Paper dust brush Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
(PH) dust.

Paper Path— Pickup Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
DCF/HCI/sHCI (Tray4,5,6) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path— Forward Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
DCF/HCI/sHCI (Tray4,5,6) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path— Retard Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
DCF/HCI/sHCI (Tray4,5,6) moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path— Pre-Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
DCF/HCI/sHCI (Tray 4,5,6) dust.

Paper Path— Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
DCF/HCI/sHCI dust.

Maintenance parts 27
 Table 1-13 Maintenance intervals (continued)

Device Item 100K 120K 200K 360K PM Note

Paper Path— Finisher Paddle Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
Finisher Roller moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path— Booklet Paddle Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
Finisher Roller moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path— Ejector Reverse Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
Finisher Roller moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path— Tamper Base Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
Finisher moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path— Ejector Base Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
Finisher moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path— Feeding Roller Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
Finisher moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Paper Path— Punch Chad Bin Clean Empty the chad bin.
Finisher

Paper Path— Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
Finisher dust.

Paper Path— Ejector Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
Finisher (2K/3K Finisher) dust.

Paper Path— End fence Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
Finisher (Inner Finisher) dust.

Scanner—ADF ADF Pick-Up roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
Assembly moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Scanner—ADF ADF Separation roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
Assembly (Gx - z moistened with water to clean maintenance
bundle) parts.

Scanner—ADF ADF Separation roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
Assembly (Lx - dn, moistened with water to clean maintenance
du) parts.

Scanner—ADF White sheet / White Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
sponge / Feed roller moistened with water to clean maintenance
parts.

Perform maintenance tasks as needed during a service visit for parts replacement.

Paper handling specifications

Learn about the paper handling specifications.

28 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-14 Paper handling specifications

Item Specification

Input Capacity Standard 1040 sheets

Multipurpose 100 sheets

Maximum 6140 sheets

NOTE: Tray 1 (MP) (100) + 2 Tray (1040) + HCI bottom (2000) + sHCI (3000)

Paper handling specifications 29

 Table 1-14 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Standard Cassette Tray Capacity ● 520 sheets x 2 (Based on Xerox Premier 80g/m2)

● Envelope: 50 sheets (only Tray 2 support)

NOTE: Supported Envelopes: Monarch, DL, C4, C5, C6, No.10, No. 9

Media Sizes ● Tray2 : 98 mm x 139.7 mm — 297 mm x 390 mm (3.86 in x 5.5 in — 11.69

in x 15.35 in)

● Tray3 : 139.7 mm x 182 mm — 320 mm x 457.2 mm (5.5 in x 7.17 in —

12.59 in x 18 in)

Media Types ● Plain

● Thin

● Bond

● Hole Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin Cardstock

● Thick Cardstock

● Heavy Cardstock

● Extra Heavy Cardstock 1

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Thick Glossy

● Heavy Glossy

● Heavy Weight

● Extra Heavy Weight 1 ,2 ,3 4

● Label

● Transparency

● Envelope (Cassette 1 Only)

Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 70-90 g/m² (18.5-24 lb/ Duplex)

● Thick Paper: 91-105 g/m² (25-28 lb/ Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper : 106-176 g/m² (Duplex)

● Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 177-220 g/m²

● Extra Heavy Weight 2: 221–256 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Extra Heavy Weight 3: 257–300 g/m2

30 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ● Thick Cardstock: 164–216 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Heavy Cardstock: 217–256 g/m2 (Duplex)

Table 1-14 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Tray 1 Capacity ● Plain Paper: 100 sheets at 80 g/m2

● Envelopes: 10 sheets at 75 g/m2

NOTE: Supported Envelopes: Monarch, DL, C4, C5, C6, No. 10, No. 9

● Labels: 20 sheets at 120–159 g/m2

● Thick Paper: 10 sheets at 176 g/m2

Media Sizes 98 mm x 139.7 mm — 320 mm x 457.2 mm (3.86 in x 5.5 in — 12.59 in x 18 in)

Media Types ● Plain

● Thin

● Bond

● Hole Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin Cardstock

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Thick Glossy

● Heavy Glossy

● Heavy Weight

● Extra Heavy Weight 1, 2 ,3 ,4

● Envelope

● Transparency

● Label

Media Weight ● 60 to 256 g/m2: Simplex, Duplex

● 257 to 325 g/m2: Simplex

● Envelope: 75–90 g/m2, Simplex

● Label: 120–150 g/m2, Simplex

Sensing Paper Empty Detect: Yes

Paper Size Detect: Yes

Paper handling specifications 31

 Table 1-14 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

ADF Capacity 250 sheets (GX/sGX)

100 sheets (LX)

Document Size ● Width: 105 mm — 297 mm (5 in — 11.7 in)

● Length: 140 mm — 432 mm (5.5in — 17 in)

Document Weight ● Simplex: 60–163 g/m2 (11.25–43.24 lb) (Guarantee) 42–60 g/m2 and 163–
220 g/m2 (Support)

● Duplex: 60–163 g/m2 (13.25–43.25 lb) (Guarantee) 50–60 g/m2 and 163–
220 g/m2 (Support)

Auto Detected Size A3/A4/A5/A6 SEF/B4/B5/Letter/Legal/Statement/Folio/Executive

Image Scanner Document Size ● Width: 140 mm — 297 mm (5.5 in — 11.7 in)

● Length: 140 mm — 432 mm (5.5 in — 17 in)

Output Capacity Standard 500 sheets, face down

Maximum 615 sheets [500 sheets (Standard) + 125 sheets (Job Separator)]

Printing Size Maximum Size 320 mm x 457 mm (12.6 in x 18 in)

Minimum Size 98 mm x 139.7 mm (3.8 in x 5.5 in)

Maximum Printing Area Simplex Top: 4.2 +/- 1.5 mm / Left: 4.2 +/- 1.5 mm

Duplex Top: 4.2 +/- 2 mm / Left: 4.2 +/- 2 mm

32 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-14 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Duplex Printing Support Built-in

Media Sizes 139.7 mm x 182 mm — 320 mm x 457 mm (5.5 in x 7.2 in — 12.6 in x 18 in)

Media Types ● Plain

● Thin

● Bond

● Hole Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin Cardstock

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Thick Glossy

● Heavy Glossy

● Heavy Weight

● Extra Heavy Weight 1, 2

Media weight 16–17 lb (60 to 256 g/m2)

Network and software specifications

Learn about the network and software specifications.

Network interface
Learn about the network interface.

Network and software specifications 33

 Table 1-15 Network interface

Item Specifications

Network OS

Windows

● XP (32/64 bit)

● 2003 (32/64 bit)

● Vista (32/64 bit)

● Windows 7

● Windows 8

Mac

● Mac OS 10.5 –10.8

Linux

● RedHat 8–9

● Fedora Core 1–4

● Mandrake 9.2–10.1

● SuSE 8.2–9.2

Novell

● Netware 5.x, 6.x (TCP/IP Only)

Others

● Unix (HP-UX, Solaris, SumOS, SCO)

Network Protocols TCP/IP TCP/IPv4, HTTP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, LDAP,

SMTP, SSL/TLS, IPSec, DNS, WINS, SLP,
Bonjour, SSDP, DDNS, DHCP/BOOTP, IPv6

IPX/SPX No

Ether Talk No

NetBIOS over TCP/IP Yes

Others HTTPS, IPSec, 802.1x

IP Addressing Static IP Yes

Auto IP Yes

BOOTP Yes

DHCP Yes

34 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-15 Network interface (continued)

Item Specifications

SNMP/MIB Access MIB-2 (RFC 1213) Yes

Host Resource MIB (RFC 2790) Yes

Printer MIB (RFC 3805) Yes

Finisher MIB (RFC 3806) Yes

Private MIB Yes

HP Compatibility Yes — Partially

SNMP Trap Yes

Printing Protocols Windows Printing (SMB) No

LPR/LPD Yes

IPP Yes

Netware I-Print No

Netware NDPS No

Ether Talk No

Port 9100 Yes

Device Discovery DNS Yes

Dynamic DNS Yes

Multicast DNS (Bonjoure) Yes

WSD (including Print and Scan) Yes (Print and Scan)

SLP Yes

uPNP (SSDP) Yes

Software and solutions

Learn about the software and solutions.

Software and solutions 35

 Table 1-16 Software and solutions

Item Specifications

Application Anyweb Print N/A

Easy Printer Manager Windows/Mac

Easy Color Manager Windows/Mac

Easy Document Creator Windows

Net PC Fax Windows/Mac

Direct Printing Utility Windows

Easy Deployment Manager Windows

Easy Eco Driver Windows

Universal Printer Driver Windows

Universal Scan Driver Windows

Mobile Printing Google Cloud Print (GCP) Yes

Airprint Yes

Smart App Smart Workspace Yes

Workbook Composer Yes

Smart Color Manager Yes

Smart Service App Yes

Hancom Office Yes

Solution Device Management Fleet Admin Pro (UniThru)

Output Management CounThru Enterprise/Pro

Document Management and Distribution SmarThru Workflow 3.0

Security SecuThur Pro 1.0

Mobility SCP 1.0 (14.09)

Security Authentication (Local) Yes

Authentication (Network) Yes (SMB/Kerberos/LDAP/IPSec/EAP)

IP Address Filtering Yes (IPv4 Filtering/IPv6 Filtering/MAC

Filtering)

HDD Overwrite (Standard) 9

HDD Overwrite (Maximum Overwrites) Yes

Secure Print Yes

Encrypted Secure Print Yes

Encrypted PDF Mode (Encrypted Scanning) Yes

IP Sec Yes

Smart Card Authentication Yes

36 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Options
Learn about printer options and accessories.

Optional configurations
Learn about optional configurations.

Figure 1-5 Options

1 2
9
3
8 5

7 6 4

Table 1-17 Printer options and configurations

Item Description Product number

1 HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87640

E87650, E87660
● dn model: X3A87A

● du model: 5CM64A

● z model: X3A86A

E87650

● dn model: X3A90A

● du model: 5CM65A

● z model: X3A89A

E87660

● dn model: X3A93A

● du model: 5CM66A

● z model: X3A92A

2 HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Y1G16A

3 HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray Y1G21A

Department

4 HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Y1F98A

Feeder

5 HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Y1G20A

Options 37
 Table 1-17 Printer options and configurations (continued)

Item Description Product number

6 HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Y1G18A

The following punch kits are available:

● Y1G10A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

2/3 accessory

● Y1G11A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

2/4 accessory

● Y1G12A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

Swedish accessory

7 HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Y1G07A

The following punch kits are available:

● Y1G10A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

2/3 accessory

● Y1G11A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

2/4 accessory

● Y1G12A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

Swedish accessory

8 HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Y1G00A

The following punch kits are available:

● Y1G02A — HP LaserJet Inner Finisher

Hole 2/3 punch

● Y1G03A — HP LaserJet Inner Finisher

Hole 2/4 Punch

● Y1G04A — HP LaserJet Inner Finisher

Swedish Punch

9 HP LaserJet Department Job Separator Y1G15A

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Department Y1G22A

NOTE: Not shown in configuration.

The following accessories are also available:

● Y1G22A#BGJ — HP LaserJet Paper

Tray Heaters Accessory Department
(110V)

● Y1G22A#B19 — HP LaserJet Paper

Tray Heaters Accessory Department
(220V)

Options list
Learn about the options list.

38 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-18 Options list

Item Product numbers Remark

HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Y1G168

HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Y1F98A

Feeder

HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray Y1F21A

Department

HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Y1F20A

Fax Kit

Fax Multiline Kit

Foreign interface harness (FIH) Kit B5L31A Service part: B5L31-67902

HP LaserJet Job Separator Department Y1G01A

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Department Y1G22A For dual cassette feeder (DCF)

For HCI/sHCI

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Accessory Y1G22A#BGJ For dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Department (110V)
For HCI/sHCI

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Accessory Y1G22A#B19 For dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Department (220V)
For HCI/sHCI

Wireless/NFC Kit 3JN69A HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless

accessory

Wireless/NFC/BLE Kit

Additional Network Kit (Dual Network Kit)

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Y1G00A

HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Y1G18A

HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Y1G07A

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Punch Y1G02A Two and three hole punch (for America, Asia,
and Africa)

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4 Punch Y1G03A Two and four hole punch (for Europe)

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Punch Y1G04A Swedish four hole punch (for Sweden)

HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory Y1G10A Two and three hole punch (for America, Asia,
and Africa)

HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory Y1G11A Two and four hole punch (for Europe)

HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory Y1G12A Swedish four hole punch (for Sweden)

HP LaserJet Inner/Booklet Finisher Staples Y1G13A ● Regular staples for the HP LaserJet
Inner Finisher
NOTE: The HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher
and HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher ● Regular saddle staples for the
have two staple slots. HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher

Options list 39
 Table 1-18 Options list (continued)

Item Product numbers Remark

HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Staples Y1G14A ● Regular staples for HP LaserJet

Stapler/Stacker Finisher
NOTE: The HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher
and HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher
have two staple slots.

Option specifications
Learn about option specifications.

40 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-19 Option specifications

Item Specification

HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Part number Y1F98A

Feeder
Capacity 520 x 2 sheets

Media Sizes ● Tray4 : 139.7mm x 182mm – 320mm

x 457.2mm (5.5inx7.17in – 12.59in x
18 in)

● Tray5 : 139.7mm x 182mm – 320mm

x 457.2mm (5.5inx7.17in – 12.59in x
18 in)

Media Types Plain/Thin/Bond/Hole Punched/Preprinted/

Recycled/Thin Cardstock/Letterhead/Thick/
Cotton/Colored/Archive/Thin Glossy/Heavy
Weight/Extra Heavy Weight

Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 71–90 g/m2 (18.5–24 lb/

Duplex)

● Thick Paper: 91–105 g/m2 (25–28 lb/

Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper: 106–176 g/m2

(Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper 1: 177–216 g/m2

(Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper 2: 217–256 g/m2

(Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper 3: 257–300 g/m2

● Thin Paper: 60–69 g/m2 (16–19 lb/

Duplex)

● Cotton Paper: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Colored: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Preprinted: 71–90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Recycled: 60–90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Bond Paper: 105–120 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Letterhead: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Hole Punched Paper: 75–90 g/m2

(Duplex)

● Thin Cardstock: 105–163 g/m2

(Duplex)

● Thin Glossy: 106–163 g/m2 (Duplex)

Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes

● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect:

Yes

● Paper Type Detect: No

● Paper Size Detect: Yes

Dimensions 556 mm x 610 mm x 265 mm (22.3 in x 24

in x 10 in)
Option specifications 41
Weight Net 20 kg, Packing 23.5 kg
 Table 1-19 Option specifications (continued)

Item Specification

HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray Part number Y1G21A

Department
Capacity 2000 sheets at 20 lb (80 g/m2)

Media Sizes A4, Letter

Media Types Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper,

Punched Paper

Media Weight 60 to 300 gsm

Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes

● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect:

Yes

● Paper Type Detect: No

● Paper Size Detect: No

HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Part number Y1F20A

Capacity 3000 sheets at 20 lb (80 g/m2)

Media Sizes A4, Letter

Media Types Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper,

Punched Paper

Media weight 60 to 300 gsm

Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes

● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect:

Yes

● Paper Type Detect: No

● Paper Size Detect: No

HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Part number Y1G16A

Dimensions 585 mm x 670 mm x 257 mm

Weight (Net) 18 kg

HP LaserJet Job Separator Department Part number Y1G01A

Capacity 125 sheets at (80 g/m2)

42 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-19 Option specifications (continued)

Item Specification

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Part number Y1G00A

Capacity 500 sheets stacking, internal

Staple Cartridge Capacity 5000 staples/cartridge

Stacking ● Top Tray: 50 sheets (A4/LT at 80 gsm)

● Finishing Tray: 500 sheets (A4/LT at

80 gsm)

Stapling ● Maximum Number of Sheets: 50

sheets stapling with 90 g/m2 sheet

● Stapling Positions: Front flat and

corner (45), Dual, Rear flat and corner
(45)

Saddle Stapling N/A

Offline Stapling N/A

Offset at Non-Staple Job Yes

Offset at Staple Job N/A

Output Stacking Face Down

HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Part number Y1G18A

Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 3,250 sheets stacking

Staple Cartridge Capacity 5000 staples/cartridge

Stacking ● Top Tray: 250 sheets (A4/LT at 80

gsm)

● Finishing Tray: 3000 sheets (A4/LT at

80 gsm)

Stapling ● Maximum Number of Sheets: 65

sheets stapling with 90 g/m2 sheet

● Stapling Positions: 2 Corners (Single ,

45 degree), Center (Double)

Offline Stapling Yes

Offset at Non-Staple Job Yes

Offset at Staple Job Yes

Output Stacking Face Down

Option specifications 43
 Table 1-19 Option specifications (continued)

Item Specification

HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Part number Y1G07A

Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 2000 sheets stacking

Staple Cartridge Capacity 5000 staples/cartridge

Stacking ● Top Tray: 250 sheets (A4/LT at 80

gsm)

● Finishing Tray: 2000 sheets (A4/LT at

80 gsm)

Stapling ● Maximum Number of Sheets: 65

sheets stapling with 90 g/m2 sheet

● Stapling Positions: 2 Corners (Single),

Center (Double)

Saddle Stapling Maximum Number of Sheets: 25 sheets

stapling with 80 g/m2 sheet

Offline Stapling Yes

Offset at Non-Staple Job Yes

Offset at Staple Job Yes

Output Stacking Face Down

1. HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory Part numbers 1. Y1G10A

2. HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory 2. Y1G11A

3. HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish 3. Y1G12A

Accessory
Available Unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4
hole, Swedish 4

Paper Wight 52–300 g/m2

1. HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Part numbers 1. Y1G02A

Punch
2. Y1G03A
2. P LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4
Punch 3. Y1G04A

3. HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Available Unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4
Punch hole, Swedish 4

Paper Wight 52–256 g/m2

Feeding system
Learn about the feeding system.

Feeding system overview

Learn about the feeding system overview.

The feeding system picks up paper from the cassette or Tray 1 and moves it to the printing mechanism inside the
printer. The feeding system consists of the pickup unit, registration unit, transfer roller assembly, and exit unit.

44 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-6 Feeding system overview

Main components and functions

Learn about main components and their functions.

Rollers
Learn about the rollers.

Main components and functions 45

 Figure 1-7 Rollers

1 Tray 2 13 Tray 4 feed roller (optional)

2 Tray 3 14 Tray 4 trans roller (optional)

3 Tray 4 (optional) 15 Tray 5 feed roller (optional)

4 Tray 5 (optional) 16 Registration sensor

5 Tray 2 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 17 Registration roller

6 Tray 3 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 18 Transfer roller

7 Tray 4 pickup/reverse/feed rollers (optional) 19 Exit roller (1st)

8 Tray 5 pickup/reverse/feed rollers (optional) 20 Exit roller (2nd)

9 Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 21 Exit roller (trans)

10 Tray 2 feed roller 22 Duplex 1 roller

46 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 11 Tray 3 feed roller 23 Duplex 2 roller

12 Tray 3 trans roller 23 Duplex 3 roller

● Pickup roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

– This roller picks up the paper from the tray.

● Feed roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

– This roller is placed against the reverse roller. It transfers the paper from the pickup roller to the feed
roller.

● Reverse roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

– This roller is placed against the feed roller and transfers only one sheet of paper to the feed roller. When
two or more sheets of paper are being transferred from the pickup roller, the load of the torque limiter
of the reverse roller is heavier than the frictional force between the sheets of paper. As a result, the
reverse roller is stopped and the lower sheet of paper is not transferred.

● Feed roller

– This roller transfers the paper sent from the feed/reverse roller to the registration roller.

● Registration roller

– This roller aligns the leading edge of the paper and transfers the paper to the transfer roller assembly.

Table 1-20 Roller period table

Roller Periodic

OPC/Drum 94.5 mm (3.7 in)

Charge Roller (CR) 37.7 mm (1.5 in)

Magnetic roller (MR) 32.3 mm (1.3 in)

Transfer roller 44.0 mm (1.7 in)

Transfer roller (T2) 75.4 mm (3.0 in)

Fuser Belt (HR) 110 mm (4.3 in)

Fuser Pressure Roller (PR) 114.7 mm (4.5 in)

Sensor, motor, and solenoid

Learn about the sensor, motor, and solenoid.

Sensor, motor, and solenoid 47

 Figure 1-8 Sensor, motor, solenoid

Item Function

Tray 2 paper size detection sensor Detects Tray 2 paper size

Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects Tray 2 paper empty

sensor

Tray 2 upper limit detection sensor Detects Tray 2 upper limit

Tray 2 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 2 paper Lead Edge
sensor

Tray 3 paper size detection sensor Detects Tray 3 paper size

48 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Item Function

Tray 3 paper empty detection Detects Tray 3 paper empty

sensor

Tray 3 upper limit detection sensor Detects Tray 3 upper limit

Tray 3 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 3 paper Lead Edge
sensor

Tray 3 paper feed jam detection Detects Tray 3 paper feed jam
sensor

Tray 4 paper size detection (option) Detects Tray 4 paper size

sensor

Tray 4 paper empty detection Detects Tray 4 paper empty

(option) sensor

Tray 4 upper limit detection (option) Detects Tray 4 upper limit

sensor

Tray 4 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 4 paper Lead Edge
(option) sensor

Tray 4/4 paper feed jam detection Detects Tray 4/4 paper feed jam
(option) sensor

Tray 5 paper size detection (option) Detects Tray 5 paper size detection
sensor

Tray 5 paper empty detection Detects Tray 5 paper empty

(option) sensor

Tray 5 upper limit detection (option) Detects Tray 5 upper limit

sensor

Tray 5 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 5 paper Lead Edge
(option) sensor

Paper registration jam detection Detects Paper registration jam

sensor

Paper fuser-out jam detection Detects Paper fuser-out jam

sensor

Output Tray 2 paper full detection Detects output Tray 2 paper full
sensor

Output 2 tray path and Return path Changes paper path

solenoid

Return motor Controls 2nd output tray and duplex printing

Output Tray 3 paper full detection Detects output Tray 3 paper full
sensor

Output 2 paper return detection Detects Duplex Return position

sensor

1st Duplex motor Controls duplex printing

2nd Duplex motor Controls duplex printing

Duplex 1 jam detection sensor Detects Duplex 1 jam

Duplex 2 jam detection sensor Detects Duplex 2 jam

Sensor, motor, and solenoid 49

 Item Function

Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly paper Detects Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly: paper empty
empty detection sensor
NOTE: If paper is loaded in Tray 1, that tray takes priority over trays 2,3,4, or 5.

Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly Controls Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly pickup roller

Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly paper Detects Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly paper width
width detection sensor

Tray 2 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate

Tray 3 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate

Tray 4 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate

Tray 5 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate

Paper Loop Detection sensor Detects paper loop between transfer Nip and fusing Nip

At warm-up, Detects the fuser jam

Cassette
Learn about the cassette.

The tray stores paper. The paper size is set using the guides in each tray.

Figure 1-9 Basic cassette

Table 1-21

Item Description

1 Structure: Drawer Type

2 Capacity: 520 sheets (80 g/m² paper standard)

3 Paper type

NOTE: Tray 2 does not support A3 or 11 x 17 paper.

50 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-21 (continued)

Item Description

4 Paper weight

● Plain paper: 60–220 g/m²

5 Plate knock up lift type: Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor

Pickup Assembly
Learn about the pickup assembly.

When paper pickup occurs, the pickup roller moves down in order to come in contact with the surface of the
paper. If the cassette is installed, the LEVER-INPUT CST is pushed and the pickup roller moves down. The feed
and separation rollers make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved into the paper path, and that the feed
roller moves the paper as far as the registration (REGI) roller.

NOTE: The pickup unit 1 and pickup unit 2 are not interchangeable.

Figure 1-10 Pickup unit 1

Figure 1-11 Pickup unit 2

Registration unit
Learn about the registration unit.

The registration roller is driven by the registration/multipurpose motor.

Pickup Assembly 51
 The registration roller clutch is located between the registration/Tray 1 motor and registration roller, or on the
transfer belt (for color), and it controls power to the registration roller in order to match paper and an image on
the drum at the predetermined registration point.

Figure 1-12 Registration roller

Tray 1 feed assembly

Learn about the Tray 1 feed assembly.

The Tray 1 feed assembly allows feeding of special media cardstock and custom size paper.

Figure 1-13 Tray 1 (MP) feeder assembly

Specification

● Capacity: 100 sheets (80g/m² / 21 lb paper standard)

● Media size: 98 mm x 139.7 mm — 320 mm x 457.2 mm (3.86 in x 5.5 in — 12.59 in x 18 in)

● Media weight: Plain paper 60 – 320 g/m²

● Feeding speed: 32 ppm, 40 ppm, 48 ppm Letter/A4 LEF (Long Edge Feeding)

52 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Paper separation

Figure 1-14 Paper separation

When the Tray 1 (MP) paper detection [A] sensor detects paper and the machine gets a Tray 1 (MP) printing job,
the Tray 1 (MP) solenoid [B] drops the pickup roller [C] onto the top of the paper stack in Tray 1.

This machine uses a Feed and Reverse Roller (FRR) system for feeding paper. The friction between the reverse
roller [D] and feed roller [E] separates the top sheet of paper from the stack.

Fuser unit
Learn about the fuser unit.

Fuser unit overview

Learn about the fuser unit.

This section describes the image fusing process used by the printer.

This unit fuses the toner that was transferred by the transfer roller onto the paper, by applying a combination
of heat and pressure to complete the fusing process. This printer uses an instant fusing system (NIF type). The
fuser unit design for this model has improved. The fuser belt has been changed to require less heat capacity and
still fuse the toner properly. Additionally, the life has been improved by incorporating a sub-bush system with a
lubricant storage design.

Fuser unit 53
 Figure 1-15 Fuser unit

● Lamp halogen

The fuser unit has two halogen lamps. One heats the center of the fusing belt, the other heats the end of
axial direction. These halogen lamps are lit alternately to heat the fusing belt. Each lamp has its coil in a
different location. The coil of the center heater lamp is in the center, the coils on the side heater lamp are
on both sides. The lamps are fixed inside of the fusing belt. When the fusing belt rotates, the lamps do not
rotate.

● Belt fuser

The belt fuser gets heat from the halogen lamp and transfers it to the toner and paper. The belt fuser
consists of three thin-layers. The thin fusing belt reduces warm up and mode changing time. To prevent the
fusing belt from adhering to the toner, the surface of the fuser belt is fluorinated. There is a nip inside the
fusing belt. Tension springs are used to keep a constant nip area where the fusing belt contacts the pressure
roller.

● Roller fuser pressure

The pressure roller makes sure there is a proper nip width between the pressure roller and fusing belt. It is
made up of the soft silicone sponge rubber. The pressure roller is driven by the driving system and drives the
fusing belt.

● Thermistor (NC sensor)

The temperature of the fusing belt is maintained by NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors) located near
the center and the end of the fusing belt.

● Thermostats

The thermostat cuts off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening the circuit when the fusing belt
becomes abnormally hot as a result of a problem, such as a NC sensor malfunction. The thermostat is used
to prevent abnormal operation. When a thermostat is triggered, it must be replaced as well as the other
damaged parts in the fuser unit.

54 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Fuser unit drive
Learn about the fuser unit drive.

The fuser motor (A) drives the pressure roller (B) through the gear train. The fuser belt is driven by the pressure
roller.

Figure 1-16 Fuser drive

Fuser unit temperature control

Learn about fuser temperature control.

When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays on until the NC sensors detect
the standby temperature. The CPU then raises the temperature up to the printing temperature.

Fuser unit drive 55

 Figure 1-17 Fuser unit temperature control

Overheat protection

● The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases:

– The belt temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 220°C for 20 seconds.

– The belt temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 230°C for 3 seconds.

– The relay off works when the belt temperature detected by the NC sensors is higher than 230°C.

● The following components are used when thermistor overheat protection fails:

– Two thermostats get into line with the common ground wire of the fusing lamp.

– If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 195°C, it opens and cuts power to the
fusing lamp. If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 195°C, it also opens and cuts
power to the fusing lamp.

Loop control
Learn about fuser loop control.

The tension of the paper between the OPC nip and the fuser nip is known as the paper loop level.

56 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-18 Loop control

The paper loop level is controlled by monitoring photo sensors 1 and 2. The fuser unit controls the motor speed
for the paper loop level.

Image creation
Learn about image creation.

Printing process overview

Learn about the printing process overview.

This printer uses four drum units, four development units, and four laser beams for color printing. Each drum
unit consists of a drum, charge roller, and cleaning blade. Each development unit consists of a magnetic roller and
mixing auger.

Figure 1-19 Printing process overview

Image creation 57
 The light produced by the laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the OPC drum. The
negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent drum image due to an electric field. The toner (real image) on
each OPC drum is moved to the ITB (C) by the positive bias applied to the first transfer roller. All four toners (color
image) are transferred to the paper by a positive charge applied to the second transfer roller (D).

1. OPC drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.

2. Laser exposure: Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.

3. Development: The developing roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum
surface. This printer uses four independent drum and development units (one for each color).

4. Transfer:

● Image transfer: The first transfer roller opposite the OPC drums transfer toner from the drums to the
ITB. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the belt.

● Paper transfer: The second transfer roller transfers the toner from the ITB to the media.

5. Cleaning the OPC drum: The cleaning brush and blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface after
image transfer to the paper.

6. Quenching for OPC drum: Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the
end of every job.

Imaging unit
Learn about the imaging unit.

Imaging unit overview

Learn about the imaging unit.

This printer uses a tandem type drum and development units. It uses four color developing during one paper
path to increase color printing productivity.

The development units are not interchangeable, but the drum units for Y, M, and C color are interchangeable. The
black drum unit is independent. The diameter of the drum is 30 mm with a circumference of about 94.2 mm (3.7
in).

The drum unit has the charge roller to charge the drum surface and cleaning roller to clean the charge roller.

The e-label is the sub part of the drum unit. It stores the count information and other data. If the drum unit is
replaced, the count information stored by the discarded drum unit is lost.

58 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-20 Imaging unit

Drum drive
Learn about the drum drive unit.

The color OPCs and magnetic roller are driven by each color motor. The OPC drum and magnetic roller are
powered by the coupling.

The Brushless Direct Current (BLDC) motor maintains constant speed. The speed sync for each color depends on
the BLDC motor.

Phase sync for each OPC job prints the pattern on the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) and is adjusted
automatically.

Drum drive 59
 Figure 1-21 Drum drive

Developer unit
Learn about the developer unit.

This printer uses a dual-component development system that has four development units. Each unit contains
245 g (8.6 oz) of magnetic toner carrier (developer powder).

The developer powder is supplied to the magnetic (development) roller [A] by the two mixing augers [B]. The
diameter of the magnetic roller is 18 mm (0.71 in).

Each development unit has a toner carrier (TC) sensor [C]. It is used for controlling the operating range of the
toner density.

60 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-22 Developer unit

Developer agitation

Two mixing augers (A) circulate the developer forward and backward to agitate the developer in order to
sufficiently mix the toner and developer.

Figure 1-23 Developer auger

Agitation occurs at the following times:

Developer unit 61
 ● During the process control self-checking (warm up)

● During toner supply job

● During development job

If the developer unit is stored above 45°C (113°F), the toner might harden and will not work properly. If the toner
in the development unit has hardened, an installation error occurs.

Toner cartridge
Learn about the toner cartridges.

When the toner and carrier in the toner cartridge is mixing:

● The YMC cartridge contains 570 g (20.1 oz) of toner and the K cartridge contains 840 g (29.6 oz) of toner.
Additionally, the YMC cartridge contains 55 g (1.9 oz) of carrier and K cartridge contains 80 g (2.8 oz) of
carrier

● The toner in the YMC cartridge is transferred to the reservoir by the spring-ETC.

● The toner in the K cartridge is transferred to the Spring-ETC by the Wheel-Paddle Toner and transferred to
the reservoir by Spring-ETC.

62 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-24 Toner cartridge

Dynamic security
Learn about dynamic-security-enabled printers.

Certain HP printers use cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a non-HP chip
or modified or non-HP circuitry* might not work. And, those that work today might not work in the future.

As is standard in the printing business, HP has a process for authenticating cartridges. HP continues to use
security measures to protect the quality of our customer experience, maintain the integrity of our printing
systems, and protect our intellectual property. These measures include authentication methods that change
periodically and might prevent some third-party supplies from working now or in the future. HP printers
and original HP cartridges deliver the best quality, security and reliability. When cartridges are cloned or
counterfeited, the customer is exposed to quality and potential security risks, compromising the printing
experience.

*Non-HP Chips and modified or non-HP electronic circuitry are not produced or validated by HP. HP cannot
guarantee that these chips or circuitry will work in your printer now or in the future. If you are using a
non-original HP cartridge, please check with your supplier to ensure your cartridge has an original HP security
chip or unmodified HP electronic circuitry.

Dynamic security 63
 Intermediate transfer belt unit
Learn about the intermediate transfer belt unit.

Intermediate transfer belt overview

Learn about the intermediate transfer belt (ITB).

The toner on the four drums is transferred to the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) by the first transfer roller

The image overlapped by four colors is transferred to the paper by the second transfer roller. The remaining
toners are removed by the cleaning blade and transferred to the toner collection unit.

This process is completed with one rotation of the ITB. The arrow above the C and M drums on the following
diagram shows the direction of the ITB rotation. The ITB is rotated by friction between the drive roller and the ITB.
The tension roller provides tension to prevent slipping.

There are three color plane registration (CPR) sensors and one photo sensor. Two CPR sensors are for line
position adjustment and one is for process control. The photo sensor monitors the position of the first transfer
rollers.

Figure 1-25 Intermediate transfer belt

Table 1-22 Intermediate transfer belt components

Item Description

1 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)

2 First transfer roller

3 ITB drive roller

4 Tension roller

5 Photo sensor

6 Cleaning blade

7 Color plane registration (CPR) sensor

8 Second transfer roller

9 Toner collection auger

10 Drum unit

64 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Transfer belt drive
Learn about the transfer belt drive.

The drive motor (A) drives the ITB (B) by using gears and the ITB drive roller (C).

The ITB (B) and black OPC (D) is synchronized by the drive motor (A).

Figure 1-26 Transfer belt drive

Cleaning blade
Learn about the transfer belt cleaning blade.

The intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner removes toner during printing. Belt cleaning is completed while the
ITB makes one rotation. The ITB drive motor drives the ITB cleaning motor.

The cleaning blade (A) in the ITB cleaner always contacts the ITB (B). The cleaning blade removes the used toner
from the ITB. The toner collection auger (C) transfers the waste toner to the toner collection unit.

The seal (D) on the ITB cleaner protects against toner contamination. The driving power by the driver roller is
transferred to the tension roller (E). The toner collection auger gear (F) drives the gear (G) and collects the toner

Transfer belt drive 65

 Figure 1-27 Cleaning blade

Toner reservoir unit

Learn about the toner reservoir unit.

Main functions

● Toner Buffer Space (about 0.6 K page volume) which allows users to continue printing until a new toner
cartridge is delivered from purchase.

● A toner supply unit that is more accurate from the toner full sensing algorithm.

– Minimizes the remaining toner in toner cartridge.

– A uniform toner supply volume per second prevents an abnormal case of toner-density control error in
the development unit.

Working mechanism

● Toner level sensing method in the Reservoir unit:

– The toner level is checked by time with a floating actuator shuttering light sensor (toner full sensor).

● Toner supply to Reservoir unit:

66 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 – As the toner level (high, middle, and low) in the reservoir unit decreases so does the toner bottle supply
motor 1500 ms, 900 ms, and 600 ms.

Troubleshooting

1. Enter service mode and execute the toner dispense motor.

Service Mode > Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics Engine Test Routines > Toner Dispense Motor (Y,M,C,BK)

NOTE: There is no test routine for the toner full sensor in the reservoir unit.

2. Check the gear noise and motor operation.

If the reservoir driving gear is working without abnormal noise, then each reservoir unit does not have a
mechanical problem.

Figure 1-28 Toner reservoir unit

Laser scanner unit

Learn about the laser scanner unit.

Laser scanner assembly overview

Learn about the laser scanner assembly.

The laser scanner assembly consists of one polygon motor and four laser diodes (LD) units. The Laser scanner
assembly forms a latent image on the surface of four OPC drums. For this process, the laser scanner assembly
has a collimator lens, cylindrical lens, two F-Theta lenses, and two reflective mirrors on an optical path for each
color.

This laser scanner assembly uses the cross scan type scanning. K Color and C Color scan the laser from the rear
to the front. M Color and Y Color scan the laser from the front to the rear.

Laser scanner unit 67

 The laser scanner assembly has a skew adjustment function which adjusts the scanning line. An automatic
shutter is used to clean and protect the glass on the laser scanner assembly.

Figure 1-29 Laser scanner assembly overview

Table 1-23 Laser scanner assembly overview

Item Description

1 LD PCA

2 P/Mirror Motor

3 F1 Lens

4 F2 Lens

5 Skew adjust assembly

6 Shutter

7 PD PCA

Laser scanning optical path

Learn about the laser scanning optical path.

68 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 The laser from the laser scanner assembly is placed at intervals of 78 mm for each color. All colors use the same
polygon motor for oblique incidence.

The F2 lens (A) determines the slope of the primary scanning line and the image position of the secondary
scanning direction. This setting is adjusted by the manufacturer. The primary scanning line slope difference is
adjusted by the skew adjustment in the laser scanner assembly.

Reflective mirrors (B) on each color path adjust the curvature of primary scanning. This setting is adjusted by the
manufacturer.

Figure 1-30 Laser scanning optical path

Item Specification Remark

LD Unit Laser Diode: Quad Beam LD x 4 (for each color)

Driving IC: Dual LD X 8

P/Motor Speed ● E87640: 22,087 rpm

● E87650: 27,520 rpm

● E87660: 33,071 rpm

Speed ● E87640: 187 mm/s

● E87650: 233 mm/s

● E87660: 280 mm/s

H/W interface Interface with printer: 50 pin + 60 pin + 8 pin FFC + FFC + Wire

Laser synchronizing detectors

Learn about laser synchronizing detectors.

The laser scanner assembly has two beam detector sensor boards (PD PBA includes four sensors). The PD PBAs
are located at each corner of the laser optics housing unit.

The beam is detected by the PD PCA at the scanning start point and creates the horizontal sync signal (Hsync).

The two PD PBAs detect the following:

● (A, B): Scanning start position for K, C

Laser synchronizing detectors 69

 ● (C, D): Scanning start position for M, Y

Figure 1-31 Laser synchronizing detectors

Main scan start detection

The PD PBAs detect four beams at the scanning start point and create the horizontal sync (Hsync) signal. Data is
scanned by Hsync.

The arrow in the previous diagram shows the data scanning direction for each color. Black/Cyan and Yellow/
Magenta use the same polygon motor scanning in opposite directions.

Automatic CPR adjustment

Learn about automatic CPR adjustment.

During automatic CPR adjustment, the line patterns below are created eight times on the intermediate transfer
belt (ITB). The spaces between the lines (KK, CC, MM, YY, KC, KM, KY) are measured by the front, center, and rear
CPR sensors.

The controller takes the average of the spaces and then adjusts the following positions and magnification:

● Sub scan line position for CMY

● Main scan line position for CMY

● Magnification ratio for CMY

70 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 ● Skew for CMY

● KK, CC, MM, YY: Spaces between two lines of the same color.

● KC, KM, KY: Spaces between a black line and each color line.

NOTE: The ITB cleaning unit cleans the ITB after the patterns are measured.

Figure 1-32 Automatic CPR adjustment

Adjustment

● Sub Scan line position for CMY

The adjustment of the sub scan line position for CMY is based on the line position for K (black). The printer
measures the gaps between the lines of each color in the pattern on the ITB. When the gaps for a color are
incorrect, the printer moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this, it changes the
laser write timing for that color.

● Main Scan line position for CMY

When the printer detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it changes the laser
write start timing for each scan line.

● Magnification Adjustment for CMY

Automatic CPR adjustment 71

 When the printer detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock frequency for
the required color.

● Skew for CMY

The adjustment of the skew for CMY is based on the line position for K (black).

Adjustment Conditions

Line position adjustment can be turned on or off. However, it is normally recommended to turn on this function.

Line position adjustment timing depends on several settings. These settings include the following:

● ΔT = Temperature change of the laser scanner assembly between the temperature of the previous line
position adjustment and the current temperature.

● Pages = Total printed pages after previous line position adjustment.

Interval during print job

Line position adjustment interrupts printing and then starts automatically when one of these conditions occurs
when the printer checks at the sheet interval:

● ΔT > Temperature threshold (laser scanner assembly temperature: default 3°C (37.4°F)

● Pages > Output threshold for all outputs (default: 500 pages)

Toner collection unit not-installed/installed

● Line position adjustment starts automatically when toner collection unit is removed and reinstalled.

Drum unit or developer unit replaced

● When the printer detects a new drum unit or developer unit, line position adjustment is automatically
performed.

ITB replaced

● When the printer detects a new ITB or other ITB, field technicians have to execute the adjustment manually.

Main scan skew adjustment

The skew adjustment assembly (A) consists of the worm gear (1) for adjustment and worm gear (2). When Color
Plane Registration (CPR) executes, it detects and adjusts the scanning line slope manually.

The skew adjustment assembly (A) for magenta, cyan, and yellow adjusts the skew angle of the F2 lens (B). This
mechanism corrects main scan skew.

72 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-33 Main scan skew adjustment

Drive system
Learn about the drive system.

Pickup and cassette lift drive

Learn about the pickup and cassette lift drive.

Drive system 73
 Figure 1-34 Pickup and cassette lift drive

Power train

Pickup: normal rotation (pickup input) counter rotation (cassette lift input)

● 1 PM STEP → normal rotation → 2 Gear (pickup driving)

● 1 PM STEP → counter rotation → 3 Gear → 4 5 Gear → 6 Gear & Coupler (cassette lift driving)

Feed drive
Learn about the feed drive.

74 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-35 Feed drive

Power Train

HP STEP → Feed & Tray 1 drive

● 1 HP STEP → 2 Pulley & Coupler → 3 Gear → 4 Gear & Coupler (Feed Roller driving) → 5 E-Clutch & Gear
(Tray 1 driving)

● 1 HP STEP → 2 Pulley & Coupler → 6 Gear & Coupler (Feed Roller driving) → 7 Pulley & Coupler (Feed Roller
driving)

Registration drive
Learn about the registration drive.

Registration drive 75
 Figure 1-36 Registration drive

Power Train

HP STEP → Registration driving

● 1 HP STEP → 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Registration Roller driving)

Fuser release/exit drive

Learn about the fuser release/exit drive.

76 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-37 Fuser release/exit drive

Power Train

BLDC → Fuser and exit driving

PM Step → Fuser release driving

● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear (Fuser P/R driving)

● 1 BLDC → 3 Gear & Pulley → 4 Gear (exit driving)

● 5 PM Step → 6 Gear → 7 Gear → 8 Gear (Fuser Release driving)

Drive motors
Learn about the drive motors.

The following diagram shows the location of the printer drive motors.

Drive motors 77
 Figure 1-38 Drive motor

Number Motor Motor type Qty Function

1 Fuser Release PM-STEP 1 Fuser Release driving

2 Fuser and output BLDC 1 Fuser and output driving

3 Main OPC, BLDC 4 OPC and ITB Belt driving

development, and ITB

4 Registration assembly HP-STEP 1 Registration assembly driving

5 Feed/Tray 1 (MP) HP-STEP 1 Feed roller 1, 2, 3 driving

E-CLT 1 Feed/Tray 1 (MP) driving control

6 Pickup PM-STEP 2 Pickup roller/Cassette lift

driving

(reverse driving at cassette lift

driving)

7 Toner supply amd PM-STEP 4 Toner transfer (reservoir to

toner reservoir development unit)

78 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Number Motor Motor type Qty Function

8 Engage transfer PM-STEP 1 T1 engage/disengage driving

assembly

9 Toner collection unit PM-STEP 1 TCU driving

Main drive unit motors

Learn about the main drive unit motors.

Figure 1-39 Main drive unit motors

Power Train

BLDC → OPC, Development and PTB driving

● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear & Coupler → 3 Gear & Coupler (ITB driving)

● 1 BLDC → 4 Gear & Coupler (K OPC driving)

● 1 BLDC → 5 Gear & Pulley → 5 Gear & Coupler (K Development driving)

● 7 BLDC → 8 Gear & Coupler (Y, M, C OPC driving)

● 7 BLDC → 9 Gear & Coupler (Y, M, C Development driving)

Toner supply/reservoir drive

Learn about the toner supply/reservoir drive.

Main drive unit motors 79

 Figure 1-40 Toner supply/reservoir drive

Power Train

BLDC → Toner Supply, Reservoir driving

● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear → 3 Gear → 4 Gear & Latch → 5 Gear (Y, C Toner Supply driving)

● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear → 6 Gear (Photo Interrupt) → 7 Gear & Latch → 8 Gear (M, K Toner Supply driving)

● 9 PM Step → 10 Gear (Y, C Toner Reservoir driving)

● 9 PM Step → 11 Gear → 12 Gear (M, K Toner Reservoir driving)

Engage transfer roller drive

Learn about the engage transfer roller drive.

Figure 1-41 Engage transfer roller drive

80 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Power Train

PM STEP Motor → Engage transfer roller driving

● 1 PM STEP Motor → 2 Gear (Engage transfer roller driving)

Toner collection unit (TCU) drive

Learn about the engage transfer roller drive.

Figure 1-42 Toner collection unit (TCU) drive

Power Train

PM STEP Motor → TCU driving

● 1 PM STEP Motor → 2 Gear (TCU driving)

Flatbed Scanner System

Learn about the flatbed scanner system.

Flatbed scanner system overview

Learn about the flatbed scanner system.

The scanner converts a hard copy original into data. To scan an original, the scanner uses the lens and Charge
Coupled Device (CCD). The scanner stores and transfers the converted image to the storage space or transfers
the scanned data to the printer engine for copy.

For scan operation, the scanner uses a full rate (FR) carriage and a half rate (HR) carriage that is moved by a wire.
It scans the original document on the scanner glass or from the ADF.

The scanner system consists of the three following modules:

● Full Rate (FR) carriage: Illuminates the original and reflects the light at a 90 degree angle.

● Half Rate (HR) carriage: Transfers the reflected light from the FR carriage to the lens.

● Imaging lens: Makes an image on the CCD.

Toner collection unit (TCU) drive 81

 The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage. This keeps a regular gap between
the original and the imaging lens.

Figure 1-43 Scanner system overview

Scan process description

Learn about the scan process description.

1. The FR carriage lamp illuminates the original. The reflected light is moved to Mirror #1.

2. The reflected light from Mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through Mirror #2 and #3.

3. The light becomes smaller and makes an optical image.

4. The optical image is generated to the electrical signal by the CCD sensor.

To make a stable image, a gap must be maintained between the original and the lens. To maintain this gap, the
HR carriage moves half the distance and half the speed of the FR carriage.

82 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-44 Scan process

The optical image made by the CCD sensor is changed to an electrical-analog signal.

Each color element signal in the optical image is separated by the CCD sensor into red, green, and blue.

The red CCD sensor extracts the red color from the optical image, the green CCD sensor extracts the green color
from the optical image, and the blue CCD sensor extracts the blue color from the optical image.

The analog image signal is changed to a digital image signal by the A/D converter and is transferred to the
processor.

The image scan of the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD sensor. The CCD sensor consists of
approximately 7500 pixels. The image scan of the sub scanning direction is performed by the FR carriage and HR
carriage. The carriage is moved by a wire driven by the scan motor.

Scan resolution is 600 dpi.

Scan process description 83

 Figure 1-45 Image processing

Scanning system components

The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system.

To scan the original on the scanner glass, two carriages driven by the motor move at a regular speed. The motor
drives the timing belt, pulley, and wire. The wire pulley rolls and releases the wire to move the carriage.

The scanner consists of the scanner glass, FR carriage, HR carriage, imaging unit, and driving unit.

84 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-46 Scanning system components

● FR Carriage

Scanning system components 85

 Figure 1-47 FR carriage

– LED lamp module

This module illuminates the original. Two white LEDs are assembled on the side of the module. The
original is illuminated by the light-guide. The heat sink is attached to the LED PCB. When the heat sink is
broken or expired, an engineer needs to replace it.

○ Light-guide

The light-guide changes the light from point type to line type. The light-guide is made by
transparent resin and controls the amount of light in the scan area uniformly.

○ White LED

The white LED emits white light. The heat sink attached to the PCA prevents heat deterioration.

○ Reflection holder

The reflection holder reflects the light that has passed through the light-guide.

– Mirror #1

Mirror #1 reflects light at a 90 degree angle.

HR Carriage (mirror unit)

86 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-48 HR carriage

● Mirror #2 and #3

Mirrors #2 and #3 are positioned at a 45 degree angle in order to change the direction of the light. The
reflected light from mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through mirrors #2 and #3.

● Pulley

The pulley is a ball bearing type. The pulley rolls and releases the wire which makes the HR carriage move.
The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage.

Imaging unit

The imaging unit changes the optical image to an electrical signal.

Figure 1-49 Imaging unit

● Imaging lens

The reflected light from the imaging lens is focused on the CCD. The image is reduced to the fixed CCD
sensor and pixel size.

● CCD PCA

The image made by the imaging lens is changed to an electrical signal by the CCD. The CCD consists of three
channel line sensors for image creation. The brightness and darkness of the image depends on the voltage
level from the CCD. The output voltage is changed to a digital signal. The digital signal makes the scanned
image.

Scanning system components 87

 Wire driving

To move the carriages, the wire is assembled in the front and rear of the scanner. The pulley rolls and releases
the wire which moves the FR carriage and the HR carriage.

Figure 1-50 Wire driving

Scanner glass (flatbed glass)

The original is placed on the scanner glass for scan or copy jobs. The scanner glass is made of tempered glass
and is held in place by the frame to prevent distortion.

88 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Drive motor

The scanner drive system uses the step motor to move the carriage. The step motor controls the position and
maintains constant speed. The motor power is transferred to the wire through the timing belt and pulley.

Timing belt

The timing belt has a regular saw tooth gear and transfers the motor power to the pulley.

Figure 1-51 Timing belt

Paper size sensor

The paper size sensor automatically detects the size of the original on the scanner glass. The paper size sensor
uses two sensors. An infrared LED is used to detect the dark original.

Home sensor

The home sensor detects the FR carriage position. The home sensor is a transmission photo sensor.

Cover open sensor #1

When the ADF unit opens and closes, a function is triggered which detects whether the paper size sensor is on or
off.

Cover open sensor #2

The cover open sensor #2 detects when the ADF unit is closed using magnetic force.

ADF glass

Scanner read the original feed from ADF unit through ADF glass. The FR carriage read the original as it passes on
ADF glass. If ADF glass is contaminated.

Shading sheet

Scanning system components 89

 The shading sheet is attached under flat-bed glass. Before every scan job, scanner read the shading sheet to get
reference image with same optical conditions. If shading sheet is contaminated, a vertical line might occur on
scan image.

Figure 1-52 Shading sheet

Caution for moving the scanner

Learn about cautions when moving the scanner.

When shipping or moving the printer, the FR and HR carriages in the scanner must be secured with a scan locking
screw to prevent movement of these parts and possible damage to the scanner

This screw must be installed before moving the printer and then removed once the printer is positioned in place.

When installing

After unpacking, before turning on the printer, the scan locking screw must be removed. If the locking screw is not
removed scanner failure will occur.

1. When installing the printer, remove the scan locking screw.

2. After removing the screw, assemble the screw cap from the accessory package.

90 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-53 Remove scan locking screw

When moving the printer

When moving the printer, tighten the scan locking screw to prevent damage to the carriages.

1. Make sure the FR carriage is located in the end of scanner side wall which is screw locked.

2. Remove the screw cap.

3. Tighten the M3x8 screw to secure the FR carriage.

Figure 1-54 Tighten scan locking screw

Document feeder LX (du models)

Learn about the document feeder LX (du models).

Document feeder LX overview

Learn about the document feeder LX.

Document feeder LX (du models) 91

 Figure 1-55 Document feeder LX overview
R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1

R7 R8 R9 R10 R11
Table 1-24 Document feeder LX overview

Part Description Function

R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray

R2 GUIDE-DOC F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)

R3 PICK ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray

R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller

R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller

R6 REGISTRATION (REGI) ROLLER Original paper alignment roller

R7 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning

R8 SIMPLEX WHITE-BAR Support of scanning unit

R9 SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the exit roller

R10 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit

R11 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray

Document feeder LX electrical parts

Learn about the document feeder LX electrical parts.

Figure 1-56 Document feeder LX electrical parts electrical parts locations

Pick~ Roller
4. Paper Length
3.Detect Pickup
2, Registra on Feed Out

Registra on 5. Paper Width

1. Cover Open
Roller
Exit Roller

6. Exit Idle
Scan In

Scan Out

Scan Scan CCD

92 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-25 Document feeder LX electrical parts

Callout Item Function

1 Cover Open Detects if cover is open or closed

2 Registration (Regi) Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the registration path

3 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty

4 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length

5 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width

Document feeder LX registration

Learn about the document feeder LX registration.

Figure 1-57 Document feeder LX registration

Registra on Sensor
Registra on Roller

Item Document feeder LX

Registration 1 times registration

Document feeder LX drive system

Learn about the document feeder LX drive system.

The drive system consists of one motor and two clutches to transfer the paper.

Document feeder LX registration 93

 Figure 1-58 Document feeder LX drive system

Pickup Drive sec•on

Registra•on Motor sec•on

Feed Drive sec•on

The document feeder LX drive system consists of two motors (BLDC and STEP) and one clutch that moves the
paper.

● BLDC Motor > Feed and pickup

● STEP Motor > Regi

● Clutch > Pickup

There are three sections: pickup drive section, registration (regi) motor section, and feed drive section.

The pickup drive section has three assemblies: pickup drive assembly, pickup assembly, and guide pickup
assembly.

The registration motor section has the regi motor, trans gear, regi roller, regi-idle roller, regi sensor, and actuator.

LX ADF original pickup assembly

Learn about the LX ADF original pickup assembly.

Figure 1-59 LX ADF pickup assembly

Pickup Drive sec•on

Pickup Drive Assy

Pickup Assy

Guide pickup Assy

94 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 After detecting the paper, one motor controls the drive system.

The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC provides the power to pick up the paper.

The CLUTCH cannot rotate inversely. The spring that is included in the ADF GUIDE PICKUP ASSEMBLY is connected
to COVER-OPEN. When the CLUTCH does not drive, stand-by status occurs and stops the operation.

The ADF roller and pick roller are connected by the belt.

The ADF roller is provided with power while the paper is picked up and transferred to the registration roller. When
the pickup drive is stopped and the registration roller is driven, the ADF roller becomes idle.

The normal process is:

● When the original is setting up, the detect-sensor is activated and the printing job starts. The motor and
pickup clutch begin working. The pick roller then moves down and contacts the original in the tray.

● When the registration sensor detects paper, the pickup clutch stops.

● When the detect-sensor detects that the tray is empty, the motor stops and the printer enters stand-by
status.

LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly

Learn about the LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly.

Figure 1-60 LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly

Registra•on Motor sec•on
istra•on(V)$)/(+'-$%)"

The registration drive uses the CLUTCH-ELECTRIC to drive the registration roller and transfer the paper to the
ROLLER FEED.

The registration roller aligns the leading edge of the original. When the original is placed in the nip, the roller is
rotated for alignment.

The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC repeats on/off to align each original.

Document feeder LX scanning position

Learn about the document feeder LX scanning position.

LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly 95

 Figure 1-61 Document feeder LX scanning position

Item Simplex Duplex

Scanning White Bar White Bar

Document feeder LX specifications

Learn about the document feeder LX specifications.

Table 1-26 Document feeder LX specification

Item Specification

Capacity 100 pages

Scan Speed 80/160 ipm

Pickup Semi-Retard

Registration 1 times registration

Motor 2 each

Stacker Not applicable

Scanning White Bar

MSO Not applicable

Flow document feeder dn/z models (GX and sGX)

Learn about the flow document feeder dn/z models (GX and sGX).

Flow document feeder overview

Learn about the flow document feeder.

96 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-62 Flow document feeder overview
R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1

R8 R9 R1 R11 R1 R1 R1
0 2 3 4

Table 1-27 Flow document feeder overview

Part Description Function

R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray

R2 GUIDE-DOC F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)

R3 PICK ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray

R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller

R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller

R6 FEED ROLLER Original paper transfer roller (A6 size)

R7 PRE REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (1 round)

R8 REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (2 round)

R9 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning

R10 SIMPLEX WHITE-ROLLER Support of simplex scanning unit

R11 SIMPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the duplex
white-roller

R12 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit

R13 DUPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the exit roller

R14 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray

Flow document feeder sensors

Learn about the flow document feeder sensors.

Flow document feeder sensors 97

 Figure 1-63 Flow document feeder sensors
10. MSO 8.Cover Open 7. Pickup Position 5. Detect Sensor 2. Paper Width

9.Pickup 1. Paper Length

Pickup Roller
11. Pre Registration
12. Registration

3.LIFT

PRE REGI PICK UP FEED separation 4.CAM RELEASE

6. POSITION
REGI
DUPLEX-SCAN OUT EXIT

Scan CIS
13. SIM Scan Idle
SIMPLEX
Scan In WHITE-R
OLLER

16. Exit

14. SIM Scan

Scan CCD
MSO Sensors 15. DUP Scan

11. Pre Registration

10. MSO

Table 1-28 Flow document feeder sensors

Callout Item Function

1 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length

2 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width

3 Stacker Lift Sensor Detects Stacker Position

4 Cam Release Sensor Sensing ‘Separation Roller’ rotation

5 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty

6 Position Sensor Detects Stacker Position

7 Pickup Position Sensor Sensing ‘Pickup Roller’ rotation

8 Cover Open Sensor Detects if cover is open or closed

9 Pickup Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the feed path

10 MSO Sensor Detects mix size

11 Pre-Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the pre-regi path

12 Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Regi path

13 SIM Scan Idle Sensor Sensing ‘Scan In Roller’ rotation

14 SIM Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan In path

15 DUP Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan Out path

16 Exit Sensor Paper Exit Sensing

98 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor
Learn about the flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor.

Figure 1-64 Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor
Tx Sensor

Rx Sensor

This sensor detects multi-feeds.

● Component: Ultrasonic Sensor Tx Board, Rx Board , HIC Board (Amp and Filter)

● The Rx Sensor has a different level on each paper status: no paper, one paper, multiple papers.

● Detect the multi-feeding through the level change of Rx Sensor.

● Transmit and receive operation of 300 khz frequency.

Flow document feeder drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder drive system.

The flow document feeder drive system drive system includes eight motors.

The Flow ADF drive system consists for the following sections:

● Pickup release drive

● Pickup drive

● Pre-regi drive

● Regi drive

● Scan-in roller release drive

● Scan drive

● Exit drive

● Lift drive

Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor 99

 Figure 1-65 Flow document feeder drive system
Pre-Registration Drive section

Registration Drive section

Pickup Drive section Pickup Release Drive section

Scan Drive section

Lift Drive section

Scan in Roller Release Drive section

Exit Drive section

Flow document feeder lifting drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder lifting drive system.

Figure 1-66 Flow document feeder lifting drive system

● Component: LIFT MOTOR, LIFT SHAFT, LIFT BAR, PAPER SENSOR

● LIFT MOTOR Starts > LIFT SHAFT and LIFT BAR lift Tray

● PAPER SENSOR detects paper in the Tray

100 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 ● Paper contacts PICKUP ROLLER and stops movement

● Document is passed through SCAN OUT SENSOR. Duplex scanning starts.

Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system.

Figure 1-67 Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system

● Holds the rear of the paper using cam motion for improved scan quality

● Component: RELEASE MOTOR, RELEASE CAM, SCAN-IN IDLE ROLLER

● Motor and cam operation repeats for every piece of paper

Flow document feeder specifications

Learn about the flow document feeder specifications.

Table 1-29 Flow document feeder specification

Item Specification

Capacity 250 pages (stacker lifting)

Scan Speed 120/240 ipm

Pickup Semi-Retard

Registration 2 times registration

Motor 8 each

Stacker Lifting

Scanning White Roller/White Bar

MSO Support

Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system 101

 Flow document feeder registration
Learn about the flow document feeder registration.

The flow document feeder registration uses a two-times registration process.

Figure 1-68 Flow document feeder registration

Pre Registration Roller
Registration Sensor Pre Registration Sensor

Registration
Roller

Flow document feeder scanning position

Learn about the flow document feeder scanning position.

Figure 1-69 Flow document feeder scanning position

6LPSOH[
'XSOH[

Table 1-30 Flow document feeder scanning position

Item Simplex Duplex

Scanning White Roller White Bar

102 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor
Learn about the flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor.

The MSO sensor detects the size of mixed size papers and sets the alignment of the papers to the rear.

Figure 1-70 Flow document feeder MSO 1

Figure 1-71 Flow document feeder MSO 2

Table 1-31 Flow document feeder MSO3 (length x max width)

Length A3 SEF A4 LEF B4 SEF B5 LEF A4 SEF A5 LEF A5 LEF A5 SEF

(297 mm) (297 mm) (257 mm) (257 mm) (210 mm) (210 mm) (182 mm) (148 mm)
(11.7 in) (11.7 in) (10.1 in) (10.1 in) (8.3 in) (8.3 in) (7.2 in) (5.8 in)

A3 SEF X

(420 mm)
(16.5 in)

A4 LEF X

(210 mm)
(8.3 in)

B4 SEF X X X

(363 mm)
(14.3 in)

Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor 103

 Table 1-31 Flow document feeder MSO3 (length x max width) (continued)

Length A3 SEF A4 LEF B4 SEF B5 LEF A4 SEF A5 LEF A5 LEF A5 SEF

(297 mm) (297 mm) (257 mm) (257 mm) (210 mm) (210 mm) (182 mm) (148 mm)
(11.7 in) (11.7 in) (10.1 in) (10.1 in) (8.3 in) (8.3 in) (7.2 in) (5.8 in)

B5 LEF X X X

(182 mm)
(7.2 in)

A4 SEF X X X X X

(297 mm)
(11.7 in)

A5 LEF X X X X X

(148 mm)
(5.8 in)

B5 SEF X X X X

(257 mm)
(10.1 in)

A5 SEF X X

(210 mm)
(8.3 in)

Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method

Learn about the flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method.

● Component: LEVER GUIDE EXIT F, GUIDE-EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY.

● Open LEVER GUIDE EXIT F.

● Cleans with a D-CIS GLASS in the direction indicated.

● Cleans the GUIDE EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY in the direction indicated.

Figure 1-72 Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method (1 of 2)

3XOOWKHOHYHU

104 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-73 Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method (2 of 2)

Flow ADF z bundles (GX)

Learn about the flow ADF z bundles (GX).

Model Engine Scanner

Platen DN-sGX Z-GX

Color 40 ppm Same at Scan Speed USM Capacity Scan Speed USM Capacity
whole model
50 ppm 80/160 ipm X 100 sheet 120/240 O 250 sheet
ipm
60 ppm

Mono 40 ppm

50 ppm

60 ppm

Hardware configuration
Learn the functions and specifications of the hardware configuration.

The electronic circuit system consists of the following:

● Main controller (main board)

● OPE unit

● Document feeder (Flow/LX) controller

● HVPS board

● LVPS board

Flow ADF z bundles (GX) 105

 ● Fuser drive assembly

Figure 1-74 Electronic circuit diagram

The main controller handles the video controller, engine controller, and scan controller.

The main controller receives print data from the host through the network or USB port and receives copy data
from the scan controller. The main controller uses this information to generate printable video bitmap data. It
controls all modulesrequired to print, including the laser scanner assembly, HVPS, FAN, fuser, and so on.

The main controller communicates with the drive system and other devices through Universal Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitter (UART). The main controller communicates with and checks the life of the toner cartridge,
drum, and developer units through I2C.

The main controller uses Quad Core CPU 1.5 GHz, DDR3 4 GB memory, Micro SD 4 GB, and a 500 GB SATA HDD to
control the engine driving, video signal processing, and user interface.

A MICOM controls power to the fuser lamp and power to the system according to an optimized energy saving
algorithm. The MICOM communicates with the OPE controller through the USB 3.0 protocol to display the system
information on the control panel.

The OPE unit displays the status of the system using the control panel TFT LCD in response to user actions or the
main controller.

The soft power switch in the OPE unit is used to safely shut down the system.

The ADF controller controls some mechanisms required to scan continuously from the ADF. The ADF controller
communicates with the main controller to synchronize scan timing.

The HVPS board generates and controls high-voltage channels. The fuser drive assembly controls power to the
fuser lamp. The LVPS board generates 5 V and 24 V power for the system.

The following diagrams show the locations of the printer circuit boards:

106 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-75 Circuit board locations

HP Formatter
(Not shown)

LVPS (2)

Main controller
Learn about the main controller.

CAUTION: The main controller for the previous model is not compatible with the new model (IR/UI). Do not use
the previous model main controller during replacement.

Main controller (previous model)

Learn about the main controller (previous model).

The main controller consists of the main processor (A3000), memory (DDR3 4 GB), Micro SD (4 GB), 1 G Ethernet
PHY, USB 3.0 HUB, and Micom (Power/Fuser control). It can control Video/UI/FAX signal interface connection,
motor driving IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.

Main controller 107

 The main processor (Quad Core 1.5 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with the
various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by a SATA cable and connected to the other device
(such as ADF, dual cassette feeder (DCF), Finisher, Modem) by UART.

Figure 1-76 Main controller block diagram

Figure 1-77 Main controller clock diagram

M 41T81
RTC with IRQ
32.768Khz
CrystalInput

RTS5401
U SB3.0 H U B
12M hz
Crystal
Input

A TSA M D A3000 CH 0_CLK_P(800M hz)

20E15 D D R3 8G b
D D R3 C H 0 CH 0_CLK_N
12M hz K4B8G 1646B
Crystal
Input
RTC D D R3 8G b
K4B8G 1646B
CH 1_CLK_P(800M hz)
N .C
D D R3 8G b
ASM 3P2863 Clk0 D D R3 C H 1 CH 1_CLK_N K4B8G 1646B
12M hz CLK_M A IN (Spread 12M hz)
Crystal Clk1
Input CLK_PU RE(Reference 12M hz)
Sel Clk2 D D R3 8G b
K4B8G 1646B

M AC0
SA TA _REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C0_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 NETWORK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal SA TA _REFCLK_N M A C0_RX_CLK(125M hz) Crystal
Input Clk1 RTL8211 Input

M AC1 NETWORK OPTION PBA

PCI_REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C1_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 NETWORK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal M A C1_RX_CLK(125M hz) Crystal
Input Clk1
PCI_REFCLK_N RTL8211 Input

CLK_M A IN _CCD M _P(35M hz)

U SB3D _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CCD M
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 CLK_M A IN _CCD M _N
Crystal U SB3D _REFCLK_N
Input Clk1 SC AN0 RX_CLK_CCD M _P(35M hz)

RX_CLK_CCD M _N

U SB3H _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CLK_M A IN _D CIS_P(35M hz)

D CIS
U SB3H _REFCLK_N SC AN1 CLK_M A IN _D CIS_N
RX_CLK_D CIS_P(35M hz)

RX_CLK_D CIS_N

108 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-78 Main controller connection information

Table 1-32 Main controller connections

Item Description Item Description Item Description Item Description

1 OUTPUT 12 OPC BLDC 23 FIH JOINT 34 FAX JOINT

MONO

2 FUSER DRIVE 13 LVPS TYPE5 24 UI IF 35 2ND

NETWORK

3 FUSER 14 LVPS TYPE3R 25 USB 36 EFI SIGNAL

DRAWER HOST/HUB

4 TB/DEVE/E- 15 FRONT IF 26 DCIS 37 CPU FAN

Label MONO

5 TONER 16 Fuser drive 27 CCDM

SUP/RES assembly IF

6 CTD/ 17 Laser scanner 28 Flow ADF

Registration assembly
assembly MONO
SENS

7 PICKUP 1/2 18 HVPS MONO 29 HDD POWER

8 FEED/ 19 USB HOST 1/2 30 HDD SIGNAL

Registration
assembly MOT

Main controller (previous model) 109

 Table 1-32 Main controller connections (continued)

Item Description Item Description Item Description Item Description

9 SIDE 20 USB DEVICE 31 SIDE FAN

10 dual cassette 21 NETWORK 32 MSOK

feeder (DCF) IF

11 FINISHER 22 EFI POWER 33 SD CARD

CAUTION: The main controller for the previous model is not compatible with the new model (IR/UI). Do not use
the previous model main controller during replacement.

Main controller
Learn about the printer main controller.

The main controller consists of the main processor (A3000), memory (DDR3 6 GB), eMMC (4 GB)1 G Ethernet PHY,
USB 3.0 HUB, and Micom (Power/Fuser control). It can control Video/UI/FAX signal interface connection, motor
driving IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.

The main processor (Quad Core 1.5 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with the
various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by a SATA cable and connected to the other device
(such as ADF, dual cassette feeder (DCF), Finisher, and Modem) by UART.

Figure 1-79 Main controller block diagram

O P E IR
IR P B A
C h3
FU S E R
10.1" C h2 PTB SC A N N ER
T FT LC D
TO N ER C R U M
C h1 O PC C R U M D SD F
U S B 3.0 H U B P B A
R TC
W IFI/N FC M O D U LE C h0
D E B U G _M C B
FR O N T 2 nd N W
R T S 5411 C h0 P LA T E N
C A R D R EA D ER U SB D IM M C h1
D E B U G _S C B
4Port H U B H O ST
M S O K /T P M C h2
D E B U G _U I
C h3
E N G IN E P A N E L
LC D C h4
A T S A M D 2E 15
C on. I2C SPI S C A N IF S C A N IF
C h5
CH0 CH1 D SD F
R EA R U SB
U SB H O ST
R T S 5401 3.0
C h6
DCF
1/2 4Port H U B H O ST C h7
FIN IS H E R
C h9
R EA R U SB UART E FI
U SB 3.0 C h10
M O D EM 0
D EVIC E D E V IC E C h11
M O D EM 1
D D R 3 6G B DDRC
FU S E R FU S E R U N IT
O n-board 4G B 800M hz
D IM M 2G B 32bit
N C TH 1 C /D N C TH 2 C /D
M A G IC 12B it AD C A T S A M D 2E 15
IO ExternalAD C 12b A N A LO G M U X
A N A LO G M U X READ M H V YM C K, TH V YM C K
M P SIZE / PAPER SIZE1,2 / ADC TC YM C K / C TD ,AC R / FU SER / W TB
IN N ER, O U TTER, EXIT, LSU TEM P 1.8V
H U M ID ITY, M O D EL SEL, AC Level E FI V ID E O
P C Iex C O N T R O LLE R
Step M otor FB / 24V FB
* C olor m odel

EN G IN E

STEP M O T
PIC KU P1/2, FEED , REG I, T1 EN G AG E,
D R V 8825
X15
A 3000 M AC0 R T L8211E
G igabit phy
R J45
B ASE

D U PLEX_RET/1/2, SKEW Y/M /C , S I-7321M CTRL.

W TB , FU SER RELEASE, TO N ER SU PPLY X2 R T L8211E R J45
YM /C K, TO N ER RESERVO IR YM /C K, M AC1
A N 44061A G igabit phy EXTEN D
C ST LO C K, X1 O PTIO N KIT

FA N SA TA
SEN SO R EXIT1/2/3/4,SM PS(LX/G X), SA TA
2.5", 320G B
EM PTY 1/2, LIFT1/2, PRE FEED 1/2, FEED C PU , LSU , D EVE,SID E,
REG I, M P_EM PTY/SIZEL/W , C U RL2, FU SER O U T CTRL. G P IO
FU SER IN /O U T, B IN _FU LL_EXIT1/2, PW M
D U PLEX_JAM 1/2, D U PLEX_RETU RN , B LD C 4B E A M LS U
PAPER_SIZE1/2, W ASTE_IN STALL, O PC Y,M ,C ,K/ITB , YM CK
O PC _PH ASE Y/M /C /K, RESERVO IR Y/M /C /K, FU SER LS U C CTRL. LD 1,2,3,4
TO N ER SU P YM /C K, ITB H O M E, FU SER PO S, LSU _M O T1
C O VER O PEN FRO N T/SID E, H V PS VD O 1B _YM C K
SC AN H O M E / APS 1,2 SH U TTER AC R, M H V YM C K
VD O 2B _YM C K
PLATEN C O VER O PEN 1,2 D EV D C YM C K H PV C VD O D ATA VD O 3B _YM C K
D EV AC VPP YM C K
VD O 4B _YM C K
S O LE N O ID / C LT D EV AC
C LT : M P D EV AC EN YM C K
SO L : M P / EXIT TH V1 YM C K
TH V2(C V/C C ) / TH V eM M C
DC M OT C LEAN MMC CTRL. 4G B
AC R SH U TTER, C ST LO C K 1/2 SAW / FU SER B IAS B oot D evice

110 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-80 Main controller clock diagram
32.768Khz
M 41T81
Crystal Input RTC w ith IRQ

12M hz
RTS5401 A3000 CH 0_CLK_P(800M hz)
Crystal
U SB3.0 H U B D D R3 2G B
Input D D R3 C H 0 CH 0_CLK_N
(4G b*8*4ea)

RTC D D R3 2G B
(4G b*8*4ea)
CH 1_CLK_P(800M hz) D D R3 2G B
N .C
12M hz
ASM 3P2863 Clk0 D D R3 C H 1 CH 1_CLK_N (4G b*8*4ea)
CLK_M A IN (Spread 12M hz)
Crystal Clk1
Input CLK_PU RE(Reference 12M hz)
Sel Clk2 D D R3 2G b_tem p
(4G b*8*4ea)

M AC 0
SA TA _REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C0_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz ID T6U 41362 D IF_CLK_P N ETW O RK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal SA TA _REFCLK_N
Input D IF_CLK_N M A C0_RX_CLK(125M hz) RTL8211 Crystal
Input

PCI_REFCLK_P(100M hz)
M AC 1 N ETW O RK O PTIO N PBA
D IF_CLK_P M A C1_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
PCI_REFCLK_N N ETW O RK PH Y 12M hz
D IF_CLK_N M A C1_RX_CLK(125M hz) RTL8211 Crystal
Input

CLK_M A IN _CCD M _P(35M hz)

U SB3D _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CCD M
25M hz ID T6U 41362 D IF_CLK_P CLK_M A IN _CCD M _N
Crystal U SB3D _REFCLK_N
Input D IF_CLK_N SC AN 0 RX_CLK_CCD M _P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_CCD M _N

U SB3H _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CLK_M A IN _D CIS_P(35M hz)

D IF_CLK_P
U SB3H _REFCLK_N D CIS
D IF_CLK_N SC AN 1 CLK_M A IN _D CIS_N
RX_CLK_D CIS_P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_D CIS_N

Main controller 111

 Figure 1-81 Main controller connection information

Table 1-33 Main controller connections

Item Description Item Description Item Description Item Description

1 OUTPUT 12 FINISHER 23 Laser scanner 34 DCIS

assembly 1
COLOR

2 FUSER DRIVE 13 OPC E- 24 Laser scanner 35 CCDM

Label/T1 assembly 2
COLOR

3 FUSER 14 OPC HOME 25 HVPS COLOR 36 Flow ADF

DRAWER SENS

4 TB/DEVE/E- 15 OPC BLDC 26 USB HOST 1/2 37 HDD POWER

Label COLOR

5 TONER 16 TC SENS/RES 27 USB DEVICE 38 HDD SIGNAL

SUP_/RES FULL

6 CPR_CTD 17 LVPS TYPE5 28 NETWORK 39 CPU FAN

COLOR

112 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-33 Main controller connections (continued)

Item Description Item Description Item Description Item Description

7 Registration 18 HVPS POWER/ 29 EFI POWER 40 SIDE FAN

assembly/T1 Laser scanner
POS SENS assembly
SKEW

8 PICKUP 1/2 19 LVPS TYPE4 30 FIH JOINT 41 MSOK

9 FEED/ 20 FRONT IF 31 HUB IF 42 FAX JOINT

Registration COLOR
assembly MOT

10 SIDE 21 Fuser drive 32 USB 43 EFI SIGNAL

assembly IF HOST/HUB

11 dual cassette 22 Laser scanner 33 UI IF 44 2ND

feeder (DCF) IF assembly PD NETWORK
45
DDR3 DIMM

Information

● Part Number

– E876z, E876dn series: JC82-00543A

– E876du series: 5CM63-67001

● Part Name: MainPCA

Master system operation key (MSOK)

Learn about the master system operation key (MSOK).

MSOK PCA is used to store all system information and consists of serial flash memory, an EEPROM, and a
X-E-Label. The flash memory (4 MB), EEPROM (256 KB) and X-E-Label are used for all system operations such as
system parameter, device status, tech information, and service information.

NOTE: When a main board needs to be exchanged, reinstall the MSOK PCA to the new main board to retain the
system information.

IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main board in the
same orientation as when it was removed in order for the printer to function.

Figure 1-82 MSOK

Master system operation key (MSOK) 113

 1 Main PCA I/F connector

Formatter cabling
Learn about the formatter cabling.

Figure 1-83 Formatter cabling (sGX/GX)

sGX/GX ADF Only Cable Rev A CPS (J28)
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown Card insGX/GX

Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A

Engine Engine
g LAN (J8)
( ) JC39 - 002567A
Controller Board Engine
g Control (J36)
( ) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)

8” Control Panel JC39-02579A

w/ Keyboard “Z” bundle Accelerator Card
CP HDMI (J30) Std sGX/GX

CP Sideband (J16)
( )
JC39-02583A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Inside Formatter Cage Fan (J47)
Gigabit
RJ45

Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0

Opt
2x Host Ports Device

Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card

a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS(Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)

Figure 1-84 Formatter cabling (LX)

LX ADF Only Cable Rev A
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown
Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A
Engine Engine
g LAN (J8)
( ) JC39 - 002567A
Controller Board Engine
g Control (J36)
( ) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)

8” Control Panel JC39-02579A

CP HDMI (J30)

CP Sideband (J16)
( )
JC39-02583A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Inside Formatter Cage Fan (J47)
Gigabit
RJ45

Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0

Opt
2x Host Ports Device

Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card

a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS (Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)

114 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Cable Rev A
sGX/GX ADF Only CPS (J28)
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown Card insGX/GX

Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A

Engine Engine
g LAN (J8)
( ) JC39 - 002567A
Controller Board Engine
g Control (J36)
( ) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)

8” Control Panel JC39-02579A

w/ Keyboard “Z” bundle Accelerator Card
CP HDMI (J30) StdsGX/GX

CP Sideband (J16)
( )
JC39-02557A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
Figure 1-85 Formatter cabling (sGX/GX)

IOD (Island of Data) J51

Inside Formatter Cage Gigabit
Fan (J47) RJ45

Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0

Opt Device
2x Host Ports
Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card
a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) SAM
- -JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS(Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)

Formatter cabling
115
116
Cable Rev A
LX ADF Only

Cable
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown

Engine HDMI
Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A
Engine Engine
g LAN (J8)
( ) JC39 - 002567A

Formatter cabling
Controller Board Engine
g Control (J36)
( ) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)

NA
Jxx

J29
Table 1-34 Formatter cabling
8” Control Panel JC39-02579A

CP HDMI (J30)
Figure 1-86 Formatter cabling (LX)

CP Sideband (J16)
( )
JC39-02583A

Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC

LVPS
From
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Inside Formatter Cage Gigabit

Main board
Fan (J47) RJ45

Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0

Opt Device
2x Host Ports
Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card
a

To
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS (Smart Transducer Monitoring

Formatter
Accelerator
System)

Purpose

(JC39-02584A)
Power for accelerator

High speed print data

 Table 1-34 Formatter cabling (continued)

Cable Jxx From To Purpose

Engine LAN J8 Main board Formatter High speed print data

(JC39-02584A)

Engine control J36 Main board Formatter Low level engine control
(JC39-02553A)

HIP2 USB J12 Formatter HIP USB for HIP

NOTE: Cable bundled.

Front walk-up USB J20 Formatter Front of printer USB for walk u

NOTE: Cable bundled.

CP HDMI J30 Formatter CP Data to CP

NOTE: Cable bundled.

CP side band J16 Formatter CP Power, reset, wake lines,

display power, keyboard
(JC39-02557A)

Power button J16 Formatter Power button Power ON/OFF

IOD J16 Formatter IOD Data to/from Island of

Data

Internal USB/AA J21 Formatter Accessory Accessory

Engine power J6 LVPS Formatter 5V supply to formatter

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5H)

Learn about the low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5H).

NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)

The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards. The
voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection modes for
over current and overload.

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5H) 117

 Figure 1-87 LVPS PCA (Type 5H)

1 INPUT_AC

2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V 1/2/3/4 (to Main PCA)

3 24 V on/off

4 OUTPUT_DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)

Specification

● General input/output voltage

– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)

– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)

– Input current: 8.0 A (110 V)/5.0 A (220 V)

– Output power: 275 W

○ DC 5 V: 35 W

○ DC 24 V: 240 W

Information

110 V 220 V

Part number JC44-00249A JC44-00250A

Part name LVPS 110V Type 5H LVPS 220V Type 5H

118 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Input/output connector

● AC input connector (CN1)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 AC_L AC input

2 AC_N

● DC output connector (CN2)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 +5V1 Power

2 GND 5 V ground

3 +5V2 Power

4 GND 5 V ground

● DC output connector (CN3)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 +24V1 Power

2 GND 24 V ground

3 +24V2 Power

4 GND 24 V ground

5 +24V3 Power

6 GND 24 V ground

7 +24V4 Power

8 GND 24 V ground

● Signal Connector (CN4)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 GND Active Low

2 24 V On/Off

3 GND

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 3R) for GX/sGX only
Learn about the low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 3R) for GX/sGX only.

NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 1 each, Type3 x 1 each)

The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards. The
voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection modes for
over current and overload.

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 3R) for GX/sGX only 119
 Figure 1-88 LVPS PCA (Type 3R)

1 INPUT_AC Power (CON1)

2 Fuser AC Power (CON2)

3 OUTPUT_DC +24 V 1/2/3 and +5V1 (CON3)

4 Signal_24 V on/off, Relay on, Fuser on (CON4)

Specification

● General input/output voltage

– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)

– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)

– Input current: 10.0 A (110 V)/8.0 A (220 V)

– Output power: 164 W

○ DC 5 V: 20 W

○ DC 24 V: 144 W

Information

110 V 220 V

Part number JC44-00222E JC39-01202A

Part name LVPS 110V Type 3R LVPS 220V Type 3R

120 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Input/output connector

● AC input connector (CN1)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 AC_L AC input

2 AC_N

● Fuser AC Power Connector (CN2)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 AC_L AC input for fuser

2 AC_N

● DC output connector (CN3)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 +5V1 DC 5 V

2 GND Ground

3 +24V1 DC 24 V

4 GND Ground

5 +24V2 DC 24 V

6 GND Ground

7 +24V3 DC 24 V

● Signal Connector (CN4)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 GND Ground

2 24 V On/Off Active Low

3 Relay on Active High

4 24 V Bias for photo triac, relay

5 Fuser on Active High

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4)

Learn about the low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4).

NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)

The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards. The
voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection modes for
over current and overload.

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) 121

 Figure 1-89 LVPS PCA (Type 4)

1 INPUT_AC

2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V1/2/3 and DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)

3 24 V on/off

Specification

● General input/output voltage

– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)

– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)

– Input current: 6.3 A (110 V)/5 A (220 V)

– Output power: 205 W

○ DC 5 V: 25 W

○ DC 24 V: 180 W

Information

110 V 220 V

Part number JC44-00091D JC44-00092D

Part name LVPS 110V Type 4 LVPS 220V Type 4

Input/output connector

● AC input connector (CN1)

122 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 PIN assign PIN name Description

1 AC_L AC input

2 AC_N

● DC output connector (CN4)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 +5V1 Power

2 GND 5 V ground

3 +5V2 Power

4 GND 5 V ground

5 +24V1 Power

6 GND 24 V ground

7 +24V2 Power

8 GND 24 V ground

9 +24V3 Power

● Signal Connector (CN3)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 GND Active Low

2 24 V On/Off

3 GND

Fuser drive assembly

Learn about the fuser drive assembly.

This board supplies voltage to the fuser AC, heater, and main board.

Fuser drive assembly 123

 Figure 1-90 Fuser drive board

1 Option Heater

2 Fuser Lamp

3 Fuser drive assembly I/F

4 LVPS (Type 5H)

5 Main Switch

6 AC Inlet

7 Option Heater Switch

8 LVPS (Type 4)

9/10 Reactor

Information

110 V 220 V

Part number JC44-00235B JC44-00236B

Part name Fuser Drive Board 110V Fuser Drive Board 220V

High voltage power supply (HVPS) board

Learn about the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).

The HVPS board generates 15 high-voltage channels, including ITHV (4), MHV (4), DEV (4), FUSER, SAW, and
2THV(+/-).

124 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-91 HVPS PCA

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 DETECT

2 PWM_ITHV_C PWM signal

3 PWM_ITHV_K PWM signal

4 PWM_ITHV_M PWM signal

5 READ_ITHV_C Output voltage

6 PWM_ITHV_Y PWM signal

7 READ_ITHV_K Output voltage

8 READ_ITHV_M Output voltage

9 PWM_FUSEBIAS PWM signal

10 READ_ITHV_Y Output voltage

11 PWM_SAW PWM signal

12 READ_MHV_Y Output voltage

13 PWM_THV2_MINUS PWM signal

14 READ_MHV_M Output voltage

15 PWM_THV2_P_CV PWM signal

16 READ_MHV_C Output voltage

High voltage power supply (HVPS) board 125

 PIN assign PIN name Description

17 READ_THV2 Output voltage

18 PWM_MHV_Y PWM signal

19 PWM_DEVE_DC_K PWM signal

20 PWM_MHV_M PWM signal

21 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_K PWM signal

22 PWM_MHV_C PWM signal

23 PWM_DEVE_DC_C PWM signal

24 PWM_MHV_K PWM signal

25 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_C PWM signal

26 PWM_THV2_P_CC PWM signal

27 PWM_DEVE_DC_M PWM signal

28 THV2_CV_SELECT PWM signal

29 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_M PWM signal

30 NC

31 PWM_DEVE_DC_Y PWM signal

32 READ_MHV_K Output voltage

33 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_Y PWM signal

34 PWM_DEVE_AC_VFREQ PWM signal

35 DETECT

CN2

1 24 V Input voltage

2 24 V Input voltage

3 24 V Input voltage

4 3.3 V Input voltage

5 GND GND

6 GND GND

7 GND GND

8 READ_HVPS_24 Output voltage

9 nEN_DEVE_AC_Y nEN signal

10 nEN_DEVE_AC_M nEN signal

11 nEN_DEVE_AC_C nEN signal

12 nEN_DEVE_AC_K nEN signal

Connections

CN3 ITHV Y/M/C/K Output voltage

CN5 2THV ± Output voltage

126 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 PIN assign PIN name Description

CN6 MHV Y Output voltage

CN7 MHV M Output voltage

CN8 MHV C Output voltage

CN9 MHV K Output voltage

CN10 DEVE Y Output voltage

CN11 DEVE M Output voltage

CN12 DEVE C Output voltage

CN13 DEVE K Output voltage

CN4

1 FUSER_BIAS Output voltage

2 SAW_PLATE Output voltage

Specification

● Input voltage: DC 24 V, 3.3 V

● Output voltage:

– MHV Y/M/C/K: -1395 V

– DEVE DC Y/M/C/K: -606 V

– DEV AC Y/M/C/K: Vpp 920 V

– THV1 Y/M/C/K: 45.5 uA

– THV2+(CV): 2020 V

– THV2+(CC): 25.5 uA

– THV2–: –1310 V

– FUSER: 998 V

– SAW: -998 V

Information

● Part number: JC44-00240B

● Part name: HVPS

Eraser PCA
Learn about the eraser PCA.

The eraser PCA has one LED. The LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the drum after
printing.

Eraser PCA 127

 Figure 1-92 Eraser PCA

Information

● Part name: PCA-ERASER

Fuser PCA
Learn about the fuser PCA.

The Fuser PCA includes a CRU memory for Fuser Unit Life Cycle counting. The Fuser PCA provides a connection
interface for the pressure sensor.

Figure 1-93 Fuser PCA

1 Fuser EEPROM, Pressure Sensor I/F

2 Pressure Sensor (Not used)

Information

● Part number:

● Part name: PBA-FUSER

Waste Sensor PCA

Learn about the waste sensor PCA.

The waste sensor PCA detects the waste toner level inside the toner collection unit.

128 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-94 Waste sensor PCA

Information

● Part name: WASTE SENSOR RX

Paper Size sensor PCA

The paper size sensor PCA is used for detecting the size of the paper in the tray.

Figure 1-95 Paper size sensor PCA

Flow document feeder PCA

Learn about the flow document feeder PCA.

The flow document feeder PCA uses the R5F562TAEDFP (100 MHz Main Clock) for controlling the flow document
feeder and interfaces with the main board through UART.

The flow document feeder PCA has three motor driver ICs to control the BLDC/step motor and controls one BLDC
motor, two step motors, one clutch, one fan, and 11 sensors.

Paper Size sensor PCA 129

 Figure 1-96 Flow document feeder PCA

1 Scan Position 1/2, Registration, Feed Sensor

2 Pickup, Paper Detect, Cover Open Sensor

3 BLDC Motor, Registration Motor, Pickup Clutch

4 Output Sensor, Fan

5 Paper Length 1/2, Width Sensor

6 Scan Joint PCA

Information

● Part number: JC92-02964A

● Part name: Flow PCA - ADF HIC (GX only)

● Part number: JC92-02964B

● Part name: Flow ADF-PCA (sGX)

● Part number: JC92-02962A

● Part name: LX (du models) ADF PCA

Scan joint PCA

The scan joint PCA has a Bipolar Step Motor driving IC and interfaces with the WLED, APS sensor (1, 2), cover open
sensor (1, 2), home position sensor, and main board.

The scan joint PCA also functions as the relay board to interface with the ADF I/F and power board.

130 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-97 Scan joint PCA

1 WLED IF PCA

2 MAIN PCA

3 Cover Open 2, Home Sensor

4 ADF/flow ADF PCA

5 Image Scanner Motor

Information

● Part number: JC92-02781A

● Part name: PCA-SCAN JOINT

CCDM PCA
The CCDM PCA is used in the scanner unit and converts the reflected light from an original document to electrical
signals. The reflected light from an original document is converted to three-color analog signals: red, green, and
blue. The ADC converts each analog signal to digital. For a high speed data transmission, the digital data signal is
converted to a LVDS format with serialization. The CCDM PCA includes the CCD, ADC, Logic IC, and so on.

Figure 1-98 CCDM PCA

1 MAIN PCA

Information

● Part number:

● Part name: PBA-CCDM

CCDM PCA 131

 WLED IF PCA
The WLED IF PCA interfaces with the WLED and sensors inside the Image Scanner unit.

Figure 1-99 WLED IF PCA

1 APS1, APS2 Sensor

2 Cover Open1 Sensor

3 SCAN JOINT PCA

4 WLED PCA

Information

● Part number:

● Part name: PBA-WLED IF

WLED PCA
The WLED PCA consists of two WLEDs used as scanner light.

Figure 1-100 WLED PCA

1 WLED PCA

Information

● Part number:

● Part name: PBA-WLED

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)

Learn about the dual cassette feeder.

132 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

The DCF is an optional device that stores additional paper.

Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)

Figure 1-101 Paper feeding system

Tray number Roller number Roller name Function

4 R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.

4 R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed

roller.

4 R3 Reverse (separation) Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

roller

4 R4 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the feed roller.

4 R5 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

4/5 R6 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the basic

machine.

4/5 R7 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

5 R8 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.

5 R9 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed

roller.

5 R10 Reverse (separation) Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

roller

5 R11 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the feed roller.

5 R12 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 133

 Paper path

Figure 1-102 Paper path

Electrical parts locations, descriptions, and functions

Figure 1-103 Electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions

Tray number Callouts Description Function

4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in Tray 3.

134 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Tray number Callouts Description Function

4 S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting-up of

Tray 3.

4 S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and

R4-5.

4/5 S4 Path sensor Detects paper passing through R6-R7.

5 S5 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in Tray 4.

5 S6 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting-up of

Tray 4.

5 S7 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R9-R10 and

R11-12.

4 S8 Paper size sensor Detects tray insertion and paper size

in Tray 3.

5 S9 Paper size sensor Detects tray insertion and paper size

in Tray 4.

4/5 SW1 Side door open switch Detects opening of right cover.

4 M1 Tray 3 pickup motor

5 M2 Tray 4 pickup motor

4/5 M3 Tray feed motor

PCA connection

Figure 1-104 PCA connection and DCF

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 135

 Connector number Item number Connection

CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F

CN801 2 PICK/LIFT4 MOTOR I/F

CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F

CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/LCT HOME I/F

CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK

CN301 6 MAIN I/F

CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F

CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F

CN802 9 SENSOR PAPER SIZE

CN901 10 HCI INNER DRAWER

CN302 11 SUB I/F

CN1101 12 BBP I/F

CN501 13 T4 SENSOR

CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

High capacity input tray (HCI)

Learn the functions and specifications of the high capacity input tray.

Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)

Figure 1-105 Paper feeding system

Tray number Roller number Roller name Function

4 R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.

136 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Tray number Roller number Roller name Function

4 R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed

roller.

4 R3 Reverse (separation) Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

roller

4 R4 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the feed roller.

4 R5 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

4 R6 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the basic

machine.

4 R7 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

Paper path

Figure 1-106 HCI paper path

Electrical parts locations, descriptions, and functions

Figure 1-107 Electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions

High capacity input tray (HCI) 137

 Tray number Callouts Description Function

3/4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in main tray.

3/4 S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting up of

main tray.

3/4 S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and

R4-5.

3/4 S4 Path sensor Detects paper passing through R6-R7.

3/4 S5 Tray insertion sensor Detects tray insertion.

3/4 S6 Knockup home sensor Detects home position of knock-plate.

3/4 S7 Main tray level sensor 1 Detects paper residual paper quantity
in main tray.

3/4 S8 Main tray level sensor 2 Detects paper residual paper quantity
in main tray.

3/4 S9 Shift tray no paper sensor Detects paper empty in sub tray.

3/4 S10 Shift tray level sensor 1 Detects paper residual quantity in sub
tray.

3/4 S11 Shift tray level sensor 2 Detects paper residual quantity in sub
tray.

3/4 S12 Shift plate home sensor Detects home position of shift plate.

3/4 S13 Shift plate end sensor Detects end position of shift plate.

3/4 S14 Solenoid home sensor Detects home position of solenoid.

3/4 SW1 Side door open switch Detects opening of solenoid.

3 M1 Tray pickup motor

3 M2 Tray feed motor

3 M3 Tray lift up motor

3 M4 Paper shift motor

3 A1 Solenoid

138 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

PCA connection

Figure 1-108 HCI PCA connection

Connector number Item number Connection

CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F

CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F

CN301 6 MAIN I/F

CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F

CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F

CN901 10 HCI INNER DRAWER

CN302 11 SUB I/F

CN1101 12 BBP I/F

CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

High capacity input tray (HCI) 139

 Side high capacity input tray (sHCI)
Learn the functions and specifications of the side high capacity input tray.

Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)

Figure 1-109 Paper feeding system

Roller number Roller name Function

R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.

R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed roller.

R3 Reverse (separation) roller Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

R4 Idle roller Transports paper to the feed roller.

R5 Feed roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

140 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Paper path

Figure 1-110 sHCI paper path

Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) 141

 Electrical parts locations, descriptions, and functions

Figure 1-111 sHCI electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions

Callouts Description Function

S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in tray.

S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting up of main tray.

S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and R4-5.

S4 Paper level sensor 1 Detects paper residual paper quantity in tray.

S5 Paper level sensor 2 Detects paper residual paper quantity in tray.

S6 Install sensor 1 Detects installation of SL-sHCI501S to the

basic machine.

S7 Install sensor 2 Detects installation of SL-sHCI501S to the

basic machine.

SW1 Top door open switch Detects opening of the top door.

M1 Tray pickup motor Drives the pickup roller.

M2 Tray feed motor Drives the feed roller

M3 Tray lift up motor Lifts up the tray.

142 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

PCA connection

Figure 1-112 sHCI PCA connection

Connector number Item number Connection

CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F

CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/sHCI HOME I/F

CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK

CN301 6 MAIN I/F

CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F

CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F

CN1101 12 BBP I/F

CN501 13 T4 SENSOR

CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) 143

 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement.

HP service and support

Learn about HP access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners go to partner.hp.com, and then use the steps below to access the HP Web-based Interactive
Search Engine (WISE).

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners

1. Select Services & Support (near the top of the screen).

2. Under Services Delivery, select Technical Support.

3. Select Technical Documentation.

Find information about the following topics

● Service manuals

● Service advisories

● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Install and configure

● Printer specifications

● Warranty and regulatory information

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

144 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of ow to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP] search).

Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 2-1 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your computer, enter
the printer IP address or host name in the address/URL field. The
EWS contains a link to the HP SureSupply web site, which provides
options for purchasing Original HP supplies.

Order parts by authorized service providers 145

 Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part is
orderable.

How to use parts lists and diagrams

Learn how to use the parts lists and diagrams.

The figures in this chapter show the major sub-assemblies in the printer and their component parts. A parts list
table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. The table lists the item number, the associated part number,
and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a field replacement unit (FRU).

NOTE: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical parts, pay careful
attention to the voltage that is listed in the part description. Doing so will make sure that the selected part
number is for the correct printer model.

NOTE: The abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as a PCA
might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors.

ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an
ESD-sensitive assembly.

Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Service approach
Learn more about the service approach.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when assembling and disassembling

● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage, and
current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the machine, circuit
overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause the
printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This printer
contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short circuit or
electric shock.

146 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is disassembled, dust
might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts inside
the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to overheating
and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCAs

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when handling
insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or lamps,
as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the correct
screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in their original
positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when releasing
them. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

Before performing service

Learn what to do before performing service.

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Remove any finishing devices and the side HCI, if they are installed.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Before performing service 147

 ● Remove the toner cartridges, if needed.

After performing service

Learn what to do after performing service.

● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.

1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print quality
defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Copy-quality test
Learn about the copy-quality test.

1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder, print a copy job, and then verify the results.

2. Place the configuration page on the flatbed glass, print a copy job, and then verify the results

Fax-quality test
Learn about the fax-quality test.

1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder.

2. Type a valid fax number, and send the fax job.

3. Verify that the send quality and the receive quality meet expectations.

Parts removal order

For procedures and/or steps that require identifying the right, left, or rear side of the printer, face the front of the
printer for correct orientation.

148 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Maintenance
Learn about preventive maintenance and printer cleaning procedures.

Cleaning the paper dust stick

Learn about cleaning the paper dust stick.

The paper dust stick needs to be cleaned after a specified number of pages are printed. A clean the paper dust
stick message will appear. This is when the paper dust stick must be cleaned. Use the following procedure to
complete this task.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 2-1 Open the front door

2. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

Figure 2-2 Remove the TCU

Maintenance 149
 3. Pull out the paper dust stick.

Figure 2-3 Remove paper dust stick

4. Remove the paper dust.

Figure 2-4 Remove the paper dust

5. Insert the paper dust stick back into the slot.

Figure 2-5 Install the paper dust stick

150 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 6. Insert the toner collection unit (TCU) until it locks in place on each side.

Figure 2-6 Install the TCU

7. Close the front door. Make sure the cover is securely closed. If the message still appears, repeat Steps 3 and
4.

Figure 2-7 Close the front door

Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX)

Learn about cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX).

Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX) 151
 1. Open the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-8 Open document feeder unit

2. Clean the document feeder white bar and CIS using a lint-free cloth.

Figure 2-9 Clean document feeder white bar

CIS

Simplex
White bar

Duplex
White bar

Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX)
Learn about cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX).

152 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Open the document feeder, peel back the white backing , and then release the green tab.

Figure 2-10 Peel back the white backing and release one tab

2. Open the access door. Clean the simplex white bar (callout 1), the CIS (callout 2), and the duplex white bar
(callout 3) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.

Figure 2-11 Clean flow document feeder white bar

Cleaning the scanner glass

Learn about cleaning the scan glass.

Cleaning the scanner glass 153

 ▲ Open the document feeder. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.

Figure 2-12 Clean the scanner glass

Main parts
Learn about the printer main parts.

Main assemblies
View the main assemblies exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main assembly
Parts diagram and parts list for the main assembly.

154 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-13 Main assembly

49

30

43

Table 2-2 Main assembly

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC90-01610A Cassette tray 2 1 Not applicable

2 JC90-01611A Cassette tray 3 1 Not applicable

5 JC44-00240B HVPS 24V 1 Removal and replacement: High

voltage power supply (HVPS)
board on page 162

6 JC97-04863A Laser scanner unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Laser scanner assembly on
page 165

7 JC93-01414A Fan type 8 2 Removal and replacement:

Laser scanner fan assembly on
page 170

8 JC96-11639A HP LaserJet yellow developer unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer unit on page 173

Main assembly 155

 Table 2-2 Main assembly (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

9 JC96-11640A HP LaserJet magenta developer unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer unit on page 173

10 JC96-11641A HP LaserJet cyan developer unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer unit on page 173

11 JC96-11642A HP LaserJet blk developer unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer unit on page 173

12 JC93-01026B Paper dust brush 1 Removal and replacement:

Paper dust brush on page 178

13 JC98-05425A Image transfer belt assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
unit on page 185

13-1 JC93-01377A ITB cleaner blade 1 Removal and replacement:

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
cleaner on page 181

15 JC97-04907A Image scanner assembly (flat bed) 1 Removal and replacement:

Image scanner assembly
(flatbed) on page 194

16 JC63-05410A White backing (LX) 1 Removal and replacement: ADF

white backing (LX) on page 207

16 JC63-05795A White backing (GX) 1 Removal and replacement: ADF

white backing (GX) on page 210

17 JC97-05074A ADF LX whole unit 1 Removal and replacement: ADF

whole unit (LX) on page 707

17 JC97-04955A Flow ADF-GX 1 Not applicable

17 JC97-04956A Non-Flow ADF-sGX 1 Not applicable

18 JC90-01369A Exit assembly 1 Removal and replacement: Exit

unit on page 217

18-1 C90-01374A Exit assembly, second 1 Not applicable

18-2 JC90-01370A Exit assembly, first 1 Not applicable

19 JC82-00483A 220V fuser assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser unit on page 225

19 JC82-00477A 110V fuser assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser unit on page 225

22 JC95-02092A Right door assembly 1 Removal and replacement: Right

door on page 212

29 JC44-00236B Fuser drive board, 220V 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser drive board on page 233

29 JC44-00235B Fuser drive board, 110V 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser drive board on page 233

Not shown JC39-02569A Wire harness FDB interface to main PCA 1 Removal and replacement:
Fuser drive board on page 233

156 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-2 Main assembly (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

30 JC44-00250A LVPS 220V Type 5H 1 Removal and replacement: Low

voltage power supply (LVPS)
type 5H on page 237

30 JC44-00249A LVPS 110V Type 5H 1 Removal and replacement: Low

voltage power supply (LVPS)
type 5H on page 237

34-1 JC31-00161A Fan type 7 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser fan on page 240

38 X3A92-67926 Toner collection unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Toner collection unit on page
159

40 JC61-07088A Return guide 1 Not applicable

41 JC97-02276A Main PCA HDD bracket 1 Not applicable

42 5851-6712 Main PCA HDD 500GB 1 Removal and replacement:

Internal hard disk drive (HDD) on
page 245

43 Y1G22-67901 Tray Heater (110v) 1 Not applicable

43 Y1G22-67902 Tray Heater (220v) 1 Not applicable

49 JC82-00543A PCA-Main Board w/heat sink 1 Removal and replacement: Main

(E876z, board on page 249
E876dn
series)

5CM63-67001
(E876du
series)

Not shown B5L47-60101 Pulsar Control Panel 1 Removal and replacement:

Control panel on page 279

Not shown X3A92-60003 Formatter (du models) 1 Removal and replacement:

Formatter (du models) on page
271

Not shown X3A92-60001 Formatter 1 Removal and replacement:

Formatter on page 275

Not shown X3A62-60001 Accelerator PCA - Toast (GX ADF only) 1 Removal and replacement:
Accelerator board (GX ADF only)
on page 256

Not shown X3A92-60002 PCA-Island of Data (du models) 1 Removal and replacement:
Island of data (IOD; du models)
on page 259

Not shown X3A92-60002 PCA-Island of Data 1 Removal and replacement:

Island of data (IOD) on page 262

Not shown 5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500GB Kit (du models) 1 Removal and replacement:
Formatter hard disk drive (HDD;
du models) on page 265

Not shown 5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500GB Kit 1 Removal and replacement:
Formatter hard disk drive (HDD)
on page 268

Main assembly 157

 Table 2-2 Main assembly (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

Not shown L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500GB 1 Removal and replacement:

Formatter hard disk drive (HDD)
on page 268

Not shown B5L46-40014 Formatter HDD Cradle 1 Removal and replacement:

Formatter hard disk drive (HDD)
on page 268

Not shown T3U55-60001 Formatter HDD SATA Riser Module 1 Removal and replacement:
Formatter hard disk drive (HDD)
on page 268

Not shown B5L47-60102 US English Keyboard Assy 1 Removal and replacement:

Keyboard (z bundles) on page
282

Not shown B5L47-60103 UK English Keyboard Assy 1 Removal and replacement:

Keyboard (z bundles) on page
282

Not shown X3A92-67905 HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit 1 Removal and replacement:
Imaging drum unit on page 287

Not shown X3A92-67906 HP LaserJet CMY Imaging Drum Unit 1 Removal and replacement:
Imaging drum unit on page 287

Not shown B5L31-67902 Foreign interface harness 1 Install accessory: HP Foreign

interface harness (FIH) solution
on page 289

Not shown J8030-61001 Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit 1 Removal and replacement: NFC
Kit Installation on page 291

Not shown JC92-02969A PCA, front power switch 1 Removal and replacement:
Front power switch on page 298

Not shown JC31-00161A Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans (Type 7) 1 Removal and replacement: Low
voltage power supply (LVPS)
fans on page 301

Not shown JC44-00091D LVPS 110V Type 4 1 Removal and replacement: Low
voltage power supply (LVPS)
Type 4 on page 305

Not shown JC44-00092D LVPS 220V Type 4 1 Removal and replacement: Low
voltage power supply (LVPS)
Type 4 on page 305

Not shown JC39-02187A Lower tray connector 1 Removal and replacement:

Lower tray connector on page
309

Not shown JC31-00130A Developer fan 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer fan on page 312

Not shown JC90-01772B Bridge unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Bridge unit on page 317

Not shown JC27-00012A Inductor unit 110V 1 Removal and replacement:

Inductor unit on page 319

Not shown JC27-00009A Inductor unit 220V 1 Removal and replacement:

Inductor unit on page 319

158 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-2 Main assembly (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

Not shown JC93-01467A Switch Assy - Right Door 1 Removal and replacement: Right
door switch assembly on page
323

Not shown JC93-01063C Drive, pickup 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup drive unit 1 (Tray 2) on
page 331

Not shown JC93-00492A TCU sensor 1 Removal and replacement:

Toner collection unit (TCU)
sensors on page 335

Not shown JC93-01277A Assy- Engine Side Crum Connector 1 Removal and replacement:
CRUM connector on page 341

Not shown 0604-001393 Duplex 1 sensor (photo interrupter) 1 Removal and replacement:
Duplex 1 sensor (on the exit
unit) on page 348

Not shown 0604-001393 Exit 1 bin full sensor (photo interrupter) 1 Removal and replacement: Exit
1 bin full sensor (on the exit
unit) on page 357

Not shown 0604-001381 Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) 1 Removal and replacement:
Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2)
on page 368

Not shown 0604-001490 Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) 1 Removal and replacement:
Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1)
on page 376

Not shown JC39-02253A FFC cable, laser scanner unit 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02252A FFC Cable, HVPS 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-01202A Cable, SATA main HDD 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-01943A Cable, PWR main HDD 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC31-00154A Fan-type 3 24V LVPS/FDB 1 Not applicable

Not shown X3A92-60003 Formatter PCA-Obsidian Blue Angel 1 Not applicable

Not shown X3A62-60002 Accelerator PCA-toast Blue Angel 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02194A Wiring harness (output device) 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02252A HVPS FFC cable 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit

Learn how to remove and replace the toner collection unit (TCU).

View a video of how to remove and replace the TCU.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit 159

 Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-3 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A92-67926 HP Managed LJ Toner Collection Unit

Required tools

● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

1. Open the front cover.

160 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-14 Remove the TCU

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 161

 Removal and replacement: High voltage power supply (HVPS) board
Learn how to remove and replace the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board.

View a video of how to remove and replace the HVPS.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-4 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00240B HVPS 24V

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

162 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove the top left cover.

Figure 2-15 Top left cover

2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.

Figure 2-16 Remove the left cover

2. Remove the HVPS

Follow these steps to remove the HVPS.

Remove the left cover 163

 1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then release one retainer in the
center of the board (callout 3).

Figure 2-17 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

2. Tilt the board away from the printer, and then disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

Figure 2-18 Disconnect three connectors

3. If you are replacing the HVPS board, release two tabs and rotate the cover off of the board. Attach the cover
to the replacement part before installing.

Figure 2-19 Remove the HVPS cover

164 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Unpack the replacement assembly 165

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-5 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04863A Laser Scanner Unit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove the top left cover.

Figure 2-20 Top left cover

166 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.

Figure 2-21 Remove the left cover

2. Remove the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board

Follow these steps to remove the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board.

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then release one retainer in the
center of the board (callout 3).

Figure 2-22 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

Remove the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board 167

 2. Tilt the board away from the printer, and then disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

Figure 2-23 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove the laser scanner assembly

Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner assembly.

1. To remove the laser scanner fan and holder, disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws on the
fan holder.

Figure 2-24 Remove the laser scanner fan and holder

168 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove two screws, and then disconnect two in-line connectors on the left.

Figure 2-25 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors

3. Slide the laser scanner partially out of the printer (callout 1), and then disconnect two flat cables and one
connector on the left. One of the flat cable connectors is a zero insertion force (ZIF) connector. Open the
latch on the connector before removing the flat cable. After disconnecting the connectors, remove the laser
scanner assembly from the printer.

Figure 2-26 Laser scanner assembly

TIP: Align the locator pin on the back of the assembly with the opening in the printer sheet metal frame to
guide the assembly into place. The screw holes on the front of the assembly will line up with the screw
holes in the sheet metal when the assembly is correctly installed.

When reinstalling the laser scanner assembly, make sure that the flat cable that routes over the top of the
assembly does not become trapped under the assembly.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 169

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Laser scanner fan assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly fan.

View a video of how to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly fan.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

170 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-6 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01414A Fan Type 8

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove the top left cover.

Figure 2-27 Top left cover

Remove the left cover 171

 2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.

Figure 2-28 Remove the left cover

2. Remove the laser scanner assembly fan

Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner assembly fan.

▲ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the laser scanner assembly fan.

Figure 2-29 Remove the laser scanner assembly fan

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

172 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer unit

Learn how to remove and replace the developer unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the developer unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-7 Part information

Part number Part description

JC96-11642A HP LaserJet Blk Developer Unit

JC96-11641A HP LaserJet Cyan Developer Unit

Removal and replacement: Developer unit 173

 Table 2-7 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

JC96-11640A HP LaserJet Magenta Developer Unit

JC96-11639A HP LaserJet Yellow Developer Unit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the developer unit

Follow these steps to remove the developer unit.

IMPORTANT: Update the firmware to the latest version before replacing the developer unit.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

2. Remove the drum unit to the right of the developer to be replaced..

TIP: Also remove the adjacent drum unit to allow better access to the toner supply pipe.

174 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Rotate the reservoir shutter lever down to ensure it is closed..

Figure 2-30 Shutter open/close

4. Release the valve from the developer by rotating the valve side-to-side while pulling it firmly away from the
printer.

TIP: Make sure that the valve is fully installed on the developer before rotating it to the open position.

Figure 2-31 Release the toner collection valve

Remove the developer unit 175

 5. Reach to the top of the toner supply pipe, and then rotate it up.

Figure 2-32 Tilt toner supply pipe up

6. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the metal bracket
(callout 3).

TIP: Note the orientation of the bracket when reinstalling it.

Figure 2-33 Remove the metal bracket

TIP: Reinstall the bottom of the bracket first.

7. Hold the grip point of the developer unit and slide it away from the printer to remove it.

NOTE: Do not grip the toner collection unit connection when removing the developer unit.

Figure 2-34 Developer unit removal

TIP: Hold the toner supply pipe up and out of the way when reinstalling the developer unit.

176 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

3. Special installation instructions (Developer unit)

Also use the following special installation instructions.

1. Fill the empty replacement developer unit with developer powder prior to installation.

IMPORTANT: During filling, place the developer unit on sheets of paper or a disposable cover to catch any
spilled developer powder.

a. Unpack the developer unit and silver packet of developer powder from the kit box.

b. Open the developer unit cover.

CAUTION: Do not touch the silver roller.

c. Carefully open the developer packet, and then distribute the developer powder evenly into the
developer unit.

IMPORTANT: Before opening the packet, shake it three or four times. This prevents the developer
powder from scattering.

d. Close the developer unit cover.

e. Install the developer unit in the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 177

 2. Reset the firmware counter and initialize the toner concentration.

IMPORTANT: The front door must be open at the beginning of this procedure. Do not close the door until
instructed.

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

b. Select the Service menu.

c. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the service
access code.

d. Select the Service Tools menu.

e. On the Information tab, select the Supply Status menu.

f. Select Field Replacement Unit.

g. Select Development Unit (Developer) (CMYK).

h. Select the check box on the right side of the screen for the replaced developer unit.

i. Select Reset, to clear the counter and begin the toner concentration initialization.

j. Close the front door, wait for the toner concentration initialization process to complete, and then exit
service mode (touch the Home button).

Removal and replacement: Paper dust brush

Learn how to remove and replace the paper dust brush.

View a video of how to remove and replace the paper dust brush.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

178 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-8 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01026B Paper dust brush

Required tools

● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the toner collection unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-35 Remove the TCU

Remove the toner collection unit 179

 2. Remove the paper dust brush
Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

▲ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-36 Remove the paper dust brush

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

180 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner

Learn how to remove and replace the ITB cleaner blade.

View a video of how to remove and replace the ITB cleaner blade.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Unpack the replacement assembly 181

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-9 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01377A ITB cleaner blade

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the toner collection unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

182 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-37 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the ITB cleaner

Follow these steps to remove the ITB cleaner.

1. Loosen the screw securing the ITB cleaner.

NOTE: The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.

Figure 2-38 ITB screw location

2. Grasp the ITB cleaner housing, and pull it out of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not grasp the waste toner connector.

Use care when removing the ITB cleaner as loose toner might be present on the metal shelf along the side
of the cleaner.

Remove the ITB cleaner 183

 Figure 2-39 ITB cleaner removal

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

4. Special installation instructions: ITB cleaner

After the replacement cleaner is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

1. Select the Service menu.

184 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the access code
(04087617).

3. Select the Service Tools menu.

4. Select the Supply Status menu.

5. Select Field Replacement Unit.

6. Select ITB Cleaner.

7. Select Transfer Cleaning Unit.

8. Select Reset.

Removal and replacement: Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit

Learn how to remove and replace the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the ITB.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-10 Part information

Part number Part description

JC98-05425A HP Laserjet Image Transfer Belt Assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Removal and replacement: Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit 185

 For replacement ITB installations: Perform a Setting Standard Tone procedure. See Setting Standard Tone on
page 190.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-40 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the ITB cleaner

Follow these steps to remove the ITB cleaner.

1. Loosen the screw securing the ITB cleaner.

NOTE: The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.

186 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-41 ITB screw location

2. Grasp the ITB cleaner housing, and pull it out of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not grasp the waste toner connector.

Use care when removing the ITB cleaner as loose toner might be present on the metal shelf along the side
of the cleaner.

Figure 2-42 ITB cleaner removal

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

3. Remove the ITB

Follow these steps to remove the ITB.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the ITB 187

 2. Remove the cable from the retainer, and then disconnect one connector. Slide the ITB latch toward the front
of the printer to release the coupled drive.

Figure 2-43 Disconnect one connector and slide the latch

3. Remove two screws securing the ITB unit.

TIP: Use a magnetized screwdriver to prevent the screws from falling into the printer..

Figure 2-44 Remove two screws

4. Pull the ITB unit partially out of the printer, and then lift it up and out of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not touch the ITB belt and be careful not to damage the it by hitting it on the door during
removal.

188 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-45 Remove the ITB

5. While pushing the color plane registration (CPR) shutter toward the rear of the printer, clean the three CPR
sensors with a damp, lint-free cloth.

Figure 2-46 Clean the CPR sensors

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 189

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

5. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

ITB install and firmware counter reset

NOTE: If the ITB was removed to gain access to another assembly, follow step 1 and skip step 2.

If a replacement ITB is installed, follow both steps 1 and 2.

1. Installing an ITB: Align the arrow on the gear with the arrowhead on the ITB frame.

Figure 2-47 Align arrows

2. ITB replacement installations: Follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

b. Select the Service menu.

c. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the access code
(04087617).

d. Select the Service Tools menu.

e. Select the Supply Status menu.

f. Select Field Replacement Unit.

g. Select ITB (Image Transfer Belt).

h. Select Transfer Belt.

i. Select Reset.

6. Setting Standard Tone

Follow the steps below if a replacement ITB is installed.

190 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

For a replacement ITB installation (or after cleaning the CTD sensor), perform a Setting Standard Tone procedure.

Support Tools > Service > Service Tools > Diagnostics > Image Management > Setting Standard Tone

1. From the control panel, select Support Tools and then Service.

2. Enter the Service PIN ID.

● 04087617

3. Select Service Tools.

Figure 2-48 Service Tools

4. Select Diagnostics.

Figure 2-49 Diagnostics

Setting Standard Tone 191

 5. Select Image Management.

Figure 2-50 Image Management

6. Select Setting Standard Tone.

Figure 2-51 Setting Standard Tone (1 of 4)

7. Load Tray 2 with paper, and then select Start.

NOTE: Make sure that the paper is loaded for short-edge first (SEF) feeding into the printer.

192 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-52 Setting Standard Tone (2 of 4)

8. A color patch page prints.

Figure 2-53 Setting Standard Tone (3 of 4)

9. Position the color patch page on the flatbed glass as shown below, and then select Start.

NOTE: If when the process is completed the results are not satisfactory, use the Cancel Setting Standard
Tone menu item to return to the default value.

Support Tools > Service > Service Tools > Diagnostics > Image Management > Cancel Setting Standard
Tone

Setting Standard Tone 193

 Figure 2-54 Setting Standard Tone (4 of 4)

Removal and replacement: Image scanner assembly (flatbed)

Learn how to remove and replace the image scanner assembly.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the image scanner assembly.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

194 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-11 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04907A Scanner whole unit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-55 Remove the formatter cover

Remove the formatter cover 195

 2. Remove the upper rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-56 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (LX).

1. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector cover
(callout 2).

Figure 2-57 Remove the document feeder connector cover

196 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 2-58 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

4. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.

Figure 2-59 Release the document feeder hinge screws

Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX) 197

 5. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.

Figure 2-60 Lift and remove the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4. Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).

1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-61 Remove document feeder connector cover

198 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness
from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 2-62 Remove the cable choke

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one grounding
wire.

Figure 2-63 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a full
90°.

IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 199

 Figure 2-64 Alignment marks

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 2-65 Remove screws

200 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-66 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

5. Remove the control panel bezel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel bezel.

1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-67 Remove the control panel bezel.

2. Place the control panel in the upright position.

Remove the control panel bezel 201

 3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

6. Remove the control panel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

1. Place the control panel in the upright position.

2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws on the
control-panel frame.

Figure 2-68 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors

3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.

Figure 2-69 Remove the USB interconnect cable

202 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control panel.

Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control panel.

7. Remove the keyboard (z bundles)

Follow these steps to remove the keyboard (z bundles).

Keyboard bundles only. For all other models, skip this step.

1. Disconnect one FFC.

Figure 2-70 Disconnect one FFC

2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.

Figure 2-71 Remove the control-panel keyboard

Remove the keyboard (z bundles) 203

 8. Remove the Image scanner assembly (flat bed)
Follow these steps to remove the Image scanner assembly (flat bed).

1. Remove six screw-caps and six screws. It might be necessary to use leverage near the left hinge and then
pull the cover toward the back.

Figure 2-72 Remove screw-caps and screws and release scan-front cover

2. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.

Figure 2-73 Release scan-left cover

204 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Remove three screw-caps and three screws (callout 1). Release the scan-right cover.

Figure 2-74 Remove scan-right cover

2
1

NOTE: At the front of the scanner, remove the bracket (callout 2) and install it on the replacement scanner
whole unit.

4. Disconnect the two scan cables and one FFC at the top of the main board.

Figure 2-75 Disconnect scan cables

Remove the Image scanner assembly (flat bed) 205

 5. Remove three screws from the left.

Figure 2-76 Remove screws

6. Remove two screws from the right.

Figure 2-77 Remove screws

7. Lift up and release the image scanner unit.

Figure 2-78 Lift up and release image scanner unit

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

206 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF white backing (LX).

This document provides the procedures to remove the white backing assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder white backing (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX) 207

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-12 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05410A ADF white backing (LX)

Required tools

● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder cover.

2. Peel the white backing away to remove.

IMPORTANT: Remove all the tape and foam from the bottom of the document feeder.

3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.

4. Peel the adhesive tape backing off the new white backing.

208 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.

Figure 2-79 Close the document feeder cover

6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.

Figure 2-80 Smooth the white backing

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 209

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (GX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF white backing (GX ADF).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder white backing (GX ADF).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

210 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-13 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05795A ADF white backing (GX ADF)

Required tools

● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the white backing

Follow these steps to remove the white backing.

1. Open the document feeder cover.

2. Peel the white backing away to remove.

3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.

4. Replace any damaged or missing hook-and-loop fasteners by positioning them on the new white backing.

5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.

Remove the white backing 211

 6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.

Figure 2-81 Smooth the white backing

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door

Learn how to remove and replace the right door.

212 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the right door.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-14 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02092A Right door assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 213

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-82 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-83 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

214 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-84 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-85 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 215

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-86 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-87 Remove the right door

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

216 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit unit

Learn how to remove and replace the exit unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the exit unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-15 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01369A Exit unit

Removal and replacement: Exit unit 217

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-88 Remove four screws

218 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-89 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-90 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Remove the right door 219

 Figure 2-91 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-92 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

220 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-93 Remove the right door

3. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-94 Remove the front top inner cover

4. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 221

 Figure 2-95 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-96 Remove the front power cover

5. Remove the top right cover

Follow these steps to remove the top right cover.

222 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the printer
to remove it.

Figure 2-97 Remove the top right cover

6. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

1. Open the right door.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-98 Fuser unit screw locations

3. Pull out the fuser unit.

CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of getting
burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

Remove the fuser unit 223

 Figure 2-99 Fuser unit removal

7. Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.

1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-100 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws

2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.

Figure 2-101 Remove the exit unit

224 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

8. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser unit

Learn how to remove and replace the fuser unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser unit.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Unpack the replacement assembly 225

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-16 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A73-60016 HP LaserJet 110V fuser assembly

X3A73-60017 HP LaserJet 220V fuser assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

1. Open the right door.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-102 Fuser unit screw locations

226 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Pull out the fuser unit.

CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of getting
burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

Figure 2-103 Fuser unit removal

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

3. Install the fuser support brackets

Follow these steps to install the fuser support brackets.

NOTE: Installing the fuser support brackets is only required if the fuser PEM nut is damaged.

Unpack the replacement assembly 227

 If the PEM nut separates from the printer frame, a service part for replacing this fastener is required. The
replacement parts are two brackets that support the fuser unit in the place of the PEM nut.

Figure 2-104 PEM nut

Table 2-17 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A76-67002 SVC AS-Bracket repair

You will receive two brackets, shown below, to install in the fuser cavity.

Figure 2-105 Fuser support brackets

228 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove five screws to remove the two covers shown below. Removing the covers reveals the mounting
points for the support brackets.

Figure 2-106 Remove covers

2. Locate the left bracket mounting point (callout 1) and the right bracket mounting point (callout 2).

Figure 2-107 Fuser support mounting points

2
1

Install the fuser support brackets 229

 3. Line up the left support bracket (part number X3A76-00005) to the corresponding mounting point holes, as
shown below, and then fasten the bracket to the frame with four screws.

Figure 2-108 Install the left bracket

230 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Line up the right support bracket (part number X3A76-00004) to the corresponding mounting point holes,
as shown below, and then fasten the bracket to the frame with four screws.

Figure 2-109 Install the right bracket

Install the fuser support brackets 231

 5. Install the fuser, and then confirm that the printer works correctly.

Figure 2-110 Install the fuser

6. Reinstall the two covers by fastening the five screws.

NOTE: The brackets feature lines for taking apart the legs. You can tear off partial sections if needed. Use
metal tools to remove them.

NOTE: Verify that the brackets are installed as shown below. The two brackets are not interchangeable.

232 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Fuser drive board
Learn how to remove and replace the fuser drive board.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser drive board.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-18 Part information

Part number part description

JC44-00235B Fuser drive board 110V

Removal and replacement: Fuser drive board 233

 Table 2-18 Part information (continued)

Part number part description

JC44-00236B Fuser drive board 220V

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-111 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

234 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-112 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 2-113 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the fuser drive board

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive board.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

Remove the LVPS cover 235

 NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.

▲ Disconnect twelve connectors and release one retainer on the lower left. Remove four screws, and then
remove the fuser drive board.

TIP: Two of the connectors (callout 1) can be mistakenly switched and connected to the wrong connector
on the fuser drive board. If this happens, the printer will not power on. Make sure that the cables are
installed in the correct positions.

Figure 2-114 Fuser drive board

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

236 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Low voltage power supply (LVPS) type 5H
Learn how to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) Type 5.

View a video of how to remove and replace the LVPS Type 5.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-19 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00250A LVPS 220V Type 5H

JC44-00249A LVPS 110V Type 5H

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Low voltage power supply (LVPS) type 5H 237
 1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-115 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-116 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

238 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 2-117 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the LVPS type 5H

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS type 5H.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board use retainers. Be sure to release the retainer before attempting
to disconnect the connector.

▲ Disconnect all connectors. Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS type 5H.

Figure 2-118 LVPS type 5H

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the LVPS type 5H 239

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser fan

Learn how to remove and replace the fuser fan.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fuse fan.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

240 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-20 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00161A Fan, type 7

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-119 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 241

 ▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-120 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-121 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

242 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Release the cables from two retainers (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove
three screws.

Figure 2-122 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

1
2

2. Lift the LVPS board and cage slightly away from the printer, and disconnect one connector behind the cage.
Remove the LVPS board and cage.

Figure 2-123 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove the fuser fan

Follow these steps to remove the fuser fan.

Remove the fuser fan 243

 1. Release the cables (callout 1) from the cable guides (callout 2), and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-124 Release the harness and remove three screws

2. Pull the fuser fan housing slightly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-125 Disconnect one connector

3. Optional step: For a replacement fan, release five tabs along the edges of the fan housing. If you are
removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.

Figure 2-126 Release five tabs

244 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Optional step:For a replacement fan, separate the fan housing, and then remove the fuser fan. If you are
removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the housing and install the replacement fan in the
same orientation.

Figure 2-127 Remove the fuser fan

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Internal hard disk drive (HDD)

Learn how to remove and replace the internal hard-disk drive (installed beneath the rear-exit cover).

Unpack the replacement assembly 245

 View a video of how to remove and replace the internal hard-disk drive.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-21 Part information

Part number Part description

L41606-011 Main PCA HDD 500 GB

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

246 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-128 Remove the front top inner cover

2. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-129 Remove the exit cover

3. Remove the HDD

Follow these steps to remove the HDD.

Remove the exit cover 247

 1. Remove four screws, and then release the HDD cover.

Figure 2-130 Remove the HDD cover

2. Remove four screws, disconnect the HDD cable, and then remove the HDD with its holder.

Figure 2-131 Remove the HDD

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

248 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main board

Learn how to remove and replace the main board.

View a video of how to remove and replace the main board.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-22 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00543A Main PCA for E876z, E876dn series

5CM63-67001 MainPCA for E876du series

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Main board 249

 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-132 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

250 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-133 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-134 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

Remove the upper rear cover 251

 ▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-135 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-136 Remove one screw

252 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet metal
cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-137 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-138 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main board

Follow these steps to remove the main board.

Remove the main board 253

 1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector.

IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the cable
away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.

Figure 2-139 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 1) are zero insertion
force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables. Remove the MSOK
board (callout 2) and install it on the replacement main board. Remove nine screws, and then remove the
main board.

IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main board in
the correct orientation in order for the printer to function. The MSOK chip is extremely difficult to replace if it
is lost or damaged.

IMPORTANT: A shade Test for the ADF must be completed after replacing the ADF unit or the Main board.

Figure 2-140 Remove the main board

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

254 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

Main board

1. When reinstalling the MSOK board, note the dashed outline (callout 1) on the main board. When the MSOK
board is installed correctly, it fits within this outline.

Figure 2-141 Position of MSOK board

2. Make sure that the MSOK board is installed correctly on the replacement main board.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 255

 Figure 2-142 Install the MSOK board

3. When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF connector before
closing the latch to secure the cable.

Figure 2-143 Install the flat cable

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Accelerator board (GX ADF only)

Learn how to remove and replace the accelerator board.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

256 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the accelerator board.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-23 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A62-60002 Accelerator PCA

NOTE: An accelerator PCA is only installed on some early models during original release. This has been
removed from all new models.

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Removal and replacement: Accelerator board (GX ADF only) 257

 Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-144 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the accelerator board

Follow these steps to remove the accelerator board.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

▲ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one connector,
release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the formatter by the
edges.

NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.

IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.

258 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-145 Remove the accelerator PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD; du models)

Learn how to remove and replace the IOD (du bundles).

View a video of how to remove and replace the IOD (du models).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 259

 Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-24 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A92-60002 PCA-Island of Data (du models)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver withs a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

260 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-146 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the island of data (IOD; du models)

Follow these steps to remove the island of data (IOD; du models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

▲ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the IOD.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Figure 2-147 Remove the IOD (du models)

Remove the island of data (IOD; du models) 261

 3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Island of Data (IOD).

View a video of how to remove and replace the Island of Data (IOD).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

262 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-25 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A92-60002 PCA-Island of Data

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 263

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-148 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the island of data (IOD)

Follow these steps to remove the island of data (IOD).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

▲ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the IOD.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Figure 2-149 Remove the IOD

264 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter hard disk drive (HDD; du models)

Learn how to remove and replace the HDD (du models).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the HDD (du models).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

Unpack the replacement assembly 265

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-26 Part information

Part number Part description

L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500 GB (du models)

Required tools

● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

266 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-150 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models).

▲ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Figure 2-151 Remove the HDD (du models)

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models) 267

 3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter hard disk drive (HDD)

Learn how to remove and replace the HDD.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the HDD.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

268 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-27 Part information

Part number Part description

L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500 GB

Required tools

● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 269

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-152 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

▲ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Figure 2-153 Remove the HDD

270 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter (du models)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the formatter (du models).

View a video of how to remove and replace the formatter (du models).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

Unpack the replacement assembly 271

 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-28 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A92-60003 Formatter PCA (du models)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver withs a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

272 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-154 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models).

▲ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Figure 2-155 Remove the HDD (du models)

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models) 273

 3. Remove the formatter PCA (du models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA (du models).

▲ Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter board, remove seven screws, and then remove the
formatter PCA.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter and the main PCA at the same time. Replace one component,
turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Figure 2-156 Remove the formatter PCA (du models)

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

274 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the formatter.

View a video of how to remove and replace the formatter.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-29 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A92-60001 Formatter PCA

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

Removal and replacement: Formatter 275

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-157 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the accelerator board

Follow these steps to remove the accelerator board.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

▲ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one connector,
release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the formatter by the
edges.

NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.

IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.

276 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-158 Remove the accelerator PCA

3. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

▲ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Figure 2-159 Remove the HDD

4. Remove the formatter PCA

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 277

 ▲ Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter board, remove seven screws, and then remove the
formatter PCA.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter and the main PCA at the same time. Replace one component,
turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Figure 2-160 Remove the formatter PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

278 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Control panel

Learn how to remove and replace the control panel.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the control panel.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-30 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L47-60101 Control panel

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

Removal and replacement: Control panel 279

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Verify that the control panel illuminates and displays information while the printer is initializing. Verify control
panel functionality after initialization.

1. Remove the control panel bezel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel bezel.

1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-161 Remove the control panel bezel.

2. Place the control panel in the upright position.

3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

2. Remove the control panel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

1. Place the control panel in the upright position.

280 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws on the
control-panel frame.

Figure 2-162 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors

3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.

Figure 2-163 Remove the USB interconnect cable

4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control panel.

Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control panel.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 281

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Keyboard (z bundles)

Learn how to remove and replace the keyboard.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the keyboard.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

282 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-31 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L47-60102 US English keyboard assembly

B5L47-60103 UK English keyboard assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Type on the keyboard and verify that it is recognized by the control panel.

1. Remove the control panel bezel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel bezel.

Remove the control panel bezel 283

 1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-164 Remove the control panel bezel.

2. Place the control panel in the upright position.

3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

2. Remove the control panel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

1. Place the control panel in the upright position.

284 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws on the
control-panel frame.

Figure 2-165 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors

3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.

Figure 2-166 Remove the USB interconnect cable

4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control panel.

Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control panel.

3. Remove the keyboard (z bundles)

Follow these steps to remove the keyboard (z bundles).

Keyboard bundles only. For all other models, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (z bundles) 285

 1. Disconnect one FFC.

Figure 2-167 Disconnect one FFC

2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.

Figure 2-168 Remove the control-panel keyboard

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

286 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Imaging drum unit

Learn how to remove and replace the imaging drum unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the imaging drum unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-32 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A92-67905 HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit

X3A92-67906 HP LaserJet CMY Imaging Drum Unit

Removal and replacement: Imaging drum unit 287

 Required tools

● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the imaging drum

Follow these steps to remove the imaging drum.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

2. There are four locking levers, one for each color. Pull down on the locking lever for the color drum unit that
is being replaced.

Figure 2-169 Release locking lever

3. Grip the handle and remove the drum unit.

NOTE: Open the right door to remove the black drum.

CAUTION: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the drum unit.

Do not touch the shiny surface on the imaging drum. Cover the drum with a sheet of paper while it is out
of the printer to limit light exposure.

288 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-170 Remove the drum unit

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution

Lear how to install the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Basic

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

Unpack the replacement assembly 289

 ○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-33 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L31-67902 Foreign interface harness

Required tools

● No special tools are required to remove this part.

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Connect a third party solution to the FIH, and then verify it correctly functions.

1. Unpack the FIH accessory

Follow these steps to unpack the FIH accessory.

▲ Unpack the accessory from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

290 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Install the FIH accessory
Follow these steps to install the FIH accessory.

▲ Locate the USB connector on the printer formatter. Connect the FIH to this connector

Figure 2-171 Connect the FIH

Removal and replacement: NFC Kit Installation

Learn how to install the NFC kit.

View a video of how to install the NFC kit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-34 Part information

Part number Part description

J8030-61001 Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit

Required tools

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Install the FIH accessory 291

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Verify that the light on the NFC accessory illuminates to confirm the installation is correct.

Verify that a wireless network icon appears on the control panel.

1. Unpack the NFC kit

Follow these steps to unpack the NFC kit.

▲ Unpack the kit from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the part prior to installation.

2. Install the NFC kit

Follow these steps to install the NFC kit.

1. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the HIP cover.

Figure 2-172 Release the HIP cover

292 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the HIP cover.

Figure 2-173 Remove the HIP cover

3. Identify the USB connector in the HIP, and then attach the appropriate USB cable:

Install the NFC kit 293

 a. Locate the USB connector that is along one of the short edges. A USB Mini B receptacle (callout 1) is
the most common. However, on some models, a USB Mini B plug (callout 2) is used.

Figure 2-174 Identify USB connector

b. Select the appropriate cable from the two that are provided.

Figure 2-175 Select USB cable

294 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 c. Install the USB cable in the socket in the HIP. Note that the USB logo on the connector may face down
on some models.

Figure 2-176 Install the USB cable

4. Attach the power and grounding ends of the USB cable:

Install the NFC kit 295

 a. Attach the white power connector of the cable into the corresponding receptacle on the NFC
accessory.

Figure 2-177 Install the white power connector

b. Attach the metal ground connector of the cable to the grounding tab on the NFC accessory.

Figure 2-178 Attach the metal ground connector

5. Install the NFC accessory into the HIP recess.

296 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

a. Install the hook-shaped clips on the NFC accessory into the HIP recess.

Figure 2-179 Position the NFC accessory in the HIP recess

b. Gently push the NFC accessory onto the rounded clips so that it is held securely in place within the
recess.

Figure 2-180 Install the NFC accessory

Install the NFC kit 297

 Removal and replacement: Front power switch
Learn how to remove and replace the front power switch.

View a video of how to remove and replace the front power switch.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-35 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02969A Front power switch

298 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Press the power switch and verify that the printer turns on.

1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-181 Remove the front top inner cover

2. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 299

 Figure 2-182 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-183 Remove the front power cover

3. Remove the front power switch

Follow these steps to remove the front power switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the power switch board.

NOTE: If necessary, remove the power switch button assembly after removing the PCA.

300 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-184 Remove one screw and the power switch

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans

Learn how to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans.

View a video of how to remove and replace the LVPS fans.

Unpack the replacement assembly 301

 Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-36 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00161A Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans (Type 7)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

302 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-185 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-186 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS fans

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS fans.

Remove the lower rear cover 303

 ▲ Disconnect two connectors, release four tabs, and then remove the LVPS fans.

TIP: When installing replacement fans, make sure that the arrow embossed on the fans points into the
printer.

Figure 2-187 Remove the LVPS fans

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

304 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

5. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following sSpecial installation instructions.

LVPS fans

▲ When installing the replacement fans, make sure that the embossed arrow on the fans point toward the
printer.

Figure 2-188 Correct installation of LVPS fans

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Low voltage power supply (LVPS) Type 4

Learn how to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) type 4.

View a video of how to remove and replace the LVPS type 4.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 305

 Table 2-37 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00091D LVPS 110V Type 4

JC44-00092D LVPS 220V Type 4

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-189 Remove the formatter cover

306 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the lower rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-190 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-191 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the LVPS type 4

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS type 4.

Remove the lower rear cover 307

 WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.

1. Remove three screws, then remove the shield-LVPS sub upper.

Figure 2-192 Remove the shield-LVPS sub upper

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS type 4.

Figure 2-193 LVPS Type 4

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

308 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Lower tray connector

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the lower tray connector.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-38 Part information

Lower tray connector part number

JC39-02187A Lower tray connector

Removal and replacement: Lower tray connector 309

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-194 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

310 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-195 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 2-196 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the lower tray connector

Follow these steps to remove the lower tray connector.

Remove the LVPS cover 311

 1. Release one retainer, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-197 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove three screws, and then remove the lower tray connector.

Figure 2-198 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer fan

Learn how to remove and replace the developer fan.

View a video of how to remove and replace the developer fan.

312 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-39 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00130A Developer fan

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 313

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-199 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-200 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

314 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 2-201 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

▲ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors (callout 1)
that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS and fuser drive
boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and then tilt the top of the
cage out to remove it.

Figure 2-202 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

5. Remove the developer fan

Follow these steps to remove the developer fan.

1. Remove Tray 2.

Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage 315
 2. Inside the Tray 2 opening, disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-203 Disconnect one connector

3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release two retainers (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-204 Disconnect one connector and remove four screws

4. Remove the fan shroud under the cables.

Figure 2-205 Remove the fan shroud

5. Release the cables from two retainers.

Figure 2-206 Release the cables

6. Turn the fan shroud over to the other side. Remove two screws, and then release five tabs (callout 1) to
remove the fan cover.

Figure 2-207 Remove two screws and release five tabs

316 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 7. Remove the developer fan (callout 1).

Figure 2-208 Remove the developer fan

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge unit

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge unit.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the bridge unit.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Unpack the replacement assembly 317

 Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-40 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01772B Bridge unit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the bridge unit

Follow these steps to remove the bridge unit.

318 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove one screw, and then slightly lift and slide the bridge unit away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-209 Remove the bridge unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Inductor unit

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the inductor unit.

Unpack the replacement assembly 319

 Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-41 Part information

Inductor unit part number

JC27-00012A Inductor unit - 110v

JC27-00009A Inductor unit - 220v

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

320 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-210 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-211 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

Remove the lower rear cover 321

 ▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 2-212 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

▲ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors (callout 1)
that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS and fuser drive
boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and then tilt the top of the
cage out to remove it.

Figure 2-213 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

5. Remove the inductor unit

Follow these steps to remove the inductor unit.

322 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Disconnect the wire harness, remove two screws, and then remove the inductor unit.

Figure 2-214 Remove the inductor unit

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door switch assembly

Learn how to remove the right door open switch.

Unpack the replacement assembly 323

 View a video of how to remove and replace the right door open switch.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-42 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01467A Switch assembly, right door

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

324 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-215 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-216 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

Remove the lower rear cover 325

 ▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-217 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

1. Release the cables from two retainers (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove
three screws.

Figure 2-218 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

1
2

326 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Lift the LVPS board and cage slightly away from the printer, and disconnect one connector behind the cage.
Remove the LVPS board and cage.

Figure 2-219 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove the fuser fan

Follow these steps to remove the fuser fan.

1. Release the cables (callout 1) from the cable guides (callout 2), and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-220 Release the harness and remove three screws

Remove the fuser fan 327

 2. Pull the fuser fan housing slightly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-221 Disconnect one connector

3. Optional step: For a replacement fan, release five tabs along the edges of the fan housing. If you are
removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.

Figure 2-222 Release five tabs

4. Optional step:For a replacement fan, separate the fan housing, and then remove the fuser fan. If you are
removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the housing and install the replacement fan in the
same orientation.

328 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-223 Remove the fuser fan

6. Remove the fuser/exit drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser/exit drive unit.

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2). Remove four screws, and
then remove the fuser/exit drive unit.

Figure 2-224 Remove the fuser/exit drive unit

1
2

7. Remove the right door switch assembly

Follow these steps to remove the right door switch assembly.

Remove the fuser/exit drive unit 329

 ▲ Disconnect one connector. Remove one screw, and then remove the right door switch assembly.

Figure 2-225 Remove the side door open sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

9. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

LVPS Type 4 and cage

330 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Two of the connectors are the same size and might be installed in the incorrect positions. Make sure that the
two-wire harness (callout 1) is installed on the LVPS Type 4 and the three-wire harness (callout 2) is installed
in the fan connector behind the LVPS Type 4 cage.

Figure 2-226 LVPS connectors installation

1
2

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Pickup drive unit 1 (Tray 2)

Learn how to remove and replace the pickup drive (Tray 2).

View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup drive (Tray 2).

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Removal and replacement: Pickup drive unit 1 (Tray 2) 331

 Table 2-43 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01063C Pickup drive (Tray 2)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-227 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

332 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-228 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 2-229 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

Remove the LVPS cover 333

 ▲ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors (callout 1)
that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS and fuser drive
boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and then tilt the top of the
cage out to remove it.

Figure 2-230 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

5. Remove the pickup drive unit 1

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive unit 1.

▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the pickup drive (Tray 2).

Figure 2-231 Remove pickup drive (Tray 2)

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

334 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) sensors

Learn how to remove and replace the toner collection unit (TCU) level sensor and the toner collection unit (TCU)
detect sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the toner collection unit level sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the toner collection unit detect sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-44 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00492A TCU sensors

0604-001393 Photo Interrupter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) sensors 335

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-232 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

336 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-233 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-234 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

Remove the front cover 337

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-235 Remove the front top inner cover

5. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-236 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

338 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-237 Remove the front power cover

6. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-238 Remove the exit cover

7. Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

Remove the exit cover 339

 3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-239 Remove seven screws

4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-240 Remove the inner cover

8. Remove the TCU sensors

Follow these steps to remove the TCU sensors.

▲ Release the corresponding sensor.

● [A]: Toner collection unit level sensor.

● [B]: Toner collection unit detect sensor.

340 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-241 Remove the TCU unit detect sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: CRUM connector

Learn how to remove and replace the CRUM connector.

View a video of how to remove and replace the CRUM connector.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Unpack the replacement assembly 341

 Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-45 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01277A CRUM connector

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

342 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-242 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-243 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

Remove the lower rear cover 343

 ▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-244 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-245 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

344 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-246 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet metal
cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-247 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

Remove the formatter and cage 345

 3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-248 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main board and cage

Follow these steps to remove the main board and cage.

1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector.

IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the cable
away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.

Figure 2-249 Disconnect one connector

2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero insertion

346 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables. Release the cables
from six retainers (callout 3).

Figure 2-250 Remove one screw

3. Remove five screws.

Figure 2-251 Remove five screws

4. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away from the printer to remove it.

7. Remove the toner supply drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply drive unit.

▲ Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and then release cables from three retainers (callout 2). Release the
cables from the guides (callout 3). Remove five screws and then remove the toner supply drive unit.

TIP: Transfer the cables from the toner supply drive unit to the replacement part.

Figure 2-252 Remove the toner supply drive unit

8. Remove the CRUM connector

Follow these steps to remove the CRUM connector.

▲ If replacing the yellow CRUM connector, disconnect one connector (callout 1). Remove the screw next to the
defective CRUM connector. Release one tab on the right, and then remove the CRUM connector.

Figure 2-253 Remove the CRUM connector

Remove the toner supply drive unit 347

 9. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

10. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Main board and cage

▲ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF connector before
closing the latch to secure the cable.

Figure 2-254 Install the flat cable

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Duplex 1 sensor (on the exit unit)

Learn how to remove and replace the duplex 1 sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the duplex 1 sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

348 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-46 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 349

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-255 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-256 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

350 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-257 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-258 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 351

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-259 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-260 Remove the right door

3. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

352 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-261 Remove the front top inner cover

4. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-262 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

Remove the front power cover 353

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-263 Remove the front power cover

5. Remove the top right cover

Follow these steps to remove the top right cover.

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the printer
to remove it.

Figure 2-264 Remove the top right cover

6. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

1. Open the right door.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.

354 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-265 Fuser unit screw locations

3. Pull out the fuser unit.

CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of getting
burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

Figure 2-266 Fuser unit removal

7. Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.

Remove the exit unit 355

 1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-267 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws

2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.

Figure 2-268 Remove the exit unit

8. Remove the duplex 1 sensor

Follow these steps to remove the duplex 1 sensor.

1. Locate the sensor on the exit unit. Remove two screws, and then lift the sensor holder up.

Figure 2-269 Remove two screws

356 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the duplex 1 sensor.

Figure 2-270 Remove the duplex 1 sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit 1 bin full sensor (on the exit unit)
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the exit 1 bin full sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the exit 1 bin full sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Unpack the replacement assembly 357

 Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-47 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo Interrupter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

358 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-271 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-272 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

Remove the right door 359

 1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-273 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-274 Release the right hinge

360 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-275 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-276 Remove the right door

3. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 361

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-277 Remove the front top inner cover

4. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-278 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

362 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-279 Remove the front power cover

5. Remove the top right cover

Follow these steps to remove the top right cover.

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the printer
to remove it.

Figure 2-280 Remove the top right cover

6. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

1. Open the right door.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.

Remove the top right cover 363

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-281 Fuser unit screw locations

3. Pull out the fuser unit.

CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of getting
burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

Figure 2-282 Fuser unit removal

7. Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.

364 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-283 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws

2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.

Figure 2-284 Remove the exit unit

8. Remove the output 1 bin full sensor

Follow these steps to remove the output 1 bin full sensor.

Remove the output 1 bin full sensor 365

 1. On the exit unit, remove one self-tapping screw (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2).

Figure 2-285 Remove one screw and the guide

2. Remove the black adhesive strip from the exit unit.

Figure 2-286 Remove the black adhesive strip

366 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Release two tabs, and then unhook the sensor from the sheet metal.

Figure 2-287 Release two tabs

4. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-288 Disconnect one connector

Remove the output 1 bin full sensor 367

 5. Rotate the shaft to release the sensor, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 2-289 Remove the exit 1 bin full sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2)

Learn how to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 2 for pickup unit 2.

368 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 2 for pickup unit 2.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-48 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 369

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-290 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-291 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

370 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-292 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-293 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 371

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-294 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-295 Remove the right door

3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

372 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-296 Remove one screw and the cover

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-297 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely.

Remove pickup unit 2 373

 Figure 2-298 Rotate pickup unit 2

5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-299 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove the prefeed sensor 2

Follow these steps to remove the prefeed sensor 2.

374 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Open the guide-pickup, and then remove the prefeed sensor 2.

Figure 2-300 Remove prefeed sensor 2

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

Pickup unit 2

▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Unpack the replacement assembly 375

 Figure 2-301 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1)

Learn how to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 1 for pickup unit 1.

View a video of how to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 1 for pickup unit 1

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-49 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001490 Photo interrupter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

376 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-302 Remove four screws

Remove the right rear cover 377

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-303 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-304 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

378 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-305 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-306 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Remove the right door 379

 Figure 2-307 Remove the right door

3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-308 Remove one screw and the cover

380 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-309 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely.

Figure 2-310 Rotate pickup unit 2

Remove pickup unit 2 381

 5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-311 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove pickup unit 1

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 1.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-312 Remove three screws

2. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 1 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely.

382 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-313 Rotate pickup unit 1

3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-314 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove the prefeed sensor 1

Follow these steps to remove the prefeed sensor 1.

Remove the prefeed sensor 1 383

 1. Remove five screws, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 2-315 Remove five screws and the bracket.

2. Remove the sensor from its holder.

Figure 2-316 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

384 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Pickup unit 2.

▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-317 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Pickup unit 1.

▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 385

 Figure 2-318 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

386 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-50 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

110V fuser assembly JC82-00477A Main assembly on page 155

220V fuser assembly JC82-00483A Main assembly on page 155

ADF LX whole unit JC97-05074A Main assembly on page 155

Accelerator PCA - Toast (GX ADF only) X3A62-60001 Main assembly on page 155

Accelerator PCA-toast Blue Angel X3A62-60002 Main assembly on page 155

Assy- Engine Side Crum Connector JC93-01277A Main assembly on page 155

Bridge unit JC90-01772B Main assembly on page 155

Cable, PWR main HDD JC39-01943A Main assembly on page 155

Cable, SATA main HDD JC39-01202A Main assembly on page 155

Cassette tray 2 JC90-01610A Main assembly on page 155

Cassette tray 3 JC90-01611A Main assembly on page 155

Developer fan JC31-00130A Main assembly on page 155

Drive, pickup JC93-01063C Main assembly on page 155

Duplex 1 sensor (photo interrupter) 0604-001393 Main assembly on page 155

Exit 1 bin full sensor (photo interrupter) 0604-001393 Main assembly on page 155

Exit assembly JC90-01369A Main assembly on page 155

Exit assembly, first JC90-01370A Main assembly on page 155

Exit assembly, second C90-01374A Main assembly on page 155

FFC Cable, HVPS JC39-02252A Main assembly on page 155

FFC cable, laser scanner unit JC39-02253A Main assembly on page 155

Fan type 7 JC31-00161A Main assembly on page 155

Fan type 8 JC93-01414A Main assembly on page 155

Fan-type 3 24V LVPS/FDB JC31-00154A Main assembly on page 155

Flow ADF-GX JC97-04955A Main assembly on page 155

Foreign interface harness B5L31-67902 Main assembly on page 155

Formatter X3A92-60001 Main assembly on page 155

Formatter (du models) X3A92-60003 Main assembly on page 155

Formatter HDD 500GB L41606-011 Main assembly on page 155

Formatter HDD 500GB Kit 5851-6712 Main assembly on page 155

Formatter HDD 500GB Kit (du models) 5851-6712 Main assembly on page 155

Formatter HDD Cradle B5L46-40014 Main assembly on page 155

Formatter HDD SATA Riser Module T3U55-60001 Main assembly on page 155

Formatter PCA-Obsidian Blue Angel X3A92-60003 Main assembly on page 155

Alphabetical parts list 387

 Table 2-50 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Fuser drive board, 110V JC44-00235B Main assembly on page 155

Fuser drive board, 220V JC44-00236B Main assembly on page 155

HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit X3A92-67905 Main assembly on page 155

HP LaserJet CMY Imaging Drum Unit X3A92-67906 Main assembly on page 155

HP LaserJet blk developer unit JC96-11642A Main assembly on page 155

HP LaserJet cyan developer unit JC96-11641A Main assembly on page 155

HP LaserJet magenta developer unit JC96-11640A Main assembly on page 155

HP LaserJet yellow developer unit JC96-11639A Main assembly on page 155

HVPS 24V JC44-00240B Main assembly on page 155

ITB cleaner blade JC93-01377A Main assembly on page 155

Image scanner assembly (flat bed) JC97-04907A Main assembly on page 155

Image transfer belt assembly JC98-05425A Main assembly on page 155

Inductor unit 110V JC27-00012A Main assembly on page 155

Inductor unit 220V JC27-00009A Main assembly on page 155

Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit J8030-61001 Main assembly on page 155

LVPS 110V Type 4 JC44-00091D Main assembly on page 155

LVPS 110V Type 5H JC44-00249A Main assembly on page 155

LVPS 220V Type 4 JC44-00092D Main assembly on page 155

LVPS 220V Type 5H JC44-00250A Main assembly on page 155

Laser scanner unit JC97-04863A Main assembly on page 155

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans (Type 7) JC31-00161A Main assembly on page 155

Lower tray connector JC39-02187A Main assembly on page 155

Main PCA HDD 500GB 5851-6712 Main assembly on page 155

Main PCA HDD bracket JC97-02276A Main assembly on page 155

Non-Flow ADF-sGX JC97-04956A Main assembly on page 155

PCA, front power switch JC92-02969A Main assembly on page 155

PCA-Island of Data X3A92-60002 Main assembly on page 155

PCA-Island of Data (du models) X3A92-60002 Main assembly on page 155

PCA-Main Board w/heat sink JC82-00543A (E876z, Main assembly on page 155
E876dn series)
5CM63-67001 (E876du
series)

Paper dust brush JC93-01026B Main assembly on page 155

Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) 0604-001490 Main assembly on page 155

Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) 0604-001381 Main assembly on page 155

388 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-50 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Pulsar Control Panel B5L47-60101 Main assembly on page 155

Return guide JC61-07088A Main assembly on page 155

Right door assembly JC95-02092A Main assembly on page 155

Switch Assy - Right Door JC93-01467A Main assembly on page 155

TCU sensor JC93-00492A Main assembly on page 155

Toner collection unit X3A92-67926 Main assembly on page 155

Tray Heater (110v) Y1G22-67901 Main assembly on page 155

Tray Heater (220v) Y1G22-67902 Main assembly on page 155

UK English Keyboard Assy B5L47-60103 Main assembly on page 155

US English Keyboard Assy B5L47-60102 Main assembly on page 155

White backing (GX) JC63-05795A Main assembly on page 155

White backing (LX) JC63-05410A Main assembly on page 155

Wiring harness (output device) JC39-02194A Main assembly on page 155

Alphabetical parts list 389

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-51 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) Main assembly on page 155

0604-001393 Duplex 1 sensor (photo interrupter) Main assembly on page 155

0604-001393 Exit 1 bin full sensor (photo interrupter) Main assembly on page 155

0604-001490 Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) Main assembly on page 155

5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500GB Kit Main assembly on page 155

5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500GB Kit (du models) Main assembly on page 155

5851-6712 Main PCA HDD 500GB Main assembly on page 155

B5L31-67902 Foreign interface harness Main assembly on page 155

B5L46-40014 Formatter HDD Cradle Main assembly on page 155

B5L47-60101 Pulsar Control Panel Main assembly on page 155

B5L47-60102 US English Keyboard Assy Main assembly on page 155

B5L47-60103 UK English Keyboard Assy Main assembly on page 155

C90-01374A Exit assembly, second Main assembly on page 155

J8030-61001 Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit Main assembly on page 155

JC27-00009A Inductor unit 220V Main assembly on page 155

JC27-00012A Inductor unit 110V Main assembly on page 155

JC31-00130A Developer fan Main assembly on page 155

JC31-00154A Fan-type 3 24V LVPS/FDB Main assembly on page 155

JC31-00161A Fan type 7 Main assembly on page 155

JC31-00161A Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans (Type 7) Main assembly on page 155

JC39-01202A Cable, SATA main HDD Main assembly on page 155

JC39-01943A Cable, PWR main HDD Main assembly on page 155

JC39-02187A Lower tray connector Main assembly on page 155

JC39-02194A Wiring harness (output device) Main assembly on page 155

JC39-02252A FFC Cable, HVPS Main assembly on page 155

JC39-02253A FFC cable, laser scanner unit Main assembly on page 155

JC44-00091D LVPS 110V Type 4 Main assembly on page 155

JC44-00092D LVPS 220V Type 4 Main assembly on page 155

JC44-00235B Fuser drive board, 110V Main assembly on page 155

JC44-00236B Fuser drive board, 220V Main assembly on page 155

JC44-00240B HVPS 24V Main assembly on page 155

JC44-00249A LVPS 110V Type 5H Main assembly on page 155

JC44-00250A LVPS 220V Type 5H Main assembly on page 155

390 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-51 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC61-07088A Return guide Main assembly on page 155

JC63-05410A White backing (LX) Main assembly on page 155

JC63-05795A White backing (GX) Main assembly on page 155

JC82-00477A 110V fuser assembly Main assembly on page 155

JC82-00483A 220V fuser assembly Main assembly on page 155

JC82-00543A (E876z, PCA-Main Board w/heat sink Main assembly on page 155
E876dn series)
5CM63-67001 (E876du
series)

JC90-01369A Exit assembly Main assembly on page 155

JC90-01370A Exit assembly, first Main assembly on page 155

JC90-01610A Cassette tray 2 Main assembly on page 155

JC90-01611A Cassette tray 3 Main assembly on page 155

JC90-01772B Bridge unit Main assembly on page 155

JC92-02969A PCA, front power switch Main assembly on page 155

JC93-00492A TCU sensor Main assembly on page 155

JC93-01026B Paper dust brush Main assembly on page 155

JC93-01063C Drive, pickup Main assembly on page 155

JC93-01277A Assy- Engine Side Crum Connector Main assembly on page 155

JC93-01377A ITB cleaner blade Main assembly on page 155

JC93-01414A Fan type 8 Main assembly on page 155

JC93-01467A Switch Assy - Right Door Main assembly on page 155

JC95-02092A Right door assembly Main assembly on page 155

JC96-11639A HP LaserJet yellow developer unit Main assembly on page 155

JC96-11640A HP LaserJet magenta developer unit Main assembly on page 155

JC96-11641A HP LaserJet cyan developer unit Main assembly on page 155

JC96-11642A HP LaserJet blk developer unit Main assembly on page 155

JC97-02276A Main PCA HDD bracket Main assembly on page 155

JC97-04863A Laser scanner unit Main assembly on page 155

JC97-04907A Image scanner assembly (flat bed) Main assembly on page 155

JC97-04955A Flow ADF-GX Main assembly on page 155

JC97-04956A Non-Flow ADF-sGX Main assembly on page 155

JC97-05074A ADF LX whole unit Main assembly on page 155

JC98-05425A Image transfer belt assembly Main assembly on page 155

L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500GB Main assembly on page 155

Numerical parts list 391

 Table 2-51 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

T3U55-60001 Formatter HDD SATA Riser Module Main assembly on page 155

X3A62-60001 Accelerator PCA - Toast (GX ADF only) Main assembly on page 155

X3A62-60002 Accelerator PCA-toast Blue Angel Main assembly on page 155

X3A92-60001 Formatter Main assembly on page 155

X3A92-60002 PCA-Island of Data Main assembly on page 155

X3A92-60002 PCA-Island of Data (du models) Main assembly on page 155

X3A92-60003 Formatter (du models) Main assembly on page 155

X3A92-60003 Formatter PCA-Obsidian Blue Angel Main assembly on page 155

X3A92-67905 HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit Main assembly on page 155

X3A92-67906 HP LaserJet CMY Imaging Drum Unit Main assembly on page 155

X3A92-67926 Toner collection unit Main assembly on page 155

Y1G22-67901 Tray Heater (110v) Main assembly on page 155

Y1G22-67902 Tray Heater (220v) Main assembly on page 155

Exit assemblies
View the exit assemblies exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Exit assemblies
Parts diagram and parts list for the exit assemblies.

392 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-319 Exit assemblies

Table 2-50 Exit assemblies

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

3-1 JC93-00802A Drive, motor step 2 Removal and replacement: Exit

gate solenoid/motors/sensor
(on the exit unit) on page 394

3-2 JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting 1 Removal and replacement: Exit

gate solenoid/motors/sensor
(on the exit unit) on page 394

3-5 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Removal and replacement: Exit

gate solenoid/motors/sensor
(on the exit unit) on page 394

3-5 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Return sensor (on the exit unit)
on page 403

Exit assemblies 393

 Removal and replacement: Exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor (on the exit unit)
Learn how to remove and replace the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-51 Part information

Part number Part description

JC33-00031B Solenoid , lifting

JC93-00802A Drive, motor step (qty 2)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

394 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-320 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-321 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 395

 1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-322 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-323 Release the right hinge

396 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-324 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-325 Remove the right door

3. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 397

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-326 Remove the front top inner cover

4. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-327 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

398 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-328 Remove the front power cover

5. Remove the top right cover

Follow these steps to remove the top right cover.

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the printer
to remove it.

Figure 2-329 Remove the top right cover

6. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

1. Open the right door.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.

Remove the top right cover 399

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-330 Fuser unit screw locations

3. Pull out the fuser unit.

CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of getting
burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

Figure 2-331 Fuser unit removal

7. Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.

400 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-332 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws

2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.

Figure 2-333 Remove the exit unit

8. Remove the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor

Follow these steps to remove the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor.

1. Disconnect one connector. Gently pry the black gear from behind to remove it. Remove the e-ring, and then
remove the white gear.

NOTE: If necessary, remove two motors, and then remove one sensor.

Remove the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor 401

 Figure 2-334 On the exit unit, disconnect one connector and remove two gears

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the exit gate solenoid (callout A).

Figure 2-335 Exit gate solenoid

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

402 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Return sensor (on the exit unit)

Learn how to remove and replace the return sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the return sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-52 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo Interrupter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

Removal and replacement: Return sensor (on the exit unit) 403
 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-336 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-337 Remove the right rear cover

404 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the right door
Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-338 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-339 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 405

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-340 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-341 Remove the right door

3. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

406 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-342 Remove the front top inner cover

4. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-343 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

Remove the front power cover 407

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-344 Remove the front power cover

5. Remove the top right cover

Follow these steps to remove the top right cover.

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the printer
to remove it.

Figure 2-345 Remove the top right cover

6. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

1. Open the right door.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.

408 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-346 Fuser unit screw locations

3. Pull out the fuser unit.

CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of getting
burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

Figure 2-347 Fuser unit removal

7. Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.

Remove the exit unit 409

 1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-348 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws

2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.

Figure 2-349 Remove the exit unit

8. Remove the return sensor

Follow these steps to Remove the return sensor.

410 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Locate the sensor on the exit unit. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then peel the black adhesive
strip (callout 2) away from the top of the sensor. Release two small tabs (callout 3), and then remove the
sensor.

Figure 2-350 Return sensor

1
3

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 411

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Drive, motor step JC93-00802A Exit assemblies on page 393

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Exit assemblies on page 393

Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Exit assemblies on page 393

Solenoid, lifting JC33-00031B Exit assemblies on page 393

412 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Exit assemblies on page 393

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Exit assemblies on page 393

JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting Exit assemblies on page 393

JC93-00802A Drive, motor step Exit assemblies on page 393

Cassettes tray 2/3

View the cassettes tray 2/3 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Cassettes Tray 2/3

Parts diagram and parts list for the cassettes tray 2/3.

Numerical parts list 413

 Figure 2-351 Cassettes Tray 2/3

Table 2-53 Cassettes Tray 2/3

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC90-01610A Cassette, Tray 2 1 Not applicable

0 JC90-01611A Cassette, Tray 3 1 Not applicable

414 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-54 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cassette, Tray 2 JC90-01610A Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page 414

Cassette, Tray 3 JC90-01611A Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page 414

Alphabetical parts list 415

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-55 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC90-01610A Cassette, Tray 2 Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page 414

JC90-01611A Cassette, Tray 3 Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page 414

Main frame assembly

View the main frame assembly exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main frame assembly

Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame assembly.

416 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-352 Main assembly frame

12-1

6R

7R 5R
1R

2R
3R

4R

8R

9R

Table 2-54 Main assembly frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-00466A Front Door Switch Open 1 Removal and replacement:

Front cover open sensor on
page 418

3R JC39-02204A Registration cable 1 Removal and replacement:

Registration sensor assembly
on page 424

4R 0604-001381 Photo interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Registration sensor assembly
on page 424

5 JC93-01039A ACR assembly 1 Not applicable

Main frame assembly 417

 Table 2-54 Main assembly frame (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

7 JC93-01116A Main frame registration assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

Registration assembly on page
432

8 JC93-01370A Tray closing assembly 2 Removal and replacement: Tray

closing unit on page 438

12-1 5CM63-67901 Right door damper and lever kit 1 Removal and replacement: Right
door dampener and lever kit on
page 443

Not shown JC39-02217A Harness, fuser connector 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02187A Harness, engine side for DCF + connector 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC93-01023A High-voltage rail assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

High-voltage rail assembly on
page 460

Removal and replacement: Front cover open sensor

Learn how to remove the front cover open sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the front cover open sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-55 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00466A Front door switch open

418 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-353 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

Remove the TCU 419

 ▲ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-354 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-355 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

420 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-356 Remove the front top inner cover

5. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-357 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

Remove the front power cover 421

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-358 Remove the front power cover

6. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-359 Remove the exit cover

7. Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

422 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-360 Remove seven screws

4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-361 Remove the inner cover

8. Remove the front cover open sensor

Follow these steps to remove the front cover open sensor.

1. Remove the toner cartridges.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front cover open sensor.

Figure 2-362 Remove one screw and the cover open sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the front cover open sensor 423

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Registration sensor assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the registration sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the registration sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

424 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-56 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-363 Remove the TCU

Remove the TCU 425

 2. Remove the paper dust brush
Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

▲ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-364 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-365 Remove four screws

426 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-366 Remove the right rear cover

4. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-367 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Remove the right door 427

 Figure 2-368 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-369 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

428 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-370 Remove the right door

5. Remove the registration assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-371 Remove two screws

2. Remove the gear cover.

Figure 2-372 Remove the gear cover

3. Disconnect one in-line connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 2-373 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

Remove the registration assembly 429

 4. Rotate the left side of the registration assembly away from the printer, and then remove it.

Figure 2-374 Remove the registration assembly

6. Remove the registration sensor

Follow these steps to remove the registration sensor.

1. Remove three self-tapping screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-375 Remove three screws and the cover

2. Release the cables from one lower retainer (callout 1) and one upper retainer (callout 2). Remove five
screws.

Figure 2-376 Release retainers and remove five screws

3. Carefully lift the registration sensor assembly slightly away from the printer. Release one retainer
(callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2).

Figure 2-377 Release one retainer and disconnect two connectors

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

430 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Registration assembly

1. Install the back, gear side of the shaft (callout 1) into the opening in the sheet metal (callout 2).

Figure 2-378 Install the gear side of the shaft

2. Remove the bushing (callout 1) from the end of the front of the shaft.

Figure 2-379 Remove the bushing

3. Install the bushing in the opening in the sheet metal.

NOTE: The bushing is flat along the top and bottom edges. Install the bushing so the flat edges match the
keyed opening in the sheet metal.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 431

 Figure 2-380 Install the bushing

4. Install the front of the shaft into the bushing.

Figure 2-381 Install the front of the shaft

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Registration assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the registration assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the registration assembly.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-57 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01116A Registration assembly

432 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-382 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 433

 ▲ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-383 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-384 Remove four screws

434 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-385 Remove the right rear cover

4. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-386 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Remove the right door 435

 Figure 2-387 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-388 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

436 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-389 Remove the right door

5. Remove the registration assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-390 Remove two screws

2. Remove the gear cover.

Figure 2-391 Remove the gear cover

3. Disconnect one in-line connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 2-392 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

Remove the registration assembly 437

 4. Rotate the left side of the registration assembly away from the printer, and then remove it.

Figure 2-393 Remove the registration assembly

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray closing unit

Learn how to remove and replace the tray closing unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the tray closing unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

438 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-58 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01370A Tray closing unit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 439

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-394 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-395 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

440 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 2-396 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

▲ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors (callout 1)
that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS and fuser drive
boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and then tilt the top of the
cage out to remove it.

Figure 2-397 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

5. Remove the tray closing unit

Follow these steps to remove the tray closing unit.

1. Remove Tray 2.

Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage 441
 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cassette rail cover.

Figure 2-398 Remove the CST rail cover

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the tray closing unit.

Figure 2-399 Remove the tray closing unit

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

442 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door dampener and lever kit

Learn how to remove and replace the right door dampener.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-59 Part information

Part number Part description

5CM63-67901 Right door dampener and lever kit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

Removal and replacement: Right door dampener and lever kit 443
 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-400 Remove the front top inner cover

Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

444 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-401 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-402 Remove the front power cover

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 445

 Figure 2-403 Remove the TCU

Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

▲ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-404 Remove the paper dust brush

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

446 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-405 Remove the exit cover

Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

Remove the exit cover 447

 ▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-406 Remove the front cover

Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-407 Remove seven screws

4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-408 Remove the inner cover

Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

448 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-409 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-410 Remove the right rear cover

Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

Remove the right door 449

 1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-411 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-412 Release the right hinge

450 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-413 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-414 Remove the right door

Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

Remove pickup unit 2 451

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-415 Remove one screw and the cover

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-416 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely.

452 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-417 Rotate pickup unit 2

5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-418 Disconnect one connector

Remove pickup unit 1

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 1.

Remove pickup unit 1 453

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-419 Remove three screws

2. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 1 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely.

Figure 2-420 Rotate pickup unit 1

454 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-421 Disconnect one connector

Remove the right door dampener

Follow these steps to remove the right door dampener.

1. Remove two screw caps and three screws, and then remove the right front cover.

Figure 2-422 Remove the right front cover

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front lower cover.

Remove the right door dampener 455

 Figure 2-423 Remove the front lower cover

3. Remove four screws to detach the front end of the tray rails.

CAUTION: The rails can be easily damaged when they are detached.

Figure 2-424 Detach the tray rails

4. Before proceeding, use paper reams to support the printer chassis.

CAUTION: When the sheet-metal corner bracket is removed the chassis will become misaligned if it is not
supported.

456 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-425 Support the chassis

5. Remove six screws (callouts 1-6).

Reinstallation tip: These screws are labeled 1 to 6. When the bracket is reinstalled, make sure that the
screws are installed in order (1 to 6).

Figure 2-426 Remove six screws

3
5 4

2
1

Remove the right door dampener 457

 6. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-427 Remove three screws

7. Rotate the top of the bracket away from the printer (callout 1), and then lift it up (callout 2) to release the
tab (callout 3) at the bottom of the bracket.

Figure 2-428 Remove the corner bracket

1 2

8. Remove the dampener gear assembly from the bracket.

IMPORTANT: Do not discard the failed dampener. Return the assembly to HP for failure analysis.

458 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-429 Remove the dampener

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Pickup unit 1

Unpack the replacement assembly 459

 ▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-430 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Pickup unit 2

▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-431 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: High-voltage rail assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the high-voltage rail assembly.

Before performing service

460 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-60 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01023A High-voltage rail assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 461

 1. Remove the top left cover.

Figure 2-432 Top left cover

2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.

Figure 2-433 Remove the left cover

Remove the laser scanner assembly fan

Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner assembly fan.

462 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the laser scanner assembly fan.

Figure 2-434 Remove the laser scanner assembly fan

Remove the HVPS

Follow these steps to remove the HVPS.

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then release one retainer in the
center of the board (callout 3).

Figure 2-435 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

Remove the HVPS 463

 2. Tilt the board away from the printer, and then disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

Figure 2-436 Disconnect three connectors

3. If you are replacing the HVPS board, release two tabs and rotate the cover off of the board. Attach the cover
to the replacement part before installing.

Figure 2-437 Remove the HVPS cover

Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

464 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-438 Remove the front top inner cover

Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-439 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

Remove the front power cover 465

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-440 Remove the front power cover

Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-441 Remove the exit cover

Remove the toner cartridges and toner collection unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner cartridges and toner collection unit (TCU).

1. Open the front cover.

466 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove the toner cartridges (callout 1), and then push both hooks (callout 2) to release and remove the
TCU.

Figure 2-442 Remove the toner cartridges and TCU

1

Remove the ITB cleaner

Follow these steps to remove the ITB cleaner.

1. Loosen the screw securing the ITB cleaner.

NOTE: The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.

Figure 2-443 ITB screw location

2. Grasp the ITB cleaner housing, and pull it out of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not grasp the waste toner connector.

Use care when removing the ITB cleaner as loose toner might be present on the metal shelf along the side
of the cleaner.

Remove the ITB cleaner 467

 Figure 2-444 ITB cleaner removal

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

Remove the ITB

Follow these steps to remove the ITB.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the cable from the retainer, and then disconnect one connector. Slide the ITB latch toward the front
of the printer to release the coupled drive.

Figure 2-445 Disconnect one connector and slide the latch

3. Remove two screws securing the ITB unit.

TIP: Use a magnetized screwdriver to prevent the screws from falling into the printer..

468 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-446 Remove two screws

4. Pull the ITB unit partially out of the printer, and then lift it up and out of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not touch the ITB belt and be careful not to damage the it by hitting it on the door during
removal.

Figure 2-447 Remove the ITB

5. While pushing the color plane registration (CPR) shutter toward the rear of the printer, clean the three CPR
sensors with a damp, lint-free cloth.

Figure 2-448 Clean the CPR sensors

Remove the imaging drum

Follow these steps to remove the imaging drum.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

Remove the imaging drum 469

 2. There are four locking levers, one for each color. Pull down on the locking lever for the color drum unit that
is being replaced.

Figure 2-449 Release locking lever

3. Grip the handle and remove the drum unit.

NOTE: Open the right door to remove the black drum.

CAUTION: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the drum unit.

Do not touch the shiny surface on the imaging drum. Cover the drum with a sheet of paper while it is out
of the printer to limit light exposure.

Figure 2-450 Remove the drum unit

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the developer unit

Follow these steps to remove the developer unit.

IMPORTANT: Update the firmware to the latest version before replacing the developer unit.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

2. Remove the drum unit to the right of the developer to be replaced..

TIP: Also remove the adjacent drum unit to allow better access to the toner supply pipe.

470 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Rotate the reservoir shutter lever down to ensure it is closed..

Figure 2-451 Shutter open/close

4. Release the valve from the developer by rotating the valve side-to-side while pulling it firmly away from the
printer.

TIP: Make sure that the valve is fully installed on the developer before rotating it to the open position.

Figure 2-452 Release the toner collection valve

Remove the developer unit 471

 5. Reach to the top of the toner supply pipe, and then rotate it up.

Figure 2-453 Tilt toner supply pipe up

6. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the metal bracket
(callout 3).

TIP: Note the orientation of the bracket when reinstalling it.

Figure 2-454 Remove the metal bracket

TIP: Reinstall the bottom of the bracket first.

7. Hold the grip point of the developer unit and slide it away from the printer to remove it.

NOTE: Do not grip the toner collection unit connection when removing the developer unit.

Figure 2-455 Developer unit removal

TIP: Hold the toner supply pipe up and out of the way when reinstalling the developer unit.

472 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Remove the paper dust brush
Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

▲ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-456 Remove the paper dust brush

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Remove the paper dust brush 473

 Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-457 Remove the front cover

Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-458 Remove seven screws

4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-459 Remove the inner cover

474 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Remove the reservoir unit
Follow these steps to remove the reservoir unit.

NOTE: The toner reservoirs must be removed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you are
replacing the yellow reservoir, the black, cyan, and magenta reservoirs must all be removed first. Follow the
instructions below to remove only those reservoirs required to reach the target reservoir.

1. Close the toner reservoir shutters (callout 1), and then release the cables from the retainers (callout 2).

Figure 2-460 Close the shutters and release the cables

2. Disconnect four connectors.

Figure 2-461 Disconnect four connectors

3. Lower the release levers (callout 1), and then remove the yellow, magenta, and cyan drum units (callout 2).

Figure 2-462 Remove drum units

4. Lower and close the release levers for all of the developer units. This stops the flow of toner from the toner
reservoirs to the developer units.

Figure 2-463 Lower the developer release levers

Remove the reservoir unit 475

 5. Release the valves from the toner connections by rotating the valves side-to-side while pulling them firmly
away from the printer.

Figure 2-464 Release the toner supply pipes

6. Remove eight screws.

Figure 2-465 Remove eight screws

7. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cables from eight retainers.

Figure 2-466 Disconnect one connector and release the cables

8. Remove the toner reservoir by sliding it out of the printer. The figure below shows the black toner reservoir.
The procedure is the same for all of the toner reservoirs.

NOTE: The toner reservoirs must be removed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you are
replacing the yellow reservoir, the black, cyan, and magenta reservoirs must all be removed first.

NOTE: Removing the yellow toner reservoir requires removing the high voltage power supply.

Figure 2-467 Remove the black toner reservoir

Remove the high-voltage rail assembly

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage rail assembly.

476 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Before proceeding, take note from the front of the printer where the six high-voltage rail screws are located.

Figure 2-468 Locate six screws

2. From inside the printer remove six screws, and then remove the high-voltage rail assembly.

Figure 2-469 Remove the high-voltage rail assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 477

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

478 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ACR assembly JC93-01039A Main assembly frame on page

417

Front Door Switch Open JC93-00466A Main assembly frame on page

417

Harness, engine side for DCF + connector JC39-02187A Main assembly frame on page
417

Harness, fuser connector JC39-02217A Main assembly frame on page

417

High-voltage rail assembly JC93-01023A Main assembly frame on page

417

Main frame registration assembly JC93-01116A Main assembly frame on page

417

Registration cable JC39-02204A Main assembly frame on page

417

Right door damper and lever kit 5CM63-67901 Main assembly frame on page
417

Tray closing assembly JC93-01370A Main assembly frame on page

417

Alphabetical parts list 479

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

5CM63-67901 Right door damper and lever kit Main assembly frame on page
417

JC39-02187A Harness, engine side for DCF + connector Main assembly frame on page
417

JC39-02204A Registration cable Main assembly frame on page

417

JC39-02217A Harness, fuser connector Main assembly frame on page

417

JC93-00466A Front Door Switch Open Main assembly frame on page

417

JC93-01023A High-voltage rail assembly Main assembly frame on page

417

JC93-01039A ACR assembly Main assembly frame on page

417

JC93-01116A Main frame registration assembly Main assembly frame on page

417

JC93-01370A Tray closing assembly Main assembly frame on page

417

Drive system
View the drive system exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ACR frame assembly

Parts diagram and parts list for the ACR frame assembly.

480 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-470 ACR frame assembly

Table 2-61 ACR frame assembly

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-01039A ACR Assembly 1 Not applicable

1 JC32-00014A CTD sensor 3 Not applicable

2 JC31–00078A Motor, dc 1 Not applicable

ACR frame assembly 481

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-62 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ACR Assembly JC93-01039A ACR frame assembly on page 481

CTD sensor JC32-00014A ACR frame assembly on page 481

Motor, dc JC31–00078A ACR frame assembly on page 481

482 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-63 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC31–00078A Motor, dc ACR frame assembly on page 481

JC32-00014A CTD sensor ACR frame assembly on page 481

JC93-01039A ACR Assembly ACR frame assembly on page 481

Drive system
View the drive system exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Toner reservoir (CMYK)

Parts diagram and parts list for the toner reservoir (CMYK).

Figure 2-471 Toner reservoir (CMYK)

Table 2-62 Toner reservoir (CMYK)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-01089B Toner Reservoir Assy C/M/Y 3 Removal and replacement:

Reservoir unit on page 484

Numerical parts list 483

 Table 2-62 Toner reservoir (CMYK) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2 JC93-01088B Toner Reservoir Assy K 1 Removal and replacement:

Reservoir unit on page 484

Removal and replacement: Reservoir unit

Learn how to remove and replace the reservoir unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the reservoir unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-63 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01089B Toner reservoir assembly C/M/Y

JC93-01088B Toner reservoir assembly K

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

484 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-472 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

Remove the TCU 485

 ▲ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-473 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-474 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

486 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-475 Remove the front top inner cover

5. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-476 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

Remove the front power cover 487

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-477 Remove the front power cover

6. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-478 Remove the exit cover

7. Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

488 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-479 Remove seven screws

4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-480 Remove the inner cover

8. Remove the reservoir unit

Follow these steps to remove the reservoir unit.

NOTE: The toner reservoirs must be removed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you are
replacing the yellow reservoir, the black, cyan, and magenta reservoirs must all be removed first. Follow the
instructions below to remove only those reservoirs required to reach the target reservoir.

1. Close the toner reservoir shutters (callout 1), and then release the cables from the retainers (callout 2).

Figure 2-481 Close the shutters and release the cables

Remove the reservoir unit 489

 2. Disconnect four connectors.

Figure 2-482 Disconnect four connectors

3. Lower the release levers (callout 1), and then remove the yellow, magenta, and cyan drum units (callout 2).

Figure 2-483 Remove drum units

4. Lower and close the release levers for all of the developer units. This stops the flow of toner from the toner
reservoirs to the developer units.

Figure 2-484 Lower the developer release levers

5. Release the valves from the toner connections by rotating the valves side-to-side while pulling them firmly
away from the printer.

Figure 2-485 Release the toner supply pipes

6. Remove eight screws.

Figure 2-486 Remove eight screws

490 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 7. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cables from eight retainers.

Figure 2-487 Disconnect one connector and release the cables

8. Remove the toner reservoir by sliding it out of the printer. The figure below shows the black toner reservoir.
The procedure is the same for all of the toner reservoirs.

NOTE: The toner reservoirs must be removed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you are
replacing the yellow reservoir, the black, cyan, and magenta reservoirs must all be removed first.

NOTE: Removing the yellow toner reservoir requires removing the high voltage power supply.

Figure 2-488 Remove the black toner reservoir

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 491

 10. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly
Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

▲ Position the locator pins on the toner reservoir into the openings in the sheet metal inside the printer.

Figure 2-489 Position the locator pins

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

492 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-64 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Toner Reservoir Assy C/M/Y JC93-01089B Toner reservoir (CMYK) on page

483

Toner Reservoir Assy K JC93-01088B Toner reservoir (CMYK) on page

483

Alphabetical parts list 493

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-65 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC93-01088B Toner Reservoir Assy K Toner reservoir (CMYK) on page

483

JC93-01089B Toner Reservoir Assy C/M/Y Toner reservoir (CMYK) on page

483

Rear frame assembly

View the rear frame assembly exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Rear frame assembly

Parts diagram and parts list for the rear frame assembly.

Figure 2-490 Rear frame assembly

494 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-64 Rear frame assembly

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-00018A Rear holder autosize 3 Not applicable

1-1 JC92-02622A PCA, paper size sensor 1 Removal and replacement:

Paper size sensor on page 495

Not shown JC93-00486A Humidity sensor Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor

Learn how to remove the paper size sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the paper size sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-65 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02622A Paper size sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor 495

 Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the paper size sensor

Follow these steps to remove the paper size sensor.

▲ Do the following:

● Remove all trays to access the inside of the printer.

● Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 2-491 Remove the paper size sensor

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

496 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 497

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

PCA, paper size sensor JC92-02622A Rear frame assembly on page

495

Rear holder autosize JC93-00018A Rear frame assembly on page

495

498 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC92-02622A PCA, paper size sensor Rear frame assembly on page

495

JC93-00018A Rear holder autosize Rear frame assembly on page

495

Drive system
View the drive system exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Drive system
Parts diagram and parts list for the drive system.

Numerical parts list 499

 Figure 2-492 Drive system

Table 2-66 Drive system

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-01059C Main drive assembly 1 Removal and replacement: Main

drive unit on page 501

1-1 JC93-01048B Main drive 1 Not applicable

1-2 JC31-00123D Motor, bldc 4 Not applicable

2 JC93-01065B Toner drive 1 Removal and replacement:

Toner supply drive on page
508

2-1 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 2 Not applicable

2-2 JC31-00110A Step motor, circuit 2 Removal and replacement:

Toner supply and toner reservoir
motors on page 515

500 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-66 Drive system (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

3 JC93-01064A Fuser/exit drive 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser/exit drive unit on page
521

3-1 JC31-00123B Motor, bldc 1 Not applicable

3-2 JC93-01084A Drive motor, step alienation 1 Not applicable

3-3 6602-001581 Timing belt 1 Not applicable

4 JC93-01062A Feed drive 1 Removal and replacement:

Feed/Tray 1 drive unit or motor
on page 534

4-1 JC31-00132A Step motor, ip 1 Removal and replacement:

Feed/Tray 1 drive unit or motor
on page 534

4-2 JC47-00037A Electric clutch 1 Not applicable

4-3 6602-001730 Timing gear belt 1 Not applicable

5 JC93-01063C Pickup drive (Tray 3) 2 Removal and replacement:

Pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor
on page 537

5-1 JC93-01083A Drive motor, step 2 Removal and replacement:

Pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor
on page 537

6 JC93-01068A Engage T1 1

6-1 JC31-00110B Step motor, circuit 1 Removal and replacement:

Alienation drive unit or motor on
page 528

7 JC93-01070A Drive, toner collection unit 1

8 JC93-01061A Registration drive 1

Removal and replacement: Main drive unit

Learn how to remove and replace the main drive unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the main drive unit.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

Removal and replacement: Main drive unit 501

 ○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-67 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01059C Main drive assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

502 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-493 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-494 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

Remove the lower rear cover 503

 ▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-495 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-496 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

504 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-497 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet metal
cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-498 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

Remove the formatter and cage 505

 3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-499 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the main drive unit.

1. Remove the cables (callout 1) from the cable guide (callout 2), and then release three retainers (callout 3).
Disconnect four connectors (callout 4), and then release the cables from the cable guide (callout 5).

Figure 2-500 Disconnect and release cables

2. Disconnect three flat cables from the main board (callout 1). One of the flat cable connectors is a zero
insertion force (ZIF) connector. Open the latch on the connector before removing the flat cable. Remove the
flat cables (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3).

Figure 2-501 Disconnect flat cables

506 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove eight screws.

Figure 2-502 Remove eight screws

4. Lift the main drive unit up to release the hooks in the sheet metal, rotate it to the right, and then remove it
from under the cables.

Figure 2-503 Remove the main drive unit

5. Optional step: Move all the cables (callout 1) and cable guides (callout 2) from the old main drive unit and
transfer them to the replacement unit.

Figure 2-504 Remove cables and guides

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 507

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive

Learn how to remove and replace the toner supply drive unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the toner supply drive unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-68 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01065B Drive, toner

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

508 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-505 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 509

 ▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-506 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-507 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

510 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-508 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-509 Remove one screw

Remove the formatter and cage 511

 2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet metal
cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-510 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-511 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main board and cage

Follow these steps to remove the main board and cage.

512 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector.

IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the cable
away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.

Figure 2-512 Disconnect one connector

2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero insertion
force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables. Release the cables
from six retainers (callout 3).

Figure 2-513 Remove one screw

3. Remove five screws.

Figure 2-514 Remove five screws

4. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away from the printer to remove it.

7. Remove the toner supply drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply drive unit.

▲ Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and then release cables from three retainers (callout 2). Release the
cables from the guides (callout 3). Remove five screws and then remove the toner supply drive unit.

TIP: Transfer the cables from the toner supply drive unit to the replacement part.

Remove the toner supply drive unit 513

 Figure 2-515 Remove the toner supply drive unit

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

9. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

Top flat cable

▲ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF connector before
closing the latch to secure the cable.

Figure 2-516 Install the flat cable

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

514 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Toner supply and toner reservoir motors
Learn how to remove and replace the toner supply and toner reservoir motors.

View a video of how to remove and replace the toner supply and toner reservoir motors.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-69 Part information

Part numbers Part description

JC31-00110A Motor - step

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Toner supply and toner reservoir motors 515
 1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-517 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-518 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

516 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-519 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-520 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

Remove the left rear corner cover 517

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-521 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet metal
cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-522 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

518 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-523 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main board and cage

Follow these steps to remove the main board and cage.

1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector.

IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the cable
away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.

Figure 2-524 Disconnect one connector

2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero insertion

Remove the main board and cage 519

 force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables. Release the cables
from six retainers (callout 3).

Figure 2-525 Remove one screw

3. Remove five screws.

Figure 2-526 Remove five screws

4. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away from the printer to remove it.

7. Remove the toner supply and toner reservoir motors

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply and toner reservoir motors.

▲ Disconnect one connector and remove two screws for each motor that is replaced.

Figure 2-527 Remove the toner supply and toner reservoir motors

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

520 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

9. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Main board and cage

▲ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF connector before
closing the latch to secure the cable.

Figure 2-528 Install the flat cable

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Fuser/exit drive unit

Learn how to remove and replace the fuser/exit drive unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser/exit drive unit.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 521

 Table 2-70 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01064A Drive, fuser exit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-529 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

522 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-530 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-531 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

Remove the upper rear cover 523

 1. Release the cables from two retainers (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove
three screws.

Figure 2-532 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

1
2

2. Lift the LVPS board and cage slightly away from the printer, and disconnect one connector behind the cage.
Remove the LVPS board and cage.

Figure 2-533 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove the fuser fan

Follow these steps to remove the fuser fan.

524 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Release the cables (callout 1) from the cable guides (callout 2), and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-534 Release the harness and remove three screws

2. Pull the fuser fan housing slightly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-535 Disconnect one connector

3. Optional step: For a replacement fan, release five tabs along the edges of the fan housing. If you are
removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.

Figure 2-536 Release five tabs

Remove the fuser fan 525

 4. Optional step:For a replacement fan, separate the fan housing, and then remove the fuser fan. If you are
removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the housing and install the replacement fan in the
same orientation.

Figure 2-537 Remove the fuser fan

6. Remove the fuser/exit drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser/exit drive unit.

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2). Remove four screws, and
then remove the fuser/exit drive unit.

Figure 2-538 Remove the fuser/exit drive unit

1
2

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

526 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

LVPS Type 4 and cage

▲ Two of the connectors are the same size and might be installed in the incorrect positions. Make sure that the
two-wire harness (callout 1) is installed on the LVPS Type 4 and the three-wire harness (callout 2) is installed
in the fan connector behind the LVPS Type 4 cage.

Figure 2-539 LVPS connectors installation

1
2

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 527

 Removal and replacement: Alienation drive unit or motor
Learn how to remove and replace the alienation motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the alienation motor.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-71 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01068A Assembly (drive, engage T1)

JC31-00110B Motor circuit step

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

528 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-540 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-541 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 529

 ▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-542 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-543 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

530 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-544 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet metal
cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-545 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

Remove the formatter and cage 531

 3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-546 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the main drive unit.

1. Remove the cables (callout 1) from the cable guide (callout 2), and then release three retainers (callout 3).
Disconnect four connectors (callout 4), and then release the cables from the cable guide (callout 5).

Figure 2-547 Disconnect and release cables

2. Disconnect three flat cables from the main board (callout 1). One of the flat cable connectors is a zero
insertion force (ZIF) connector. Open the latch on the connector before removing the flat cable. Remove the
flat cables (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3).

Figure 2-548 Disconnect flat cables

532 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove eight screws.

Figure 2-549 Remove eight screws

4. Lift the main drive unit up to release the hooks in the sheet metal, rotate it to the right, and then remove it
from under the cables.

Figure 2-550 Remove the main drive unit

5. Optional step: Move all the cables (callout 1) and cable guides (callout 2) from the old main drive unit and
transfer them to the replacement unit.

Figure 2-551 Remove cables and guides

7. Remove the alienation motor

Follow these steps to remove the alienation motor.

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the alienation motor.

Figure 2-552 Remove the alienation motor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the alienation motor 533

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feed/Tray 1 drive unit or motor

Learn how to remove and replace the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-72 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01062A Drive, Feed

JC31-00132A Step motor, ip

534 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-553 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 535

 ▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-554 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.

▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove four screws, and then remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.

NOTE: If replacing only the motor, remove the drive unit from the printer and then remove the motor from
the drive unit.

Figure 2-555 Remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

536 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor

Learn how to remove and replace the pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-73 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01063C Pickup drive (Tray 3)

JC93-01083A Drive motor, step

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Removal and replacement: Pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor 537

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-556 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

538 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-557 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the pickup drive unit 2

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive unit 2.

▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the pickup drive (Tray 3).

NOTE: If replacing only the motor, remove the drive unit from the printer and then remove the motor from
the drive unit.

Figure 2-558 Remove pickup drive unit 2

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the pickup drive unit 2 539

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) drive and motor
Learn how to remove and replace the toner collection unit (TCU) drive.

View a video of how to remove and replace the TCU drive.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-74 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01070A Drive, Toner Collection Unit

JC31-00110A Step motor, circuit

540 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-559 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

Remove the TCU 541

 ▲ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-560 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-561 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

542 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-562 Remove the front top inner cover

5. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-563 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

Remove the front power cover 543

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-564 Remove the front power cover

6. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-565 Remove the exit cover

7. Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

544 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-566 Remove seven screws

4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-567 Remove the inner cover

8. Remove the TCU drive

Follow these steps to remove the TCU drive.

▲ Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the TCU drive.

NOTE: To replace the motor, remove the drive unit from the printer and then remove the motor from the
drive unit.

Remove the TCU drive 545

 Figure 2-568 Remove the TCU drive

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

546 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-75 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01061A Drive, registration

JC31-00132A Step motor, ip

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 547

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-569 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-570 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

548 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-571 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-572 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

Remove the left rear corner cover 549

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-573 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet metal
cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-574 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

550 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-575 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the main drive unit.

1. Remove the cables (callout 1) from the cable guide (callout 2), and then release three retainers (callout 3).
Disconnect four connectors (callout 4), and then release the cables from the cable guide (callout 5).

Figure 2-576 Disconnect and release cables

2. Disconnect three flat cables from the main board (callout 1). One of the flat cable connectors is a zero
insertion force (ZIF) connector. Open the latch on the connector before removing the flat cable. Remove the
flat cables (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3).

Figure 2-577 Disconnect flat cables

Remove the main drive unit 551

 3. Remove eight screws.

Figure 2-578 Remove eight screws

4. Lift the main drive unit up to release the hooks in the sheet metal, rotate it to the right, and then remove it
from under the cables.

Figure 2-579 Remove the main drive unit

5. Optional step: Move all the cables (callout 1) and cable guides (callout 2) from the old main drive unit and
transfer them to the replacement unit.

Figure 2-580 Remove cables and guides

7. Remove the registration drive assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration drive assembly.

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1). Remove three screws (callout 2), then remove the registration drive
assembly.

NOTE: To replace the motor, remove the drive assembly from the printer and then remove the motor from
the drive assembly.

Figure 2-581 Remove the registration drive assembly

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

552 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 553

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Drive motor, step JC93-01083A Drive system on page 500

Drive motor, step alienation JC93-01084A Drive system on page 500

Drive, toner collection unit JC93-01070A Drive system on page 500

Electric clutch JC47-00037A Drive system on page 500

Engage T1 JC93-01068A Drive system on page 500

Feed drive JC93-01062A Drive system on page 500

Fuser/exit drive JC93-01064A Drive system on page 500

Main drive JC93-01048B Drive system on page 500

Main drive assembly JC93-01059C Drive system on page 500

Motor, bldc JC31-00123B Drive system on page 500

Motor, bldc JC31-00123D Drive system on page 500

Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Drive system on page 500

Pickup drive (Tray 3) JC93-01063C Drive system on page 500

Registration drive JC93-01061A Drive system on page 500

Step motor, circuit JC31-00110A Drive system on page 500

Step motor, circuit JC31-00110B Drive system on page 500

Step motor, ip JC31-00132A Drive system on page 500

Timing belt 6602-001581 Drive system on page 500

Timing gear belt 6602-001730 Drive system on page 500

Toner drive JC93-01065B Drive system on page 500

554 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Drive system on page 500

6602-001581 Timing belt Drive system on page 500

6602-001730 Timing gear belt Drive system on page 500

JC31-00110A Step motor, circuit Drive system on page 500

JC31-00110B Step motor, circuit Drive system on page 500

JC31-00123B Motor, bldc Drive system on page 500

JC31-00123D Motor, bldc Drive system on page 500

JC31-00132A Step motor, ip Drive system on page 500

JC47-00037A Electric clutch Drive system on page 500

JC93-01048B Main drive Drive system on page 500

JC93-01059C Main drive assembly Drive system on page 500

JC93-01061A Registration drive Drive system on page 500

JC93-01062A Feed drive Drive system on page 500

JC93-01063C Pickup drive (Tray 3) Drive system on page 500

JC93-01064A Fuser/exit drive Drive system on page 500

JC93-01065B Toner drive Drive system on page 500

JC93-01068A Engage T1 Drive system on page 500

JC93-01070A Drive, toner collection unit Drive system on page 500

JC93-01083A Drive motor, step Drive system on page 500

JC93-01084A Drive motor, step alienation Drive system on page 500

Main frame pickup 1 and 2

View the main frame pickup 1 and 2 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main frame pickup 1 and 2

Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup 1 and 2.

Numerical parts list 555

 Figure 2-582 Main frame pickup 1 and 2

Table 2-76 Main frame pickup 1 and 2

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-01364A Main Pick Up 1st 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup unit 1 on page 556

1-5 0604-001490 Photo interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup lifting and empty sensor
(pickup unit 1) on page 565

2 JC93-01365A Main Pick Up 2nd Removal and replacement:

Pickup unit 2 on page 575

2-3 0604-001381 Photo interrupter Removal and replacement:

Pickup lifting and empty sensor
(pickup unit 2) on page 582

Removal and replacement: Pickup unit 1

Learn how to remove and replace pickup unit 1.

View a video of how to remove and replace pickup unit 1.

Mean time to repair: 12 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

556 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-77 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01364A Main pick up 1st

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 557

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-583 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-584 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

558 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-585 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-586 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 559

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-587 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-588 Remove the right door

3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

560 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-589 Remove one screw and the cover

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-590 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely.

Remove pickup unit 2 561

 Figure 2-591 Rotate pickup unit 2

5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-592 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove pickup unit 1

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 1.

562 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-593 Remove three screws

2. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 1 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely.

Figure 2-594 Rotate pickup unit 1

Remove pickup unit 1 563

 3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-595 Disconnect one connector

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

564 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Pickup unit 2.

▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-596 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Pickup unit 1.

▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-597 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1)
Learn how to remove and replace the pickup lifting and empty sensor for pickup unit 1.

Removal and replacement: Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1) 565
 View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup lifting and empty sensor for pickup unit 1.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-78 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001490 Photo interrupter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

566 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-598 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-599 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

Remove the right door 567

 1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-600 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-601 Release the right hinge

568 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-602 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-603 Remove the right door

3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

Remove pickup unit 2 569

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-604 Remove one screw and the cover

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-605 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely.

570 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-606 Rotate pickup unit 2

5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-607 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove pickup unit 1

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 1.

Remove pickup unit 1 571

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-608 Remove three screws

2. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 1 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely.

Figure 2-609 Rotate pickup unit 1

572 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-610 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

Follow these steps to remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor.

▲ Disconnect the corresponding sensor connector, and then remove the sensor.

● Empty sensor (callout A)

● Pickup lifting sensor (callout B)

Figure 2-611 Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor 573

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Pickup unit 2.

▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-612 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Pickup unit 1.

▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.

574 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-613 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Pickup unit 2

Learn how to remove and replace pickup unit 2.

View a video of how to remove and replace pickup unit 2.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Removal and replacement: Pickup unit 2 575

 Table 2-79 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01365A Main pick up 2nd

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-614 Remove four screws

576 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-615 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-616 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Remove the right door 577

 Figure 2-617 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-618 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

578 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-619 Remove the right door

3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-620 Remove one screw and the cover

Remove pickup unit 2 579

 3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-621 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely.

Figure 2-622 Rotate pickup unit 2

580 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-623 Disconnect one connector

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

5. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 581

 Pickup unit 2.

▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-624 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Pickup unit 1.

▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-625 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 2)
Learn how to remove and replace the pickup lifting and empty sensor for pickup unit 2.

582 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup lifting and empty sensor for pickup unit 2.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-80 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo Interrupter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 583

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-626 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-627 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

584 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-628 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-629 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 585

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-630 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-631 Remove the right door

3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

586 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-632 Remove one screw and the cover

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-633 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely.

Remove pickup unit 2 587

 Figure 2-634 Rotate pickup unit 2

5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-635 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

Follow these steps to remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor.

▲ Disconnect the corresponding sensor connector, and then remove the sensor.

● Empty sensor (callout A)

● Pickup lifting sensor (callout B)

588 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-636 Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Pickup unit 2.

▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Unpack the replacement assembly 589

 Figure 2-637 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

590 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-81 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Main Pick Up 1st JC93-01364A Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 556

Main Pick Up 2nd JC93-01365A Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 556

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 556

Photo interrupter 0604-001490 Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 556

Alphabetical parts list 591

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-82 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 556

0604-001490 Photo interrupter Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 556

JC93-01364A Main Pick Up 1st Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 556

JC93-01365A Main Pick Up 2nd Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 556

Main (sub) frame pickup

View the main (sub) frame pickup exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main frame pickup

Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup

592 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-638 Frame main pickup

Table 2-81 Frame main pickup

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-01421A Sub Pick Up Upper 1 Not applicable

1-2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 2 Not applicable

3 JC66-04625A Feed roller, first exit 1 Not applicable

5 JC93-01092A HP LaserJet Trays 2-x rollers 3 Removal and replacement:

Trays 2–x pick, feed, and
separation rollers on page 593

6 JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
Learn how to remove and replace the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers.

Removal and replacement: Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers 593
 View a video of how to remove and replace the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-82 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01092A Tray 2,3 main pick, feed, sep rollers

Required tools

● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers

Follow these steps to remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers.

594 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

NOTE: HP recommends replacing all three rollers at the same time.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the two cassettes.

Figure 2-639 Remove the two cassettes

3. Inside the tray opening, slide the return guide toward the front of the printer until it stops.

Figure 2-640 Slide the return guide

Reinstallation tip: After installing the new rollers, slide the return guide toward the rear of the printer to
prevent paper jams.

Remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers 595
 4. Release the latch at the end of the rollers (callout 1) by pulling the latch tab away from the shaft, and then
slide the pick, feed, and separation rollers off of the shaft (callout 2) to remove them.

Figure 2-641 Remove rollers

5. When removing the rollers, make sure to leave the white couplers (callout 1) in place. If the couplers
become dislodged, reinstall them as shown in the figure below.

NOTE: The figure shows the pickup assembly removed from the printer to more clearly show the positions
of the couplers and rollers.

Figure 2-642 Coupler locations

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal

596 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

▲ After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

b. Select the Service menu.

c. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the access code
(04087617).

d. Select the Service Tools menu.

e. Select the Supply Status menu.

f. Select Field Replacement Unit.

g. Select Tray X Rollers.

h. Select the tray number for the rollers just replaced.

i. Select Reset.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 597

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-83 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Feed roller, first exit JC66-04625A Frame main pickup on page 593

HP LaserJet Trays 2-x rollers JC93-01092A Frame main pickup on page 593

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Frame main pickup on page 593

Sub Pick Up Upper JC93-01421A Frame main pickup on page 593

598 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-84 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Frame main pickup on page 593

JC66-04625A Feed roller, first exit Frame main pickup on page 593

JC93-01092A HP LaserJet Trays 2-x rollers Frame main pickup on page 593

JC93-01421A Sub Pick Up Upper Frame main pickup on page 593

Covers
View covers exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Covers
Parts diagram and parts list for the covers.

Figure 2-643 Covers

Table 2-83 Covers

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair Procedure

No

1 JC95-02109A Front cover 1 Removal and replacement:

Front cover on page 601

Numerical parts list 599

 Table 2-83 Covers (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair Procedure

No

2 JC95-02110A Inner cover front 1 Removal and replacement:

Front inner cover on page 602

4 JC63-02105A Right middle cover 1 Removal and replacement:

Front power cover on page
608

5 JC63-04861B Front cover, lower 1 Not applicable

6 JC63-05635A Middle left cover 1 Removal and replacement:

Front top inner cover on page
611

7 JC95-02101A Cover, exit 1 Removal and replacement: Exit

cover on page 613

9 JC63-05587A Scan left cover 1 Not applicable

10 JC63-05638A Left cover, upper 1 Removal and replacement:

Upper left cover on page 616

11 JC63-04840B Cover, exit rear 1 Not applicable

14 JC63-05571A Scan right cover 1 Not applicable

16 JC63-04847C Right cover, front 1 Not applicable

17 JC95-02102A Right cover, rear 1 Removal and replacement: Right

rear cover on page 619

18 JC95-02117A Cover, lower rear 1 Removal and replacement:

Lower rear cover on page 621

19 JC63-05633A Rear cover, upper 1 Removal and replacement:

Upper rear cover on page 623

21 JC63-04863B Rear cover, dummy 1 Not applicable

22 JC63-04859C Rear scan cover 1 Not applicable

22 JC63-04859D Rear scan cover (du model) 1 Not applicable

24 JC95-02100A Left cover 1 Removal and replacement: Left

cover on page 626

25 JC63-04862B Left cover, top 1 Not applicable

26 JC63-05639A Cover, control panel bottom 1 Not applicable

27 JC63-05640A Cover, control panel top 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC63-04916B Cover, upper right door 1 Removal and replacement:
Upper right door cover on page
629

Not shown JC61-04626A Strap, front cover Not applicable

Not shown JC41-00964A PCA, sub USB Host Not applicable

Not shown JC92-02969A PCA, front power switch Not applicable

600 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Front cover
Learn how to remove and replace the front cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the front cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-84 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02109A Cover, front

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Front cover 601

 1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-644 Remove the front cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front inner cover

Learn how to remove and replace the inner front cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the inner front cover.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

602 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-85 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02110A Cover, inner front

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the toner collection unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the toner collection unit 603

 Figure 2-645 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

▲ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-646 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

604 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-647 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-648 Remove the front top inner cover

5. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 605

 Figure 2-649 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-650 Remove the front power cover

6. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

606 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-651 Remove the exit cover

7. Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-652 Remove seven screws

Remove the inner front cover 607

 4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-653 Remove the inner cover

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front power cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front power cover.

608 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the front cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-86 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-02105A Cover, middle right

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 609

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-654 Remove the front top inner cover

2. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-655 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

610 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-656 Remove the front power cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front top inner cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front top inner cover.

Unpack the replacement assembly 611

 View a video of how to remove and replace the front top inner cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-87 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05635A Cover, middle left

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

612 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-657 Remove the front top inner cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit cover

Learn how to remove and replace the exit cover.

Unpack the replacement assembly 613

 View a video of how to remove and replace the exit cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-88 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02101A Cover, exit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

614 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-658 Remove the front top inner cover

2. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-659 Remove the exit cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the exit cover 615

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Upper left cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left rear corner cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the left rear corner cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

616 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-89 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05638A Cover, upper left

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-660 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

Remove the formatter cover 617

 ▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-661 Remove the left rear corner cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

618 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Right rear cover
Learn how to remove and replace the right rear cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the right rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-90 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02102A Cover, right rear

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Removal and replacement: Right rear cover 619

 1. Remove the right rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-662 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-663 Remove the right rear cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

620 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Lower rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the lower rear cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the lower rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Removal and replacement: Lower rear cover 621

 Table 2-91 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02117A Cover, lower rear

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-664 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

622 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-665 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Upper rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the upper rear cover.

Unpack the replacement assembly 623

 View a video of how to remove and replace the upper rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-92 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05633A Cover, rear upper

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

624 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-666 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-667 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

Remove the lower rear cover 625

 ▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-668 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left cover.

626 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the left cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-93 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02100A Cover, left

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the left cover 627

 1. Remove the top left cover.

Figure 2-669 Top left cover

2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.

Figure 2-670 Remove the left cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

628 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Upper right door cover

Learn how to remove and replace the top right cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the top right cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-94 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04916B Cover, right upper

Removal and replacement: Upper right door cover 629

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-671 Remove the front top inner cover

2. Remove the upper right door cover

Follow these steps to Remove the upper right door cover.

630 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the printer
to remove it.

Figure 2-672 Remove the upper right door cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 631

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cover, control panel bottom JC63-05639A Covers on page 599

Cover, control panel top JC63-05640A Covers on page 599

Cover, exit JC95-02101A Covers on page 599

Cover, exit rear JC63-04840B Covers on page 599

Cover, lower rear JC95-02117A Covers on page 599

Cover, upper right door JC63-04916B Covers on page 599

Front cover JC95-02109A Covers on page 599

Front cover, lower JC63-04861B Covers on page 599

Inner cover front JC95-02110A Covers on page 599

Left cover JC95-02100A Covers on page 599

Left cover, top JC63-04862B Covers on page 599

Left cover, upper JC63-05638A Covers on page 599

Middle left cover JC63-05635A Covers on page 599

PCA, front power switch JC92-02969A Covers on page 599

PCA, sub USB Host JC41-00964A Covers on page 599

Rear cover, dummy JC63-04863B Covers on page 599

Rear cover, upper JC63-05633A Covers on page 599

Rear scan cover JC63-04859C Covers on page 599

Rear scan cover (du model) JC63-04859D Covers on page 599

Right cover, front JC63-04847C Covers on page 599

Right cover, rear JC95-02102A Covers on page 599

Right middle cover JC63-02105A Covers on page 599

Scan left cover JC63-05587A Covers on page 599

Scan right cover JC63-05571A Covers on page 599

Strap, front cover JC61-04626A Covers on page 599

632 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC41-00964A PCA, sub USB Host Covers on page 599

JC61-04626A Strap, front cover Covers on page 599

JC63-02105A Right middle cover Covers on page 599

JC63-04840B Cover, exit rear Covers on page 599

JC63-04847C Right cover, front Covers on page 599

JC63-04859C Rear scan cover Covers on page 599

JC63-04859D Rear scan cover (du model) Covers on page 599

JC63-04861B Front cover, lower Covers on page 599

JC63-04862B Left cover, top Covers on page 599

JC63-04863B Rear cover, dummy Covers on page 599

JC63-04916B Cover, upper right door Covers on page 599

JC63-05571A Scan right cover Covers on page 599

JC63-05587A Scan left cover Covers on page 599

JC63-05633A Rear cover, upper Covers on page 599

JC63-05635A Middle left cover Covers on page 599

JC63-05638A Left cover, upper Covers on page 599

JC63-05639A Cover, control panel bottom Covers on page 599

JC63-05640A Cover, control panel top Covers on page 599

JC92-02969A PCA, front power switch Covers on page 599

JC95-02100A Left cover Covers on page 599

JC95-02101A Cover, exit Covers on page 599

JC95-02102A Right cover, rear Covers on page 599

JC95-02109A Front cover Covers on page 599

JC95-02110A Inner cover front Covers on page 599

JC95-02117A Cover, lower rear Covers on page 599

Right door
View the right door exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Right door
Parts diagram and parts list for the right door

Numerical parts list 633

 Figure 2-673 Right door

Table 2-95 Right door

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC90-01352B Tray 1 door 1 Removal and replacement: Tray

1 unit (on the right door) on
page 635

2 JC63-04910B Cover, right door front 1 Not applicable

3 JC63-04918B Cover, dummy LCT 1 Not applicable

4 JC63-04920B Cover, right 1 Not applicable

5 JC63-04916B Cover, upper right door 1 Not applicable

8 JC95-01970A Right door, link 1 Not applicable

9 JC66-04400A Right door, side hinge 1 Not applicable

11 JC93-01085A Motor - step 1 Not applicable

12 6602-001730 Timing belt, gear 1 Not applicable

14 JC61-07372A Spring, ts 1 Not applicable

23 6602-003183 Timing belt 1 Not applicable

29 JC66-04398A Right door damper 1 Not applicable

Not shown 0604-001393 Tray 1 empty sensor 1 Removal and replacement: Tray
1 empty sensor on page 644

Not shown 0604-001393 Tray 1 paper length sensor 1 Removal and replacement: Tray
1 paper length sensor on page
654

634 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-95 Right door (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

Not shown 0604-001393 Fuser out sensor 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser out sensor (on the right
door) on page 664

Not shown 0604-001490 Feed 2 sensor 1 Removal and replacement: Feed

2 sensor (on the right door) on
page 670

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 unit (on the right door)

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 unit on the right door.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 unit on the right door.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-96 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01352B Tray 1, door

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 unit (on the right door) 635
 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-674 Remove four screws

636 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-675 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-676 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Remove the right door 637

 Figure 2-677 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-678 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

638 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-679 Remove the right door

3. Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
Follow these steps to remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-680 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 2-681 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-682 Remove two screws

Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper 639
 4. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-683 Remove one screw

5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.

Figure 2-684 Remove the feed guide take away lower

6. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-685 Remove two screws

7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one connector
(callout 1).

Figure 2-686 Remove the feed guide take away upper

4. Remove the Tray 1 unit

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 unit.

1. Hold the right door upright, open Tray 1, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).

Figure 2-687 Release the hinge arm

640 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-688 Remove one screw and bushing cover

3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-689 Remove one e-ring and bushing

4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-690 Remove one e-ring and bushing

5. Remove the shaft.

Figure 2-691 Remove the shaft

6. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 2-692 Remove one screw

Remove the Tray 1 unit 641

 7. Release the hinge.

Figure 2-693 Release the hinge

8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).

Figure 2-694 Remove one screw

9. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-695 Remove one screw

10. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 2-696 Release the feed roller assembly

11. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

Figure 2-697 Rotate the feed roller assembly

642 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

12. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-698 Remove three screws

13. Remove the duplex lower guide.

Figure 2-699 Remove the duplex lower guide

14. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-700 Remove one screw

15. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-701 Remove two screws

16. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove two screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-702 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

Remove the Tray 1 unit 643

 17. Release the Tray 1 unit from the right door.

Figure 2-703 Release the Tray 1 unit

18. Remove the Tray 1 unit.

Figure 2-704 Remove the Tray 1 unit

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 empty sensor

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Tray 1 empty sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 empty sensor.

644 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-97 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo Interrupter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 645

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-705 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-706 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

646 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-707 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-708 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 647

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-709 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-710 Remove the right door

3. Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
Follow these steps to remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper.

648 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-711 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 2-712 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-713 Remove two screws

4. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-714 Remove one screw

5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.

Figure 2-715 Remove the feed guide take away lower

Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper 649
 6. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-716 Remove two screws

7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one connector
(callout 1).

Figure 2-717 Remove the feed guide take away upper

4. Remove the Tray 1 unit

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 unit.

1. Hold the right door upright, open Tray 1, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).

Figure 2-718 Release the hinge arm

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-719 Remove one screw and bushing cover

3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-720 Remove one e-ring and bushing

650 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-721 Remove one e-ring and bushing

5. Remove the shaft.

Figure 2-722 Remove the shaft

6. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 2-723 Remove one screw

7. Release the hinge.

Figure 2-724 Release the hinge

8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).

Figure 2-725 Remove one screw

Remove the Tray 1 unit 651

 9. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-726 Remove one screw

10. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 2-727 Release the feed roller assembly

11. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

Figure 2-728 Rotate the feed roller assembly

12. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-729 Remove three screws

13. Remove the duplex lower guide.

Figure 2-730 Remove the duplex lower guide

652 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 14. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-731 Remove one screw

15. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-732 Remove two screws

16. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove two screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-733 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

17. Release the Tray 1 unit from the right door.

Figure 2-734 Release the Tray 1 unit

18. Remove the Tray 1 unit.

Figure 2-735 Remove the Tray 1 unit

5. Remove the Tray 1 empty sensor

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 empty sensor.

Remove the Tray 1 empty sensor 653

 ▲ Disconnect the connector, and then remove the Tray 1 empty sensor.

Figure 2-736 Remove the Tray 1 empty sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 paper length sensor

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 paper length sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 paper length sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

654 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-98 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 655

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-737 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-738 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

656 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-739 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-740 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 657

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-741 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-742 Remove the right door

3. Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
Follow these steps to remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper.

658 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-743 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 2-744 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-745 Remove two screws

4. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-746 Remove one screw

5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.

Figure 2-747 Remove the feed guide take away lower

Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper 659
 6. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-748 Remove two screws

7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one connector
(callout 1).

Figure 2-749 Remove the feed guide take away upper

4. Remove the MP unit

Follow these steps to remove the MP unit.

1. Hold the right door upright, open the MP tray, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).

Figure 2-750 Release the hinge arm

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-751 Remove one screw and bushing cover

3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-752 Remove one e-ring and bushing

660 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-753 Remove one e-ring and bushing

5. Remove the shaft.

Figure 2-754 Remove the shaft

6. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 2-755 Remove one screw

7. Release the hinge.

Figure 2-756 Release the hinge

8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).

Figure 2-757 Remove one screw

Remove the MP unit 661

 9. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-758 Remove one screw

10. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 2-759 Release the feed roller assembly

11. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

Figure 2-760 Rotate the feed roller assembly

12. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-761 Remove three screws

13. Remove the duplex lower guide.

Figure 2-762 Remove the duplex lower guide

662 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 14. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-763 Remove one screw

15. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-764 Remove two screws

16. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove two screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-765 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

17. Release the Tray 1 unit from the right door.

Figure 2-766 Release the Tray 1 unit

18. Remove the MP unit.

Figure 2-767 Remove the Tray 1 unit

5. Remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor.

Remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor 663

 1. Remove the Tray 1 Tray upper.

Figure 2-768 Remove the Tray 1 Tray upper

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor.

Figure 2-769 Remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor (on the right door)
Learn how to remove and replace the fuser out sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser out sensor.

664 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-99 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Fuser out sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 665

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-770 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-771 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

666 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-772 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-773 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 667

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-774 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-775 Remove the right door

3. Remove the fuser out sensor

Follow these steps to remove the fuser out sensor.

668 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw on the back, top corner of the door.

Figure 2-776 Remove one screw

2. Remove one screw on the front, top corner of the door, and then open the cover-side exit.

Figure 2-777 Remove one screw

3. Remove one screw, and then rotate the sensor holder up.

Figure 2-778 Remove one screw

Remove the fuser out sensor 669

 4. Disconnect the sensor connector, and then remove the fuser-out sensor from its holder.

Figure 2-779 Disconnect one connector

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feed 2 sensor (on the right door)

Learn how to remove and replace the feed 2 sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the feed 2 sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

670 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-100 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001490 Feed sensor 2

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 671

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-780 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-781 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

672 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-782 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-783 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 673

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-784 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-785 Remove the right door

3. Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
Follow these steps to remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper.

674 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-786 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 2-787 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-788 Remove two screws

4. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-789 Remove one screw

5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.

Figure 2-790 Remove the feed guide take away lower

Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper 675
 6. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-791 Remove two screws

7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one connector
(callout 1).

Figure 2-792 Remove the feed guide take away upper

4. Remove the feed 2 sensor

Follow these steps to remove the feed 2 sensor.

▲ Disconnect the sensor connector, and then remove the feed 2 sensor located on the feed guide take away
upper.

Figure 2-793 Disconnect one connector and remove the feed 2 sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

676 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 677

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cover, dummy LCT JC63-04918B Right door on page 634

Cover, right JC63-04920B Right door on page 634

Cover, right door front JC63-04910B Right door on page 634

Cover, upper right door JC63-04916B Right door on page 634

Feed 2 sensor 0604-001490 Right door on page 634

Fuser out sensor 0604-001393 Right door on page 634

Motor - step JC93-01085A Right door on page 634

Right door damper JC66-04398A Right door on page 634

Right door, link JC95-01970A Right door on page 634

Right door, side hinge JC66-04400A Right door on page 634

Spring, ts JC61-07372A Right door on page 634

Timing belt 6602-003183 Right door on page 634

Timing belt, gear 6602-001730 Right door on page 634

Tray 1 door JC90-01352B Right door on page 634

Tray 1 empty sensor 0604-001393 Right door on page 634

Tray 1 paper length sensor 0604-001393 Right door on page 634

678 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Fuser out sensor Right door on page 634

0604-001393 Tray 1 empty sensor Right door on page 634

0604-001393 Tray 1 paper length sensor Right door on page 634

0604-001490 Feed 2 sensor Right door on page 634

6602-001730 Timing belt, gear Right door on page 634

6602-003183 Timing belt Right door on page 634

JC61-07372A Spring, ts Right door on page 634

JC63-04910B Cover, right door front Right door on page 634

JC63-04916B Cover, upper right door Right door on page 634

JC63-04918B Cover, dummy LCT Right door on page 634

JC63-04920B Cover, right Right door on page 634

JC66-04398A Right door damper Right door on page 634

JC66-04400A Right door, side hinge Right door on page 634

JC90-01352B Tray 1 door Right door on page 634

JC93-01085A Motor - step Right door on page 634

JC95-01970A Right door, link Right door on page 634

Tray 1
View the tray 1 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Tray 1
Parts diagram and parts list for tray 1.

Numerical parts list 679

 Figure 2-794 Tray 1

Table 2-101 Tray 1

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC90-01357B Tray 1, main pickup 1 Not applicable

10 JC93-00540B Tray 1, main rollers 3 Removal and replacement: Tray

1 pickup/reverse/feed roller on
page 680

11 JC90-01355A Tray 1, bracket pickup 1 Not applicable

11-1 JC33-00029B Solenoid, tray 1 1 Removal and replacement: Tray

1 solenoid on page 684

11-4 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

11-5 JC66-04459A Actuator lever, empty 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

680 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-102 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00540B Tray 1 (MP) roller

Required tools

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller.

1. Open Tray 1. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of the cover.

NOTE: The plastic tabs on the edges of the cover might require extra pressure to remove.

Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller 681

 Figure 2-795 Remove the cover

2. Remove the cover shown using a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of the
cover.

NOTE: The flag, it will need to be moved out of the way to remove cover.

Figure 2-796 Remove cover

Note the orientation of the flag.

3. Release the small tab and remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller (callout 2). The flag (callout 1) will
need to be moved out of the way to release rollers. Use caution and remove slowly to avoid loosening the
parts behind the rollers. If these parts come loose, they might fall into the printer and will be difficult to
retrieve. Note the location of all components.

NOTE: It is recommended to replace all three rollers at the same time.

682 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-797 Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

Unpack the replacement assembly 683

 1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

2. Select the Service menu.

3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the service access
code.

4. Select the Service Tools menu.

5. Select the Supply Status menu.

6. Select Field Replacement Unit.

7. Select Tray X Rollers.

8. Select Tray 1 Roller Kit.

9. Select Reset.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 solenoid

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 solenoid.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 solenoid.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-103 Part information

Part number Part description

JC33-00029B Solenoid, Tray 1

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

684 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-798 Remove four screws

Remove the right rear cover 685

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-799 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-800 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

686 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-801 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-802 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Remove the right door 687

 Figure 2-803 Remove the right door

3. Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
Follow these steps to remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-804 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 2-805 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-806 Remove two screws

688 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-807 Remove one screw

5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.

Figure 2-808 Remove the feed guide take away lower

6. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-809 Remove two screws

7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one connector
(callout 1).

Figure 2-810 Remove the feed guide take away upper

4. Remove the MP unit

Follow these steps to remove the MP unit.

1. Hold the right door upright, open the MP tray, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).

Figure 2-811 Release the hinge arm

Remove the MP unit 689

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-812 Remove one screw and bushing cover

3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-813 Remove one e-ring and bushing

4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-814 Remove one e-ring and bushing

5. Remove the shaft.

Figure 2-815 Remove the shaft

6. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 2-816 Remove one screw

690 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

7. Release the hinge.

Figure 2-817 Release the hinge

8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).

Figure 2-818 Remove one screw

9. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-819 Remove one screw

10. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 2-820 Release the feed roller assembly

11. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

Figure 2-821 Rotate the feed roller assembly

Remove the MP unit 691

 12. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-822 Remove three screws

13. Remove the duplex lower guide.

Figure 2-823 Remove the duplex lower guide

14. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-824 Remove one screw

15. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-825 Remove two screws

16. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove two screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-826 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

692 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 17. Release the Tray 1 unit from the right door.

Figure 2-827 Release the Tray 1 unit

18. Remove the MP unit.

Figure 2-828 Remove the Tray 1 unit

5. Remove the Tray 1 solenoid

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 solenoid.

1. Remove two screws, remove three gears, and then release Tray 1.

Figure 2-829 Remove two screws and three gears

Remove the Tray 1 solenoid 693

 2. Remove two screws, three e-rings, and three bushings. Remove the bracket-rear.

Figure 2-830 Remove the bracket-rear

3. Remove seven screws, and then remove the frame-base.

Figure 2-831 Remove seven screws

4. Remove two screws, and then remove the Tray 1 solenoid.

Figure 2-832 Remove two screws

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

694 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 695

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Actuator lever, empty JC66-04459A Tray 1 on page 680

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Tray 1 on page 680

Solenoid, tray 1 JC33-00029B Tray 1 on page 680

Tray 1, bracket pickup JC90-01355A Tray 1 on page 680

Tray 1, main pickup JC90-01357B Tray 1 on page 680

Tray 1, main rollers JC93-00540B Tray 1 on page 680

696 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Tray 1 on page 680

JC33-00029B Solenoid, tray 1 Tray 1 on page 680

JC66-04459A Actuator lever, empty Tray 1 on page 680

JC90-01355A Tray 1, bracket pickup Tray 1 on page 680

JC90-01357B Tray 1, main pickup Tray 1 on page 680

JC93-00540B Tray 1, main rollers Tray 1 on page 680

Right door guide

View the right door guide exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Right door guide

Parts diagram and parts list for the right door guide.

Figure 2-833 Right door guide

Table 2-104 Right door guide

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC95-01969A Side cover guide 1 Not applicable

Numerical parts list 697

 Table 2-104 Right door guide (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

3 6107-001737 Spring, ts 1 Not applicable

4 JC66-04405A Actuator lever, dup 1 Not applicable

6 6107-001731 Spring, cs 4 Not applicable

7 JC66-02289B Idle roller, rubber 4 Not applicable

8 JC61-06988A Feed guide 1 Not applicable

698 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-105 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Actuator lever, dup JC66-04405A Right door guide on page 697

Feed guide JC61-06988A Right door guide on page 697

Idle roller, rubber JC66-02289B Right door guide on page 697

Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Right door guide on page 697

Side cover guide JC95-01969A Right door guide on page 697

Spring, cs 6107-001731 Right door guide on page 697

Spring, ts 6107-001737 Right door guide on page 697

Alphabetical parts list 699

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-106 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Right door guide on page 697

6107-001731 Spring, cs Right door guide on page 697

6107-001737 Spring, ts Right door guide on page 697

JC61-06988A Feed guide Right door guide on page 697

JC66-02289B Idle roller, rubber Right door guide on page 697

JC66-04405A Actuator lever, dup Right door guide on page 697

JC95-01969A Side cover guide Right door guide on page 697

Right door exit and takeaway

View the right door exit and takeaway exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Right door exit and takeaway

Parts diagram and parts list for the right door exit and takeaway.

Figure 2-834 Right door exit and takeaway

Table 2-105 Right door exit and takeaway

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC95-01968A Right door side exit 1 Not applicable

1-2 6107-001737 Spring, ts 1 Not applicable

700 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-105 Right door exit and takeaway (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-3 JC66-04406A Actuator lever, fuser out 1 Not applicable

1-4 0604–001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

2 JC95-01972A Side cover, takeaway 1 Not applicable

2-2 0604-001490 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC93-01467A Switch assembly - right door 1 Not applicable

Right door exit and takeaway 701

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-106 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Actuator lever, fuser out JC66-04406A Right door exit and takeaway on
page 700

Photo interrupter 0604-001490 Right door exit and takeaway on

page 700

Photo-interrupter 0604–001393 Right door exit and takeaway on

page 700

Right door side exit JC95-01968A Right door exit and takeaway on
page 700

Side cover, takeaway JC95-01972A Right door exit and takeaway on

page 700

Spring, ts 6107-001737 Right door exit and takeaway on

page 700

Switch assembly - right door JC93-01467A Right door exit and takeaway on
page 700

702 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-107 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001490 Photo interrupter Right door exit and takeaway on

page 700

0604–001393 Photo-interrupter Right door exit and takeaway on

page 700

6107-001737 Spring, ts Right door exit and takeaway on

page 700

JC66-04406A Actuator lever, fuser out Right door exit and takeaway on
page 700

JC93-01467A Switch assembly - right door Right door exit and takeaway on
page 700

JC95-01968A Right door side exit Right door exit and takeaway on
page 700

JC95-01972A Side cover, takeaway Right door exit and takeaway on

page 700

Drive system
View the drive system exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

T2 transfer assembly
Parts diagram and parts list for the T2 transfer assembly.

Numerical parts list 703

 Figure 2-835 T2 transfer assembly

Table 2-106 T2 transfer assembly

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-01078A T2 transfer 1 Not applicable

1 JC93-01080A T2 transfer roller assembly 1 Not applicable

704 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-107 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

T2 transfer JC93-01078A T2 transfer assembly on page

704

T2 transfer roller assembly JC93-01080A T2 transfer assembly on page

704

Alphabetical parts list 705

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-108 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC93-01078A T2 transfer T2 transfer assembly on page

704

JC93-01080A T2 transfer roller assembly T2 transfer assembly on page

704

ADF (LX models)

View the ADF (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ADF (LX models)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF (LX models).

Figure 2-836 ADF (LX models)

Table 2-107 ADF (LX models)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC97-04853A ADF cover open (LX) 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF) jam
access cover (LX) on page 712

2 JC97-04856B ADF pickup (LX) 1 Not applicable

3 JC63-05563A ADF, front cover (LX) 1 Not applicable

706 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-107 ADF (LX models) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

4 JC63-05561A ADF, cover rear (LX) 1 Not applicable

7 JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) input
tray (LX) on page 715

7 X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) input
tray (LX) on page 715

7-4 JC66-04079A ADF pinion gear (LX) 1 Not applicable

7-5 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (LX bundles).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (LX/du bundles).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-108 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-05074A Document feeder whole unit assembly (LX models)

Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX) 707

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-837 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

708 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-838 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (LX).

1. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector cover
(callout 2).

Figure 2-839 Remove the document feeder connector cover

Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX) 709

 2. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 2-840 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

4. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.

Figure 2-841 Release the document feeder hinge screws

710 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 5. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.

Figure 2-842 Lift and remove the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 711

 Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) jam access cover (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-109 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04853A Jam access cover (LX)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

712 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-843 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-844 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 713

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-845 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the document feeder jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder jam access cover.

1. Open the jam access cover, and then remove one screw.

Figure 2-846 Remove the jam access cover screw

714 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove the pivot pin, and then pivot the cover and release the hinge to remove the jam access cover.

Figure 2-847 Remove the jam access cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) input tray (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (LX).

Unpack the replacement assembly 715

 To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-110 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (E778xx series)

X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) E783xx series)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

716 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-848 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom of the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-849 Open the document feeder

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 717

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-850 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-851 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

718 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-852 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-853 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray.

▲ Disconnect one connector on document feeder board (callout 1), remove one screw and hinge pin (callout
2), and then remove the input tray.

NOTE: Carefully guide the cable out of the chassis while removing the tray.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray 719

 Figure 2-854 Remove the input tray connector, screw, and hinge pin

1
2

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Contact image sensor (CIS)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

720 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-111 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04920A Contact image sensor (CIS)

JC97-04722A Contact image sensor (CIS) (E778xx series)

JC97-04920A Contact image sensor (CIS) (E783xx series)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Removal and replacement: Contact image sensor (CIS) 721

 Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-855 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom of the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-856 Open the document feeder

722 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-857 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-858 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 723

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-859 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-860 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the pick and feed roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the pick and feed roller assembly.

724 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-861 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws on the front cover.

Figure 2-862 Remove two screws on front cover

Remove the pick and feed roller assembly 725

 3. Open the ADF and then remove three screw caps.

Figure 2-863 Remove three screw caps

4. Remove three screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 2-864 Remove three screws and front cover

726 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

5. Rotate the pick/feed roller assembly to release the sheet metal tab from ADF frame.

Figure 2-865 Release the sheet metal tab from ADF frame

6. To remove the pick/feed roller assembly lift up on the front side (callout 1) and, then slide towards the front
(callout 2) to release the pick/feed roller assembly.

Figure 2-866 Release the pick/feed roller assembly

Remove the pick and feed roller assembly 727

 7. Rotate the roller assembly over, and then disconnect one connectors. Remove the document feeder pick
roller assembly.

Figure 2-867 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly

TIP: Note the four flags (callout 1) on the bottom of the pick/feed roller assembly. When reinstalling, hold
up the flags while reinstall to allow for proper installation.

Figure 2-868 Pick/Feed roller assembly four flags

4. Remove the CIS assembly

Follow these steps to remove the CIS assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover. The cover must be reinstalled in
the same orientation.

728 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-869 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly (callout 2).

Figure 2-870 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin

3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 729

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder main motor (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.

View a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

730 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-112 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163A Main motor assembly (LX)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-871 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 731

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-872 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-873 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the main motor

Follow these steps to remove the main motor.

732 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove the tension spring (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-874 Remove the main motor connector, spring, and screws

2
1

2. Carefully lift the motor out while releasing the gear belt.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.

c. Install the tension spring.

d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount screws)
is providing the tension to the belt.

Remove the main motor 733

 Figure 2-875 Main motor and gear belt

3. Remove the CIS assembly

Follow these steps to remove the CIS assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover. The cover must be reinstalled in
the same orientation.

Figure 2-876 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws

734 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly (callout 2).

Figure 2-877 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin

3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 735

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ADF cover open (LX) JC97-04853A ADF (LX models) on page 706

ADF pickup (LX) JC97-04856B ADF (LX models) on page 706

ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC97-04859A ADF (LX models) on page 706

ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) X3A84-60103 ADF (LX models) on page 706

ADF, cover rear (LX) JC63-05561A ADF (LX models) on page 706

ADF, front cover (LX) JC63-05563A ADF (LX models) on page 706

736 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC63-05561A ADF, cover rear (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 706

JC63-05563A ADF, front cover (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 706

JC97-04853A ADF cover open (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 706

JC97-04856B ADF pickup (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 706

JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) ADF (LX models) on page 706

X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) ADF (LX models) on page 706

ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)

View the ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models).

Figure 2-878 ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)

Numerical parts list 737

 Table 2-113 ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-1 JC92-02962A LX PCA 1 Removal and replacement: PCA-

Scanner (LX) on page 742

1-5 JC97-04528A LX, hinge r 1 Not applicable

1-6 JC97-04527A LX, hinge l 1 Not applicable

2-2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

2-5 JC97-04857A Pick Roller Assy - LX 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF) pick/
feed roller assembly (LX) on
page 738

2-5-1 JC97-04099A LX pick roller 1 Not applicable

2-5-6 JC97-04860A LX feed roller 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller assembly (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup/feed roller assembly (LX/du models).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup/feed roller assembly (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

738 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-114 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04857A Pick feed roller assembly (LX)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly.

1. Open the document feeder cover.

Figure 2-879 Open the document feeder cover

Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly 739
 2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pick roller assembly cover.

NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)

Figure 2-880 Remove the document feeder cover screws

3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-881 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector

740 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Before proceeding, take note of the removed roller cover and the roller assembly.

Figure 2-882 Document feeder pick roller cover and roller assembly

5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on both sides
of the assembly) are correctly installed and move freely.

Figure 2-883 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket

6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide the shaft
towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.

CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.

NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly 741
 Figure 2-884 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly clips

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

742 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-115 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02962A Document feeder PCA assembly (LX)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner (LX) 743

 1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-885 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-886 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

744 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-887 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA.

▲ Disconnect six connectors and the ground wire from PCA, remove four screws, and then remove the
document feeder PCA (LX).

Figure 2-888 Document feeder PCA (LX)

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA 745

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

746 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

LX PCA JC92-02962A ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX

models) on page 738

LX feed roller JC97-04860A ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX

models) on page 738

LX pick roller JC97-04099A ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX

models) on page 738

LX, hinge l JC97-04527A ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX

models) on page 738

LX, hinge r JC97-04528A ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX

models) on page 738

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX

models) on page 738

Pick Roller Assy - LX JC97-04857A ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX
models) on page 738

Alphabetical parts list 747

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX

models) on page 738

JC92-02962A LX PCA ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX

models) on page 738

JC97-04099A LX pick roller ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX

models) on page 738

JC97-04527A LX, hinge l ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX

models) on page 738

JC97-04528A LX, hinge r ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX

models) on page 738

JC97-04857A Pick Roller Assy - LX ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX
models) on page 738

JC97-04860A LX feed roller ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX

models) on page 738

ADF main frame assembly (LX models)

View the ADF main frame assembly (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ADF main frame assembly (LX/du models)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF main frame assembly (LX models).

748 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-889 ADF main frame (LX models)

13

Table 2-116 ADF main frame assembly (LX models)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-1 JC97-04586A LX separation housing 1 Not applicable

1-2 JC97-04852A ADF LX separation roller 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder separation
roller assembly (LX) on page
750

1-2-1 JC97-04861A ADF LX separation sub roller Not applicable

1-3 JC69-01326A Friction pad 1 Not applicable

5-5 JC66-04104A Actuator, output1 1 Not applicable

6-2 JC66-04105A Actuator, feed out 1 Not applicable

6-3 JC66-04103A Actuator, registration 1 Not applicable

6-4 0604-001381 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

6-5 0604–001393 Photo interrupter1 1 Not applicable

ADF main frame assembly (LX/du models) 749

 Table 2-116 ADF main frame assembly (LX models) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

7 JC31-00156C Feed motor assembly (Motor, bldc type 1) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder feed motor
(LX) on page 756

13 JC31-00163A Motor - Step main 1 Not applicable

16 JC47-00038A LX - Motor feed DC 1 Not applicable

17 JC66-04100A LX - Link Cover Open 1 Not applicable

19 JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) 1 Not applicable

19 JC97-04722A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) 1 Not applicable

19 JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) 1 Not applicable

1Early models only during original release. This part removed from newer models.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

750 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-117 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04852A ADF separation roller assembly (LX)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly.

1. Open the document feeder cover.

Figure 2-890 Open the document feeder cover

Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly 751
 2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pick roller assembly cover.

NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)

Figure 2-891 Remove the document feeder cover screws

3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-892 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector

752 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Before proceeding, take note of the removed roller cover and the roller assembly.

Figure 2-893 Document feeder pick roller cover and roller assembly

5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on both sides
of the assembly) are correctly installed and move freely.

Figure 2-894 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket

6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide the shaft
towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.

CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.

NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly 753
 Figure 2-895 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly clips

2. Remove the LX document feeder separation roller

Follow these steps to remove the LX document feeder separation roller.

1. Rotate the separation roller cover up to release it, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-896 Remove the separation roller cover

754 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Before proceeding, take note of the removed roller cover and the roller assembly.

Figure 2-897 Document feeder separation roller cover and roller assembly

3. Release two claws, and then remove the separation roller assembly.

NOTE: The separation roller assembly spring under the roller is not captive.

Figure 2-898 Remove the separation roller assembly

Remove the LX document feeder separation roller 755

 4. When the assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the spring is correctly seated in the holder.

Figure 2-899 Separation roller assembly spring

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder feed motor (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder feed motor (LX).

756 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder feed motor (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-118 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00156C Feed motor assembly (LX) (bldc type 1)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder feed motor (LX) 757

 1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-900 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-901 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

758 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-902 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the feed motor.

1. Loosen the cables in the cable guide, remove two screws and then move the cable guide out of the way.

Figure 2-903 Feed motor cable guide

Remove the feed motor 759

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then carefully lift the motor out to remove.

Figure 2-904 Remove the feed motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

760 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ADF LX separation roller JC97-04852A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

ADF LX separation sub roller JC97-04861A ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 749

Actuator, feed out JC66-04105A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

Actuator, output1 JC66-04104A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

Actuator, registration JC66-04103A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) JC97-04920A ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 749

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) JC97-04722A ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 749

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 749

Friction pad JC69-01326A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

LX - Link Cover Open JC66-04100A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

LX - Motor feed DC JC47-00038A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

LX separation housing JC97-04586A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

Motor - Step main JC31-00163A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

Photo interrupter1 0604–001393 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

Alphabetical parts list 761

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 749

0604-001381 Photo interrupter ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

0604–001393 Photo interrupter1 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

JC31-00163A Motor - Step main ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

JC47-00038A LX - Motor feed DC ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

JC66-04100A LX - Link Cover Open ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

JC66-04103A Actuator, registration ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

JC66-04104A Actuator, output1 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

JC66-04105A Actuator, feed out ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

JC69-01326A Friction pad ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

JC97-04586A LX separation housing ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

JC97-04722A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 749

JC97-04852A ADF LX separation roller ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 749

JC97-04861A ADF LX separation sub roller ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 749

JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 749

Flow ADF (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Flow ADF (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF (GX/sGX).

762 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-905 Flow ADF (GX/sGX)

Table 2-119 ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC97-04869A ADF Cover open 1 Not applicable

2 JC97-04872A Pickup, upper - GX 1 Not applicable

2 JC97-04646B Pickup, upper - sGX 1 Not applicable

3 JC66-02270A Cover, hinge - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

5 JC97-04881A Cover, front - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

6 JC97-04879A Dummy, front - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

8 JC97-04692A Damper - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

9 JC97-04880A Cover, bottom - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

10 JC97-04883A Main frame - GX 1 Not applicable

10 JC97-04882A Main frame sGX 1 Not applicable

13 JC63-05566A Cover, rear - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (ultrasonic) (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement: Flow
ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA
(GX/sGX) on page 770

Flow ADF (GX/sGX) 763

 Table 2-119 ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

Not shown JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (ultrasonic) (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement: Flow
ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA
(GX/sGX) on page 770

Complete JC97-04955A Flow ADF - GX 1 Removal and replacement: Flow

ADF whole unit (GX/sGX) on
page 764

Complete JC97-04956A Non Flow ADF - sGX 1 Removal and replacement: Flow
ADF whole unit (GX/sGX) on
page 764

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (GX/sGX bundles).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX bundles).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-120 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04955A Flow ADF - GX

JC97-04956A Non Flow ADF - sGX

764 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-906 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 765

 ▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-907 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).

1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-908 Remove document feeder connector cover

766 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness
from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 2-909 Remove the cable choke

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one grounding
wire.

Figure 2-910 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a full
90°.

IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 767

 Figure 2-911 Alignment marks

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 2-912 Remove screws

768 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-913 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

769
 a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA (GX/sGX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder ultrasonic sensor (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder feed ultrasonic sensor (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-121 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (GX only)

JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

770 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-914 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 771

 2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom of the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-915 Open the document feeder

3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-916 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

772 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-917 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-918 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 773

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-919 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly.

1. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-920 Remove 4 screws.

774 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-921 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

4. Remove the paper path cover

Follow these steps to remove the paper path cover.

Remove the paper path cover 775

 ▲ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.

Figure 2-922 Remove the document feeder paper path cover

5. Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA

Follow these steps to remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA.

1. Remove the separation roller, and then remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-923 Remove one screw

776 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove the pick/feed cover.

Figure 2-924 Remove the pick/feed cover

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the ultrasonic sensor.

Figure 2-925 Remove the ultrasonic sensor

6.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

777
 b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

778 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ADF Cover open JC97-04869A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Cover, bottom - GX/sGX JC97-04880A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Cover, front - GX/sGX JC97-04881A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Cover, hinge - GX/sGX JC66-02270A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Cover, rear - GX/sGX JC63-05566A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Damper - GX/sGX JC97-04692A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Dummy, front - GX/sGX JC97-04879A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Flow ADF - GX JC97-04955A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Main frame - GX JC97-04883A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Main frame sGX JC97-04882A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Non Flow ADF - sGX JC97-04956A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

PCA - ADF receiver (ultrasonic) (GX only) JC92-02967A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page
763

PCA - ADF transmitter (ultrasonic) (GX only) JC92-02966A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page
763

Pickup, upper - GX JC97-04872A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Pickup, upper - sGX JC97-04646B ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Alphabetical parts list 779

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC63-05566A Cover, rear - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

JC66-02270A Cover, hinge - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (ultrasonic) (GX only) ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page
763

JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (ultrasonic) (GX only) ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page
763

JC97-04646B Pickup, upper - sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

JC97-04692A Damper - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

JC97-04869A ADF Cover open ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

JC97-04872A Pickup, upper - GX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

JC97-04879A Dummy, front - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

JC97-04880A Cover, bottom - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

JC97-04881A Cover, front - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

JC97-04882A Main frame sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

JC97-04883A Main frame - GX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

JC97-04955A Flow ADF - GX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

JC97-04956A Non Flow ADF - sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

763

Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF open cover (GX/sGX).

780 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-926 ADF open cover (GX/sGX)

Table 2-122 Flow ADF open cover

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC97-04869A Cover, open (GX/sGX) 1 Removal and replacement: Flow

ADF jam access cover (GX/sGX)
on page 781

2 JC97-04696B Cover, open lower (GX/sGX) 1 Not applicable

2-5-1 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 4 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF jam access cover (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF jam access cover (GX/sGX) 781
 View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-123 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04869A Open cover - GX

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

782 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-927 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom of the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-928 Open the document feeder

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 783

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-929 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-930 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

784 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-931 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-932 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the document feeder jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder jam access cover.

Remove the document feeder jam access cover 785

 1. Disconnect connector at document feeder PCA and route cable out.

Figure 2-933 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect the ground wire.

Figure 2-934 Remove the jam access cover ground wire

786 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1), remove hinge (pivot) pin, and then remove door arm support (callout 2)

Figure 2-935 Remove the jam access cover door arm support

4. Remove the jam access cover.

4.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

787
 a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

788 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cover, open (GX/sGX) JC97-04869A Flow ADF open cover on page 781

Cover, open lower (GX/sGX) JC97-04696B Flow ADF open cover on page 781

Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 Flow ADF open cover on page 781

Alphabetical parts list 789

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF open cover on page 781

JC97-04696B Cover, open lower (GX/sGX) Flow ADF open cover on page 781

JC97-04869A Cover, open (GX/sGX) Flow ADF open cover on page 781

Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX).

790 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-936 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

Table 2-124 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2-1 JC97-04650A Pick feed roller assembly (GX/sGX) 1 Removal and replacement: Flow
ADF pickup roller assembly (GX/
sGX) on page 791

2-2 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

2-5 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF pickup roller assembly (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup roller assembly (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF pickup roller assembly (GX/sGX) 791
 View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup roller assembly (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-125 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04650A Pick feed roller assembly - GX/sGX

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

792 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly.

1. Open the document feeder top cover.

2. Remove the pickup roller assembly:

a. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-937 Remove 4 screws.

b. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-938 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly 793

 3. Remove the pickup rollers:

a. Remove four screws and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-939 Remove the pickup roller assembly cover

b. Remove two plastic clips and two bushings, disconnect two springs, and then remove the shaft
coupler.

NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.

794 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-940 Remove the pickup roller components

Figure 2-941 Pickup roller components-disassembled

c. Slide the roller shaft and then remove the pickup roller assembly.

Figure 2-942 Remove the pickup roller assembly

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

795
 a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

ADF pick roller (GX/sGX)

After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

2. Select the Service menu.

3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the service access
code.

4. Select the Service Tools menu.

5. Select the Supply Status menu.

6. Select Field Replacement Unit.

7. Select ADF Pick Roller.

8. Select ADF Pick Roller.

9. Select Reset.

796 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-126 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

on page 791

Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

on page 791

Pick feed roller assembly (GX/sGX) JC97-04650A Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)
on page 791

Alphabetical parts list 797

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-127 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

on page 791

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

on page 791

JC97-04650A Pick feed roller assembly (GX/sGX) Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)
on page 791

Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX).

Figure 2-943 Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)

798 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-126 Flow ADF stacker

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC97-04658B Stacker -GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement: Flow

ADF input tray (GX/sGX) on page
799

1-6 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

6 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC82-00693A Flow ADF - stacker upper CM 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF input tray (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-127 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04658B Stacker - Gx/sGX

Required tools

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF input tray (GX/sGX) 799

 ● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-944 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

800 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom of the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-945 Open the document feeder

3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-946 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 801

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-947 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-948 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

802 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-949 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the dampening unit

Follow these steps to remove the dampening unit.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the damping unit.

Figure 2-950 Remove the document feeder dampening unit

4. Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly.

Remove the dampening unit 803

 1. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-951 Remove 4 screws.

2. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-952 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

804 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

5. Remove the input tray
Follow these steps to remove the input tray.

1. Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector, and then remove cable from guide.

Figure 2-953 Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector

2. Lift the tray from the front, and pivot the tray outward to remove.

6.

Remove the input tray 805

 1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

806 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Flow ADF - stacker upper CM JC82-00693A Flow ADF stacker on page 799

Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 Flow ADF stacker on page 799

Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Flow ADF stacker on page 799

Stacker -GX/sGX JC97-04658B Flow ADF stacker on page 799

Alphabetical parts list 807

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF stacker on page 799

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF stacker on page 799

JC82-00693A Flow ADF - stacker upper CM Flow ADF stacker on page 799

JC97-04658B Stacker -GX/sGX Flow ADF stacker on page 799

Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)

Figure 2-954 Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)

1-3

808 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-128 Flow ADF main

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-1 JC97-04915A Separation roller assembly - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement: Flow
ADF separation roller assembly
on page 810

1-2 JC97-04652A Cover, separation roller - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

1-3 JC61-08235A Spring CS 1 Not applicable

5 JC97-04656B Scan in lower assembly - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement: Flow

ADF scan in lower assembly (GX/
sGX) on page 844

7 0609-001558 Contact image sensor - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement: Flow

ADF contact image sensor (CIS)
(GX/sGX) on page 815

8 JC97-04681A Drive release pickup - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement: Flow

ADF rear motors (GX/sGX) on
page 823

11 JC92-02964A PCA - AF HIC (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement: Flow

ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX) on page
832

11 JC92-02964B PCA - sGX 1 Removal and replacement: PCA-

Scanner sGX (dn models only)
on page 851

12 JC97-04680A Motor, feed drive - GX/sGX 4 Removal and replacement: Flow

ADF front motor (GX/sGX) on
page 836

13 JC97-04640A Hinge L - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

14 JC97-04641A Hinge R - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

16 JC61-07694A Motor, ADF fan 1 Not applicable

17 JC31-00168A Fan - GX/sGX (CIS) 1 Removal and replacement:

Contact image sensor (CIS) fan
(GX/sGX) on page 840

19 JC97-04679A Drive - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement: Flow

ADF rear motors (GX/sGX) on
page 823

20 JC31-00177A Step motor, ip 1 Removal and replacement: Flow

ADF rear motors (GX/sGX) on
page 823

21 JC31-00146A Fan type 4 ADF GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement: Flow

ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX) on page
832

23 JC97-04668B Input tray - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

26 JC97-04687A White roller - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

27 JC97-04830A Scan out - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

29 JC97-04682A Motor, drive release scan 1 Not applicable

36 6602-001730 Timing belt gear - GX/sGX 3 Not applicable

Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX) 809

 Table 2-128 Flow ADF main (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

Not shown JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (GX only) 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only) 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF separation roller assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-129 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04915A Separation roller assembly - GX\sGX

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

810 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly.

1. Slightly lift the input tray, and then remove the separation roller cover.

Figure 2-955 Remove the separation roller cover

2. Remove one plastic clip.

NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.

Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly 811

 Figure 2-956 Remove one plastic clip

3. Slide the roller assembly to the front, and then pull up to release the claws from the shaft.

Reinstallation tip: Position the spring and shaft before attaching the claws to the shaft.

Figure 2-957 Release the separation roller

4. Remove the separation roller.

NOTE: Make sure that the sponge washer (circled in a previous step) is retained during the removal of the
roller assembly–it might fall off.

812 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-958 Remove the separation roller

TIP: Re-assembly tip

1. Put the spring to the arrow direction at the bottom of the holder.

2. Insert the spring at the hole carefully.

Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly 813

 3. Push the separation roller assembly to the bottom (Callout 1), then insert the assembly (2 joints) to
the shaft (Callout 2)

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

814 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Flow ADF separation roller

After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

2. Select the Service menu.

3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the service access
code.

4. Select the Service Tools menu.

5. Select the Supply Status menu.

6. Select Field Replacement Unit.

7. Select ADF Separation (Reverse) Roller.

8. Select ADF Separation Roller.

9. Select Reset.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF contact image sensor (CIS) (GX/sGX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 815

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-130 Part information

Part number Part description

0609-001558 Contact image sensor - GX/sGX

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

816 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-959 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom of the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-960 Open the document feeder

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 817

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-961 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-962 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

818 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-963 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-964 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly.

Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly 819

 1. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-965 Remove 4 screws.

2. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-966 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

820 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Remove the paper path cover
Follow these steps to remove the paper path cover.

▲ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.

Figure 2-967 Remove the document feeder paper path cover

5. Remove the CIS assembly

Follow these steps to remove the CIS assembly.

Remove the paper path cover 821

 1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover. The cover must be reinstalled in
the same orientation.

Figure 2-968 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly (callout 2).

Figure 2-969 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin

3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.

6.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

822 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF rear motors (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder rear motors (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder rear motors (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF rear motors (GX/sGX) 823

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-131 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04679A Drive - GX/sGX

JC97-04681A Drive release pickup - GX/sGX

JC97-04680A Pickup motor

JC97-04680A Pre-REGI motor

JC97-04680A Exit motor

JC97-04680A Feed motor

JC31-00177A REGI motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Identify the document feeder motors

Follow these steps to identify the document feeder motors.

824 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Use the figure below to locate the motor.

Figure 2-970 Document feeder motors identification

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

Callout Description

1 Motor 1

2 Motor 2

3 Pickup motor

4 Pre-REGI motor

5 Exit motor

6 Feed motor

7 REGI motor

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 825

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-971 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-972 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

826 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-973 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove motors 1 and 2

Follow these steps to remove motors 1 and 2.

▲ Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

Figure 2-974 Remove the motor

4. Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors

Follow these steps to remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors.

1. Loosen the cable retainer, and then disconnect one connector from the motor.

TIP: Remove the connector harness from the retainer, and then disconnect the connector.

Remove motors 1 and 2 827

 Figure 2-975 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the pickup motor off
the screws to remove it.

NOTE:

● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the motor
pulley.

● Install the tension spring.

● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount screws)
is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-976 Pickup motor

828 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the pre-REGI motor
off the screws to remove it.

NOTE:

● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the motor
pulley.

● Install the tension spring.

● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount screws)
is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-977 Pre-REGI motor

5. Remove the exit motor

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor.

Remove the exit motor 829

 1. Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the CIS fan.

Figure 2-978 Remove the main fan

2. Remove the spring (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), loosen three screws, and then remove
the exit motor.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Install the tension spring.

c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount screws)
is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-979 Remove the motor

830 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

6. Remove the feed motor
Follow these steps to remove the feed motor.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-980 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove two screws, and then remove motor.

Figure 2-981 Remove the motor

7. Remove the REGI motor

Follow these steps to remove the REGI motor.

1. Remove the rear cover.

2. Remove the Pre-REGI motor.

Remove the feed motor 831

 3. Disconnect one connector from the motor.

TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.

4. Remove one spring, loosen (do not remove) 3 screws, and then slide the motor off the screws to remove it.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Install the tension spring.

c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount screws)
is providing the tension to the belt.

8.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA fan (GX/sGX).

832 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA fan (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-132 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00146A Document feeder PCA fan assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX) 833

 1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-982 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-983 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

834 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-984 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the document feeder PCA fan

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder PCA fan.

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and then release two tabs (callout 2) to remove the fan.

Reinstallation tip: Install the fan with the correct orientation when reinstalling.

Figure 2-985 Remove the document feeder PCA fan connector

3. Remove the REGI motor

Follow these steps to remove the REGI motor.

1. Remove the rear cover.

2. Remove the Pre-REGI motor.

3. Disconnect one connector from the motor.

TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.

Remove the document feeder PCA fan 835

 4. Remove one spring, loosen (do not remove) 3 screws, and then slide the motor off the screws to remove it.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Install the tension spring.

c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount screws)
is providing the tension to the belt.

4.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF front motor (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder front motor (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

836 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder front motor (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-133 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00177A Motor, step

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF front motor (GX/sGX) 837

 1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-986 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-987 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

838 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-988 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the front motor

Follow these steps to remove the front motor.

▲ Remove two screws and disconnect one connector, and then remove the motor.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.

c. Install the tension spring.

d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount screws)
is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-989 Remove the document feeder front motor

Remove the front motor 839

 3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Contact image sensor (CIS) fan (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS fan (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS fan (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

840 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-134 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00168A CIS fan

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 841

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-990 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-991 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

842 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-992 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the document feeder CIS fan

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder CIS fan.

▲ Remove one connector, and then remove two mounting screws to remove the fan.

Figure 2-993 Remove the document feeder CIS fan

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the document feeder CIS fan 843

 b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF scan in lower assembly (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder scan in lower assembly (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder scan in lower assembly (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

844 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-135 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04656B Scan in lower assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 845

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-994 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom of the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-995 Open the document feeder

846 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-996 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-997 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 847

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-998 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-999 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the scan in lower assembly

Follow these steps to remove the scan in lower assembly.

848 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws (ADF front).

Figure 2-1000 Remove two screws

2. Remove five screws (ADF back; four sheet-metal and one ground).

Figure 2-1001 Remove five screws

3. Remove one screw (ADF back).

Figure 2-1002 Remove one screw

4. At the front corner, carefully pry the scan in lower assembly away from the ADF frame.

IMPORTANT: Locate the dimples in the scan in lower assembly. Separate the dimples from the ADF frame.

Remove the scan in lower assembly 849

 NOTE: When installing a replacement scan in lower assembly, do not crease or wrinkle the attached Mylar.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 2-1003 Pry the scan in lower assembly away from the ADF

4.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

850 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner sGX (dn models only)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA-scanner (sGX dn models).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA-scanner (sGX dn models).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-136 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02964A PCA-scanner (sGX dn models)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner sGX (dn models only) 851

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-1004 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

852 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-1005 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).

1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-1006 Remove document feeder connector cover

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 853

 2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness
from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 2-1007 Remove the cable choke

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one grounding
wire.

Figure 2-1008 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a full
90°.

IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.

854 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-1009 Alignment marks

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 2-1010 Remove screws

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 855

 6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-1011 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4. Remove the scan joint board

Follow these steps to remove the scan joint board.

1. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.

Figure 2-1012 Release scan-left cover

856 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove three screw-caps and three screws, and then remove the scan-right cover.

Figure 2-1013 Remove scan-right cover

3. At the top of the scanner, remove three screw caps and three screws.

Figure 2-1014 Remove three screws

Remove the scan joint board 857

 4. At the back of the scanner, remove three screw caps and three screws, and then remove the scan-rear
cover.

Figure 2-1015 Remove three screws and the scanner rear cover

5. Disconnect all harnesses. Remove four screws, and then release the scanner PCA.

NOTE: There are two empty connectors.

Figure 2-1016 Remove screws and release scanner PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

858 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 859

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Contact image sensor - GX/sGX 0609-001558 Flow ADF main on page 809

Cover, separation roller - GX/sGX JC97-04652A Flow ADF main on page 809

Drive - GX/sGX JC97-04679A Flow ADF main on page 809

Drive release pickup - GX/sGX JC97-04681A Flow ADF main on page 809

Fan - GX/sGX (CIS) JC31-00168A Flow ADF main on page 809

Fan type 4 ADF GX/sGX JC31-00146A Flow ADF main on page 809

Hinge L - GX/sGX JC97-04640A Flow ADF main on page 809

Hinge R - GX/sGX JC97-04641A Flow ADF main on page 809

Input tray - GX/sGX JC97-04668B Flow ADF main on page 809

Motor, ADF fan JC61-07694A Flow ADF main on page 809

Motor, drive release scan JC97-04682A Flow ADF main on page 809

Motor, feed drive - GX/sGX JC97-04680A Flow ADF main on page 809

PCA - ADF receiver (GX only) JC92-02967A Flow ADF main on page 809

PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only) JC92-02966A Flow ADF main on page 809

PCA - AF HIC (GX only) JC92-02964A Flow ADF main on page 809

PCA - sGX JC92-02964B Flow ADF main on page 809

Scan in lower assembly - GX/sGX JC97-04656B Flow ADF main on page 809

Scan out - GX/sGX JC97-04830A Flow ADF main on page 809

Separation roller assembly - GX/sGX JC97-04915A Flow ADF main on page 809

Spring CS JC61-08235A Flow ADF main on page 809

Step motor, ip JC31-00177A Flow ADF main on page 809

Timing belt gear - GX/sGX 6602-001730 Flow ADF main on page 809

White roller - GX/sGX JC97-04687A Flow ADF main on page 809

860 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0609-001558 Contact image sensor - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

6602-001730 Timing belt gear - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC31-00146A Fan type 4 ADF GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC31-00168A Fan - GX/sGX (CIS) Flow ADF main on page 809

JC31-00177A Step motor, ip Flow ADF main on page 809

JC61-07694A Motor, ADF fan Flow ADF main on page 809

JC61-08235A Spring CS Flow ADF main on page 809

JC92-02964A PCA - AF HIC (GX only) Flow ADF main on page 809

JC92-02964B PCA - sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only) Flow ADF main on page 809

JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (GX only) Flow ADF main on page 809

JC97-04640A Hinge L - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC97-04641A Hinge R - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC97-04652A Cover, separation roller - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC97-04656B Scan in lower assembly - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC97-04668B Input tray - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC97-04679A Drive - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC97-04680A Motor, feed drive - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC97-04681A Drive release pickup - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC97-04682A Motor, drive release scan Flow ADF main on page 809

JC97-04687A White roller - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC97-04830A Scan out - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

JC97-04915A Separation roller assembly - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 809

Image scanner
View the image scanner exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Image scanner
Parts diagram and parts list for the image scanner.

Numerical parts list 861

 Figure 2-1017 Image scanner

Table 2-137 Image scanner

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC97-04522B Scanner glass 1 Removal and replacement:

Scanner glass on page 863

2 JC92-02781A PCA scanner 1 Not applicable

3 JC01-00101A Tempered scan glass 1 Not applicable

4 JC97-04516A Scanner open sensor 1 Not applicable

5 JC97-04521A Scanner - front lamp 1 Removal and replacement: LED

lamp module on page 865

862 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-137 Image scanner (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

7 JC31-00158A Motor, step 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02128A Harness - Scanjoint to main 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02129A Harness - Home open sensor 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Scanner glass

Learn how to remove and replace the scanner glass.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the scanner glass.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-138 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04522B Scanner glass

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Removal and replacement: Scanner glass 863

 Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the scanner glass

Follow these steps to remove the scanner glass.

▲ CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed.

Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right to
remove it.

Figure 2-1018 Remove scanner glass

2.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the

864 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: LED lamp module

Learn how to remove and replace the LED lamp module.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the LED lamp module.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: LED lamp module 865

 Table 2-139 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04521A Scanner - front lamp

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-1019 Remove the formatter cover

866 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the upper rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-1020 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).

1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-1021 Remove document feeder connector cover

Remove the upper rear cover 867

 2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness
from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 2-1022 Remove the cable choke

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one grounding
wire.

Figure 2-1023 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a full
90°.

IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.

868 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-1024 Alignment marks

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 2-1025 Remove screws

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 869

 6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-1026 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4. Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (LX).

1. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector cover
(callout 2).

Figure 2-1027 Remove the document feeder connector cover

870 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 2-1028 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

4. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.

Figure 2-1029 Release the document feeder hinge screws

Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX) 871

 5. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.

Figure 2-1030 Lift and remove the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

5. Remove the scanner glass

Follow these steps to remove the scanner glass.

▲ CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed.

Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right to
remove it.

Figure 2-1031 Remove scanner glass

6. Remove the LED lamp module

Follow these steps to remove the LED lamp module.

872 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed. then remove
the LED lamp module.

Remove the transparent tape.

Figure 2-1032 Remove transparent tape

2. Disconnect the flat cable.

Figure 2-1033 Disconnect cable

3. Remove four screws. Remove the LED lamp module.

Figure 2-1034 Remove screws and release LED lamp module

Remove the LED lamp module 873

 7.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

874 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Motor, step JC31-00158A Image scanner on page 862

PCA scanner JC92-02781A Image scanner on page 862

Scanner - front lamp JC97-04521A Image scanner on page 862

Scanner glass JC97-04522B Image scanner on page 862

Scanner open sensor JC97-04516A Image scanner on page 862

Tempered scan glass JC01-00101A Image scanner on page 862

Alphabetical parts list 875

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC01-00101A Tempered scan glass Image scanner on page 862

JC31-00158A Motor, step Image scanner on page 862

JC92-02781A PCA scanner Image scanner on page 862

JC97-04516A Scanner open sensor Image scanner on page 862

JC97-04521A Scanner - front lamp Image scanner on page 862

JC97-04522B Scanner glass Image scanner on page 862

Image scanner, lower

View the image scanner, lower exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Image scanner, lower

Parts diagram and parts list for the lower image scanner.

876 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-1035 Image scanner, lower

Table 2-140 Image scanner, lower

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC97-04509A Scanner - FFC CCD 1 Not applicable

2 JC97-04512A Scanner - guide harness 1 Not applicable

(JC39-02131 WLED I/F Harness, JC92-02728A

WLED I/F PBA included)

3 JC97-04507A Scanner - APS 1 Removal and replacement: APS

sensor on page 879

3-1 604-001453 Photo interrupter 2 Not applicable

4 JC97-04523B Scanner assembly - CCD and lens 1 Removal and replacement:

Scanner assembly - CDD and
lens on page 878

Not shown JC81-09891A Auto adjustment chart A3 Ver. 1.0 1 Not applicable

Image scanner, lower 877

 Removal and replacement: Scanner assembly - CDD and lens
Learn how to remove and replace the scanner CDD and lens.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the scanner CDD and lens.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-141 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04523B Scanner assembly -CDD and lens

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

878 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: APS sensor

Learn how to remove and replace the APS sensor.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the APS sensor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-142 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04507A APS sensor assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

Removal and replacement: APS sensor 879

 ○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.

Figure 2-1036 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

880 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-1037 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).

1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-1038 Remove document feeder connector cover

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 881

 2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness
from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 2-1039 Remove the cable choke

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one grounding
wire.

Figure 2-1040 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a full
90°.

IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.

882 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-1041 Alignment marks

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 2-1042 Remove screws

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 883

 6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-1043 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4. Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (LX).

1. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector cover
(callout 2).

Figure 2-1044 Remove the document feeder connector cover

884 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 2-1045 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

4. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.

Figure 2-1046 Release the document feeder hinge screws

Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX) 885

 5. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.

Figure 2-1047 Lift and remove the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

5. Remove the scanner glass

Follow these steps to remove the scanner glass.

▲ CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed.

Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right to
remove it.

Figure 2-1048 Remove scanner glass

6. Remove the APS sensor

Follow these steps to remove the APS sensor.

886 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove the joint board cover.

Figure 2-1049 Remove joint board cover

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-1050 Remove screw

3. Disconnect the harness.

Figure 2-1051 Disconnect harness

Remove the APS sensor 887

 4. Remove two screws. Release the APS sensor.

Figure 2-1052 Remove screws and release APS sensor

7.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

888 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Auto adjustment chart A3 Ver. 1.0 JC81-09891A Image scanner, lower on page 877

Photo interrupter 604-001453 Image scanner, lower on page 877

Scanner - APS JC97-04507A Image scanner, lower on page 877

Scanner - FFC CCD JC97-04509A Image scanner, lower on page 877

Scanner - guide harness JC97-04512A Image scanner, lower on page 877

Scanner assembly - CCD and lens JC97-04523B Image scanner, lower on page 877

Alphabetical parts list 889

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

604-001453 Photo interrupter Image scanner, lower on page 877

JC81-09891A Auto adjustment chart A3 Ver. 1.0 Image scanner, lower on page 877

JC97-04507A Scanner - APS Image scanner, lower on page 877

JC97-04509A Scanner - FFC CCD Image scanner, lower on page 877

JC97-04512A Scanner - guide harness Image scanner, lower on page 877

JC97-04523B Scanner assembly - CCD and lens Image scanner, lower on page 877

890 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Learn about the dual cassette feeder (DCF) exploded diagrams, parts lists, and repair procedures.

DCF main
View the DCF main exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

DCF main
Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF main.

Figure 2-1053 DCF main

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 891

 Table 2-143 DCF main

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC60-00078A Machinery, fastener screw 2 Not applicable

2 JC90-01649A DCF, sub-takeaway (right door) 1 Removal and replacement: Dual

cassette feeder (DCF) right door
on page 892

3 6009-001665 Hex screw 19 Not applicable

4 JC93-01135A Feed drive opt 1 Removal and replacement: Dual

cassette feeder (DCF) motor on
page 899

5 JC93-01063C Drive pickup assembly 2 Removal and replacement: Dual

cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
motor on page 902

6 JC90-01652A Cassette, fifth 1 Not applicable

7 JC90-01654A Cassette, fourth 1 Not applicable

8 JC90-01680A DCF second pickup 1 Removal and replacement: Dual

cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
units on page 904

9 JC90-01679A DCF first pickup 1 Removal and replacement: Dual

cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
units on page 904

10 6602-003185 Timing belt 1 Not applicable

14 JC90-01677A DCF, sub-auto closing 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC93-01092A Rollers - pick, feed, sep 2 Not applicable

Not shown 0604-001490 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC66-00977A Clutch one way 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC93-01435A SF left cassette rail assembly 2 Not applicable

Not shown JC93-01045A SF right cassette rail assembly 2 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF right door.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF right door.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

892 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-144 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01649A DCF right door

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 893

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-1054 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-1055 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

894 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-1056 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-1057 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 895

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-1058 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-1059 Remove the right door

3. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door.

896 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.

Figure 2-1060 Remove the lower right cover

2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the tab
(callout 1).

Figure 2-1061 Slide the hinge pin

Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door 897

 3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the right to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 2-1062 Remove the DCF right door

4.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

898 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF cassette motor.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF cassette motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-145 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01135A SF drive feed assy (Opt)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor 899

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the DCF rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the DCF rear cover.

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1063 Remove the DCF rear cover

2. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor.

1. Disconnect two connectors, and then open one retainer.

Figure 2-1064 Disconnect two connectors and open one retainer

900 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.

Figure 2-1065 Remove the feed drive unit

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.

Figure 2-1066 Remove the feed motor

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

901
 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF pickup motor.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF pickup motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

902 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-146 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01063C Drive pickup assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the DCF rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the DCF rear cover.

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1067 Remove the DCF rear cover

2. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor.

Remove the DCF rear cover 903

 ▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the DCF pickup assembly.

Figure 2-1068 Remove the DCF pickup assembly

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF pickup units.

904 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF pickup units.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-147 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01679A First pickup assembly

JC90-01680A Second pickup assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units 905
 Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-1069 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-1070 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

906 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-1071 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-1072 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 907

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-1073 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-1074 Remove the right door

3. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door.

908 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.

Figure 2-1075 Remove the lower right cover

2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the tab
(callout 1).

Figure 2-1076 Slide the hinge pin

Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door 909

 3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the right to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 2-1077 Remove the DCF right door

4. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cable cover.

Figure 2-1078 Remove two screws and the cable cover

910 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove five screws, and then remove two brackets.

Figure 2-1079 Remove five screws and two brackets

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness from the cable guide (callout 2).
Remove eight screws (callout 3).

Figure 2-1080 Disconnect two connectors and remove eight screws

Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units 911

 4. Rotate both pickup units away from the feeder on the left (callout 1). Release the belt (callout 2) that
connects the two units. Slide the pickup units to the left (callout 3) to remove them.

Figure 2-1081 Remove the pickup units

5.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

912 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

913
 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cassette, fifth JC90-01652A DCF main on page 892

Cassette, fourth JC90-01654A DCF main on page 892

Clutch one way JC66-00977A DCF main on page 892

Coupler, torque limiter JC67-00455A DCF main on page 892

DCF first pickup JC90-01679A DCF main on page 892

DCF second pickup JC90-01680A DCF main on page 892

DCF, sub-auto closing JC90-01677A DCF main on page 892

DCF, sub-takeaway (right door) JC90-01649A DCF main on page 892

Drive pickup assembly JC93-01063C DCF main on page 892

Feed drive opt JC93-01135A DCF main on page 892

Hex screw 6009-001665 DCF main on page 892

Machinery, fastener screw JC60-00078A DCF main on page 892

Photo-interrupter 0604-001490 DCF main on page 892

Rollers - pick, feed, sep JC93-01092A DCF main on page 892

SF left cassette rail assembly JC93-01435A DCF main on page 892

SF right cassette rail assembly JC93-01045A DCF main on page 892

Timing belt 6602-003185 DCF main on page 892

914 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001490 Photo-interrupter DCF main on page 892

6009-001665 Hex screw DCF main on page 892

6602-003185 Timing belt DCF main on page 892

JC60-00078A Machinery, fastener screw DCF main on page 892

JC66-00977A Clutch one way DCF main on page 892

JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter DCF main on page 892

JC90-01649A DCF, sub-takeaway (right door) DCF main on page 892

JC90-01652A Cassette, fifth DCF main on page 892

JC90-01654A Cassette, fourth DCF main on page 892

JC90-01677A DCF, sub-auto closing DCF main on page 892

JC90-01679A DCF first pickup DCF main on page 892

JC90-01680A DCF second pickup DCF main on page 892

JC93-01045A SF right cassette rail assembly DCF main on page 892

JC93-01063C Drive pickup assembly DCF main on page 892

JC93-01092A Rollers - pick, feed, sep DCF main on page 892

JC93-01135A Feed drive opt DCF main on page 892

JC93-01435A SF left cassette rail assembly DCF main on page 892

DCF frame
View the DCF frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

DCF frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF frame.

Numerical parts list 915

 Figure 2-1082 DCF frame

32 31

31
32

Table 2-148 DCF frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-01435A Frame, left cst rail assembly 2 Not applicable

2 JC93-01045A Frame, right cst rail assembly 2 Not applicable

6 JC90-01385A DCF sub-takeaway interlock 1 Not applicable

14 6109-001138 Caster 4 Not applicable

15 JC61-04871A DCF guide adjust 4 Not applicable

916 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-148 DCF frame (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

18 JC92-02738D DCF PCA 1 Removal and replacement: Dual

cassette feeder (DCF) PCA on
page 917

23 JC39-02276A DCF, main harness 1 Not applicable

25 JC39-02278A DCF, sub harness 1 Not applicable

30 JC39-02268A DCF, t1mot harness 1 Not applicable

31 JC61-06655A Rear holder-hinge 1 Not applicable

32 JC61-06713A Front holder-hinge 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF PCA.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF PCA.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-149 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02738D PCA-MX7 DCF

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA 917

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the DCF rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the DCF rear cover.

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1083 Remove the DCF rear cover

2. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA.

918 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the DCF PCA.

Figure 2-1084 Remove the DCF PCA

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

919
 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Caster 6109-001138 DCF frame on page 916

DCF PCA JC92-02738D DCF frame on page 916

DCF guide adjust JC61-04871A DCF frame on page 916

DCF sub-takeaway interlock JC90-01385A DCF frame on page 916

DCF, main harness JC39-02276A DCF frame on page 916

DCF, sub harness JC39-02278A DCF frame on page 916

DCF, t1mot harness JC39-02268A DCF frame on page 916

Frame, left cst rail assembly JC93-01435A DCF frame on page 916

Frame, right cst rail assembly JC93-01045A DCF frame on page 916

920 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

6109-001138 Caster DCF frame on page 916

JC39-02268A DCF, t1mot harness DCF frame on page 916

JC39-02276A DCF, main harness DCF frame on page 916

JC39-02278A DCF, sub harness DCF frame on page 916

JC61-04871A DCF guide adjust DCF frame on page 916

JC90-01385A DCF sub-takeaway interlock DCF frame on page 916

JC92-02738D DCF PCA DCF frame on page 916

JC93-01045A Frame, right cst rail assembly DCF frame on page 916

JC93-01435A Frame, left cst rail assembly DCF frame on page 916

DCF rear frame

View the DCF rear frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

DCF rear frame

Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF rear frame.

Figure 2-1085 DCF rear frame

Numerical parts list 921

 Table 2-150 DCF rear frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC61-03002A Ground plate 2 Not applicable

6 JC93-00018A Main frame rear auto-size holder 2 Not applicable

6-2 JC92-02622A PCA, paper size sensor 2 Removal and replacement:

Paper size sensor on page 922

Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF paper size sensor.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF paper size sensor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-151 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02622A Paper size sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

922 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the paper size sensor

Follow these steps to remove the paper size sensor.

▲ Do the following:

● Remove all trays to access the inside of the printer.

● Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 2-1086 Remove screws

2.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the

Remove the paper size sensor 923

 sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

924 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Ground plate JC61-03002A DCF rear frame on page 922

Main frame rear auto-size holder JC93-00018A DCF rear frame on page 922

PCA, paper size sensor JC92-02622A DCF rear frame on page 922

Alphabetical parts list 925

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC61-03002A Ground plate DCF rear frame on page 922

JC92-02622A PCA, paper size sensor DCF rear frame on page 922

JC93-00018A Main frame rear auto-size holder DCF rear frame on page 922

926 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Opt feed drive
Parts diagram and parts list for the opt feed drive.

Figure 2-1087 Opt feed drive

Table 2-152 Opt feed drive

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-01135A Opt feed drive 1 Not applicable

1 6602-003670 Timing belt, gear 1 Not applicable

2 JC31-00177A Step motor, ip 1 Not applicable

8 6009-001665 Hex screw 1 Not applicable

Opt feed drive 927

 DCF second pickup
Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF second pickup.

Figure 2-1088 DCF second pickup

Table 2-153 DCF second pickup

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

4 6044-000125 E-ring 6 Not applicable

8 JC66-00977A Clutch one way 4 Not applicable

11 JC63-03776A Sheet sensor 2 Not applicable

13 JC93-01092A Frame, main pickup roller 3 Not applicable

14 JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

16 6003-000269 Screw, tap type 4 Not applicable

17 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

20 JC61-00884A Bush-6, dl 2 Not applicable

928 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2000-sheet HCI (department)
View the 2000-sheet HCI (department) exploded diagrams and parts lists.

2K HCI main
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI main.

Figure 2-1089 2K HCI main

Table 2-154 2K HCI main

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2 JC93-01114A Feed drive, HCI 1 Not applicable

3 JC93-01115A Pickup drive 1 Not applicable

4 JC93-01118A Lift drive, shift assembly 1 Not applicable

5 JC90-01646A HCI right door (takeaway) 1 Not applicable

6 JC90-01642A Cassette 1 Not applicable

7 JC90-01736A Assy - main pickup 1 Not applicable

8 JC93-01119A Drive takeaway roller 1 Not applicable

2000-sheet HCI (department) 929

 Table 2-154 2K HCI main (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

10 JC90-01382A Sub-auto closer 1 Not applicable

2K HCI drive
View the 2K HCI drive exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

2K HCI drive
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI drive.

Figure 2-1090 2K HCI drive

Table 2-155 2K HCI drive

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-1 JC31-00177A Motor step, 1p 1 Removal and replacement:

Bottom HCI tray feed motor on
page 931

1-2 6602-003670 Timing belt, gear 1 Not applicable

2 JC93-01115A Pickup drive 1 Not applicable

930 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-155 2K HCI drive (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2-1 JC93-01083A Drive motor, step 1 Removal and replacement:

Bottom HCI tray pickup motor
on page 935

3-1 JC31-00125A Motor shift gear 1 Not applicable

3-2 JC31-00109A HCI motor gear 1 Removal and replacement:

Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor on
page 937

Not shown JC31-00125A HCI shaft motor 1 Removal and replacement:

Bottom HCI tray shaft motor on
page 939

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray feed motor

Learn how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray feed motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-156 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00177A Bottom HCI tray feed motor

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray feed motor 931

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the 2K HCI rear cover.

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1091 Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

2. Remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor.

932 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect two motor connectors, and open the harness clamp.

Figure 2-1092 Disconnect two connectors and open the clamp

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.

Figure 2-1093 Remove the feed drive unit

Remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor 933

 3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.

Figure 2-1094 Remove the feed motor

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

934 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray pickup motor

Learn how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-157 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01083A Bottom HCI tray pickup motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray pickup motor 935

 ○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the 2K HCI rear cover.

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1095 Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

2. Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.

▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.

Figure 2-1096 Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

936 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor

Learn how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor 937

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-158 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00109A Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the 2K HCI rear cover.

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1097 Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

2. Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.

938 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Disconnect the connector. Remove three screws, and the remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.

Figure 2-1098 Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray shaft motor

Learn how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.

939
 View a video of how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-159 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00125A Bottom HCI tray shaft motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

940 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove the 2K HCI rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the 2K HCI rear cover.

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1099 Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

2. Remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.

▲ Disconnect the connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.

Figure 2-1100 Remove the shaft motor

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

Remove the 2K HCI rear cover 941

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

942 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Drive motor, step JC93-01083A 2K HCI drive on page 930

HCI motor gear JC31-00109A 2K HCI drive on page 930

HCI shaft motor JC31-00125A 2K HCI drive on page 930

Motor shift gear JC31-00125A 2K HCI drive on page 930

Motor step, 1p JC31-00177A 2K HCI drive on page 930

Pickup drive JC93-01115A 2K HCI drive on page 930

Timing belt, gear 6602-003670 2K HCI drive on page 930

Alphabetical parts list 943

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

6602-003670 Timing belt, gear 2K HCI drive on page 930

JC31-00109A HCI motor gear 2K HCI drive on page 930

JC31-00125A HCI shaft motor 2K HCI drive on page 930

JC31-00125A Motor shift gear 2K HCI drive on page 930

JC31-00177A Motor step, 1p 2K HCI drive on page 930

JC93-01083A Drive motor, step 2K HCI drive on page 930

JC93-01115A Pickup drive 2K HCI drive on page 930

944 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2K HCI cassette
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI cassette.

Figure 2-1101 2K HCI cassette

Table 2-160 2K HCI cassette

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC90-01642A Cassette 1 Not applicable

2 JC61-01742A Connector holder, scf 1 Not applicable

3 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 4 Not applicable

14 JC61-00076A Spring, etc torsion doc (cc2-f) 1 Not applicable

29 JC61-07471A Cassette guide rail 1 Not applicable

2K HCI cassette 945

 2K HCI frame
View the 2K HCI frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

2K HCI frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI frame.

Figure 2-1102 2K HCI frame

17

18

17

18

Table 2-161 2K HCI frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC61-03331A Idle roller, cst 2 Not applicable

6 JC61-04871A Adjust guide, DCF 4 Not applicable

7 6109-001138 Caster 4 Not applicable

13 JC92-02738B PCA - Department HCI 1 Removal and replacement: 2K

HCI tray PCA on page 947

14 JC39-02285A Cable harness, sub if 1 Not applicable

15 JC39-02284A Cable harness, heater 1 Not applicable

16 JC39-02283A Harness, main if 1 Not applicable

946 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-161 2K HCI frame (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

17 JC61-06655A Rear Holder Hinge 1 Not applicable

18 JC61-06713A Front Holder Hinge 1 Not applicable

19 JC39-02286A Harness, inner tray 1 Not applicable

20 JC39-02279A Cable harness, motor 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: 2K HCI tray PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the 2K HCI tray PCA.

View a video of how to remove and replace the 2K HCI tray PCA.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-162 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02738B PCA - department HCI

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Removal and replacement: 2K HCI tray PCA 947

 Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the 2K HCI rear cover.

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1103 Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

2. Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray PCA.

▲ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the bottom HCI tray PCA.

Figure 2-1104 Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

948 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

949
 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Adjust guide, DCF JC61-04871A 2K HCI frame on page 946

Cable harness, heater JC39-02284A 2K HCI frame on page 946

Cable harness, motor JC39-02279A 2K HCI frame on page 946

Cable harness, sub if JC39-02285A 2K HCI frame on page 946

Caster 6109-001138 2K HCI frame on page 946

Harness, inner tray JC39-02286A 2K HCI frame on page 946

Harness, main if JC39-02283A 2K HCI frame on page 946

Idle roller, cst JC61-03331A 2K HCI frame on page 946

PCA - Department HCI JC92-02738B 2K HCI frame on page 946

950 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

6109-001138 Caster 2K HCI frame on page 946

JC39-02279A Cable harness, motor 2K HCI frame on page 946

JC39-02283A Harness, main if 2K HCI frame on page 946

JC39-02284A Cable harness, heater 2K HCI frame on page 946

JC39-02285A Cable harness, sub if 2K HCI frame on page 946

JC39-02286A Harness, inner tray 2K HCI frame on page 946

JC61-03331A Idle roller, cst 2K HCI frame on page 946

JC61-04871A Adjust guide, DCF 2K HCI frame on page 946

JC92-02738B PCA - Department HCI 2K HCI frame on page 946

Numerical parts list 951

 2K HCI main pickup
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI main pickup.

Figure 2-1105 2K HCI main pickup

Table 2-163 2K HCI main pickup

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-01139A HCI main 1 Not applicable

4 JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

5 JC93-01092A Roller, pick, feed, and separation 3 Not applicable

6 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

11 JC66-04607A Roller - feed takeaway 1 Not applicable

16 JC61-00884A Bush-6, D (L) 1 Not applicable

25 JC66-04670A Roller - right door feed takeaway 1 Not applicable

28 JC66-04281A Pulley belt 1 Not applicable

952 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3000-sheet sHCI (department; E82540/50/60 and E87640/50/60
only)
View the 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E82540/50/60 and E87640/50/60 only) exploded diagrams and parts
lists.

3K sHCI main 1
View the 3K sHCI main 1 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

3K sHCI main 1
Parts diagram and parts list for the 3K sHCI main 1.

Figure 2-1106 3K sHCI main 1

17

3000-sheet sHCI (department; E82540/50/60 and E87640/50/60 only) 953

 Table 2-164 3K HCI main 1

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC63-04797B Left cover 1 Not applicable

2 JC67-00711D Screw cap 3 Not applicable

3 JC63-04798B Pickup cover 1 Not applicable

4 JC90-01660A Assembly, rear cover 1 Removal and replacement: Side HCI rear cover on page
LCT 954

5 JC66–04279A Link door 2 Not applicable

6 JC61-06568A Link holder, hinge r 1 Not applicable

7 JC66-04277A Link door, rear 2 1 Not applicable

15 JC66-04278A Link door, front 2 1 Not applicable

16 JC61-06567A Link holder, hinge f 1 Not applicable

17 JC93-01143A Latch bracket 2 Not applicable

frame*

Not shown JC92-02738C PCA - 3K sHCI 1 Removal and replacement: Side sHCI PCA on page 957

Not shown 6001-000130 Screw, M3 1 Not applicable

Not shown 6001-002284 Screw, M4 1 Not applicable

Not shown 6003-001256 Screw, tap type M4 1 Not applicable

Not shown 6009-001664 Screw, M3 1 Not applicable

Not shown 6009-001665 Screw, M3 1 Not applicable

* This part is assembled with DCF or HCI

Removal and replacement: Side HCI rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the side HCI rear cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the side HCI rear cover.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

954 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-165 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01660A Assy - cover, rear LCT

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the side HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI rear cover.

Remove the side HCI rear cover 955

 ▲ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.

Figure 2-1107 Remove the sHCI rear cover

2.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

956 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Side sHCI PCA
Learn how to remove and replace the side sHCI PCA.

View a video of how to remove and replace the side sHCI PCA.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-166 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02738C Side HCI PCA

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Removal and replacement: Side sHCI PCA 957

 Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the side HCI right cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI right cover.

▲ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.

Figure 2-1108 Right sHCI cover

2. Remove the side HCI cable cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI cable cover.

▲ Remove the side HCI cable cover.

Figure 2-1109 Remove the sHCI cable cover

3. Remove the side HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI rear cover.

958 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.

Figure 2-1110 Remove the sHCI rear cover

4. Remove the side HCI PCA

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI PCA.

▲ Disconnect all connectors. Remove three screws, and replace the sHCI PCA.

Figure 2-1111 sHCI PCA

5.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the side HCI PCA 959

 b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

960 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Assembly, rear cover LCT JC90-01660A 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Left cover JC63-04797B 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Link door JC66–04279A 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Link door, front 2 JC66-04278A 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Link door, rear 2 JC66-04277A 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Link holder, hinge f JC61-06567A 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Link holder, hinge r JC61-06568A 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

PCA - 3K sHCI JC92-02738C 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Pickup cover JC63-04798B 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Screw cap JC67-00711D 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Screw, M3 6001-000130 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Screw, M3 6009-001664 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Screw, M3 6009-001665 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Screw, M4 6001-002284 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Screw, tap type M4 6003-001256 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

Alphabetical parts list 961

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

6001-000130 Screw, M3 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

6001-002284 Screw, M4 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

6003-001256 Screw, tap type M4 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

6009-001664 Screw, M3 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

6009-001665 Screw, M3 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

JC61-06567A Link holder, hinge f 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

JC61-06568A Link holder, hinge r 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

JC63-04797B Left cover 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

JC63-04798B Pickup cover 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

JC66-04277A Link door, rear 2 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

JC66-04278A Link door, front 2 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

JC66–04279A Link door 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

JC67-00711D Screw cap 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

JC90-01660A Assembly, rear cover LCT 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

JC92-02738C PCA - 3K sHCI 3K HCI main 1 on page 954

3K sHCI main 3
View the 3K sHCI main 3 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

3K sHCI main 3
Parts diagram and parts list for the 3K sHCI main 3.

962 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-1112 3K sHCI main 3

Table 2-167 3K sHCI main 3

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

8-1 6602-001730 Timing belt, gear 1 Not applicable

8-3 JC66-04295A Feed pulley gear 1 Not applicable

8-4 JC93-01083A Drive motor, stepJC93 1 Removal and replacement: Side

HCI pickup motor on page 963

8-5 JC31-00163A Step motor, ip 1 Removal and replacement: Side

HCI feed motor on page 967

8-6 JC66-04294A Drive gear 1 Not applicable

9-1 JC31-00109A Gear motor 1 Removal and replacement: Side

HCI lift-up motor on page 971

10 JC39-02287A Motor harness 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Side HCI pickup motor

Learn how to remove and replace the side HCI pickup motor.

Removal and replacement: Side HCI pickup motor 963

 View a video of how to remove and replace the side HCI pickup motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-168 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01083A Side HCI pickup motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

964 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove the side HCI right cover
Follow these steps to remove the side HCI right cover.

▲ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.

Figure 2-1113 Right sHCI cover

2. Remove the side HCI cable cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI cable cover.

▲ Remove the side HCI cable cover.

Figure 2-1114 Remove the sHCI cable cover

3. Remove the side HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI rear cover.

Remove the side HCI right cover 965

 ▲ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.

Figure 2-1115 Remove the sHCI rear cover

4. Remove the side HCI pickup motor

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI pickup motor.

▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and then replace the pickup motor.

Figure 2-1116 Pickup motor

5.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the

966 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Side HCI feed motor

Learn how to remove and replace the side HCI feed motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the side HCI feed motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Side HCI feed motor 967

 Table 2-169 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163A Side HCI feed motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the side HCI right cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI right cover.

▲ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.

Figure 2-1117 Right sHCI cover

2. Remove the side HCI cable cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI cable cover.

968 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove the side HCI cable cover.

Figure 2-1118 Remove the sHCI cable cover

3. Remove the side HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI rear cover.

▲ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.

Figure 2-1119 Remove the sHCI rear cover

4. Remove the side HCI feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI feed motor.

Remove the side HCI rear cover 969

 1. Disconnect two connectors. Open the cable clamp. Remove three screws, and then remove the Drive-PH

Figure 2-1120 Drive PH

2. Remove two screws, and then replace the feed motor.

Figure 2-1121 Feed motor

5.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

970 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Side HCI lift-up motor

Learn how to remove and replace the side HCI lift-up motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the side HCI lift-up motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-170 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00109A Side HCI lift-up motor

Removal and replacement: Side HCI lift-up motor 971

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the side HCI right cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI right cover.

▲ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.

Figure 2-1122 Right sHCI cover

2. Remove the side HCI cable cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI cable cover.

972 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ▲ Remove the side HCI cable cover.

Figure 2-1123 Remove the sHCI cable cover

3. Remove the side HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI rear cover.

▲ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.

Figure 2-1124 Remove the sHCI rear cover

4. Remove the side HCI lift-up motor

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI lift-up motor.

Remove the side HCI rear cover 973

 ▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then replace the sHCI lift-up motor.

Figure 2-1125 sHCI lift-up motor

5.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the
ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

974 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

975
 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Drive gear JC66-04294A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

Drive motor, stepJC93 JC93-01083A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

Feed pulley gear JC66-04295A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

Gear motor JC31-00109A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

Motor harness JC39-02287A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

Step motor, ip JC31-00163A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

Timing belt, gear 6602-001730 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

976 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

6602-001730 Timing belt, gear 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

JC31-00109A Gear motor 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

JC31-00163A Step motor, ip 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

JC39-02287A Motor harness 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

JC66-04294A Drive gear 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

JC66-04295A Feed pulley gear 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

JC93-01083A Drive motor, stepJC93 3K sHCI main 3 on page 963

Numerical parts list 977

 3K sHCI main 5
Parts diagram and parts list for the 3K sHCI main 5.

Figure 2-1126 3K sHCI main 5

Table 2-171 3K sHCI main 5

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

9 JC66-04290A Actuator SNS 1 Not applicable

12-2 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 2 Not applicable

15 JC39-02291A Connect sensor harness 1 Not applicable

16 JC39-02288A Plow harness 1 Not applicable

978 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3K sHCI main 6
Parts diagram and parts list for the 3K sHCI main 6.

Figure 2-1127 3K sHCI main 6

Table 2-172 3K sHCI main 6

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

8 JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

9 JC93-01092A Frame, main pickup roller 1 Not applicable

13 JC39-02288A Plow harness 1 Not applicable

3K sHCI main 6 979

 Pickup cover unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the pickup cover unit

Figure 2-1128 Pickup cover unit

Table 2-173 Pickup cover unit

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

9 JC66-00977A Clutch, one way 2 Not applicable

10 JC61-01288A Idle holder, one way 1 Not applicable

16 JC63-04799A Pickup cover lever 1 Not applicable

17 JC61-00884A Bush-6, D (L) 2 Not applicable

25 0604–001393 Photo-interrupter 2 Not applicable

980 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-173 Pickup cover unit (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

26 JC66-04276A Actuator, empty pickup 1 Not applicable

30 JC93-01092A Frame, main pickup roller 3 Not applicable

Pickup cover unit 981

 3K sHCI frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the 3K sHCI frame

Figure 2-1129 3K sHCI frame

Table 2-174 3K sHCI frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

7 JC92-02738C PCA - 3K sHCI 1 Not applicable

11 JC93-01124A Assembly, frame latch rear sensor 1 Not applicable

14 JC93-01125A Assy - frame latch sensor front 1 Not applicable

15 JC93-01123A Assembly, frame interlock 1 Not applicable

982 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3 Problem solving

Learn about problem solving.

Control panel messages document (CPMD)

Learn about the printer control panel messages document (CPMD).

NOTE: A complete CPMD is not included in this service manual.

Click here to access the complete CPMD for this printer.

Error codes (types and structure)

Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel to indicate the current printer status
or situations that might require action. Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and have a set structure
with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).

● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error. For
example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.

● The remaining four characters (W, X, Y, and Z values) further define the error.

HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control panel message document
(CPMD) for each printer.

The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or resolve the
error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers.

The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error codes.

Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters

Error code System Component System Error Description

10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error.

11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the formatter.

13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.

15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.

17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.

20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering error.

Problem solving 983

 Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)

Error code System Component System Error Description

21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a decompression error when

trying to process job.

30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the unit.

31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.

32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification or error.

33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity (SureStart),

or Trusted Platform Module (TPM) notification or
error.

40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or USB accessory

error.

41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general and misprint or
mismatch errors typically involving (but not limited to)
the fuser, the laser scanner, or the paper path.

42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event Log, Shell,

System Manager, or other component.

44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital sending

component.

45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving the OXPd Web Kit
(communications log).

46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.

47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.

48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management, or job pipeline

error.

49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.

50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.

51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.

52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.

54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).

55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.

56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory error.

57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.

58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.

59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.

60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.

61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide) Print engine error with the 8–bit data package.

62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.

Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.

63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical, communication, etc.).

65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.

984 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)

Error code System Component System Error Description

66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.

67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error

69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.

70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.

80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.

81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.

82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.

90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB, display) or
interconnection error.

98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.

99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware install

(engine or accessory), or disk error.

How to search for printer documentation

Find printer documentation using the internal HP portals.

The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is found on the internal HP portals
GCSN and WISE (formerly SAW). GCSN is available to HP channel partners and WISE is available to call agents,
service technicians, and other HP internal users. The level of detail available will depend on your access
credentials.

How to search WISE for printer documentation

These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users. View a
video of how to find support content in WISE.

To view a list of control panel message documents per printer in WISE, enter document ID c05048451, to locate
CPMD list.

Go to WISE and enter this document ID c05791539 for written instructions.

How to search GCSN for printer documentation

These instructions are for internal use by HP Channel Partners. View a video of how find support content in GCSN,
or follow the steps below.

1. On the Home screen in GCSN, open Technical information using one of the following two methods:

● Type TINF in the Speedcode field found in the upper right corner and press Enter, or

● On the Home page, click Technical information in the left pane.

How to search for printer documentation 985

 Figure 3-1 GCSN home page

2. Under Product Search, select the Type, Category, Family, and Series that match your product model (leave
the Model field as blank or the default).

NOTE: Make sure to login to GCSN using your service-qualified credentials to access the most
comprehensive content list available. To find out how to become service-qualified, contact your HP
representative.

Figure 3-2 Sample product search criteria (GCSN)

3. Click Add Favorites and then click Add to add the printer to your Favorites list and allow you to bypass the
Product Search fields next time for that particular model (optional).

986 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-3 Add favorites (GCSN)

4. Clear all of the high-level check boxes.

Figure 3-4 Clear search criteria (GCSN)

5. Select the check boxes for the document types for which you want to search.

NOTE: Select only the high-level Manuals and Guides search option if you are not sure in which type of
manual or guide the content might be listed.

Figure 3-5 Select search criteria (GCSN)

6. Select Submit.

How to search for printer documentation 987

 7. If needed, click Back To selection Criteria and narrow your search (the maximum allowed search result is 100
documents).

NOTE: Do not select the Top Issue option unless you only want to view top issues for that model. All other
available content is filtered out.

Table 3-2 Information type selections

Technical information type Select this checkbox

Control panel message document (CPMD) CPMD-Map

List of all CPMDs per product Support Information

Installation Guide or Hardware Install Guide Maintenance/Service Guide or Install Guide

Service cost document Install Guide or Service Guide/Manual

Service guide or Service manual Service Guide/Manual

Self-solve or troubleshooting document Support Information

User manual or User guide User Guide

Warranty and Legal Guide Warranty Statement

Troubleshooting process
Learn about the troubleshooting process.

Determine the problem source

When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts you to the
situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem.
A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of this chapter
provides steps for correcting problems.

● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart
guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction.

Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:

● Are supply items within their rated life?

● Are supply items Genuine HP supplies?

● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?

NOTE: The customer or service provider is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in
good condition.

Power subsystem
Learn about the power subsystem.

988 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Power-on checks
The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and the power
switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and
solve the problem.

If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control-panel
display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.

Power-on troubleshooting overview

If the control panel is blank 1 minute after turning on the printer, check the following items:

During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place your hand
over the vents at the rear of the printer, next to the formatter, or on the on the rear of the scanner. If the fan is
operating, you will feel air passing out of the printer. You can lean close to the printer and hear the fan operating.

A fan begins to blow on the right door (fuser), and then the control panel goes through a series of set up
functions. The main motor turns on (unless the left door or cartridge access door is open, a jam condition is
sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly determine if the main
motor is turned on.

If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control panel problems.

1. Make sure that the printer is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip) that
delivers the correct voltage.

2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position, and then verify that the LED is on.

3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.

4. Depress the button on the back of the control panel to test the control panel functionality.

5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected.

6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the printer on again.

Troubleshooting a blank display, black display, no display, or no power situation

Customers usually report that the control-panel display is not showing anything. It is very important to collect as
much information as possible from the customer about the issue to help resolve it.

Following are some printer behaviors the customer might encounter:

● The control panel is completely blank (no LEDs or back light).

● The control panel is blank, but there might be LEDs illuminated.

● The control panel is blank (LEDs are on or flashing) and the back light is on (but no text visible).

Following are some possible causes of a blank control-panel display:

● No power to the printer.

● The control panel contrast setting is not correctly adjusted.

● The formatter connector(s) are not fully seated into the connector(s) on the DC controller, or the connectors
are not fully seated on the formatter.

Power-on checks 989

 ● A faulty component is installed on the formatter (for example a memory DIMM, fax PCA, network PCA, USB
device, or other component).

● The formatter is defective.

● The control panel connector is not fully seated, or the control panel is defective.

● The DC controller is defective.

Following are some questions to ask the customer:

● Was the printer newly install or has the printer been properly functioning?

– For a new install, investigate to see if there was any shipping damage to the printer.

– Did the customer notice any damage to the shipping box or any visible damage to the printer?

● What happened just prior to the control panel going blank?

– Was the printer serviced recently, a power outage occurred?

– Has a lightning storm recently occurred?

– Did the customer recently add a memory DIMM or install a third-party component?

● Make sure to get a complete description of the failure.

– Is the control-panel display completely blank (might be faint text and no back light)?

– Is the control-panel display back light on?

– Has a print job been sent to the printer? The customer might report that their print jobs seemed to print
but when they go to the printer the control-panel display is blank.

Recommended actions
If the control-panel display is completely blank (no LEDs illuminated or no back light) check to see if the printer is
getting power. Listen for fans or any printer initialization sounds when the power is turned on.

If there are no signs of power, then perform the following:

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip or
interruptible power supply) that delivers the correct voltage.

TIP: Try using a different power cable if possible.

2. Turn the printer power on, and make sure that the fan(s) run briefly (this indicates that the power supply is
operational).

3. Check if the yellow LED on formatter is flashing. If so, there is a communication issue between the formatter
and the control panel.

4. Turn the printer power off.

5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness (and/or flat cable) is properly connected (and fully
seated), and then turn the printer power on again.

6. Check control panel diagnostics by pressing the button on the back of the control panel to run different
diagnostic tests.

990 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 7. Verify the status LEDs are illuminated, but the control-panel display is blank. If applicable: Check if the
contrast setting is adjusted to very low. If so, try turning the contrast knob to see if the control-panel display
becomes visible.

8. From a host computer, send a print job to the printer.

NOTE: If the print job correctly prints, then the problem is most likely to a defective control panel.

9. Turn the printer power off, and then make sure that the memory DIMM is installed in the correct slot and is
fully seated.

NOTE: For some printers, there may be more than one memory DIMM installed. Some printers have third-
party solutions/applications or fonts that use memory.

10. Remove all of the components/accessories installed on the formatter (for example, hard drive, solid-state
drive, memory DIMM(s), fax PCA, network PCA, USB devices, or other devices).

● Make sure that the formatter is fully seated.

IMPORTANT: This is important because the formatter or a component on the formatter might be
defective or shorted, which causes the printer to lose power.

11. Reinstall the formatter. Make sure that it makes a good connection and is fully seated.

Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are correctly connected and fully seated.

12. Turn the printer power on, and then check the control-panel display.

13. If the printer control panel is properly working, replace each removed component (one at a time) to
determine which one is causing the problem.

CAUTION: Turn the printer power off, and then on again, after replacing a component on the formatter.

14. If the control-panel display is still blank after performing the above troubleshooting steps, and the control
panel diagnostics do not function, replace the control panel. If the control panel diagnostics are functioning,
then replace the formatter.

Control panel checks

Learn about the control panel checks.

Control panel diagnostic flowcharts

Learn about the control panel diagnostic flowcharts.

Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.

● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).

● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.

● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

● No control panel sound.

● Home button is unresponsive.

● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Control panel checks 991

 Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)
Learn about the touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image).

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Figure 3-6 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)

Black display White display Dim display
(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)

Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.

Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.

Turn the product power off.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?

Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y

Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the comtrol panel.

Turn the product power off. N

Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N

Replace the
control panel.

Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

Learn about how the touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

992 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-7 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone

Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
touch test.

Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?

Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.

Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?

Do not replace the

control panel.

No control panel sound

Learn what to do when there is no control panel sound.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

No control panel sound 993

 Figure 3-8 No control panel sound

Control panel
has no
sound

Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save

Can sounds
be heard?

N
Y

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the sound test.

Can sounds
be heard?
Y

N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?

Home button is unresponsive

Learn what to do when the home button is unresponsive.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

994 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-9 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illuminated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
turn the power off, and
then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the Home
button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?

Turn the product power off,

and then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
Home button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y

Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Learn about when the hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional) 995
 Figure 3-10 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)

Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.

Individual component diagnostics

Learn about individual component diagnostics.

Tools for troubleshooting: LED diagnostics

LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems.

Understand lights on the formatter

Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.

Figure 3-11 LEDs

Table 3-3 LEDs

Item Description

1 Heartbeat LED

2 HP Jetdirect LEDs

996 Chapter 3 Problem solving

HP Jetdirect LEDs
Learn about the HP Jetdirect LEDs.

The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green
LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has
failed.

For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link settings
on the embedded print server by using the printer control-panel menus.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Networking

● Ethernet

● Link Speed

3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then select OK.

Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics

The printer contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path,
noise, assembly, and timing issues.

Defeating interlocks
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the diagnostic
test when the toner cartridge door or right door is open.

Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation (and view the page enter
registration).

WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service
personnel should open and run the diagnostics with a door open. Never touch any of the power supplies when
the printer is turned on.

Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Learn how to defeat the toner cartridge door interlock.

1. Open the toner cartridge door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in) strips,
and insert the strips into the slot for the cartridge door logic switches.

HP Jetdirect LEDs 997

 Figure 3-12 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Defeat the right door interlock

Learn how to defeat the right door interlock.

1. Open the right door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in) strips,
and insert the strips into the slot for the front door logic switches.

Figure 3-13 Defeat the right door interlock

Tools for troubleshooting

Use the procedure below to test various printer mechanical and electromechanical assemblies.

998 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test)
Learn about the individual component diagnostics (special-mode test).

This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.

NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Select one of the following tests:

● Continuous Scan

● Run Fax Test

3. Select the component test options for the test.

Tools for troubleshooting

Learn about tools for troubleshooting.

Problem-solving checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the printer.

Step 1: Check that the printer power is on

Learn how to check that the printer power is on.

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged in and turned on. The power button should be lit with a white light. If it
is not, press the power button. If the power button does not light up, check the following conditions.

● Make sure that the power cable is connected to the printer and the outlet.

● Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet.

2. If the printer motors do not rotate, make sure that the toner cartridges are installed and that the doors are
all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems.

Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages

Learn how to check the control panel for error messages.

The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.

Print a supplies status page to ensure that the supplies are not at or over end of life.

NOTE: HP long-life consumable and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual individual life or
yield during normal use will vary depending on usage, environment, media, and other factors. Estimated life is
not an implied warranty.

Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test) 999

 Step 3: Test print functionality
Learn how to test print functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Reports menu, touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu, select the Configuration Page item,
and then touch the Print button to print the report.

3. If the report does not print, make sure that paper is loaded in the tray, and check the control panel to see if
paper is jammed inside the printer.

NOTE: Make sure that the paper in the tray meets specifications for this printer.

Step 4: Test copy functionality

Learn how to test copy functionality.

1. Place the configuration page into the ADF and make a copy. If paper does not feed smoothly through
the ADF, you might need to clean the ADF rollers and separation pad. Make sure that the paper meets
specifications for this printer.

2. Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy.

3. If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small glass strip.

Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality

Learn how to test the fax sending functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tools menu. Touch the Run Fax Test button
to test the fax functionality.

3. Touch the Fax on the printer control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button.

Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality

Learn how to test the fax receiving functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.

2. Touch the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tests menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.

3. Use another fax machine to send a fax to the printer.

4. Review and reset the printer fax settings.

Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer

Learn how to try sending a print job from a computer.

1. Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the printer.

2. If the job does not print, make sure that you selected the correct printer driver.

3. Uninstall and then reinstall the printer software.

1000 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality
Learn how to test the plug and print USB drive printing functionality.

1. Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the USB port near the control
panel.

2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Try printing the document or photo.

3. If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive.

Factors that affect printer performance

Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:

● The software program that you are using and its settings

● The use of special paper (such as heavy paper or custom-size paper)

● Printer processing and download time

● The complexity and size of graphics

● The speed of the computer you are using

● The USB or network connection

● Whether the printer is printing in color or in monochrome

● The type of USB drive, if you are using one

● Environmental factors, such as low temperature or high humidity

Print menu map

Learn how to print the menu map.

To more easily navigate individual settings, print a report of the complete Reports menu.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3. Select the Settings Menu Map option.

4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Print current settings pages

Learn how to print current settings pages.

Printing the current settings page provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful in the
troubleshooting process.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality 1001
 3. Select the Current Settings Page option.

4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Print event log

Printing the event log might be helpful in the troubleshooting process. For more information, see the Interpret
control-panel messages and event log entries section in the printer troubleshooting manual.

Print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Event Log

3. The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button.

Print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Service menu.

3. Enter the following service access code for the printer:

● Access code: 04072517

4. Touch the Event Log item.

Clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel

Learn how to clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Service menu.

3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.

4. Enter the following service access code for the printer:

● Access code: 04072517

5. Select the trash icon to clear the event log.

Pre-boot menu options

The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.

1002 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 CAUTION: The Format Disk option (printers with a hard-disk drive only) performs a disk initialization for the
entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost.
HP does not recommend this action.

TIP: The Pre-boot menu can be remotely accessed by using a telnet network protocol to establish an
administration connection to the printer. See Remote Admin on page 1012.

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel

Learn how to open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 3-14 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

2. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.

Figure 3-15 Pre-boot menu

Table 3-4 Pre-boot screen buttons

Use this button to see more information about a selected item.

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 1003

 Table 3-4 Pre-boot screen buttons (continued)

Use this button to scroll up through menu items.

Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.

Use this button to scroll down through menu items.

Use this button to go back to the previous menu.

Not used.

Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.

4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 3-16 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

2. Use the button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.

3. Use the button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.

1004 Chapter 3 Problem solving

4. Use the button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and then
touch the OK button.

NOTE: The printer will initialize.

NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version of the
printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support these options.

Table 3-5 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu

and continues the normal boot process.

If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30

seconds, the printer returns to a normal boot (the same
as selecting Continue).

If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout does

not apply.

Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is

required to open the Pre-boot menu.

Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.

If authentication is required (and the user is not already

signed in) the Sign In prompt displays. The user is
required to sign in.

Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download

process. A USB Thumbdrive option will work on all
USB FutureSmart printers. USB or Network connections are
not currently supported.
USB
Thumbdrive

Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk
partitions.

CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item removes all

data.

A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

The system is not bootable after this action and

a 99.09.67 error displays on the control panel. A
firmware download must be performed to return the
system to a bootable state.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 1005
 Table 3-5 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data except
the firmware repository where the master firmware
bundle is downloaded and saved).

CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all

data except the firmware repository. A delete
confirmation prompt is not provided.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer

configurations and settings to factory defaults
(customer configurations and settings are lost).

This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing

the firmware image from the active directory without
having to download new firmware code (printer remains
bootable).

Change Select this item to set or change the administrator

Password password.

Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a password

from the Administrator menu. Before the password is
actually cleared, a message will be shown asking to
confirm that the password should be cleared. Press the
OK button to confirm the action.

When the confirmation prompt displays, press the OK

button to clear the password.

Table 3-6 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable using an external
device for job storage. Job storage is normally enabled
only for the Boot device. This will be grayed out unless
the 99.09.68 error is displayed.

Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new secure
disk to this printer.

The secure disk already locked to this printer will remain

accessible to this printer. Use this function to have more
than one encrypted disk accessible by the printer when
using them interchangeably.

The data stored on the secure disk locked to this printer

always remains accessible to this printer.

Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure
disk in an unlocked mode for a single service event.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer will
remain accessible to this printer and uses the old disk's
encryption password with the new disk.

The secure disk that is already locked to this printer

remains accessible to this printer.

1006 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-6 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the
non-secure disk and clear the password associated with
the yet-to-be installed secure disk.

CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.

Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-secure
disk for this session only, and then search for the missing
secure disk in future sessions.

Boot Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on
the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command is a
one-pass overwrite, which erases the entire disk
including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.

Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase

all data on the disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to
gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The
encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes a non-
encrypted disk.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

Table 3-7 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal
device or get a status about the internal device.

Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on
the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command
erases the entire disk, including firmware. The disk
remains an encrypted disk.

Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase

all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow the
user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. The HP High Performance Secure
Hard Disk is erased.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

External Device Select the External Device item to erase the external
device or get status about the external device.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 1007
 Table 3-7 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on
the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled.

The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire disk,

including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted
disk.

Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase

all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow a user
to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. The encryption key is erased, so the
disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

Table 3-8 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [DHCP] The network can be configured to obtain the network
settings from a DHCP server or as static.
NOTE: This
configuration is Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition
only active when from the DHCP server.
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

IP Mode [STATIC] Use this item to manually assign the network

addresses.

IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.

Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.

Default Use this item to manually enter the default gateway.

Gateway

Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.

Table 3-9 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options that
can be set for the next time the printer is turned on
and initializes to the Ready state.

1008 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-9 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision

item to allow the printer to initialize and show the
firmware version when the printer reaches the Ready
state.

Once the printer power is turned on the next time, the

Show Revision item is unchecked so that the firmware
revision is not shown.

Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address
and all customer settings. (This item also returns all
settings to factory defaults.)

NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.

Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed
third-party applications.

Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer calibration
for the very next power-initialization cycle only.

Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock the
Service menu access (both in the Pre-boot menu and
the Device Maintenance menu).

Service personnel must have the administrator

remove the Lock Service setting before they can open
the Service menu.

Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/

ScanVolume during startup.

First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the printer to
initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on.

For example, the user is prompted to configure first-

time settings like date/time, language, and other
settings.

Select this item so that it is enabled for the next time

the printer power is turned on.

When the printer power is turned on the next time,

this item is unchecked so that the pre-configured
settings are used during configuration, and the first-
time setting prompt is not used.

Embedded Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable the

Jetdirect Off embedded HP Jetdirect.

By default this item is unchecked so that HP Jetdirect

is always enabled.

WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the wireless
accessory.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 1009
 Table 3-10 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are

useful to diagnose
hardware components
and their interface
connections. Use these
items to troubleshoot
specific hardware
components, and the
interface between them
and other components.

Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not

Run item to exclude
the Memory diagnostic
when executing multiple
diagnostics.

Short Use the Short item to

select a brief memory
test.

NOTE: This test

requires about four
minutes to execute.

Long Use the Long item

to select an extended
memory test.

NOTE: This test

requires about twenty
minutes to execute.

Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not

Run item to exclude
the Disk diagnostic
when executing multiple
diagnostics.

Short Use the Short item to

select a brief firmware
self-test.

NOTE: This test

requires about two or
three minutes to execute.

Long Use the Long item

to select an extended
firmware self-test.

NOTE: This test

requires about sixty
minutes to execute.

Optimized Use the Optimized item

to select a test that
checks the active sectors
on the disk.

NOTE: This test

requires about thirty
minutes to execute.

1010 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-10 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Raw Use the Raw item to

select a test that checks
every sector on the disk.

NOTE: This test

requires about fifty
minutes to execute.

Smart Use the Smart item to

select a very brief test
that checks the drive
self-monitoring analysis
and reporting technology
(SMART) status—the
drive detects and reports
reliability indicators to
help anticipate disk
failures (SMART status).

CPB Use the CPB item to

verify the integrity of
the copy processor board
(CPB) and the formatter
PCA connections.

Interconnect Use the Interconnect

item to verify the
integrity of the
interconnect PCA (ICB)
and its connections.

Run Selected Select the Run Selected

item to execute a
selected test.

NOTE: If more than one

test is selected, they are
executed in sequence.

Table 3-11 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
access to the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to
navigate the menu selections from a remote location.

IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be

initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This person will also need to provide a randomly

generated PIN to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the Remote
Admin function, see Remote Admin on page 1012.

Stop Telnet

Refresh IP

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 1011
 Table 3-11 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the
diagnostic log feature found in the Troubleshooting menu
is not accessible, then use the System Triage item to copy
the diagnostic logs to a USB flash drive at the next printer
start up.

The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the

problem.

Change Svc PWD Use this item to change the Service menu personal
identification number (PIN).

Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number (PIN)
has been changed. Use this item to reset it to the original
PIN.

Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator
password.

Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these values.

Developer Tools Netexec

Remote Admin
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The printer
functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any computer (with
telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and interact with the Pre-boot
menu.

IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security reasons
the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the printer.

This section describes the following Remote Admin items.

Required software and network connection

Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed, and enabled, on
the remote telnet client computer.

NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a Windows®
operating system.

HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows based system, however, there are other
operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and configuring
the telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that operating system.

Telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet client
function might not be enabled by default.

NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system. Screens and
menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.

1012 Chapter 3 Problem solving

1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.

Figure 3-17 Open the Control Panel

2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.

Figure 3-18 Turn Windows features on or off

3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the box to
select it, and then click the OK button.

TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the Cancel
button.

Telnet client 1013

 Figure 3-19 Enable the telnet client feature

Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin function
to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the printer. The
Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote access network security
programs.

If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network (VPN)
connection to the network.

Connect a remote connection

Learn how to connect a remote connection using telnet.

Start the telnet server function at the printer

For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.

NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how the
printer is configured.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays, touch the
middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.

1014 Chapter 3 Problem solving

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 3-20 Select the +3:Administrator item

4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 3-21 Select the +A:Remote Admin item

5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 3-22 Select the 1:Start Telnet item

6. Do one of the following

● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7..

Figure 3-23 Telnet connecting message

● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

Start the telnet server function at the printer 1015

 Figure 3-24 Telnet error message

a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.

b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.

○ The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use DHCP
instead.

○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.

c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.

7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the information on
this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.

NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.

● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.

● Port: The standard telnet port (23).

● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

Figure 3-25 Telnet server function initialized

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer

The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.

1016 Chapter 3 Problem solving

1. From the Start menu click Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then click the OK
button to open a Windows command window.

Figure 3-26 Open a command window

2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 3-27 Start a telnet session

3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.

NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7. in Start the telnet
server function at the printer on page 1014.

TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall or on a
different network that the remote telnet client computer. See Network connection on page 1014.

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 1017

 Figure 3-28 Establish a telnet connection

4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7. in Start the telnet server function at the printer on page 1014 at
the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer terminates the
Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the printer. See Start the
telnet server function at the printer on page 1014.

Figure 3-29 Enter the PIN

5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection is
successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see Pre-boot menu options on page
1002.

NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection, the
following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.

● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.

1018 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-30 Remote Admin window

Disconnect a remote connection

Learn how to disconnect a remote connection.

The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet client
computer.

NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote telnet
client computer.

1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 3-31 Access the administrator menu

Disconnect a remote connection 1019

 2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press the
Enter key.

Figure 3-32 Access the remote admin menu

3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the Enter
key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer terminates.

IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present at the
printer do the following:

● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Figure 3-33 Terminate the telnet connection

Control panel menus

You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for more
advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or host name in the
address bar of a web browser.

Reports menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select Reports.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

1020 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-12 Reports menu

First level Second level Values Description

Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire
Settings menu and the selected
View values for each setting.

Current Settings Page Print Shows the current printer

settings.
View

Configuration Page Print Shows the printer settings and

installed accessories.
View

How to Connect Page Print Shows the IP address, the host

name, and the hardware (MAC)
View address for the printer if it is
connected to a network.

Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate

remaining life for the supplies;
View reports statistics on total
number of pages and jobs
processed, serial number,
page counts, and maintenance
information.

HP provides approximations
of the remaining life
for the supplies as a
customer convenience. The
actual remaining supply levels
might be different from the
approximations provided.

Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper sizes

that have passed through the
View printer; lists whether they were
simplex, duplex, monochrome,
or color; and reports the page
count.

File Directory Page Print Shows the file name and folder
name for files that are stored in
View the printer memory.

Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web

Services for the printer.
View

Color Usage Job Log Print Shows the color-usage statistics

for the printer.
View

HP Flex Build Configuration Page Print Shows installed Flex Build

components and replacement
View history.

NOTE: 877/826/786/731
printers only.

Event Log Print Displays or prints event logs

listing event code, date/time,
View cycles and repetitions on the
printer.

Reports menu 1021

 Table 3-12 Reports menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

Paper Path Page Print Shows paper path usage on the

printer.
View

Fax Reports (MFP fax models Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes that
only) have been sent from or received
View by this printer.

Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes

that have been used for
View outgoing faxes. This report
shows how many sent faxes
were billed to each code.

Blocked Fax List Print Provides a list of phone

numbers that are blocked from
View sending faxes to this printer.

Fax Call Report Print Provides a detailed report of the

last fax operation, either sent or
View received.

Other Pages Demonstration Page Print Prints a demonstration page.

RGB Samples Print Prints color samples for

different RGB values. use the
samples as a guide for matching
printed colors.

CMYK Samples Print Prints color samples for

different CMYK values. use the
samples as a guide for matching
printed colors.

PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts.

PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts.

Secure Drum Data Erase Print Prints the secure drum data
erase pattern to overwrite any
residual image data that might
be left on the drum from the
previous print job.

Settings menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-13 Settings menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

General Date/Time Date/Time Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/

Settings Format Time Settings
MMM/DD/YYYY menu to specify
the date and
YYYY/MMM/DD time and to
configure date/
time settings.

1022 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format

that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time,
for example 12-
hour format or
24-hour format.

Date/Time Date Select the time zone Select the time

from a list. zone, date, and
time that the
printer uses.

Time Select the date from

a pop-up calendar.

Time Zone Select the time from

a pop-up keypad.

Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of + (Add) Use to configure

scheduled the printer to
events displays. Edit automatically
wake up or go to
Delete sleep at specific
times on specific
days. Using this
feature saves
energy.

NOTE: You
must configure
the date and
time settings
before you can
use this feature.

New event Event Type Select whether

to add or edit a
Wake event or a
Sleep event, and
then select the
time and the
days for the
wake or sleep
event.

Time Set the wake or

sleep event time
parameters.

Event Days Select days of the Set the wake or

week from a list. sleep event day
parameters.

Settings menu 1023

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Sleep Settings Sleep After Range: 1 to 110 Set the number

Inactivity minutes of minutes after
which the printer
Shut Down Default = 0 minutes enters Sleep or
Auto Off mode.
Touch the
existing number
to open the
virtual keypad,
and then
increase or
decrease the
number of
minutes.

Display Settings Display Manual The Manual setting Use to specify

Brightness uses a slider the intensity of
to manually the LCD control
control the display panel display.
brightness.

System Sound On* Use to specify

whether you
Off hear a sound
when you touch
the screen or
press buttons on
the control panel.

Language Language Select from a list of Use to select a

Settings languages that the different
printer supports. language for
control panel
messages and
specify the
default keyboard
layout. When you
select a new
language, the
keyboard layout
automatically
changes to
match the
factory default
for the selected
language.

Keyboard Layout Each language has Select the default

a default keyboard keyboard layout
Flow models layout. To change it, that matches the
only select from a list of language you
layouts. want to use.

Information Show connection Use this menu

Screen information* item to display or
hide connection
Hide connection information on
information the Home
screen.

1024 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

DisplayDate and Yes* Select whether

Time to display or hide
No the date and
time on the
control panel
Home screen.

Job Status Fewer* Use this feature

Notifications to control how
More many job status
notifications
appear while a
job is proceeding

● If the
setting is
Fewer,
there will
only be a
notification
to indicate
the job has
been added
to the job
queue
(except Fa,
which
always
indicates
success or
failure).

● If the
setting is
More, there
will be
status
notification
s while the
job is
proceeding
including a
completion
notification.

Inactivity Range: 10-300 Specifies the

Timeout seconds amount of time
that elapses
Default = 60 between any
seconds activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the
default settings.
When the
timeout expires,
the control panel
display returns to
the Home menu,
and any user
signed in to the
printer is signed
out.

Settings menu 1025

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Clearable On Use this feature

Warnings to set the period
Job* that a clearable
warning displays
on the control
panel. If the On
setting is
selected,
clearable
warnings appear
until the
Clearable
Warnings button
is pressed. If the
Job setting is
selected,
clearable
warnings stay on
the display
during the job
that generated
the warning and
disappear from
the display when
the next job
starts.

Continuable Auto-continue (10 Use this option to

Events seconds)* configure the
printer behavior
Touch OK to when the printer
continue encounters
certain errors. If
the Auto-
continue (10
seconds) option
is selected, the
job will continue
after 10 seconds.
If the Touch OK
to continue
option is
selected, the job
will stop and
require the user
to touch the OK
button before
continuing.

Enable Device Enabled* Use this feature

USB to enable or
Disabled disable the USB
port, which
allows
connecting to a
computer by
using a USB
device.

1026 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Jam Recovery Auto* This printer

provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following
options:

Auto: The printer

attempts to
reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient
memory is
available. This is
the default
setting.

Off: The printer

does not attempt
to reprint
jammed pages.
Because no
memory is used
to store the most
recent pages,
performance is
optimal.

NOTE: When
using this option,
if the printer runs
out of paper and
the job is being
printed on both
sides, some
pages can be
lost.

On: The printer

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional
memory is
allocated to store
the last few
pages printed.
This might cause
a decrease in
overall
performance.

Auto Recovery Enabled The printer

attempts to
Disabled* reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient
memory is
available. This is
the default
setting.

Settings menu 1027

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Enable Disabled Use the Enable

AutoSend AutoSend menu
Enabled* to enable or
disable the
AutoSned
feature. The
AutoSend feature
enables your
product to
periodically send
product
configuration
information
including serial
number, event
logs, page usage
counts, and
supplies status
information to
HP web
addresses
(URLs), or email
addresses.
Information sent
to HP is used to
improve products
and services, and
to monitor the
product if you
have a
relationship with
HP that provides
you serives such
as proactive
cartidge
replacement,
pay-per-page
contracts,
support
agreements, or
usage tracking.

Hold Off Print Enabled* Enable this

Job feature if you
Disabled want to prevent
print jobs from
starting while a
user is initiating a
copy job from the
control panel.
Held print jobs
start printing
after the copy job
is finished,
provided that no
other copy job is
in the print
queue.

Reset Factory Restore Use to reset all

Settings printer settings
Cancel to their factory
defaults.

1028 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Copy/Print Copy Settings Image Preview Display a preview

of the image
before printing it.

Enable Print Enabled Enables the

from USB Drive printer to open a
Disabled* file from a USB
drive.

Manage Stored Job Sort Order Job Name* This option

Jobs allows you list
Date the jobs either
alphabetically or
chronologically.

Retain Do not retain* Sets which

Temporary Jobs temporary jobs
After Reboot Personal jobs only will be retained in
the event of a
All temporary jobs printer reboot.

Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored in
the printer
memory.

The Temporary
Job Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be
stored on the
printer. The
maximum
allowed value is
300.

Temporary Off* Configure global

Stored Job settings for jobs
Retention 30 minutes that are stored in
the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
3 days number of
temporary jobs
1 week that can be
stored on the
4 weeks printer. The
maximum
allowed value is
300.

Settings menu 1029

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Standard Stored Off* Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored in
the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
3 days number of
standard jobs
1 week that can be
stored on the
4 weeks printer. The
maximum
allowed value is
300.

Default Print Number of Range: Sets the default

Options Copies 1-32000 number of copies
for a copy job.
Default = 1 This default applies
when the Copy
function or the
Quick Copy function
is initiated from
the printer Home
screen.

Paper Selection Select from a Configures the

list of sizes that default paper size
the printer used for print jobs.
supports.

Default Custom X Dimension Range: 3-8.5 Configures the

Paper Size inches default paper size
that is used when
Default = 8.5 the user selects
inches Custom as the
paper size for a
print job.

Y Dimension Range: 5-14

inches

Default = 14
inches

Use Inches Enabled*

Disabled

1030 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

whether the
2-sided original
document is
printed on one or
both sides, and
whether the
copies should be
printed on one or
both sides. For
example, select
the 1-sided
original, 2-sided
output option
when the original
is printed on one
side, but you
want to make
two-sided
copies.

Fit to Page (PDF) On Use this feature

to reduce or
Off* enlarge the
image/content of
each page to fit
the currently
selected paper
size.

Fit to Page (TIFF, On* Use this feature

BMP, JPG, PNG) to reduce or
Off enlarge the
image/content of
each page to fit
the currently
selected paper
size.

Quality and Quick View

Speed
Normal*

Fine Lines

Staple None Sets the position

of the staple on
Top left the page.

Top right

Top left or right

Output Bin Automatically select

Standard bin

Upper bin

Middle bin

Settings menu 1031

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Booklet Sub Use this feature

Tray when creating
large volumes of
booklets. Insert
the booklet sub
tray and
configure the
finisher options.

Envelope Rotate Off* Use this feature

to enable
90 Degrees rotation when
printing on
180 degrees envelopes.

Envelopes are
usually loaded
into the printer
as short-edge
feed. However, if
the Envelope
Rotate function is
enabled, you can
load envelopes
as long-edge
feed. The printer
rotates the
image to be
printed so that it
appears correctly
on the
envelopes.

● Off
(default):
Load
envelopes
in short-
edge feed
direciton.

● 90 degrees:
Load
envelopes
in long-
edge feed
direction.

● 180
degrees:
Load
envelopes
in short-
edge feed
direction
with the
flap on the
bottom
side.

PCL and Suppress Blank Off* When set to On,

PostScript Pages any blank pages
Settings On will not be
printed.

1032 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Courier Font Regular* Select which

version of the
Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is
Regular, which
uses an average
stroke width. The
Dark setting can
be used if a
heavier Courier
font is needed.

Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature

to select whether
Disabled* a PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer
encounters a PS
error.

Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether

a PDF error page
Disabled* is printed when
the printer
encounters a
PDF error.

Personality Auto* Configures the

default print
PCL language or
personality for
PS the printer.
Normally you
PDF should not
change the
printer language.
If you change the
setting to a
specific printer
language, the
printer does not
automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.

PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font

source for the
Disk resident user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending
on the installed
printer options.

Settings menu 1033

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the font

number for the
Default = 0 user-soft default
font using the
source that is
specified in the
Font Source
menu. The
printer assigns a
number to each
font and lists it
on the PCL font
list. The font
number displays
in the Font #
column of the
printout.

Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font

Source option
Default = 10 and the Font
Number setting
indicate a
contour font,
then use this
feature to select
a default pitch
(for a fixed-
spaced font).

PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL

print-command
Default = 60 options. PCL is a
set of printer
commands that
HP developed to
provide access to
printer features.

Use the Form

Length feature to
select the user-
soft default
vertical form
length.

Orientation Portrait* Select the

orientation that
Landscape is most often
used for copy or
scan originals.
Select the
Portrait option if
the short edge is
at the top or
select the
Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the
top.

1034 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Symbol Set Select from a list of Select any one of

symbol sets. several available
symbol sets from
the control panel.
A symbol set is a
unique grouping
of all the
characters in a
font. The factory
default value for
this option is
PC-8. Either PC-8
or PC-850 are
recommended
for line-draw
characters.

Append CR to No* Configure

LF whether a
Yes carriage return
(CR) is appended
to each line feed
(LF) encountered
in backwards-
compatible PCL
jobs (pure text,
no job control).
Select Yes to
append the
carriage return.
The default
setting is No.
Some
environments,
such as UNIX,
indicate a new
line by using only
the line-feed
control code.
This option
allows the user
to append the
required carriage
return to each
line feed.

Settings menu 1035

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Media Source Standard* Use to select and

Mapping maintain input
Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when
the software
program has no
option for tray
selection. The
following options
are available:

Standard: Tray
numbering is
based on newer
HP LaserJet
models.

Classic: Tray
numbering is
based on
HP LaserJet 4
and older
models.

Print Quality Adjust paper Select from a list of If print quality

types paper types problems occur,
use this menu to
Reset Paper Types adjust the Print
Mode for the
paper type in
use. If a user-
defined type
(enabled in the
Embedded Web
Server) has
preprinted
content that
makes the sides
of the paper
different, set the
paper type as
Marked Paper.

1036 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Edge Control Off The Edge Control

setting
Light determines how
edges are
Normal rendered. Edge
control has two
Maximum components:
adaptive
halftoning and
trapping.
Adaptive
halftoning
increases edge
sharpness.
Trapping reduces
the effect of
color-plane
misregistration
by overlapping
the edges of
adjacent objects
slightly.

● Off: Turns
off both
trapping
and
adaptive
halftoning.

● Light: Sets
trapping at
a minimal
level, and
adaptive
halftoning
is on.

● Normal:
Trapping is
at a
medium
level and
adaptive
halftoning
is on.

● Maximum:
Trapping is
at the
highest
level, and
adaptive
halftoning
is on.

Customize Colors RGB: Office (sRGB)

NOTE: Color
CMYK: SWOP printers only.

Settings menu 1037

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manage Trays Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the

Tray printer handles
First jobs that have
specified a
specific input
tray. Two options
are available:

Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a
different tray
when the user
has indicated
that a specific
tray should be
used, even if that
tray is empty.

First: The printer

pulls from
another tray if
the specified tray
is empty, even
though the user
specifically
indicated a tray
for the job.

Manually Feed Always* Indicate whether

Prompt a prompt should
Unless loaded appear when the
type or size for a
job does not
match the
specified tray
and the printer
pulls from the
multipurpose
tray instead. Two
options are
available:

Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose
tray.

Unless loaded: A
message
displays only if
the multipurpose
tray is empty.

1038 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Size/Type Display* Controls whether

Prompt the tray
Do not display configuration
message
displays
whenever a tray
is closed. Two
options are
available:

Display: Shows
the tray
configuration
message when a
tray is closed.
The user is able
to configure the
tray settings
directly from this
message.

Do not display:
Prevents the tray
configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.

Use Another Tray Allow* Use to turn on or

off the control
Do not allow panel prompt to
select another
tray when the
specified tray is
empty. Two
options are
available:

Enabled: When
this option is
selected, the
user is prompted
either to add
paper to the
selected tray or
to choose a
different tray.

Disabled: When
this option is
selected, the
user is not given
the option of
selecting a
different tray.
The printer
prompts the user
to add paper to
the tray that was
initially selected.

Settings menu 1039

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Alternative Off* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
On preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs,
whether you are
printing to one
side of the sheet
or to both sides
of the sheet.
When this option
is selected, load
the paper as you
would for
printing on both
sides. See the
user
documentation
that came with
the printer for
instructions
about loading
letterhead for
printing on both
sides. When this
option is
selected, the
printer speed
slows to the
speed required
for printing on
both sides.

Duplex Blank Automatic* Controls how the

Pages printer handles
Always two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:

Auto: Enables
Smart Duplexing,
which instructs
the printer not to
process blank
pages.

Yes: Disables
Smart Duplexing
and forces the
duplexer to flip
the sheet of
paper even if it is
printed on only
one side. This
might be
preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as
letterhead or
prepunched
paper.

1040 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Image Rotation Left to right* The Image

Rotation setting
Right to left allows
alternatives
Alternate affecting how
preprinted paper
is loaded into the
tray

NOTE: For
stapled print or
copy jobs, make
sure the Staple/
Collate setting
matches the
Image Rotation
setting as to
which side of
paper (left or
right) you want
stapled. If these
setting do not
match each
other, you will
need to change
the loading
orientation of the
paper so that the
job is stapled in
the correct spot.

Override A4/ Yes* Prints on letter-

Letter size paper when
No an A4 job is sent
but no A4-size
paper is loaded in
the printer (or to
print on A4 paper
when a letter-
size job is sent
but no letter-size
paper is loaded).
This option will
also override A3
with ledger-size
paper and ledger
with A3-size
paper.

Settings menu 1041

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Unsupported Use default size Use this feature

Size Behavior automatically* to print
documents that
Prompt for user are on a paper
response size that the
product does not
support

● Select Use
default size
automatical
ly to use
the paper
size
selected in
Default
Print
Options.

● Select
Prompt for
user
response to
be asked to
use the size
selected in
Default
Print
Options or
to cancel
the job.

1042 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Rotate Offset Automatic Use this feature

to separate each
NOTE: When Off* copy by rotating
set to Automatic, its position in the
rotation does not output bin. Two
occur if: options are
available:
● The tray is
specified in Off: Jobs are
the job and printed normally
the User with separating
Selected each copy.
Tray
setting is Automatic:
set to Copies are
Exclusively. rotated
automatically.
● The
specified
bin in the
job does
not
support
both
orientation
s.

● The job is
uncollated.

● The job is
collated,
but only
has one
sheet per
copy.

● The job has

mixed
paper size
or type.

● The user
selects a
different
paper after
the job has
started.

● A job
setting
works only
with a
specific
orientation.

● The Job
Offset
setting is
available
and set to
On.

Settings menu 1043

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Tray Priority Tray 4 You can set the

tray priority. If
Tray 3 first setting is
Tray 1, the
Tray 2 printer
automatically
Tray 1 prints from Tray
1 after the
current tray runs
out of paper.

Tray Protection NOTE: You can When this option

select all but one of is chosen, the
the trays. At least selected tray will
one tray must be be protected.
unselected at all This prevents
times paper from being
fed if Use
Tray 4 Another Tray is
enabled. If you
Tray 3 select Tray 1, for
example, then
Tray 2 Tray 1 is
excluded when
Tray 1 using another
tray.

Paper Out Action Auto Continue Specify the

Time-Out action the printer
will take when
Auto Continue the paper
Action configured for
the print job does
not match the
paper loaded in
the input tray

Scan/Digital Scan+ Settings Image Preview Make optional* Use this menu to
Send configure
Require preview settings that
affect scan apps.
Disable preview

1044 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

E-mail Settings E-mail Setup Use to configure

settings that
NOTE: Email apply to sending
Settings only documents
through email or
saving
documents to a
folder on the
network or on a
USB multi-drive.

The E-mail Setup

Wizard feature
configures the
printer to send
scanned images
as email
attachments. To
open the printer
HP Embedded
Web Server and
set up the email
notification
server, enter the
printer IP
address into a
Web browser.

Settings menu 1045

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Image Preview Make optional* Defines the

default job
Require preview options for each
function. If you
Disable preview do not specify
the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options
are used. For
complete setup,
go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a
Web browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature
to scan a
document and
display a preview
before
completing the
job. Select
whether this
feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional:
The feature is
optional,
depending on the
user who is
signed in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

1046 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Network Folder Image Preview Make optional* Defines the

Settings default job
Require preview options for each
function. If you
Disable preview do not specify
the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options
are used. For
complete setup,
go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a
Web browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature
to scan a
document and
display a preview
before
completing the
job. Select
whether this
feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional:
The feature is
optional,
depending on the
user who is
signed in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Settings menu 1047

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

SharePoint Image Preview Make optional* Defines the

Settings default job
Require preview options for each
function. If you
Disable preview do not specify
the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options
are used. For
complete setup,
go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a
Web browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature
to scan a
document and
display a preview
before
completing the
job. Select
whether this
feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional:
The feature is
optional,
depending on the
user who is
signed in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

1048 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Scan to USB Image Preview Make optional* Defines the

Drive Settings default job
Require preview options for each
function. If you
Disable preview do not specify
the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options
are used. For
complete setup,
go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a
Web browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature
to scan a
document and
display a preview
before
completing the
job. Select
whether this
feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional:
The feature is
optional,
depending on the
user who is
signed in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Settings menu 1049

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Digital Sending Allow Use of a Disabled Configure how

Software Setup DSS Server the printer
Enabled* interacts with the
Allow Transfer to HP Digital
New DSS server Sending
Software (DSS)
server. HP DSS
handles digital
sending tasks,
such as faxing,
emailing, and
sending scanned
documents to a
network folder or
USB storage
device.

Use the Allow

Use of a DSS
Server and Allow
Transfer to New
DSS server
options to
configure the
printer to use
HP DSS.

Fax Internal Fax Line 1

Modem Setup
Line 2

Fax Send Image Preview

Settings

Fax Dialing Line Monitor Off These settings

Settings Volume control how the
Low* fax modem dials
the outgoing fax
High number when
faxes are sent.

Dialing Mode Tone*

Pulse

Redial Interval 1-5 Minutes

Default = 5 minutes

Fax Send Speed Fast*

Medium

Slow

Dialing Prefix

Detect Dial Tone

Redial on Error Range: 0-9

Default = 2

1050 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Redial on No Range: 0-2

Answer
Default = 0

Redial on Busy Range: 0-9

Default = 3

General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature is

Settings Confirmation enabled, you
Disabled* must enter the
fax number
twice.

PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users

who have the
Disabled correct driver
installed to send
faxes through
the printer from
their computers.

Error Correction Line 1* Enabled* When error-

Mode correction mode
Line 2* Disabled is enabled and an
error occurs
during fax
transmission, the
printer sends or
receives the error
portion again.

Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend

or overlay the fax
Overlay header page.

Settings menu 1051

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Billing Code Enable Billing Off* When billing

Settings Codes codes are
On enabled, a
prompt displays
that asks the
user to enter the
billing code for
an outgoing fax.
This prompt does
not appear if the
Allow users to
edit billing codes
check box is not
checked.

You can also use

the billing codes
report in the
Reports menu to
view the list of
the billing codes
that have been
used for faxes
that have been
sent from the
printer. The list is
grouped by
billing code and
also shows fax
details. This
feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.

Default Billing Specify a default

Code billing code for
faxing. If you
specify a default
billing code, this
code displays in
the Billing Code
field when the
user sends an
outgoing fax. If
this field is blank,
no default billing
code is provided
for the user.

Minimum Length Range: 1-16 Specify the

required length
Default = 1 of the billing
code. Billing
codes can be
between 1 and
16 characters
long.

Allow users to Off

edit billing codes
On*

1052 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fax Receive Fax Receive Ring Volume Off Use to configure

Settings Setup settings for
Low* receiving faxes.

High

Rings To Answer Range: 1-6

Default = 1

Fax Receive Fast*

Speed
Medium

Slow

Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have

Schedule concerns about
Always print faxes* the security of
private faxes, use
Use Fax Printing this feature to
Schedule store faxes
rather than
having them
automatically
print. Open the
Fax Printing
Schedule sub-
menu, and then
you can choose
to always store
faxes, always
print them, or
you can set up a
schedule for
each day of the
week.

Schedule + (Add) Print incoming faxes If you are using a

fax printing
Touch this to set Edit Store incoming schedule, use
up a fax printing faxes this menu to
schedule if you Delete (trash configure when
selected the Use can) Time to print faxes.
Fax Printing
Schedule option. Event Days

Settings menu 1053

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Blocked Fax Fax Number to The blocked fax

Numbers Block list can contain
up to 30
numbers. When
the printer
receives a call
from one of the
blocked fax
numbers, it
deletes the
incoming fax. It
also logs the
blocked fax in the
activity log along
with job-
accounting
information.

Add blocked
numbers: Enter a
fax number into
the Fax Number
to Block field,
and then touch
the arrow button
to add a new
number to the
blocked fax list.

To remove
blocked
numbers: Select
a number and
touch the Delete
button to delete
it from the
blocked fax list.

To clear all
blocked
numbers: Touch
the Delete All
button to clear all
of the numbers
from the blocked
fax list.

You also can use

the Blocked Fax
List report in the
Information
menu to view the
list of the fax
numbers that
have been
blocked on this
printer.

1054 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Default Job Notification Do not notify* Configure to

Options receive
Notify when job notification about
completes the status of a
sent document.
Notify only if job
fails Do not notify:
Turns off this
feature.

Notify when job

completes:
Select to receive
notification for
this job only.

Notify only if job

fails: Select to
receive
notification only
if the job is not
sent successfully.

Print E-mail: Select to

receive the
E-mail* notification in an
email. Touch the
text box
following Email
Address, and
then enter the
email address for
the notification.

Include NOTE: When

Thumbnail sending an
analog fax, select
Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail image
of the first page
of the fax in your
notification.

Notification E- Touch this text

mail address field, provide the
email address to
which you want
notifications
sent, and then
touch the OK
button.

Stamp Received On Use this option to

Faxes add the date,
Off* time, sender’s
phone number,
and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this printer
receives.

Settings menu 1055

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fit to Page On* Use to shrink

faxes that are
Off larger than
Letter-size or
A4-size so that
they can fit onto
a Letter-size or
A4-size page. If
this feature set
to Disabled,
faxes larger than
Letter or A4 will
flow across
multiple pages.

Paper Tray Automatic*

Select from a list of

the trays.

Output Bin Automatically select

Output bin 1

Alternate bin

Out Sides 1-sided* Use to describe

the layout for
2-sided each side of the
original
Page flips up document. First
select whether
the original
document is
printed on one
side or both
sides.

Fax Forwarding Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward

Forwarding received faxes to
Enabled another fax
machine.

Type of Fax Job All faxes Use to select the

to Forward type of fax jobs
Sent faxes that you want
forwarded.
Received faxes*

Fax Forwarding Provide the

Number forwarding
phone number,
and then touch
the OK button.

Clear Fax Activity Clears all events

Log from the fax
activity log.

1056 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manage Supplies Low Warning Black Cartridge 0 %* Set the

Thresholds estimated
Cyan Cartridge 0 %* percentage at
which the printer
Magenta 0 %* notifies you
Cartridge when a toner
0 %* cartridge is very
Yellow low.
Cartridge 10 %*

Document
feeder kit

Low Warning On Displays a

Threshold message on the
Message Off control panel
when a cartridge
is very low.

Very Low Black Cartridge Stop

Behavior
Color Cartridges Continue

Document Prompt to continue

Feeder Kit

Staples Stop

Prompt to continue

Delay Very Low Stop Yellow Cartridge 0 After a supply

Message pages* reaches the very
Continue low state, the
Magenta Cartridge 0 warning
pages* message can be
delayed by a
Cyan Cartridge 0 specified page
pages* count.

Black Cartridge 0
pages*

Restrict Color Enable Use this feature

Use to enable,
Disable Color restrict, or
disable color
Color if allowed* printing or
copying.

Settings menu 1057

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Color/Black Mix Auto Instructs the

printer when to
Mostly Color Pages switch between
color and
Mostly Black Pages monochrome
printing modes
for the best
overall
performance.

Auto: Uses the

mode that is
appropriate for
the first page of
the job. If
necessary, the
printer switches
modes during
the middle of a
job and then
stays in that
mode until the
job is finished.

Mostly Color
Pages: The
printer uses color
mode for all jobs,
even if the job
contains no color
pages.

Mostly Black
Pages: The
printer uses
monochrome
mode until it
detects a color
page. The printer
switches back to
monochrome
mode when it
detects a
sequence of
several
monochrome
pages.

1058 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Store Usage On supplies The Store Usage

Data Data provides a
Not on supplies way to suppress
the toner
cartridges from
storing most of
the information
gathered
exclusively for
the purpose of
understanding
the usage of the
printer. Select
the On supplies
setting to store
the data on the
toner cartridge
memory chip.
Select the Not on
supplies setting
to suppress the
information from
being stored on
the memory
chip.

Supply Off* Select to

Protection permanently
Protect Supplies protect
cartridges so
that they can be
used only in this
product or fleet
of products.

Cartridge Policy Off* Set Authorized

HP to allow only
Authorized HP genuine HP
cartridges to be
used in this
product.

Reset Supplies Document Feeder After replacing a

Kit supply kit, select
it from the list
and touch
"Reset."

Manage Stapler/ Job Offset On

Stacker
Off

Developer Use this menu to

Options configure
developer
settings for the
product.

Settings menu 1059

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Networking ETHERNET INFORMATION PRINT SECURITY YES Yes: Prints a

REPORT page that
NO* contains the
current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.

No: A security
settings page is
not printed.

TCP/IP HOST NAME Use the arrow An alphanumeric

buttons to edit the string, up to 32
host name. characters, used
to identify the
NPIXXXXXX* printer. This
name is listed on
the HP Jetdirect
configuration
page. The default
host name is
NPIxxxxxx,
where xxxxxx is
the last six digits
of the LAN
hardware (MAC)
address.

1060 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

IPV4 SETTINGS CONFIG BOOTP Specifies the

METHOD method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
AUTO IP on the
HP Jetdirect print
MANUAL server.

Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration
from a BootP
server.

DHCP (Dynamic
Host
Configuration
Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration
from a DHCPv4
server. If
selected and a
DHCP lease
exists, the DHCP
Release menu
and the DHCP
Renew menu are
available to set
DHCP lease
options.

Auto IP: Use for

automatic link-
local IPv4
addressing. An
address in the
form 169.254.x.x
is assigned
automatically.

If you set this

option to the
Manual setting,
use the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/
IPv4 parameters.

DHCP RELEASE YES

NO*

DHCP RENEW YES

NO*

PRIMARY DNS RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

address (n.n.n.n)
DEFAULT = of a Primary
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Domain Name
System (DNS)
Server.

Settings menu 1061

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

address (n.n.n.n)
Default = 0.0.0.0 of a Secondary
DNS Server.

IPV6 SETTINGS ENABLE OFF Use this item to

enable or disable
ON* IPv6 operation
on the print
server.

Off: IPv6 is
disabled.

On: IPv6 is
enabled.

ADDRESS MANUAL SETTINGS Use this item to

enable and
ENABLE manually
configure a TCP/
ADDRESS IPv6 address.

DHCPV6 POLICY ROUTER SPECIFIED Router Specified:

The stateful
ROUTER auto-
UNAVAILABLE* configuration
method to be
ALWAYS used by the print
server is
determined by a
router. The
router specifies
whether the print
server obtains its
address, its
configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6 server.

Router
Unavailable: If a
router is not
available, the
print server
should attempt
to obtain its
stateful
configuration
from a DHCPv6
server.

Always: Whether
a router is
available, the
print server
always attempts
to obtain its
stateful
configuration
from a DHCPv6
server.

1062 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

PRIMARY DNS RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

address (n.n.n.n)
DEFAULT = of a Primary
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Domain Name
System (DNS)
Server.

SECONDARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n)
DEFAULT = 0.0.0.0 of a Secondary
DNS Server.

PROXY SERVER Specifies the

proxy server to
be used by
embedded
applications in
the printer. A
proxy server is
typically used by
network clients
for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a
degree of
Internet security
for those clients.

To specify a
proxy server,
enter its IPv4
address or fully-
qualified domain
name. The name
can be up to 255
octets.

For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.

PROXY PORT DEFAULT = 00080 Enter the port

number used by
the proxy server
for client
support. The port
number identifies
the port reserved
for proxy activity
on your network,
and can be a
value from 0 to
65535.

Settings menu 1063

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

IDLE TIMEOUT DEFAULT = 0270 The time period,

in seconds, after
which an idle TCP
print data
connection is
closed (default is
270 seconds, 0
disables the
timeout).

SECURITY SECURE WEB HTTPS REQUIRED*

HTTPS OPTIONAL

IPSEC KEEP

DISABLE*

FIREWALL KEEP

DISABLE*

802.1X RESET

KEEP*

ANNOUNCEMEN ENABLE*
T AGENT
DISABLE

RESET SECURITY YES

NO*

FIPS KEEP

RESET & REBOOT

DEVICE

LINK SPEED AUTO*

10T HALF

10T FULL

10T AUTO

100TX HALF

100TX FULL

100TX AUTO

1000T FULL

I/O Timeout 15* seconds Range:

5 to 300

Copy menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Copy menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

1064 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-14 Copy menu

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Sides Original Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate whether

the original document is
2-sided printed on one or both
sides.

Output Sides 1-sided Use to indicate whether

the copies should be
2-sided printed on one or both
sides.

Color/Black (color Automatically detect* Select how the copy

printers only) should be printed.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Prints color documents
in color, and black and
white documents in black
and white. For mixed
documents, the printer
will determine whether to
print in color or black and
white.

Color: Prints documents

in color.

Black: Prints documents

in black and white or
grayscale.

Quick Sets and Defaults Load

Save

Options Sides Original Sides 1-sided

2-sided

Output Sides 1-sided

2-sided

Color/Black (color Automatically detect* Select how the copy

printers only) should be printed.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Prints color documents
in color, and black and
white documents in black
and white. For mixed
documents, the printer
will determine whether to
print in color or black and
white.

Color: Prints documents

in color.

Black: Prints documents

in black and white or
grayscale.

Copy menu 1065

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Watermark None* Use this feature to add

a watermark to the
Text document

Secure ● Text: Text is placed

at the center of the
page.

● Secure: Background
text and pattern
that is barely visible
on the first copy of
a document.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed
Top Right there. Some positions
might require selecting
Bottom Left the stamp from a list of
predefined options.
Bottom Center

Bottom Right

Staple None* Sets the position of the

staple on the page.
Top left angled

Two left

Two to

Top right angled

Two right

Top left or right

Hole Punch None*

Three left

Two left

Three top

Two top

Three right

Two right

Two bottom

Four left

Four right

Four left or top

1066 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Fold V-fold Max sheets folded Controls the V-fold action

together of the booklet maker.
NOTE:
877/826/786/731 Inward fold
printers only.
Outward fold

C-fold Max sheets folded Controls the C-fold action

together of the booklet maker.

Inward fold; opens left or

up

Inward fold; opens right

or down

Outward fold; opens left

or up

Outward fold; opens right

or down

Scan mode Standard Document Book Mode allows the

user to scan pages from
Book Mode a book.

2–sided ID 2–sided ID allows the

user to scan both sides
of an identification card
onto one sheet.

Copy menu 1067

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Reduce/Enlarge Automatic* Use to scale the size

of the document up or
Manual down. Select one of the
predefined percentages,
● 25% or select the Scaling field
and type a percentage
● 50% between 25 and 400. The
Auto option automatically
● 63% (Letter to scales the image to fit the
Statement) paper size in the tray.

● 64% (11x17 to NOTE: To reduce the

Letter) image, select a scaling
percentage that is less
● 77% (11x17 to than 100. To enlarge the
Legal) image, select a scaling
percentage that is
● 78% (Legal to greater than 100.
Letter)

● 85% (Letter to
Exec)

● 100% (Letter to
Legal)

● 105% (Exec to
Letter)

● 122% (Legal to
11x17)

● 131% (Letter to
11x17)

● 131% (Statement
to Letter)

● 150%

● 200%

● 400%

● Custom1

● Custom2

Image Shift Off* Use this feature to shift

the content of the page.
Automatically center This is useful for moving
the image away from
Manual punched holes, staples,
folds, or binding edges.

Original Size Select from a list of sizes Describes the page size
that the printer supports. of the original document.

Paper Selection Paper Size For the best color and

image quality, select the
Paper Type appropriate paper type
from the control panel
Paper Tray menu or from the print
driver.

1068 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Booklet Booklet Format (Checkbox) Use to copy two or more

pages onto one sheet
of paper so you can
fold the sheets in the
center to form a booklet.
The printer arranges the
pages in the correct
order. For example, if the
original document has
eight pages, the printer
prints pages 1 and 8 on
the same sheet.

Content Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you must
Landscape specify the way the
content of the original
document is placed
on the page. Portrait
orientation means the
short edge of the page is
along the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In the
Orientation area, select
whether the original
document has a portrait
or landscape orientation.

Pages per Sheet One (1) Copies multiple pages

onto one sheet of paper.
Two (2)
NOTE: Before using this
Four (4) screen, use the Content
Orientation screen to
describe the original
document orientation.

Image Adjustment Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing the
sharpness could make
text appear crisper, but
decreasing it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of the
copy.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase or
decrease the amount of
white and black in the
colors.

Copy menu 1069

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase or
decrease the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.

Background Cleanup Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a
faint image.

Automatic Tone

Auto Paper Color

Removal

Optimize Text/Picture Automatically detect Use this setting to

optimize the output for
Text a particular type of
content.
Mixed*
Use Text for documents
Printed picture that contain mostly
text. This option is
Photograph also best suited for
scanning documents with
highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text
and graphics.

Use Printed picture

for line drawings and
preprinted images, such
as magazine clippings or
pages from books. If you
see bands of irregular
intensity on copies, try
selecting Printed picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use inches Use this menu item to
remove blemishes, such
Apply same width to all as dark borders or staple
edges marks, by cleaning the
specified edges of the
Top edge scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter
Bottom edge the measurements, in
millimeters or inches, for
Left edge how much of the top
edge, bottom edge, left
Right edge edge, and right edge to
clean.

1070 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Back Side Use inches

Mirror front side

Top edge

Bottom edge

Left edge

Right edge

Collate Collate on (Sets in page If you are making more

order)* than one copy, select the
Collate on (Sets in page
Collate off (Pages order) option to assemble
grouped) the pages in the correct
order in each set of
copies.

Select the Collate off

(Pages grouped) option
to group the same pages
together. For example,
if you are making five
copies of an original
document that has two
pages, all five first
pages would be grouped
together and all five
second pages would be
grouped together.

Blank Page Suppression Off* When enabled, blank

pages found in the
Suppress Blank Pages original document are
not included in the output
document.

Automatically Straighten Off* Enable this feature

prior to scanning to
Automatically Straighten automatically straighten
on the scanned image when
pages are skewed during
scanning.

Multi-feed Detection Off Use this feature to

prevent multiple pages
On* being fed through the
document feeder during
● Automatically Retry document scans.

Copy menu 1071

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Output Bin Automatically select

Output bin 1

Output bin 2

Alternate bin

Lower booklet bin

Standard bin

Upper bin

Middle bin

Scan menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Scan menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

1072 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan to Email File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select
● PDF* the file format for
the scanned image.
● PDF/A Each file type has
sub-settings, some
● JPEG of which affect
resolution and file
● TIFF size.

● MTIFF

● XPS

Resolution

● 600 dpi

● 400 dpi

● 200 dpi*

● 150 dpi

● 75 dpi

Quality and File Size

● Very Low
(smaller file)

● Low

● Medium*

● High

● Very High
(larger file)

Original Sides Auto (keep sides Use this feature to

with content) describe the layout
for each side of the
1-sided* original document

2-sided Use 1-sided for

originals that are
Pages Flip Up printed on one side
of the page.

Use 2-sided for

originals that are
printed on both
sides of the page.

Select Pages Flip Up

for originals that flip
on the top/bottom
edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Scan menu 1073

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Color/Black Automatically detect If Automatically

color or black detect color or black
is selected and the
Automatically detect current settings do
color or gray not allow scanning
in black, pages
Color will be scanned in
grayscale.
Black/Gray

Black

Watermark None* Use this feature to

add a watermark to
Text the document

Text: Text is placed

at the center of the
page.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six

preset positions
Top Center for a stamp
and configure the
Top Right content that will be
printed there. Some
Bottom Left positions might
require selecting the
Bottom Center stamp from a list of
predefined options.
Bottom Right

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to

provide information
Book about the type of
document to be
2-sided ID scanned and to
change the format
Prompt for of the output.
Additional Pages
Use Standard
Document to scan
regular documents
using default scan
settings.

Use Prompt for

Additional Pages to
create a single job
from multiple scans
without having to do
a preview.

Use Book to scan

the pages of an
open book and to
print the pages on
separate sheets of
paper.

Use 2-sided ID to
scan both sides of
an ID and print them
on one side of a
sheet of paper.

1074 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Original Size Select from a list of Describes the page

sizes that the printer size of the original
supports. document.

Content Orientation Automatically detect For some features

to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the content
Landscape of the original
document is placed
on the page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of the
page is along the
top.

Use Automatically
detect when the
format of the
original document is
known to specifically
work with
the Automatically
detect setting.
Using Automatically
detect is not
recommended in
other circumstances.

Scan menu 1075

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Adjustment Sharpness Use this feature

to improve the
Darkness overall quality of the
scanned image.
Contrast
Adjust the
Background Cleanup Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
Automatic Tone the image. For
example, increasing
Auto Paper Color the sharpness
Removal could make text
appear crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase
or decrease the
amount of white and
black in the colors.

Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.

Adjust the
Background Cleanup
setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint
image.

If you select the

Automatic Tone
options, the product
automatically
adjusts the
Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings
to the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.

The Auto Paper

Color Removal
option dynamically
adjusts the color
balance and
lightness of the
background. A slider
bar is used to
specify the setting.
When the slider is
moved toward the
left, most white
paper with normal
brightness is output
as white background
in the scanned
output. When the
slider is moved
1076 Chapter 3 Problem solving toward the right,
very colorful paper/
background colors
are converted to
Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Text/ Automatically detect Use this setting to

Picture optimize the output
Text for a particular type
of content.
Mixed*
Use Text for
Printed Picture documents that
contain mostly text.
Photograph This option is also
best suited for
scanning documents
with a highlighter.

Use Mixed for

documents that
contain a mix of text
and graphics.

Use Printed Picture

for line drawings
and preprinted
images, such as
magazine clippings
or pages from
books. If you see
bands of irregular
intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed
Picture to improve
the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to

remove blemishes,
● Top Edge such as dark borders
or staple marks,
● Bottom Edge by cleaning the
specified edges of
● Left Edge the scanned image.
In each of the
● Right Edge text boxes enter
the measurements,
Back Side in millimeters or
inches, for how
● Top Edge much of the top
edge, bottom edge,
● Bottom Edge
left edge, and right
edge to clean.
● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Scan menu 1077

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Cropping Options Do not crop* Use this menu item

to specify a method
Crop to Paper to automatically
crop the scan for
Crop to Content digital sending. Use
the Crop to Paper
option to crop the
scan to the edge
of the document
being scanned. Use
the Crop to Content
option to scan the
smallest possible
area that has
detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to

Paper option is
effective only when
you scan pages by
using the document
feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect
for pages that you
scan from the glass.

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning
Automatically to automatically
Straighten straighten the
scanned image
when pages are
skewed during
scanning.

Blank Page Off* Use this feature

Suppression to prevent blank
Suppress Blank pages in the original
Pages document from
being included in the
output document.

1078 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Create Multiple Files Off* Use this item to

enable the product
Maximum Pages Per to separate scanned
File output into multiple
files.
Blank Page
Separator (E877, Touch the Create
E826, E785, E731 z Multiple Files
bundles only) checkbox. Enter the
maximum number
Barcode Page of pages for each
Separator (E877, output file in the
E826, E785, E731 z Maximum Pages Per
bundles only) File field.

When a file type that

does not support
multiple pages is
selected, such as
JPEG or TIFF, this
feature is ignored.
When scanning
front and back
sides, two pages
are generated per
original document.

When scanning
to email, the
configuration option
that specifies the
maximum six of the
email also interacts
with this feature. In
this case, the more
restrictive of the two
settings will take
effect.

Notification Do Not Notify* Use this feature to

receive notification
Notify When Job about the status of
Completes the sent document.

Notify Only If Job ● SelectDo Not

Fails Notify to turn
off this feature

● Select Notify
When Job
Completes to
receive
notification for
this job only.

● Select Notify
Only If Job
Fails to receive
notification
only if the job
is not sent
successfully

Scan menu 1079

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Signing and Signing A digitally signed

Encryption email ensures the
Encrypt recipient that you
sent this email. An
encrypted message
can be opened only
by the recipient.

Scan to Network Folder Paths

Folder

File Name

Quick Sets and

Defaults

Options File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select
Resolution the file format for
the scanned image.
Quality and File Size Each file type has
sub-settings, some
High Compression of which affect
(smaller file) resolution and file
size.
PDF Encryption

Original sides 1-sided Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
select whether the
original document
is printed on
one side or both
sides. Then touch
the Orientation
setting to indicate
whether the
original has portrait
or landscape
orientation. If it is
printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

1080 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Color/Black Automatically Use to enable

detect* or disable color
scanning.
Color
Automatically
Black/Gray detect:
Automatically scans
Black documents in color
if at least one page
has color.

Color: Scans
documents in color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.

Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file size.

Watermark None* Use this feature to

add a watermark to
Text the document

● Text Font ● Text: is placed

at the center
● Text Size of the page.

● Text Color

Stamps Top Left Select up to six

preset positions
Top Center for a stamp
and configure the
Top Right content that will be
printed there. Some
Bottom Left positions might
require selecting the
Bottom Center stamp from a list of
predefined options.
Bottom Right

Scan menu 1081

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard document* Use this feature to

provide information
Book about the type of
document to be
2-sided ID scanned and to
change the format
● Prompt for of the output
additional
pages Use Standard
document to scan
regular documents
using the default
scan settings.

Use Prompt for

additional pages to
create a single job
from multiple scans
without having to do
a preview.

Use Book to scan

the pages of an
open book and to
print the pages on
separate sheets of
paper.

Use 2-sided ID to
scan both sides of
an ID and print them
on one side of a
sheet of paper.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

supported sizes. page size of the
original document.

1082 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Content Orientation Orientation Automatically Detect For some features

to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the content
Landscape of the original
document is placed
on the page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait
or landscape
orientation.

Use Automatically
Detect when the
format of the
original document is
known to specifically
work with
the Automatically
Detect setting.
Using Automatically
Detect is not
recommended in
other circumstances.

Scan menu 1083

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Adjustment Sharpness Use this feature

to improve the
Darkness overall quality of the
scanned image.
Contrast
Adjust the
Background Cleanup Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
Automatic Tone the image. For
example, increasing
Auto Paper Color the sharpness
Removal could make text
appear crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase
or decrease the
amount of white and
black in the colors.

Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.

Adjust the
Background Cleanup
setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint
image.

If you select the

Automatic Tone
options, the product
automatically
adjusts the
Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings
to the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.

The Auto Paper

Color Removal
option dynamically
adjusts the color
balance and
lightness of the
background. A slider
bar is used to
specify the setting.
When the slider is
moved toward the
left, most white
paper with normal
brightness is output
as white background
in the scanned
output. When the
slider is moved
1084 Chapter 3 Problem solving toward the right,
very colorful paper/
background colors
are converted to
Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.

Background Cleanup Adjust the

Background Cleanup
setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint
image.

Sharpness Adjust the

Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness
could make text
appear crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Automatic Tone The printer

automatically
adjusts the
Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings
to the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.

Auto Paper Color

Removal (Flow
models only)

Default Select this to make

the selected Image
Adjustment setting
the default value.

Scan menu 1085

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Text/ Automatically detect Use this setting to

Picture (Flow models only) optimize the output
for a particular type
Text of content.

Mixed* Use Text for

documents that
Printed picture contain mostly text.
This option is also
Photograph best suited for
scanning documents
with highlighter
marks.

Use Mixed for

documents that
contain a mix of text
and graphics.

Use Printed picture

for line drawings
and preprinted
images, such as
magazine clippings
or pages from
books. If you see
bands of irregular
intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed
picture to improve
the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu

item to remove
Back side erase blemishes, such
as dark borders
Front side erase or staple marks,
by cleaning the
specified edges of
the scanned image.
In each of the
text boxes enter
the measurements,
in millimeters or
inches, for how
much of the top
edge, bottom edge,
left edge, and right
edge to clean.

Cropping Options Do not crop Use this menu item

to automatically
Crop to content crop the scan for
digital sending. Use
Crop to paper the Crop to content
option to scan the
smallest possible
area that has
detectable content.

1086 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Blank Page Off* Use to prevent blank

Suppression pages in the original
Suppress Blank document from
being included in the
output document.

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning
Automatically to automatically
Straighten straighten the
scanned image
when pages are
skewed during
scanning.

Multi-feed Detection Off Use this feature

to prevent multiple
On* pages being
fed through the
● Automatically document feeder
Retry (E877. during document
E826 z bundles scans.
only)

Create Multiple Files Off* Use this item to

enable the product
Maximum pages per to separate scanned
file output into multiple
files.
Blank page
separator (E877. Touch the Create
E826, E786, E731 z Multiple Files
bundles only) checkbox. Enter the
maximum number
● White page of pages for each
output file in the
● Red/pink page Maximum pages per
file field.
● Green page
When a file type that
● Yellow page does not support
multiple pages is
● Any color page selected, such as
JPEG or TIFF, this
Barcode page feature is ignored.
separator (E877. When scanning
E826, E786, E731 z front and back
bundles only) sides, two pages
are generated per
original document.

When scanning
to email, the
configuration option
that specifies the
maximum size of
the email also
interacts with this
feature. In this case,
the more restrictive
of the two settings
will take effect.

Scan menu 1087

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about
Notify when job the status of a sent
completes document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns

off this feature.

Notify when job

completes: Select to
receive notification
for this job only.

Notify only if job

fails: Select to
receive notification
only if the job is not
sent successfully.

Scan to USB Drive Folder Path

File Name

Quick Set Defaults

Options File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select
Resolution the file format for
the scanned image.
Quality and File Size Each file type has
sub-settings, some
High Compression of which affect
(smaller file) resolution and file
size.
PDF Encryption

Original sides 1-sided Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
select whether the
original document
is printed on
one side or both
sides. Then touch
the Orientation
setting to indicate
whether the
original has portrait
or landscape
orientation. If it is
printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

1088 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Color/Black Automatically Use to enable

detect* or disable color
scanning.
Color
Automatically
Black/Gray detect:
Automatically scans
Black documents in color
if at least one page
has color.

Color: Scans
documents in color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.

Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file size.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

supported sizes. page size of the
original document.

Content Orientation Automatically detect For some features

to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the content
Landscape of the original
document is placed
on the page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait
or landscape
orientation.

Use Automatically
Detect when the
format of the
original document is
known to specifically
work with
the Automatically
Detect setting.
Using Automatically
Detect is not
recommended in
other circumstances.

Scan menu 1089

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Adjustment Darkness Sharpness Use this feature

to improve the
Darkness overall quality of the
scanned image.
Contrast
Adjust the
Background Cleanup Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
Automatic tone the image. For
example, increasing
Auto Paper Color the sharpness
Removal could make text
appear crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase
or decrease the
amount of white and
black in the colors.

Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.

Adjust the
Background Cleanup
setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint
image.

If you select the

Automatic Tone
options, the product
automatically
adjusts the
Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings
to the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.

The Auto Paper

Color Removal
option dynamically
adjusts the color
balance and
lightness of the
background. A slider
bar is used to
specify the setting.
When the slider is
moved toward the
left, most white
paper with normal
brightness is output
as white background
in the scanned
output. When the
slider is moved
1090 Chapter 3 Problem solving toward the right,
very colorful paper/
background colors
are converted to
Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.

Background Cleanup Adjust the

Background Cleanup
setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint
image.

Sharpness Adjust the

Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness
could make text
appear crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Automatic Tone The printer

automatically
adjusts the
Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings
to the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.

Auto Paper Color

Removal (Flow
models only)

Default Select this to make

the selected Image
Adjustment setting
the default value.

Scan menu 1091

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Text/ Manually Adjust* Use to optimize

Picture the output for
Text a particular type
of content. You
Printed picture can optimize the
output for text,
Photograph printed pictures, or a
mixture.

Manually Adjust:
Use to manually
optimize the setting
for text or for
pictures.

Text: Use to
optimize the text
portion of the copy
when text and/or
pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture: Use

for line drawings
and preprinted
images, such as
magazine clippings
or pages from
books.

Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu

item to remove
Back side erase blemishes, such
as dark borders
Front side erase or staple marks,
by cleaning the
specified edges of
the scanned image.
In each of the
text boxes enter
the measurements,
in millimeters or
inches, for how
much of the top
edge, bottom edge,
left edge, and right
edge to clean.

Cropping Options Do not crop Use this menu item

to automatically
Crop to content crop the scan for
digital sending. Use
Crop to paper the Crop to content
option to scan the
smallest possible
area that has
detectable content.

1092 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning
Automatically to automatically
Straighten straighten the
scanned image
when pages are
skewed during
scanning.

Blank Page Off* Use to prevent blank

Suppression pages in the original
Suppress Blank document from
Pages being included in the
output document.

Multi-feed Detection Off Use this feature

to prevent multiple
On* pages being
fed through the
● Automatically document feeder
retry (E877, during document
E826 z bundles scans.
only)

Create Multiple Files Off* Use this item to

enable the product
Maximum pages per to separate scanned
file output into multiple
files.
Blank page
separator (E877, Touch the Create
E826, E785, E731 z Multiple Files
bundles only) checkbox. Enter the
maximum number
● White page of pages for each
output file in the
● Red/pink page Maximum pages per
file field.
● Green page
When a file type that
● Yellow page does not support
multiple pages is
● Any color page selected, such as
JPEG or TIFF, this
Barcode page feature is ignored.
separator (E877, When scanning
E826, E785, E731 z front and back
bundles only) sides, two pages
are generated per
original document.

When scanning
to email, the
configuration option
that specifies the
maximum size of
the email also
interacts with this
feature. In this case,
the more restrictive
of the two settings
will take effect.

Scan menu 1093

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about
Notify when job the status of a sent
completes document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns

off this feature.

Notify when job

completes: Select to
receive notification
for this job only.

Notify only if job

fails: Select to
receive notification
only if the job is not
sent successfully.

Include Thumbnail Select Include

Thumbnail to receive
a thumbnail image
of the first page
of the job in your
notification.

Scan to Job Storage Sides Original Sides

● 1-sided

● 2-sided

Output Sides

● 1-sided

● 2-sided

Color/Black Automatically detect Use to enable

or disable color
Color* scanning.

Black/Gray Automatically
detect:
Black Automatically scans
documents in color
if at least one page
has color.

Color: Scans
documents in color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.

Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file size.

1094 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard document*

Book

2-sided ID

Reduce/Enlarge Automatic*

Manual

Image Shift Off*

Automatically center

Manual

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

supported sizes. page size of the
original document.

Paper Selection Paper Size

Paper Type

Paper Tray

Booklet Booklet Format

Content Orientation Automatically detect For some features

to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the content
Landscape of the original
document is placed
on the page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of the
page is along the
top.

Use Automatically
detect when the
format of the
original document is
known to specifically
work with
the Automatically
detect setting.
Using Automatically
detect is not
recommended in
other circumstances.

Scan menu 1095

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Pages per Sheet One

Two

Four (right, then

down)

Four (down, then

right)

Image Adjustment Sharpness Use this feature

to improve the
Darkness overall quality of the
scanned image.
Contrast
Adjust the
Background Cleanup Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness
could make text
appear crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase
or decrease the
amount of white and
black in the colors.

Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.

Adjust the
Background Cleanup
setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint
image.

1096 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Text/ Automatically detect Use this setting to

Picture optimize the output
Text for a particular type
of content.
Mixed*
Use Text for
Printed picture documents that
contain mostly text.
Photograph This option is also
best suited for
scanning documents
with highlighter
marks.

Use Mixed for

documents that
contain a mix of text
and graphics.

Use Printed picture

for line drawings
and preprinted
images, such as
magazine clippings
or pages from
books. If you see
bands of irregular
intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed
picture to improve
the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to

remove blemishes,
● Top Edge such as dark borders
or staple marks,
● Bottom Edge by cleaning the
specified edges of
● Left Edge the scanned image.
In each of the
● Right Edge text boxes enter
the measurements,
Back Side in millimeters or
inches, for how
● Top Edge much of the top
edge, bottom edge,
● Bottom Edge
left edge, and right
edge to clean.
● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Collate Collate*

Collate off

Blank Page Off* Use this feature

Suppression to prevent blank
Suppress Blank pages in the original
Pages document from
being included in the
output document.

Scan menu 1097

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning
Automatically to automatically
Straighten on straighten the
scanned image
when pages are
skewed during
scanning.

Multi-feed Detection Off Use this feature

to prevent multiple
On* pages being
fed through the
● Automatically document feeder
Retry (E877. during document
E826 z bundles scans.
only)

Scan to Sharepoint Save Settings Use this feature to

save the current
settings as the
default settings for
an app or to
create a new Quick
Set. First configure
the desired options.
Then touch Save
and choose to either
save the current
settings as the
default settings for
the app or as a new
Quick Set.

File Type and File Type Select File Type and

Resolution Resolution to select
Resolution the file format for
the scanned image.
Quality and File Size Each file type has
sub-settings, some
High Compression of which affect
(smaller file) resolution and file
size.
PDF Encryption

Original Sides Auto (keep sides Use this feature to

with content) describe the layout
for each side of the
1-sided* original document

2-sided Use 1-sided for

originals that are
Pages Flip Up printed on one side
of the page.

Use 2-sided for

originals that are
printed on both
sides of the page.

Select Pages Flip Up

for originals that flip
on the top/bottom
edge of the page,
such as calendars.

1098 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Color/Black Automatically detect If Automatically

color or black detect color or black
is selected and the
Automatically detect current settings do
color or gray not allow scanning
in black, pages
Color will be scanned in
grayscale.
Black/Gray

Black

Watermark None* Use this feature to

add a watermark to
Text the document

● Text: Text is
placed at the
center of the
page.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six

preset positions
Top Center for a stamp
and configure the
Top Right content that will be
printed there. Some
Bottom Left positions might
require selecting the
Bottom Center stamp from a list of
predefined options.
Bottom Right

Scan menu 1099

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to

provide information
Book about the type of
document to be
2-sided ID scanned and to
change the format
Prompt for of the output.
Additional Pages
Use Standard
Document to scan
regular documents
using default scan
settings.

Use Prompt for

Additional Pages to
create a single job
from multiple scans
without having to do
a preview.

Use Book to scan

the pages of an
open book and to
print the pages on
separate sheets of
paper.

Use 2-sided ID to
scan both sides of
an ID and print them
on one side of a
sheet of paper.

Content Orientation Automatically detect For some features

to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the content
Landscape of the original
document is placed
on the page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of the
page is along the
top.

Use Automatically
detect when the
format of the
original document is
known to specifically
work with
the Automatically
detect setting.
Using Automatically
detect is not
recommended in
other circumstances.

1100 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Adjustment Sharpness Use this feature

to improve the
Darkness overall quality of the
scanned image.
Contrast
Adjust the
Background Cleanup Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
Automatic tone the image. For
example, increasing
Auto Paper Color the sharpness
Removal could make text
appear crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase
or decrease the
amount of white and
black in the colors.

Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.

Adjust the
Background Cleanup
setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint
image.

If you select the

Automatic Tone
options, the product
automatically
adjusts the
Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings
to the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.

The Auto Paper

Color Removal
option dynamically
adjusts the color
balance and
lightness of the
background. The
slider bar allows the
user to specify a
specific optimization
for the entire job.
When the slider is
moved toward the
left, most white
paper with normal
brightness is output
as white background
in the scanned
Scan menu
output. When the 1101
slider is moved
toward the right,
very colorful paper/
 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Text/ Automatically detect Use this setting to

Picture optimize the output
Text for a particular type
of content.
Mixed*
Use Text for
Printed picture documents that
contain mostly text.
Photograph This option is also
best suited for
scanning documents
with a highlighter.

Use Mixed for

documents that
contain a mix of text
and graphics.

Use Printed picture

for line drawings
and preprinted
images, such as
magazine clippings
or pages from
books. If you see
bands of irregular
intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed
Picture to improve
the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to

remove blemishes,
● Top Edge such as dark borders
or staple marks,
● Bottom Edge by cleaning the
specified edges of
● Left Edge the scanned image.
In each of the
● Right Edge text boxes enter
the measurements,
Back Side in millimeters or
inches, for how
● Top Edge much of the top
edge, bottom edge,
● Bottom Edge
left edge, and right
edge to clean.
● Left Edge

● Right Edge

1102 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Cropping Options Do not crop* Use this menu item

to specify a method
Crop to Paper to automatically
crop the scan for
Crop to Content digital sending. Use
the Crop to Paper
option to crop the
scan to the edge
of the document
being scanned. Use
the Crop to Content
option to scan the
smallest possible
area that has
detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to

Paper option is
effective only when
you scan pages by
using the document
feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect
for pages that you
scan from the glass.

Blank Page Off* Use this feature

Suppression to prevent blank
Suppress Blank pages in the original
Pages document from
being included in the
output document.

Scan menu 1103

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Create Multiple Files Off* Use this item to

enable the product
Maximum pages per to separate scanned
file output into multiple
files.
Blank page
separator (E877, Touch the Create
E826, E785, E731 z Multiple Files
bundles only) checkbox. Enter the
maximum number
Barcode page of pages for each
separator (E877, output file in the
E826, E785, E731 z Maximum Pages Per
bundles only) File field.

When a file type that

does not support
multiple pages is
selected, such as
JPEG or TIFF, this
feature is ignored.
When scanning
front and back
sides, two pages
are generated per
original document.

When scanning
to email, the
configuration option
that specifies the
maximum six of the
email also interacts
with this feature. In
this case, the more
restrictive of the two
settings will take
effect.

Notification Do not notify* Use this feature to

receive notification
Notify When Job about the status of
Completes the sent document.

Notify Only If Job ● Select Do not

Fails notify to turn
off this feature

● Select Notify
When Job
Completes to
receive
notification for
this job only.

● Select Notify
Only If Job
Fails to receive
notification
only if the job
is not sent
successfully

1104 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Remote Scan Use the Remote

Request Scan Request app
to scan and
send documents
requested by a
remote computer.

Remote scans are

initiated on a
computer with
applications such
as TWAIN Software
or other AirPrint
Compatible devices

Scan+ Common Scan Shortcuts Redact and Sign Scan Shortcuts can
be used to quickly
OCR set up a job for
specialty tasks.
Document
Separation

Barcode Separation

Sticky Notes and

Envelopes

2-sided ID

Scan menu 1105

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Auto Sense Preset Fastest Scan Speeds Auto Sense Presets

make it easy to
Best Productivity optimize a scan
(Recommended) job for fastest scan
speeds or best
productivity.

● Fastest Scan
Speeds
disables some
automatic
features, which
requires less
image
processing and
allows
scanning at
the fastest
speeds
available.

● Best
Productivity
enables
several
automatic
features,
including
automatic
sides,
automatic
content
orientation,
automatic
image
straightening,
and automatic
image
optimization.

NOTE: Unlike Quick

Sets, Auto Sense
Preset presets do
not affect
destinations and
recipients.

Watermark None* Use this feature to

add a watermark to
Text the document

● Text: Text is
placed at the
center of the
page.

1106 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Stamps Top Left Select up to six

preset positions
Top Center for a stamp
and configure the
Top Right content that will be
printed there. Some
Bottom Left positions might
require selecting the
Bottom Center stamp from a list of
predefined options.
Bottom Right

Notification Do not notify* Use this feature to

receive notification
Notify When Job about the status of
Completes the sent document.

Notify Only If Job ● Select Do not

Fails notify to turn
off this feature

● Select Notify
When Job
Completes to
receive
notification for
this job only.

● Select Notify
Only If Job
Fails to receive
notification
only if the job
is not sent
successfully

Scan Color/Black Automatically detect If Automatically

color or black detect color or black
is selected and the
Automatically detect current settings do
color or gray not allow scanning
in black, pages
Color will be scanned in
grayscale.
Black/Gray

Black

Scan menu 1107

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Create Multiple Files Off* Use this item to

enable the product
Maximum pages per to separate scanned
file output into multiple
files.
Blank page
separator Touch the Create
Multiple Files check
Barcode page box. Enter the
separator maximum number
of pages for each
output file in the
Maximum Pages Per
File field.

When a file type that

does not support
multiple pages is
selected, such as
JPEG or TIFF, this
feature is ignored.
When scanning
front and back
sides, two pages
are generated per
original document.

When scanning
to email, the
configuration option
that specifies the
maximum size of
the email also
interacts with this
feature. In this case,
the more restrictive
of the two settings
will take effect.

Signing and Signing A digitally signed

Encryption email ensures the
Encrypt recipient that you
sent this email. An
encrypted message
can be opened only
by the recipient.

1108 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Cropping Options Do not crop* Use this menu item

to specify a method
Crop to Paper to automatically
crop the scan for
Crop to Content digital sending. Use
the Crop to Paper
option to crop the
scan to the edge
of the document
being scanned.
Use the Crop to
Contentoption to
scan the smallest
possible area that
has detectable
content.

NOTE: The Crop to

Paper option is
effective only when
you scan pages by
using the document
feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect
for pages that you
scan from the glass.

Copy Number of Copies Copies (1 to 9999) Use this feature to

set the number of
printed copies.

Output Sides 1-sided* Use this feature

to set the layout
2-sided and format for the
output.
Pages flip-up
Select from the
following options:

● Use 1-sided
for originals
that are
printed on one
side of the
page.

● Use 2-sided
for originals
that are
printed on
both sides of
the page.

● Select Pages
flip-up for
originals othat
flip on the top/
bottom edge
of the page,
such as
calendars.

Scan menu 1109

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Color/Black Automatically Automatically

detect* detect: Prints color
documents in color,
Color and black and white
documents in black
Black/Gray and white. For
mixed documents,
the product will
determine whether
to print in color or
black and white.

Color: Prints
documents in color.

Black/Gray: Prints
documents in
grayscale.

Paper Selection Paper Size Use this feature to

select the paper for
Paper Type the job.

Paper Tray Use Paper Size

or Paper Type to
enable the printer
to automatically find
the selected paper
size or type.

Use Paper Tray

to select a source
tray. Depending on
the administrator's
setting, the product
will either print from
that tray first, or
it will limit printing
from that tray.

Fax Resolution Standard (100 x Select the resolution

200dpi) for outgoing faxes.
If you increase the
Fine (200 x 200dpi) resolution, faxes
might be clearer but
Superfine (300 x they could transmit
300dpi) more slowly.

1110 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Auto Sense Original Sides Auto (keep sides Use this feature to
with content) describe the layout
for each side of the
1-sided* original document

2-sided Use 1-sided for

originals that are
Pages Flip Up printed on one side
of the page.

Use 2-sided for

originals that are
printed on both
sides of the page.

Select Pages Flip Up

for originals that flip
on the top/bottom
edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

supported sizes. page size of the
original document.

Content Orientation Automatically detect For some features

to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the content
Landscape of the original
document is placed
on the page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of the
page is along the
top.

Use Automatically
detect when the
format of the
original document is
known to specifically
work with
the Automatically
detect setting.
Using Automatically
detect is not
recommended in
other circumstances.

Scan menu 1111

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Adjustment Sharpness Use this feature

to improve the
Darkness overall quality of the
scanned image.
Contrast
Adjust the
Background Cleanup Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
Automatic Tone the image. For
example, increasing
Auto Paper Color the sharpness
Removal could make text
appear crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase
or decrease the
amount of white and
black in the colors.

Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.

Adjust the
Background Cleanup
setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint
image.

If you select the

Automatic Tone
options, the product
automatically
adjusts the
Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings
to the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.

The Auto Paper

Color Removal
option dynamically
adjusts the color
balance and
lightness of the
background. A slider
bar is used to
specify the setting.
When the slider is
moved toward the
left, most white
paper with normal
brightness is output
as white background
in the scanned
output. When the
slider is moved
1112 Chapter 3 Problem solving toward the right,
very colorful paper/
background colors
are converted to
Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Text/ Automatically detect Use this setting to

Picture optimize the output
Text for a particular type
of content.
Mixed*
Use Text for
Printed picture documents that
contain mostly text.
Photograph This option is also
best suited for
scanning documents
with a highlighter.

Use Mixed for

documents that
contain a mix of text
and graphics.

Use Printed picture

for line drawings
and preprinted
images, such as
magazine clippings
or pages from
books. If you see
bands of irregular
intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed
Picture to improve
the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning
Automatically to automatically
Straighten straighten the
scanned image
when pages are
skewed during
scanning.

Multi-feed Detection Off Use this feature

to prevent multiple
On* pages being
fed through the
● Automatically document feeder
Retry (E877. during document
E826 z bundles scans.
only)

Blank Page Off* Use this feature

Suppression to prevent blank
Suppress Blank pages in the original
Pages document from
being included in the
output document.

Scan menu 1113

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Advanced File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select
Resolution the file format for
the scanned image.
Quality and File Size Each file type has
sub-settings, some
High Compression of which affect
(smaller file) resolution and file
size.
DF EncryptionP

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to

provide information
Book about the type of
document to be
2-sided ID scanned and to
change the format
Prompt for of the output.
Additional Pages
Use Standard
Document to scan
regular documents
using default scan
settings.

Use Prompt for

Additional Pages to
create a single job
from multiple scans
without having to do
a preview.

Use Book to scan

the pages of an
open book and to
print the pages on
separate sheets of
paper.

Use 2-sided ID to
scan both sides of
an ID and print them
on one side of a
sheet of paper.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to

remove blemishes,
● Top Edge such as dark borders
or staple marks,
● Bottom Edge by cleaning the
specified edges of
● Left Edge the scanned image.
In each of the
● Right Edge text boxes enter
the measurements,
Back Side in millimeters or
inches, for how
● Top Edge much of the top
edge, bottom edge,
● Bottom Edge
left edge, and right
edge to clean.
● Left Edge

● Right Edge

1114 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed)
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Fax menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Dialing Prefix

Fax Recipients

Quick Sets and Defaults

Options Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the

layout for each side of
2-sided the original document.
First select whether the
original document is
printed on one side or
both sides. Then touch
the Orientation setting
to indicate whether the
original has portrait or
landscape orientation. If
it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

Watermark None* Use this feature to add

a watermark to the
Text document.

● Watermark Text ● Text: Text is placed

at the center of the
● Text Font page.

● Text Size NOTE: Flow models

only.
● Text Color

Stamps None* Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp and
Top Left configure the content
that will be printed
Top Center there. Some positions
might require selecting
Top Right the stamp from a list of
predefined options.
Bottom Left
NOTE: Flow models
Bottom Center only.

Bottom Right

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed) 1115

 Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Resolution Standard (100 x 200dpi)* Select the resolution

for outgoing faxes.
Fine (200 x 200dpi) If you increase the
resolution, faxes might
Superfine (300 x 300dpi) be clearer but they could
transmit more slowly.
Some file types, for
example a file that
will be processed with
OCR, require a specific
resolution. When these
file types are selected,
the Resolution setting
might be automatically
changed to a valid value.

Original Size Select from a list of sizes Use to describe the

that the printer supports. page size of the original
document.

Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you must
Landscape specify the way the
content of the original
document is placed on
the page.

Portrait: This setting

means the short edge of
the page is along the top.

Landscape: This setting

means the long edge of
the page is along the top.

1116 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Image Adjustment Sharpness Use to improve the

overall quality of the
Darkness copy. Adjust the darkness
and sharpness, and you
Contrast can use the Background
Cleanup setting to
Background Cleanup remove faint images
from the background
Automatic tone or to remove a light
background color.
Auto Paper Color
Removal Adjust the Darkness
setting to increase or
decrease the amount of
white and black in the
colors.

Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase or
decrease the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.

Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a
faint image.

Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing the
sharpness could make
text appear crisper, but
decreasing it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed) 1117

 Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output

for a particular type
Automatically detect Text of content. You can
optimize the output for
NOTE: Flow models Mixed text, printed pictures, or
only. a mixture.
Printed picture
Manually Adjust: Use to
Photograph manually optimize the
setting for text or for
pictures.

Text: Use to optimize

the text portion of the
copy where text and/or
pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture: Use

for line drawings and
preprinted images, such
as magazine clippings or
pages from books.

Photograph: Best suited

for making copies of
printed pictures.

Fax Line Selection Automatic* HP MFP Analog Dual Fax

810 Accessory needs to
Line 1 be installed

Line 2

Blank Page Suppression Disabled* Prevents blank pages in

the original document
Enabled from being included in
the output document.

Automatically Straighten Off* Enable this feature

prior to scanning to
Automatically Straighten* automically straighten
the scanned image when
pages are skewed during
scanning.

Notification Do not notify* Use to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.

Notify only if job fails Do Not Notify: Turns off

this feature.

Notify When Job

Completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.

Notify Only If Job

Fails: Select to receive
notification only if the job
is not sent successfully.

1118 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Print menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Print menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-17 Print Options menu

First level Second level Values Description

Print from Job Storage Stored Job to Print Untitled Print a job stored on the printer.

Stored Faxes

Print from USB Drive USB File to Print Choose file to print on USB drive. Print a job stored on a USB drive.

Fax Polling Fax Polling Number Use the Fax Polling app to
print faxes sent to another fax
machine.

Supplies menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Supplies menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-18 Supplies menu

First level Values Description

Supplies Summary

Black Cartridge Status

Cyan Cartridge Order HP Part

Magenta Cartridge Pages Printed

Yellow Cartridge Approximate Pages Remaining

Toner Collection Unit Status

Document Feeder Kit Order HP Part

Stapler 1

Trays menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Trays menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-19 Trays menu

First level Second level Values Description

Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list of Choose the paper size for the
supported sizes. tray
Tray 2–x

Type Select paper type from a list of Choose the paper type for the
supported types. tray.

Print menu 1119

 Troubleshooting menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the Troubleshooting
menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-20 Troubleshooting

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Configuration/Status ● Settings Menu Select the

Pages Map configuration/Status
reports to review,
● Current and then touch the
Settings Page Print or View button.

● Configuration
Page

● How to
Connect Page

● Supplies
Status Page

● sage Page

● File Directory
Page

● Web Services
Status Page

● Color Usage
Job Log

Reports

Other Pages ● Demonstration

Page

● RGB Samples

● CMYK Samples

● PCL Font List

● PS Font List

Event Log Print Prints the 50 most

recent events in the
Event Log. For each
event, the printed
log shows the
error number, page
count, error code,
and description or
personality.

Paper Path Page View Shows how many

pages were printed
Print from each tray.

1120 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-20 Troubleshooting (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax (Fax is optional) Fax T.30 Trace Print T.30 Report Print Use to print or
configure the fax
T.30 trace report.
T.30 is the standard
that specifies
handshaking,
protocols, and error
correction between
fax machines.

When to Print Never automatically Configure the T.30

Report print* report to print after
certain events. You
Print after every fax can choose to print
the report after
Print only after fax every fax job, every
send jobs fax job sent, every
fax job received,
Print after any fax every send error, or
error every receive error.

Print only after fax

send errors

Print only after fax

receive errors

Fax V.34 Normal* Use to disable

V.34 modulations if
Off several fax failures
have occurred or
if phone line
conditions require it.

Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a technician

to evaluate and
Diagnostic diagnose fax issues
by listening to
the sounds of fax
modulations

Fax Log Entries On The standard fax

log includes basic
Off* information such
as the time and
whether the fax
was successful.
The detailed fax
log shows the
intermediate results
of the redial process
not shown in the
standard fax log.

Print Quality Pages Print Fuser Test Print Use to print pages
Page that help you resolve
problems with print
quality.

Diagnostic Tests

Continuous Scan 2-sided

Troubleshooting menu 1121

 Table 3-20 Troubleshooting (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Run Fax Test Start Use this menu to

perform a test on
specific components
within the product to
determine whether
the components
are functioning
correctly.

Retrieve Diagnostic Insert a US drive into Create files that

Data the USB port. The contain information
exported data might about the product
contain personally that can help
identifiable identify the cause of
information. problems.

Generate Debug Start

Data

Maintenance menu
Learn about the Maintenance menu.

Backup/Restore menu
To display: At the product control panel, select Support Tools and then Maintenance, and then select the Backup/
Restore menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-21 Backup/Restore menu

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Backup Data Enable Scheduled Backup Time Enter a time

Backups

Days Between Backups Enter the number of days

Backup Now

Export Last Backup

Restore Data Insert a USB drive that

contains the backup file.

Calibration/Cleaning menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibrate/Cleaning
menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

1122 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-22 Calibrate/Cleaning menu

First level Second level Values Description

Calibration/Cleaning Page Print Use to process the cleaning

page that was created by using
the Create Cleaning Page menu.
The process takes up to 1.5
minutes.

Calibration Start The product automatically

calibrates itself at various times.
However, you can calibrate the
product immediately if you see
problems with print quality.
Use this feature to perform a
full calibration, which can take
up to three minutes. Use this
calibration if the color layers
seem to be shifted on the page.

Before calibrating the product,

make sure that the Ready
indicator displays on the
control-panel display. If a job
is in progress, the calibration
occurs when that job is
complete.

Delay Calibration at Wake/Power No Delay Controls the timing of power-

On on calibration when the product
Delay 15 minutes wakes up or is turned on.

Wake: Select if you are not

using the feature and want to
print jobs immediately when the
product wakes up or is turned
on, before calibration begins.

No: The product will calibrate

immediately when it wakes up
or is turned on. The product will
not print any jobs until it finishes
calibrating.

Yes: Enables the product that

is asleep to accept print jobs
before it calibrates. It might start
calibrating before it has printed
all the jobs it has received. This
option allows quicker printing
when coming out of sleep mode
or when you turn the product
on, but print quality might be
reduced.

NOTE: For the best results,

allow the product to calibrate
before printing. Print jobs
performed before calibration
might not be of the highest
quality.

Calibration/Cleaning menu 1123

 USB Firmware Upgrade menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware
Upgrade menu.

Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen
instructions.

Clear paper jams

Learn about clearing paper jams.

Paper jam locations

Learn about paper jam locations.

1 Tray 1

2 Tray 2

3 Tray 3

13.A1 tray 1 paper jam

Learn about A1 tray 1 paper jams.

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the Tray 1. When a jam
occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.A1.XX Jam in tray 1

1124 Chapter 3 Problem solving

1. Gently remove the jammed paper.

2. Open and then close the front door to resume

printing.

13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam

Learn about A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jams.

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2 or Tray 3. When a
jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.A2.XX Jam in tray 2

● 13.A3.XX Jam in tray 3

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

NOTE: The procedure to clear a paper jam in Tray 3 is the same as for Tray 2. Only Tray 2 is shown here.

13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam 1125

 1. Open the right door.

2. Gently remove any jammed paper.

1126 Chapter 3 Problem solving

3. Close the right door.

4. Open the tray.

13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam 1127

 5. Gently remove any jammed paper.

6. Close the tray. Printing automatically resumes.

Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI

Learn about clearing paper jams in the bottom HCI.

1128 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 1. Open the HCI.

2. Remove any jammed paper.

3. Close the HCI.

Service mode (tech mode; du models)

Learn about service mode (tech mode; du models).

Entering service mode

Learn about entering service mode.

1. From the control panel, select Support tools and then Service.

Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1129

 2. Enter the Service PIN ID.

● 04087617

3. Select Service tools.

Figure 3-34 Service tools view

Service mode menu tree

Learn about the service mode menu tree.

Figure 3-35 Information

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Information General Engine Board Serial Number

Supply Status Customer Replacement Unit Toner (CMYK)

1130 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Field Replacement Unit Imaging Unit (CMYK)

Development Unit (CMYK)

TCU

Intermediate transfer belt

(ITB)

ITB cleaner

Transfer roller/T2 roller

Fuser

Tray x rollers

Flow ADF Roller

Software Version System Firmware Version

Main Firmware Version

Engine Firmware Version

Boot ROM Version

File System Version

Flow ADF Firmware Version

Finisher Version

Scanner Version

Scan Control Version

Tray 2 Version

Tray 3 Version

Tray 4 Version

Tray 5 Version

Tray 6 Version

EP Version

Fuser Version

TR Version

Toner Version

Print CMS Version

Copy CMS Version

Scan CMS Version

Print Reports Supplies Information

Full Color Plane Registration

Color Plane Registration

Service mode menu tree 1131

 Figure 3-36 Maintenance counts

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Maintenance counts Part Replacement Count Toner Cartridge (CMYK)

Imaging Unit (CMYK)

Development Unit (CMYK)

Image Transfer Belt (ITB)

ITB cleaner

Fuser

Tray x rollers

Flow ADF Pickup Roller

Figure 3-37 Diagnostics

1132 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics Engine NVM Initialization

Engine NVM Read/Write

Engine Test Routines

Scanner Diagnostics Shading Test Shade and Print Report

Print Last Shade Report

Shade and Print Report (Flow

ADF)

Print Last Shade Report (Flow

ADF)

Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/

Write

Scanner/Flow ADF Test

Routines

Adjustment Print Adjustment Image Position

Print Test Patterns

Copy Adjustment Image Position

Scan Area Adjustment Automatic Adjustment

Manual Adjustment

Flow ADF Adjustment Automatic Adjustment

Manual Adjustment

ACS ACS Level Adjustment [1–5]: 3*

ACS Page Adjustment [1–5]: 5*

Image Management Auto Tone Adjustment Normal

Activation

Full

Print Test Patterns

Service mode menu tree 1133

 Figure 3-38 Service functions

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Service Functions Main Memory Clear

Debug Log Job Status

Details

Capture Log All

Period Start Date/End Date

Transfer Assembly Control T2 Control Mode Paper Group/Paper Side/

Mode Paper Direction/T2 PWM

Envelope Rotate Off

90 degrees

180 degrees

Information
Learn more service mode information.

General
Learn general information about the menus.

Information > General

This menu displays the following information:

● Printer serial number

● Ethernet IP address

● Ethernet Mac address

1134 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 ● Optional Ethernet IP address

● Optional Ethernet Mac address

● Total printed impressions

● Installed date and time

Supply status
Learn about supply status.

Information > Supply Status > Customer Replacement Unit

● This menu displays the printer’s customer replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to
check the information of the selected unit.

Field replacement unit (FRU)

Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit

● This menu displays the printer’s field replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to check
the information of the selected unit.

In this menu, there are five columns: Item, Threshold, Status, Count, and Maximum Life.

● Status: This column shows the current status of the selected item.

– OK: The current count is smaller than the default warning value.

– Check: The current count is bigger than the default warning value.

– OFF: The current count exceeds the maximum life.

● Count: This column shows the current count of the selected item.

● Maximum Life: This column shows the maximum capacity of the selected item.

The technician can edit the default warning value within the given threshold.

Selecting some items will enable the reset button to reset the current count to zero after replacing the unit.

Software version
Learn about the software version.

Information > Software Version

● This menu displays the version of the software installed on the printer.

Print reports
Learn how to print reports.

Supply status 1135

 Information > Print Reports

This menu displays reports that can be printed from the system. The following reports are available to print:

● Supplies Information

● Auto Toning History

Information > Print Reports > Auto Toning History

NOTE: TRC means Tone Reproduction Curve.

This report shows a history of execution of the TRC control. The TRC control preserves color consistency against
changes in supplies resulting from long-time use and environmental change. The purpose of the history report is
to check if the TRC control is working normally.

● If the TRC control performs normally, Pass count must be a non-zero value and Fail count must be zero.

● If Fail count is not zero, check the image density sensor.

Maintenance counts
Learn about Maintenance counts.

Part replacement count

Learn about part replacement count.

Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count

● This menu displays the replacement counts for the system parts. Users can select one group and press OK
to see the exact name of the part and the occurrence of the replacement.

The following table shows replaceable parts groups of the system:

Table 3-23 Part Replacement Count

Unit Item Sensing Method

Toner Cartridge Toner (C) Auto Sensing

Toner Cartridge Toner (M) Auto Sensing

Toner Cartridge Toner (Y) Auto Sensing

Toner Cartridge Toner (K) Auto Sensing

Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (C) Auto Sensing

Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (M) Auto Sensing

Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (Y) Auto Sensing

Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (K) Auto Sensing

Fuser Fuser Auto Sensing

Transfer Transfer Roller Count Clear

Roller Tray 2 Roller Count Clear

1136 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-23 Part Replacement Count (continued)

Unit Item Sensing Method

Roller Tray 3 Roller Count Clear

Roller Tray 4 Roller Count Clear

Roller Tray 5 Roller Count Clear

Flow ADF Roller Flow ADF Roller Count Clear

Diagnostics
Learn about diagnostics.

Engine diagnostics
Learn about the engine diagnostics.

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Initialization

● This menu initializes all engine NVM values to the default.

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Read/Write

Table 3-24 Engine Diagnostics (Engine NVM Read/Write)

Purpose To change a configuration value for the engine firmware

Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can
navigate through the list of codes with descriptions and saved
values.

Users can also input a code through the text box to find a
configuration value directly.

After selecting one value, press the Edit button to open an

interface for user input.

Table 3-25 Engine NVM Read/Write codes

Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min

112–0120 Manual Color Registration X- Distant from hsync to lsync 100 200/0
Offset Yellow (multi-hsync) for yellow

112–0130 Manual Color Registration X- Distant from hsync to lsync 100 200/0
Offset Magenta (multi-hsync) for magenta

112–0140 Manual Color Registration X- Distant from hsync to lsync 100 200/0
Offset Cyan (multi-hsync) for cyan

112–0150 Manual Color Registration X- Distant from hsync to lsync 100 200/0
Offset Cyan (multi-hsync) for black

112–0160 Manual Color Registration Y-Offset Distant from psync to image area 200 400/0
Yellow for yellow

112–0170 Manual Color Registration Y-Offset Distant from psync to image area 200 400/0
Magenta for magenta

Diagnostics 1137
 Table 3-25 Engine NVM Read/Write codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min

112–0180 Manual Color Registration Y-Offset Distant from psync to image area 200 400/0
Cyan for cyan

112–0190 Manual Color Registration Y-Offset Distant from psync to image area 200 400/0
Black for balck

112–0240 Manual Color Registration Yellow Image area left width for yellow 500 1000/0

112–0250 Manual Color Registration Right Image area right width for yellow 500 1000/0
Width Yellow

112–0260 Manual Color Registration Left Image area left width for magenta 500 1000/0
Width Magenta

112–0270 Manual Color Registration Right Image area right width for 500 1000/0
Width Magenta magenta

112–0280 Manual Color Registration Left Image area left width for cyan 500 1000/0
Width Cyan

112–0290 Manual Color Registration Right Image area right width for cyan 500 1000/0
Width Cyan

112–0300 Manual Color Registration Left Image area left width for black 500 1000/0
Width Balck

112–0310 Manual Color Registration Right Image area right width for black 500 1000/0
Width Black

112–0320 Color Registration Laser Scanner Laser scanner assembly skew for 200 400/0
Assembly Skew Yellow yellow

112–0330 Color Registration Laser Scanner Laser scanner assembly skew for 200 400/0
Assembly Skew Magenta magenta

112–0340 Color Registration Laser Scanner Laser scanner assembly skew for 200 400/0
Assembly Skew Cyan cyan

Engine test routines

● Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines

Table 3-26 Engine Diagnostics (Engine Test Routines)

Purpose To perform test routines for the engine

Operation procedure When the main Engine Test Routines window displays, users
can navigate through the list of routines and descriptions that
display. Users can directly input an EDC code through the text
box to search for a routine. A maximum of three routines can be
selected at the same time.

After selecting one or more routines, press the OK button to

open the test window. The selected routines will display and
users can start/start the selected test routine.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference See the following table.

1138 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes

Code Display Meaning

100-004 Yellow drum motor Yellow drum BLDC motor is on/off

1

100-004 Magenta drum motor Magenta drum BLDC motor is on/off

2

100-004 Cyan drum motor Cyan drum BLDC motor is on/off

3

100-004 Black drum motor Black drum BLDC motor is on/off

4

100-004 Yellow drum motor ready Detect if yellow drum BLDC motor runs at normal speed
6

100-004 Magenta drum motor ready Detect if magenta drum BLDC motor runs at normal speed
7

100-004 Cyan drum motor ready Detect if cyan drum BLDC motor runs at normal speed
8

100-004 Black drum motor ready Detects if black drum BLDC motor is running at normal
9 speed

100-008 ITB Engage Motor ITB engage motor on/off

0

100-009 ITB Engage Sensor Detects if the ITB engage is on or off

0

100-014 Duplex Motor Forward Duplex motor forward on/off

0

100-014 Duplex Motor Forward Slow Duplex motor forward slow on/off
1

100-014 Duplex Motor Forward Slowest Duplex motor forward slowest on/off
2

100-016 Duplex Fan 1 Run Start/stop duplex fan 1 run

0

100-018 Duplex Fan 1 Run Ready Detects if duplex fan 1 is running at normal speed
0

100-020 Tray 2 Elevating Motor Tray 2 elevate motor on/off

0

100-021 Tray 3 Elevating Motor Tray 3 elevate motor on/off (optional)

0

100-022 Tray 4 Elevating Motor Tray 4 elevate motor on/off (optional)

0

100-023 Tray 5 Elevating Motor Tray 5 elevate motor on/off (optional)

0

100-023 Tray 6 Elevating Motor Tray 6 elevate motor on/off (optional)

1

100-024 Waste Toner Motor Waste toner motor on/off

0

100-024 Waste Toner LED Waste Toner LED on/off

1

Engine diagnostics 1139

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

100-025 Waste Toner Full Sensor Detects if the Waste Toner is full
0

100-026 SMPS Fan Run Start/stop SMPS fan run

0

100-027 SMPS Fan Run Ready Detects if SMPS fan is running at normal speed
0

100-034 Feed Motor Feed motor is on/off

0

100-034 Feed Motor Slow Feed motor slow is on/off

1

100-034 Feed Motor Slowest Feed motor slowest is on/off

2

100-037 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Tray 2 motor is on/off

0

100-037 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 2 motor slow on/off

1

100-037 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 2 motor slowest on/off

2

100-038 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Tray 3 motor is on/off

0

100-038 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 3 motor slow on/off

1

100-038 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 3 motor slowest on/off

2

100-039 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Tray 4 motor is on/off

0

100-039 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 4 motor slow on/off

1

100-039 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 4 motor slowest on/off

2

100-040 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Tray 5 motor is on/off

0

100-040 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 5 motor slow on/off

1

100-040 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 5 motor slowest on/off

2

100-041 Registration Motor Registration motor is on/off

0

100-041 Registration Motor Slow Registration motor slow on/off

1

100-041 Registration Motor Slowest Registration motor slowest on/off

2

100-042 Tray 1 Feed Motor Tray 1 Feed motor is on/off

0

1140 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

100-042 Tray 1 Feed Motor Slow Tray 1 Feed motor slow on/off
1

100-042 Tray 1 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 1 Feed motor slowest on/off
2

100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Exit 2 motor is on/off

0

100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Slow Exit 2 motor slow on/off

1

100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Slowest Exit 2 motor slowest on/off

2

100-049 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Duplex motor forward is on/off

0

100-049 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Slow Duplex motor forward slow is on/off
1

100-049 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Slowest Duplex motor forward slowest is on/off
2

100-060 Return Motor Forward Return motor forward is on/off

0

100-060 Return Motor Forward Slow Return motor forward slow is on/off
1

100-060 Return Motor Forward Slowest Return motor forward slowest is on/off
2

100-060 Return Motor Backward Return motor backward is on/off

3

100-060 Return Motor Backward Slow Return motor backward slow is on/off
4

100-060 Return Motor Backward Slowest Return motor backward slowest is on/off
5

100-070 Tray 6 Pickup Motor Tray 6 motor is on/off

0

100-070 Tray 6 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 6 motor slow on/off

1

100-070 Tray 6 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 6 motor slowest on/off

2

101-010 Tray 4 Shift Gate Solenoid Tray 4 shift gate solenoid on/off
1

101-014 Tray 4 Feed Motor Tray 4 feed motor on/off

0

101-014 Tray 4 Feed Motor Slow Tray 54 feed motor slow on/off
1

101-014 Tray 4 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 4 feed motor slowest on/off
2

101-015 Tray 5 Feed Motor Tray 5 feed motor on/off

0

Engine diagnostics 1141

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

101-015 Tray 5 Feed Motor Slow Tray 5 feed motor slow on/off
1

101-015 Tray 5 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 5 feed motor slowest on/off
2

101-016 Tray 6 Feed Motor Tray 6 feed motor on/off

0

101-016 Tray 6 Feed Motor Slow Tray 6 feed motor slow on/off
1

101-016 Tray 6 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 6 feed motor slowest on/off
2

101-019 Output Bin Full Sensor Detects when paper is at output bin full sensor
0

101-019 Output Bin 2 Full Sensor Detects when paper is at output bin 2 full sensor
1

101-020 Developer Suction Fan Run Start/stop developer fan run

6

101-020 Developer Suction Fan Run Ready Detects if developer suction fan runs at normal speed
7

101-027 Tray 1 Clutch Tray 1 clutch on/off

0

101-027 Tray 1 Solenoid Tray 1 solenoid on/off

1

101-028 Return Gate Solenoid Return Gate solenoid on/off

0

101– Power 24V1

1000

101– Power 24V2

1001

101– Power 24V3

1002

101– Power 24V4

1003

102-000 Tray 2 Home Position Detects when Tray 2 is closed

0

102-000 Tray 2 Lock Detect Detect Tray 2 lock unit

1

102-000 Tray 2 Lock Position Check Tray 2 lock position

2

102-001 Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 2

0

102-004 Tray 2 Paper Size Read Detects paper Tray 2 size.

1

102-005 Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 2 is elevated to the sensor
0

1142 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

102-007 Tray 3 Home Position Detects when Tray 3 is closed

0

102-007 Tray 3 Lock Detect Detect Tray 3 lock unit

1

102-007 Tray 3 Lock Position Check Tray 3 lock position

2

102-008 Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 3

0

102-011 Tray 3 Paper Size Read Detects paper Tray 3 size.

1

102-012 Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 3 is elevated to the sensor
0

102-014 Tray 4 Home Position Detects when Tray 4 is closed

0

102-014 Tray 4 Lock Detect Detect Tray 4 lock unit

1

102-014 Tray 4 Lock Position Check Tray 4 lock position

2

102-015 Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 4

0

102-018 Tray 4 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray 4 size.

1

102-019 Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 4 is elevated to the sensor
0

102– Tray 4 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 level sensor 1
0201

102– Tray 4 Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 level sensor 2
0202

102-021 Tray 5 Home Position Detect when Tray 5 is closed.

0

102-021 Tray 5 Lock Detect Detect Tray 5 lock unit

1

102-021 Tray 5 Lock Position Check Tray 5 lock position

2

102-022 Tray 5 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 5

0

102-025 Tray 5 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray 5 size

1

102-026 Tray 5 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 5 is elevated to the sensor
0

102– Tray 5 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 5 level sensor 1
0271

102– Tray 5 Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 5 level sensor 2
0272

Engine diagnostics 1143

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

102– Tray 5 Install Sensor 1 Detect when Tray 5 install sensor 1

0273

102– Tray 5 Install Sensor 2 Detect when Tray 5 install sensor 2

0274

102-028 Tray 1 Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Bypass Tray (Tray 1)
0

102-028 Tray 1 Paper Size Read Detect Paper Tray 1 size

1

102-029 Prefeed 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 2 sensor

2

102-030 Tray 3 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 3 feed sensor (optional)
0

102-030 Prefeed 3 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 3 sensor

1

102-032 Tray 4 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 4 feed sensor (optional)
0

102-032 Prefeed 4 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 4 sensor

1

102-033 Tray 4 Door Open Sensor Detect when Tray 4 is closed

0

102-034 Prefeed 5 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 5 sensor

3

102-035 Tray 5 Door Open Sensor Detect when Tray 5 is closed

0

102-035 Tray 6 Door Open Sensor Detect when Tray 6 is closed

1

102-035 Prefeed 6 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 6 sensor (optional)

3

102-036 Registration Sensor Detects when paper is at the registration sensor

0

102-036 Fuser Out Sensor Detects when paper is at the fuser out sensor.
1

102-037 Exit 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at exit 2 sensor.

1

102-038 Duplex Jam 1 Sensor Detects when paper is at duplex jam 1 sensor.
0

102-039 Duplex Jam 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at duplex jam 2 sensor.
0

102-043 Front Cover Sensor Detects status of front cover

5

102-043 Side Cover Sensor Detects status of side cover

6

102-048 Tray 6 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 6

0

1144 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

102-052 Tray 6 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 6 is elevated to the sensor
0

102-053 Tray 6 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 6 level sensor 1
1

102-053 Tray 6 Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 6 level sensor 2
2

102-053 Tray 6 Install Sensor 1 Detect when Tray 6 install sensor 1

3

102-053 Tray 6 Install Sensor 2 Detect when Tray 6 install sensor 2

4

102-073 Tray 4 Knock Up Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 knock up home sensor
0

102-073 Tray 4 Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 4 shift tray
1

102-073 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 shift tray level
2 sensor 1

102-073 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 shift tray level
3 sensor 2

102-073 Tray 4 Shift Plate Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 shift plate home sensor
4

102-073 Tray 4 Shift Plate End Sensor Detect when Tray 4 shift plate end sensor
5

102-073 Tray 4 Gate Solenoid Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 gate solenoid home sensor
6

104-000 Waste Install Sensor Detects if waste is installed

0

105-000 Yellow MHV Bias Yellow MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

105-001 Magenta MHV Bias Magenta MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

105-002 Cyan MHV Bias Cyan MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

105-003 Black MHV Bias Black MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

106-000 Yellow Developer Bias Yellow developer bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

106-001 Magenta Developer Bias Magenta developer bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

106-002 Cyan Developer Bias Cyan developer bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

106-003 Black Developer Bias Black developer bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

106-003 Black Developer AC Bias Black developer bias AC voltage on at normal drive level
1

Engine diagnostics 1145

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

106-003 Cyan Developer AC Bias Cyan developer bias AC voltage on at normal drive level
2

106-003 Magenta Developer AC Bias Magenta developer bias AC voltage on at normal drive level
3

106-003 Yellow Developer AC Bias Yellow developer bias AC voltage on at normal drive level
4

106-020 HVPS Installed Detect HVPS unit

0

107-003 THV(-) Bias THV minus bias voltage on at normal drive level
3

107-003 THV CC Bias THV constant current plus bias voltage

4

107-003 THV CV Bias THV constant voltage plus bias voltage

5

107-016 Yellow Eraser On Yellow eraser lamp on/off

2

107-016 Magenta Eraser On Magenta eraser lamp on/off

3

107-016 Cyan Eraser On Cyan eraser lamp on/off

4

107-016 Black Eraser On Black eraser lamp on/off

5

107-016 Yellow Eraser Detect Detect yellow eraser status

6

107-016 Magenta Eraser Detect Detect magenta eraser status

7

107-016 Cyan Eraser Detect Detect cyan eraser status

8

107-016 Black Eraser Detect Detect black eraser status

9

107-020 ITHV Yellow Bias Transfer assembly yellow bias on/off

1

107-020 ITHV Magenta Bias Transfer assembly magenta bias on/off

2

107-020 ITHV Cyan Bias Transfer assembly cyan bias on/off

3

107-020 ITHV Black Bias Transfer assembly black bias on/off

4

109-000 Fuser Temperature A Detects what the temperature A is on fuser

0

109-001 Fuser Temperature B Detects what the temperature B is on fuser

0

109-001 LSU Temperature LSU temperature

1

1146 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

109-001 Inner Temperature Inner temperature

2

109-001 Outer Temperature Outer temperature

3

109-001 Humidity Humidity

4

109-002 Fuser Fan Run Ready Detects if fuser fan motor runs at normal speed
0

109-002 Exit 2 Fan Run Start/stop exit 2 fan run

1

109-002 Exit 2 Fan Run Ready Detects if exit 2 fan runs at normal speed
2

109-002 Exit 3 Fan Run Start/stop exit 3 fan run

3

109-002 Exit 3 Fan Run Ready Detects if exit 3 fan runs at normal speed
4

109– Exit 4 Fan Run Start/stop exit 4 fan run

0025

109– Exit 4 Fan Run Ready Detects if exit 4 fan runs at normal speed
0026

109-003 Fuser Motor Forward Fuser motor forward on/off

0

109-003 Fuser Motor Ready Detects if fuser motor runs at each speed
4

109-004 Fuser Fan Run Fuser fan motor on/off

0

109-004 Exit Fan Run Exit fan motor on/off

6

109-004 Exit Fan Run Ready Detects if exit fan runs at normal speed
7

109-013 Fuser Gap Motor Fuser press control motor on/off

0

109-014 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Detects if the fuser press is located home position
0

109-020 Detect Fuser Relay Detect fuser relay status

0

109-021 Detect Zero Cross Period Detect zero cross period

0

109-030 Fuser Installed Detect fuser unit

0

110-000 LSU Motor 1 Run Ready Detects if LSU motor 1 runs at normal speed
0

110-002 LUS Motor Fan 1 Run Ready Detects if the LSU fan motor 1 runs at normal speed
0

Engine diagnostics 1147

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

110-006 LSU Motor 1 Run LSU motor 1 on/off

0

110-008 LSU LD Power 1 LSU LD 1 power on/off (yellow)

0

110-009 LSU LD Power 2 LSU LD 2 power on/off (magenta

0

110-010 LSU LD Power 3 LSU LD 3 power on/off (cyan)

0

110-011 LSU LD Power 4 LSU LD 4 power on/off (black)

0

110-012 LSU Fan 1 Run Start/stop the LSU fan run

0

110-014 LSU HSync 1 Detect the LSU HSync 1 (yellow)

0

110-015 LSU HSync 2 Detect the LSU HSync 2 (magenta)

0

110-016 LSU HSync 3 Detect the LSU HSync 3 (cyan)

0

110-017 LSU HSync 4 DetectsLSU HSync 4 (black)

0

110-020 LSU Installed Detect LSU

0

110-032 LSU Shutter Open Detects if the LSU shutter is open

0

110-033 LSU Shutter Closed Detects if the LSU shutter is closed

0

111-000 Toner Dispense Motor Yellow Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off
0

111-001 Toner Dispense Motor Magenta Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off
0

111-002 Toner Dispense Motor Cyan Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off
0

111-003 Toner Dispense Motor Black Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off
0

111-004 Toner Sensor Yellow TC sensor in developer tank

0

111-005 Toner Sensor Magenta TC sensor in developer tank

0

111-006 Toner Sensor Cyan TC sensor in developer tank

0

111-007 Toner Sensor Black TC sensor in developer tank

0

111-011 Toner Control Voltage Yellow Yellow toner voltage on/off

0

1148 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

111-012 Toner Control Voltage Magenta Magenta toner voltage on/off

0

111-013 Toner Control Voltage Cyan Cyan toner voltage on/off

0

111-014 Toner Control Voltage Black Black toner voltage on/off

0

111-020 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Yellow Yellow supply motor lock sensor
0

111-021 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Magenta Magenta supply motor lock sensor
0

111-022 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Cyan Cyan supply motor lock sensor
0

111-023 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Black Black supply motor lock sensor
0

111-030 Toner Reservoir Motor Yellow Yellow reservoir motor on/off

0

111-031 Toner Reservoir Motor Magenta Magenta reservoir motor on/off

0

111-032 Toner Reservoir Motor Cyan Cyan reservoir motor on/off

0

111-033 Toner Reservoir Motor Black Black reservoir motor on/off

0

111-034 Toner Reservoir Level Yellow Yellow reservoir motor on/off

0

111-035 Toner Reservoir Level Magenta Magenta reservoir motor on/off

0

111-036 Toner Reservoir Level Cyan Cyan reservoir level display

0

111-037 Toner Reservoir Level Black Black reservoir level display

0

112-001 Clear Manual Offset Value of Color Registration Clear manual offset value of color registration
0

112-010 Yellow Drum Home Sensor Status Yellow drum home sensor status display
1

112-011 Magenta Drum Home Sensor Status Magenta drum home sensor status display
1

112-012 Cyan Drum Home Sensor Status Cyan drum home sensor status display
1

112-013 Black Drum Home Sensor Status Black drum home sensor status display
1

112-020 ACR Shutter Motor Run ACR shutter motor on/off

0

112-021 ACR Shutter Detect Detect ACR shutter

0

Engine diagnostics 1149

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

112-022 ACR Shutter Open ACR shutter open

0

112-023 ACR Shutter Close ACR Shutter Close

0

112-030 Front ID Sensor P Read Front ID sensor P value display

0

112-031 Front ID Sensor S Read Front ID sensor S value display

0

112-032 Rear ID Sensor P Read Rear ID sensor P value display

0

112-033 Rear ID Sensor S Read Rear ID sensor S value display

0

112-034 Center ID Sensor P Read Show center ID sensor P value

0

112-035 Center ID Sensor S Read Show center ID sensor S value

0

113-000 Finisher Present Sensor Detect if the finisher is in place

0

113-035 Finisher Entrance Sensor Detects when paper is at entrance sensor

0

113-036 Finisher Exit Sensor Detects when paper is at exit sensor

0

113-036 Finisher Compile Paper Sensor Detect when a paper is at compile sensor
1

113-037 Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detects paddle home position

0

113-038 Finisher Left Tamper Home Sensor Detects lift tamper home position
0

113-039 Finisher Right Tamper Home Sensor Detects right tamper home position
0

113-041 Finisher Stapler Door Sensor Detects if stapler door cover is closed
0

113-042 Finisher Jam Cover Sensor Detects if jam door cover is closed
0

113-043 Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detects stapler home position

0

113-044 Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detects stapler level

0

113-045 Finisher Stapler Ready Sensor Detect stapler ready sensor

1

113-046 Finisher Ejector 1 Home Sensor Detect ejector 1 home position

1

113-046 Finisher Ejector 2 Home Sensor Detect ejector 2 home position

2

1150 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

113-046 Finisher Ejector 2 Encoder Sensor Detect ejector 2 encoder Sensor

3

113-047 Finisher Main Tray Home Sensor Detects main tray home position
0

113-047 Finisher Main Tray Beam Sensor Detect main tray beam sensor
1

113-047 Finisher Main Tray Low Limit Sensor Detect main tray low limit sensor
2

113-047 Finisher Main Tray Encoder Sensor Detect main tray encoder sensor
3

113-048 Finisher Paper Support Sensor Detect paper support home sensor
1

113-049 Finisher Traverse Front Sensor Detect traverse front home sensor
1

113-049 Finisher Traverse Rear Sensor Detect traverse rear home sensor
2

113-050 Finisher Entrance Motor Finisher entrance motor on/off

1

113-050 Finisher Exit Motor Finisher exit motor on/off

2

113-051 Finisher Paddle Motor Finisher paddle motor on/off

0

113-052 Finisher Left Tamper Motor Finisher left tamper motor on/off
0

113-053 Finisher Right Tamper Motor Finisher right tamper motor on/off
0

113-055 Finisher Staple Unit Motor Finisher staple unit motor on/off
0

113-056 Finisher Ejector 1 Motor Finisher ejector 1 motor on/off

1

113-056 Finisher Ejector 2 Motor Finisher ejector 2 motor on/off

2

113-056 Finisher Ejector 2 Reverse Motor Finisher ejector 2 reverse direction on/off
3

113-057 Finisher Main Tray Motor Finisher main tray motor on/off
0

113-057 Finisher Paper Support Motor Finisher paper support motor on/off
1

113-058 Finisher Traverse Motor Finisher staple unit traverse motor on/off
1

113-059 Finisher Paper Hold Solenoid Finisher paper hold solenoid on/off
1

113-060 Finisher Punch Motor Finisher punch motor on/off

0

Engine diagnostics 1151

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

113-061 Finisher Punch Encoder Sensor Detect finisher punch encoder sensor
0

113-061 Finisher Punch Position Sensor Detect finisher punch position sensor
1

113-061 Finisher Punch Home Sensor Detect finisher punch home sensor
2

113-062 Finisher Hopper Install Sensor Detect finisher punch hopper install sensor
0

113-062 Finisher Hopper Full Sensor Detect finisher punch hopper full sensor
1

113-200 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Lift Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher buffer lift sensor
0

113-201 2 Bin Finisher Clamp Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher clamp home sensor
0

113-202 2 Bin Finisher Diverter Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher diverter home sensor
0

113-203 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Away Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 away sensor
0

113-203 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 home sensor
1

113-203 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 encoder sensor
2

113-204 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 2 home sensor
0

113-204 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 2 encoder sensor
1

113-205 2 Bin Finisher End Fence Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher end fence sensor
0

113-206 2 Bin Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher paddle home sensor
0

113-207 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Entrance Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher Bridge entrance sensor
0

113-207 2 Bin Finisher IPTU Middle Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher Bridge Unit middle sensor
1

113-208 2 Bin Finisher Entrance Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher entrance sensor
0

113-209 2 Bin Finisher Main Exit Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main exit sensor
0

113-209 2 Bin Finisher Sub Exit Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher sub exit sensor
1

113-210 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Exit Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher buffer exit sensor
0

113-211 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler home sensor
0

1152 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

113-211 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Rear Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler rear sensor
1

113-211 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Front Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler front sensor
2

113-211 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Manual Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler manual sensor
3

113-211 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Head Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler head sensor
4

113-211 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler low sensor
5

113-211 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Ready Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler ready sensor
6

113-212 2 Bin Finisher Front Tamper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher front tamper sensor
0

113-213 2 Bin Finisher Rear Tamper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher rear tamper sensor
0

113-214 2 Bin Finisher Main Beam Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main beam sensor
0

113-214 2 Bin Finisher Main Front Level Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main front level sensor
1

113-214 2 Bin Finisher Main Rear Level Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main rear level sensor
2

113-214 2 Bin Finisher Main Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main encoder sensor
3

113-214 2 Bin Finisher Main Full Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main full sensor
4

113-214 2 Bin Finisher Sub Full Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher sub full sensor
5

113-215 2 Bin Finisher Booklet Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher booklet paper sensor
0

113-216 2 Bin Finisher Staple Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher staple paper sensor
0

113-216 2 Bin Finisher Staple Button Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher staple button sensor
1

113-217 2 Bin Finisher Compile Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher compile paper sensor
0

113-218 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Cover Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher bridge cover sensor
0

113-218 2 Bin Finisher Top Cover Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher top cover sensor
1

113-218 2 Bin Finisher Front Door Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher front door sensor
2

113-219 2 Bin Finisher Stack Top Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stack top sensor
0

Engine diagnostics 1153

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

113-220 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher bridge detect sensor
0

113-220 2 Bin Finisher Punch Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher punch detect sensor
1

113-220 2 Bin Finisher Booklet Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher booklet detect sensor
2

113-221 2 Bin Finisher BM exit cam home sensor Detects 2 bin finisher booklet exit cam home sensor
0

113-250 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Lift Motor 2 bin finisher buffer lift motor on/off
0

113-251 2 Bin Finisher Clamp Motor 2 bin finisher camp motor on/off
0

113-252 2 Bin Finisher Diverter Motor 2 bin finisher diverter motor on/off
0

113-253 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Motor 2 bin finisher eject 1 motor on/off
0

113-254 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Motor 2 bin finisher eject 2 motor on/off
0

113-256 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Feed Motor 2 bin finisher bridge feed motor on/off
0

113-257 2 Bin Finisher Entrance Motor 2 bin finisher entrance motor on/off
0

113-258 2 Bin Finisher Exit Feed Motor 2 bin finisher exit feed motor on/off
0

113-259 2 Bin Finisher End Fence Motor 2 bin finisher end fence motor on/off
0

113-260 2 Bin Finisher Paddle Motor 2 bin finisher paddle motor on/off
0

113-261 2 Bin Finisher Main Tray Motor 2 bin finisher main tray motor on/off
0

113-262 2 Bin Finisher Staple Move Motor 2 bin finisher staple move motor on/off
0

113-262 2 Bin Finisher Staple Head Motor 2 bin finisher staple head motor on/off
1

113-263 2 Bin Finisher Front Tamper Motor 2 bin finisher front tamper motor on/off
0

113-264 2 Bin Finisher Rear Tamper Motor 2 bin finisher rear tamper motor on/off
0

113-265 2 Bin Finisher Manual Blue LED 2 bin finisher manual blue LED on/off
0

113-265 2 Bin Finisher Manual Red LED 2 bin finisher Manual red LED on/off
1

113-266 2 Bin Finisher BM exit cam Motor

0

1154 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

113-267 2 Bin Finisher BM exit cam Solenoid

0

113-300 Booklet Stopper Home Sensor Detect booklet Stopper home sensor
0

113-301 Booklet Staple Home Sensor Detect booklet staple home sensor
0

113-302 Booklet Front Staple Empty Sensor Detect booklet front staple empty sensor
0

113-303 Booklet Rear Staple Empty Sensor Detect booklet rear staple empty sensor
0

113-304 Booklet Knife Home Sensor Detect booklet knife home sensor
0

113-305 Booklet Guide Home Sensor Detect booklet guide home sensor
0

113-306 Booklet Diverter Home Sensor Detect booklet Diverter home Sensor
0

113-308 Booklet Tamper Home Sensor Detect booklet tamper home sensor
0

113-309 Booklet Paddle Home Sensor Detect booklet paddle home sensor
0

113-310 Booklet Entrance Paper Sensor Detect booklet entrance paper sensor
0

113-311 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor Detect booklet fold output paper sensor
0

113-312 Booklet Fold Exit Paper Sensor Detect booklet fold exit paper sensor
0

113-313 Booklet Press Home Sensor Detect booklet press home sensor
0

113-350 Booklet Feed Motor Booklet feed motor on/off

0

113-351 Booklet Fold Motor Booklet fold motor on/off

0

113-352 Booklet Stopper Solenoid Booklet stopper solenoid on/off

0

113-353 Booklet Stopper Motor Booklet stopper motor on/off

0

113-354 Booklet Tamper Motor Booklet tamper motor on/off

0

113-355 Booklet Knife Motor Booklet knife motor on/off

0

113-356 Booklet Diverter Motor Booklet diverter motor on/off

0

113-357 Booklet Press Motor Booklet press motor on/off

0

Engine diagnostics 1155

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

113-358 Booklet Paddle Motor Booklet paddle motor on/off

0

113-359 Booklet Guide Motor Booklet guide motor on/off

0

113-360 Booklet Staple Motor Booklet staple motor on/off

0

113-400 Punch Scan Home Sensor Detect punch scan home sensor
0

113-401 Punch Scan Edge 1 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 1 sensor
0

113-401 Punch Scan Edge 2 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 2 sensor
1

113-401 Punch Scan Edge 3 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 3 sensor
2

113-401 Punch Scan Edge 4 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 4 sensor
3

113-402 Punch Home Sensor Detect punch home sensor

0

113-403 Punch Position A Sensor Detect punch position A sensor

0

113-403 Punch Position B Sensor Detect punch position B sensor

1

113-404 Punch Encoder Sensor Detect punch encoder sensor

0

113-405 Punch Hopper Full Sensor Detect punch hopper full sensor
0

113-406 Punch Type 1 Detect Sensor Detect punch type 1 detect sensor
0

113-406 Punch Type 2 Detect Sensor Detect punch type 2 detect sensor
1

113-450 Punch Scan Motor Punch scan motor on/off

0

113-451 Punch Motor Punch motor on/off

0

Fax diagnostics
Learn about the fax diagnostics.

Fax NVM Read/Write

● Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax NVM Read/Write

1156 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-28 Fax Diagnostics )Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write)

Purpose To change a configuration value for fax firmware.

Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can navigate through the list of
configuration values and descriptions that display.

Users can input a code through the text box to search for a configuration value.

After selecting a value, press the Edit button to open an interface for user input.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference N/A

Table 3-29 Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write codes

Code Name Description Default Range

20-200 Pause dial time Pause time (value * 1000 ms) Country/region 0-200
value

20-210 Dial pulse M/B ratio 33/66 40/60 Country/region 0=

value OPTION_DP_3
3

1=
OPTION_DP_4
0

2=
OPTION_DP_3
7

3=
OPTION_DP_5
0

20-220 Auto dial start pause time Pause time before auto-dialing 1 0-10
(second)

20-300 Ring on time Ring on time (ms) 170 90-800

20-310 Ring off time Ring off time (ms) 560 90-800

20-320 Ring detection frequency Sets the call indication 1 1 = 12-80 hz

frequency range that will be
detected by LIU. 2 = 16-55 hz

3 = 20-55 hz

4 = 22-55 hz

20-330 Ring on max time Ring on max time (ms) 5100 3000-12000

20-340 Ring off max time Ring off max time (ms) 11100 9000-22000

20-400 DTMF high-frequency level DTMF high-frequency level Country/region 0-15

(dBm) value

20-410 DTMF low-frequency level DTMF low-frequency level (dBm) Country/region 0-15
value

Fax diagnostics 1157

 Table 3-29 Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write codes (continued)

Code Name Description Default Range

20-420 DTMF timing DTMF duration of on/off output 8 1 = 80/80

(ms)
2 = 70/70

3 = 70/150

4 = 60/60

5 = 80/100

6 = 150/50

7 = 150/240

8 = 100/100

9 = 100/80

20-500 Dial mode Select tone/pulse Country/region 0=

value OPTION_TONE
_MODE

1=
OPTION_PULS
E_MODE

20-520 Error rate Adjust error rate (Off/5%/10%/ 2 0=

20%) OPTION_RATE
_OFF

1=
OPTION_RATE
_5

2=
OPTION_RATE
_10

3=
OPTION_RATE
_20

20-530 Dial tone detect Detect dial tone prior to sending Country/region 0=
value OPTION_OFF

1=
OPTION_ON

20-540 Loop current detect Detect if loop current is present Country/region 0=

prior to sending value OPTION_OFF

1=
OPTION_ON

20-550 Busy signal detect Detect busy signal to allow Country/region 0=

redials value OPTION_OFF

1=
OPTION_ON

20-560 TCF duration Adjust TCF duration (ms) 1500 1000-3000

20-800 Modem speed Select modem start speed 24

20-810 Fax transmission level Adjust fax transmission level Country/region Country/region
(dBm) value value

1158 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-29 Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write codes (continued)

Code Name Description Default Range

20-830 Auto dial timeout Adjust auto dial timeout Country/region 30-150
(second) value

20-920 CNG detection count CNG tone detection check count 2 1-15
during ANS/FAX mode

20-930 Caller ID This option is needed to Country/region 0=

guide Caller ID off for user value OPTION_OFF
environment
1=
OPTION_ON

20-940 Ext. phone Ext. phone detection enable/ 1 0 = Disable

disable (default: enable 1)
1 = Enable

21-999 Fax line setting Fax test line setting (dual fax) 0 0 = Line 1

1 = Line 2

21-800 Modem speed line 2 Select modem start speed for 24

line 2. This item will display
only when a dual line fax kit is
installed

Fax test routines

● Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax Test Routines

Table 3-30 Fax Diagnostics (Fax Test Routines)

Purpose To perform test routines for the fax machine.

Operation When the main Fax Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list of routines and
procedure descriptions that display. Users can input a code through the text box to search for a routine.

After selecting a routine, press OK to open the test window that lists the selected routine. Users can
start/stop the selected test routine.

Table 3-31 Fax Test Routines codes

Code Name Description State

Displayed

20-012 Single tone 1100Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 1100Hz on line 1 On/Off

20-014 Single tone 1650Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 1650Hz on line 1 On/Off

20-015 Single tone 1850Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 1850Hz on line 1 On/Off

20-016 Single tone 2100Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 2100Hz on line 1 On/Off

20-020 DTMF # Line1 Emits DTMF # on line 1 On/Off

20-021 DTMF * Line1 Emits DTMF * on line 1 On/Off

20-022 DTMF 0 Line1 Emits DTMF 0 on line 1 On/Off

20-023 DTMF 1 Line1 Emits DTMF 1 on line 1 On/Off

20-024 DTMF 2 Line1 Emits DTMF 2 on line 1 On/Off

Fax diagnostics 1159

 Table 3-31 Fax Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Name Description State

Displayed

20-025 DTMF 3 Line1 Emits DTMF 3 on line 1 On/Off

20-026 DTMF 4 Line1 Emits DTMF 4 on line 1 On/Off

20-027 DTMF 5 Line1 Emits DTMF 5 on line 1 On/Off

20-028 DTMF 6 Line1 Emits DTMF 6 on line 1 On/Off

20-029 DTMF 7 Line1 Emits DTMF 7 on line 1 On/Off

20-030 DTMF 8 Line1 Emits DTMF 8 on line 1 On/Off

20-031 DTMF 9 Line1 Emits DTMF 9 on line 1 On/Off

20-040 V.21 300 bps Line1 Emits V.21 300 bps Line 1 On/Off

20-041 V.27ter 2400 bps Line1 Emits V.27ter 2400 bps Line1 On/Off

20-042 V.27ter 4800 bps Line1 Emits V.27ter 4800 bps Line1 On/Off

20-043 V.29 7200 bps Line1 Emits V.29 7200 bps Line1 On/Off

20-044 V.29 9600 bps Line1 Emits V.29 9600 bps Line1 On/Off

20-045 V.17 7200 bps Line1 Emits V.17 7200 bps Line1 On/Off

20-046 V.17 9600 bps Line1 Emits V.17 9600 bps Line1 On/Off

20-047 V.17 12000 bps Line1 Emits V.17 12000 bps Line1 On/Off

20-048 V.17 14400 bps Line1 Emits V.17 14400 bps Line1 On/Off

20-049 V.34 2400 bps Line1 Emits V.34 2400 bps Line1 On/Off

20-050 V.34 4800 bps Line1 Emits V.34 4800 bps Line1 On/Off

20-051 V.34 7200 bps Line1 Emits V.34 7200 bps Line1 On/Off

20-052 V.34 9600 bps Line1 Emits V.34 9600 bps Line1 On/Off

20-053 V.34 12000 bps Line1 Emits V.34 12000 bps Line1 On/Off

20-054 V.34 14400 bps Line1 Emits V.34 14400 bps Line1 On/Off

20-055 V.34 16800 bps Line1 Emits V.34 16800 bps Line1 On/Off

20-056 V.34 19200 bps Line1 Emits V.34 19200 bps Line1 On/Off

20-057 V.34 21600 bps Line1 Emits V.34 21600 bps Line1 On/Off

20-058 V.34 24000 bps Line1 Emits V.34 24000 bps Line1 On/Off

20-059 V.34 26400 bps Line1 Emits V.34 26400 bps Line1 On/Off

20-060 V.34 28800 bps Line1 Emits V.34 28800 bps Line1 On/Off

20-061 V.34 31200 bps Line1 Emits V.34 31200 bps Line1 On/Off

20-062 V.34 33600 bps Line1 Emits V.34 33600 bps Line1 On/Off

21-012 Single tone 1100Hz Ln2 Emits single tone 1100Hz on line 2 On/Off

21-014 Single tone 1650Hz Ln2 Emits single tone 1650Hz on line 2 On/Off

21-015 Single tone 1850Hz Ln2 Emits single tone 1850Hz on line 2 On/Off

21-016 Single tone 2100Hz Ln2 Emits single tone 2100Hz on line 2 On/Off

1160 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-31 Fax Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Name Description State

Displayed

21-020 DTMF # Line2 Emits DTMF # on line 2 On/Off

21-021 DTMF * Line2 Emits DTMF * on line 2 On/Off

21-022 DTMF 0 Line2 Emits DTMF 0 on line 2 On/Off

21-023 DTMF 1 Line2 Emits DTMF 1 on line 2 On/Off

21-024 DTMF 2 Line2 Emits DTMF 2 on line 2 On/Off

21-025 DTMF 3 Line2 Emits DTMF 3 on line 2 On/Off

21-026 DTMF 4 Line2 Emits DTMF 4 on line 2 On/Off

21-027 DTMF 5 Line2 Emits DTMF 5 on line 2 On/Off

21-028 DTMF 6 Line2 Emits DTMF 6 on line 2 On/Off

21-029 DTMF 7 Line2 Emits DTMF 7 on line 2 On/Off

21-030 DTMF 8 Line2 Emits DTMF 8 on line 2 On/Off

21-031 DTMF 9 Line2 Emits DTMF 9 on line 2 On/Off

21-040 V.21 300 bps Line2 Emits V.21 300 bps Line2 On/Off

21-041 V.27ter 2400 bps Line2 Emits V.27ter 2400 bps Line2 On/Off

21-042 V.27ter 4800 bps Line2 Emits V.27ter 4800 bps Line2 On/Off

21-043 V.29 7200 bps Line2 Emits V.29 7200 bps Line2 On/Off

21-044 V.29 9600 bps Line2 Emits V.29 9600 bps Line2 On/Off

21-045 V.17 7200 bps Line2 Emits V.17 7200 bps Line2 On/Off

21-046 V.17 9600 bps Line2 Emits V.17 9600 bps Line2 On/Off

21-047 V.17 12000 bps Line2 Emits V.17 12000 bps Line2 On/Off

21-048 V.17 14400 bps Line2 Emits V.17 14400 bps Line2 On/Off

21-049 V.34 2400 bps Line2 Emits V.34 2400 bps Line2 On/Off

21-050 V.34 4800 bps Line2 Emits V.34 4800 bps Line2 On/Off

21-051 V.34 7200 bps Line2 Emits V.34 7200 bps Line2 On/Off

21-052 V.34 9600 bps Line2 Emits V.34 9600 bps Line2 On/Off

21-053 V.34 12000 bps Line2 Emits V.34 12000 bps Line2 On/Off

21-054 V.34 14400 bps Line2 Emits V.34 14400 bps Line2 On/Off

21-055 V.34 16800 bps Line2 Emits V.34 16800 bps Line2 On/Off

21-056 V.34 19200 bps Line2 Emits V.34 19200 bps Line2 On/Off

21-057 V.34 21600 bps Line2 Emits V.34 21600 bps Line2 On/Off

21-058 V.34 24000 bps Line2 Emits V.34 24000 bps Line2 On/Off

21-059 V.34 26400 bps Line2 Emits V.34 26400 bps Line2 On/Off

21-060 V.34 28800 bps Line2 Emits V.34 28800 bps Line2 On/Off

21-061 V.34 31200 bps Line2 Emits V.34 31200 bps Line2 On/Off

Fax diagnostics 1161

 Table 3-31 Fax Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Name Description State

Displayed

21-062 V.34 33600 bps Line2 Emits V.34 33600 bps Line2 On/Off

Scanner diagnostics
Learn about the scanner diagnostics.

Shading test

● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test

1162 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-32 Scanner Diagnostics (Shading Test)

Purpose – To check the quality of scanned images, especially if there might be defects in optical devices
such as the lens, mirror, or lamp.

– Check the quality problem as shown below:

Operation For the Image Scanner Unit

Procedure
Press Shade and Print report to see if the current shading value is correct. Mono, red, green, and blue
gray shading values will be shown on the printed report. When the previous shading value is needed,
press “Print Last Shade Report”.

For the Flow ADF unit

1. Load the shading sheet on the Flow ADF tray.

2. Enter SCV mode. Select the following menu items:

Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test > Shade and Print Report (Flow ADF)

Press Print Last Shade Report (ADF) for the previous shading value report.

3. Check if the printed results are correct.

NOTE:

– When executing Flow ADF shading, use only the shading sheet (JC63–05055A).

– A Shading Test for the Flow ADF unit must be completed after replacing the Flow ADF unit or
main board.

Verification Look at the bottom of the report page for a "RESULTS : OK" message.

Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write

● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write

Scanner diagnostics 1163

 Table 3-33 Scanner Diagnostics (Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write)

Purpose To read and/or write values in the scanner and Flow ADF
memory.

Operation Procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users
can navigate through the list of codes with descriptions and
saved values. Users can also directly input a code through
the text box to search for an NVM.

After selecting a code, the Edit button will be enabled only

if the code is writable.

If the selected code is writable and the Edit button is

enabled, press the button to configure the desired value
for the code.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference See the following table.

Table 3-34 Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write codes

Code NVM description Default GX Model

05-0000 Pick Up Count 0 O

05-0001 Separation Roller Count 0 O

05-0010 Document Duplex Reverse Point 0 O

05-0030 Simplex Registration Value (Registration 1) 0 O

05-0040 Duplex Registration Value (Registration 2) 0 O

05-0050 Width Guide Max Value Depends on Flow ADF O

05-0060 Width Guide Min Value Depends on Flow ADF O

Scanner/Flow ADF test routines

● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines

Table 3-35 Scanner Diagnostics (Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines)

Purpose To perform test routines for the scanner and Flow ADF.

Operation Procedure When the main Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines window displays, users can
navigation through the list of routines and descriptions that display. Users can
input a code through the text box to search for a routine.

After selecting a routine, press OK to open the test window that lists the
selected routine. Users can start/stop the selected test routine.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference See the following table.

1164 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-36 Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines codes

Code Name Value GX model

06-0000 Scanner Original Size High/Low O

Detecting Sensor 1

06-0001 Scanner Original Size High/Low O

Detecting Sensor 2

06-0010 Scanner Cover Open/Close High/Low O

Sensor 1

06-0011 Scanner Cover Open/Close High/Low O

Sensor 2

06-0020 Scanner Platen Motor Start/Stop O

Forward

06-0030 Scanner Platen Motor Start/Stop O

Backward

06-0040 Scanner Platen Home High/Low O

Position Sensor

05-0000 Document Length .1 Sensor High/Low O

05-0001 Document Length .2 Sensor High/Low O

05-0020 Document Cover Open High/Low O

Sensor

05-0040 Document Detect Sensor High/Low O

05-0050 Document Feed Sensor High/Low O

05-0060 Document Simplex High/Low O

Registration Sensor

05–0061 Document Duplex

Registration Sensor

05-0070 Document Scan Read High/Low O

Sensor 1

05-0071 Document Scan Read High/Low O

Sensor 2

05-0080 Document Exit Sensor High/Low O

05-0090 Document Pickup Clutch Start/Stop X

05-0110 Document Motor Forward Start/Stop O

05-0111 Document Motor Backward Start/Stop O

05-0123 Document width 1 MSO High/Low O

Sensor

05-0124 Document width 2 MSO High/Low O

Sensor

05-0125 Document width 3 MSO High/Low O

Sensor

05-0130 Document Pickup Motor Start/Stop O

Forward

05-0131 Document Pickup Motor Start/Stop O

Backward

Scanner diagnostics 1165

 Table 3-36 Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Name Value GX model

05-0140 Document Pickup Roller High/Low X

Detect Sensor

05-0151 Document Stacker Lift High/Low O

Lower Sensor

05-0160 Document Registration 1 Start/Stop O

Motor Forward

05-0162 Document Registration 1 Start/Stop O

Motor Backward

05-0170 Document Registration 2 Start/Stop O

Motor Forward

05-0171 Document Registration 2 Start/Stop O

Motor Backward

05-0180 Document Stacker Lift Start/Stop O

Motor Forward

05-0181 Document Stacker Lift Start/Stop O

Motor Backward

05–0182 Document Exit Motor

Forward

05–0183 Document Exit Motor

Backward

05–0184 Document Pickup Release

Motor Forward

05–0185 Document Pickup Release

Motor Backward

05–0186 Document Scan ln Release

Motor Forward

05–0187 Document Scan ln Release

Motor Backward

05-0190 Document Width Guide ADC 10Bit (0~1023) O

Sensor

05–0191 Document USM ADC Sensor

05–0192 Document USM Calibration

Test

05-0210 Document Jig Test Low Start/Stop O

Speed Simplex

05-0230 Document Jig Test High Start/Stop O

Speed Simplex

Adjustment
Learn about the print adjustment.

Print adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Image Position

1166 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-37 Print Adjustment (Image Position)

Purpose Manually adjust the position of the printed image on the

paper in the print engine.

Operational Procedure 1. Select a tray to adjust.

2. Change the adjustment value using the + or -

buttons, then press the OK button to save the
changes.

– Simplex Leading Edge

– Simplex Side Edge

– Duplex Leading Edge

– Duplex Side Edge

NOTE:

– Adjustment must be done for each tray (Tray 1,

2, 3, 4, and 5).

– Do not choose ALL for the tray selection.

– Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.

3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image is

adjusted. If not, repeat Step 2.

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Print Margin Test

This menu is used to print out the test pattern manually.

Copy adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Copy Adjustment > Image Position

Adjustment 1167
 Table 3-38 Copy Adjustment (Image Position)

Purpose Manually adjust the position of the copied image on the paper in the copy
engine.

Operation Procedure NOTE: Before copy adjustment:

– Make sure that the initial values of margin adjustment are the same as
the values of the print adjustment.

– Perform an adjustment for each tray. Do not choose All for tray selection,
as this can confuse the adjustment.

NOTE:

– Complete adjustment for each tray (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5).

– Do not choose All for tray selection.

– Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.

1. Locate the Scanner A/S Chart on the Flow ADF tray.

2. Change the adjustment value using the + or - button, and then press OK
to save the changes.

– Simplex Leading Edge

– Simplex Side Edge

– Duplex Leading Edge

– Duplex Side Edge

3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image has moved. If not, repeat
Step 2.

Scan area adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

1168 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-39 Scan Area Adjustment (Automatic Adjustment)

Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of scanned images automatically.

Operation Procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart at the scanner glass.

Note that the Lead Edge arrows point to the left side of the scanner glass and are
placed face down. The Scanner A/S Chart comes in two sizes, A4 and Letter.

2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the proper value
based on the scanning result of the chart.

3. The new value saves to the system.

4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the
scanner glass.

5. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the
chart to the scanned image.

6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.

NOTE: Specifications:

– a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

– c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Adjustment 1169
 Table 3-40 Scan Area Adjustment (Manual Adjustment)

Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.

Operation Procedure 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:

– Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)

– Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)

– Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)

2. Select one item and press the Edit button.

3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.

4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press +,
otherwise press -.

5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -,
otherwise, press +.

6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.

7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the
scanner glass.

8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the
chart to the scanned image.

9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.

NOTE: Specifications:

– a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

– c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

Flow ADF adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Flow ADF Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

1170 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-41 Flow ADF Adjustment (Automatic Adjustment)

Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of images scanned with the Flow ADF
automatically.

Operation Procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart at the scanner glass.

2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the proper value
based on the scanning result of the chart.

3. The new value saves to the system.

4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the
Flow ADF.

5. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the
chart to the scanned image.

6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.

NOTE: Specifications:

– a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

– c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

NOTE: After executing the Flow ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer to
Scanner Diagnostics.

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Flow ADF Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Adjustment 1171
 Table 3-42 Flow ADF Adjustment (Manual Adjustment)

Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.

Operation 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:
procedure
– Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)

– Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)

– Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)

2. Select one item and press the Edit button.

3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.

4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press +, otherwise press
-.

5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -, otherwise, press +.

NOTE: Specifications:

– a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

– c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.

7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the Flow ADF.

8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the chart to the
scanned image.

9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the scanned image.

10. If Auto Skew Correction during job box is checked, skewed image is corrected by digitally rotating
the scanned images.

NOTE: When this function is enabled, visual artifact (like checkerboard patterns) might appear on
the image depending on the original contents or copy option settings.

NOTE: After executing the Flow ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer to Scanner Diagnostics.
1172 Chapter 3 Problem solving
Image management
Learn about image management.

Auto tone adjustment activation

● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Normal

Table 3-43 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Normal)

Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image is poor.

Normal TRC Control is recommended after changing a unit,
such as a toner cartridge, imaging unit, and PTB, or after
restarting the printer.

Operation Procedure 1. Select On or Off for Normal TRC Control execution.

– Off: Normal TRC Control will not execute.

– On: Normal TRC Control will execute during the

determined conditions,

2. Change the execution condition(s) of Normal TRC

Control.

– Page Count: The system executes Normal TRC

Control based on the count of printed pages
since the last execution.

– Time Left Alone: The system executes Normal

TRC Control when the system returns from a
power save mode and the rest time exceeds the
configured value.

Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has
recovered.

● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Full

Table 3-44 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Full)

Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is replaced,

the life of the OPC drum is changed, the density of the
image is poor, or the temperature and/or humidity in the
room changes suddenly.

Operation Procedure 1. Select On or Off for Full TRC Control execution.

– Off: Full TRC Control will not execute.

– On: Full TRC Control will execute during the

determined conditions,

2. Change the execution condition(s) of Full TRC Control.

– Page Count: The system executes Full TRC

Control based on the count of printed pages
since the last execution.

– Time Left Alone: The system executes Full

TRC Control when the system returns from a
power save mode and the rest time exceeds the
configured value.

Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has
recovered.

Image management 1173

 Print test patterns
Learn about the print test patterns.

Diagnostics > Print Test Patterns >

● EP Calibration Pattern1 Contone

Service functions
Learn about service functions.

Main memory clear

Learn about the main memory clear.

Service Functions > Main Memory Clear

● This function resets the main memory of the system to the factory default setting. This function can be used
to reset the system to the initial value when the product is functioning abnormally. User configured values
return to the default values.

To clear the main memory, select the country/region where the system is located, and restart the printer.

Debug log
Learn about the debug log.

Service Functions > Debug Log

● This function sets the system log message level. Users can select three options:

– Off: This option disables the logging option.

– Job Status: This option only enables the logging of user created jobs.

– Details: This option enables all the logging options of the running tasks of the system. This option
might affect the performance of certain system operations. Use this option when the system performs
abnormally and engineers need to investigate the problem.

Capture log
Learn about the capture log.

Service Functions > Capture Log

● This function copies all the saved logs in the system to a USB flash drive as a .zip file. The size of the system
log could reach up to 1 GB. If the system log size becomes very large, it will take a longer time to copy to the
USB flash drive.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the printer.

2. Tap the Service Mode app. When the pop-up displays, press the area below the pop-up until the
password window appears. Enter 4087617 and press the OK button.

3. Go to Service Functions > Debug Log and change the debug log level to INFO.

1174 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 4. Go to Service Functions > Capture Log.

5. Select All or Period. If selecting Period, enter the start and end date.

6. Press the Capture Log button.

7. Once the log is completed, a completion message will display. Restore the debug log level to JOB
STATUS.

NOTE: If the system log size becomes very large, it will take longer to copy to the USB flash drive.

8. Check that the Log File has been saved to the USB flash drive.

Transfer assembly control mode

Learn about the transfer assembly control mode.

Service Functions > Transfer Assembly Control Mode

Table 3-45 Transfer Assembly Control Mode

●
Purpose To correct transfer related problems. This function can be used to change the transfer
value to optimize image quality to a certain type of paper.

Operation Procedure – T2 Control Mode

○ Choose the paper group, paper side, and paper direction.

○ Adjust PWM value based on the problem type.

● Blur: Increase PWM value

● Poor Transfer: Increase PWM value

● Re-transfer: Decrease PWM value

● White Spot: Decrease PWM value

● OPC Cylic Ghost: Decrease PWM value

Verification Print a test job and make sure the transfer problem has been resolved.

Specification N/A

Reference N/A

Transfer assembly control mode 1175

 Envelope rotate
Learn about the envelope rotate function.

Service Functions > Envelope Rotate

● This menu enables rotation when printing on an envelope. The machine usually guides loaded envelopes
with SEF direction. If this function is enabled, the user can load an envelope with LEF direction and the
machine will rotate the image for printing on the envelope.

This function provides the following setting options:

– Off (default): Load envelope SEF direction

– 90 degrees: Load envelope LEF direction.

– 180 degrees: Load envelope SEF direction with flap on bottom side.

NOTE: If the paper source is Auto, the device will feed from the Tray 1 because the LEF envelope can only
be loaded in the Tray 1 according to paper specification.

If the length of envelope is over the maximum size of the custom width, the device will not rotate the
image and determine that the direction of the envelope is SEF. For example, the A4 model supports custom
sizes like W 98–216 ~ L148–356. This model does not support C5 Env (162x229) DL Env (110x220), No 9
Env (98x225), No 10 Env (105x241) rotation.

Print quality troubleshooting guide

Learn about print quality troubleshooting.

Image quality problems and solutions

Learn about print -quality troubleshooting.

Print quality defects can be caused by printer components, consumables, media, internal software, external
software applications, and environmental conditions.

To successfully troubleshoot print quality problems, eliminate as many variables as possible.

First, generate prints using printable pages using laser paper. Use paper from an unopened ream that has been
acclimated to room temperature. Make sure that genuine HP toner is installed in the printer.

1176 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Figure 3-39 A/S chart (A3)

Image quality problems and solutions 1177

 Figure 3-40 A/S chart

Table 3-46 A/S chart

Item Description Use

[1] Grid pattern For adjusting margin and magnification

[2] Black patches For adjusting skew error

[3] Barcode For checking the reproduction of the

barcode

[4] Note area For recording the date, conditions, and so

on.

[A] Halftone band For checking banding and jitter (K 50%)

[B, L] Resolution patterns For checking resolution

[C, D, E] Images For checking color reproduction

[F] Map image For checking fine line reproduction

[G] Color patches For checking color reproduction and

uniformity

[H] Gradation pattern For checking tone reproduction of seven

colors (C, M, Y, K, R, G, B/10~100%)

[I] Color/Mono text For checking the reproduction of color, mono

text

[J] Multilingual feature For checking the reproduction of small text

1178 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-46 A/S chart (continued)

Item Description Use

[K] White gap pattern For checking color to color, color to mono
white gap

[M] Rulers For checking the magnification error (unit:

cm)

[N] Rulers For checking the magnification error (unit:

inch)

How to analyze image defects

See the following flowchart.

TIP: Depending on the remaining life of the part, the cause of the defect can vary. Check the remaining life of
the part.

Check for defects even if the defect is not repeated.

Image quality problems and solutions 1179

 Figure 3-41 Defect analysis flowchart

How to analyze image defects (rollers)

Use the following table to isolate rollers suspected of causing defects.

Table 3-47 Roller period table (repetitive defects)

Roller Periodic

Magnetic roller (MR) 32.3 mm (1.27 in)

Charge Roller (CR) 37.7 mm (1.48 in)

1180 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-47 Roller period table (repetitive defects) (continued)

Roller Periodic

Transfer roller 44.o mm (1.73 in)

Transfer roller (T2) 75.4 mm (2.97 in)

OPC/Drum 94.5 mm (3.72 in)

Fuser Belt (HR) 110.0 mm (4.33 in)

Fuser Pressure Roller (PR) 114.7 mm (4.51 in)

Vertical black lines

Learn about vertical black lines.

Figure 3-42 Typical faulty images

Table 3-48 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Charge roller (CR) is contaminated. Check if the CR is contaminated.

Replace the Drum unit if there are additional problems.

Vertical black lines 1181

 Table 3-48 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

2 ITB is contaminated. Check if the ITB is contaminated.

● The ITB cleaning is poor.

● The ITB clean-blade is partially broken.

Replace the ITB Cleaner if there are additional problems.

3 Scanner unit is contaminated. Wipe the surface of the contaminated parts with a soft
cloth.
● Scan glass contamination
CAUTION: The scanner unit contains fragile parts. Use
● Mirror contamination caution while cleaning.

● CCD sensor contamination

Vertical light or white lines

Learn about vertical light or white lines.

Figure 3-43 Typical faulty images

1182 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-49 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 A foreign substance is between the magnetic roller and the Remove the foreign substance.
blade.

No toner on magnetic roller.

Make the hook (transparency sheet is recommended.)

Put the hook into the gap between magnetic roller and
blade.

Pull out foreign substances.

2 The developer in the developer unit is empty or the ● Check the life remaining of the developer unit on the
developer unit life has expired. supply information report.

– If its life has expired, replace the developer unit.

● Check if the developer layer on magnetic roller is

uniform.

– If the developer layer is short, replace the

developer unit.

3 The laser beam path is blocked. Clean the laser scanner assembly window.

(Foreign substance is on the laser scanner assembly

window.)

Vertical light or white lines 1183

 Table 3-49 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

4 The OPC is scratched or contaminated in a vertical Replace the drum unit.

direction.

1184 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-49 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

5 ITB cleaner or T2 transfer unit is contaminated with paper Clean the paper dust stick on a regular basis.
dust build up.

● ITB cleaner contamination

NOTE: The paper dust stick (Callout 1 ) may vary

depending on the product.

NOTE: Clean the paper dust stick on a regular basis in

order to prevent horizontal light band. Frequent cleaning
can help maintain product quality.
● T2 contamination (Callout 1) & Image defect
HP recommends to clean this item when replacing TCU at
a minimum.

Horizontal periodic black lines, dots

Learn about horizontal periodic black lines and dots.

Horizontal periodic black lines, dots 1185

 Figure 3-44 Typical faulty images

Table 3-50 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Horizontal periodic band or dot (CR 38 mm). Clean the contaminated surface on the charge roller with a
soft cloth.
Check if the surface of the charge roller is contaminated or
scratched. If the surface is scratched, replace the drum unit.

2 Horizontal periodic band or dot (OPC 188 mm). Clean the contaminated surface on the OPC drum with a
soft cloth.
Check if the surface of the OPC drum is contaminated or
scratched. If the surface is scratched, replace the drum unit.

3 Check if the charge roller contact plate had debris or is Clean the charge roller contact plate.
contaminated.
If the problem persists, replace the drum unit.

If the problem persists after replacing the drum unit,

replace the HVPS board.

Horizontal periodic light/dark lines, dots

Learn about horizontal periodic light/dark lines and dots.

Figure 3-45 Typical faulty images

1186 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-51 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Horizontal periodic bands (OPC, 94.2 mm) This problem is likely to resolve itself over time.

● OPC was exposed for too long. If the problem persists, replace the drum unit.

● Damage was caused by a high voltage in a short

amount of time.

2 Horizontal periodic bands (magnetic roller, 35 mm) Replace developer unit.

The magnetic roller is in poor condition.

V-groove of the surface of magnetic roller is not uniform.

Foggy image
Learn about foggy images.

Figure 3-46 Typical faulty images

Table 3-52 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Voltage of OPC motor is abnormally low. Replace the drum unit.

2 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace the HVPS board.

HVPS is damaged or broken.

Foggy image 1187

 Table 3-52 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Cause Action

3 Toner is over supplied by abnormal TC sensor. Replace the toner cartridge.

4 Voltage of OPC motor is abnormally low. Check the transfer assembly connection in the HVPS.

Transfer assembly voltage is abnormally high. Check if the transfer assembly roller spring in the ITB is
connected correctly.

Replace HVPS.

Light image
Learn about light image.

Figure 3-47 Typical faulty images

Table 3-53 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 TRC operates abnormally. Perform TRC three to four times.

2 Poor transfer has occurred. Force a jam during the print job. Check the image on the
transfer belt. If the image on the transfer belt is normal,
refer to the Blurred image section.

3 Output voltage of HVPS is abnormally low. Replace HVPS.

● Color density decreases.

4 TC down and toner spills. Replace the developer unit.

5 Toner spills by eraser. Check if the eraser is contaminated.

Replace the drum unit.

Blurred image
Learn about blurred images.

1188 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-48 Typical faulty images

Table 3-54 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 High humidity and/or the quality of the paper. Use new, high quality paper.

2 T2 transfer voltage is low. Turn up the T2 transfer voltage.

3 Connection between HVPS and THV is incorrect. Check if the connection between T2 high voltage terminal
and HVPS THV terminal is correct.

Check if the connection between the HVPS and ITB is

correct.

4 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace the HVPS.

Incorrect color registration

Learn about the incorrect color registration defect.

Incorrect color registration 1189

 Figure 3-49 Typical faulty images

Text of lines appear jagged, unclear, or blurred. This defect is usually caused by a faulty laser/scanner diode.

NOTE: Feed direction (callout 1).

Table 3-55 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 CPR sensor is contaminated. Execute CPR manually.

2 Environment has changed. To recognize the environment change, execute CPR after a
certain amount of time.

3 Belt surface is contaminated. Remove the ITB. If the surface of the belt is contaminated,
clean it with soft cloth.

Uneven pitch and jitter image

Learn about uneven pitch and jitter image.

Figure 3-50 Typical faulty images

1190 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-56 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Under 3 mm periodic jitters or horizontal bands have Remove foreign substance from the drive gears.
occurred.
Grease the drive gears.

● Developer unit gears

● Drum unit gears

● Main drive unit gears.

If the problem persists, replace the abnormal units.

● Developer unit

● Drum unit

● Main drive unit

2 Under 1 mm periodic jitter or horizontal bands have Check if the laser scanner assembly is assembled
occurred. correctly. If not, replace the screws.

Replace the laser scanner assembly.

Skewed image
Learn about skewed images.

Figure 3-51 Typical faulty images

Table 3-57 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Is the tray properly installed? Reinstall the tray correctly.

2 Is too much paper loaded in the tray? Remove some paper.

3 Are the paper guides properly set? Adjust the paper guides.

4 Is the surface of the pickup/reverse/feed Clean or replace the contaminated roller.

roller dirty?

Skewed image 1191

 Table 3-57 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

5 Is the Flow ADF installed and adjusted Reinstall the Flow ADF unit.
properly?
Adjust the Flow ADF skew.

6 Is the intermediate transfer belt installed Reinstall the ITB unit.

properly?

Poor fusing performance

Learn about poor fusing performance.

Figure 3-52 Typical faulty images

Table 3-58 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Check the paper type. Check that the paper type displayed on the control panel is
the same type of paper being used for the print job.
Depending on what type of paper is used, print speed
varies.

● Plain (71~90g/), Thick (91~105g/): Full Speed

● Heavy weight (106~175g/): Half Speed

● Envelope (75~90 g/), Label (120~150 g/): Half Speed

1192 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-58 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Cause Action

2 The fuser unit is worn out. Replace the fuser unit.

3 Check the surface of the fuser belt and pressure roller for Replace the fuser unit.
scratches.

4 Check the temperature control system for problems. Check the non-contact thermistor sensor

● Thermistor is broken or operates abnormally

● Halogen lamp is broken or operates abnormally

Check the halogen lamp.

If parts are broken, replace the broken parts or the fuser

unit.

5 Check if the pressure control system operates properly. Check the pressure control system.

If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.

6 Paper is wrapped on the heating roller. Remove the wrapped paper and print a test page.

If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.

Stain on the paper back side

Learn about the stain on the paper back side.

Figure 3-53 Typical faulty images

Table 3-59 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Is the transfer roller dirty or worn out? Clean or replace the transfer roller assembly.

2.1 Is there any stain caused by poor cleaning on the ITB? Clean the ITB.

If the problem persists, replace the ITB unit.

2.2 Is the ITB cleaning blade in proper contact with the ITB? Take off the ITB and check that the ITB cleaning blade
pressure spring and the pressure hook are installed
correctly.

Stain on the paper back side 1193

 Table 3-59 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Cause Action

3.1 Are the fuser belt and pressure roller dirty? Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.

3.2 Check the pressure roller surface for damage or scratches. Replace the fuser unit.

Duplex blur, white spot blur on color print-out

Learn about the duplex blur, white spot blur on color print-out defect.

Figure 3-54 Typical faulty images

Troubleshooting procedure

1. Enter SVC Mode → Service Functions → TR Control Mode.

2. Select T2 Control Mode.

3. Select the paper setting based on the site. (Paper Group, Paper Side, Paper Direction).

4. Increase value for T2 PWM and check if the blur problem is resolved.

5. When the problem persists after changing the T2 Control Mode values, change the T1 Control Mode values.

6. Decrease the value for each color and see whether the symptom disappears.

In this case, [-4] was applied and solved the blur.

7. As there can be variation for each device, change T1, T2 and observe the results.

Setting standard tone

Learn about setting a standard tone.

When to perform the set the standard tone procedure

● When the printer is installed for the first time.

● After replacing the transfer belt (PTB or ITB) or cleaning the color toner density (CTD) sensor.

● When there is a difference in color between models.

● When image brightness changes in comparison to a previous printing.

1194 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Figure 3-55 Image brightness (color image shown for contrast)

Normal image Dark image Light image

NOTE: If the problem persists after performing the setting standard tone procedure, investigate other print-
quality causes.

Perform a Setting Standard Tone

Use this procedure to adjust the color tone standard set during manufacturing.

1. Load A4- or Letter-size in a short-edge feeding (SEF) tray.

2. At the control panel, select the Setting item.

3. Log in as an Admin user.

4. Open the following menus:

● Adjustment

● Tone Adjustment

● Setting Standard Tone

5. Select the OK item to print a scan ID chart.

6. Place the scan ID chart on the flatbed glass, and then start a scan.

7. When prompted after the scan is complete, Select the OK item.

8. Perform a FullTRC function: Adjustment > Auto Tone Adjustment > Full + Execute Now.

Cancel a Setting Standard Tone

Use this procedure to cancel a setting standard tone and return to the customized tone (set by the user after
setting the standard tone).

1. Open the following menus:

● Adjustment

● Tone Adjustment

● Cancel Setting Standard Tone

2. When cancellation is complete, select the OK item

3. Perform a FullTRC function: Adjustment > Auto Tone Adjustment > Full + Execute Now.

Scan image fail

When a problem occurs on the scanned ID chart, an error message displays. Check the following items:

● Check the scanned ID chart for correct placement.

Setting standard tone 1195

 ● Make sure that the chart direction is horizontal.

● Retry the setting standard tone procedure.

Red/Magenta hue printouts

Learn about the red/magenta hue printouts defect.

NOTE: The printed image shows a red or magenta tone in areas where red/magenta should not be present.

Figure 3-56 Typical faulty images

1 2
Troubleshooting procedure

1. Use the printer control panel to print a demo page (Reports > Other Pages > Demonstration Page).

NOTE: If the defect is not present on this page, the issue is occurring in the application on the host
computer.

2. If the defect appears on the demo page, perform a color calibration.

a. Open the following menus: Support Tools > Maintenance > Calibration/Cleaning.

b. Select the Color Calibrations item and then select the Start item.

NOTE: If this menu is locked, contact the printer administrator.

c. Print another demo page and check for the defect.

3. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner assembly (PN JC97-04864A).

Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models)

Learn about adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models).

1196 Chapter 3 Problem solving

1. Open the ADF. Loosen the two screws securing both hinges.

Figure 3-57 Open ADF and loosen screws

2. Adjust the position of the ADF hinge according to the skew status.

Figure 3-58 Adjust ADF hinge

Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models) 1197

 a. If the skew image is similar to the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

Figure 3-59 Adjust hinge

1198 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 b. If the skew image is like the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the arrow. (1
scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

Figure 3-60 Adjust hinge

3. Detach the ADF sponge after adjusting the skew. Place the ADF sponge on the scanner glass. Close the ADF
unit to attach the sponge.

Adjusting the Flow ADF skew

Learn about adjusting the flow ADF skew.

Adjusting the Flow ADF skew 1199

 1. Open the Flow ADF. Loosen the two screws securing both hinges.

1200 Chapter 3 Problem solving

2. Adjust the position of the Flow ADF hinge according to the skew status.

Adjusting the Flow ADF skew 1201

 a. If the skew image is similar to the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

1202 Chapter 3 Problem solving

b. If the skew image is like the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the arrow. (1
scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

Adjusting the Flow ADF skew 1203

 3. Detach the Flow ADF sponge after adjusting the skew. Place the Flow ADF sponge on the scanner glass.
Close the Flow ADF unit to attach the sponge.

1204 Chapter 3 Problem solving

4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Learn about the electrical-mechanical diagrams.

Connection diagrams
Learn about the electrical-mechanical connection diagrams.

Connection Diagram (FUSER/EXIT/DUPLEX/TONER)

Learn about the connection diagram for the fuser/exit/duplex/toner.

Electrical-mechanical diagrams 1205

 HDD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4

SATA SIGNA L
SATA PO W ER
CN 22-SATA PO W ER

CN 19-SATA SIGN AL

SATA_RX_N
SATA_RX_P
SATA_TX_P
SATA_TX_N
5V2_SATA
DGND

DGND
DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND
DGND
DGND
EXIT/DU PLEX
I.5m m / 14*2P
Color
CN 33 EXIT/DU PLEX
4 1 14 1 A_DU P_RET TO NER CRUM
DU P_RET 3 2 13 2 nA_DUP_RET 1.5mm / 17*1P
M OT STEP 2 3 12 3 nB_DU P_RET CN 50 TB CRU M JC39-02261A JC39-02214A
1 4 11 4 B_DU P_RET 3.3V_CRUM 1 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_K 2 4 2 3 2 3
5 10 5 A_DU PLEX1 3 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M K
4 SCL_CRUM_ TB_K
3 6 9 6 nA_DUPLEX1 DGN D 4 2 4 1 4 1
DUP1 M O T STEP 2 7 8 7 nB_DU PLEX1 1 5
1 8 7 8 B_DU PLEX1
JC39-02214A
3.3V_CRUM 5 5 1 4 1 4
3 9 6 9 R_5V_PS SDA_CRUM_ TB_C 6 4 2 3 2 3
D up RETU RN 10 5 10 DGND 7 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M C
2 SCL_CRUM_ TB_C
SEN 11 4 11 nSEN SE_P_DUP_RETU RN DGN D 8 2 4 1 4 1
1
1 5
2 12 3 12 DGND
EXIT TEM P JC39-02214A
1 13 2 13 ADC_EXIT_TEMP 3.3V_CRUM 9 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_M 10 4 2 3 2 3
14 1 14 NC SCL_CRUM_ TB_M 11 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M M
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A 3
DGN D 12 2 4 1 4 1
3 1 14 15 R_5V_PS 1 5
BIN FU LL1 2 2 13 16 DGND
1 3 12 17 nSEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT1 3.3V_CRUM 13 1
JC39-02214A
5 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_Y 14 4 2 3 2 3
3 1 5 4 11 18 R_5V_PS SCL_CRUM_ TB_Y 15 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M Y
BIN FU LL2 2 2 4 5 10 19 DGND DGN D 16 2 4 1 4 1
1 3 3 6 9 20 nSEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT2 1 5
NC 17
JC39-02190A
7 8 21 R_5V_PS
4 2 8 7 22 DGND
5 1 9 6 23 nDETECT_JOB_SEP
TO NER CRUM
3 10 5 24 24V4 1.5mm / 17*1P Mono
SO L

EXIT GATE
SO LEN O ID 2 CN 50 TB CRU M
1
JC39-02237A 5
11 4 25 EN _EXIT_SO L 3.3V_CRUM 1 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_K 2 4 2 3 2 3
12 3 26 R_5V_PS 3 3 2 3 2 BTL CRU M
3 SCL_CRUM_ TB_K 3
D UP 13 2 27 DGND 4 2 4 1 4 1
2 DGN D
JAM 1 14 1 28 nSEN SE_JAM_ DU PLEX1 1 5
1

3.3V_CRUM 5 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_C 6 4 2 3 2 3
FU SER DRIVE 3 2 3 2 DEVE CRU M
SCL_CRUM_ TB_C 7 3
1.5mm / 16*2P 8 2 4 1 4 1
DGN D
1 5
JC39-02195A CN 30 FU SER DRIVE
10 1 R_DGND 3.3V_CRUM 9
9 2 CLK_BLDC_FUSER 5V_PS 10 2 1 ERASER LED
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_FU SER M_ O N _ERASER 11 1 2
7 4 nEN_BLDC_FU SER
FU SER BLDC
6 DGN D 12
BLDC 5
5
6
NC
R_DGND 3.3V_CRUM 13
4 7 DG ND SDA_CRUM_ TB_Y 14
3 8 DG ND SCL_CRUM_ TB_Y 15
2 9 24V2_SW DGN D 16
1 10 24V2_SW NC 17

3 11 FAN_FUSER_O UT
FUSER OU T 2 12 FB_OUT_FAN _FUSER_OUT
FAN 1 13 DG ND

SIDE CO M 1 3 14 DG ND TO N ER RESERVOIR
COVER OPEN N .O .
N .C.
2
3
2
1
15 CO VER_O PEN _SIDE
16 nCO VER_O PEN_SIDE
I.5mm / 11*2P Color
CN 27 Toner M otor/L
o ck JC39-02257A
4 17 A_FUSER_REL A_TNR_SU P_KC 1 4
TO N ER
3 18 nA_FUSER_REL nA_TNR_SUP_KC 2 3
SU PP
FU SER REL M O T STEP 2 19 nB_FU SER_REL nB_TN R_SU P_KC 3 2
M O T_KC
1 20 B_FU SER_REL B_TN R_SU P_KC 4 1

3 3
1 9 21 FAN_EXIT1 R_5V_PS 5 TN R LO CK
2 2
EXIT FAN 1 2 8 22 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT1 DGN D 6 SEN S_KC
1 1
3 7 23 DG ND nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_KC 7

3 4 6 24 FAN_EXIT2 A_RES_KC 8 4
EXIT FAN 2 2 5 5 25 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT2 nA_RES_KC 9 3 RESERVO IR
1 6 4 26 DG ND nB_RES_KC 10 2 M O T_KC
JC39-02191A B_RES_KC 11 1
3 7 3 27 FAN_EXIT3
EXIT FAN 3 2 8 2 28 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT3 A_TNR_SU P_M Y 12 4
29 DG ND 13 TO N ER
1 9 1 nA_TNR_SUP_M Y 3
SU PP
nB_TN R_SU P_MY 14 2
30 R_5V_PS 15 M O T_M Y
3 3 B_TN R_SU P_M Y 1
Fuser 2 31 DG ND
2
POSI 1 32 nSENS_FU SER_PO S1 R_5V_PS 16 3
1 RES LO CK
DGN D 17 2
nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_MY 18 1 SEN S_M Y

FU SER DRAWE R
A_RES_MY 19 4
I.5m m / 9*2P
JC39-02218A JC39-02217A nA_RES_M Y 20 3 RESERVO IR
CN 40 FUSER DRAW ER nB_RES_M Y 21 2 M O T_M Y
1 11 1 DGND B_RES_M Y 22 1
2 10
FU SER N C TH ERM
CEN TER
3
2
1
3
4
9
8
2
3
4
DGND
N C_C_TD
N C_C_TC
TO N ER RESERVOIR

3 5 7 5
I.5mm / 11*2P Mono
N C TH ERM DGN D CN 27 Toner M otor/L
o ck JC39-02242A
2 6 6 6 N C_S_TD A_TNR_SU P_KC 1 4
SIDE TO NER
1 7 5 7 N C_S_TC nA_TNR_SUP_KC 2 3
SU PP
nB_TN R_SU P_KC 3 2
M OT
8 4 8 nDETECT_FU SER B_TN R_SU P_KC 4 1

9 3 5 3
R_5V_PS TN R LO CK
10 2 6 2
DGN D SEN S
11 1 1
21P-RW ZV-K4GG -P4

21R-RW ZV-K2G G-P4

nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_KC 7

JC39-02243A
8
JST

JST

A_RES_KC 7 1 4
nA_RES_KC 9 6 2 3 RESERVO IR
6 1 10 9 R_5V_PS 10
nB_RES_KC 5 3 2 M OT
5 2 9 10 3.3V_CRUM 11
B_RES_KC 4 4 1
4 3 8 11 ADC_CU RL_TEST
3 7 3 5 3
4 12 DGND RES FU LL
FUSER 2 6 2 6 2
5 13 SDA2_FU SER SEN S
EEPRO M 1 5 1 7 1
6 14 SCL2_FU SER

7 4 15 THERM_ REAR1
8 3 16 THERM_ REAR2
JC39-02244A 4
DGN D 12 4 1
M_ TC_VIN _K 13 3 2 3 TC
9 2 17 THERM_ FRO N T1 14 2 3 2 SENSO R
24V1_TC
10 1 18 THERM_ FRO N T2 15 1 4 1
M_ TN R_VCON _K

R_5V_PS 16
DGN D 17
nSEN SE_RES_FULL 18

A_RES_MY 19
nA_RES_M Y 20
nB_RES_M Y 21
To FDB B_RES_M Y 22

Connection Diagram (Scanner)

Learn about the connection diagram for the scanner.

1206 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 ???

CN 55 ???
1 3.3V_MICOM
2 PA30|SWCLK
3 PA31|SWDIO
4 DGND
5 nRST_XMEGA

FLOW DOCUMENT FEEDER

-1.5mm / 17*2P

CN 42 D SDF
M S1_STEP_SCAN 1
CUR_STEP_SCAN 2
DIR_STEP_SCAN 3
nEN _STEP_SCAN 4
PLS_STEP_SCAN 5
PW M _W LED 6
nCO VER_O PEN _PLATEN 2 7
nCO VER_O PEN _PLATEN 1 8
??? nSEN SE_SCAN _HO M E 9
-1.5mm / 6*1P nSEN SE_APS2 10
nSEN SE_APS1 11
CN 51 ??? nDETECT_RSDF 12
6 1 6 1 DG N D nSENSE_PAPER_RADF 13
5 2 5 2 nSEN SE_P_REG I_R1 nSENSE_SCAN_PO S_1 14
4 3 4 3 5V_PS TXD_DSDF 15
3 4 3 4 DG N D RXD_DSDF 16
2 5 2 5 nSEN SE_P_REG I_R2 nRST_RSDF 17
1 6 1 6 5V_PS nSENSE_SCAN_PO S_2 18
DGN D 19
DGN D 20
DGN D 21
DGN D 22
3.3V_SCAN 23
DGN D 24
5V_W KUP 25
DGN D 26
5V_SCAN 27
5V_SCAN 28
DGN D 29
24V_SCAN 30
24V_SCAN 31
24V_SCAN 32
24V_SCAN 33
M S2_STEP_SCAN 34

DCIS
40P FFC

CN 43 DCIS
CLK_M AIN _DCIS_P 1
CLK_M AIN _DCIS_N 2
DGN D 3
LVDO _DCIS_4_P 4
LVDO _DCIS_4_N 5
DGN D 6
LVDO _DCIS_3_P 7
LVDO _DCIS_3_N 8
DGN D 9
LVDO _DCIS_2_P 10
LVDO _DCIS_2_N 11
DGN D 12
RX_CLK_DCIS_P 13
RX_CLK_DCIS_N 14
DGN D 15
LVDO _DCIS_1_P 16

DCIS
LVDO _DCIS_1_N 17

DSDF
DGN D 18
LVDO _DCIS_0_P 19
LVDO _DCIS_0_N 20
DGN D 21
DGN D 22
SDI_DCIS 23
SCLK_DCIS 24

Scanner Unit
SDO _DCIS 25
SLO AD_DCIS 26
DGN D 27
DGN D 28
PI_SH_DCIS 29
DGN D 30
3.3V_SCAN 31
3.3V_SCAN 32
3.3V_SCAN 33
3.3V_SCAN 34
3.3V_SCAN 35
3.3V_SCAN 36
3.3V_SCAN 37
3.3V_SCAN 38
DGN D 39
DGN D 40

CCDM
BBP 50P FFC
50P
CN 41 BBP CN 44 CCDM
1 5V DGN D 1
2 N EN_STEP_DU PLEX1 CLK_M AIN _CCDM_ P 2
3 EN _M P_CLU TCH CLK_M AIN _CCDM_ N 3
4 N EN_STEP_FU SER_REL DGN D 4
5 CO VER_OPEN _SIDE SLO AD_CCDM 5
6 N EN_STEP_TNR_SU P_KC SCLK_CCDM 6
7 DIR_STEP_TNR_SUP_KC SDI_CCDM 7
8 EN _EXIT_SO L DGN D 8
9 N EN_STEP_DUP_RET PITG_CCDM 9
10 NSENSE_T1_PO S nRST_AFE 10
11 N EN_STEP_TNR_SU P_KC SDO _CCDM 11
12 PW M _M P_SO L DGN D 12
13 CLK_BLDC_FU SER LVDO _CCDM _4_N 13
14 N EN_BLDC_FUSER LVDO _CCDM _4_P 14
15 CO VER_OPEN _FRO N T DGN D 15
16 N SEN SE_P_EM PTY2 LVDO _CCDM _3_N 16
17 PLS_STEP_T1 LVDO _CCDM _3_P 17
18 N EN_STEP_T1 DGN D 18
19 nEN_STEP_FEED RX_CLK_CCDM _N 19
20 NSENSE_FUSER_PO S1 RX_CLK_CCDM _P 20
21 nEN_STEP_REGI DGN D 21
22 PLS_STEP_DU PLEX1 LVDO _CCDM _2_N 22
23 nSEN SE_CU RL1 LVDO _CCDM _2_P 23
24 N SEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT1 DGN D 24
25 DIR_STEP_TNR_SUP_M Y LVDO _CCDM _1_N 25
26 N EN_STEP_DU PLEX2 LVDO _CCDM _1_P 26
27 PLS_STEP_DU P_RET DGN D 27
28 N SENSE_JAM_ DUPLEX1 LVDO _CCDM _0_N 28
29 N SEN SE_P_DUP_RETU RN LVDO _CCDM _0_P 29
30 N SEN SE_P_REGI DGN D 30
31 PLS_STEP_DU PLEX2 3.3V_SCAN 31
32 PLS_STEP_FEED 3.3V_SCAN 32
33 PLS_STEP_PICKU P1 3.3V_SCAN 33
34 PLS_STEP_PICKU P2 3.3V_SCAN 34
35 PLS_STEP_REG I 3.3V_SCAN 35
36 nSEN SE_CU RL2 3.3V_SCAN 36
37 N SEN SE_P_PRE_FEED1 3.3V_SCAN 37
38 N SEN SE_P_PRE_FEED2 3.3V_SCAN 38
39 N SEN SE_P_FEED DGN D 39
40 N SEN SE_P_FU SER_O UT DGN D 40
41 N SENSE_JAM_ DUPLEX2 5V_SCAN 41
42 N EN_STEP_PICKU P1 5V_SCAN 42
43 N EN_STEP_PICKU P2 5V_SCAN 43
44 ADC_FB_FR 5V_SCAN 44
45 ADC_FB_REGI DGN D 45
46 ADC_FB_FEED DGN D 46
47 FB_DU P2 10V_CCD 47
48 FB_PU1 10V_CCD 48
49 FB_PU2 10V_CCD 49
50 DGN D 10V_CCD 50

BBP
16P
CN 54 BBP
1 5V
2 N EN_BLDC_O PC_K
3 N READY_BLDC_O PC_K
4 N EN_BLDC_O PC_C
5 N READY_BLDC_O PC_C
6 N EN_BLDC_O PC_M
7 N READY_BLDC_O PC_M
8 N EN_BLDC_O PC_Y
9 N READY_BLDC_O PC_Y
10 NSEN SE_SHUT_ACR
11 NREADY_BLDC_FU SER
12 N EN_STEP_RES_KC
13 DIR_STEP_RES_KC
14 N EN_STEP_RES_M Y
15 DIR_STEP_RES_M Y
16 DGN D

Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB)

Learn about the connection diagram for the laser scanner assembly/OPE/USB.

Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB) 1207

 SPEAKER

HUB

FDIJOINT
-1.5m m / 11P

CN20 FDIJO INT

DGND 1
DGND 2
3.3VSUSP 3
5V_SUSP 4
nDETECT_FDI 5
NOT_READY_FDI 6
EN_COPY_EXIT_FDI 7
nEN_COPY_CNT_FDI 8
nDETECT_PSIZE_FDI 9
nDETECT_COLOR_DFI 10
nEN_FDI 11

N/W RJ45
CN1 NETW ORK 1
TD+ 2
TD- 3
RD+ 4
TERM1 5
Color Only LSU SIGNAL M Y
50FFC
TERM2
RD-
6
7
CN25 LSU SIGNAL TERM3 8
MY TERM4 9
1 DGND GREEN- 10
2 PW M _LD_POW ER_M GREEN+ 11 NTWORK
3 DGND YELLOW - 12
4 nHSYNC_M _DP YELLOW +
5 nHSYNC_M _DN
6 DGND
7 nVDO_M _B1_DP
USB
8 nVDO_M _B1_DN
9 DGND CN14 USB 1
10 nSH_M1 USB3D_VBUS 2
11 nSH_M2 USB3D_DN 3
12 DGND USB3D_DP 4
13 VDO_M _B2_DP DGND 5
14 nVDO_M _B2_DN USB3D_PXN 6
15 DGND USB3D_PXP 7
16 nVDO_M _B3_DP DGND 8
17 nVDO_M _B3_DN USB3D_RXN 9
18 DGND USB3D_RXP
19 nSH_M3
20 nSH_M4
21 DGND PC
22 nVDO_M _B4_DP
23 nVDO_M _B4_DN USB HOST Ch2
24 DGND
25 CN17 USB HOST Ch2 1
nLDON_LSU_M
26 USB3H_VBUS_REAR2 2
nLDON_LSU_Y
27 USB3H_REAR2_DN 3
DGND
28 USB3H_REAR2_DP 4
nHSYNC_Y_DP
29 DGND 5
nHSYNC_Y_DN
30 USB3H_REAR2_RXN 6
DGND
31 USB3H_REAR2_RXP 7
nVDO_Y_B1_DP
32 DGND 8
VDO_Y_B1_DN
33 USB3H_REAR2_TXN 9
DGND
34 USB3H_REAR2_TXP
nSH_Y1
35 nSH_Y2
36 DGND
EXT.DRIVE
37 nVDO_Y_B2_DP
38 nVDO_Y_B2_DN USB HOST Ch1
39 DGND
40 nVDO_Y_B3_DP CN16 USB HOST Ch1 1
41 nVDO_Y_B3_DN USB3H_VBUS_REAR1 2
42 DGND USB3H_REAR1_DN 3
43 nSH_Y3 USB3H_REAR1_DP 4
44 nSH_Y4 DGND 5
45 DGND USB3H_REAR1_RXN 6
46 nVDO_Y_B4_DP USB3H_REAR1_RXP 7
47 nVDO_Y_B4_DN DGND 8
48 DGND USB3H_REAR1_TXN 9
LASER SCANNER 49
50
PW M _LD_POW ER_Y
DGND
USB3H_REAR1_TXP

ASSEMBLY CARD READER

(COLR) LSU SIGNAL KC
60FFC
CN2 LSU SIGNALKC
1 DGND
2 DGND
3 DGND
4 DGND
5
6
7
DGND
DGND
DGND
LSU
40FFC
Mono Only
8 DGND
9 DGND CN28 LSU
10 PW M _LD_POW ER_C DGND 1
11 DGND NC 2
12 nVDO_C_B4_DN 24V3 3
13 nVDO_C_B4_DP 24V3 4
14 DGND NC 5
15 nSH_C4 DGND 6
16 nSH_C3 nSTART_LSU_M OT 7
17 DGND nREADY_LSU 8
18 nVDO_C_B3_DN CLK_LSU_M OT 9
19 nVDO_C_B3_DP 5V_LSU 10
20 DGND 5V_LSU 11
21 nVDO_C_B2_DN DGND 12
22
23
24
nVDO_C_B2_DP
DGND
PW M _LD_POW ER_K
DGND
13
14
15
LASER SCANNER
nSH_C2 nHSYNC_K_DP
25
26
nSH_C1
DGND
nHSYNC_K_DN
DGND
16
17
ASSEMBLY
27
28
nVDO_C_B1_DN
nVDO_C_B1_DP
nVDO_K_B1_DP
nVDO_K_B1_DN
18
19
(MONO)
29 DGND DGND 20
30 nHSYNC_C_DN nSH_K1 21
31 nHSYNC_C_DP nSH_K2 22
32 DGND DGND 23
33 nLDON_LSU_C nVDO_K_B2_DP 24
34 nLDON_LSU_K nVDO_K_B2_DN 25
35 DGND DGND 26
36 nVDO_K_B4_DN nVDO_K_B3_DP 27
37 nVDO_K_B4_DP nVDO_K_B3_DN 28
38 DGND DGND 29
39 nSH_K4 nSH_K3 30
40 nSH_K3 nSH_K4 31
41 DGND DGND 32
42 nVDO_K_B3_DN nVDO_K_B4_DP 33
43 nVDO_K_B3_DP nVDO_K_B4_DN 34
44 DGND DGND 35
45 nVDO_K_B2_DN nLDON_LSU_K 36
46 nVDO_K_B2_DP DGND 37
47 DGND DGND 38
48 nSH_K2 DGND 39
49 nSH_K1 CON_DETECT_LSU 40
50 DGND
51 nVDO_K_B1_DN
52 nVDO_K_B1_DP
53 DGND
54 nHSYNC_K_DN
55 nHSYNC_K_DP
56 DGND
57 PW M _LD_POW ER_K
58 DGND
59 ADC_LSU_TEMP
60 CON_DETECT_LSU

Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup)

Learn about the connection diagram for the Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup.

1208 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 REAR/FRONT/LED
Color Only I.5m m /10*2P TB CRUM
1.5m m /8*1P Color
JC39-02229A JC39-02230A CN35 REAR/FRONT/LED
1 1 15 1 ACR_REAR CN48 TB CRUM
LEFT 2 2 14 2 5VA ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1
ACR 3 3 13 3 DGND 5VA 2
REAR 4 4 12 4 NC DGND 3
5 5 11 5 PW M _ACR_LED_REAR ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4
JC39-02239A JC39-02258A
1 6 10 6 ADC_ACR_FRONT_P R_5V_PS 5 1 3 3
2 2 T1 POSI
RIGHT 2 7 9 7 5VA DGND 6 2
3 1 SENSOR
ACR 3 8 8 8 DGND SENS_T1_POS 7 1
FRONT 4 9 7 9 NC
5 10 6 10 PW M _ACR_LED_FRONT DGND 8 3
nSENSE_P_REGI 9 PAPER REGI
2
5V_PS 10 SENSOR
1 11 5 11 ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1
2 12 4 12 5VA
CENTER
3 13 3 13 DGND
CTD
4 14 2 14 ADC_CTD_CENTER_S TB CRUM
5 15 1 15 PW M _ACR_LED_CENTER 1.5m m /8*1P
CN48 TB CRUM
Mono
ACR SHUTTER 2 1 5 16 DGND ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1 JC39-02236A 7 1 JC39-02235A 1
M OT DC 1 2 4 17 OUT_DC_ACR_SHUT1 6 2
5VA 2 2
JC39-02220A DGND 3 5 3 3 CTD SENSOR
3 3 3 18 R_5V_PS 4 4
ACR SHUTTER ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4 4
2 4 2 19 DGND 3 5
SENS PW M _ACR_LED_CENTER 5 5
1 5 1 20 nSENSE_SHUT_ACR
DGND 6 2 6 2 INNER
ADC_INNER_TEM P 7 1 7 1 TEM P

PICKUP 8
DGND 3 1 3
9 PAPER REGI
nSENSE_P_REGI 2 2 2
10 SENSOR
CN49 PICKUP 5V_PS 1 3 1
JC39-02234A 1 JC39-02204A
3 1 9 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EM PTY1 2 2 8 2 DGND
1 3 7 3 nSENSE_P_EM PTY1
JC39-02201A 4 m icroSD SOCKET
3 4 6 R_5V_PS
2 5 5 5 DGND
PAPER_LIFT1 CN12 microSD SOCKET
1 6 4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1 1
DATA2_SD
2
3 7 3 7 DGND DATA3_SD
3
FEED1 2 8 2 8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1 CM D_SD
4
1 9 1 9 5V_PS 3.3V
5
CLK_SD
6
4 10 A_PICKUP1 DGND
7
3 11 nA_PICKUP1 DATA0_SD
PICKUP1 8
M OT STEP 2 12 nB_PICKUP1 DATA1_SD
9
1 13 B_PICKUP1 DGND
10
DGND
11
3 14 R_5V_PS DGND
1 10 12
2 15 DGND DGND
PAPER_EM PTY2 2 9 13
1 16 nSENSE_P_EM PTY2 DGND
3 8 14
DGND
3
JC39-02202A 17 R_5V_PS
4 7
2 5 6 18 DGND M SOK
PAPER_LIFT2
1 6 5 19 nSENSE_C_LIFT2
CN21 M SOK
20 DGND 1
3 7 4 DGND
FEED2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2 2
2 8 3 SCK_M SOK
22 5V_PS 3
1 9 2 DGND
4
10 1 M SOI_M SOK
5
DGND
4 23 A_PICKUP2 6
nSS_M SOK
PICKUP2 3 24 nA_PICKUP2 7
DGND
M OT STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2 M SIO_M SOK
8
1 26 B_PICKUP2 9
3_3V_PS
10
SCL0_M SOK
11
3_3V_PS
FEED_REGI 12
SDA0_M SOK

DEBUGGER M AIN
CN53 FEED_REGI
JC39-02336A -2.0mm /4*1P
1 6 1 A_FEED
2 5 2 24V4 CN8 DEBUGGER M AIN
FEED M OT
STEP 3 4 3 nA_FEED 3.3V 1
4 3 4 nB_FEED RXD_M CB 2
HYBRID
5 2 5 24V4 TXD_M CB 3
6 1 6 B_FEED DGND 4

1 6 7 A_REGI DEBUGGER SCAN

2 5 8 24V1_SW -2.0mm /4*1P
REGIM OT
STEP 3 4 9 nA_REGI
CN9 DEBUGGER SCAN
4 3 10 nB_REGI
HYBRID 11 24V1_SW 3.3V 1
5 2 2
12 B_REGI RXD_SCB
6 1 3
TXD_SCB
M P CLUTCH DGND 4
1 2 13 24V4
CL 2 1 14 EN_M P_CLUTCH
DEBUGGER ENGINE
-2.0mm /4*1P
SIDE /MP CN10 DEBUGGER
ENGINE
1.5m m /20*2P
3.3V 1
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A CN32 SIDE / M P /PTB RXD_ENG 2
2 1 5 1 20 1 24V3 TXD_ENG 3
M P SO L
1 2 4 2 19 2 PW M _MP _SOL DGND 4
INNER
JC39-02210A ENGINE PANEL
3 3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
-1.5m m /5*1P FINISHER
M P EM PTY 2 4 2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EM PTY CN11 ENGINE PANEL
DGND 1
3 1 6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS 5V_SUSP 2
M P PAPER 2 2 5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_W IDTH RXD_ENG_PANEL 3
W IDTH 1 3 4 8 13 8 DGND R_5V_SUSP 4
JC39-02211A TXD_ENG_PANEL 5
3 4 3 9 12 9 R_5V_PS
M P PAPER
2 5 2 10 11 10 DGND
LENGTH
1 6 1 11 10 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH DUAL FAX

3 1 3 12 9 12 DGND CN24 DUALFAX

PRE FEED 2 2 2 13 8 13 nSENSE_P_FEED 5V_SUSP 1 FINISHER
1 3 1 14 7 14 5V_PS DGND 2
JC39-02208A 3.3V 3
3K
4 15 6 15 A_DUPLEX2 3.3V 4
DUP2 3 16 5 16 nA_DUPLEX2 DGND 5
M OT STEP 2 17 4 17 nB_DUPLEX2 DGND 6
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2 CM L_M ODEM 1 7
3 CM L_M ODEM 2 8 *****-****/
19 2 19 NC AOUT0 9 M OLEX
20 1 20 NC AOUT1 10
nRST_M ODEM 1 11
JC39-02338A 1 6
JC39-02240A 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS nCTS_M ODEM 1 12
3 54679-1619/
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND nCTS_M ODEM 2 13
M OLEX
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1 nRTS_M ODEM 1 14
nRTS_M ODEM 2 15
3 4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS DGND 16
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND nDETECT_MO DEM 1 17
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2 nDETECT_MO DEM 2 18
TXD_M ODEM1 19
4 7 4 TXD_M ODEM2 20
3 8 3 RXD_M ODEM1 21
PTB CRUM
2 9 2 RXD_M ODEM2 22
Mono 1 10 1 nRI_MOD EM _1
nRI_MOD EM _2
23
24
nINT_M ODEM _1 25
nINT_M ODEM _2 26
nDCD_M ODEM _1 27
PTB 4 1 7 27 DGND nDCD_M ODEM _2 28
7 14
W ASTE 3 2 6 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL nRST_M ODEM _2 29
8 13
FULL 2 3 5 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED DGND 30
9 12
1 4 4 30 R_5V_PS
10 11

11 10 31 3.3V_CRUM
JC39-02207A 12 9 32 SCL2_PTB
13 8 33 SDA2_PTB
14 7 34 DGND

3 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
DUPLEX 6 2
2 16 5 36 DGND
JAM 2 7 1
1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM _DUPLEX2

3 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
P FUSER 39 DGND
2 2 2 19 2
OUT 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
1 3 1 20 1
JC39-02209A

3 1 3
FAN
2 2 2
SIDE
1 3 1

To FDB

2-292246-2/
JC39-02338A JC39-02341A TYCO
3 1 6 1
CURL1 2 2 5 2
1 3 4 3
2-292249-2/
3 4 3 4 TYCO
CURL2 2 5 2 5
1 6 1 6

7
8 DCF
Color 9
10

LC T HCF

Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup) 1209

 Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock)
Learn about the connection diagram for the OPC/WTB/CST Lock.

1210 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 T1 /ERASER /OPC CRUM
-1.5mm /16*2P OPC HOM E
CN36 T1 / ERASER /
JC39-02256A JC39-02255A OPC CRUM CN29 O PC HO M E
1 1 6 1 6 1 5V_PS
JC39-02240A
R_5V_PS 1 3
2 2 5 2 5 2 ON_ERASER_K DGND 2 2
3 3 4 3
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_K 3 1
4 4 3 4 4 3 3.3V_CRUM
3 4 SDA_CRUM _OPC_K
2 R_5V_PS 4 3
5 2 5 2 5 SCL_CRUM _OPC_K
1 DGND 5 2
6 1 6 1 6 DGND nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_C 6 1

R_5V_PS 7 3
JC39-02256A DGND 8 2
1 1 6 1 6 7 5V_PS 9 1
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_M
2 2 5 2 5 8 ON_ERASER_C
3 3 4 3 R_5V_PS 10 3
4 4 3 4 4 9 3.3V_CRUM 11 2
DGND
3 10 SDA_CRUM _OPC_C 12 1
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_Y
2 5 2 5 2 11 SCL_CRUM _OPC_C
1 6 1 6 1 12 DGND

2 13 ADC_INNER_TEMP
1 14 DGND OPC K
15 NC
16 NC CN29 OPC K JC39-02239A
JC39-02256A 1 10
DIR_BLDC_OPC_K 9
1 1 6 1 6 17 5V_PS 2
CLK_BLDC_OPC_K 8
2 2 5 2 5 18 ON_ERASER_M 3
nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K 7
3 3 4 3 4
nEN_BLDC_OPC_K 6
4 4 3 4 4 19 3.3V_CRUM 5
3 20 SDA_CRUM _OPC_M
NC
6 5 BLDC
2 BRK_BLDC_OPC_K 4
5 2 5 2 21 SCL_CRUM _OPC_M 7
1 DGND 3
6 1 6 1 22 DGND 8
DGND 2
9
DGND 1
10
DGND
11
JC39-02256A NC
1 6 1 6 23 5V_PS 12
1
2 2 5 2 5 24 ON_ERASER_Y
3 3 4 3
4 4 3 4 4 25 3.3V_CRUM
3 26 SDA_CRUM _OPC_Y
2 5 2 5 2 27 SCL_CRUM _OPC_Y T/C SENSOR
1 6 1 6 1 28 DGND -1.5m m /15*2P
CN34 T/C SENSOR
1 4 29 A_T1 DGND 1 JC39-02260A JC39-02259A
2 3 30 nA_T1 4 1 4
TC_VIN_K 2 3 2 3
3 2 31 nB_T1 3
24V1_TC 2 3 2
4 1 32 B_T1 4
TNR_VCON_K 1 4 1

DGND 5 4 1
JC39-02259A 4
TC_VIN_C 6 3 2 3
24V1_TC 7 2 3 2
TNR_VCON_C 8 1 4 1

R_5V_PS 9
12 1 3
DGND 10
11 2 2
nSENSE_FULL_RES_K 11
10 3 1
R_5V_PS 12
9 4 3
DGND 13
BLDC OPC KCMY 8 5 2
nSENSE_FULL_RES_C 14
7 6 1
JC39-02342A
CN47 BLDC OPC NC 15
6 7 3
JC39-02232A KCM Y 5 8 2
10 1 DIR_BLDC_OPC_K 4 9 1
9 2 CLK_BLDC_OPC_K
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K 3 10 3
7 4 nEN_BLDC_OPC_K 2 11 2
6 5 NC
BLDC 5 6 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_K
1 12 1
4 7 DGND DGND 16
4 1
JC39-02259A 4
3 8 DGND TC_VIN_M 17
3 2 3
2 9 24V1_SW 24V1_TC 18
2 3 2
1 10 24V1_SW TNR_VCON_M 19
1 4 1
10 11 DIR_BLDC_OPC_C DGND 20
4 1
JC39-02259A 4
9 12 CLK_BLDC_OPC_C TC_VIN_Y 21
3 2 3
8 13 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_C 24V1_TC 22
2 3 2
7 14 nEN_BLDC_OPC_C TNR_VCON_Y 23
1 4 1
6 15 NC
BLDC 5 16 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_C R_5V_PS 24
4 17 DGND DGND 25
3 18 DGND nSENSE_FULL_RES_M 26
2 19 24V7
1 20 24V7 R_5V_PS 27
DGND 28
10 21 DIR_BLDC_OPC_M nSENSE_FULL_RES_Y 29
9 22 CLK_BLDC_OPC_M
8 23 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_M NC 30
7 24 nEN_BLDC_OPC_M
6 25 NC
BLDC 5 26 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_M
4 27 DGND
3 28 DGND
2 29 24V7
1 30 24V7 HVPS2 /SKEW MO TOR
-1.5mm /12*2P
10 31 DIR_BLDC_OPC_Y CN4 HVPS2 / SKEW CN2
9 32 CLK_BLDC_OPC_Y M O TOR
33 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_Y
JC39-02228A 12 nEN_DEVE_AC_K
8 nEN_DEVE_AC_K 1 12
7 34 nEN_BLDC_OPC_Y nEN_DEVE_AC_C 2 11 11 nEN_DEVE_AC_C
6 35 NC nEN_DEVE_AC_M 3 10 10 nEN_DEVE_AC_M
BLDC 5 36 BRK_BLDC_OPC_Y nEN_DEVE_AC_Y 4 9 9 nEN_DEVE_AC_Y
4 37 DGND ADC_READ_HVPS_24V 5 8 8 ADC_READ_HVPS_24V
3 38 DGND DGND 6 7 7 GND
2 39 24V5 DGND 7 6 6 GND
1 40 24V5 DGND 8 5 5 GND
3.3V_PS 9 4 4 3.3V
24V2_SW 10 3 3 24V
24V2_SW 11 2 2 24V
24V2_SW 12 1 1 24V

A_SKEW _Y 13 12
nA_SKEW _Y 14 11
B_SKEW _Y 15 10
nB_SKEW _Y 16 9
A_SKEW _M 17 8
nA_SKEW _M 18 7
B_SKEW _M 19 6
nB_SKEW _M 20 5
A_SKEW _C 21 4
nA_SKEW _C 22 3
B_SKEW _C 23 2
nB_SKEW _C 24 1

W TB/CST LOCK/FAN_LSU

CN38 W TB/CST
LOCK/FAN_LSU JC39-02337A
FAN_LSU 1 3
FB_OUT_ FAN_LSU 2 2
DGND 3 1

A_W TB 4 4
nA_W TB 5 3
nB_W TB 6 2
B_W TB 7 1

DGND 8 3 1 COM
COVER_OPEN_FRONT 9 2 2 N.O.
nCOVER_OPEN_FRONT 10 1 3 N.C.

DGND 11 4 1 4
ADC_W TB_FULL 12 3 2 3
EN_W TB_LED 13 2 3 2
5V_PS 14 1 4 1

R_5V_PS 15 3
DGND 16 2
nDETECT_W TB 17 1

OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_2 18 10 1 2 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_1 19 9 2 1 2

R_5V_PS 20 8 3 3
DGND 21 7 4 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK1 22 6 5 1
JC39-02186A
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_2 23 5 6 2 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_1 24 4 7 1 2

R_5V_PS 25 3 8 3
DGND 26 2 9 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK2 27 1 10 1

NC 28

LSU PD /RESERVOIR SENSOR

-1.5m m /22*1P

CN26 LSU P M OTOR JC39-02231A

5V_LSU 1
5V_LSU 2
DGND 3
24V2 4
DGND 5
nSTART_LSU_M OT 6
nREADY_LSU 7
CLK_LSU_M OT 8

Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock) 1211

 Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB)
Learn about the connection diagram for the HVPS/LVPS/FDB.

M ono Only
HVPS(MONO)
HVPS
24FFC

HEATER SW ITCH
M AIN SW ITCH
CN31 HVPS
nDETECT_HVPS 1 1 nDETECT_HVPS
24V2_SW 2 2 24V
24V2_SW 3 3 24V
ADC_HVPS_24V 4 4 ADC_HVPS_24V
24V2_SW 5 5 24V
GND 6 6 GND

JC39-02250A
GND 7 7 GND
3.3V 8 8 3.3V
GND 9 9 GND
NC 10 10 NC
ADC_READ_M HV 11 11 ADC_READ_M HV

JC39-02197A
AC
PW M _THV+_CV_hybrid 12 12 PW M _THV+_CV_hybrid
JC39-02203A

PW M _M HV 13 13 PW M _M HV
PW M _THV+_CV_SELECT_hybrid 14 14 PW M _THV+_CV_SELECT_hybrid

J
9
-
A
7
C03
21
ToFUSER
PW M _SAW 15 15 PW M _SAW
ADC_READ_THV 16 16 ADC_READ_THV

INLET
PW M _THV_N 17 17 PW M _THV_N
nEN_DEVE 18 18 nEN_DEVE
PW M _FUSER_BIAS 19 19 PW M _FUSER_BIAS
PW M _DEVE_DC 20 20 PW M _DEVE_DC

GND
PW M _THV_P 21 21 PW M _THV_P
PW M _DEVE_VPP 22 22 PW M _DEVE_VPP

JC39-02199A
PW M _DEVE_AC 23 23 PW M _DEVE_AC
GND 24 24 GND

JC39-02248A
4
3
2
1

HEATER SW ITCH
4
3
2
1

2
1

3
2
1
M AIN SW ITCH

LIVE
LIVE
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
CN10
LIVE
LIVE
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
CN5

NEUTRAL
LIVE
CN1

COM M ON
LAM P2
LAM P1
CN6

FUSER
INLET

DEVE HV M 2

JC39-02249A
To INPUT OPTION
THV M

JC39-02247A
SAW /M HV
CN2 1
1 LIVE
2 NEUTRAL 2
M ono :SM PS TYPE3R

TYPE5 3
Color SM

INPUT OPTION
(OPTI

CN7 (Blue)
1 LIVE CN3

JC39-02246A
2 NEUTRAL 1 LIVE 1
O N/SCAN)

: PS TYPE4

FDB

2 NEUTRAL FUSER HV M 2
TYPE3R TYPE3R
DCF
JC39-02193A

CON1 CN8(Red)
LIVE 1 1 LIVE CN4
NEUTRAL 2 2 NEUTRAL 1 LIVE
2 NEUTRAL JC39-02
6196A
J
C
3
9
-
0
2
1
A
JC39-02192A

ColorOnly
HVPS
220V Only
35FFC

HVPS(COLOR)
CN11
CN3 HVPS
ON_FUSER_CENTER 1

1
REACTOR
ON_FUSER_RELAY 5

nDETECT_HVPS 1 1 nDETECT_HVPS
ON_SM PS_RELAY 7
FUSER_ON
24VS
RELAY_ON
24V_ON/OFF
GND
CON4

+24V3
GND
+24V2
GND
+24V1
GND
+5V
CON3

2
ON_FUSER_SIDE 2

PW M _D_AC_FREQ 2 2 PW M _D_AC_FREQ
TYPE3R S

ZERO_CROSS 10
SM PS TYPE 3R

M AIN IF

PW M _D_AC_VPP_Y 3 3 PW M _D_AC_VPP_Y
AC_SENSE 9

ADC_R_M HV_K 4 4 ADC_R_M HV_K

+24VS2 6

+24VS1 4

PW M _D_DC_Y 5 5 PW M _D_DC_Y
CN12
GND 8

GND 3

CN9
IGNAL

NC 6 6 NC
1
PW M _DC_AC_VPP_M 7 7 PW M _DC_AC_VPP_M
2
8 8 PW M _THV+_CC_SEL
5
4
3
2
1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

PW M _THV+_CC_SEL
PW M _D_DC_M 9 9 PW M _D_DC_M
JC27-00 PW M _THV+CC_Hyb 10 10 PW M _THV+CC_Hyb
90009A
J
2
7
0
A
C
- 0 PW M _D_AC_VPP_C 11 11 PW M _D_AC_VPP_C
PW M _M HV_K 12 12 PW M _M HV_K

JC39-02252A
SM PS TYPE5 6*2P PW M _D_DC_C 13 13 PW M _D_DC_C
CN5 SM PS TYPE5 PW M _M HV_C 14 14 PW M _M HV_C
1 5V1 PW M _D_AC_VPP_K 15 15 PW M _D_AC_VPP_K
2 5V2 PW M _M HV_M 16 16 PW M _M HV_M
SM PS TYPE5 PW M _D_DC_K 17 17 PW M _D_DC_K
TYPE5 3 24V1
4 24V2 PW M _M HV_Y 18 18 PW M _M HV_Y
CN3 JC39-02213A(C) 19 19 ADC_R_THV2
CN1 +24V1 1 3
2
1
A
J
9
-
4
)
M
(-
32
C
0
40
A2 M )
JC39-02344A(
5
6
24V3 ADC_R_THV2
ADC_R_M HV_C 20 20 ADC_R_M HV_C
1 LIVE 24V4 HV_OPC_Y
GND 2

JC39-02225A
7 DGND PW M _THV_2 21 21 PW M _THV_2
2 NEUTRAL +24V2 3
8 DGND ADC_R_M HV_M 22 22 ADC_R_M HV_M HV_OPC_M
GND 4 23 23 PW M _THV2_CLEAN
9 DGND PW M _THV2_CLEAN
+24V3 5 24 24 ADC_R_M HV_Y
10 DGND ADC_R_M HV_Y HV_OPC_C
GND 6 25 25 PW M _SAW
11 DGND PW M _SAW
+24V4 7 26 26 ADC_R_ITHV_Y
12 DGND ADC_R_ITHV_Y HV_OPC_K
(M ain SYSTEM )

GND 8 27 27 PW M _FUSER_BIAS
PW M _FUSER_BIAS
SM PS TYPE5

SM PS TYPE3 4*2P ADC_R_ITHV_M 28 28 ADC_R_ITHV_M

ADC_R_IHTV_K 29 29 ADC_R_IHTV_K
TYPE5 SIGNAL CN6 SM PS TYPE4
PW M _ITHV_Y 30 30 PW M _ITHV_Y
/ TYPE3R
CN4 JC39-02212A(C) 8 1 ADC_R_IHTV_C 31 31 ADC_R_IHTV_C
5V_OPT

JC39-02223A
HV_DEVE_Y
GND 1 C
9
10
J
3
9
2
(
A
)
C
-
4
M-
20 M )
3
JC39-02343A( 7 2 24V5 PW M _ITHV_M 32 32 PW M _ITHV_M
+24V_ON/OFF 2 6 3 PW M _ITHV_K 33 33 PW M _ITHV_K
24V6 HV_DEVE_M
GND 3 5 4 PW M _ITHV_C 34 34 PW M _ITHV_C
24V7
4 5 GND 35 35 GND
DGND HV_DEVE_C
3 6 DGND
SM PS TYPE5 2 7 DGND
1 HV_DEVE_K
8 DGND
CN2
+5V1 1
GND 2

JC39-02226A
HV_T1_Y 1
+5V2 3 AC CTRL./FDB /PAPER 2
GND 4
DET 1.5m m /17*2P HV_T1_M 3
JC39-02221A(C) CN39 AC CTRL./ 4
-
2
1
)
C
J
C
0
3
M
3
2
A3
9 M)
9
2
(
JC39-02233A( JC39-02569A FDB / PAPER DET HV_T1_C 5
JC39-02196A
J
C
3
9
-
0
2
1
6
A 6
17 1 ZEROCROSS
10 1 HV_T1_K 7
16 2 AC_SENS
9 2
15 3 DGND
8 3
14 4 ON_SM PS_RREAY
7 4
13 5 24V3
6 5

C39-02227A
12 6 ON_FUSER_RELAY T2HV
5 6
11 7 24VS_FUSER
4 7
10 8 DGND
3 8
9 9 ON_FUSER_SIDE
2 9
8 10 ON_FUSER_CENTER
1 10 1
3
2 11 11 EN_24V_ENGINE 2
7
JC39-02224A

1 12 6 12 DGND HV_SAW
3
5
4
3
2 13 5 13 EN_24V_OPTION
1 14 4 14 DGND

3 15 3 15 FAN_SM PS
SM PS
FAN

2 16 2 16 FB_OUT_FAN_SM PS
1 17 1 17 DGND

4 18 nDETECT_CST1
PAPER SIZE1 PAPER SIZE2

3 19 DGND
2 20 ADC_P_SIZE1
1 21 DGND

4 22 nDETECT_CST2
3 23 DGND
2 24 ADC_P_SIZE2
1 25 1.8V_PS

26 FAN_DEVE
DEVE / OPC

3
2 27 FB_OUT_FAN_DEVE
FAN

1 28 DGND

4 29 ADC_OUT_TEM P
3 30 DGND
2 31 ADC_OUT_HUM I
1 32 3.3V_PS
OUT TEM P
/HUM ID

33 NC
34 NC

Electrical-mechanical relationships diagrams

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagrams.

Main drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the toner supply drive.

1212 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-1 Main drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

321 5v

321 5v

321 5v

321 5v

24v 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

24v 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

24v 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

24v 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

BLDC OPC KCMY

CN47 BLDC OPC

KCM Y
JC39-02232A 1 DIR_BLDC_OPC_K
10
9 2 CLK_BLDC_OPC_K
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K
7 4 nEN_BLDC_OPC_K
6 5 NC
24v 5 6 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_K
4 7 DGND
3 8 DGND
2 9 24V1_SW
1 10 24V1_SW OPCHOME

11 DIR_BLDC_OPC_C CN 29 OPCHOME JC39-02240A

10 R_5V_PS 1 3
12 CLK_BLDC_OPC_C
9 DGND 2
8 13 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_C 2
14 nEN_BLDC_OPC_C nSENSE_OPC_HOME_K 3 1 5v
7
6 15 NC
16 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_C R_5V_PS 4 3
24v 5
17 DGND DGND 5 2
4
3 18 DGND nSENSE_OPC_HOME_C 6 1 5v
2 19 24V7
R_5V_PS 7 3
1 20 24V7
DGND 8 2
21 DIR_BLDC_OPC_M nSENSE_OPC_HOME_M 9 1 5v
10
9 22 CLK_BLDC_OPC_M
23 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_M R_5V_PS 10 3
8 DGND 11 2
7 24 nEN_BLDC_OPC_M
25 NC nSENSE_OPC_HOME_Y 12 1 5v
6
5 26 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_M
24v 27 DGND
4
3 28 DGND
2 29 24V7
1 30 24V7

31 DIR_BLDC_OPC_Y
10
32 CLK_BLDC_OPC_Y
9
8 33 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_Y
7 34 nEN_BLDC_OPC_Y
6 35 NC
5 36 BRK_BLDC_OPC_Y
24v 37 DGND
4
3 38 DGNG
2 39 24V5
1 40 24V5

Main drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) 1213

 T1 drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the T1 drive.

1214 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-2 T1 drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

4
3
2
1
24v

T1/ERASER/OPC CRUM
-1.5mm / 16*2P
CN36 T1/ERASER/
JC39-02256A JC39-02255A OPC CRUM
1 1 6 1 6 1 5V_PS
2 2 5 2 5 2 ON_ERASER_K
3 3 4 3
4 4 4 3 3.3V_CRUM
3 4
3 4 SDA_CRUM_OPC_K
2 5 2 5 2 5 SCL_CRUM_OPC_K
1 6 1 6 1 6 DGND

JC39-02256A JC39-02255A 7 5V_PS

1 1 6 1 6
8 ON_ERASER_C
2 2 5 2 5
3 3 4 3
4 9 3.3V_CRUM
4 4 3 4
3 10 SDA_CRUM_OPC_C
2 5 2 5 2 11 SCL_CRUM_OPC_C
1 6 1 6 1 12 DGND
JC39-02255A
2 13 ADC_INNER_TEMP
1 14 DGND

15 NC
16 NC
JC39-02256A JC39-02255A
1 1 6 1 6 17 5V_PS
2 2 5 2 5 18 ON_ERASER_M
3 3 4 3
4 4 4 19 3.3V_CRUM
3 4
3 20 SDA_CRUM_OPC_M
2 5 2 5 2 21 SCL_CRUM_OPC_M
1 6 1 6 1 22 DGND

JC39-02256A JC39-02255A
1 1 6 1 6 23 5V_PS
2 2 5 2 5 24 ON_ERASER_Y
3 3 4 3 4 25 3.3V_CRUM
4 4 3 4 3 26 SDA_CRUM_OPC_Y
2 5 2 5 2 27 SCL_CRUM_OPC_Y
1 6 1 6 1 28 DGND
JC39-02256A 29 A_T1
4
3 30 nA_T1
2 31 nB_T1
24v
32 B_T1
1
24v

T1 drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) 1215

 WTB drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the WTB drive.

1216 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-3 WTB drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

4 JC31-00110A
24v
3
2
1

WTB/CST LOCK/FAN_LSU

CN 38 W TB/CST
LOCK/FAN_LSU JC39-02337A
FAN_LSU 1 3
FB_OUT_FAN_LSU 2 2
DGND 3 1
24v
JC39-02337A
A_W TB 4 4
nA_W TB 5 3
nB_W TB 6 2 24v
B_W TB 7 1
24v
DGND 8 JC39-02337A COM
3 1
COVER_OPEN_FRONT 9 2 2 N.O.
nCOVER_OPEN_FRONT 10 1 3 N.C.
24v
JC39-02337A 4 1
DGND 11 4
ADC_W TB_FULL 12 3 2 3
EN_W TB_LED 13 2 3 2
5V_PS 14 1 4 1
24v
JC39-02337A
R_5V_PS 15 3
DGND 16 2
nDETECT_W TB 17 24v 1

OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_2 18 JC39-02337A 10
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_1 19 9
24v
R_5V_PS 20 JC39-02337A 8
DGND 21 7
nSENSE_CST_LOCK1 22 6
24v
JC39-02337A 5
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_2 23
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_1 24 24v
4
JC39-02337A
R_5V_PS 25 3
DGND 26 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK2 27 24v
1

NC 28

WTB drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) 1217

 Pickup drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pickup drive.

1218 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-4 Pickup drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

JC93-01083A
PICKUP1
4
MOT
3
2
1
24v

PICKUP

CN49 PICKUP
JC39-02234A
3 1 9 1 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY1 2 2 8 2 DGND
1 3 7 3 nSENSE_P_EMPTY1
JC39-02201A
3 4 6 4 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT1 2 5 5 5 DGND
1 6 4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1

3 7 3 7 DGND
FEED1 2 8 2
8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1
1 9 1
9 5V_PS

PICKUP1 4 10 A_PICKUP1
MOT 24v 3 11 nA_PICKUP1
2 12 nB_PICKUP1
1 13 B_PICKUP1
24v

3 1 10 14 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY2 2 2 9 15 DGND
1 3 8 16 nSENSE_P_EMPTY2
JC39-02202A
3 4 7
17 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT2 2 5 6
18 DGND
1 6 5
19 nSENSE_P_PRE_LIFT2

3 7 4
FEED2 3 20 DGND
2 8
2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2
1 9
1 22 5V_PS
10

4 23 A_PICKUP2
3 24 nA_PICKUP2
PICKUP2
MOT
STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2
1 26 B_PICKUP2

Pickup drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) 1219

 Registration unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the registration unit.

Figure 4-5 Registration unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

JC39-02204A

PAPER REGI
3
SENSOR
2
5v
1
0604-001381

TB CRUM
-1.5mm /8*1P

CN48 TB CRUM JC39-02236A JC39-02235A

ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1 7 1 1
5VA 2 6 2 2
DGND 3 5 3 3 CTD SENSOR
ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4 4 4 4
PW M_ACR_LED_CENTER 5 3 5 5
JC39-02236A
DGND 6 2 6 2 INNER
ADC_INNER_TEMP 7 1 7 1 TEMP

JC39-02236A
DGND 8 3
nSENSE_P_REGI 9 2
5V_PS 10 JC39-02204A PAPER REGI
1
SENSOR
5v

Pickup unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pickup unit.

1220 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-6 Pickup unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

9 0604-001393
6 8 PAPER_EMPTY1
0604-001393 5v
5 7
PAPER_LIFT1
4
5v

PICKUP

CN49 PICKUP
JC39-02234A
9 1 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY1 5v JC39-02234A
8 2 DGND
7 3 nSENSE_P_EMPTY1
5v
JC39-02234A
6 4 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT1 5v JC39-02201A 5 5 DGND
4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1
5v
JC39-02201A JC39-02234A
3 7 3
7 DGND
FEED1 2 8 2
8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1
1 9 1
9 5V_PS
JC39-02234A
4 10 A_PICKUP1
PICKUP1 3
MOT STEP 2
11 nA_PICKUP1
12 nB_PICKUP1
1 13 B_PICKUP1
JC39-02202A JC39-02234A
3 1 10 14 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY2 2 2 9 15 DGND
1 3 8 16 nSENSE_P_EMPTY2
JC39-02202A JC39-02234A
3 4 7
17 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT2 2 5 6
18 DGND
1 6 5
19 nSENSE_P_PRE_LIFT2
JC39-02202A 4 JC39-02234A
3 7 20 DGND
FEED2 2 8 3
2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2
1 9
1 22 5V_PS
10
JC39-02234A 23 A_PICKUP2
4
3 24 nA_PICKUP2
PICKUP2
MOT
STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2
1 26 B_PICKUP2

Pickup unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) 1221

 ACR unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the ACR unit.

Figure 4-7 ACR unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

6
7
RIGHT
8
ACR
9
FRONT
10 5v
JC32-00014A

JC31–00078A
ACR SHUTTER
JC32-00014A 1
MOT
2
24v
11
12 CENTER
CTD 0604-001393 3
13 ACR SHUTTER
JC32-00014A 5v 4
14 SENS 5
15 5v
1
LEFT
2
ACR
3 REAR
4 5v
5

REAR/FRONT/LED
-1.5mm/10*2P

LEFT JC39-02230A CN35 REAR/FRONT/LED

ACR 1 15 1 ACR_REAR
REAR 2 14 2 5VA
3 13 3 DGND
JC39-02229A
4 12 4 NC
5 11 5v 5 PW M_ACR_LED_REAR

RIGHT JC39-02230A
6 10 6 ADC_ACR_FRONT_P
ACR
7 9 7 5VA
FRONT
8 8 8 DGND
9 7 9 NC
10 6 10 PW M_ACR_LED_FRONT
5v
JC39-02230A
CENTER 11 5 11 ADC_CTD_CENTER_P
CTD 12 4 12 5VA
13 3 13 DGND
14 2 14 ADC_CTD_CENTER_S
15 1 15 PW M_ACR_LED_CENTER
5v
ACR SHUTTER JC39-02230A
MOT 1 5 16 DGND
2 4 17 OUT_DC_ACR_SHUT1
24v
ACR SHUTTER JC39-02230A
SENS 3 3 18 R_5V_PS
4 2 19 DGND
JC39-02220A
5 1 20 nSENSE_SHUT_ACR
5v

Exit unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the exit unit.

1222 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-8 Exit unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660
shared)

JC93-00802A
5
JC93-00802A
6
7 1
8 2
3
DUP1 MOT 4
DUP_RET
MOT

JC93-00802A
24v 24v
EXIT GATE 3
SOLENOID 2
1

24v

CN 33 Connector on Main PCA

EXIT/DUPLEX
-1.5Vmm /14*2P

CN33 EXIT/DUPLEX
DUP_RET JC39-02188A
1 14 1 A_DUP_RET
MOT 2 13 2 nA_DUP_RET
3 24v 12
3 nB_DUP_RET
4 11 4 B_DUP_RET

JC39-02188A 5 A_DUPLEX1
5 10
DUP1 MOT 6 nA_DUPLEX1
6 24v 9 7 nB_DUPLEX1
7 8
8 7 8 B_DUPLEX1

JC39-02189A JC39-02188A 9 R_5V_PS

3 9 6 10 DGND
Dup RETURN 5
SEN 2 10 11 nSENSE_P_DUP_RETURN
1 11 4
JC39-02189A 3 JC39-02188A
2 12 12 DGND
13 2 13 ADC_EXIT_TEMP
1
14 1 14 NC

JC39-02189A JC39-02188A
3 1 14 15 R_5V_PS
BINFULL1 2 2 13 16 DGND
1 3 12 17 nSENSE_P_BINFULL_EXIT1
BINFULL2
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A
3 1 5 4 11 18 R_5V_PS
2 2 4 5 10 19 DGND
1 3 3 6 9 20 nSENSE_P_BINFULL_EXIT2

JC39-02188A 21 R_5V_PS
JC39-02189A 7 8
4 2 8 7 22 DGND
5 1 9 6 23 nDETECT_JOB_SEP
EXIT GATE JC39-02189A JC39-02188A
3 10 5 24 24V4
SOLENOID 24v
2
24v 11 4 25 EN_EXIT_SOL
1
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A 26 R_5V_PS
3 12 3
DUP 13 2 27 DGND
2
JAM 1 14 1 28 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX1
1

Exit unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1223
 Fuser exit drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the fuser exit drive.

Figure 4-9 Fuser exit drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)

FUSER BLDC
JC39-02195A
24v

1
2
3
4
5
6
7 17 FUSER
8 18 REL MOT
9 19
10 20

FUSER DRIVE
-1/5mm /16*2P
FUSER BLDC
CN30 FUSER DRIVE
JC39-02195A
1 R_DGND
24v 2 CLK_BLDC_FUSER
3 nREADY_BLDC_FUSER
4 nEN_BLDC_FUSER
5 NC
6 R_DGND
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 24V2_SW
10 24V2_SW

3 11 FAN_FUSER_OUT
FUSER OUT 2
FAN 1 12 FB_OUT_FAN_FUSER_OUT
13 DGND
COM 1 3
SIDE 14 DGND
N.O. 2 2 15 COVER_OPEN_SIDE
COVER OPEN N.C. 3 1 16 nCOVER_OPEN_SIDE

17 A_FUSER_REL
FUSER REL MOT 18 nA_FUSER_REL
19 nB_FUSER_REL
20 B_FUSER_REL

3 1 9 21 FAN_EXIT1
EXIT FAN 1 2 2 8 22 FB_OUT_FAN_EXIT1
1 3 7 23 DGND

3 4 6 24 FAN_EXIT2
2 5 5 25 FB_OUT_FAN_EXIT2
EXIT FAN 2
1 6 4 26 DGND
JC39-02191A
3 7 3 27 FAN_EXIT3
EXIT FAN 3 2 8 2 28 FB_OUT_FAN_EXIT3
1 9 1 29 DGND

3 3 30 R_5V_PS
Fuser 2 2 31 DGND
POSI 1 1 32 nSENSE_FUSER_PO S1

Registration drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the registration drive.

1224 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-10 Registration drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)

JC31-00132A
6 REGI MOT
5 24v
4
3
2
1

CN 53 Connector on Main PCA

FEED_REGI

FEED MOT CN53 FEED+REGI

JC39-02336A
1 6 1 A_FEED
2 5
STEP 3 4
2 24V4
3 nA_FEED
4 3
HYBRID 5 2
4 nB_FEED
5 24V4
6 1
6 B_FEED
24v
6 7 A_REGI
5 8 24V1_SW
REGI MOT
4 9 nA_REGI
24v 3 10 nB_REGI
2 11 24V1_SW
1 12 B_REGI

MP CLUTCH 1 2 13 24V4
CL 2 1 14 EN_M P_CLUTCH

Feed drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the feed drive.

Feed drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1225
 Figure 4-11 Feed drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)

JC31-00132A
6 FEED MOT
5 24v
4
3
2
1

CN 53 Connector on Main PCA

FEED_REGI

CN53 FEED+REGI
JC39-02336A
6 1 A_FEED
JC31-00132A 5 2 24V4
FEED MOT 4 3 nA_FEED
3 4 nB_FEED
24v
2 5 24V4
1 6 B_FEED
24v
1 6 7 A_REGI
2 5 8 24V1_SW
STEP 3 4 9 nA_REGI
REGI MOT
4 3 10 nB_REGI
HYBRID 5 2 11 24V1_SW
6 1 12 B_REGI

1 2 13 24V4
MP CLUTCH CL 2 1 14 EN_M P_CLUTCH

Pickup drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pickup drive.

1226 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-12 Pickup drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)

JC93-01083A
PICKUP1 MOTOR
10
24v
11
12
13

PICKUP

CN49 PICKUP
JC39-02234A
3 1 9 1 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY1 2 2 8 2 DGND
1 3 7 3 nSENSE_P_EMPTY1
JC39-02201A JC39-02234A
3 4 6 4 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT1 2 5 5 5 DGND
1 6 4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1

7 3 JC39-02234A
3 7 DGND
FEED1 2 8 2 8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1
1 9 1
9 5V_PS
JC93-01083A
PICKUP1 10 A_PICKUP1
MOTOR 24v 11 nA_PICKUP1
24v 12 nB_PICKUP1
13 B_PICKUP1
JC39-02202A JC39-02234A
3 1 10 14 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY2 2 2 9 15 DGND
1 3 8 16 nSENSE_P_EMPTY2
JC39-02202A JC39-02234A
3 4 7 17 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT2 2 5 6
18 DGND
1 6 5
19 nSENSE_P_PRE_LIFT2
JC39-02202A 4 JC39-02234A
3 7
3 20 DGND
FEED2 2 8
2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2
1 9
1 22 5V_PS
10
JC39-02234A 23 A_PICKUP2
4
3 24 nA_PICKUP2
PICKUP2
MOTOR
STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2
1 26 B_PICKUP2

MP unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the MP unit.

MP unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1227

 Figure 4-13 MP unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660
shared)
JC33-00029B 2
MP SOL 1
5v

0604-001393 3
MP EMPTY 4
5v 5

0604-001393
JC39-02211A MP PAPER MP PAPER 3
WIDTH LENGTH 4
1.8v 5v 5
SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P

CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

MP SOL JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
1 5 1 20
24v 2 PW M_MP_SOL
24v 2 4 2 19
0604-001393
MP EMPTY JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
5v JC39-02210A
4 2 4 5v 17 4 DGND
5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY
MP PAPER JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
WIDTH 1 6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS
2 5 7 1.8v 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
1.8v 8 13 8 DGND
3 4
MP PAPER JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
4 3 9 12 9 R_5V_PS
LENGTH JC39-02211A
5 2 10 5v 11 10 DGND
5v 6 1 11 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH
10
JC39-02208A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 1 3 12 DGND
12 9
2 2 2 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
PRE FEED 13 8
1 3 1 7 14 5V_PS
14
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
15 15 A_DUPLEX2
4 6
16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
3
DUP2 STEP 2 17
5
4
17 nB_DUPLEX2
MOT 18 B_DUPLEX2
1 18 JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC

JC39-02338A JC39-02341A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
3 JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
7 4
8 3
9
Color 10
2
1

4 JC39-02205A
PTB 1 7 7 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
WASTE 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL
2 3 5 9 12
FULL 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS
JC39-02205A
11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
JC39-02207A 12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
14 34 DGND
7
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
DUPLEX
2 6 2 16 5 36 DGND
JAM 2
1 7 1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
P FUSER 2 2 2 19 2 39 DGND
OUT 1 3 1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
JC39-02209A

1228 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Side unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the side unit.

Side unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1229
 Figure 4-14 Side unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660
shared)

0604-001393
1 5v
2
3

0604-001393
4
3
2
0604-001490 1
3 24v
2
1
0604-001393
5 5v
6
7

SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P

CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
5 1 20
4 2 19 2 PW M_MP_SOL

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS
5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
4 8 13 8 DGND

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 9 R_5V_PS

3 9 12
2 10 11 10 DGND
1 11 10 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 12 DGND

PRE FEED 5v JC39-02208A 3 12 9
2 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
13 8
1 7 14 5V_PS
14 5v
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 15 A_DUPLEX2
DUP2 4 15 6
MOT 16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
3 5
2 17 17 nB_DUPLEX2
4 24v
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2
JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC

JC39-02338A JC39-02240A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
4 7 4
3 8 3
PTB CRUM 2 9 2

Mono 1 10 1

4 7 JC39-02205A
PTB 1 7 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
WASTE 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL
2 3 5 9 12
FULL 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS
JC39-02205A
11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
JC39-02207A 12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
14 34 DGND
7
DUPLEX JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
5v 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
JAM 2
6 2 16 5 36 DGND
7 1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2
5v
P FUSER JC39-02205A JC39-02206A
5v 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
OUT
2 2 19 2 39 DGND
JC39-02209A 3 1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
5v

1230 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Right door guide (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the right door guide.

Right door guide (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1231
 Figure 4-15 Right door guide electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)

0604-001393
DUPLEX
5
JAM 2
6
5v
7

SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P

CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

2 JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
1 5 1 20
MP SOL 1 2 PW M_MP_SOL
2 4 2 19
JC39-02210A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
MP EMPTY 2 4 2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 1 6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS
MP PAPER 2 2 5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
WIDTH 1 3 4 8 13 8 DGND

JC39-02211A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 9 R_5V_PS

3 4 3 9 12
MP PAPER 2 5 2 10 11 10 DGND
LENGTH 1 6 1 11 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH
10
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 12 DGND
3 1 3 12 9 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
PRE FEED 2 2 2 13 8
1 3 1 7 14 5V_PS
JC39-02208A 14
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 15 A_DUPLEX2
4 15 6
16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
DUP2 3
MOT
STEP 2 17
5
4
17 nB_DUPLEX2
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2
JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC

JC39-02338A JC39-02341A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
3 JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
7 4
8 3
9 2

Color 10 1

JC39-02207A JC39-02205A
4 1 7 7
PTB 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
WASTE 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL
2 3 5 9 12
FULL 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS
JC39-02205A
11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
JC39-02207A 14 34 DGND
7
DUPLEX JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
JAM 2 5v 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
6 2 16 5 36 DGND
7 1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2
5v
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
P FUSER 2 2 2 19 2 39 DGND
OUT 1 3 1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
JC39-02209A

1232 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Right door output takeaway (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660
shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the right door output takeaway.

Right door output takeaway (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1233
 Figure 4-16 Right door output takeaway electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560,
E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

3
2
1

JC39-02209A
P FUSER
OUT
5v

SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P

CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

2 JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
1 5 1 20
MP SOL 1 2 PW M_MP_SOL
2 4 2 19
JC39-02210A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
MP EMPTY 2 4 2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY

JC39-02206A 15 JC39-02205A 6 1.8V_PS

3 1 6 6
MP PAPER 2 2 5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
WIDTH 1 3 4 8 13 8 DGND

JC39-02211A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 9 R_5V_PS

3 4 3 9 12
MP PAPER 2 5 2 10 11 10 DGND
LENGTH 1 6 1 11 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH
10
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 12 DGND
3 1 3 12 9 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
PRE FEED 2 2 2 13 8
1 3 1 7 14 5V_PS
JC39-02208A 14
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 15 A_DUPLEX2
4 15 6
16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
3
DUP2
MOT
STEP 2 17
5
4
17 nB_DUPLEX2
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2
JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC

JC39-02338A JC39-02341A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
JC39-02338A JC39-02341A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
7 4
8 3
9 2

Color 10 1

JC39-02207A JC39-02205A
4 1 7 7
PTB 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
WASTE 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL
2 3 5 9 12
FULL 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS

11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
14 34 DGND
7
JC39-02207A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
DUPLEX
2 6 2 16 5 36 DGND
JAM 2
1 7 1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2

P FUSER JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
OUT 5v JC39-02209A 2
2 19 39 DGND
1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
5v

1234 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Front unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the front unit.

Front unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1235
 Figure 4-17 Front unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660
shared)

1
2
3
COM
N.O.
N.C.

4
3
ADC_WTB_FULL 2
EN_W TB_LED 1
5v

3 nDETCT_W TB
2 5v
1

W TB/CST LOCK/FAN_LSU

CN 38 W TB/CST
LOCK/FAN_LSU JC39-02337A
FAN_LSU 1 3
FB_OUT_FAN_LSU 2 2
DGND 3 1
JC39-02337A 4
A_W TB 4
nA_W TB 5 3
nB_W TB 6 2
B_W TB 7 1

DGND 8 JC39-02337A COM

3
COVER_OPEN_FRONT 9 2 N.O.
nCOVER_OPEN_FRONT 10 1 N.C.
ADC_WTB_FULL
JC39-02337A EN_W TB_LED
DGND 11 4
ADC_W TB_FULL 12 3 5v
EN_W TB_LED 13 2
5V_PS 14 1
JC39-02337A nDETCT_W TB
R_5V_PS 15 3 5v
DGND 16 2
nDETECT_W TB 17 1

OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_2 18
JC39-02337A 10 1
JC39-02186A
2 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_1 19 9 2 1 2
R_5V_PS 20 JC39-02337A 8 3 JC39-02186A
3
DGND 21 7 4 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK1 22 6 5 1
JC39-02337A JC39-02186A
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_2 23
5 6 2 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_1 24 4 7 1 2
JC39-02337A JC39-02186A
R_5V_PS 25 3 8 3
DGND 26 2 9 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK2 27 1 10 1

NC 28

1236 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover open sensor (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover
open sensor (DCF/HCI).

Pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover open sensor (DCF/HCI) 1237
 Figure 4-18 Pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover open sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

Pickup lift 1 motor

(JC31-00009C)

Pickup lift 2 motor

24V (JC31-00009C)

24V Cover open sensor 1 2 3 4

with harness 24V
9 10
1 2 3 4

6 1
4 3
3 4
1 3 4 6 24V
1 6
Feed motor
(JC31-00177A)
JC39-02268A JC39-02274A

CN601 CN801
1 B_PICK_LIFT1 B_PICK_LIFT2 1
24V 2 nB_PICK_LIFT1 nB_PICK_LIFT2 2 24V
3 nA_PICK_LIFT1 nA_PICK_LIFT2 3
4 A_PICK_LIFT1 A_PICK_LIFT2 4
5 B_FEED
24V 6 nB_FEED
7 nA_FEED DCF PCA
8 A_FEED
(JC92-02738D)
24V 9 DGND
10 nSIDE_C_OPEN_IN

1238 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Paper empty and limit-2 sensors (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper empty and limit-2 sensors (DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-19 Paper empty and limit-2 sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

Prefeed 2 sensor
(0604-001381)
Paper empty 2 sensor
5V 7 8 9
1 2 3 (0604-001393)
5V

5V
4 5 6 Paper limit 2 sensor
(0604-001393)

DCF PCA (JC92-02738D)

JC39-02270A
CN501
1 VCC
5V
1 9 2 GND
5V
2 8 3 SENS_P_EMPTY2
3 7 4 VCC
4 6 5V
5V JC39-02269A 5 GND
5 5
6 4 6 SENS_P_LIMIT2
7 3 7 GND
5V
8 2 5V
8 SENS_PREFEED2
9 1
9 VCC

Paper empty and limit-2 sensors (DCF/HCI) 1239

 Paper empty, path, limit-1, and path sensors (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper empty, path, limit-1, and path sensors
(DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-20 Paper empty , path, limit-1, and path sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

Path 1 sensor
(0604-001490) 10 11 12

5V
7 8 9

5V
Prefeed 1 sensor
(0604-001490)

Paper empty 1 sensor

1 2 3 (0604-001393)
5V

Paper limit 1 sensor

4 5 6 5V
(0604-001393)

JC39-02272A

DCF PCA (JC92-02738D)

CN502
1 VCC
5V
1 12 2 GND
5V
2 11 3 SENS_P_EMPTY1
3 10
4 9 4 VCC
5V 5V
5 8 5 GND
6 7 6 SENS_P_LIMIT1
7 6 JC39-02271A
5V 8 5 7 GND
5V
9 4 8 SENS_PREFEED1
10 3 9 VCC
5V 11 2
12 1 10 GND
5V
11 SENS_PATH1
12 VCC
13 NC
14 NC

Paper size sensors (DCF/HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper size sensors (DCF/HCI).

1240 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-21 Paper size sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

Paper size 1 sensor

(JC32-00013A)

3.3V
1 2 3 4

3.3V

5 6 7 8
Paper size 2 sensor
(JC32-00013A)

JC39-02275A

JC39-02606A
CN802 CN301
1 TRAY1_OPEN
3.3V 2 DGND
3 ADC_P_SIZE1
4 3.3V DCF PCA
Engine
5 TRAY2_OPEN
(JC92-02738D)
Contoller
3.3V 6 DGND Board
7 ADC_P_SIZE2 (ECB)
8 3.3V

HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI).

HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI) 1241

 Figure 4-22 HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI)

HCI PCA (JC92-02738E)

CN301
nSYNC_TRAY 1
nCMD_REQ_TRAY 2
DETECT_TRAY_OPEN 3
NC 4
nDETECT_TRAY (DGND) 5
DGND 6
DGND 7 Engine
DGND 8 Controller
DGND 9 JC39-02605A
Board
24V 10
24V 11
(ECB)
24V 12
5V 13
5V 14
5VS 15
nRST_TRAY 16
RXD_ENG2TRAY 17
TXD_TRAY2ENG 18

CN901 CN5
3.3V 1 8 3.3V
SENS_P_EMPTY_SUB 2 9 nP_EMPTY_R
7 7
SENS_P_SUB_HOME 3 6 6 10 HOME2
SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN2 4 5 5 11 nP_LEVEL2_F
SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN1 5 4 4 12 nP_LEVEL1_F
3 3
SENS_P_SUB_END 6 13 END
2 2
SENS_KNOCKUP_HOME 7 JC39-02286A 1 1 JC39-02356A 14 HOME1
SENS_P_EMPTY2 8 7 7 1 SOL_HOME
6 6 2 GND
HCF TRAY OPEN 9
5 5
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB2 10 4 4 3 nP_LEVEL2_R
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB1 11 3 3 4 nP_LEVEL1_R
GND 12 2 2 5 GND
1 1
OUT_SOL_P_GATE 13 6 SOL_A
24V 14 7 SOL_B
VCC 15
DGND 16
HCI sub PCA
SENS_P_LIMIT2 17 (JC92-02792A)

1242 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Cover open sensor, cassette installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2
motors, and shift motor (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the cover open sensor, cassette installation
sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, and shift motor (DCF/HCI).

Cover open sensor, cassette installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, and shift motor (DCF/HCI) 1243
 Figure 4-23 Cover open sensor, cassette installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, and shift
motor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

Cover open sensor

with harness 9 24V
10

24V
1 2 3 4 Pickup/lift 1 motor Cassette installation
(JC31-00009C) sensor
5V
(0604-001393)

Feed motor 15 16 17
(JC31-00177A)

24V
5 6 7 8
JC39-02279A Lift 2 motor Shift motor
(JC31-00109A) (JC31-00125A)
1 2
24V
JC39-02282A
24V 4 5

CN601 CN901
B_PICK_LIFT1 1 3.3V 1
nB_PICK_LIFT1 2 SENS_P_EMPTY_SUB 2
nA_PICK_LIFT1 3 24V SENS_P_SUB_HOME 3
A_PICK_LIFT1 4 SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN2 4
B_FEED 5 SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN1 5 JC39-02286A
nB_FEED 6 SENS_P_SUB_END 6
nA_FEED 7 24V SENS_KNOCKUP_HOME 7
A_FEED 8 HCI PCA SENS_P_EMPTY2 8
DGND 9 (JC92-02738E) HCF_TRAY_OPEN 9
nSIDE_C_OPEN_IN 10 24V SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB2 10
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB1 11
CN902 GND 12
LIMIT_SW_OUT 1 24V OUT_SOL_P_GATE 13
OUT_DCMOT_LIFT2 2 24V 14
NC 3 VCC 15
5V
OUT_DCMOT_SHIFT1 4 24V DGND 16
OUT_DCMOT_SHIFT2 5 SENS_P_LIMIT2 17
NC 6

1244 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed sensor, main limit and empty sensors (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed sensor,
main limit and empty sensors (DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-24 Limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed sensor, main limit and empty sensors electrical-mechanical
relationships (DCF/HCI)

10
11
13 5V 12
14
Limit switch Feed sensor
with harness (0604-001490)
5V Prefeed sensor
(0604-001381) 7 8 9
5V

Main limit sensor

4 5 6
(0604-001393)
5V
5V
1 2 3 Empty main sensor
(0604-001393)

JC39-02281A

HCI PCA (JC92-02738E)

CN502
1 VCC
5V
2 GND
1 14 3 SENS_P_EMPTY_MAIN
2 13
3 12 4 VCC
4 11 5V
5 GND
5 10
6 9 6 SENS_P_MAIN_LIMIT
7 8 JC39-02280A 7 GND
8 7 5V
8 SENS_PREFEED
9 6
10 5 9 VCC
11 4 10 GND
12 3 5V
13 2 11 SENS_PATH
14 1 12 VCC

5V 13 LIMIT_SW_IN
14 LIMIT_SW_OUT

Limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed sensor, main limit and empty sensors (DCF/HCI) 1245
 Level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid home sensor, and solenoid (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid home
sensor, and solenoid (DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-25 Level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid home sensor, and solenoid electrical-mechanical
relationships (DCF/HCI)

CN6 HCI sub PCA

1 SOL_B (JC92-02792A)
2 NC CN4
24V
3 SOL_A VCC 1
GND 2 3.3V

CN1 nP_LEVEL1_R 3
1 VCC VCC 4
1 6 3.3V 3.3V
2 GND GND 5
2 5
3 4 3 nP_LEVEL1_F nP_LEVEL2_R 6
JC39-02352A
4 3 4 VCC VCC 7
5 2 5 GND GND 8 3.3V
6 1 3.3V
6 nP_LEVEL2_F SOL_HOME 9

JC39-02351A JC39-02355A

1 7
1
2 8
2
4 3 9
3
5 Level1 front 4
6 Level1 rear sensor
sensor 5
(0604-001393) 6
3.3V (0604-001393) Solenoid
24V with harness 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V
(JC33-00031B) Level2 rear
3.3V 1 2 3 Solenoid home sensor
Level2 front sensor sensor (0604-001393)
(0604-001393) (0604-001393)

1246 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and empty sensor (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and empty
sensor (DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-26 Home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and empty sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

HCI sub PCA (JC92-02792A)

CN2 CN 3
1 VCC VCC 1
3.3V 3.3V
2 GND GND 2
3 HOME1 nP_EMPTY_R 3
4 VCC VCC 4
3.3V 3.3V
5 GND GND 5
6 END HOME2 6
NC 7

JC39-02352A
Home 1 sensor JC39-02352A
3.3V 4
(0604-001393) 5
1 2 3 6 3.3V
3.3V Home 2 sensor
4 5 6
Empty sensor (0604-001393)
End sensor (0604-001393)
(0604-001393)
3.3V 1 2 3

Home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and empty sensor (DCF/HCI) 1247

 Limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, prefeed
sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor (DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-27 Limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor electrical-mechanical
relationships (DCF/HCI)

Prefeed sensor
5V (0604-001490)
7 8 9
sHCI PCA
13 14 (JC92-02738F)
Limit switch 24V CN502
with harness
1 VCC
5V
2 GND
1 14
2 13 3 SENS_P_EMPTY1
3 12 4 VCC
4 11 5V
5 GND
5 10
6 9 6 SENS_P_LIMIT1
JC39-02290A
7 8 7 GND
8 7 JC39-02289A 8 SENS_PREFEED
9 6 5V
9 VCC
10 5
11 4 10 NC
12 3 11 NC
13 2 12 NC
14 1
13 LIMIT_SW_IN
24V 14 LIMIT_SW_OUT
Paper empty 1 sensor
(0604-001393) 5V 1 2 3

5V 4 5 6
Paper limit 1 sensor
(0604-001393)

Pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and feed motor (DCF/HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and feed motor
(DCF/HCI).

1248 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-28 Pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and feed motor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)
JC39-02291A

CN601 CN701
1 B_PICK_LIFT1 LIMIT_SW_OUT 1
24V 2 nB_PICK_LIFT1 OUT_DCMOT_LIFT2 2 24V
3 nA_PICK_LIFT1 VCC / CST_LOCK_DETECT1 3
4 A_PICK_LIFT1 GND 4
5 B_FEED SENS_LCT_HOME_F 5
24V 6 nB_FEED VCC / CST_LOCK_DETECT2 6
7 nA_FEED GND 7
8 A_FEED SENS_LCT_HOME_R 8
9 NC
10 NC sHCI PCA
CN701
(JC92-02738F)

JC39-02294A

JC39-02287A
Engine
Controller
Board
(ECB)

5
6
7 Pick/lift 1 motor
8 (JC31-00009B)
24V
Feed motor
(JC31-00163A)
24V
1 2 3 4

1 2 24V

Lift 2 motor
(JC31-00109A)

Upper/lower paper low sensors (DCF/HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the upper/lower paper low sensors (DCF/HCI).

Upper/lower paper low sensors (DCF/HCI) 1249

 Figure 4-29 Upper/lower paper low sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)
sHCI PCA (JC92-02738F)
CN501
1 VCC
5V
2 GND
3 SENS_P_LOW_U
4 VCC
5V
5 GND
6 SENS_P_LOW_L
7 NC
8 NC
JC39-02288A
9 NC

4
5
6
1
2 5V
3 5V
Upper paper low sensor
Lower paper (0604-001393)
low sensor
(0604-001393)

Front/rear home sensors and tray open sensor (DCF/HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the front/rear home sensors and tray open
sensor (DCF/HCI).

1250 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-30 Front/rear home sensors and tray open sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

Tray open sensor

with harness sHCI PCA (JC92-02738F)
1 2 3
3.3V
CN1001
JC39-02346A
1 GND
3.3V 2 LCT_TRAY_OPEN
3 NC

Front home sensor CN701

5V (0604-001393)
1 LIMIT_SW_OUT
3
4 2 OUT_DCMOT_LIFT2
5
3 VCC / CST_LOCK_DETECT1
5V
JC39-02291A 4 GND
5 SENS_LCT_HOME_F
6 VCC / CST_LOCK_DETECT2
7 GND
5V
8 SENS_LCT_HOME_R

Rear home sensor

(0604-001393) 5V
6
7
8

Main PCAs (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the main PCAs (SSBM).

Main PCAs (SSBM) 1251

 Figure 4-31 Main PCAs electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
CN6 CN7 CN8 CN9 CN10
Bridge Punch Rear upper Safety Staple

CN5 CN11
Front compile Eject

CN4
CN12
Front path
Front lower
Finisher main PCA
CN17 (JC92-02968A)
Engine Controller Cover CN13
SCU
Board (ECB)
CN3
Top door CN14
CN1 CN16 CN15 Stacker
CN2 Engine Log Booklet
Front door

JC39-02308A

CN4
Staple

CN9
Stopper
CN5
Feed Booklet PCA
JC39-02296A (JC92-02790B) CN10
CN6 BLDC
Tamper CN1 CN3 CN7 CN8
Interface Log Paddle Guide

Paper detection sensor (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper detection sensor (SSBM).

1252 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-32 Paper detection sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)

3.3V 21 Paper detection sensor

(0604-001415)

Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A)

JC39-02318A CN12, Front lower
1 FRONT_T_M_NB
2 FRONT_T_M_B
3 FRONT_T_M_A
4 FRONT_T_M_NA
3.3V 5 VCC(100ohm)
6 GND
7 IN_MANUAL_PAPER_DETECT
8 VCC(100ohm)
9 GND
10 IN_END_FENCE_HOME
11 VCC(100ohm)
12 GND
13 IN_STAPLER_MOVE_MANUAL_HOME

Entrance motors A/B, end fence motor, buffer motor and sensor, and diverter close
sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the entrance motors A/B, end fence motor, buffer
motor and sensor, and diverter close sensor (SSBM).

Entrance motors A/B, end fence motor, buffer motor and sensor, and diverter close sensor (SSBM) 1253
 Figure 4-33 Entrance motors A/B, end fence motor, buffer motor and sensor, and diverter close sensor electrical-
mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A) Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A)
CN4, Front path CN5, Front compile
1 3.3V 1 REAR_T_M_NB
2 IN_BM_EXIT_PATH 2 REAR_T_M_B
3 GND 3 REAR_T_M_A
4 3.3V 4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 IN_ENTRANCE_PATH 5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 GND 6 BUFFER_M_B
3.3V 7 VCC(100ohm) 24V 7 BUFFER_M_A
8 GND 8 BUFFER_M_NA
9 IN_DIVERTER_CLOSE 9 PADDLE_M_NB
24V 10 ENT_M_NA 10 PADDLE_M_B
11 ENT_M_A 11 PADDLE_M_A
12 IN_BUFFER_OPEN 12 PADDLE_M_NA
13 GND 13 END_FENCE_M_NB
3.3V
14 VCC(100ohm) 24V 14 END_FENCE_M_B
15 IN_TOP_EXIT_PATH 15 END_FENCE_M_A
16 GND 16 END_FENCE_M_NA
17 VCC(100ohm) 17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME
18 GND 18 GND
19 IN_COMPILE_EXIT_PATH 19 VCC(100ohm)
20 3.3V 20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME
21 ENT_M_NB 21 GND
24V 22 ENT_M_B 22 VCC(100ohm)
23 TOP_BEAM_IN
24 GND
25 GND

JC39-02313A 26 OP_BUTTON
27 OP_LED_FR_OUT

Entrance motor A 28 OP_LED_YG_OUT

(JC90-01459A) 29 5V
2
1 30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME
24V
31 GND
2
1
32 VCC(100ohm)
24V
Entrance motor B 4
24V
4
(JC90-01459A) 3 3
2 2 24V
3 1 1
2 End fence motor
3.3V
1
Buffer motor
(JC90-01467A) 3 (JC90-01453A)
Diverter 2
close sensor 1 3.3V
(0604-001393) Buffer open sensor
(0604-001393)

Top-beam out sensor, stack motor, and SKU motor (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the top-beam out sensor, stack motor, and SKU
motor (SSBM).

1254 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-34 Top-beam out sensor, stack motor, and SKU motor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)

3.3V

Top beam
out sensor
(0601-003440)

4
24V 3
2
3.3V 3 1 SCU motor
2
1 (JC90-01414A)

JC39-02319A

2 Stack motor Finisher main PCA Finisher main PCA

24V 1 (JC90-01415B) (JC92-02968A) (JC92-02968A)
CN8, Rear upper CN13, SCU
1 EXIT_M_NA 1 SCU_M_NB
JC39-02312A 2 EXIT_M_A 24V 2 SCU_M_B
3 EXIT_M_B 3 SCU_M_A
4 EXIT_M_NB 4 SCU_M_NA
24V 5 STACK_MTR_P 5 GND
6 STACK_MTR_M 6 BOOKLET_BEAM_IN
7 VCC(100ohm) 7 3.3V
3.3V
8 GND 8 BOOKLET_BEAM_OUT
9 IN_STACK_ENCODER 9 VCC(100ohm)
10 3.3V 10 GND
3.3V 11 3.3V 11 IN_STACK_FULL_DETEXT
12 TOP_BEAM_OUT

Curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert home sensor, and guide home sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert home
sensor, and guide home sensor (SSBM).

Curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert home sensor, and guide home sensor (SSBM) 1255
 Figure 4-35 Curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert home sensor, and guide home sensor electrical-mechanical
relationships (SSBM)

4
3
2
1 24V Booklet PCA
Curl pawl motor (JC93-01153A)
(JC92-02790B)
CN7, Paddle (Booklet)
1 3.3V
2 GND
3 PADDLE_HOME
4 PADDLE_M_NB
5 PADDLE_M_B
Divert home sensor 3 6 PADDLE_M_A
(0604-001415) 2 3.3V
1 7 PADDLE_M_NA
3.3V 8 3.3V
9 GND
10 DIVERT_HOME
11 DIVERT_M_NB

24V 12 DIVERT_M_B
13 DIVERT_M_A
14 DIVERT_M_NA

CN8, Guide (Booklet)

3
2 4 3.3V 1 3.3V
3.3V 1 3
Guide home 2 24V 2 FOLD_EXIT
sensor 1 3 GND
(0604-001393)
Fold motor 4 GND
JC39-02304A
(JC93-01154A) 3.3V
5 GND
6 GUIDE_HOME
7 GUIDE_M_NA
8 GUIDE_M_A
24V 9 GUIDE_M_B
10 GUIDE_M_NB

Fold exit sensor

3
(JC32-00020A)
2
1 3.3V

Feed entrance sensor (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the feed entrance sensor (SSBM).

1256 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-36 Feed entrance sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)

Booklet PCA (JC92-02790B)

CN4, Staple (Booklet)
3.3V 1 VCC(100ohm)
2 GND
3 FEED_ENT
4 5V
5 LOW_STAPLE2
6 GND
7 LOW_STAPLE1
8 STAPLE_HOME
JC39-02302A 9 STAPLE_M+
10 STAPLE_M+
11 NA
12 STAPLE_M-
13 STAPLE_M-

3.3V 3 Feed entrance sensor

2
1 (0604-001415)

Feed entrance sensor (SSBM) 1257

 Press home sensor, tamper home sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press
motor, and feed motor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the press home sensor, tamper home sensor,
paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press motor, and feed motor (SSBM).

1258 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-37 Press home sensor, tamper home sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press motor, and feed
motor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Booklet PCA (JC92-02790B)
CN5, Feed (Booklet)
1 3.3V
Feed motor 3.3V
Press home sensor
(JC93-01152A) 2 GND
(0604-001393)
3 4 3 PRESS_HOME
2
3
1 3.3V 4 PRESS_M_NB
2
24V
1 24V 5 PRESS_M_B
6 PRESS_M_A
4 7 PRESS_M_NA
3 24V
8 FEED_M_NB
2
1 24V 9 FEED_M_B
Press motor 10 FEED_M_A
(JC93-01155A) 11 FEED_M_NA

CN6, Tamper (Booklet)

JC39-02298A 1 VCC(100ohm)
2 GND
3 KNIFE_HOME
4 VCC(100ohm)
5 GND
3.3V
6 TAMP_HOME
7 TAMP_M_NB
4
Tamper motor 3 24V 24V 8 TAMP_M_B
(JC93-01155A) 2
9 TAMP_M_A
1
10 TAMP_M_NA
11 3.3V

3 12 PAPER_DETECT
Tamper home sensor 3.3V
2 13 GND
(0604-001393) 3.3V
1

Paper detect sensor 3 CN7, Paddle (Booklet)

(JC32-00020A) 2
1 3.3V 1 3.3V
2 GND
3 PADDLE_HOME
4 PADDLE_M_NB
24V 5 PADDLE_M_B
6 PADDLE_M_A
7 PADDLE_M_NA
8 3.3V
Paddle motor (JC93-01001A)
9 GND
4 10 DIVERT_HOME
3
2 JC39-02304A 11 DIVERT_M_NB
24V
1 12 DIVERT_M_B
13 DIVERT_M_A
14 DIVERT_M_NA

Press home sensor, tamper home sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press motor, and feed motor (SSBM) 1259
 Top-exit path and compile-exit path sensors (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the top-exit path and compile-exit path sensors
(SSBM).

Figure 4-38 Top-exit path and compile-exit path sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Finisher main PCA Finisher main PCA
(JC92-02968A) (JC92-02968A)
CN4, Front path CN5, Front compile
1 3.3V 1 REAR_T_M_NB
2 IN_BM_EXIT_PATH 2 REAR_T_M_B
3 GND 3 REAR_T_M_A
4 3.3V 4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 IN_ENTRANCE_PATH 5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 GND 6 BUFFER_M_B
7 VCC(100ohm) 7 BUFFER_M_A

8 GND 8 BUFFER_M_NA

9 IN_DIVERTER_CLOSE 9 PADDLE_M_NB

10 ENT_M_NA 10 PADDLE_M_B
11 PADDLE_M_A
11 ENT_M_A
12 PADDLE_M_NA
12 IN_BUFFER_OPEN 3.3V
13 END_FENCE_M_NB
13 GND
14 END_FENCE_M_B
14 VCC(100ohm)
15 END_FENCE_M_A
15 IN_TOP_EXIT_PATH 3.3V
3.3V 16 END_FENCE_M_NA
16 GND
17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME
17 VCC(100ohm)
18 GND
18 GND
3.3V 19 VCC(100ohm)
19 IN_COMPILE_EXIT_PATH
20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME
20 3.3V
21 GND
21 ENT_M_NB
22 VCC(100ohm)
22 ENT_M_B JC39-02322A 3.3V 23 TOP_BEAM_IN
24 GND
25 GND
26 OP_BUTTON
27 OP_LED_FR_OUT
3
28 OP_LED_YG_OUT
2
1 3.3V 29 5V
Top exit
path sensor Compile exit path 30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME

(0604-001393) sensor 31 GND

3
2 3.3V (JC32-00020A) 32 VCC(100ohm)
1

3.3V 2
1
Top beam in sensor
(JC32-00020A)

1260 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Knife motor, stopper home sensor, and stopper solenoid and motor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the knife motor, stopper home sensor, and
stopper solenoid and motor (SSBM).

Figure 4-39 Knife motor, stopper home sensor, and stopper solenoid and motor electrical-mechanical
relationships (SSBM)
Booklet PCA
(JC92-02790B)
CN10, BLDC (Booklet)
1 FOLD_M_DIR_OUT
2 FOLD_M_CLOCK
3 FOLD_M_READY
4 FOLD_M_START_OUT
5 NA
6 FOLD_M_BRAKE_OUT
7 GND
8 GND
9 24V1
10 24V1
11 KNIFE_M_DIR_OUT
Stopper solenoid 12 KNIFE_M_CLOCK
(JC33-00038A)
13 KNIFE_M_READY
2 14 KNIFE_M_START_OUT
1
24V 15 NA
24V
16 KNIFE_M_BRAKE_OUT
17 GND
18 GND
19 24V2
20 24V2
Stopper home JC39-02305A
sensor
Booklet PCA (0604-001393) 3 10
2
(JC92-02790B) 3.3V 1 9
8
CN9, Stopper (Booklet) JC39-02305A 7
24V 1 24V 6
5
STOPPER_SOL_OUT 2 24V 4
3.3V 3 3
2 Knife motor
GND 4 1 (JC31-00144A)
3.3V Stopper 4
STOPPER_HOME 5 motor 3 24V
STOPPER_M_NB 6 (JC93-01155A) 2
1
STOPPER_M_B 7
STOPPER_M_A 8 24V
STOPPER_M_NA 9

Knife motor, stopper home sensor, and stopper solenoid and motor (SSBM) 1261
 Top door sensor, fold motor, and knife home position sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the top door sensor, fold motor, and knife home
position sensor (SSBM).

Figure 4-40 Top door sensor, fold motor, and knife home position sensor electrical-mechanical relationships
(SSBM)

Finisher main PCA Booklet PCA

(JC92-02968A) (JC92-02790B)
CN3, Cover CN10, BLDC (Booklet)

1 TOP_DOOR_IL_IN 1 FOLD_M_DIR_OUT

24V 2 NC 2 FOLD_M_CLOCK

3 NC 3 FOLD_M_READY

4 DOOR_IL_IN 4 FOLD_M_START_OUT

10 24V 5 NA
9
6 FOLD_M_BRAKE_OUT
Top door sensor 8 JC39-02305A
7 7 GND
with harness 6
(JC39-02310A) 5
24V 8 GND
4
24V Fold motor 3 9 24V1
2
(JC31-00144A) 1 10 24V1
11 KNIFE_M_DIR_OUT
12 KNIFE_M_CLOCK
13 KNIFE_M_READY
14 KNIFE_M_START_OUT
15 NA
16 KNIFE_M_BRAKE_OUT
17 GND
18 GND
19 24V2
20 24V2

Knife home sensor 3

2
(0604-001393) 1 3.3V Booklet PCA
(JC92-02790B)
CN6, Tamper (Booklet)
1 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V
3.3V
2 GND
JC39-01336A
3 KNIFE_HOME
4 VCC(100ohm)
5 GND
6 TAMP_HOME
7 TAMP_M_NB
8 TAMP_M_B
9 TAMP_M_A
10 TAMP_M_NA
11 3.3V
12 PAPER_DETECT
13 GND

1262 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Operational panel button PCA and entrance path sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the operational panel button PCA and entrance
path sensor (SSBM).

Figure 4-41 Operational panel button PCA and entrance path sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)

Operational panel button PCA

(JC92-02789B)
5
5V 4
3
2
1 3
2
3.3V 1 Entrance path
sensor
(JC32-00020A)

Finisher main PCA JC39-02321A

(JC92-02968A)
CN5, Front compile
1 REAR_T_M_NB
2 REAR_T_M_B
3 REAR_T_M_A
4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 BUFFER_M_B
7 BUFFER_M_A
8 BUFFER_M_NA Finisher main PCA
9 PADDLE_M_NB (JC92-02968A)
10 PADDLE_M_B CN4, Front path
JC39-02345A 11 PADDLE_M_A 1 3.3V
12 PADDLE_M_NA 2 IN_BM_EXIT_PATH
13 END_FENCE_M_NB 3 GND
14 END_FENCE_M_B 4 3.3V
15 END_FENCE_M_A 5 IN_ENTRANCE_PATH
3.3V
16 END_FENCE_M_NA 6 GND
17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME 7 VCC(100ohm)
18 GND 8 GND
19 VCC(100ohm) 9 IN_DIVERTER_CLOSE
20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME 10 ENT_M_NA
21 GND 11 ENT_M_A
22 VCC(100ohm) 12 IN_BUFFER_OPEN
23 TOP_BEAM_IN 13 GND
24 GND 14 VCC(100ohm)
25 GND 15 IN_TOP_EXIT_PATH
26 OP_BUTTON 16 GND
27 OP_LED_FR_OUT 17 VCC(100ohm)
5V
28 OP_LED_YG_OUT 18 GND
29 5V 19 IN_COMPILE_EXIT_PATH
30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME 20 3.3V
31 GND 21 ENT_M_NB
32 VCC(100ohm) 22 ENT_M_B

Operational panel button PCA and entrance path sensor (SSBM) 1263
 Exit cam home sensor, main paddle home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the exit cam home sensor, main paddle home
sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor (SSBM).

1264 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-42 Exit cam home sensor, main paddle home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor electrical-
mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A)
CN17, Front path
3.3V 1 3.3V
2 GND
3 IN_BM_EXIT_CAM_HOME
4 24V1
Exit cam home
sensor 5 BM_EXIT_MTR_NB
(JC32-00020A) 3 6 BM_EXIT_MTR_B
2
7 BM_EXIT_MTR_A
1 3.3V
8 BM_EXIT_MTR_NA
JC39-02320A
9 IN_BM_EXIT_CAM_DETECT
10 24V1

Finisher main PCA

(JC92-02968A)
CN5, Front compile
1 REAR_T_M_NB
2 REAR_T_M_B
3 REAR_T_M_A
4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 BUFFER_M_B
7 BUFFER_M_A
Paddle motor 8 BUFFER_M_NA
(JC93-01001A) 9 PADDLE_M_NB
4 24V 10 PADDLE_M_B
3 24V 11 PADDLE_M_A
2
1 12 PADDLE_M_NA
13 END_FENCE_M_NB
14 END_FENCE_M_B
JC39-02313A 15 END_FENCE_M_A
16 END_FENCE_M_NA

3 17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME
2 Finisher main PCA 18 GND
3.3V
Main paddle 1 (JC92-02968A) 19 VCC(100ohm)
home sensor CN8, Rear upper 20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME
(0604-001393)
1 EXIT_M_NA 21 GND
3.3V
JC39-02312A 2 EXIT_M_A 22 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V
Exit motor
(JC31-00163B) 24V 3 EXIT_M_B 23 TOP_BEAM_IN
4 EXIT_M_NB 24 GND
4
3 5 STACK_MTR_P 25 GND
2 6 STACK_MTR_M 26 OP_BUTTON
24V
1
7 VCC(100ohm) 27 OP_LED_FR_OUT
8 GND 28 OP_LED_YG_OUT
9 IN_STACK_ENCODER 29 5V
10 3.3V 30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME
11 3.3V 31 GND
12 TOP_BEAM_OUT 32 VCC(100ohm)

Exit cam home sensor, main paddle home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor (SSBM) 1265
 Front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper home sensors, and end-fence home
sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper
home sensors, and end-fence home sensor (SSBM).

1266 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-43 Front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper home sensors, and end-fence home sensor electrical-
mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Finisher main PCA
4
(JC92-02968A)
3 JC39-02318A CN12, Front lower
24V 2
1
1 FRONT_T_M_NB
2 FRONT_T_M_B
24V 3 FRONT_T_M_A
Front tamper motor 4 FRONT_T_M_NA
(JC93-01001A) 3 5 VCC(100ohm)
3.3V
2
6 GND
1
End fence 7 IN_MANUAL_PAPER_DETECT
home sensor 8 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V
(0604-001393) 9 GND
3.3V
10 IN_END_FENCE_HOME
11 VCC(100ohm)
12 GND
13 IN_STAPLER_MOVE_MANUAL_HOME

Finisher main PCA

(JC92-02968A)
CN5, Front compile
3 Front tamper home sensor
2 1 REAR_T_M_NB
3.3V 1 (0604-001393)
24V 2 REAR_T_M_B
3 REAR_T_M_A
4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 BUFFER_M_B
7 BUFFER_M_A
JC39-02313A 8 BUFFER_M_NA
9 PADDLE_M_NB
10 PADDLE_M_B
11 PADDLE_M_A

Rear tamper motor (JC93-01001A) 12 PADDLE_M_NA

13 END_FENCE_M_NB
4 14 END_FENCE_M_B
3
2 15 END_FENCE_M_A
24V 1 16 END_FENCE_M_NA
17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME
18 GND
3.3V
19 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V
20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME
21 GND
22 VCC(100ohm)
23 TOP_BEAM_IN
24 GND
3 25 GND
2
Rear tamper home sensor 1 3.3V 26 OP_BUTTON
(0604-001393) 27 OP_LED_FR_OUT
28 OP_LED_YG_OUT
29 5V
30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME
31 GND
3.3V
32 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V

Front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper home sensors, and end-fence home sensor (SSBM) 1267
 Tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out sensors
(SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU home
detect sensor, and stack beam in/out sensors (SSBM).

1268 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-44 Tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out sensors electrical-
mechanical relationships (SSBM)

3
2 3.3V 3.3V SCU home detect sensor
1 Tray upper home (0604-001393)
rear sensor 3 3
2
(0604-001393) 2
1 1 3.3V
Tray upper front sensor (0604-001393)

3.3V
Stack beam
out sensor
(0603-003440)

3.3V

Stack beam in sensor

Finisher main PCA
(0603-001309)
JC39-02325A
(JC92-02968A)
CN14, Stacker

3.3V 1 3.3V
2 STACK_BEAM_OUT
3 VCC(100ohm)
3.3V
4 GND
5 IN_TRAY_UPPER_HOME_REAR
6 VCC(100ohm)
3.3V
7 GND
8 IN_SCU_HOME_DETECT
9 VCC(100ohm)
3.3V
10 GND
11 IN_TRAY_UPPER_FRONT

3.3V 12 GND
13 STACK_BEAM_IN
14 NC

Bridge motor, bridge middle sensor, and bridge guide sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the bridge motor, bridge middle sensor, and
bridge guide sensor (SSBM).

Bridge motor, bridge middle sensor, and bridge guide sensor (SSBM) 1269
 Figure 4-45 Bridge motor, bridge middle sensor, and bridge guide sensor electrical-mechanical relationships
(SSBM)

Bridge middle sensor

3 (0604-001393)
2
1 3.3V
Bridge guide sensor
(0604-001393) 3 3.3V
2
1

4
3
2
24V 1
JC39-02327A
Bridge motor
(JC31-00163B)

Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A)

CN6, Bridge
1 BRIDGE_M_NA
2 BRIDGE_M_A
24V 3 BRIDGE_M_B
4 BRIDGE_M_NB
5 3.3V
6 IN_BRIDGE_ENTRANCE_PATH
7 GND
8 IN_BRIDGE_DETECT
9 GND
3.3V
10 IN_BRIDGE_GUIDE
11 VCC(100ohm)
12 GND
3.3V
13 IN_BRIDGE_MID

Bridge entrance path sensor (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the bridge entrance path sensor (SSBM).

1270 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-46 Bridge entrance path sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)

Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A)

CN6, Bridge
1 BRIDGE_M_NA
2 BRIDGE_M_A
3 BRIDGE_M_B
4 BRIDGE_M_NB
5 3.3V
6 IN_BRIDGE_ENTRANCE_PATH
3.3V
7 GND
8 IN_BRIDGE_DETECT
9 GND
10 IN_BRIDGE_GUIDE
JC39-02327A 11 VCC(100ohm)
12 GND
13 IN_BRIDGE_MID

Bridge entrance
path sensor
(JC32-00020A)
3 3.3V
2
1

Bridge entrance path sensor (SSBM) 1271

 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Learn about the stapler/stacker and booklet maker.

Product specification and description

Learn about product specifications and descriptions.

Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher view

Learn about the front view and rear view of the stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

Figure 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher - front view

C1

C4

C3

C2

1272 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-2 Booklet finisher - front view

C3’

C5

Table 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - front view

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C1 Front door JC90-01444B

C2 Caster cover JC63-04985B (*)

C3 Left lower cover (Stapler/stacker) JC63-05001B (*)

C3' Left lower cover (Booklet) JC90-01417B (*)

C4 Left upper cover JC90-01475B (*)

C5 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B, JC63-04978B (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-3 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - rear view

C6
2

C7
C8

Table 5-2 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - rear view

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C6 Top Output tray JC63-04996B

JC63-05003B (*)

C7 Main output tray JC63-05002B

Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher view 1273

 Table 5-2 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - rear view (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C8 Rear cover JC63-04988B (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-4 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - top view

C9

C10

Table 5-3 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - top view

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C9 Top cover JC90-01446B

C10 Top door JC90-01445B (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-5 Booklet finisher – front-right view

C11

C14 C12

C13

Table 5-4 booklet finisher - front-right view

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C11 Right upper cover JC90-01448B (*)

C12 Front cover JC63-04986B

C13 Front lower cover JC63-04987B

1274 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-4 booklet finisher - front-right view (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C14 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Detailed Specifications
Learn about the detailed specifications of the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker.

Stapler-stacker finisher

Table 5-5 Stapler-stacker finisher detailed specifications

Item Stapler-stacker finisher Booklet maker

Speed PPM 18.3~70,(70ppm) 18.3~70,(70ppm)

Stack Capacity (A4/ Main 3,000 sheets 2,000 sheets

Letter 80gsm)
Top 250 sheets 250 sheets

Paper Size Main Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457 Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457

Top 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200) 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200)

Paper Weight Main 52 ~ 350 gsm 52 ~ 350 gsm

Top 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm

Offset (Non Staple) 15mm(minimum) 15mm(minimum)

※Exception SRA3 and larger size.

Staple Clinching position ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat) ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat)

● Dual ● Dual

Paper weight 52~256 gsm 52~256 gsm

Capacity 65 sheets (90gsm) 65 sheets (90gsm)

Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge 5,000 clinching/cartridge

Offline Yes Yes

Hole Punch Paper weight 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm

available unit (Auto NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish

change)

Booklet maker

Table 5-6 Booklet maker specifications

Item Description

Set Speed PPM 18.3~70(70ppm)

Paper size B5 SEF ~ 12'' x 18''

Paper weight 60 ~ 120 gsm

Staple + Fold Capacity(80gsm) 25 sheets

Detailed Specifications 1275

 Table 5-6 Booklet maker specifications (continued)

Item Description

Fold Capacity(80gsm) 5 sheets

Tray Capacity 5 sets / 25 sheets

Staple Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge

C - Folding 3 sheets

Letter SEF, A4 SEF (52~90gsm)

Physical

Table 5-7 Physical

Module Option Size Module Weight Packed Weight

(Reference) W X D X H [mm] [Kg] [Kg]

Stapler-stacker 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 40 62

Booklet maker 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 62 84.5

Hole punch 80 x 485 x 235 2.8 4.1

Paper size

Table 5-8 Paper size specification

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish
4H
52-350 Off 52-300g 45° Flat 2H 3H 2H 4H
g set

A5 210 8.3X5.8 LEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O X X

X14
8

Statem 216 8.5X5.5 LEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O X X

ent X14
0

Letter 279 11X8.5 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

X21
6

A4 297 8.3X11. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

X21 7
0

B5(JIS) 257 10.1×7. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O X X

X18 2
2

B5(ISO) 250 9.8×6.9 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O X X

X17
6

1276 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-8 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish
4H
52-350 Off 52-300g 45° Flat 2H 3H 2H 4H
g set

Executi 267 10.5X7. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

ve X18 3
4

No 9 98X 3.9X8.9 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

Env 225

Monarc 98.4 3.9×7.5 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

h Env ×19
0.5

Postcar 101. 4.0×6.0 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

d 6×1
52.4
4x6

A6 105 4.1X5.8 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

X14
8

No 10 105 4.1×9.5 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

Env ×24
1

DL Env 110 4.3×8.7 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×22
0

C6 Env 114 4.5×6.4 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×16
2

B6 128 5.0x7.2 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

x18
2

Statem 140 5.5X8.5 SEF O X O X X X O X O X O X X

ent X21
6

A5 148 5.8X8.3 SEF O X O X X X O X O X O X X

X21
0

C5 Env 162 6.4×9.0 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×22
9

B5(ISO) 176 6.9×9.8 SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O X X

×25
0

B5(JIS) 182 7.2X10. SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O O X

X25 1
7

Executi 184 7.3X10. SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O O X

ve X26 5
7

Detailed Specifications 1277

 Table 5-8 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish
4H
52-350 Off 52-300g 45° Flat 2H 3H 2H 4H
g set

16k 195 7.7X10. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X27 6
0

A4 210 8.3X11. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O O

X29 7
7

Legal 216 8.5X14 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X35
6

Letter 216 8.5X11 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O O

X27
9

Folio 216 8.5X13 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X33
0

Oficio 215. 8.5×13. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

9×3 5
42.9

C4 Env 229 9.1X12. SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×32 8
4

Tabloid 254 10 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O O X

X37 X14.7
4

B4 257 10X14. SEF O O O F/R X O O O X O O O X

X36 3
4

8K 270 10.6X1 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X39 5.4
0

Ledger 279 11X17 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X43
2

A3 297 11.7X1 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X42 6.5
0

Tabloid 304. 12×18 SEF O X O X X X X X X X X O X

8×4
Extra 57.2

SRA3 320 12.6×1 SEF O X O X X X X X X X X X X

×45 7.7
0

13"x19. 330 13x19. SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

2" x48 2
7

1278 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-8 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish
4H
52-350 Off 52-300g 45° Flat 2H 3H 2H 4H
g set

Custom W98 W3.86- - X NA O NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

-32 12.59
0
L5.5-1
L13 8
9.7-
457.
2

* “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.

Media performance

Table 5-9 Media performance

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM

Cover Content C-Fold

Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 O O O O O X X

g/m²)

Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 O O O O O X X

g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 O O X O O X X

g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 O X X X X X X

g/m2)

Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O X X X X X

Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Bond O O O O O O X

Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O O O X

Letterhead O O O O O O X

Pre-Punched O O O X X X X

Detailed Specifications 1279

 Table 5-9 Media performance (continued)

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM

Cover Content C-Fold

Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O X X X

Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X X X X

Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X X X X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 O O X X X X X

g/m²)

Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 O X X X X X X

g/m2)

Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X O X X

Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O O O X O X X

Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X X X X

Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) X O X X X X X

Transparency (138~146 gsm) O O X X X X X

Labels (120~150 gsm) X O X X X X X

Tab O O X O X X X

Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system

Learn about the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system.

Overview
Learn about the overview of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

Work flow

Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher work flow

1280 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-6 Work flow overview
6. Top output tray
14. Paper holding 5. Top exit
4. Tray diverter
13. Main output tray
3. Punch
2. Entrance
7. Main exit 1. Bridge
8. Paddle
10. Tamper
12. Ejector
9. End fence 15. Buffer
11. Stapler

16. Booklet entrance

19. Booklet presser
24. Booklet exit
23. Booklet diverter 21. Booklet stapler
17. Booklet paddle
22. Booklet fold
20. Booklet tamper
25. Booklet output tray
18. Booklet end fence

Table 5-10 work flow overview

Item Unit Description

1 Bridge unit Moves paper from the printer to the finisher.

2 Entrance unit Allows paper to move into the finisher.

3 Punch unit(optional) Holes in a specific location on paper sheet.

4 Tray diverter unit Changes the paper direction whether it is main output tray or top output tray.

5 Top exit unit Moves paper from the diverter to the top output tray.

6 Top output tray unit Stacks paper that completed its printing job.

7 Main exit unit Moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit with forward direction or to the buffer
unit with backward direction.

8 Paddle unit Pushes to the end fence to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper.

9 End fence unit Sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper.

10 Tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper.

11 Stapler unit Staples a bundle of an aligned documents.

12 Ejector unit Transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the output tray.

13 Main output tray unit Stacks paper that completed its printing job.

14 Paper holding unit Keeps paper static and controls the output tray movement.

Overview 1281
 Table 5-10 work flow overview (continued)

Item Unit Description

15 Buffer unit Maintains paper inside the unit for a while or moves it to the booklet maker.

16 Booklet entrance unit Receives the paper into the booklet maker.

17 Booklet paddle unit Pushes to the booklet end fence.

18 Booklet end fence unit Supports paper that enters from the booklet paddle unit, then moves paper to the
designated position for folding and stapling.

19 Booklet presser unit Presses paper that enters to the booklet tamper unit to prevent paper shuffled.

20 Booklet tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper to make booklet.

21 Booklet stapler unit Staples a bundle of aligned documents to make a booklet.

22 Booklet fold unit Fold a bundle of aligned documents as a booklet.

23 Booklet diverter unit Changes the paper direction to the booklet exit unit or the location to make c-fold.

24 Booklet exit unit Moves paper to the booklet output tray.

25 Booklet output tray unit Stacks the bundle of booklet.

Sensor

Figure 5-7 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1

S12
S11 S1

S10 S2

S9
S3

S8 S4

S5
S7
S6
Table 5-11 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S1 Bridge entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2070 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into the
sensor bridge entrance unit.

S2 Bridge door 0604-001393 (*) 113-2180 Photo interrupter Checks whether the bridge door is
sensor opened.

S3 Bridge exit 0604-001393 (*) 113-2071 Photo interrupter Checks whether paper comes into the
sensor bridge exit unit.

1282 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-11 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1 (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S4 Tray diverter 0604-001415 (*) 113-2020 Photo interrupter Checks whether the tray diverter
home sensor locates at the home position.

S5 Main exit cam 0604-001393 (*) 113-2000 Photo interrupter Check whether the main exit CAM
home sensor locates at the home position.

S6 Front tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2120 Photo interrupter Checks whether the front tamper
home sensor locates at the home position.

S7 End fence home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2050 Photo interrupter Checks whether the end fence locates
sensor at the home position.

S8 Paddle home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2060 Photo interrupter Checks whether the paddle locates at
sensor the home position.

S9 Rear tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2130 Photo interrupter Checks whether the rear tamper
home sensor locates at the home position.

S10 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2090 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into the
main exit unit.

S11 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2091 Photo interrupter Checks whether paper comes into the
top exit unit.

S12 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2080 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into the
entrance unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-8 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2

S35 S13
S34
S14
S33
S15

S32 S16

S31
S17
S30 S18
S29
S19
S28 S20
S21
S27
S26 S22
S23
S25
S24

Overview 1283
 Table 5-12 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S13 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2100 Paper sensor Checks whether paper exits out of the
buffer unit

S14 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2170 Paper sensor Checks whether paper is on the
ejector or not.

S15 Top output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2145 LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether the top output tray is
paper full sensor full or not.

S16 Buffer home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2210 Photo interrupter Checks whether the buffer roller and
sensor the idle roller whether attached or
detached.

S17 Front Paper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2141 Photo interrupter Checks whether the location of the
holding sensor paper holding actuator for controlling
the position of the main output tray.

S18 Front door switch JC39-02309A 113-2182 Switch Check whether the front door is open.

S19 Manual staple 0604-001415 (*) 113-2160 Photo interrupter Check whether the paper comes into
sensor the manual staple position.

S20 Main output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2140 LED IR, Photo TR Check whether the main output tray
top of stack reaches the top of stack.
sensor

S21 Stapler front 0604-001393 (*) 113-2113 Photo interrupter Makes the stapler positioned in
sensor accordance with the manual stapling
position.

S22 Paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2010 Photo interrupter Checks whether the paper holding
home sensor actuator locates at the home position.

S23 Ejector2 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2041 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector2 motor is
sensor operational.

S24 Stapler mid front 0604-001393 (*) 113-2112 Photo interrupter Make the stapler positioned at the
sensor exact stapling position.

S25 Stapler mid rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2111 Photo interrupter Make the stapler positioned at the
sensor exact stapling position.

S26 Main output tray 0604-001415 (*) 113-2144 Photo interrupter Checks whether the lower limit of the
lower limit output tray (=output tray is full).
sensor

S27 Ejector1 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2032 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector1 motor is
sensor operational.

S28 Ejector1 end 0604-001415 (*) 113-2030 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector1 locates
sensor at the end position.

S29 Ejector1 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2031 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector1 locates
sensor at the home position.

S30 Stapler rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2110 Photo interrupter Checks whether the stapler locates at
sensor the home(rear) position.

S31 Rear paper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2142 Photo interrupter Checks whether the location of the
holding sensor paper holding actuator for controlling
the position of the main output tray.

S32 Ejector2 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2040 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector2 locates
sensor at the home position.

1284 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-12 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2 (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S33 Main output tray 0604-001393 (*) 113-2143 Photo interrupter Checks whether the Main output tray
motor sensor motor is operational.

S34 Main output tray JC39-02316A 113-2190 Switch Checks whether the main output tray
top of stack reaches at the top of stack.
switch

S35 Top door switch JC39-02310A 113-2181 Switch Checks whether the top door is open.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-9 Sensor – Booklet finisher

S46
S36 S37
S45

S44 S38

S39

S43 S40

S41
S42
Table 5-13 Sensor – Booklet finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S36 Booklet entrance 0604-001415 (*) 113-3100 Photo interrupter Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the bridge entrance unit.

S37 Booklet presser 0604-001393 (*) 113-3130 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet presser
home sensor locates at the home position.

S38 Booklet tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-3080 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet tamper
home sensor locates at the home position.

S39 Booklet c-fold 0604-001393 (*) 113-3050 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet c-fold
blade home blade locates at the home position.
sensor

S40 Booklet diverter 0604-001415 (*) 113-3060 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet diverter
home sensor locates at the home position.

S41 Booklet paddle 0604-001393 (*) 113-3090 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet paddle
home sensor locates at the home position.

S42 Booklet end 0604-001393 (*) 113-3000 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet end
fence home fence locates at the home position.
sensor

Overview 1285
 Table 5-13 Sensor – Booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S43 Booklet output JC82-01039A (*) 113-2150 LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether paper goes out on
tray sensor the booklet output tray.

S44 Booklet exit JC32-00020A (*) 113-3120 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the booklet exit unit.

S45 Booklet blade 0604-001393 (*) 113-3040 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet blade
home sensor locates at the home position.

S46 Booklet tamper JC32-00020A (*) 113-3110 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the booklet tamper unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-10 Sensor – Paper path

S15 S11 S10 S4

S12
S1

S13 S3
S20

S36

S26

S43

S46

S44
S43

Motor and solenoid

1286 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-11 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher

M13 M14
M12

M11

M10 M1
SL1
M9 M2

M3
M8

M7 M4
M5
M6
Table 5-14 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

M1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Step motor Rotates the paddle and moves the
paddle pusher up and downward at
the same time.

M2 Main exit cam JC93-01155A (*) 113-2500 Step motor Rotates the main exit cam to detach
motor the exit roller from the exit idle roller.

M3 End fence motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2590 Step motor Moves front and rear end fence
depending on paper size(width) so
that paper is well arranged at the
end fence.

M4 Front tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-2630 Step motor Moves the front tamper unit.
motor

M5 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 113-2540 DC motor Moves the ejector2 and grabs paper.

M6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 113-2530 DC motor Moves the ejector1 forward and
backward

M7 Paper holding JC93-01156A (*) 113-2510 Step motor Moves paper holding actuator up
motor when paper goes out to the output
tray

M8 Stapler position JC31-00163A (*) 113-2620 Hybrid Step Moves the stapler.
motor motor

M9 Rear tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-2640 Step motor Moves the rear tamper unit.
motor

SL1 Buffer Solenoid JC33-00038A (*) 113-2670 Solenoid Holds paper not to fall out to the
booklet maker during buffering task.

M10 Buffer motor JC93-01152A (*) 113-2660 Step motor Moves paper to the buffer space or
the booklet maker.

M11 Main output tray JC31-00178B (*) 113-2610 DC motor Moves the main output tray up and
motor down.

Overview 1287
 Table 5-14 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Hybrid Step Operates the entrance roller, middle
motor roller, and top middle roller when
driving in the forward and moves
the diverter cam when driving in the
backward.

M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Hybrid Step Rotates the main exit roller and the
motor top exit roller.

M14 Bridge motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2560 Hybrid Step Rotates the bridge entrance roller,
motor the bridge middle roller and the
bridge exit roller.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-12 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher

M23 M15

M16
M22
M17
M21
M18

M19
M20 SL2 71

Table 5-15 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

M15 Booklet entrance JC93-01152A (*) 113-3500 Step motor Rotates the booklet entrance roller.
motor

M16 Booklet presser JC93-01155A (*) 113-3570 Step motor Operates the booklet presser.
motor

M17 Booklet C-fold JC93-01154A (*) 113-3590 Step motor Drives the booklet c-fold blade and
blade motor the moving guide.

M18 Booklet diverter JC93-01153A (*) 113-3560 Step motor Drives the booklet diverter
motor

M19 Booklet paddle JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Step motor Rotates the booklet paddle.
motor

M20 Booklet end JC93-01155A (*) 113-3530 Step motor Moves the booklet end fence up and
fence motor down.

1288 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-15 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

M21 Booklet Fold JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 BLDC motor Rotates the booklet fold roller, the
motor booklet c-fold roller, and the booklet
exit roller.

M22 Booklet blade JC31-00144A (*) 113-3550 BLDC motor Drives the booklet blade.
motor

M23 Booklet tamper JC93-01155A (*) 113-3540 Step motor Moves the booklet tamper unit.
motor

SL2 Booklet end JC33-00038A (*) 113-3520 Solenoid Operates the gripper of the booklet
fence solenoid end fence to grip paper that comes in
the booklet end fence.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

NOTE: The motor sensor which is mounted near the driving motor detects whether the motor is operating or
not. If a motor doesn’t work properly, an event code only for the motor will occur. On the other hand, the home
position sensor is installed for the purpose of checking the reference position or location when the specific unit
is operating.

Figure 5-13 Motor sensor in the ejector unit

Motor sensor

Motor

Figure 5-14 Home sensor in the stapler unit

Home sensor

Roller

Overview 1289
 Figure 5-15 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher

R9
R1
R2

R8
R3
R7
R4
R6 R5
Table 5-16 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description

R1 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
bridge unit.

R2 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
bridge unit.

R3 Bridge entrance JC66-04733A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit

R4 Entrance roller JC66-04722A (*) Entrance motor Moves paper from the entrance unit to the
exit unit

R5 Middle roller JC66-04724A (*) Entrance motor Moves paper from the entrance unit to the
exit unit

R6 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Buffer motor Moves paper to the booklet maker, and
makes the gap between the buffer roller
and the idle roller so that paper stays for
the buffering.

R7 Main exit roller JC66-04726A (*) Exit motor Main Moves paper to the ejector unit or the
exit cam motor buffer unit and makes the gap between the
main exit roller and the idle roller so that
paper stays for the buffering.

R8 Top middle roller JC66-04725A (*) Entrance motor Moves paper to the top output tray.

1290 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-16 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description

R9 Top exit roller JC66-04727A (*) Exit motor Moves paper to the top output tray.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-16 Roller – Booklet finisher

R10
R13

R11

R12

Table 5-17 Roller – Booklet finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description

R10 Booklet entrance JC66-04717A Booklet Moves paper from the machine to the
roller entrance motor bridge unit.

R11 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Booklet fold Presses a stack of paper to fold completely.
motor

R12 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A (*) Booklet fold In case of c-fold, presses a stack of paper to
motor fold completely.

R13 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A (*) Booklet fold Moves paper to the booklet output tray unit
motor
(*) This part is in ordering system.

PCA

Overview 1291
 Figure 5-17 PCA

P1

P3

P2

Table 5-18 PCA

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Description

P1 Manual staple PCA JC92-02789B This PCA shows the manual stapling condition and
accepts the button input for manual staple.

P2 Booklet maker PCA JC92-02789B (*) This PCA controls the booklet maker module and
consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

P3 Finisher main PCA JC92-02968A (*) This PCA controls the finisher modules and consists
of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

Not Hole punch PCA - This PCA controls the hole punch module and
shown consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Bridge unit
The Bridge Unit is the asset to transfer paper from the printer to the finisher. The bridge entrance sensor (S1)
detects paper entering the bridge unit from the printer. In the same way, the bridge exit sensor (S3) checks that
the paper leaves from the bridge unit to the finisher. The bridge motor (M14) drive the bridge entrance roller,
bridge middle roller, and bridge exit roller. It makes paper moves through the bridge unit. The jam removal door
locating at the front side of the unit helps user to remove the jammed paper.

1292 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-18 Bridge unit overview
R1
R2
M14 R3

S1

S2
S3

Figure 5-19 Bridge unit detail view

R3 R2 R1

M14
S2

S1

U1
S3
Table 5-19 Bridge unit parts information

No Part Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

U1 Bridge unit JC90-01772B (*) Moves paper from the printer to the finisher.

S2 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2180 Detects if the bridge door is open.

S1 Bridge entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2070 Checks whether paper comes into the bridge
sensor entrance unit.

S3 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2071 Checks whether paper move out of the
bridge unit.

M14 Bridge motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2560 Rotates the bridge entrance roller, the bridge
middle roller and the bridge exit roller.

R3 Bridge entrance JC66-04733A (*) Moves paper from the machine to the bridge
roller unit.

Bridge unit 1293

 Table 5-19 Bridge unit parts information (continued)

No Part Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

R2 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A (*) Moves paper from the machine to the bridge
unit.

R1 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A (*) Moves paper from the bridge unit to the
finisher entrance unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Entrance unit
Entrance unit moves paper from the bridge unit to the inside of the finisher.The Entrance sensor (S12) installed
at the right side of the unit senses that the paper is entering the unit. The Entrance motor (M12) rotates forward
to drive the entrance roller and the middle roller to move paper to the exit unit.

Figure 5-20 Entrance unit overview

M12 S12

R4
R5

Figure 5-21 Entrance unit detail view - front

R4
R5

R3
R4

1294 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-22 Entrance unit detail view - rear

M12

Figure 5-23 Entrance unit detail view - right

S12

Table 5-20 Entrance unit parts information

No Part Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S12 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2080 Detects whether paper enters at the
entrance unit.

M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Operates the entrance roller and middle
roller when driving forward.

R4 Entrance roller JC66-04722A (*) Moves paper from the entrance unit to the
exit unit.

R5 Middle roller JC66-04724A (*) Moves paper from the entrance unit to the
exit unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Punch unit (optional)

Learn about the punch unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The punch unit is a device that punches holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper. The punch unit is
positioned right after the entrance unit.

● HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory —Y1G10A

Punch unit (optional) 1295

 ● HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory — Y1G11A

● HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory — Y1G12A

NOTE: Puncher types are various depending on the country.

In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
forward, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make the holes on
the paper. When making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the backward direction and the inner gear rotates to the
left to drill two holes. The travel distance and position of the hole-punches are detected and controlled by the 3
punch position sensors.

Figure 5-24 Punch unit overview

Figure 5-25 Punch unit detail view

5 6 1 2

5 4 3
Table 5-21 Punch unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

U1 Punch unit

2-3 hole Y1G10A (*)

2-4 hole Y1G11A (*)

Swedish hole Y1G12A (*)

1 Punch scan home sensor 113-4000 Detects the home position of the
punch unit

1296 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-21 Punch unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

3 Punch scan edge sensor 113-4010 Check the paper width to make
hole on the right position of paper.
113-4011

113-4012

113-4013

2 Punch scan motor 113-4500 Transmits the force to move

the punch unit in the horizontal
direction.

4 Punch position sensor 113-4020 Detects the travel distance and

position of the hole-punches.
113-4030

113-4031

5 Punch motor sensor 113-4040 Checks whether the punch motor

is operational

6 Punch motor 113-4510 Transmits the force to make holes

on the paper
(*) This part is in system.

Punch unit operation

1. A paper enters into the punch unit, and it is aligned to drill holes.

2. The motor rotates forward or backward, then the punch rail in the punch unit moves in order to move the
punch hole makers (callout 1).

3. The punch position sensors determine the punch rail location (callout 2). It drives the punch hole makers up
and down to make holes (callout 3).

Punch unit (optional) 1297

 4

4. In some paper size, paper might be jammed in a place where punch hole maker is located. Therefore, the
punch unit moves left and right (callout 4).

Tray diverter unit

Learn about the Tray diverter unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The tray diverter unit is responsible for determining the paper feed direction so that paper can be ejected to the
main output tray or top output tray.

The entrance motor (M12) rotates this unit. When the entrance motor rotates backward, the phase of the divertor
cam (callout1) changes so that the paper path direction changes. The tray diverter home sensor (S4) checks
whether the tray diverter is located at the home position or not. (callout2).

1298 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-26 Tray diverter unit overview

M12 1

S4

Figure 5-27 Tray diverter unit detail view – front-top

Figure 5-28 Tray diverter unit detail view – rear

S4

Tray diverter unit 1299

 Table 5-22 Tray diverter unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Tray diverter JC61-07205A Selects the paper path of either

the main output tray or the top
output tray

2 Tray diverter cam JC66-04560A 113-2520 Changes the paper path

S4 Tray diverter home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2020 Checks whether home position of
sensor the tray diverter

M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) Operates the tray diverter cam
when driving in the backward
direction.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tray diverter unit operation

1. When printing or copying documents, the entrance motor operates backward so that the diverter cam
(Callout 2) can be rotate.

2. The direction of the tray diverter(callout1) is changed to the main output tray or the top output tray by the
tray diverter cam(callout2).

2
7RSRXWSXWWUD\GLUHFWLRQ 0DLQRXWSXWWUD\GLUHFWLRQ

Top exit unit

Learn about the Top exit unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The top exit unit sends paper from the tray diverter unit to the top output tray unit.

The top exit sensor(S11) detects paper entry into the top exit unit. The entrance motor(M12) drives the top
middle roller, and the exit motor(M13) transmit the force to rotate the top exit roller so that paper moves to the
top output tray unit.

1300 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-29 Top exit unit overview

M13 M12

S11

R8

R9

Figure 5-30 Top exit unit detail view – front-top

S11

R9

Table 5-23 Top exit unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S11 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2091 Checks whether paper has entered
at the top exit unit

M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Rotates the top middle roller when
driving in the forward direction.

M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Rotates the top exit roller

R8 Top middle roller JC66-04725A (*) Moves paper to the top output tray

R9 Top exit roller JC66-04727A (*) Moves paper to the top output tray
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Top output tray unit

Learn about the Top output tray unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The top output tray unit loads discharged paper from the finisher.

Top output tray unit 1301

 It has the paper pull sensor(S15) to detect whether the tray is full with paper.

Figure 5-31 Top output tray unit overview

S15

Figure 5-32 Top output tray unit detail view – front-left

S15

1
Table 5-24 Top output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Top output tray JC63-04996B Loads ejected paper

JC63-05003B (*)

S15 Top output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2145 Detects whether paper is
paper full sensor fully staked on the output
(receiver, led) tray.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Main exit unit

Learn about the Main exit unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The main exit unit delivers paper from the tray diverter unit to the ejector unit or buffer unit.

1302 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

The main exit sensor (S10) detects whether paper comes in from main exit unit. The exit motor (M13) drives the
main exit roller to send the paper to the ejector unit or buffer unit.

Figure 5-33 Main exit unit overview

M13

S5

M2

R7

S10
Figure 5-34 Main exit unit detail view – (front-rear)

M13

R7

S5
M2

Table 5-25 Main exit unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S10 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2090 Detects whether paper entered at
the main exit unit

Main exit unit 1303

 Table 5-25 Main exit unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Rotates the main exit roller

R7 Main exit roller JC66-04726A (*) Moves paper to the ejector unit or
the buffer unit

1 Main exit cam Adjusts the gap between the main

exit roller and the idle roller for the
buffering. (*Please refer to ‘buffer
unit’)

S5 Main exit cam home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2000 Detects the home position of the
sensor main exit cam

M2 Main exit cam motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-2500 Rotates the main exit cam.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Main exit unit operation

1. The exit motor(M13) drives forward so that paper will moves towards the ejector unit.

2. On the other hand, if the exit motor rotates backwards paper moves towards the buffer unit.

1304 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Paddle unit
Learn about the Paddle unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The paddle unit rotates the rubber paddles mounted on the shaft to move paper to the end fence unit, allowing
paper to be arranged well for the next job. The paddle presser is mounted behind the rubber paddles and presses
the end of paper to help paper be stacked well at the end fence unit. The Paddle home sensor (S8) checks the
home position to drive the paddles. And the paddle motor(M1) drives the paddle and paddle presser.

Figure 5-35 Paddle unit overview

Figure 5-36 Paddle unit detail view - front

Figure 5-37 Paddle unit detail view - left

Paddle unit 1305

 Table 5-26 Paddle unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Paddle JC90-01480A Moves paper into the end fence

unit

2 Paddle presser JC61-07206A Presses the end of bent paper

helps paper to be loaded well at
the end fence unit

S8 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2060 Detect the home position of the
paddle

M1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2600 Rotates the paddle, and moves the
paddle presser up and downward
at the same time
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paddle unit operation

1. A paper falls downward by exit unit.

2. The paddles rotate to make a paper moves into the end fence unit. (callout 1)

3. The paddle presser presses the end of a paper so as not to be scattered. (callout 2).

End fence unit

Learn about the End fence unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The paddle unit moves paper to the end fence unit. The end fence unit sets the standard position of the paper to
be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper.

End fence motor(M3) operates the two end fences and adjust width of them in order to stack paper correctly. The
end fence home sensor(S7) detects the home position of the end fence.

1306 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-38 End fence unit overview

Figure 5-39 End fence unit detail view – front

Figure 5-40 End fence unit detail view - left

Table 5-27 End fence unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 End fence Aligns top and bottom side of

paper.

S7 End fence home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2050 Detects the home position of the
end fence

End fence unit 1307

 Table 5-27 End fence unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M3 End fence motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2590 Moves front and rear end fence
depending on paper size(width) so
that paper arranged well at the
end fence
(*) This part is in ordering system.

End fence unit operation

1. The end fence motor(M3) moves the front and rear end fences in the arrow direction (callout 1) depending on
paper width.

2. Paper goes into the end fence unit by the paddle unit. (callout 2)

3. At the same time the end fence unit aligns paper to the direction of yellow line. (callout 3)

Tamper unit
Learn about the Tamper unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper. When a certain amount of paper is
collected after printing, the tamper unit hits the left and right ends of the paper to align the paper correctly.

Each tamper has a motor on the back side that delivers driving force to move. The tamper home sensors are
mounted on the back side of the unit to check the home position of the tamper unit.

1308 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-41 Tamper unit overview

2 S9

M4

S6 1

Figure 5-42 Tamper unit detail view - left

Figure 5-43 Tamper unit detail view - left-right

M9
2 1

S9

S6 M4

Tamper unit 1309

 Table 5-28 tamper unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00901A (*) Aligns left and right side of paper.

S6 Front tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2120 Detects the home position of the
sensor tamper unit.

M4 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2630 Moves the front tamper unit.

2 Rear tamper JC82-00898A (*) Aligns left and right side of paper.

S9 Rear tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2130 Detects the home position of the
sensor tamper unit.

M9 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2640 Moves the front tamper unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tamper unit operation

1. A stack of paper is arranged at the end fence unit.

2. The left and right tampers arrange them.

3. In case of offset printing, the tamper unit arranges the next bundle to be shifted. (callout 3)

1310 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Stapler unit
Learn about the Stapler unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

Stapler unitis a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents. Documents are
collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then stapler assembly staples the
bundle. There are 6 options to make a bundle.

Figure 5-44 Stapling options

The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor(M8) installed inside. The one home sensor (rear sensor, S30) and
two position sensors (mid-front,S24 and mid-rear sensor,S25) are mounted so that the stapler can be positioned
in the exact stapling position whether it is stapled on the left, the right, or at the center of the document. Stapling
is done by the motor inside the stapler assembly.

In addition, manual staple feature is available on the front-upper side of the finisher. The manual staple
sensor(S19) detects whether a stack of paper comes into the manual staple location or not. The front sensor
(stapler front sensor, S21) makes the stapler moves at the manual staple location.

Stapler unit 1311

 Figure 5-45 Stapler unit overview

Figure 5-46 Stapler unit detail view - front

Figure 5-47 Stapler unit detail view

M8

S21

S30 S25 S24

Table 5-29 Stapler unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Stapler unit JC82-00894A (*) Staples a bundle of paper

2 Staple cartridge JC81-09882B (*) 113-2115 Staple cartridge

113-2116

S21 Stapler front sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2113 Detect the stapler at the manual
stapling position

S24 Stapler mid-front sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2112 Detect the stapler location

1312 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-29 Stapler unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S25 Stapler mid-rear sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2111 Detect the stapler location

S30 Stapler rear sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2110 Detect the home position of the
stapler

S19 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2160 Detect paper when manual
stapling

M8 Stapler position motor JC31-00163A (*) 113-2620 Moves the stapler

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Stapler unit operation

1. The stapler position motor drives the stapler assembly to direction 1.

2. The stapler assembly moves through the rail using three stapler position sensors (callout2) and staples a
stack of paper.

3. In case of staple cartridge replacement, the stapler moves to direction 3.

4. For manual stapling, the stapler moves in direction 4.

Stapler unit 1313

 Ejector unit
Learn about the ejector unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The ejector unit ejects a bundle of paper out to the main output tray. The ejector unit consists of ejector1 and
ejector2.

The ejector1 moves a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit. During this process, the
ejector1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector1 unit. And ejector1 motor sensor checks the ejector1
motor operation. And the ejector1 home sensor detects the home position of the ejector1. The ejector1 end
sensor detects the end position of the ejector1.

When the paper arrives at the ejector2 unit, the ejector2 grabs a stack of paper and ejects it onto the main output
tray. The ejector2 motor is responsible for this process, and the ejector2 motor sensor helps it to be controlled
correctly. In addition, the ejector2 home sensor checks the location of the ejector2.

Figure 5-48 Ejector unit overview

1
2

M5

S23
S32
M6

S27

1314 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-49 Ejector unit detail view - left

S32
S23

S27 M6 M5
Table 5-30 Ejector unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

Ejector unit JC90-01409A (*)

S14 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2170 Detects whether paper is

on the ejector or not.

1 Ejector1 Moves the stack of paper

from the end fence to the
ejector2

S29 Ejector1 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2031 Detects the home

sensor position of the ejector1

S28 Ejector1 end 0604-001415 (*) 113-2030 Detects the end position
sensor of the ejector1

S27 Ejector1 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2032 Detects whether the

sensor Ejector1 motor rotates

M6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 113-2530 Moves the ejector1

forward and backward

2 Ejector2 Moves paper from the

ejector1 to the main
output tray

S32 Ejector2 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2040 Detects the home

sensor position of the ejector2

S23 Ejector2 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2041 Detects the ejector2

sensor motor rotation

Ejector unit 1315

 Table 5-30 Ejector unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M5 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 113-2540 Moves the ejector2 and

grabs paper
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Ejector unit operation

1. The ejector1(callout1) pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector2 unit(callout2).

S28
1

S29 S14

S27
M6

2. The ejector2(callout2) picks up paper, then moves forward to the main output tray direction.

S23
S32

M5

1316 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Main output tray unit
Learn about the Main output tray unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

Printouts are stacked on the main output tray (C7). The main output tray moves up and down along the rails
inside the finisher, and the main output tray motor (M11) controls those movements according to the signals of
the front & rear paper holding sensor. Main output tray motor sensor (S33) checks whether the main output tray
motor rotates properly.

When main output tray hits the lower limit sensor of the main output tray (S26), the machine detects that paper
tray is full. The main output tray top of stack sensor(S20) detects that the main output tray is on the top.

Figure 5-50 Main output tray unit overview

M11
S34
S33
S20

C7

S26

Main output tray unit 1317

 Figure 5-51 Main output tray unit detail view - left

S20

C7

S26

Figure 5-52 Main output tray unit detail view - rear

S33

M11

Table 5-31 Main output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

C7 Main output tray JC63-05002B Stacking plate for ejected paper

S20 Main output tray top of JC82-01039A (*) 113-2140 Checks the upper limit of main
stack sensor (receiver, output tray
led)

S6 Main output tray lower 0604-001415 (*) 113-2144 Detects the lowest position of the
limit sensor output tray

1318 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-31 Main output tray unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S33 Main output tray motor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2143 Detects whether the main output
sensor tray motor rotates

M11 Main output tray motor JC31-00178B (*) 113-2610 Moves the main output tray up and
down
JC90-01415B (*)

S34 Main output tray top of JC39-02316A 113-2190 Checks the upper limit of main
stack switch output tray so that detects
abnormal movement of output
tray
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paper holding unit

Learn about the Paper holding unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The paper holding unit holds printouts on the main output tray. It has a sensor that detects the height of stacked
paper so that the output tray moves up and down to stack paper in a stable manner.

The paper holding motor(M7) lifts the paper holding actuator when printouts come out to the main output tray.
The paper holding home sensor(S22) detects the location of paper holding actuator at the home position. The
front & rear paper holding sensor (S17, S31) checks the volume of printouts on the main output tray and makes
the main output tray move downward

Figure 5-53 Paper holding unit overview

S31
S17

M7 S22

Paper holding unit 1319

 Figure 5-54 Paper holding unit detail view - left
1

S17 S31

S22

Figure 5-55 Paper holding unit detail view - left

M7

Table 5-32 paper holding unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Paper holding actuator Control the height of the main

output tray and hold printouts so
as not to be scattered

S17 Front paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2141 Detects stacked paper position
sensor

S31 Rear paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2142 Detects stacked paper position
sensor

S22 Paper holding home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2010 Detects the home position of
sensor paper holding actuator

M7 Paper holding motor JC90-01414A (*) 113-2510 Lift paper holding actuator up
when printouts delivered to the
main output tray

2 Left upper cover JC90-01475B

(*) This part is in ordering system.

paper holding unit operation

1320 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. When printouts are delivered to the main output tray, a paper holding motor moves paper holding actuator
upward to create a paper path to prevent jam (callout1).

2. When printouts are stacked on top of the main output tray, the paper holding actuator goes down to hold
them(callout2).

3. As paper stacks up on the main output tray, the paper holding actuator is lifted by papers. The front & rear
paper holding sensors make the main output tray moves downward to store more printouts. (callout3)

4. As printouts are stacked on the main output tray, the tray goes down. When it reaches at the end of its
moving range (callout 4), the main output tray touches the lower limit sensor. The sensor detects that the
main output tray is full of printouts.

Paper holding unit 1321

 Buffer unit
Learn about the diverter unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The buffer unit keeps paper inside the unit or moves them to the booklet maker.

The buffer diverter creates a paper path so that paper can move to the buffer unit, and the buffer sensor detects
whether paper moved out from the buffer unit. The buffer motor controls buffer roller, and buffer home sensors
checks the location of buffer rollers. The buffer solenoid holds papers so that they do not fall into the booklet
maker while buffering.

NOTE: buffering: It is to maintain print speed when users print multiple copies continuously.

The 1st page of a print job stays in the buffer unit for a moment while the previous job is being ejected. After the
previous print job was ejected, the 1st and 2nd page of the job move to the ejector unit together.

Figure 5-56 Buffer unit overview

SL1

M10

R6

S13

S16

1322 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-57 Buffer unit detail view - front

S16

R6

Figure 5-58 Buffer unit detail view - rear

M10

Figure 5-59 Buffer unitdetail view - top

SL1

Table 5-33 Buffer unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Buffer diverter JC61-07204A Makes the way to the buffer space

S13 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2100 Detects whether paper has moved
out from the buffer unit

S16 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2210 Detects the home position of the
buffer roller.

Buffer unit 1323

 Table 5-33 Buffer unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M10 Buffer motor JC93-01152A (*) 113-2660 Moves paper to the buffer space or
the booklet maker

SL1 Buffer solenoid JC33-00038A (*) 113-2670 Holds paper to prevent them from
falling out to the booklet maker
during buffering

R6 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Moves paper to the booklet maker

or makes the gap so that paper
stays in this space.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Buffer unit operation

1. When the buffer motor rotates backward to move the cam, the buffer roller(R6) can have gap and then paper
can stay inside the buffer unit

a. When the exit motor rotates backward to drive the main exit roller(R7), paper moves to the buffer unit
through the buffer diverter(callout1).

b. The main exit cam motor moves the main exit cam so that the main exit roller(R7) is separated with the
idle roller to have a gap, and then paper can stay in this place for a while.

c. When the next sheet comes to the main exit unit, the main exit motor turns the man exit cam so that
the main exit roller is attached to the idle roller.

1324 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 d. he exit motor rotates forward and operates the main exit roller. It makes 2 paper moves to the ejector
together.

2. In case of booklet job, the buffer unit moves paper to the booklet maker.

a. The buffer motor rotates, the buffer roller(R6) is attached to the idle roller.

b. When paper arrives at the main exit unit, the exit motor rotates backward and moves the main exit
roller(R7) so that paper moves to the buffer unit through the buffer diverter.

c. The buffer motor rotates the buffer roller to move paper to the booklet maker.

Buffer unit 1325

 Booklet entrance unit
Learn about the Booklet entrance unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet entrance unit receives paper into the booklet maker. The entrance sensor(S36) detects whether the
paper enters the entrance unit. The entrance motor(M15) drives the booklet entrance roller(R10) to move the
paper.

Figure 5-60 Booklet entrance unit overview

1326 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-61 Booklet entrance unit detail view

Table 5-34 Entrance unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S36 Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-3100 Detects whether paper has come
into the booklet entrance unit

M15 Booklet entrance motor JC93-01152A (*) 113-3500 Drives the booklet entrance roller

R10 Booklet entrance roller JC66-04717A Moves paper into the booklet
maker
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet paddle unit

Learn about the Booklet paddle unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet paddle unit pushes paper to the booklet end fence by rotating the rubber paddles. The booklet
paddle motor (M19) rotates two booklet paddles, and the booklet paddle home sensor(S41) connected to the
lower booklet paddle checks the home position of the booklet paddle.

Booklet paddle unit 1327

 Figure 5-62 Booklet paddle unit overview

Figure 5-63 Booklet paddle unit detail view

Table 5-35 booklet paddle unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A Moves paper to the booklet end

fence unit

1 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A Moves paper to the booklet end

fence unit

JC61-07225A (*)

JC66-04719A (*)

1328 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-35 booklet paddle unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S41 Booklet paddle home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2590 Check the home position of the
sensor booklet paddle

M19 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Drives two booklet paddles
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet end fence unit

Learn about the Booklet end fence unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet end fence unit supports paper that enters from the booklet paddle unit, then moves paper to the
designated position for folding and stapling. The Booklet end fence motor (M20) moves the booklet end fence
up and down. The booklet end fence home sensor (S42) checks the home position of the booklet end fence. The
booklet end fence solenoid (SL2) drives the clamp to hold paper that comes into the booklet end fence.

Figure 5-64 Booklet end fence unit overview

Figure 5-65 Booklet end fence unit detail view - left

Booklet end fence unit 1329

 Figure 5-66 Booklet end fence unit detail view - right

Table 5-36 booklet end fence unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet end fence JC90-01432A Supports paper, then moves it to

the designated location to fold or
staple

S42 Booklet end fence home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3000 Checks the home position of the
sensor booklet end fence

M18 Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-3530 Moves the booklet end fence up
and down

Sl2 Booklet end fence JC33-00038A (*) 113-3520 drives the clamp to hold paper that
solenoid comes into the booklet end fence
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet end fence unit operation

1. The booklet end fence is located at the home position (callout1). When the booklet maker starts its job, the
end fence goes to the direction 2.

2. The booklet end fence unit supports paper comes from the booklet paddle unit and holds paper so as not to
be scattered(callout3). Then it moves to the certain location to fold or staple it (callout 4).

1330 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet presser unit
Learn about the Booklet presser unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet presser unit sort print pages that enter to the booklet maker in order.The Booklet presser motor
(M16) moves the booklet presser, and the booklet presser home sensor (S37) checks whether the booklet
presser is at the home position.

Figure 5-67 Booklet presser unit overview

Booklet presser unit 1331

 Figure 5-68 Booklet presser unit detail view

Table 5-37 Booklet presser unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet presser JC61-07237A Accumulates paper from the

entrance unit not to be shuffled

S37 Booklet presser home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3130 Checks the home position of the
sensor booklet presser

M16 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-3570 Drives the booklet presser
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet presser unit operation

1. Paper comes into the booklet presser unit (callout1). At this time the presser is located on the left side of the
finisher (callout 2).

2. After paper exits the entrance roller, the booklet presser hits the end of paper. (callout 3).

1332 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. When a next sheet arrives at the unit, it will fall on the left side of the previous sheet pushed by the booklet
presser (callout 4).

Booklet tamper unit

Learn about the Booklet tamper unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet tamper unit aligns the left and right side of documents for stapling or folding.

The booklet tamper motor(M23) adjusts the booklet tampers’ width according to paper size. The booklet tamper
home sensor(S38) checks the home position of the booklet tamper.

Booklet tamper unit 1333

 Figure 5-69 Booklet tamper unit overview

Figure 5-70 Booklet tamper unit detail view

Table 5-38 Booklet tamper unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet tamper JC90-01431A Aligns documents for stapling or

folding.

1334 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-38 Booklet tamper unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S38 Booklet tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3080 Checks the home position of the
sensor booklet tamper

M23 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-3540 Drives the booklet tamper

S46 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-3110

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet tamper unit operation

▲ When a certain amount of paper is collected, the booklet tamper unit hits the left and right sides of the paper
to align the paper correctly.

Booklet stapler unit

Learn about the Booklet stapler unit of the booklet finisher.

Booklet stapler unitis a device installed inside the booklet maker that staples a bundle of aligned documents as a
booklet.

There is only 1 option to make a bundle. If the user selects the option, this unit staples at the two location in the
middle of stacks.

Figure 5-71 Booklet staple option

Booklet stapler unit 1335

 Figure 5-72 Booklet stapler unit overview

Figure 5-73 Booklet stapler unit detail view

Table 5-39 Booklet stapler unitparts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet stapler JC81-08274B

2 Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-09881B (*) 113-3020

113-3030
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet stapler unit operation

1. When a stack of sheets is collected in booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout2) changes its
location to be stapled.

2. The booklet stapler(callout1) staples at the middle of stacks.

1336 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet fold unit
Learn about the Booklet fold unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet fold unit is a device installed inside the booklet maker that folds a bundle of aligned documents as a
This unit consists of 2 types of blades: blade and c-fold blade. So, it creates two types of output.

Figure 5-74 Fold options

The booklet blade motor (M22) drives the booklet blades and lightly folds the stack of paper. The folded paper
passes through the booklet fold rollers to be fully folded. The booklet blade home sensor (S45) checks the home
position of the booklet blade, and the booklet fold motor (M21) drives the rollers that enable folding.

In case of c-fold, the booklet c-fold blade motor(M17) drives the booklet c-fold blade and lightly folds the stack of
paper once more. The folded paper passes through the booklet c-fold roller to be fully folded. The booklet c-fold
blade home sensor(S39) checks the home position of the c-fold blade.

Booklet fold unit 1337

 Figure 5-75 Booklet fold unit overview – right-rear

Figure 5-76 Booklet fold unit overview – left-front

1338 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-77 Booklet fold unit detail view - right

Figure 5-78 Booklet fold unit detail view – left

Figure 5-79 Booklet fold unit detail view – left-front

Booklet fold unit 1339

 Table 5-40 Booklet fold unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet blade JC93-01163A Pushes a stack of paper to fold.

S45 Booklet blade home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3040 Checks the home position of the
sensor booklet blade.

M22 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3550 Drives the booklet blade

M21 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 Drives the booklet roller and c-fold
blade

R11 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Presses a stack of paper to be fully

folded

2 Booklet c-fold blade JC61-07366A Pushes a stack of paper to fold for

the c-fold task

S39 Booklet c-fold blade 0604-001393 (*) 113-3050 Checks the home position of the
home sensor booklet c-fold blade

M17 Booklet c-fold blade JC93-01154A (*) 113-3590 Drives the booklet c-fold blade
motor

R12 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A (*) In case of c-fold, presses a stack of
paper to fold completely.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet fold unit operation

1. In case of v-fold.

a. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout1) moves to a
designated location.

b. The booklet blade motor(M22) drives the booklet blade(callout2) to push the center of paper.

c. Paper enters between the booklet fold rollers(R11) by the booklet blade and it is completely folded
between the rollers.

d. The folded paper stack is discharged to the booklet output tray via the booklet exit roller(R13).

1340 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. In case of c-fold

a. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout1) is moved
to a designated location.

b. The booklet blade motor(M22) drives the booklet blade(callout2) to push one-third of paper.

c. he paper enters between the booklet fold rollers(R11) by the booklet blade and it is completely folded
between the rollers.

d. The folded sheets move to s location where they will be c-folded by a booklet diverter.

e. The booklet c-fold blade motor(M17) drives the booklet c-fold blade(callout3), pokes two-thirds of
paper.

f. Paper enters between the booklet c-fold roller(R12) and the booklet fold roller by the booklet c-fold
blade and it is completely folded between the rollers.

Booklet diverter unit

Learn about the Booklet diverter unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet diverter unit determines a paper path to allow the stack of folded paper to exit to the booklet output
tray during the v-fold. In case of c-fold, it makes another paper path so folded sheets can move to a location
that can be c-folded. The booklet diverter motor(M18) drives the booklet diverter, and the booklet diverter home
sensor(S40) checks whether the booklet diverter is at the home position

Booklet diverter unit 1341

 Figure 5-80 Booklet diverter unit overview

M18

S40

Figure 5-81 Booklet diverter unit detail view – left-front

M18

S40

1342 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-41 Booklet diverter unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A Determines the paper path for

either the booklet exit unit or the
location for c-fold

S40 Booklet diverter home 0604-001415 (*) 113-3060 Checks the home position of the
sensor booklet diverter

M18 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A (*) 113-3560 Drives the booklet diverter
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet diverter unit operation

1. In case of v-fold, the booklet diverter(callout1) determines the paper path so that the folded sheets exit to
the booklet exit unit and into the booklet output tray.

2. On the other hand, in c-fold, it makes another paper path to fold it by c-fold blade(callout2).

Booklet exit unit

Learn about the Booklet exit unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet exit unit ejects a stack of v-fold paper to the booklet output tray unit. The booklet exit sensor(S44)
detects paper entry into the booklet exit unit, and the booklet fold motor(M19) drives the booklet exit roller(R4)
to discharge paper.

Booklet exit unit 1343

 Figure 5-82 Booklet exit unit overview – front-right

Figure 5-83 Booklet exit unit detail view

Table 5-42 Booklet exit unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S44 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-3120 Check whether paper has come
into the booklet unit

M21 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 Drives the booklet exit roller

R13 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A (*) Moves paper to the booklet output
tray unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet output tray unit

Learn about the Booklet output tray unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet output tray unit is the place where the ejected paper is stacked. The booklet output tray sensor(S43)
detects whether paper is on the booklet output tray or not.

1344 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-84 Booklet output tray unit overview

Figure 5-85 Booklet output tray unit detail view

Table 5-43 Booklet output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B (*) Stores paper stacks from the
booklet exit unit
JC63-04978B (*)

Booklet output tray unit 1345

 Table 5-43 Booklet output tray unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S43 Booklet output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2150 Detects whether paper is on the
sensor booklet output tray.pa
(*) This part is in ordering system.

How to print large number of booklets

Y1G07A Booklet finisher is support available to print a large number of booklets.

1. Remove the booklet output tray (Callout 1).

2. Install the booklet sub tray at the booklet output (Callout 2).

NOTE:

● The booklet sub tray is included in the Booklet finisher product box. If a user misses the part, order and
use the new part.

● Booklet sub tray part number : JC61-07088A

1346 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Install a box to store printouts(Callout 3).

PCA connection information

Learn about the PCA connection information.

Figure 5-86 Stapler / Stacker finisher system - PCA connection information

Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor, Switch Diagnostics Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics

CN1 MainPCA
interface

PCA connection information 1347

 Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor, Switch Diagnostics Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics

CN2 Front door switch(S35) 113-2181

CN3 Top door switch(S18) 113-2182

CN4 Entrance 113-2570 Buffer sensor(S13) 113-2100

motor(M12)

Entrance sensor(S12) 113-2080

Tray diverter home 113-2020

sensor(S4)

Buffer home sensor(S16) 113-2210

Top exit sensor(S11) 113-2091

Main exit sensor(S10) 113-2090

CN5 Rear tamper 113-2640 Front tamper home 113-2120 Manual staple
motor(M9) sensor(S6) PCA(P3)

Buffer 113-2660 Paddle home sensor(S8) 113-2060

motor(M10)

Paddle 113-2600 Top output tray paper full 113-2145

motor(M1) sensor(S15)

End fence 113-2590 Rear tamper home 113-2130

motor(M3) sensor(S9)

CN6 Bridge 113-2560 Bridge entrance 113-2070

motor(M14) sensor(S1)

Bridge door sensor(S2) 113-2180

Bridge exit sensor(S3) 113-2143

CN7 Punch unit

CN8 Exit motor(M13) 113-2580 Main output tray motor 113-2143

sensor(S33)

Main output tray 113-2610 Top output tray paper full 113-2145
motor(M11) sensor(S15)

CN9 Main output tray top of 113-2190

stack switch(S34)

CN10 Staple clinch Staple home sensor

motor

Stapler position 113-2620 Staple ready sensor

motor (M8)

Staple low sensor

Stapler rear sensor(S30) 113-2110

Stapler mid front 113-2112

sensor(S24)

Stapler mid rear 113-2111

sensor(S25)

1348 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor, Switch Diagnostics Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics

CN11 Ejector2 113-2540 Ejector2 motor 113-2041

motor(M5) sensor(S23)

Ejector1 113-2530 Ejector1 motor 113-2032

motor(M6) sensor(S27)

Ejector2 home 113-2040

sensor(S32)

Ejector sensor(S14) 113-2170

Ejector1 end sensor(S28) 113-2030

Ejector1 home 113-2031

sensor(S29)

CN12 Front tamper 113-2630 Manual staple 113-2160

motor(M4) sensor(S19)

End fence home 113-2050

sensor(S7)

Stapler front sensor(S21) 113-2113

CN13 Paper holding 113-2510 Booklet output tray 113-2150

motor(M7) sensor(S43)

CN14 Main output top of stack 113-2140

sensor(S20)

Rear paper holding 113-2142

sensor(S31)

Front paper holding 113-2141

sensor(S17)

Paper holding home 113-2010

sensor(S22)

Main output top of stack 113-2140

sensor(S20)

CN15 Booklet
interface

CN16 Log

CN17 Main exit cam 113-2500 Main exit cam home 113-2000
motor(M2) sensor(S5)

Buffer 113-2670
solenoid(SL1)

PCA connection information 1349

 Figure 5-87 Booklet finisher system - PCA connection information

Table 5-45 Booklet finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor Diagnostics Switch, Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics

CN1 Stapler/
Stacker
interface

CN4 Booklet staple motor Booklet entrance 113-3100

sensor(S36)

Booklet staple low

sensor

Booklet staple home

sensor

CN5 Booklet presser 113-2580 Booklet presser home 113-3130

motor(M16) sensor(S37)

Booklet entrance 113-2100

motor(S13)

CN6 Booklet tamper 113-3540 Booklet blade home 113-3040

motor(M23) sensor(S45)

Booklet tamper home 113-3080

sensor(S38)

Booklet tamper 113-3110

sensor(S46)

CN7 Booklet paddle 113-3580 Booklet paddle home 113-3090

motor(M19) sensor(S41)

Booklet diverter 113-3560 Booklet diverter home 113-3060

motor(M18) sensor(S40)

CN8 Booklet c-fold blade 113-3590 Booklet exit 113-3120

motor(M17) sensor(S44)

Booklet c-fold blade 113-3050

home sensor(S39)

CN9 Booklet end fence 113-3530 Booklet end fence 113-3000 Booklet end fence
motor(M20) home sensor(S42) solenoid(SL2)

1350 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-45 Booklet finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor Diagnostics Switch, Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics

CN10 Booklet fold 113-3510 113-3520

motor(M21)

Booklet blade 113-3550

motor(M22)

Service approach
Learn about the service approach of the inner finisher.

CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach under
the weight of the product.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when assembling and disassembling

● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage, and
current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the machine, circuit
overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause the
printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This printer
contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short circuit or
electric shock.

● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is disassembled, dust
might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts inside
the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to overheating
and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCAs

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

Service approach 1351

 – Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when handling
insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or lamps,
as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the correct
screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in their original
positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when releasing
them. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

Precautions when handling PCA

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA. Service
personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when handling
insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or lamps,
as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the correct
screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in their original
positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.

1352 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Releasing plastic latches
Learn about releasing plastic latches.

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them carefully. To
remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

Before performing service

Learn what to do before performing service.

● Remove all paper from the product.

● Turn off the power using the power button.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the toner cartridges.

● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.

ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an
ESD-sensitive assembly.

Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

After performing service

Learn what to do after performing service.

● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

Releasing plastic latches 1353

 ● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.

1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print quality
defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 5-46 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your computer, enter
the printer IP address or host name in the address/URL field. The
EWS contains a link to the HP SureSupply web site, which provides
options for purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part is
orderable.

1354 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and
booklet finishers)
Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and booklet finishers)

NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-
protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to
provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by
placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)

Learn about parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)

NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-
protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to
provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by
placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and booklet finishers) 1355
 Cover & hanress

Cover & hanress

Parts diagram and parts list for the cover and hanress.

Figure 5-88 cover

2 21

18

12

17
6

19 16

7 13
5
13
9 14
20 22

8 24
3 14
23
15-1

15-2
Table 5-47 cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Finisher mount bracket JC90-01442A 1 (*)

3 Caster cover JC63-04985B 1 (*)

4 Front cover JC63-04986B 1 (*)

5 Front lower cover JC63-04987B 1 (*)

6 Rear cover JC63-04988B 1 (*)

1356 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-47 cover (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

7 Top output tray upper JC63-04996B 1 (*)

8 Main output tray JC63-05002B 1 (*)

9 Top output tray lower JC63-05003B 1 (*)

12 Bridge unit JC90-01772B 1 (*)

13 Booklet maker JC82-00905A 1 (*)

14 Left lower cover (Stacker-stapler) JC90-01771B 1 (*)

14 Left lower cover (Booklet) JC90-01417B 1 (*)

15-1 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B 1 (*)

15-2 Booklet output tray cover JC63-04978B 1 (*)

16 Front door JC90-01444B 1 (*)

17 Top door JC90-01445B 1 (*)

18 Top cover JC90-01446B 1 (*)

19 Left upper cover JC90-01475B 1 (*)

20 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B 1 (*)

21 Right upper cover JC90-01448B 1 (*)

22 Hinge JC66-04767A 1 (*)

23 Caster JC61-07452A 4 (*)

24 Caster fix nut JC61-07444A 4 (*)

Table 5-48 harness

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

Not shown Harness, finisher to copier PWR JC39-02308A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher to copier PWR JC39-02308A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher rear upper JC39-02312A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher front upper JC39-02313A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher punch relay JC39-02314A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher staple relay JC39-02315A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher eject relay JC39-02317A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher front lower JC39-02318A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher stack relay JC39-02319A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3k finisher exit path JC39-02322A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K Finisher Bridge Sub JC39-02327A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K Finisher Bridge Pa JC39-02328A 1 (*)

Not shown Stack full harness JC39-02331A 1 (*)

Cover & hanress 1357

 (*) This part is in ordering system.

1358 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the front door, top door, top cover, right upper cover.

Figure 5-89 Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover

16
17

16-1

18 21
18-1
18-2
18-3

18-4

Table 5-49 Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

16 Front door JC90-01444B 1 (*)

16-1 Cover link JC63-05004A 1 (*)

17 Top door JC90-01445B 1 (*)

18 Top cover JC90-01446B 1 (*)

18-1 Manual staple PCA JC92-02789B 1 (*)

18-2 Magnet JC81-08263A 1 (*)

18-3 Manual staple button LED JC64-00996A 1 (*)

18-4 Manual staple button JC64-00995A 1 (*)

21 Right upper cover JC90-01448B 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover 1359
 Bridge unit

Upper bridge
Parts diagram and parts list for the bridge unit, upper bridge.

Figure 5-90 Bridge unit, Upper bridge

2-2
2-1

3
2-3

Table 5-50 Bridge unit, Upper bridge

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Bridge unit JC90-01772B 1 (*)

2 Upper bridge unit JC90-01406B 1

2-1 Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

2-2 Spring JC61-07431A 4 (*)

2-3 Spring JC61-07430A 2 (*)

3 Lower bridge unit JC90-01401B 1

1360 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Upper bridge 1361

 Lower bridge
Parts diagram and parts list for the bridge unit, lower bridge.

Figure 5-91 Bridge unit, Lower bridge

3-2

3-1

3-3

3-4 3-6
3 3-5

3-7

Table 5-51 Bridge unit, Lower bridge

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

3 Lower bridge unit JC90-01401B 1

3-1 Bridge entrance roller JC66-04733A 1

3-2 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A 1 (*)

3-3 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A 4 (*)

3-4 Bridge exit actuator JC66-04569A 2 (*)

3-5 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 1

3-6 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

3-7 Bridge motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)

1362 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Lower bridge 1363

 Entrance unit

Entrance unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the entrance unit.

Figure 5-92 Entrance unit

4

7
9
5

10

3
1

11
6

Table 5-52 Entrance unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Entrance unit JC90-01449A 1 (*)

2 Entrance roller JC66-04722A 1 (*)

3 Middle roller JC66-04724A 1 (*)

4 Entrance motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)

5 Gear JC66-04656A 3

1364 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-52 Entrance unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

6 Gear JC66-04546A 1

7 Belt 6602-003646 1

8 Belt 6602-003647 1 (*)

9 Belt 6602-003645 1 (*)

10 Bushing 6601-001478 2 (*)

11 Bushing 6601-002584 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Entrance unit 1365

 Entrance unit, Entrance motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the entrance unit, entrance motor.

Figure 5-93 Entrance unit, Entrance motor

4 4-1
1

1-1
1-2

Table 5-53 Entrance unit, Entrance motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Entrance unit JC90-01449A 1 (*)

1-1 Spring JC61-07408A 2 (*)

1-2 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

4 Entrance motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)

4-1 Entrance motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1366 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Tray diverter unit

Tray diverter unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the tray diverter unit.

Figure 5-94 Tray diverter unit

6

8
1

4
3 9

5
2

Table 5-54 Tray diverter unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A 1 (*)

2 Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

Tray diverter unit 1367

 Table 5-54 Tray diverter unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

3 Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A 1 (*)

4 Bushing JC61-00423A 1 (*)

5 Belt 6602-003639 1 (*)

6 Top door switch JC39-02310A 1 (*)

7 Frame mount JC61-06663A 1 (*)

8 Frame mount side bracket JC90-01442A 1 (*)

9 Clutch JC90-01474A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1368 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM
Parts diagram and parts list for the tray jam cover, tray diverter CAM.

Figure 5-95 Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM

1-6

1-4
1-5
1-1

1
1-7

1-2
1-3

Table 5-55 Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A 1 (*)

1-1 Seal JC62-01328A 1 (*)

1-2 Spring JC61-07417A 1 (*)

1-3 Spring JC61-07415A 1 (*)

1-4 Spring JC61-07410A 1 (*)

1-5 Spring JC61-07409A 1 (*)

1-6 Tray diverter JC61-07205A 1 (*)

1-7 Tray jam cover JC61-07196A 1 (*)

3 Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A 1 (*)

3-1 Pin JC70-40360A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM 1369

 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit

Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the top output tray unit, top exit unit, main exit unit.

Figure 5-96 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
1

6 3
4
13

8
12
5

9
14
12
10 7

11

Table 5-56 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Top output tray JC63-04995B 1 (*)

2 Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A 1 (*)

3 Top exit roller JC66-04727A 1 (*)

4 Top middle roller JC66-04725A 1 (*)

5 Main output tray motor assembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)

1370 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-56 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

6 Exit motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)

7 Main exit CAM motor assembly JC90-01453A 1 (*)

8 Gear JC66-04657A 2

9 Clutch JC90-01404A 1 (*)

10 Gear JC66-04602A 1 (*)

11 Front door switch JC39-02310A 1 (*)

12 Top output tray paper full sensor JC82-01039A 1 (*)

13 Top-brush exit JC67-00818A 1 (*)

14 Belt 6602-003649 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit 1371
 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the top lower cover, exit motor, main exit CAM motor.

Figure 5-97 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor
2-4

2-2
2-1

2-3

6
6-1 7

7-1

7-2

Table 5-57 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A 1 (*)

2-1 Top exit actuator JC66-04525A 1 (*)

2-2 Spring JC61-07411A 1 (*)

2-3 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

2-4 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

6 Exit motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)

6-1 Exit motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)

7 Main exit CAM motor assembly JC90-01453A 1 (*)

1372 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-57 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

7-1 Main exit CAM motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)

7-2 Main exit CAM home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor 1373
 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit

Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the main exit unit, paddle unit, end fence unit.

Figure 5-98 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit
23

2 1
3
4
18

19

16

17
14
11

15
5
12 13
6

7
8
20

10 9

22
21
Table 5-58 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Main exit CAM guide JC90-01451A 1 (*)

2 Main exit CAM JC66-04561A 3

3 Main exit CAM shaft JC66-04715A 1

4 Pin JC70-40360A 3 (*)

5 Main exit roller JC66-04726A 1 (*)

6 Paddle pesser JC61-07206A 1 (*)

1374 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-58 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

7 Paddle JC90-01480A 1 (*)

7-1 Paddle wing JC90-01463A 2 (*)

7-2 Paddle mid JC90-01462A 1 (*)

8 Brush JC67-00819A 1 (*)

9 Brush JC67-00820A 1 (*)

10 Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A 1 (*)

11 Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A 1 (*)

11-1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

11-2 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

12 Paddle home gear JC66-04558A 1

13 End fence motor JC90-01467A 1 (*)

14 Belt 6602-003270 1 (*)

15 Belt 6602-003640 1 (*)

16 CAM JC66-04562A 1

17 CAM guide JC66-04526A 1 (*)

18 End fence JC90-01466A 1 (*)

19 Spring JC61-07414A 2 (*)

20 Main output tray top of stack switch guide JC61-07189A 1 (*)

21 Main output tray top of stack switch lower guide JC61-07192A 1 (*)

22 Ground JC63-04984A 1 (*)

23 Brush JC67-00817A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit 1375

 Paddle, Paddle motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the paddle, paddle motor.

Figure 5-99 Paddle, Paddle motor

11

11-1

7-1
7-2 11-2

Table 5-59 Paddle, Paddle motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

7 Paddle JC90-01480A 1 (*)

7-1 Paddle wing JC90-01463A 2 (*)

7-2 Paddle mid JC90-01462A 1 (*)

11 Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A 1 (*)

11-1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

11-2 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1376 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA

Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA

Parts diagram and parts list for the tamper unit, ejector unit, stapler unit, main PCA.

Figure 5-100 Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA
6 5

Table 5-60 Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Front tamper unit JC82-00901A 1 (*)

2 Rear tamper unit JC82-00898A 1 (*)

3 Ejector unit JC90-01409A 1 (*)

4 Stapler unit JC82-00894A 1 (*)

5 Stapler cartridge JC81-09882B 1 (*)

6 Finisher main PCA JC92-02968A 1 (*)

7 Roller JC66-04523A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA 1377

 Tamper unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the tamper unit.

Figure 5-101 Tamper unit

1-2
1-3

1-4

1-1

2-2

2-3

2-1

Table 5-61 Tamper unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Front tamper unit JC82-00901A 1 (*)

1-1 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-2 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

1-3 End fence home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-4 Belt 6602-003644 1 (*)

2 Rear tamper unit JC82-00898A 1 (*)

2-1 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

2-2 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

2-3 Belt 6602-003644 1 (*)

1378 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tamper unit 1379

 Ejector unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the ejector unit.

Figure 5-102 Ejector unit

3

3-5

3-1 3-2
3-7
3-3

3-9
3-6

3-4
3-10
3-8

Table 5-62 Ejector unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

3 Ejector unit JC90-01409A 1 (*)

3-1 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

3-2 Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-3 Ejector1 end sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-4 Ejector1 motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-5 Ejector1 motor assembly JC90-01411A 1 (*)

3-6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 1 (*)

3-7 Ejector2 home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-8 Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-9 Ejector2 motor assembly JC90-01410A 1 (*)

3-10 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1380 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the paper holding unit, main output tray unit.

Figure 5-103 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

11

4 10

8
9

12

3 6

2 1

Table 5-63 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Left upper cover JC90-01475B 1 (*)

2 Left lower cover(Booklet finisher) JC90-01417B 1 (*)

2 Left lower cover(Stapler-stacker finisher) JC90-01771B 1 (*)

3 Main output tray JC63-05002B 1 (*)

4 Main output tray motor aseembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)

Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit 1381

 Table 5-63 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

5 Paper holding motor JC90-01414A 1 (*)

6 Belt 6602-003652 2 (*)

7 Gear JC66-04663A 4

8 Gear JC66-04605A 1

9 Gear JC61-07305A 1

10 Spring JC61-07429A 1

11 Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A 1 (*)

12 Main output tray support JC61-06668A 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1382 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Left upper cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the left upper cover.

Figure 5-104 Left upper cover

1-3
1-5 1-2


1-1
1-6 1-4

1-7

1-7

Table 5-64 Left upper cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Left upper cover JC90-01475B 1 (*)

1-1 Paper holding home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-2 Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-3 Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-4 Left upper cover JC63-04999B 1 (*)

1-5 Spring JC61-07428A 1 (*)

1-6 Spring JC61-07427A 1 (*)

1-7 Main output tray top of stack sensor JC82-01039A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Left upper cover 1383

 Left lower cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the left lower cover.

Figure 5-105 Left lower cover

2 2

stapler-stacker booklet finisher

2-3
2-1 2-3
2-2 2-1
2-2
2-5

2-4

Table 5-65 Left lower cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Left lower cover (Booklet finisher) JC90-01417B 1 (*)

2 Left lower cover (Stapler-stacker finisher) JC90-01771B 1 (*)

2-1 Main output tray lower limit switch 0604-001415 1 (*)

2-2 Main output tray lower limit actuator JC81-07930A 1 (*)

2-3 Spring JC81-09396A 1 (*)

2-4 Spring (Booklet finisher) JC61-07407A 1 (*)

2-5 Booklet output tray sensor (Booklet finisher) JC82-01039A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1384 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Main output tray motor, Paper holding motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the main output tray motor, paper holding motor.

Figure 5-106 Main output tray motor, paper holding motor

5

4
4-1

4-5 5-1
4-4

4-2

4-3

5-2

Table 5-66 Main output tray motor, paper holding motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

4 Main output tray motor assembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)

4-1 Pin JC70-40542A 1 (*)

4-2 Gear JC81-07637A 1 (*)

4-3 Main output tray motor JC31-00178B 1 (*)

4-4 Bearing 6601-001478 1 (*)

4-5 Main output tray motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

5 Paper holding motor assembly JC90-01414A 1 (*)

5-1 Paper holding motor JC93-01156A 1 (*)

5-2 Gear JC66-04604A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Main output tray motor, Paper holding motor 1385

 Cover & hanress

Buffer unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the buffer unit.

Figure 5-107 Buffer unit

3-1

6
7
4

10
9

Table 5-67 Buffer unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Buffer diverter assembly JC90-01674A 1 (*)

2 Front jam cover assembly JC90-01457A 1 (*)

3 Budder roller assembly JC90-01672A 1 (*)

3-1 Buffer roller JC66-05161A 1

1386 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-67 Buffer unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

4 Buffer solenoid JC90-01675A 1 (*)

5 Buffer motor JC93-01152A 1 (*)

6 Gear JC66-04582A 1 (*)

7 Belt 6602-003641 1

8 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

9 Manual staple actuator JC66-04528A 1 (*)

10 Buffer jam cover JC90-01450A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Buffer unit 1387

 Buffer diverter, Front jam cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the buffer diverter, front jam cover.

Figure 5-108 Buffer diverter, Front jam cover

2-2
1

1-4
2-1
1-2 2

1-5

1-3 1-1

Table 5-68 Buffer diverter, Front jam cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Buffer diverter assembly JC90-01674A 1 (*)

1-1 Spring JC61-07413A 2 (*)

1-2 Spring JC61-07409A 2 (*)

1-3 Bufer diverter JC61-07204A 1 (*)

1-4 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-5 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

2 Front jam cover assembly JC90-01457A 1 (*)

2-1 Magnet JC81-08263A 1 (*)

2-2 Spring JC61-07418A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1388 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher)
Learn about parts, diagrams (booklet finisher)

NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-
protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to
provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by
placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Booklet maker
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet maker.

Figure 5-109 Booklet maker

2
4

5
3

Table 5-69 Booklet maker

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet maker JC82-00905A 1 (*)

2 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B 1 (*)

3 Booklet maker PCA JC92-02790B 1 (*)

4 Rail 6102-003369 2 (*)

Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher) 1389

 Table 5-69 Booklet maker (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

5 Harness guide JC90-01477A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1390 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet entrance unit, booklet presser unit.

Figure 5-110 Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

1

Table 5-70 Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet entrance unit JC90-01424A 1

2 Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly JC90-01425A 1 (*)

3 Booklet entrace roller JC66-04717A 1 (*)

4 Booklet presser unit JC61-07237A 1

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit 1391

 Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet entrance, booklet entrance-presser motor.

Figure 5-111 Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor

1

2-3 2-1
1-2

1-5 1-1

1-4

2-2
1-3

Table 5-71 Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet entrance unit JC90-01424A 1

1-1 Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

1-2 Booklet entrance actuator JC66-04520A 1 (*)

1-3 Booklet presser guide JC61-07331A 1

1-4 Booklet presser guide actuator JC66-04644A 1 (*)

1-5 Bushing JC61-02372A 2 (*)

2 Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly JC90-01425A 1 (*)

2-1 Booklet entrance motor JC93-01152A 1 (*)

2-2 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)

2-3 Booklet presser home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1392 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet stapler unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet stapler unit.

Figure 5-112 Booklet stapler unit

1
2

Table 5-72 Booklet stapler unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet stapler unit JC81-08274B 1 (*)

2 Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-09881B 2 (*)

3 Spring JC61-07398A 1 (*)

4 Spring JC61-07397A 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet stapler unit 1393

 Booklet tamper unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet tamper unit.

Figure 5-113 Booklet tamper unit

1-3

1-1

1-4 1-2

Table 5-73 Booklet tamper unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet tamper unit JC90-01431A 1

1-1 Booklet tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-2 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)

1-3 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

1-4 Bushing JC61-00423A 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1394 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet fold unit, booklet diverter unit, booklet exit unit.

Figure 5-114 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

12

10
6
5

11
4
3

1
Table 5-74 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet c-fold blade assembly JC90-01438A 1 (*)

2 Booklet exit unit JC90-01400A 1 (*)

3 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A 1 (*)

4 Booklet diverter motor assembly JC90-01397A 1 (*)

5 Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly JC90-01396A 1 (*)

6 Booklet fold motor assembly JC90-01436A 1 (*)

7 Gear JC66-04573A 1 (*)

8 Bushing 6601-003037 3

9 Bushing JC61-00426A 1 (*)

10 Bushing JC61-00423A 2 (*)

11 Bushing JC61-02372A 1 (*)

Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit 1395
 Table 5-74 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

12 Gear JC90-01479A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1396 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet c-fold blade, booklet exit, booklet diverter.

Figure 5-115 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter

1-1

1-2-1
1-3

1-2

2
3
2-2

2-3

2-4
3-1
2-1

Table 5-75 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet c-fold blade assembly JC90-01438A 1 (*)

1-1 Booklet sub exit roller assembly JC90-01395A 1 (*)

1-2 Booklet c-fold blade JC90-01394A 1 (*)

1-2-1 Spring JC61-07391A 2 (*)

1-3 Jam guide sheet JC63-05044A 3 (*)

2 Booklet exit unit JC90-01400A 1 (*)

2-1 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A 1

2-2 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A 1 (*)

2-3 Bushing JC61-00426A 4 (*)

2-4 E-ring 6044-000129 2 (*)

Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter 1397

 Table 5-75 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

3 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A 1 (*)

3-1 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1398 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet diverter motor, booklet c-fold motor, booklet fold motor.

Figure 5-116 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor

6
6-3

6-1

6-2

5-1
5-3

5-2

4-1

4-2

Table 5-76 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

4 Booklet diverter motor assembly JC90-01397A 1 (*)

4-1 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A 1 (*)

Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor 1399
 Table 5-76 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

4-2 Booklet diverter home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

5 Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly JC90-01396A 1 (*)

5-1 Booklet c-fold blade motor JC93-01154A 1 (*)

5-2 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

5-3 Gear JC66-04579A 1 (*)

6 Booklet fold motor assembly JC90-01436A 1 (*)

6-1 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A 1 (*)

6-2 Gear JC66-04592A 1 (*)

6-3 Gear JC66-04593A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1400 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet fold roller
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet fold roller.

Figure 5-117 Booklet fold roller

2-1
2

Table 5-77 Booklet fold roller

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A 2 (*)

2 Booklet fold exit JC90-01399A 1 (*)

2-1 C-ring 6044-000159 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet fold roller 1401

1402 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)
Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet blade motor, booklet blade.

Figure 5-118 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade

1 1
1-3

1-2
1-1

2-1 2

2-2

2-3

Table 5-78 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet blade motor assembly JC90-01435A 1 (*)

1-1 Gear JC66-04595A 1 (*)

1-2 Gear JC66-04594A 1 (*)

1-3 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A 1 (*)

2 Booklet blade assembly JC90-01437A 1 (*)

Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade 1403

 Table 5-78 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2-1 Gear JC66-04591A 1 (*)

2-2 Bushing JC61-00423A 1 (*)

2-3 Bushing JC61-00426A 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1404 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet paddle unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet paddle unit.

Figure 5-119 Booklet paddle unit

4
2

4-1

2
4

2-2
2-1

Table 5-79 Booklet paddle unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A 1 (*)

2 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A 1 (*)

2-1 Lower booklet paddle wing JC61-07225A 1 (*)

2-2 Lower booklet paddle mid JC66-04719A 1 (*)

3 Booklet paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

4 Booklet paddle motor assembly JC90-01430A 1 (*)

4-1 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet paddle unit 1405

 Booklet end fence unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet end fence unit.

Figure 5-120 Booklet end fence unit

1-5 1-2

1 1-3 1-4

1-6
1-7

1-1

Table 5-80 Booklet end fence unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet end fence unit JC90-01432A 1

1-1 Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)

1-2 Spring JC61-07403A 1 (*)

1-3 Spring JC61-07401A 1 (*)

1-4 Solenoid JC33-00038A 1 (*)

1-5 Booklet end fence home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-6 Spring JC61-07400A 1 (*)

1-7 Gear JC66-04583A 1 (*)

1406 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet end fence unit 1407

 Booklet maker base
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet maker base.

Figure 5-121 Booklet maker base

1-1
1-2

2
2

Table 5-81 Booklet maker base

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet maker base JC90-01476A 1 (*)

1408 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-81 Booklet maker base (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1-1 Spring JC61-07392A 1 (*)

1-2 Booklet maker base support JC61-07279A 1 (*)

2 Booklet output jam cover JC90-01433A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Bridge unit

Removal and replacement: Bridge entrance sensor (S1)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge entrance sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge entrance sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-82 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Bridge unit 1409

 ○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the bridge from the machine

Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.

1. Open the front door (callout 1)

Figure 5-122 Open the front door

1410 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)

Figure 5-123 Pull the locker out

3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)

Figure 5-124 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors

Remove the bridge from the machine 1411

 4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer

Figure 5-125 Pull out the bridge unit

2. Remove the bridge rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the bridge rear cover.

▲ Remove four screws(callout 1) and the bridge rear cover.

Figure 5-126 Remove the bridge rear cover

3. Remove the bridge door

Follow these steps to remove the bridge door.

1412 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove four screws(callout 1) and remove the metal holders each side then disconnect one
connector(callout 2)

Figure 5-127 Remove the screws and a connector

2. Lift the bridge door up(callout 1) and then remove the bridge door(callout 2)

Figure 5-128 Remove the bridge door

4. Remove the bridge paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the bridge paper guide.

Remove the bridge paper guide 1413

 ▲ Remove thirteen screws(callout 1~3) and remove the bridge paper guide(callout 4) from the bridge door

Figure 5-129 Remove the bridge paper guide

5. Remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1).

1. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-130 Unplug one connector

1414 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1, callout 1)

Figure 5-131 Remove the bridge entrance sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge motor (M14)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge motor.

Introduction

Unpack the replacement assembly 1415

 This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-83 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163B Bridge motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the bridge from the machine

Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.

1416 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Open the front door (callout 1)

Figure 5-132 Open the front door

2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)

Figure 5-133 Pull the locker out

Remove the bridge from the machine 1417

 3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)

Figure 5-134 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors

4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer

Figure 5-135 Pull out the bridge unit

2. Remove the bridge rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the bridge rear cover.

1418 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Remove four screws(callout 1) and the bridge rear cover.

Figure 5-136 Remove the bridge rear cover

3. Remove the bridge motor (M14)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge motor (M14).

1. Remove three screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-137 Remove three screws

2. Disconnect one connector(callout 1)

NOTE: It located on the bottom of the bridge

Remove the bridge motor (M14) 1419

 Figure 5-138 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the belt (callout 1)

Figure 5-139 Remove the belt

1420 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Remove the Bridge motor (M14, callout1)

Figure 5-140 Remove the Bridge motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge exit sensor (S3)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge exit sensor.

Introduction

Unpack the replacement assembly 1421

 This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge exit sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-84 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the bridge from the machine

Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.

1422 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Open the front door (callout 1)

Figure 5-141 Open the front door

2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)

Figure 5-142 Pull the locker out

Remove the bridge from the machine 1423

 3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)

Figure 5-143 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors

4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer

Figure 5-144 Pull out the bridge unit

2. Remove the bridge exit sensor (S3)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge exit sensor (S3).

1. Unplug one connector

NOTE: Bridge exit sensor(callout 1) located on the bottom of the bridge

1424 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-145 Unplug one connector

Figure 5-146 Unplug one connector

Remove the bridge exit sensor (S3) 1425

 2. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge exit sensor(S3, callout1)

Figure 5-147 Remove the bridge exit sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge door sensor (S2)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge door sensor.

Introduction

1426 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge door sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-85 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Bridge door sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the bridge from the machine

Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.

Remove the bridge from the machine 1427

 1. Open the front door (callout 1)

Figure 5-148 Open the front door

2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)

Figure 5-149 Pull the locker out

1428 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)

Figure 5-150 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors

4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer

Figure 5-151 Pull out the bridge unit

2. Remove the bridge door sensor (S2)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge door sensor (S2).

Remove the bridge door sensor (S2) 1429

 1. Bridge door sensor(callout 1) located on the bottom of the bridge

Figure 5-152 Location of the bridge door sensor

2. Open the bridge door to remove the bridge door sensor (S2)

Figure 5-153 Open the bridge door

1430 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge door sensor(S2, callout 1)

Figure 5-154 Remove the bridge door sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Covers

Unpack the replacement assembly 1431

 Removal and replacement: Right upper cover
Learn how to remove and replace the right upper cover.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right upper cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-86 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01448B Right upper cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1432 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-155 Remove the right upper cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1433

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top cover

Learn how to remove and replace the top cover.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top cover of the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-87 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01446B Top cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

1434 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-156 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1435

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-157 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-158 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1436 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-159 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front door

Learn how to remove and replace the front door.

Introduction

Unpack the replacement assembly 1437

 This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front door for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-88 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01444B Front door

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

1438 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-160 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-161 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1439

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-162 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-163 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1440 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-164 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-165 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1441

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-166 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-167 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1442 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-168 Remove the front door

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the rear cover.

Introduction

Unpack the replacement assembly 1443

 This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-89 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04988B Rear cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

1444 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-169 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-170 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1445

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-171 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-172 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1446 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-173 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-174 Remove the rear cover

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1447

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front cover.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1448 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-90 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04986B Front cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-175 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1449

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-176 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-177 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1450 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-178 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-179 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1451

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-180 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-181 Release the lower hinge pin

1452 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-182 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-183 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1453

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-184 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-185 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1454 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-186 Remove the front cover

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front lower cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front lower cover.

Introduction

Unpack the replacement assembly 1455

 This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front lower cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-91 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04987B Front lower cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

1456 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-187 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-188 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1457

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-189 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-190 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1458 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-191 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-192 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1459

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-193 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-194 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1460 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-195 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-196 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1461

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-197 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-198 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the front lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front lower cover (finisher).

▲ Remove three machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front lower cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1462 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-199 Remove the front lower cover

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster cover

Learn how to remove and replace the caster cover.

Introduction

Unpack the replacement assembly 1463

 This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the caster cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-92 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04985B Caster cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1464 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-200 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-201 Install the booklet output tray

2. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1465

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-202 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-203 Remove the caster cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1466 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left lower cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left lower cover.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left lower cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Left lower cover 1467

 Table 5-93 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01771B Left lower cover (for stapler/stacker finisher)

JC90-01417B Left lower cover (for booklet finisher)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1468 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-204 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-205 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1469

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-206 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-207 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1470 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-208 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-209 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1471

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-210 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-211 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1472 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-212 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-213 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1473

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-214 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-215 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1474 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-216 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-217 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 1475

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-218 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-219 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1476 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-220 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-221 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1477

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-222 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-223 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1478 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-224 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-225 Remove the left lower cover

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1479

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left upper cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left upper cover.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left upper cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-94 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01475B Left upper cover

1480 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-226 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1481

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-227 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-228 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1482 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-229 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-230 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1483

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-231 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-232 Release the lower hinge pin

1484 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-233 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-234 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1485

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-235 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-236 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1486 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-237 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-238 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1487

 Figure 5-239 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-240 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

1488 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-241 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-242 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 1489

 Figure 5-243 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-244 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

1490 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-245 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-246 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1491

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-247 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-248 Lower the output tray

1492 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-249 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-250 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1493

 Figure 5-251 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-252 Remove the left upper cover

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1494 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher front cover

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet front cover.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet front cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-95 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01478B Booklet front cover

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher front cover 1495

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-253 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1496 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Entrance unit

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor (M12)

Learn how to remove and replace the feed entrance motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the entrance motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Entrance unit 1497

 Table 5-96 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01459A Entrance motor assembly

JC31-00163B Entrance motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-254 Remove the right upper cover

1498 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-255 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-256 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1499

 Figure 5-257 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-258 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1500 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-259 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the entrance motor (M12)

Follow these steps to remove the entrance motor (M12).

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws (callout
3), and then remove the entrance motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling the
motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-260 Remove the entrance motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the entrance motor (M12) 1501

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Punch unit

Removal and replacement: Dummy feed guide

Learn how to remove and replace the dummy feed guide.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the dummy feed guide on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

1502 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-97 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01161A Dummy feed guide

Y1G10-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory

Y1G11-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory

Y1G12-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1503

 Figure 5-261 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-262 Remove six screws

1504 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-263 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-264 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1505

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-265 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-266 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the dummy feed guide (finisher).

1506 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the dummy feed guide (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-267 Remove two screws and the feed guide

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1507

 Tray diverter unit

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Top jam access cover
Learn how to remove and replace the top jam cover assembly.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top jam cover assembly for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-98 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

1508 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-268 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1509

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-269 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-270 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1510 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-271 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-272 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1511

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-273 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-274 Release the lower hinge pin

1512 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-275 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-276 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1513

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-277 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-278 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1514 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-279 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-280 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1515

 Figure 5-281 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws (callout
3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling the
motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-282 Remove the exit motor

7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

1516 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-283 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-284 Remove the top jam access cover

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal

Unpack the replacement assembly 1517

 chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter

Learn how to remove and replace the tray diverter.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the tray diverter on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-99 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07205A Tray diverter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1518 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-285 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1519

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-286 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-287 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1520 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-288 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-289 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1521

 Figure 5-290 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the tray diverter

Follow these steps to remove the tray diverter.

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) to take out the exit motor (callout 2)

Figure 5-291 Take out the exit motor

1522 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove two screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-292 Remove two screws

3. Pull the top jam cover assembly out.

Figure 5-293 Pull the top jam cover assembly out

Remove the tray diverter 1523

 4. Remove the tray diverter (callout 1) from top jam cover assembly.

Figure 5-294 Remove the tray diverter

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

1524 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter home sensor (S4)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray diverter home sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the tray diverter home sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-100 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter home sensor (S4) 1525

 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-295 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1526 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-296 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-297 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1527

 Figure 5-298 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-299 Lift the top hinge pin

1528 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-300 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-301 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1529

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-302 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-303 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1530 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-304 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-305 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1531

 Figure 5-306 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4)

Follow these steps to remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4).

1. Disconnect one connector(callout 1)

Figure 5-307 Disconnect one connector

1532 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the green handle (callout 1)

Figure 5-308 Remove the green handle

3. Remove the belt (callout 1)

Figure 5-309 Remove the belt

Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4) 1533

 4. Remove two screws(callout 1) and remove the bracket (callout 2) to reach out the tray diverter home sensor

Figure 5-310 Remove two screws and remove the bracket

5. Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4, callout 1)

Figure 5-311 Remove the tray diverter home sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal

1534 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Top exit unit

Removal and replacement: Top lower feed assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-101 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly

Top exit unit 1535

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-312 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1536 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-313 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-314 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1537

 Figure 5-315 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-316 Lift the top hinge pin

1538 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-317 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-318 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1539

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-319 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-320 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1540 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-321 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-322 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1541

 Figure 5-323 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-324 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1542 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-325 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws (callout
3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling the
motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-326 Remove the exit motor

7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

Remove the exit motor (M13) 1543

 1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-327 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-328 Remove the top jam access cover

8. Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher).

1544 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the main exit cam motor housing, and then tilt
the motor aside to access the screws under it.

Figure 5-329 Remove two screws

2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector
(callout 2).

Figure 5-330 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1545

 3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-331 Remove three screws

4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.

Figure 5-332 Remove the top lower feed assembly

5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector (callout
2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement part.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1546 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-333 Locate sensors and connector

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Top exit sensor (S11)
Learn how to remove and replace the top exit sensor.

Introduction

Unpack the replacement assembly 1547

 This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top exit sensor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-102 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Top exit sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

1548 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-334 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-335 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1549

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-336 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-337 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1550 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-338 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-339 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1551

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-340 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-341 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1552 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-342 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-343 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1553

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-344 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-345 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1554 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-346 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-347 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

Remove the exit motor (M13) 1555

 ▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws (callout
3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling the
motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-348 Remove the exit motor

7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-349 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1556 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-350 Remove the top jam access cover

8. Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher).

1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the main exit cam motor housing, and then tilt
the motor aside to access the screws under it.

Figure 5-351 Remove two screws

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1557

 2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector
(callout 2).

Figure 5-352 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector

3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-353 Remove three screws

1558 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.

Figure 5-354 Remove the top lower feed assembly

5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector (callout
2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement part.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-355 Locate sensors and connector

9. Remove the top exit sensor(S11)

Follow these steps to remove the top exit sensor(S11).

Remove the top exit sensor(S11) 1559

 1. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the top lower feed assembly.

Figure 5-356 Remove one screw and then top lower feed assembly

2. Remove harness(callout 1) and top exit sensor(S11, callout 2)

Figure 5-357 Remove harness and then top exit sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

1560 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Top output tray unit

Removal and replacement: Top output tray

Learn how to remove and replace the top output tray.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output tray on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-103 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04995B Top output tray

Required tools

● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Top output tray unit 1561

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the top output tray

Follow these steps to remove the top output tray.

▲ Raise the end of the top output tray (callout 1), and then lift it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove
it.

Figure 5-358 Remove the top output tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

1562 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Top output tray paper full sensor (S15)
Learn how to remove and replace the top output tray paper full sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output tray paper full sensor for the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-104 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-E87660du, E72525-

E72535, E77822-E77830 - Top output tray paper full sensor (S15) 1563
 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-359 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1564 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-360 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-361 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1565

 Figure 5-362 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-363 Lift the top hinge pin

1566 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-364 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-365 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1567

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-366 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-367 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1568 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-368 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-369 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1569

 Figure 5-370 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-371 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1570 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-372 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15)

Follow these steps to remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove screw (callout 1), disconnect the connector (callout 2) and then remove
the sensor assembly (callout 3)

Figure 5-373 Remove screw and connector and sensor assy

Remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15) 1571

 2. Remove top output tray paper full sensor- detector (callout 1).

Figure 5-374 Remove top output tray paper full sensor

3. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-375 Remove four screws

1572 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Remove screw (callout 1), disconnect the connector (callout 2), and then remove the sensor assembly
(callout 3).

Figure 5-376 Remove screw and connector and sensor assy

5. Remove top output tray paper full sensor- emitter (callout 1).

Figure 5-377 Remove top output tray paper full sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1573

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Main exit unit

Removal and replacement: Main exit sensor (S10)

Learn how to remove and replace the main exit sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main exit sensor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-105 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Main exit sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

1574 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-378 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1575

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-379 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-380 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1576 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-381 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-382 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1577

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-383 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-384 Release the lower hinge pin

1578 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-385 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-386 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1579

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-387 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-388 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1580 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-389 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-390 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1581

 Figure 5-391 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws (callout
3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling the
motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-392 Remove the exit motor

7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

1582 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-393 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-394 Remove the top jam access cover

8. Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher).

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1583

 1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the main exit cam motor housing, and then tilt
the motor aside to access the screws under it.

Figure 5-395 Remove two screws

2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector
(callout 2).

Figure 5-396 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector

1584 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-397 Remove three screws

4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.

Figure 5-398 Remove the top lower feed assembly

5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector (callout
2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement part.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1585

 Figure 5-399 Locate sensors and connector

9. Remove the main exit sensor(S10)

Follow these steps to remove the main exit sensor(S10).

▲ Remove one screw (callout 1) and main exit sensor (S10; callout 2) at the top lower feed assembly.

Figure 5-400 Remove the main exit sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

1586 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M13)

Learn how to remove and replace the exit motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the exit motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-106 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01459A Exit motor assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M13) 1587

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-401 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1588 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-402 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-403 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1589

 Figure 5-404 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-405 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1590 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-406 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws (callout
3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling the
motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-407 Remove the exit motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the exit motor (M13) 1591

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor (M2)

Learn how to remove and replace the main exit cam motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main exit cam motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1592 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-107 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-408 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1593

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-409 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-410 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1594 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-411 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-412 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1595

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-413 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-414 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the Main exit cam motor (M2)

Follow these steps to remove the Main exit cam motor (M2).

1596 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-415 Disconnect two connectors and then two screws

2. If you are replacing the gear, slide it off of the shaft

Figure 5-416 Slide the gear off of the shaft

Remove the Main exit cam motor (M2) 1597

 3. If you are replacing the sensor (callout 1), remove it from the motor housing.

Figure 5-417 Remove the sensor

4. If you are replacing the motor, do the following.

a. Remove two screws (callout 1)

1598 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 b. Lower the motor (callout 1) and then pull it away from the housing (callout 2) to remove it.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Paddle unit

Unpack the replacement assembly 1599

 Removal and replacement: Paddle
Learn how to remove and replace the paddle.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-108 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01462A Paddle mid

JC90-01463A Paddle wing

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1600 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-418 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-419 Remove six screws

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1601

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-420 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-421 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1602 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-422 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-423 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1603

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-424 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-425 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1604 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-426 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-427 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1605

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-428 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-429 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1606 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-430 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-431 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the paddle (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the paddle (finisher).

Remove the paddle (finisher) 1607

 1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-432 Remove two screws

2. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-433 Remove two screws

1608 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Do not remove the frame (callout 1) but pull it one side.

Figure 5-434 Pull it one side

4. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-435 Remove two screws

Remove the paddle (finisher) 1609

 5. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-436 Remove four screws

6. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver or tweezers on the clutch (callout
1) and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower
the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.(S11)

Figure 5-437 Pressing to the right to release the clutch

1610 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-438 Remove two screws

8. Remove two screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-439 Remove two screws

Remove the paddle (finisher) 1611

 9. Take supporter of top output bin (callout 1) forward and put it down.

Figure 5-440 Take supporter of top output bin forward and put it down.

10. Remove three paddles (callout 1) from shaft

Figure 5-441 Remove the paddle

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1612 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paddle home sensor (S8)

Learn how to remove and replace the paddle home sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle home sensor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-109 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Paddle home sensor

Removal and replacement: Paddle home sensor (S8) 1613

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-442 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1614 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-443 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-444 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1615

 Figure 5-445 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-446 Lift the top hinge pin

1616 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-447 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-448 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1617

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-449 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-450 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1618 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-451 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-452 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1619

 Figure 5-453 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the paddle home sensor (S8)

Follow these steps to remove the paddle home sensor (S8).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2)

Figure 5-454 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors

1620 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Disconnect connector from paddle home sensor

Figure 5-455 Disconnect connector from paddle home sensor

3. Remove paddle home sensor (S8; callout1)

Figure 5-456 Remove paddle home sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1621

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paddle motor (M1)

Learn how to remove and replace the paddle motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle motor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-110 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly

1622 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-110 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Paddle motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-457 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1623

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-458 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-459 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1624 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-460 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-461 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1625

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-462 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-463 Release the lower hinge pin

1626 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-464 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-465 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1627

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-466 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-467 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1628 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-468 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the paddle motor (M1)

Follow these steps to remove the paddle motor (M1).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2)

Figure 5-469 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors

Remove the paddle motor (M1) 1629

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1) and then remove paddle motor (M1; callout 2)

Figure 5-470 Remove the paddle motor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

End fence unit

1630 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: End fence home sensor (S7)
Learn how to remove and replace the end fence home sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the end fence home sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-111 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 End fence home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: End fence home sensor (S7) 1631

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-471 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-472 Remove six screws

1632 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-473 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-474 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1633

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-475 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-476 Remove the top hinge pin

1634 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-477 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-478 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1635

 Figure 5-479 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-480 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1636 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-481 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-482 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1637

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-483 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-484 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1638 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-485 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-486 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1639

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-487 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-488 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1640 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-489 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-490 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1641

 Figure 5-491 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-492 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1642 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-493 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-494 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1643

 Figure 5-495 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-496 Disconnect one connector

1644 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-497 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-498 Move the staple unit to the center

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1645

 2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-499 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-500 Remove two screws

1646 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-501 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-502 Rotate the sensor

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1647

 6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-503 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-504 Remove the front tamper shaft

1648 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-505 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-506 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1649

 10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-507 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-508 Disconnect one connector

1650 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-509 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-510 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1651

 14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-511 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-512 Lift the edges of the tampers

1652 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-513 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1653

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.

▲ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 5-514 Remove the front tamper

12. Remove the end of fence home sensor(S7)

Follow these steps to remove the end of fence home sensor(S7).

1654 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ At the front tamper, disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove end fence home sensor(S7, callout 2)

Figure 5-515 Remove end fence home sensor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1655

 HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-
E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3)
Learn how to remove and replace the end fence motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the end fence motor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-112 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01467A End fence motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1656 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-516 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-517 Remove six screws

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1657

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-518 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-519 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1658 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-520 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-521 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1659

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-522 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-523 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1660 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-524 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-525 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1661

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-526 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-527 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the end fence motor(M3)

Follow these steps to remove the end fence motor(M3).

1662 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect connector(callout 2)

Figure 5-528 Remove two screws and disconnect connector

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and end fence motor (M3, callout 1)

Figure 5-529 Remove end fence motor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1663

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Tamper unit

Front tamper

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-E87660du, E72525-

E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Front tamper unit
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper unit.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

1664 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-113 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00901A Front tamper

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1665

 Figure 5-530 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-531 Remove six screws

1666 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-532 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-533 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1667

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-534 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-535 Remove the top hinge pin

1668 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-536 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-537 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1669

 Figure 5-538 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-539 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1670 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-540 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-541 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1671

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-542 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-543 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1672 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-544 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-545 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1673

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-546 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-547 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1674 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-548 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-549 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1675

 Figure 5-550 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-551 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1676 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-552 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-553 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1677

 Figure 5-554 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-555 Disconnect one connector

1678 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-556 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-557 Move the staple unit to the center

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1679

 2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-558 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-559 Remove two screws

1680 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-560 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-561 Rotate the sensor

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1681

 6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-562 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-563 Remove the front tamper shaft

1682 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-564 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-565 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1683

 10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-566 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-567 Disconnect one connector

1684 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-568 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-569 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1685

 14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-570 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-571 Lift the edges of the tampers

1686 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-572 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1687

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.

▲ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 5-573 Remove the front tamper

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1688 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S6)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S6) 1689

 Table 5-114 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-574 Remove the right upper cover

1690 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-575 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-576 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1691

 Figure 5-577 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-578 Lift the top hinge pin

1692 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-579 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-580 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1693

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-581 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-582 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1694 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-583 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-584 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1695

 Figure 5-585 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-586 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1696 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-587 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-588 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1697

 Figure 5-589 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-590 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1698 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-591 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-592 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1699

 Figure 5-593 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-594 Disconnect two connectors

1700 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-595 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-596 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1701

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-597 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-598 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1702 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-599 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-600 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1703

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-601 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-602 Disconnect three connectors

1704 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-603 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-604 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1705

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-605 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-606 Remove one screw

1706 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-607 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-608 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1707

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-609 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-610 Remove the rear tamper shaft

1708 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-611 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-612 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1709

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-613 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-614 Remove two screws

1710 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-615 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-616 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1711

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.

1712 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 5-617 Remove the front tamper

12. Remove the front tamper home sensor(S6)

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper home sensor(S6).

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at front tamper.

Figure 5-618 Remove two screws

Remove the front tamper home sensor(S6) 1713

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1)

Figure 5-619 Remove one screw

3. Remove front tamper home sensor(S6, callout 1)

Figure 5-620 Remove front tamper home sensor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1714 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M4)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-115 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Front tamper motor

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M4) 1715

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-621 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1716 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-622 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-623 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1717

 Figure 5-624 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-625 Lift the top hinge pin

1718 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-626 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-627 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1719

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-628 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-629 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1720 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-630 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-631 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1721

 Figure 5-632 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-633 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1722 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-634 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-635 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1723

 Figure 5-636 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-637 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1724 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-638 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-639 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1725

 Figure 5-640 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-641 Disconnect two connectors

1726 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-642 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-643 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1727

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-644 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-645 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1728 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-646 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-647 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1729

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-648 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-649 Disconnect three connectors

1730 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-650 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-651 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1731

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-652 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-653 Remove one screw

1732 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-654 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-655 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1733

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-656 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-657 Remove the rear tamper shaft

1734 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-658 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-659 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1735

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-660 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-661 Remove two screws

1736 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-662 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-663 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1737

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.

1738 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 5-664 Remove the front tamper

12. Remove the front tamper motor (M4)

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper motor (M4).

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-665 Remove two screws

2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the front tamper motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front tamper motor (M4) 1739

 Figure 5-666 Release the belt and remove the motor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Rear tamper

1740 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper unit
Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper unit.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-116 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00898A Rear tamper

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper unit 1741

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-667 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-668 Remove six screws

1742 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-669 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-670 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1743

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-671 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-672 Remove the top hinge pin

1744 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-673 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-674 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1745

 Figure 5-675 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-676 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1746 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-677 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-678 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1747

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-679 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-680 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1748 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-681 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-682 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1749

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-683 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-684 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1750 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-685 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-686 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1751

 Figure 5-687 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-688 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1752 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-689 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-690 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1753

 Figure 5-691 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-692 Disconnect one connector

1754 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-693 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-694 Move the staple unit to the center

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1755

 2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-695 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-696 Remove two screws

1756 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-697 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-698 Rotate the sensor

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1757

 6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-699 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-700 Remove the front tamper shaft

1758 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-701 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-702 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1759

 10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-703 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-704 Disconnect one connector

1760 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-705 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-706 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1761

 14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-707 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-708 Lift the edges of the tampers

1762 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-709 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1763

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Remove the rear tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper unit.

▲ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it

NOTE: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-710 Remove therear tamper

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1764 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S9)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S9) 1765

 Table 5-117 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-711 Remove the right upper cover

1766 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-712 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-713 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1767

 Figure 5-714 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-715 Lift the top hinge pin

1768 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-716 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-717 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1769

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-718 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-719 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1770 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-720 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-721 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1771

 Figure 5-722 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-723 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1772 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-724 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-725 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1773

 Figure 5-726 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-727 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1774 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-728 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-729 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1775

 Figure 5-730 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-731 Disconnect two connectors

1776 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-732 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-733 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1777

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-734 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-735 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1778 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-736 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-737 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1779

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-738 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-739 Disconnect three connectors

1780 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-740 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-741 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1781

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-742 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-743 Remove one screw

1782 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-744 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-745 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1783

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-746 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-747 Remove the rear tamper shaft

1784 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-748 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-749 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1785

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-750 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-751 Remove two screws

1786 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-752 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-753 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1787

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Remove the rear tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper unit.

▲ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it

NOTE: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1788 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-754 Remove therear tamper

12. Remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9)

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9).

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the rear tamper.

Figure 5-755 Remove two screws

Remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9) 1789

 2. Remove one screw in front side(callout 1)

Figure 5-756 Remove one screw

3. Remove rear tamper home sensor(S9, callout 1)

Figure 5-757 Remove rear tamper home sensor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1790 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M9)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-118 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M9) 1791

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-758 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1792 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-759 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-760 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1793

 Figure 5-761 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-762 Lift the top hinge pin

1794 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-763 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-764 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1795

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-765 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-766 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1796 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-767 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-768 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1797

 Figure 5-769 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-770 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1798 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-771 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-772 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1799

 Figure 5-773 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-774 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1800 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-775 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-776 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1801

 Figure 5-777 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-778 Disconnect two connectors

1802 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-779 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-780 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1803

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-781 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-782 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1804 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-783 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-784 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1805

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-785 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-786 Disconnect three connectors

1806 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-787 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-788 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1807

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-789 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-790 Remove one screw

1808 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-791 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-792 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1809

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-793 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-794 Remove the rear tamper shaft

1810 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-795 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-796 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1811

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-797 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-798 Remove two screws

1812 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-799 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-800 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1813

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Remove the rear tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper unit.

▲ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it

NOTE: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1814 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-801 Remove therear tamper

12. Remove the rear tamper motor (M9)

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper motor (M9).

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-802 Remove two screws

2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the rear tamper motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the rear tamper motor (M9) 1815

 Figure 5-803 Release the belt and remove the motor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Stapler unit

1816 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Stapler unit
Learn how to remove and replace the stapler unit.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-119 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00894A Stapler unit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Stapler unit 1817

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-804 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-805 Remove six screws

1818 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-806 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-807 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1819

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-808 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-809 Remove the top hinge pin

1820 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-810 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-811 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1821

 Figure 5-812 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-813 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1822 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-814 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-815 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1823

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-816 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-817 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1824 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-818 Move the staple unit to the front

2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-819 Remove the staple cartridge

Remove the stapler unit 1825

 3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then
remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-820 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-821 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1826 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-822 Remove the staple unit

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler front sensor (S21)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler front sensor.

Introduction

Unpack the replacement assembly 1827

 This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler front sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-120 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler front sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

1828 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-823 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-824 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1829

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-825 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-826 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1830 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-827 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-828 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1831

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-829 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-830 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1832 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-831 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-832 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1833

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-833 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-834 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1834 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-835 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-836 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

Remove the stapler unit 1835

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-837 Move the staple unit to the front

2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-838 Remove the staple cartridge

1836 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then
remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-839 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-840 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the stapler unit 1837

 Figure 5-841 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler front sensor(S21)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler front sensor(S21).

▲ Remove stapler front sensor from staple unit.

Figure 5-842 Remove the stapler front sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1838 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-front sensor (S24)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler mid-front sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler mid-front sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-121 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler mid-front sensor

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-front sensor (S24) 1839

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-843 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1840 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-844 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-845 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1841

 Figure 5-846 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-847 Lift the top hinge pin

1842 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-848 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-849 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1843

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-850 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-851 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1844 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-852 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-853 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1845

 Figure 5-854 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-855 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1846 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-856 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-857 Move the staple unit to the front

Remove the stapler unit 1847

 2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-858 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then
remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-859 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

1848 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-860 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-861 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24).

Remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24) 1849

 1. Turn over staple unit and disconnect the connector(callout 1)

Figure 5-862 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove stapler mid-rear sensor(S24, callout 1) from staple unit.

Figure 5-863 Remove stapler mid-rear sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1850 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-rear sensor (S25)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler mid-rear sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler mid-rear sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-122 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler mid-rear sensor

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-rear sensor (S25) 1851

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-864 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1852 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-865 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-866 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1853

 Figure 5-867 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-868 Lift the top hinge pin

1854 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-869 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-870 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1855

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-871 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-872 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1856 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-873 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-874 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1857

 Figure 5-875 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-876 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1858 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-877 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-878 Move the staple unit to the front

Remove the stapler unit 1859

 2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-879 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then
remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-880 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

1860 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-881 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-882 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25).

Remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25) 1861

 1. Turn over staple unit and disconnect the connector(callout 1)

Figure 5-883 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove stapler mid-rear sensor(S24, callout 1) from staple unit.

Figure 5-884 Remove stapler mid-rear sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1862 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler rear sensor (S30)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler rear sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler rear sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-123 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler rear sensor

Removal and replacement: Stapler rear sensor (S30) 1863

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-885 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1864 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-886 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-887 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1865

 Figure 5-888 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-889 Lift the top hinge pin

1866 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-890 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-891 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1867

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-892 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-893 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1868 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-894 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-895 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1869

 Figure 5-896 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-897 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1870 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-898 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-899 Move the staple unit to the front

Remove the stapler unit 1871

 2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-900 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then
remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-901 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

1872 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-902 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-903 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler rear sensor(S30)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler rear sensor(S30).

Remove the stapler rear sensor(S30) 1873

 1. Remove stapler rear sensor(callout 1, S30) from staple unit.

Figure 5-904 Remove stapler rear sensor from staple unit.

2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from stapler rear sensor.

Figure 5-905 Disconnect the connector from stapler rear sensor.

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1874 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Manual staple sensor (S19)

Learn how to remove and replace the manual staple sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the manual staple sensor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-124 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Manual staple sensor

Removal and replacement: Manual staple sensor (S19) 1875

 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-906 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1876 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-907 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-908 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1877

 Figure 5-909 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-910 Lift the top hinge pin

1878 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-911 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-912 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1879

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-913 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-914 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1880 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-915 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-916 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1881

 Figure 5-917 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the manual staple sensor(S19)

Follow these steps to remove the manual staple sensor(S19).

1882 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ At the front of the finisher, disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove manual staple sensor(S19,
callout 2).

Figure 5-918 Remove the manual staple sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal

Unpack the replacement assembly 1883

 chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor (M8)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler position motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-125 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163A Stapler position motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1884 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-919 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1885

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-920 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-921 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1886 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-922 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-923 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1887

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-924 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-925 Release the lower hinge pin

1888 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-926 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-927 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1889

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-928 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-929 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1890 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-930 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-931 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1891

 Figure 5-932 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-933 Move the staple unit to the front

1892 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 5-934 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then
remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-935 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

Remove the stapler unit 1893

 4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-936 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-937 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler position motor(M8)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler position motor(M8).

1894 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-938 Remove two screws

2. Remove stapler position motor(M8, callout1) from staple unit.

Figure 5-939 Remove stapler position motor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1895

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Ejector unit

Removal and replacement: Ejector unit

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector unit.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1896 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-126 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01409A Ejector unit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-940 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1897

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-941 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-942 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1898 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-943 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-944 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1899

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-945 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-946 Release the lower hinge pin

1900 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-947 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-948 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1901

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-949 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-950 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1902 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-951 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-952 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1903

 Figure 5-953 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-954 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

1904 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-955 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-956 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 1905

 Figure 5-957 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-958 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

1906 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-959 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-960 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1907

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-961 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-962 Lower the output tray

1908 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-963 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-964 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1909

 Figure 5-965 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-966 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1910 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-967 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-968 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1911

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-969 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-970 Remove one screw

1912 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-971 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-972 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1913

 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-973 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-974 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

1914 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-975 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-976 Remove the rear tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1915

 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-977 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-978 Disconnect one connector

1916 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-979 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-980 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1917

 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-981 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-982 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

1918 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1919

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Ejector1

Removal and replacement: Ejector1 motor sensor (S27)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector1 motor sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector1 motor sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1920 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-127 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Ejector1 motor enor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-983 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1921

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-984 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-985 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1922 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-986 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-987 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1923

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-988 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-989 Release the lower hinge pin

1924 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-990 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-991 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1925

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-992 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-993 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1926 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-994 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-995 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1927

 Figure 5-996 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-997 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

1928 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-998 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-999 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 1929

 Figure 5-1000 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1001 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

1930 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1002 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1003 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1931

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1004 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1005 Lower the output tray

1932 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1006 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1007 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1933

 Figure 5-1008 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1009 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1934 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1010 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1011 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1935

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1012 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1013 Remove one screw

1936 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1014 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1015 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1937

 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1016 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1017 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

1938 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1018 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1019 Remove the rear tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1939

 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1020 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1021 Disconnect one connector

1940 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1022 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1023 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1941

 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1024 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-1025 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

1942 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27).

Remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27) 1943

 1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector1 motor(callout 2, M6) of ejector unit.

Figure 5-1026 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1027 Remove two screws

1944 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove the ejector1 motor from ejector unit, disconnect the connector(callout 1), and then remove the
ejector1 motor sensor(S27, callout 2)

Figure 5-1028 Remove the ejector1 motor sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector1 motor (M6)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector1 motor.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1945

 Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector1 motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-128 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01168A Ejector1 motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

1946 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1029 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1030 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1947

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1031 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1032 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1948 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1033 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1034 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1949

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-1035 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1036 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1950 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1037 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1038 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1951

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1039 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1040 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1952 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1041 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1042 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 1953

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1043 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1044 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1954 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1045 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1046 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1955

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1047 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1048 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1956 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1049 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1050 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1957

 1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1051 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1052 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

1958 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1053 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1054 Disconnect one connector

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1959

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1055 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1056 Move the staple unit to the center

1960 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1057 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1058 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1961

 4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1059 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1060 Rotate the sensor

1962 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1061 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1062 Remove the front tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1963

 8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1063 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1064 Remove one screw

1964 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1065 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1066 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1965

 12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1067 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1068 Disconnect one connector

1966 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1069 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1070 Lift the edges of the tampers

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1967

 16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-1071 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

1968 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector1 motor(M6)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector1 motor(M6).

1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector1 motor(M6, callout 2) of ejector unit.

Figure 5-1072 Disconnect the connector

Remove the ejector1 motor(M6) 1969

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1073 Remove two screws

3. Remove the ejector1 motor from ejector unit and remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1074 Remove the ejector1 motor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1970 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Ejector2 unit

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 home sensor (S32)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 home sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 home sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Ejector2 unit 1971

 Table 5-129 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Ejector2 home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1075 Remove the right upper cover

1972 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1076 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1077 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1973

 Figure 5-1078 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1079 Lift the top hinge pin

1974 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1080 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-1081 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1975

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1082 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1083 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1976 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1084 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1085 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1977

 Figure 5-1086 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1087 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1978 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1088 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1089 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1979

 Figure 5-1090 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1091 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1980 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1092 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1093 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1981

 Figure 5-1094 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1095 Disconnect two connectors

1982 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1096 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1097 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1983

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1098 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1099 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1984 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1100 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1101 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1985

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1102 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1103 Disconnect three connectors

1986 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1104 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1105 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1987

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1106 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1107 Remove one screw

1988 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1108 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1109 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1989

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1110 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1111 Remove the rear tamper shaft

1990 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1112 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1113 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1991

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1114 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1115 Remove two screws

1992 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1116 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-1117 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1993

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector2 home sensor(S32)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 home sensor(S32).

1994 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove sensor(callout 1, S32) using tweezers from the ejector unit.

Figure 5-1118 Remove sensor

2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector2 home sensor.

Figure 5-1119 Disconnect the connector from ejector2 home sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1995

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor sensor (S23)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 motor sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 motor sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-130 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor

1996 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1120 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1997

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1121 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1122 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1998 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1123 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1124 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1999

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1125 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-1126 Release the lower hinge pin

2000 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1127 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1128 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2001

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1129 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1130 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2002 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1131 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1132 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2003

 Figure 5-1133 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1134 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

2004 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1135 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1136 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 2005

 Figure 5-1137 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1138 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

2006 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1139 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1140 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2007

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1141 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1142 Lower the output tray

2008 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1143 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1144 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 2009

 Figure 5-1145 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1146 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

2010 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1147 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1148 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2011

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1149 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1150 Remove one screw

2012 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1151 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1152 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2013

 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1153 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1154 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

2014 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1155 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1156 Remove the rear tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2015

 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1157 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1158 Disconnect one connector

2016 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1159 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1160 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2017

 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1161 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-1162 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

2018 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23).

Remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23) 2019

 1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector2 motor(M5, callout 2) of ejector unit.

Figure 5-1163 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1164 Remove two screws

2020 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove the ejector2 motor from ejector unit, disconnect the connector(callout 1), and then remove the
ejector2 motor sensor(S23, callout 2)

Figure 5-1165 Remove the ejector2 motor sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor (M5)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 motor.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2021

 Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-131 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01168A Ejector2 motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

2022 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1166 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1167 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2023

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1168 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1169 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

2024 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1170 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1171 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2025

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-1172 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1173 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2026 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1174 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1175 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2027

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1176 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1177 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

2028 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1178 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1179 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 2029

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1180 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1181 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

2030 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1182 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1183 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2031

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1184 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1185 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2032 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1186 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1187 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 2033

 1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1188 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1189 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

2034 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1190 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1191 Disconnect one connector

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 2035

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1192 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1193 Move the staple unit to the center

2036 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1194 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1195 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2037

 4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1196 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1197 Rotate the sensor

2038 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1198 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1199 Remove the front tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2039

 8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1200 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1201 Remove one screw

2040 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1202 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1203 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2041

 12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1204 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1205 Disconnect one connector

2042 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1206 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1207 Lift the edges of the tampers

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2043

 16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.

Figure 5-1208 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

2044 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the notch
(callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector2 motor(M5)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 motor(M5).

1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector2 motor(M5, callout 2) of ejector unit.

Figure 5-1209 Disconnect the connector

Remove the ejector2 motor(M5) 2045

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1210 Remove two screws

3. Remove the ejector2 motor from ejector unit and remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1211 Remove the ejector2 motor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2046 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Main output tray unit

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack sensor (S20)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Main output tray unit 2047

 Table 5-132 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1212 Remove the right upper cover

2048 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1213 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1214 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2049

 Figure 5-1215 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1216 Lift the top hinge pin

2050 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1217 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-1218 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2051

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1219 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1220 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

2052 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1221 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1222 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2053

 Figure 5-1223 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1224 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2054 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1225 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1226 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 2055

 Figure 5-1227 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1228 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2056 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1229 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1230 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2057

 Figure 5-1231 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1232 Disconnect two connectors

2058 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1233 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1234 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 2059

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1235 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1236 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2060 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1237 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1238 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20).

Remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20) 2061

 ▲ Remove detector and emitter sensor(S20, callout 1)

Figure 5-1239 Remove detector and emitter sensor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

2062 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch (S34)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack switch.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack switch on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-133 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch (S34) 2063
 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1240 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2064 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1241 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1242 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2065

 Figure 5-1243 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1244 Lift the top hinge pin

2066 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1245 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-1246 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2067

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1247 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1248 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

2068 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1249 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1250 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2069

 Figure 5-1251 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1252 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2070 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1253 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1254 Remove two screws

Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34) 2071

 2. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1255 Remove two screws

3. Do not remove the frame(callout 1) but pull it one side.

Figure 5-1256 Pull it one side

2072 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1257 Remove two screws

5. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1258 Remove four screws

Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34) 2073

 6. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver or tweezers on the clutch (callout
1) and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower
the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position

Figure 5-1259 Pressing to the right to release the clutch

7. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1260 Remove two screws

2074 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1261 Remove two screws

9. Separate two parts (callout 1,callout 2)

Figure 5-1262 Separate two parts

Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34) 2075

 10. Separate two parts (callout 1,callout 2)

Figure 5-1263 Separate two parts

11. Disconnect the connector (callout 1) And switch(callout 2, S34)

Figure 5-1264 Disconnect the connector

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2076 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor (S26)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray lower limit sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray lower limit sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-134 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor

Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor (S26) 2077
 Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1265 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2078 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1266 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1267 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2079

 Figure 5-1268 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1269 Lift the top hinge pin

2080 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1270 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-1271 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2081

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1272 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1273 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

2082 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1274 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1275 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2083

 Figure 5-1276 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1277 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2084 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1278 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1279 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 2085

 Figure 5-1280 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1281 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2086 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1282 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1283 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2087

 Figure 5-1284 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1285 Disconnect two connectors

2088 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1286 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26).

▲ Disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove the sensor(S26, callout 2) from the lower shield assembly.

Figure 5-1287 Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26) 2089

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor sensor (S33)

Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray motor sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray motor sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

2090 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-135 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1288 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2091

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1289 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1290 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2092 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1291 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1292 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2093

 Figure 5-1293 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the main output tray motor sensor (S33)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray motor sensor (S33).

1. Disconnect the connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1294 Disconnect the connector

2094 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove the tape using tweezers and remove the sensor (S33, callout 1).

Figure 5-1295 Remove the sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2095

 HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-
E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor
(M11)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-136 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01415B Main output tray motor assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

2096 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1296 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1297 Remove six screws

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2097

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1298 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1299 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

2098 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1300 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1301 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the main output tray motor (M11)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray motor (M11).

Remove the main output tray motor (M11) 2099

 1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position

Figure 5-1302 Lower theoutput tray

2. Open two retainers (callout 1), and then release the green wires (callout 2).

Figure 5-1303 Open two retainers

2100 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-1304 Disconnect three connectors

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then thread the cable up through the opening in the top of the
bracket.

Figure 5-1305 Disconnect one connector

Remove the main output tray motor (M11) 2101

 5. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor assembly.

Figure 5-1306 Remove four screws and the motor assembly

6. Carefully pull the motor assembly away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1307 Remove the motor assembly

7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Main tray moving motor (M11)

2102 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

a. Before installing the motor assembly, slide the bushing (callout 1) off of the shaft.

b. Align the flat edges on the bushing with the flat edges on the opening in the motor assembly bracket,
and then install the bushing.

Remove the main output tray motor (M11) 2103

 c. Position the bushing over the shaft, and then install the motor assembly.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Paper holding unit

2104 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Paper holding home sensor (S22)
Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding home sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper holding home sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-137 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding home sensor (S22) 2105

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1308 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1309 Remove six screws

2106 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1310 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1311 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 2107

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1312 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1313 Remove the top hinge pin

2108 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-1314 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1315 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 2109

 Figure 5-1316 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1317 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

2110 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1318 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1319 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2111

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1320 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1321 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

2112 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1322 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1323 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 2113

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1324 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1325 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

2114 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1326 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1327 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2115

 Figure 5-1328 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1329 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

2116 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1330 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1331 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down (callout
2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 2117

 Figure 5-1332 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1333 Disconnect one connector

2118 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1334 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the paper holding home sensor(S22)

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding home sensor(S22).

▲ Disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove the sensor(S22, callout 2) from the upper shield assembly.

Figure 5-1335 Remove the paper holding home sensor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the paper holding home sensor(S22) 2119

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding front sensor (S17)

Learn how to remove and replace the front paper holding sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front paper holding sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

2120 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-138 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1336 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2121

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1337 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1338 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2122 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1339 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1340 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2123

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1341 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-1342 Release the lower hinge pin

2124 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1343 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1344 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2125

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1345 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1346 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2126 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1347 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1348 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2127

 Figure 5-1349 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1350 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

2128 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1351 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1352 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 2129

 Figure 5-1353 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1354 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

2130 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1355 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1356 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2131

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1357 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the paper holding sensor (S17)

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding sensor (S17).

▲ Remove the sensor(callout 1, S17) from the upper shield assembly.

Figure 5-1358 Remove the paper holding sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

2132 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding rear sensor (S31)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear paper holding sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear paper holding sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding rear sensor (S31) 2133

 Table 5-139 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1359 Remove the right upper cover

2134 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1360 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1361 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2135

 Figure 5-1362 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1363 Lift the top hinge pin

2136 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1364 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-1365 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2137

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1366 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1367 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

2138 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1368 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1369 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2139

 Figure 5-1370 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1371 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2140 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1372 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1373 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 2141

 Figure 5-1374 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1375 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2142 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1376 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1377 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2143

 Figure 5-1378 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1379 Disconnect two connectors

2144 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1380 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the rear paper holding sensor(S31)

Follow these steps to remove the rear paper holding sensor(S31).

▲ Remove the sensor(S31, callout 1) from the upper shield assembly.

Figure 5-1381 Remove the rear paper holding sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the rear paper holding sensor(S31) 2145

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding Motor (M7)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding Motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper holding Motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

2146 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-140 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01414A Paper holding motor assembly

JC93-01156A Paper holding motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1382 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2147

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1383 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1384 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2148 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1385 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1386 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2149

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1387 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.

Figure 5-1388 Release the lower hinge pin

2150 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1389 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1390 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2151

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1391 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1392 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2152 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1393 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1394 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2153

 Figure 5-1395 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1396 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

2154 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1397 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1398 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 2155

 Figure 5-1399 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1400 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

2156 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1401 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1402 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2157

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1403 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the paper holding Motor (M7)

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding Motor (M7).

1. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-1404 Disconnect one connector

2158 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor and bracket.

Figure 5-1405 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor.

Figure 5-1406 Remove two screws and the motor

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: paper holding Motor (M10)

When installing the motor and bracket, align the tab and slot on the motor bracket with the tab and slot in
the printer.

Remove the paper holding Motor (M7) 2159

 Figure 5-1407 Install the motor and bracket

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Buffer unit

2160 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Buffer motor (M10)
Learn how to remove and replace the buffer motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-141 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01152A Buffer motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Buffer motor (M10) 2161

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1408 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1409 Remove six screws

2162 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1410 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1411 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2163

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1412 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1413 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the main exit cam motor(M10)

Follow these steps to remove the main exit cam motor(M10).

2164 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1414 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1)

Figure 5-1415 Disconnect the connector

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2165

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Buffer solenoid (SL1)

Learn how to remove and replace the buffer solenoid.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer solenoid on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-142 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid

2166 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1416 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2167

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1417 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1418 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2168 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1419 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1420 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2169

 Figure 5-1421 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the buffer solenoid(SL1)

Follow these steps to remove the buffer solenoid(SL1).

1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(Callout 1)

Figure 5-1422 Remove two screws

2170 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(Callout 1)

Figure 5-1423 Remove two screws

3. Remove top jam cover assembly (Callout 1)

Figure 5-1424 Remove top jam cover assembly

Remove the buffer solenoid(SL1) 2171

 4. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(Callout 1)

Figure 5-1425 Remove two screws

5. Disconnect the connector(Callout 1) and remove the buffer solenoid(Callout 2)

Figure 5-1426 Remove the buffer solenoid

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2172 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Booklet maker

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet maker.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet maker on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Booklet maker 2173

 Table 5-143 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00905A Booklet maker

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1427 Remove the right upper cover

2174 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1428 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1429 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2175

 Figure 5-1430 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1431 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2176 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1432 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1433 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

Remove the booklet maker 2177

 2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1434 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1435 Release the metal bracket

2178 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1436 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1437 Slide the right rail

Remove the booklet maker 2179

 6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1438 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1439 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

2180 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1440 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1441 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2181

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1442 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1443 Extend the right rail

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2182 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Booklet entrance unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance motor (M15)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet entrance motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet entrance motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Booklet entrance unit 2183

 Table 5-144 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01152A Booklet entrance motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1444 Remove five screws and the cover

2184 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the booklet entrance motor (M15)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance motor (M15).

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2). Lift the motor away from the
booklet maker and release the belt (callout 3) from the back of the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1445 Remove the booklet entrance motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

Remove the booklet entrance motor (M15) 2185

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance sensor (S36)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet entrance sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet entrance sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-145 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Booklet entrance sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

2186 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1446 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2187

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1447 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1448 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2188 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1449 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1450 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2189

 Figure 5-1451 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1452 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2190 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1453 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1454 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2191

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1455 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1456 Slide the right rail

2192 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1457 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1458 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2193

 Figure 5-1459 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1460 Align arrows

2194 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1461 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1462 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet entrance unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance unit.

Remove the booklet entrance unit 2195

 1. Remove two screws(callout 1) then remove the black cover (callout 2)

Figure 5-1463 Remove two screws then remove the black cover

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect one connector(callout 2)

Figure 5-1464 Remove two screws and disconnect one connector

2196 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1465 Remove two screws

4. Remove two screws(callout 1) to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit (callout2)

Figure 5-1466 Remove two screws to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit

Remove the booklet entrance unit 2197

 5. Remove the booklet entrance unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1467 Remove the booklet entrance unit

6. Remove the booklet entrance sensor (S36)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance sensor (S36).

1. Entrance unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1468 Entrance unit

2198 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1469 Unplug one connector

3. Use a tweezer to remove the entrance sensor (S36, callout1)

Figure 5-1470 Remove the entrance sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2199

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Booklet paddle unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor (M19)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet paddle motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet paddle motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

2200 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-146 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Booklet paddle motor

JC90-01430A Booklet paddle motor assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1471 Remove five screws and the cover

Remove the booklet front cover 2201

 2. Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle motor (M19).

1. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1472 Remove two screws

2. Remove the booklelt paddle motor (M19, callout1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1473 Remove the booklelt paddle motor and unplug one connector

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

2202 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle home sensor (S41)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet paddle home sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet paddle home sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-147 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet paddle home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle home sensor (S41) 2203

 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1474 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2204 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1475 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1476 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2205

 Figure 5-1477 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1478 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2206 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1479 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1480 Remove five screws and the cover

5. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

Remove the booklet front cover 2207

 1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1481 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1482 Remove two screws

2208 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1483 Remove the right lower shield

6. Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle motor (M19).

1. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1484 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19) 2209

 2. Remove the booklelt paddle motor (M19, callout1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1485 Remove the booklelt paddle motor and unplug one connector

7. Remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41).

1. Remove one e-clip on top of the white washer and then remove the white washer(callout 1)

Figure 5-1486 Remove white washer

2210 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove two belts (callout 1)

Figure 5-1487 Remove two belts

3. Remove the black actuator (callout 1)

Figure 5-1488 Remove the black actuator

4. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1489 Unplug one connector

Remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41) 2211

 5. Use a tweezer to remove the Booklet paddle home sensor (S41, callout 1) from the left side

Figure 5-1490 Use a tweezer to remove the Booklet paddle home sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Booklet end fence unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence unit

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence.

2212 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-148 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01432A Booklet end fence unit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2213

 ▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1491 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1492 Remove six screws

2214 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1493 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1494 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2215

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1495 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1496 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

2216 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1497 Remove five screws and the cover

5. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1498 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2217

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1499 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1500 Remove the right lower shield

6. Remove the fold stopper unit

Follow these steps to remove the fold stopper unit.

2218 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. On the left side of the booklet maker, remove two screws through access openings in the jam access cover
(callout 1).

Figure 5-1501 Remove two screws

2. Raise the jam access cover.

Figure 5-1502 Raise the jam access cover

Remove the fold stopper unit 2219

 3. Raise the booklet width guide.

Figure 5-1503 Raise the booklet width guide.

4. On the right side of the booklet maker, open two retainers (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1504 Disconnect three connectors

2220 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1505 Remove two screws

6. Release the tab (callout 1) on the guide arm, and then slide the guide off of the shaft (callout 2) to remove
it.

Figure 5-1506 Release the guide arm

Remove the fold stopper unit 2221

 7. Lower the width guide to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1507 Lower the width guide

8. On the right side of the booklet maker, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1508 Remove one screw

2222 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. Lift the right lower corner (callout 1) to clear the cable guide, and then slide the assembly to the right
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1509 Remove the fold stopper unit

10. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse theremoval steps to finishinstalling theassembly.

Special installation instructions: Fold stopper unit

Loosen the two alignment screws (callout 1) and move the fold unit side to side to until the alignment
gauge is positioned on the center line. Tighten the screws and run a folded job through the finisher and
verify that the fold is correct. If the fold is not correct, loosen the screws, adjust the alignment, and run
another fold job. Continue this process until the fold is correct.

Figure 5-1510 Adjust the alignment gauge

Remove the fold stopper unit 2223

 7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

2224 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-149 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01155A Booklet end fence motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2225

 Figure 5-1511 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1512 Remove two screws

2226 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1513 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1514 Remove the right lower shield

3. Remove the booklet end fence motor (M20)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet end fence motor (M20).

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet end
fence motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the booklet end fence motor (M20) 2227

 Figure 5-1515 Remove the booklet end fence motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence home sensor (S42)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence home sensor.

Introduction

2228 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-150 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet end fence home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

Remove the booklet front cover 2229

 ▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1516 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1517 Remove two screws

2230 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1518 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1519 Remove the right lower shield

3. Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42)

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42).

Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42) 2231

 1. Unplug one connector(callout 1) at the left of the booklet make

Figure 5-1520 Unplug one connector

2. Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42, callout 1) at the right of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1521 Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2232 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Booklet presser unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Booklet presser unit 2233

 Table 5-151 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07237A Booklet presser

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1522 Remove the right upper cover

2234 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1523 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1524 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2235

 Figure 5-1525 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1526 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2236 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1527 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1528 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

Remove the booklet maker 2237

 2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1529 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1530 Release the metal bracket

2238 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1531 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1532 Slide the right rail

Remove the booklet maker 2239

 6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1533 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1534 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

2240 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1535 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1536 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2241

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1537 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1538 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet entrance unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance unit.

2242 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) then remove the black cover (callout 2)

Figure 5-1539 Remove two screws then remove the black cover

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect one connector(callout 2)

Figure 5-1540 Remove two screws and disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet entrance unit 2243

 3. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1541 Remove two screws

4. Remove two screws(callout 1) to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit (callout2)

Figure 5-1542 Remove two screws to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit

2244 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Remove the booklet entrance unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1543 Remove the booklet entrance unit

6. Remove the booklet presser

Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-1544 Remove three screws

Remove the booklet presser 2245

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and remove the motor unit (callout 2)

Figure 5-1545 Disconnect one connector and remove the motor unit

3. Remove one e-clip on top of the white gear then remove the white gear (callout 1)

Figure 5-1546 Remove one e-clip on top of the white gear then remove the white gear

2246 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Remove one e-clip on top of the bush then remove the bush (callout 1)

Figure 5-1547 Remove one e-clip on top of the bush then remove the bush

5. Band (callout2) the booklet presser (callout 1) out to make it easy to pull out (callout 3)

Figure 5-1548 Band the booklet presser out to make it easy to pull out

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2247

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser home sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser home sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-152 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet presser home sensor

2248 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1549 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet presser home sensor (S37)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser home sensor (S37) .

Remove the booklet front cover 2249

 1. Remove three screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-1550 Remove three screws

2. Use a tweezer to remove booklet presser home sensor (S37, callout 1)

Figure 5-1551 Remove booklet presser home sensor

2250 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1552 Unplug one connector

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser motor (M16)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser motor.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2251

 Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-153 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01155A Booklet presser motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

2252 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1553 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet presser motor (M16)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser motor (M16).

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet presser
motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1554 Remove the booklet presser motor

Remove the booklet presser motor (M16) 2253

 3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Booklet tamper unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper unit

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper unit.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

2254 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-154 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01431A Booklet tamper unit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2255

 Figure 5-1555 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1556 Remove six screws

2256 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1557 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1558 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2257

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1559 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1560 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

2258 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1561 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1562 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2259

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1563 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1564 Remove one screw

2260 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1565 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1566 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2261

 7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1567 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1568 Position the hooks

2262 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1569 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1570 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2263

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1571 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1572 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

2264 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1573 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1574 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2265

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1575 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1576 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2266 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1577 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1578 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2267

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then remove
the board cover.

Figure 5-1579 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1580 Remove two screws

4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1581 Disconnect one connector

2268 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1582 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1583 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2269

 2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1584 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1585 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1586 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

2270 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1587 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper unit.

1. Remove two screws and disconnect one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1588 Remove two screws

2. Booklet tamper unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1589 Booklet tamper unit

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the booklet tamper unit 2271

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper home sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper home sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

2272 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-155 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet tamper home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1590 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2273

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1591 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1592 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2274 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1593 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1594 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2275

 Figure 5-1595 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1596 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2276 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1597 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1598 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2277

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1599 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1600 Slide the right rail

2278 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1601 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1602 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2279

 Figure 5-1603 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1604 Align arrows

2280 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1605 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1606 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2281

 Figure 5-1607 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1608 Remove two screws

2282 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1609 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1610 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

Remove the booklet maker middle right shield 2283

 1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1611 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1612 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

2284 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1613 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then remove
the board cover.

Figure 5-1614 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1615 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2285

 4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1616 Disconnect one connector

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1617 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

2286 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1618 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1619 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1620 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2287

 4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1621 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1622 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper unit.

1. Remove two screws and disconnect one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1623 Remove two screws

2288 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Booklet tamper unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1624 Booklet tamper unit

11. Remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1625 Remove four screws

2. Use a tweezer to remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38, callout 1)

Figure 5-1626 Remove booklet tamper home sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38) 2289

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper motor (M23)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

2290 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-156 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01155A Booklet tamper motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1627 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2291

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1628 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1629 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2292 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1630 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1631 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2293

 Figure 5-1632 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1633 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2294 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1634 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1635 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2295

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1636 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1637 Slide the right rail

2296 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1638 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1639 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2297

 Figure 5-1640 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1641 Align arrows

2298 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1642 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1643 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2299

 Figure 5-1644 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1645 Remove two screws

2300 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1646 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1647 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

Remove the booklet maker middle right shield 2301

 1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1648 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1649 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

2302 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1650 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then remove
the board cover.

Figure 5-1651 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1652 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2303

 4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1653 Disconnect one connector

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1654 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

2304 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1655 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1656 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1657 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2305

 4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1658 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1659 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper unit.

1. Remove two screws and disconnect one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1660 Remove two screws

2306 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Booklet tamper unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1661 Booklet tamper unit

11. Remove the booklet tamper motor (M23)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper motor (M23).

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1662 Remove two screws and unplug one connector

Remove the booklet tamper motor (M23) 2307

 2. Remove the booklet tamper motor (M23, callout 1)

Figure 5-1663 Remove the booklet tamper motor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Booklet stapler unit

2308 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Booklet stapler unit
Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet stapler unit.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet stapler unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-157 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-08274B Booklet stapler unit

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Booklet stapler unit 2309

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1664 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1665 Remove six screws

2310 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1666 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1667 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2311

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1668 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1669 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

2312 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1670 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1671 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2313

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1672 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1673 Remove one screw

2314 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1674 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1675 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2315

 7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1676 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1677 Position the hooks

2316 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1678 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1679 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2317

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1680 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1681 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

2318 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1682 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to reach
out to the screw.

Figure 5-1683 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2319

 3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1684 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1685 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

2320 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1686 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the booklet stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet stapler unit.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1687 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet stapler unit 2321

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1688 Remove two screws

3. Remove the metal frame (callout 1)

Figure 5-1689 Remove the metal frame

4. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to remove the board cover (callout 2)

Figure 5-1690 Remove the board cover

2322 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Remove four screws (callout 1) and unplug the connector (callout 2) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1691 Remove four screws and unplug the connector

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1692 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet stapler unit 2323

 7. Remove the connector cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1693 Remove the connector cover

8. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1694 Remove one screw

9. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1695 Remove one screw

2324 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

10. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker and pull the metal bracket (callout 2) out
each side.

Figure 5-1696 Remove two screws

11. Remove one screw(callout 1) and remove one screw(callout 2) (Remove two screws each side)

Figure 5-1697 Remove two screws each side

12. Remove two screws (callout 1) and remove the black cover (callout 2) and pull the stapler unit (callout 3) out

Figure 5-1698 Pull the stapler unit

Remove the booklet stapler unit 2325

 8. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Booklet fold unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet blade.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

2326 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-158 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01163A Booklet blade

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2327

 Figure 5-1699 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1700 Remove six screws

2328 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1701 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1702 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2329

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1703 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1704 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

2330 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1705 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1706 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2331

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1707 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1708 Remove one screw

2332 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1709 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1710 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2333

 7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1711 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1712 Position the hooks

2334 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1713 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1714 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2335

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1715 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1716 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

2336 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1717 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1718 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2337

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1719 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1720 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2338 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1721 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1722 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2339

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then remove
the board cover.

Figure 5-1723 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1724 Remove two screws

4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1725 Disconnect one connector

2340 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1726 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1727 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2341

 2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1728 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1729 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1730 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

2342 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1731 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet blade

Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1732 Remove two screws and disconnect one connector

2. Remove 7 screws (callout 1) and remove the booklet blade (callout 2)

Figure 5-1733 Remove 7 screws and remove the booklet blade

NOTE: Be sure to make the scale when you reassemble with the new blade

Remove the booklet blade 2343

 11. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade home sensor (S45)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet blade home sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade home sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

2344 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-159 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet blade home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2345

 Figure 5-1734 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1735 Remove six screws

2346 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1736 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1737 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2347

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1738 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1739 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

2348 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1740 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1741 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2349

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1742 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1743 Remove one screw

2350 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1744 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1745 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2351

 7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1746 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1747 Position the hooks

2352 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1748 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1749 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2353

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1750 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1751 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

2354 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1752 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1753 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2355

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1754 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1755 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2356 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1756 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1757 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2357

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then remove
the board cover.

Figure 5-1758 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1759 Remove two screws

4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1760 Disconnect one connector

2358 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1761 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1762 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2359

 2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1763 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1764 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1765 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

2360 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1766 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet blade home sensor (S45)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade home sensor (S45).

▲ Disconnect one connector(callout 1) and remove the Booklet blade home sensor (S45, callout 2)

Figure 5-1767 Disconnect one connector and remove the Booklet blade home sensor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

Remove the booklet blade home sensor (S45) 2361

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade motor (M22)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet blade motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-160 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01435A Booklet blade motor assembly

JC31-00144A Booklet blade motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

2362 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1768 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

Remove the booklet front cover 2363

 1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1769 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1770 Remove two screws

2364 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1771 Remove the right lower shield

3. Remove the booklet blade motor (M22)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade motor (M22).

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet blade
motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1772 Remove the booklet blade motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the booklet blade motor (M22) 2365

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor (M21)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet fold motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet fold motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

2366 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-161 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01436A Booklet fold motor assembly

JC31-00144A Booklet fold motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1773 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2367

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1774 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1775 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2368 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1776 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1777 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2369

 Figure 5-1778 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet fold motor (M21)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet fold motor (M21).

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the folding roller
motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1779 Remove the booklet fold motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2370 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade 2371

 Table 5-162 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07366A Booklet c-fold blade

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1780 Remove the right upper cover

2372 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1781 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1782 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2373

 Figure 5-1783 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1784 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2374 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1785 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1786 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

Remove the booklet maker 2375

 2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1787 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1788 Release the metal bracket

2376 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1789 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1790 Slide the right rail

Remove the booklet maker 2377

 6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1791 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1792 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

2378 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1793 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1794 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2379

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1795 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1796 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2380 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1797 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1798 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2381

 2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to reach
out to the screw.

Figure 5-1799 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1800 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

2382 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1801 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1802 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade.

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade 2383

 ▲ Remove four screws(callout 1) to remove the booklet c-fold blade

Figure 5-1803 Remove four screws to remove the booklet c-fold blade

NOTE:

● Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

● Make sure the metal located on the home position when you reassemble the unit.

You can make it by rotating the gear to the left direction.

TIP: Rotate the white gear (callout 1) to the left direction to make the metal (callout 2) to the home
postion.

2384 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade home sensor.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2385

 Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-163 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

2386 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1804 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1805 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2387

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1806 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1807 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

2388 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1808 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1809 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2389

 1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1810 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1811 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

2390 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1812 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1813 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2391

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1814 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1815 Remove one screw

2392 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1816 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1817 Position the hooks

Remove the booklet maker 2393

 9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1818 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1819 Align arrows

2394 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1820 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1821 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

Remove the booklet front cover 2395

 1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1822 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to reach
out to the screw.

Figure 5-1823 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

2396 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1824 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1825 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2397

 5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1826 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39).

1. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1827 Remove three screws at the front of the booklet maker

2398 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Take motor unit (callout 1) out from the booklet maker and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1828 Take motor unit out from the booklet maker and unplug one connector

3. Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39, callout 1)

Figure 5-1829 Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2399

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor (M17)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade motor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-164 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01154A Booklet c-fold blade motor

2400 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-164 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

JC90-01396A Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1830 Remove five screws and the cover

Remove the booklet front cover 2401

 2. Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17).

1. Note the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor (callout 1). These
arrows must be aligned in these positions when the motor is reinstalled.

Figure 5-1831 Check arrow alignment

2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-1832 Disconnect two connectors

2402 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1833 Remove four screws (callout 1).

4. Remove one e-clip (callout 1) on top of the white gear. Remove the white gear (callout 2) and release the
belt (callout 3).

Figure 5-1834 Remove one e-clip, gear, and belt

5. Remove the bracket and motor from the booklet maker.

CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft might
become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet maker PCA shield
and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.

Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17) 2403

 Figure 5-1835 Remove the bracket and motor

6. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the C fold motor.

Figure 5-1836 Remove two screws

7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: C fold motor

2404 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

a. When installing the motor, install one screw (callout 1) to hold the bracket in place while installing the
gear and belt.

b. Check the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor (callout 1).

Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17) 2405

 c. If the arrows are not aligned, slightly pull up on the belt to create some slack around the gear (callout
1), and then rotate the gear (callout 2) until the arrows align.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Booklet diverter unit

2406 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-165 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01398A Booklet diverter

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter 2407

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1837 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1838 Remove six screws

2408 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1839 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1840 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2409

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1841 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1842 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

2410 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1843 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1844 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2411

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1845 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1846 Remove one screw

2412 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1847 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1848 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2413

 7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1849 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1850 Position the hooks

2414 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1851 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1852 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2415

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1853 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1854 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

2416 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1855 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to reach
out to the screw.

Figure 5-1856 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2417

 3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1857 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1858 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

2418 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1859 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the booklet diverter

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-1860 Remove two screws at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover

Remove the booklet diverter 2419

 2. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to make it easy to disconnect the connector.

Figure 5-1861 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

3. Pull the connector cover (callout 1) and disconnect the one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1862 Pull the connector cover and disconnect the one connector

2420 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1863 Remove two screws

5. Remove the white bush

Figure 5-1864 Remove the white bush

Remove the booklet diverter 2421

 6. Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator and make sure not
to lose the pin(callout 2) when you pull out the black actuator.

Figure 5-1865 Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator

7. Remove the white bush (callout 1).

Figure 5-1866 Remove the white bush

2422 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 8. Pull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1867 ull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter home sensor (S40)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter home sensor.

Introduction

Unpack the replacement assembly 2423

 This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter home sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-166 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Booklet diverter home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

2424 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1868 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40).

1. Remove three screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-1869 Remove three screws

Remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40) 2425

 2. Unplug one connector (callout 1) and remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40, callout 2)

Figure 5-1870 Remove the booklet diverter home sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor (M18)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter motor.

2426 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-167 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01397A Booklet diverter motor assembly

JC93-01153A Booklet diverter motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

Remove the booklet front cover 2427

 ▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1871 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet diverter motor (M18)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter motor (M18).

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet diverter
motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1872 Remove the separate pawl motor

2428 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Booklet exit unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet exit sensor (S44)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet exit sensor.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet exit sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2429

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-168 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Booklet exit sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2430 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1873 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1874 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2431

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1875 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1876 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

2432 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1877 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1878 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2433

 1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1879 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1880 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

2434 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1881 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1882 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2435

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1883 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1884 Remove one screw

2436 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1885 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1886 Position the hooks

Remove the booklet maker 2437

 9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1887 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1888 Align arrows

2438 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1889 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1890 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

Remove the booklet front cover 2439

 1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1891 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to reach
out to the screw.

Figure 5-1892 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

2440 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1893 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1894 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2441

 5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1895 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the booklet diverter

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-1896 Remove two screws at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover

2442 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to make it easy to disconnect the connector.

Figure 5-1897 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

3. Pull the connector cover (callout 1) and disconnect the one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1898 Pull the connector cover and disconnect the one connector

Remove the booklet diverter 2443

 4. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1899 Remove two screws

5. Remove the white bush

Figure 5-1900 Remove the white bush

2444 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator and make sure not
to lose the pin(callout 2) when you pull out the black actuator.

Figure 5-1901 Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator

7. Remove the white bush (callout 1).

Figure 5-1902 Remove the white bush

Remove the booklet diverter 2445

 8. Pull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1903 ull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet exit sensor (S44)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet exit sensor (S44).

1. Remove three screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-1904 Remove three screws

2. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1905 Unplug one connector

2446 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove the booklet exit sensor (S44, callout 1)

Figure 5-1906 Remove the booklet exit sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Booklet output tray unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet output tray.

Introduction

Unpack the replacement assembly 2447

 This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet output tray on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-169 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07253B Booklet output tray

JC63-04978B Booklet output tray cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

2448 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1907 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1908 Install the booklet output tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2449

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

PCA

Removal and replacement: Main PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the main PCA.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main PCA on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

2450 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-170 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02968A Finisher mainPCA

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2451

 Figure 5-1909 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1910 Remove six screws

2452 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1911 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1912 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2453

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1913 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1914 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the controller PCA

Follow these steps to remove the controller PCA.

2454 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ▲ Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the controller PCA.

TIP: Refer to the figure below for correct positioning and connection of the cables.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1915 Remove the controller PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2455

 Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher PCA
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet maker PCA.

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet maker PCA on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-171 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02789B Booklet finisher PCA

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

2456 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1916 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1917 Remove six screws

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2457

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1918 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1919 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

2458 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1920 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1921 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2459

 1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1922 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1923 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

2460 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1924 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1925 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2461

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1926 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1927 Remove one screw

2462 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1928 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1929 Position the hooks

Remove the booklet maker 2463

 9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1930 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

Figure 5-1931 Align arrows

2464 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1932 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet maker PCA

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker PCA.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1933 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet maker PCA 2465

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the metal cover.

Figure 5-1934 Remove one screw and the metal cover

3. Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet maker PCA.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1935 Remove four screws and the PCA

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2466 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Problem solving
Learn about problem solving.

Control panel message document (CPMD)

Learn about the control panel message document (CPMD).

Refer to Error codes (types and structure) on page 983 for more details.

Clear paper jams

Learn about clearing paper jams.

Clear paper jams in the Booklet maker

Learn how to clear paper jams in the Booklet maker.

Clear jams in the top output area

Learn how to clear jams in the top output area.

Problem solving 2467

 1. Open the top cover.

2. Lift the TF feeder, and then turn the knob while the TF feeder is lifted.

3. Remove any jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker paper path

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker paper path.

2468 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Open the booklet maker door.

2. Release the lever.

Clear jams in the booklet maker paper path 2469

 3. Turn the knob.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area.

1. Open the booklet maker door.

2470 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

3. Turn the knob to advance the jammed paper.

4. Remove the jammed paper/booklet from the output area.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper area

Learn how to clear paper jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper-area.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper area 2471

 1. Open the booklet maker door.

2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

2472 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Open the vertical tray by pulling outward on the green tab.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left middle area

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left-middle-area.

1. Open the booklet maker door.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left middle area 2473
 2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

3. Pull the green tab.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

2474 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Open the clear plastic door at the left bottom.

6. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left lower area

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left-lower area.

1. Open the booklet maker door.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left lower area 2475
 2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

3. Open the roller door.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

5. Open the clear plastic door at the left bottom.

6. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the IPTU

Learn how to clear jams in the IPTU.

2476 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Lift the IPTU cover and clear any jammed paper inside the IPTU.

2. Close the IPTU cover.

Clear jams in the inner finisher (IF)

Learn how to clear jams in the inner finisher (IF).

1. Open the staple cartridge access door.

Clear jams in the inner finisher (IF) 2477

 2. Rotate the lever to the left to release the hooks that secure the inner finisher (they hold the IF in place).

3. Slide the inner finisher partially out.

4. Release the lever to open the right cover on the inner finisher.

2478 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Lift the inner finisher jam access cover, and then remove any jammed paper inside the rear of the inner
finisher.

6. Close the inner finisher jam access cover.

7. Close the inner finisher right cover.

8. Open the output side jam access cover, and then remove any jammed paper.

9. Close the output side jam access cover.

10. Slide the inner finisher in until it clicks into place.

11. Close the staple cartridge access door.

Clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher

Learn how to clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher.

Clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher 2479

 1. Open the top cover.

2. Lift the TF feeder, and then turn the knob while the TF feeder is lifted.

3. Remove any jammed paper.

Finisher system diagram

Learn about the finisher system diagram.

Finisher system consists of the FINISHER PCA, BOOKLET MAKER PCA, SWITCH PCA, and HOLE PUNCH PCA.

2480 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-1936 Finisher system diagram

PCA function

● FINISHER PCA

This PCA controls the finisher modules and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

● SWITCH PCA

This PCA shows the manual stapling condition and accepts the button input for manual staple operation.

● BOOKLET MAKER PCA

This PCA controls the booklet maker module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

● HOLE PUNCH PCA

This PCA controls the hole punch module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

Finisher system diagram 2481

 6 Inner finisher

Learn more about the inner finisher.

Product specification and description

Learn about product specifications and descriptions.

Inner finisher view

Learn about the front view and rear view of the inner finisher.

Front & rear view

Figure 6-1 Inner finisher system - front view

2482 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-2 Inner finisher system - rear view

Table 6-1 Inner finisher system - entrance unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C1 Front cover JC90-01321B (*)

C2 Top cover JC90-01323B (*)

C3 Middle cover JC90-01322B (*)

C4 Punch cover JC90-01343B (*)

C5 Output tray JC90-01337B (*)

C6 PCA cover JC63-04792B (*)

C7 Left cover JC90-01324B (*)

C8 Rear cover JC63-04750B (*)

1 Lock release handle JC66-04233A (*)

2 Main interface harness JC39-02169A (*)

Not shown Exit bin full JC90-01546A (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

NOTE: Exit bin full is included in the box

Detailed specifications
Learn about the detailed specifications of the inner finisher.

Detailed specifications 2483

 Table 6-2 General specifications

Item Description

Capacity 550 Sheets (Main 500, Top 50) @ 80gsm

Sensing Paper Jam/Tray Sensing/Stapler/Cover Open

Media Sizes ● Main: 98mm - 320mm x 139.7mm - 457.2mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.5in - 18in)

● Top: 98mm - 320mm x 148.0mm - 430.0mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.83in - 16.93in)

Media types Plain/Thick/Heavy weight/Thin/Cotton/Colored/Recycled/Bond/Archive/Pre-Punched/Cardstock/Glossy/

Envelope

Media Weight ● Main: 52-256 gsm (13.9-68.3 lb.)

● Top: 52-325 gsm (13.9-86.7 lb.)

Number of Bin 2 (Main/Top)

Dimension (W X D X H) 458 x 491 x 173 mm (18.0 X 19.3 X 6.8 inch)

Weight Net weight: 15 kg (33 lb.)

Packing weight: 18.39 kg (40.53 lb.)

Tray 1 Finishing Capacity 50 Sheets @ 80gsm

Tray 1 Finishing Mode Stapling (Left, Right, Dual)/Punch (2/3, 2/4, Swedish)

Tray 2 Finishing Capacity 500 Sheets @ 80 gsm

Table 6-3 Paper Size Specification

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF O O O X F/R1 O

Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF O O O X F/R 1 O

Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

B5(JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

B5(ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X O X X X

Monarch Env 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X O X X X

PostCard 4X6 101.6 x 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X O X X X

152.4

A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X O X X X

No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X O X X X

DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X O X X X

2484 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-3 Paper Size Specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X O X X X

B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X O X X X

Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X O X X X

A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X X X

C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X 0 X X X

B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R 1 X

B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

342.9

C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X O X X X

Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O F/R 1 X O

Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF O X X X X X

457.2

SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF O X X X X X

Detailed specifications 2485

 Table 6-3 Paper Size Specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ — O X O X X X

L 140-1200 L 5.5-47.2 (W 98-297 ~

L 140-1200)
1 “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.

Table 6-4 Punch specifications

Name Paper size Orientation Punch

mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish

2H 3H 2H 4H 4H

A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF 0 X O X O

Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF 0 X O X O

Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O O O

A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O O O

B5 (JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O X O

B5 (ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O X O

Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O O O

No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X X X X

Monarch Env 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X X X X

PostCard 4X6 101.6 x 152.4 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X X X X

A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X X X X

No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X X X X

DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X X X X

C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X X X X

B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X X X X

Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X X X X

A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X O

C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X X X X

B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O

B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O

Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O X O X O

16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O X O X O

A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O X O X O

2486 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-4 Punch specifications (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Punch

mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish

2H 3H 2H 4H 4H

Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O X O X O

Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O X O X O

Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O X O X O

Oficio 215.9 x 342.9 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O X O X O

C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X X X X

Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O X O

B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O X O

8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O O

Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O O O

A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O O O

Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 457.2 12 x 18 SEF X X X X X

SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF X X X X X

Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ — X X X X X

L 140-1200 L 5.5-47

Table 6-5 Media performance

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch

Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O

Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O

Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 g/m²) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 g/m2) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 g/m2) X O X X

Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 g/m2) X O X X

Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O

Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O

Bond O O O O

Detailed specifications 2487

 Table 6-5 Media performance (continued)

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch

Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O

LetterHead O O O O

Pre-Punched O O O X

Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O

Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X

Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 g/m²) X O X X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 g/m2) X O X X

Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O

Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X

Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O X X X

Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X

Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) O X X X

Tab O X X O

Inner finisher system

Learn about the inner finisher system.

Overview
Learn about the overview of the inner finisher.

Work flow

2488 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-3 Inner finisher system - work flow overview

Table 6-6 Inner finisher system - work flow overview

Item Unit Description

1 Punch unit holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper

2 Entrance unit allows paper to move into the finisher

3 Diverter unit holds paper so that the newly printed paper can stay out for seconds while the stapled
bundle of paper moves to the output tray

4 Exit unit moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit

5 Paper support unit prevents paper from being fallen down or bent when the long length paper such as A3 is
ejected from the exit unit

6 Main paddle unit moves paper to the sub paddle

7 Sub paddle unit moves paper to the end fence

8 End fence unit sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper

9 Tamper unit aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper

10 Stapler unit performs stapling to a bundle of aligned documents

11 Ejector 1 unit transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit

12 Ejector 2 unit grips a stack of paper up and ejects it onto the output tray

13 Output tray unit stacks the job ended paper

14 Paper holding unit controls the output tray movement

Sensor

Overview 2489
 Figure 6-4 Inner finisher system - sensor

Table 6-7 Inner finisher system - sensor

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S1 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0350 Photo emitter, Checks paper comes into the
detector entrance unit

S2 Stapler position 0604-001393 113-0491 Photo interrupter Makes the stapler be positioned in the
sensor exact stapling position
113-0492

S3 Front cover JC39-01610A 113-0410 Cover open Checks whether the front cover is
switch switch closed or opened

S4 Main paddle 0604-001393 113-0370 Photo interrupter Checks the main paddle locates at the
home sensor home position

S5 Front tamper 0604-001393 113-0390 Photo interrupter Checks the front tamper locates at
home sensor the home position

S6 Output tray 0604-001393 113-0473 Photo interrupter Checks the output tray motor is
motor sensor operational

S7 Output tray lower JC90-01320A (*) 113-0472 Lower limit Checks the lower limit (=Output tray is
limit switch switch assembly full) of the output tray

S8 Output tray top 0603-001309 (*) 113-0471 Photo TR Checks the upper limit of output tray
of stack sensor
(receiver)

S9 Paper holding 0604-001393 113-0470 Photo interrupter Checks the location of the paper
sensor holding actuator

S10 Ejector 2 home 0604-001393 113-0462 Photo interrupter Checks the ejector 2 locates at the
sensor home position.

S11 Ejector 2 motor 0604-001393 113-0463 Photo interrupter Checks the ejector 2 motor is
sensor operational

S12 Paper support 0604-001393 113-0481 Photo interrupter Checks the paper support locates at
home sensor the home position

2490 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-7 Inner finisher system - sensor (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S13 Output tray top 0601-003440 113-0471 LED IR Checks the upper limit of output tray
of stack sensor
(led)

S14 Rear tamper 0604-001393 113-0380 Photo interrupter Checks the rear tamper locates at the
home sensor home position

S15 Top cover switch JC39-01610A (*) 113-0420 Cover open Checks whether the top cover is
switch closed or opened

S16 Ejector 1 home 0604-001393 113-0461 Photo interrupter Checks the ejector 1 locates at the
sensor home position

S17 End fence sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0361 Photo emitter, Check paper comes into the end fence
detector unit

S18 Punch waste box 0604-001393 113-0620 Photo interrupter Detects the punch waste box is
sensor installed

S19 Punch waste full 0604-001381 (*) 113-0621 Photo emitter, Checks the punch waste box is full
sensor detector

S20 Finisher docking 0604-001393 113-0000 Photo interrupter Checks the finisher is installed
sensor

S21 Exit sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-0360 Photo interrupter Checks paper comes into the exit unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 6-5 Inner finisher system - Photo interrupter (0604-001393)

Figure 6-6 Inner finisher system - Photo emitter, detector (0604-001381)

Motor and solenoid

Overview 2491
 Figure 6-7 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid

Table 6-8 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Motor Description

sensor

M1 Stapler JC93-00999A (*) 113-0581 Step motor Drives the stapler unit
position motor

M2 Exit motor JC31-00169B (*) 113-0502 Step motor Drives the exit roller and the sub
paddle unit

M3 Main paddle JC93-01001A (*) 113-0510 Step motor Home Drives the main paddle unit
motor
assembly

M4 Output tray JC90-01334B (*) 113-0570 DC Motor Encoder Drives the output tray unit
motor
assembly

M5 Rear tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-0520 Step motor Home Drives the rear tamper unit
motor
assembly

M6 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 113-0562 DC Motor Home, Drives the ejector 2 unit
assembly encoder

M7 Ejector1 motor JC93-00998A 113-0561 Step Motor Home Drives the ejector 1 unit
assembly

M8 Paper support JC93-00802B 113-0571 Step Motor Home Drives paper support unit
motor
assembly

M9 Front tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-0530 Step Motor Home Drives the front tamper unit
motor
assembly

2492 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-8 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Motor Description

sensor

M10 Entrance motor JC90-01344A (*) 113-0501 Step Motor Drives the entrance roller and the
assembly middle roller

SL1 Paper holding JC33-00037A (*) 113-0591 Solenoid Drives paper holding unit
solenoid
(*) This part is in ordering system.

The sensor mounted at the driving motor detects motor operation. If a motor doesn’t work properly, an event
code only for the motor will pop up.

Figure 6-8 Inner finisher system - motor sensor

The home position sensor is installed for the purpose of checking the reference point when the specific unit is
operating.

Figure 6-9 Inner finisher system - home sensor

Roller

Overview 2493
 Figure 6-10 Inner finisher system - roller

Table 6-9 Inner finisher system - roller

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

R1 Entrance roller JC66-04243A (*) Roller Moves paper forward

R2 Middle roller JC66-04243A (*) Roller Moves paper forward

R3 Exit roller JC66-04244A (*) Roller Moves paper forward

(*) This part is in ordering system.

PCA

Figure 6-11 Inner finisher system - PCA

2494 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-10 Inner finisher system - roller

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

1 Main PCA JC92-02774B (*)

2 Rear joint PCA JC92-02780A (*) Joint PCA between main PCA
and several parts punch, stapler,
entrance, and front door
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Punch unit (optional)

Learn about the punch unit of the inner finisher.

The punch unit is a device that punches holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper. The punch unit is located
immediately before the entrance unit and punches holes onto a paper.

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole2/3 Punch : Y1G02-67901

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole2/4 Punch : Y1G03-67901

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Punch : Y1G04-67901

NOTE: Puncher types vary depending on the country/region.

In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
clockwise, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make holes. When
making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the inner gear rotates to the left to drill
two holes. The travel distance and position of the motor are detected and controlled by the hole punch home
sensor and the hole punch motor sensor.

Figure 6-12 Inner finisher system - punched hole location and pair

For more information, go to the HP WISE support portal and search for HP LaserJet Managed MFP - How to use
the hole punch (c05450959).

Punch unit (optional) 2495

 Figure 6-13 Inner finisher system - punch unit overview

Figure 6-14 Inner finisher system - punch unit detail view

Table 6-11 Inner finisher system - punch unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

- Hole 2/3 Punch Y1G02-67901 (*) Punch unit assembly for hole 2/3

Hole 2/4 Punch Y1G03-67901 Punch unit assembly for hole 2/4

Swedish Punch Y1G04-67901 Punch unit assembly for Swedish

Punch cover JC90-01343B Punch cover (for the finisher punch

is not installed)

1 Punch motor - 113-0610 Drives the entrance roller

connected by a belt

2 Punch motor sensor - 113-0600 Detects punch motor operation

3 Punch home sensor - 113-0612 Detects punchers’ home position

Not Punch PBA 2-4 hole SS465-67001 (*)

shown

Not Punch PBA 2-3 hole SS467-67001 (*)

shown

2496 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-11 Inner finisher system - punch unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

Not Punch PBA Swedish SS466-67001 (*)

shown
(*) This part is in system.

Figure 6-15 Inner finisher system - punch unit operation (3 holes)

Figure 6-16 Inner finisher system - punch unit operation (2 holes)

Entrance unit
Learn about the entrance unit of the inner finisher.

The entrance unit is located right after the punch unit. This unit is driven by entrance motor which is installed on
the rear of the finisher. This motor is connected to the entrance roller by a belt, which transfers driving force to
move paper from the printer to the finisher inside. If an error such as paper jam occurs in the entrance unit, the
entrance sensor detects the error and generates an event code (13.60.xx).

Entrance unit 2497

 Figure 6-17 Inner finisher system - entrance unit overview

Figure 6-18 Inner finisher system - entrance unit detail view

Table 6-12 Inner finisher system - entrance unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S1 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0350 Detects paper if it comes into the
entrance unit

M10 Entrance motor JC90-01344A (*) 113-0501 Drives the entrance roller
assembly connected by a belt

- Entrance motor JC31-00169B (*)

R1 Entrance roller JC66-04243A (*) Moves paper forward

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Diverter unit
Learn about the diverter unit of the inner finisher.

The diverter unit holds paper so that the newly printed paper can wait for a few seconds until the stapled bundle
moves to the output tray. The diverter unit is used to change paper path, which is done by a spring mounted on
the diverter unit. When paper exit from the unit, it goes through the upper path of the diverter. When the paper
rolls back, it passes the lower paper path created by the diverter. Here, the paper sits for a while until the next
paper is ready to come out together.

2498 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-19 Inner finisher system - diverter unit overview

Figure 6-20 Inner finisher system - diverter unit detail view

Table 6-13 Inner finisher system - diverter unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M10 Entrance motor JC90-01344A (*) 113-501 Drives the feed roller connected by
assembly a belt

Entrance motor JC31-00169B (*)

R2 Middle roller JC66-04243A (*) Drives paper forward installed in

front of the diverter

1 Diverter JC61-06392A Changes paper path when paper

goes backward

2 Diverter spring JC61-07269A Pulls the diverter to upward so

that it makes paper path to the
lower of the diverter
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Diverter unit operation

1. Paper goes forward to the output tray.

Diverter unit 2499

 2. Exit roller stops after paper passes by the diverter unit.

3. Paper goes backward under the diverter unit.

Exit unit
Learn about the exit unit of the inner finisher.

The exit unit is the part that moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit. The exit unit is powered by
an exit motor installed on the front of the finisher. The motor and the exit roller are connected by a single belt.
The exit motor rotates in both the forward and reverse directions, since it serves to return paper to a new paper

2500 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

path created by the diverter unit. The exit sensor is installed right in front of exit roller. It generates an event code
when a paper jam occurred.

Figure 6-21 Inner finisher system - exit unit overview

Figure 6-22 Inner finisher system - exit unit detail view

Table 6-14 Inner finisher system - exit unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Rear compile guide JC61-07450A (*) Guides to help paper move

through the paper path

2 Front compile guide JC61-07449A (*) Guides to help paper move

through the paper path

Exit unit 2501

 Table 6-14 Inner finisher system - exit unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

3 Exit sensor actuator JC66-04199A (*) 113-0360 Makes the sensor on and off by
checking paper

S21 Exit sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-0360 Detects paper if it passes through
the exit unit

M2 Exit motor assembly JC90-01331A 113-0502 Drives the exit roller connected by
a belt

Exit motor JC31-00169B (*)

R3 Exit roller JC66-04244A (*) Moves paper to the ejector unit

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Exit unit operation

1. When rotating the exit motor counter clockwise, paper goes forward to the output tray.

2. When rotating the exit motor clockwise, paper goes backward to the end fence unit.

2502 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Paper support unit
Learn about the paper support unit of the inner finisher.

Paper support unit works to prevent the paper from falling out or being folded. Also, the newly printed paper will
not scatter papers already sitting on the output tray. Paper guides are installed on each front and rear side of the
finisher, these guides move towards the output tray when the paper exits, then the guides return to the original
position after the support operation is completed. The paper support home sensor confirms the original position
of the guide.

Figure 6-23 Inner finisher system - paper support unit overview

Figure 6-24 Inner finisher system - paper support unit detail view

Table 6-15 Inner finisher system - paper support unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Rear paper support JC90-01311A (*) Supports paper not to be bended

2 Front paper support JC90-01310A (*) Supports paper not to be bended

S12 Paper support home 0604-001393 113-0481 Detects the paper support guides
sensor locate at the home position

Paper support unit 2503

 Table 6-15 Inner finisher system - paper support unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M8 Paper support motor JC93-00802B 113-0571 Drives paper support guides from
assembly the home position to the forward
direction

Paper support motor JC31-00149A

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paper support unit operation

Paper support unit is extended to the arrow direction to help paper is bent of fallen to the output tray.

Figure 6-25 Inner finisher system - paper support unit operation

Paddle unit
Learn about the paddle unit of the inner finisher.

The paddle unit consists of two paddle systems, a main paddle and a sub paddle. First, when paper is discharged
from the exit unit, the main paddle unit moves paper to the sub paddle. Then the sub paddle unit moves paper to
the end fence unit so that it can be ready to be stapled.

The main paddle unit is operated by the main paddle motor. The main paddle sensor detects the main paddle
position. The sub paddle unit rotates by the exit motor.

2504 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-26 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system overview (main paddle unit)

Figure 6-27 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system overview (sub paddle unit)

Figure 6-28 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system detail view (1/2)

Paddle unit 2505

 Figure 6-29 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system detail view (2/2)

Table 6-16 Inner finisher system - paddle unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Main paddle JC90-01327A (*) Moves paper to the sub paddle

unit

1-a Main paddle kit JC82-01038A (*)

1-b Main paddle A JC63-04957A (*)

1-c Main paddle B JC63-04958A (*)

1-d Main paddle holder JC81-07560A (*)

2 Sub paddle JC90-01336A (*) Gets paper move to the end fence
and arrange them to be stapled
correctly

S4 Main paddle home 0604-001393 113-0370 Detects the home position of the
sensor main paddle

M3 Main paddle motor JC90-01331A (*) 113-0510 Drives the main paddle unit
assembly connected by a belt

Main paddle motor JC31-00149A

M2 Exit motor JC31-00169B (*) 113-0502 Drives the sub paddle unit
connected by a belt
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paddle unit operation

1. Main paddles get paper moves to the sub paddle unit.

2506 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Sub paddle unit gets paper goes to the end fence unit.

Tamper unit
Learn about the tamper unit of the inner finisher.

The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper in order to staple it to the correct
position. When a certain amount of paper for stapling is collected after printing, the tamper unit hits the left and
right ends of the paper to align the paper correctly.

Each temper has a motor on the back side that delivers driving force to move. The temper unit sensors are
mounted on the back side of the unit, to check the position of the temper unit.

Tamper unit 2507

 Figure 6-30 Inner finisher system - tamper unit overview

Figure 6-31 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (1/3)

Figure 6-32 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (rear) (2/3)

2508 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-33 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (front) (3/3)

Table 6-17 Inner finisher system - tamper unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00899A (*) Aligns left and right side of paper

2 Rear tamper JC82-00900A (*) Aligns left and right side of paper

M5 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-0520 Drives the rear temper unit
assembly

Rear tamper motor JC31-00149A

S14 Rear tamper home 0604-001393 113-0380 Detects the reference position of
sensor the tamper unit

M9 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-0530 Drives the front tamper unit
assembly

Front tamper motor JC31-00149A

S5 Front tamper home 0604-001393 113-0390 Detects the reference position of

sensor the tamper unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tamper unit operation

1. Paper is arranged at the end of the end fence unit.

2. The left and right tampers arrange a stack of paper.

Tamper unit 2509

 End fence unit
Learn about the end fence unit of the inner finisher.

The paddle unit moves paper to the end fence unit. The end fence unit sets the standard position of the paper
to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper. The end fence is fixed onto the finisher, and the end fence
sensor can sense any paper entering the end fence unit.

Figure 6-34 Inner finisher system - end fence unit overview

2510 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-35 Inner finisher system - end fence unit detail view

Table 6-18 Inner finisher system - end fence unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 End fence JC61-06428A Aligns paper toward top and

bottom direction

2 End fence sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0361 Detects paper whether paper
exists in the end fence unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

End fence unit operation

1. Paper goes into the end fence unit through the main paddle unit and sub paddle unit. At the same time the
end fence unit is aligned paper to the direction of yellow line.

2. The end fence sensor is checking whether paper goes into the end fence sensor.

End fence unit 2511

 Stapler unit
Learn about the stapler unit of the inner finisher.

Stapler unit is a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents. Documents are
collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then stapler assembly staples the
bundle. There are 6 options to make a bundle.

Figure 6-36 Inner finisher system - stapling options

The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor installed inside. The four stapler position sensors are mounted so
that the stapler can be positioned in the exact stapling position whether it is stapled on the left, the right, or at
the center of the document. Stapling is done by the motor inside the stapler assembly.

Figure 6-37 Inner finisher system - stapler unit overview

2512 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-38 Inner finisher system - stapler unit detail view (1/2)

Figure 6-39 Inner finisher system - stapler unit detail view (2/2)

Table 6-19 Inner finisher system - stapler unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Stapler assembly JC59-00040A (*) Staples a bundle of paper

1-a Staple cartridge JC81-07408B (*) Staple cartridge

S2 Stapler position sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0491 Detects and moves the staple
assembly position to make a
113-0492 bundle of paper at the exact
location

M1 Stapler position motor JC93-00999A (*) 113-0581 Gets the staple assembly move
toward top and down direction of
paper
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Stapler unit operation

1. The stapler position motor delivers the stapler assembly to the horizontal direction (yellow line).

Stapler unit 2513

 2. The stapler assembly checks front and rear home position and moves where the stapler position sensors are
located depending on stapling types.

Ejector unit
Learn about the ejector unit of the inner finisher.

The ejector unit moves a bundle of stapled paper out. The ejector unit consists of ejector1 and ejector2. The
Ejector1 transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit. During this process, the
ejector1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector1 unit. And the ejector1 home position sensor controls
the movement of the ejector1. When the paper arrives at the ejector2 unit, the ejector2 grabs a stack of paper
and ejects it onto the output tray. The ejector2 motor is responsible for this process, and the ejector2 motor
sensor helps it to be controlled correctly. In addition, the ejector2 home position sensor is mounted to check the
location of the ejector2.

2514 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-40 Inner finisher system - ejector unit overview

Figure 6-41 Inner finisher system - ejector unit detail view (1/3)

Figure 6-42 Inner finisher system - ejector unit detail view (2/3)

Ejector unit 2515

 Figure 6-43 Inner finisher system - ejector unit detail view (3/3)

Table 6-20 Inner finisher system - ejector unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

NA Ejector SS456-61001 (*)

1 Ejector2 Not applicable Moves paper from the ejector 1 to

the output tray

2 Ejector1 Not applicable Moves the stack of paper from the

end fence to the ejector2

S10 Ejector2 home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0462 Detects the home position of the
ejector2

S16 Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0461 Detects the home position of the
ejector1

3 Ejector motor assembly JC90-01309A Moves the ejector1 and ejector2

M6 Ejector2 motor assembly JC93-01168A (*) 113-0562 Moves the ejector2 forward and
backward

Ejector2 motor JC31-00175A Detects the ejector2 motor

rotation

S11 Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0463

M7 Ejector1 motor assembly JC93-00998A (*) 113-0561 Grabs a stack of paper, then move
it to the output tray

Ejector1 motor JC31-00009C

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Ejector unit operation

1. Ejector 1 pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector 2 unit.

2516 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Ejector 2 grabs paper, then moves forward to the output tray unit direction.

3. Ejector2 draws off paper on the output tray.

Ejector unit 2517

 Output tray & paper holding unit
Learn about the output tray & paper holding unit of the inner finisher.

The output tray moves up and down along the rails inside the finisher, and the output tray motor controls those
movement according to the signals sent from the paper holding sensor. As paper stacks up on the output tray,
the paper holding unit is lifted by papers. When the paper holding sensor is touched, the output tray moves
downward.

The machine detects when the output tray is full as the output tray hits the lower limit switch. The output tray
top of stack sensor is mounted on both left and right sides for the case that the paper holding sensor breaks
down.

The paper holding solenoid lifts the paper holding actuator up when a new bundle of paper come to the output
tray.

Figure 6-44 Inner finisher system - output tray unit overview

2518 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-45 Inner finisher system - output tray unit detail view (1/2)

Figure 6-46 Inner finisher system - output tray unit detail view (2/2)

Table 6-21 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Output tray JC90-01337B (*) Stacking plate for ejected paper

M4 Output tray motor JC90-01334B (*) 113-0570 Moves the output tray up and
assembly down

Output tray motor JC31-00178B (*)

S6 Output tray motor sensor 0604-001393 113-0473 Detects if the output tray motor is
operational

2 Output tray frame JC90-01319A (*)

S7 Output tray lower limit JC90-01320A (*) 113-0472 Detects the lowest position of the
switch output tray

3 Output tray lower JC66-04200A (*) 113-0472 Detects the lowest position of the
actuator output tray

4 Output tray top of stack JC82-01039A (*) 113-0471 Detects abnormal movement of
sensor kit output tray (Output tray top of
stack sensor receiver + led)

S8 Output tray top of stack 0603-001309 (*)

sensor (receiver)

Output tray & paper holding unit 2519

 Table 6-21 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S13 Output tray top of stack 0601-003440

sensor (led)
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 6-47 Inner finisher system - paper holding unit overview

Figure 6-48 Inner finisher system - paper holding unit detail view

Table 6-22 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Paper holding actuator JC90-01313A (*) Controls the output tray height,
and grabs stacked paper not to be
scattered

2 Paper holding kit JC90-01314A (*) Paper holding solenoid + Paper

holding sensor

SL1 Paper holding solenoid JC33-00037A (*) 113-0591 Moves paper holding actuator up
when paper goes out to the output
tray

2520 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-22 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S9 Paper holding sensor 0604-001393 113-0470 Detects stacked paper position

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Inner finisher system - output tray & paper holding unit operation

1. Paper holding unit helps paper stores stable on the output tray. Besides it detects amount of stacked paper
and get the output tray moves downward.

2. When paper goes out to the output tray, paper holding solenoid forcibly make paper holding actuator goes
upward to create the paper passage not to be jammed by the paper holding actuator.

3. As the paper accumulates, output tray moves downward. When it reaches at the end of the moving range,
output tray lower limit switch is pressed. The switch detects paper stacks full on the output tray.

Output tray & paper holding unit 2521

 4. In case of fatal error in the output tray unit and paper holding unit, output tray top of stack sensor makes the
machine emergency stop so that output tray unit does not move upward.

PCA connection information

Learn about the PCA connection information.

2522 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-49 Inner finisher system - PCA connection information

Table 6-23 Inner finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information

CN No. Connector name Motor Sensor Switch & Solenoid

(Diagnostics) (Diagnostics) (Diagnostics)

CN1 Rear sensor ● Punch waste box

sensor (113-0620)

● Finisher docking
sensor (113-0000)

● Entrance sensor
(113-0350)

CN2 Rear ● Rear tamper motor ● Rear tamper home ● Top cover switch
(113-0520) sensor (113-0380) (113-0420)

● Paper support motor ● Output tray top

(113-0571) of stack sensor
(113-0471)

● Exit sensor
(113-0360)

● End fence sensor

(113-0361)

● Paper support home

sensor (113-0481)

PCA connection information 2523

 Table 6-23 Inner finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)

CN No. Connector name Motor Sensor Switch & Solenoid

(Diagnostics) (Diagnostics) (Diagnostics)

CN3 Rear joint ● Stapler motor ● Stapler low ● Front cover switch
(113-0550) sensor(113-0440) (113-0420)

● Stapler position motor ● Stapler ready sensor

(113-0581) (113-0451)

● Entrance motor ● Stapler home

(113-0501) sensor(113-0430)

● Punch motor ● Stapler position

(113-0610) sensor (front home)
(113-0491)

● Stapler position
sensor (rear home)
(113-0492)

● Punch waste full

sensor (113-0621)

● Punch motor
sensor(113-0600)

● Punch home sensor

(113-0612)

CN4 Ejector ● Ejector2 motor ● Ejector2 motor sensor

(113-0562) (113-0463)

● Ejector1 motor ● Ejector2 home sensor

(113-0561) (113-0462)

● Ejector1 home sensor

(113-0461)

CN5 Main (to the main PBA)

CN6 Output tray lower limit ● Output tray lower limit

switch switch (113-0472)

CN7 Front ● Exit motor (113-0502) ● Output tray motor

sensor (113-0473)
● Main paddle motor
(113-0510) ● Main paddle home
sensor (113-0370)
● Output tray motor
(113-0570) ● Front tamper home
sensor (113-0390)
● Front tamper motor
(113-0530) ● Paper holding sensor
(113-0470)

● Output tray top

of stack sensor
(113-0471)

CN9 Paper holding solenoid ● Paper holding solenoid

(113-0591)

2524 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-23 Inner finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)

CN No. Connector name Motor Sensor Switch & Solenoid

(Diagnostics) (Diagnostics) (Diagnostics)

CN10 Stapler position sensor ● Stapler position sensor

(mid front) (-)

● Stapler position sensor

(mid rear) (-)

Service approach
Learn about the service approach of the inner finisher.

CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach under
the weight of the product.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when assembling and disassembling

● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage, and
current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the machine, circuit
overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause the
printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This printer
contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short circuit or
electric shock.

● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is disassembled, dust
might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts inside
the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to overheating
and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCAs

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

Service approach 2525

 ● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when handling
insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or lamps,
as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the correct
screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in their original
positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when releasing
them. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

Precautions when handling PCA

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA. Service
personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when handling
insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or lamps,
as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the correct
screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in their original
positions.

2526 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 – Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Learn about releasing plastic latches.

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them carefully. To
remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

Before performing service

Learn what to do before performing service.

● Remove all paper from the product.

● Turn off the power using the power button.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the toner cartridges.

● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.

ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an
ESD-sensitive assembly.

Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

After performing service

Learn what to do after performing service.

Releasing plastic latches 2527

 ● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.

1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print quality
defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 6-24 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your computer, enter
the printer IP address or host name in the address/URL field. The
EWS contains a link to the HP SureSupply web site, which provides
options for purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part is
orderable.

2528 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher)
Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher)

NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-
protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to
provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by
placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher) 2529

 Parts and diagrams (inner finisher)
View inner finisher exploded diagrams and parts lists.

Inner finisher (main)

Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (main).

Figure 6-50 Inner finisher (main)

6-1

6-2

Table 6-25 Inner finisher (main)

Ref Part number Description Qty

Complete Y1G00-67901 Inner finisher whole unit 1

1 JC90-01310A Front paper support 1

2 JC90-01311A Rear paper support 1

3 JC82-00899A Front tamper unit assembly 1

4 JC82-00900A Rear tamper unit assembly 1

2530 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-25 Inner finisher (main) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

5 SS456-61001 Ejector 1

6 JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly 1

6-1 JC31-00178B Output tray motor 1

6-2 0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor 1

7 JC90-01336A Sub paddle unit 1

8 JC90-01337B Output tray 1

10 JC81-07408B Staple cartridge 1

11 JC90-01343B Punch cover 1

13 6102-003354 Slide pack 2

14 JC61-07713A Wavy roller retainer 1

Not shown JC39-02169A Main interface harness 1

Inner finisher (main) 2531

 Inner finisher (covers)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (covers)

Figure 6-51 Inner finisher (covers)

Table 6-26 Inner finisher (covers)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 JC90-01321B Front cover 1

2 JC90-01322B Middle cover 1

3 JC90-01323B Top cover 1

4 JC90-01324B Left cover 1

4-1 JC82-01039A Output tray top of stack sensor kit 1

5 JC63-04750B Rear cover 1

6 JC63-04792B PCA cover 1

7 JC90-01546A Exit bin full 1

2532 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit,
and output tray unit).

Figure 6-52 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)

23-1

23
23-2

8-1

8-2

25 20
15-2
15-1

24

Table 6-27 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 0604-001393 Main paddle home sensor 2

2 JC92-02774B Main PCA 1

4 6602-003644 Entrance motor timing belt 1

5 JC82-01038A Paddle kit 1

5-1 JC63-04957A Paddle A 2

5-2 JC63-04958A Paddle B 2

5-3 JC81-07560A Paddle holder 4

8-1 JC66-04243A Entrance roller 1

8-2 JC66-04243A Middle roller 1

10 JC90-01344A Entrance motor assembly 1

Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit) 2533
 Table 6-27 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

13 JC66-04199A Exit sensor actuator 1

14 JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator 1

15 JC90-01314A Paper holding kit 1

15-1 JC33-00037A Paper holding solenoid 1

15-2 0604-001393 Paper holding sensor 1

16 JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch 1

16-3 JC66-04200A Output tray lower limit switch actuator 1

17 JC93-01001A Main paddle motor assembly 1

17-1 JC31-00149A Main paddle motor 1

19-1 JC66-04244A Exit roller 1

19-2 JC61-07449A Front compile guide 1

19-3 JC61-07450A Rear compile guide 1

20 JC90-01331A Exit motor assembly 1

20-1 JC31-00169B Exit motor 1

21 JC90-01319A Output tray frame 1

22 JC92-02780A Rear joint PCA 1

23 shown JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly 1

23-1 JC31-00178B Output tray motor 1

23-2 0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor 1

24 0604-001415 Exit sensor 1

25 JC61-06391A Middle lower guide 1

2534 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Inner finisher (paper support unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (paper support unit).

Figure 6-53 Inner finisher (paper support unit)

2-2
2-1

1 2
Table 6-28 Inner finisher (paper support unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 JC90-01310A Front paper support 1

2 JC90-01311A Rear paper support 1

2-1 0604-001393 Paper support home sensor 1

2-2 JC93-00802B Paper support motor assembly 1

Inner finisher (paper support unit) 2535

 Inner finisher (tamper unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (tamper unit).

Figure 6-54 Inner finisher (tamper unit)

2 2-1
2-2

1-1

1-2

Table 6-29 Inner finisher (tamper unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 JC82-00900A Rear tamper unit 1

1-1 0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor 1

1-2 JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor assembly 1

2 JC82-00899A Front tamper unit 1

2-1 0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor 1

2-2 JC93-01001A Front tamper motor assembly 1

2536 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit).

Figure 6-55 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)

7
6

8
2

Table 6-30 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 0604-001381 End fence sensor 1

2 0604-001393 Stapler position sensor 1

3 JC93-00999A Stapler position motor 1

4 0604-001381 Punch waste full sensor 1

5 JC39-01610A Top cover switch 1

6 0604-001393 Finisher docking sensor 1

7 0604-001393 Punch waste box sensor 1

Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit) 2537

 Table 6-30 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

8 JC39-01610A Compile cover switch 1

2538 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit).

Figure 6-56 Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)

Table 6-31 Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 JC59-00040A Stapler assembly 1

1-1 JC81-07408B Staple cartridge 1

2 JC90-01343B Punch cover 1

2-1 0604-001381 Entrance sensor 1

Not shown SS465-67001 Punch PBA 2-4 hole 1

Not shown SS467-67001 Punch PBA 2-3 hole 1

Not shown SS466-67001 Punch PBA Swedish 1

Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit) 2539

 Inner finisher (ejector unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (ejector unit).

Figure 6-57 Inner finisher (ejector unit)

5 7
2
6

Table 6-32 Inner finisher (ejector unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 SS456-61001 Ejector 1

2 0604-001393 Ejector2 home sensor 1

3 0604-001393 Ejector1 home sensor 1

4 JC90-01309A Ejector motor assembly 1

5 JC93-01168A Ejector2 motor assembly 1

6 0604-001393 Ejector2 motor sensor 1

7 JC93-00998A Ejector1 motor assembly 1

Covers

2540 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: Front cover (C1)
Learn how to remove and replace the front cover.

To view tear down and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a tear down video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-33 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01321B Front cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Front cover (C1) 2541

 1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-58 Remove the front cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

2542 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (C8)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-34 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04750B Rear cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (C8) 2543

 ● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-59 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-60 Remove the rear cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2544 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Middle cover (C3)

Learn how to remove and replace the middle cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Removal and replacement: Middle cover (C3) 2545

 Table 6-35 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01322B Middle cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-61 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2546 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-62 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-63 Open the front door and punch cover

Remove the middle cover 2547

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by lifting off
the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-64 Remove the middle cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top cover (C2)

Learn how to remove and replace the top cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

2548 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-36 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01323B Top cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the rear cover 2549

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-65 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-66 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the top cover

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.

2550 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-67 Remove the top cover

▲ Remove one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the top cover by lifting off the hinge
pins at the front.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: PCA cover (C6)

Learn how to remove and replace the PCA cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2551

 View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-37 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04792B PCA cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

2552 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-68 Remove the PCA cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2553

 Removal and replacement: Left cover (C7)
Learn how to remove and replace the left cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-38 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01324B Left cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

2554 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-69 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-70 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the front cover 2555

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-71 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-72 Remove four screws

2556 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-73 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-74 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2557

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-75 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2558 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2559

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-76 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-77 Remove two screws

2560 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-78 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-79 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2561

 7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Entrance unit

Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor (S1)

Learn how to remove and replace the entrance sensor.

2562 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-39 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Entrance sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the rear cover 2563

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-80 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-81 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

2564 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-82 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-83 Open the punch cover

Remove the punch cover 2565

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the punch
cover.

Figure 6-84 Remove the punch cover

3. Remove the entrance sensor

Follow these steps to remove the entrance sensor.

2566 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Loosen the adhesive tape around, and then remove four screws. And then remove the punch cover.

Figure 6-85 Remove the punch cover

2. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the entrance sensor bracket.

Figure 6-86 Remove the entrance sensor bracket

Remove the entrance sensor 2567

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 6-87 Remove the entrance sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor (M10)

Learn how to remove and replace the entrance motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

2568 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-40 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01344A Entrance motor assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

Remove the front cover 2569

 4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-88 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-89 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2570 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-90 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-91 Open the front door and punch cover

Remove the middle cover 2571

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by lifting off
the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-92 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-93 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-94 Open the punch cover

2572 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the punch
cover.

Figure 6-95 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-96 Remove the e-ring and bushing

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2573

 2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden from
view).

Figure 6-97 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-98 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

2574 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-99 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-100 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the entrance motor

Follow these steps to remove the entrance motor.

Remove the entrance motor 2575

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-101 Remove two screws

2. Open the clamps, and then unplug the connector.

Figure 6-102 Unplug the connector

2576 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-103 Remove the entrance motor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Exit unit

Unpack the replacement assembly 2577

 Removal and replacement: Exit roller (R3)
Learn how to remove and replace the exit roller.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-41 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04244A Exit roller

JC61-07449A Front compile guide

JC61-07450A Rear compile guide

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

2578 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-104 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-105 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the front cover 2579

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-106 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the sub paddle unit

Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-107 Remove one screw

2580 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-108 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-109 Remove the sub paddle unit

4. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2581

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-110 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-111 Release the timing belt

2582 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-112 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-113 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2583

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-114 Remove the exit roller

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit sensor (S21)

Learn how to remove and replace the exit sensor.

2584 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-42 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Exit sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

Remove the front cover 2585

 1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-115 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-116 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2586 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-117 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-118 Open the front door and punch cover

Remove the middle cover 2587

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by lifting off
the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-119 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-120 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-121 Open the punch cover

2588 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the punch
cover.

Figure 6-122 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-123 Remove the e-ring and bushing

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2589

 2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden from
view).

Figure 6-124 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-125 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

2590 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-126 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-127 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the exit sensor

Follow these steps to remove the exit sensor.

Remove the exit sensor 2591

 ▲ Remove the exit sensor from the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-128 Remove the exit sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

2592 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M2)

Learn how to remove and replace the exit motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-43 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00169B Exit motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M2) 2593

 ● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-129 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

2594 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ▲ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 6-130 Remove the exit motor bracket

3. Remove the exit motor

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor from the bracket.

Figure 6-131 Remove the exit motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the exit motor 2595

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Paper support unit

Removal and replacement: Front paper support

Learn how to remove and replace the front paper support.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

2596 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-44 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01310A Front paper support

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-132 Remove the front cover

Remove the front cover 2597

 2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-133 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-134 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

2598 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-135 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-136 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

Remove the output tray frame 2599

 1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-137 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-138 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

2600 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

Remove the output tray frame 2601

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-139 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

2602 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-140 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-141 Remove four screws

Remove the left cover 2603

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-142 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

2604 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-143 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-144 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2605

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-145 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-146 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2606 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-147 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-148 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2607

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-149 Remove one screw

2608 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-150 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-151 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2609

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-152 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-153 Release the timing belt

2610 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-154 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-155 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2611

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-156 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-157 Remove four screws

2612 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-158 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-159 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2613

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-160 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-161 Disconnect one connector

2614 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-162 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-163 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the front paper support

Follow these steps to remove the front paper support.

Remove the front paper support 2615

 1. Remove the e-ring and the bushing, and then pull and remove the drive shaft.

Figure 6-164 Remove the drive shaft

TIP: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down position(against
the stops).

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front paper support.

Figure 6-165 Remove the front paper support

17. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2616 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Rear paper support

Removal and replacement: Rear paper support

Learn how to remove and replace the rear paper support.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Rear paper support 2617

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-45 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01311A Rear paper support

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-166 Remove the front cover

2618 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-167 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-168 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the rear cover 2619

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-169 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-170 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2620 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-171 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-172 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2621

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

2622 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-173 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2623

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-174 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-175 Remove four screws

2624 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-176 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2625

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-177 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-178 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2626 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-179 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-180 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2627

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-181 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-182 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2628 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-183 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2629

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-184 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-185 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2630 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-186 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-187 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2631

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-188 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-189 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2632 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-190 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-191 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2633

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-192 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-193 Remove four screws

2634 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-194 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-195 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2635

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-196 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-197 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the rear paper support

Follow these steps to remove the rear paper support.

2636 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-198 Remove one screw

2. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-199 Remove the shaft

Remove the rear paper support 2637

 3. Remove the rear paper support with attention for pinion.

Figure 6-200 Remove the rear paper support

17. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

2638 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor (S12)
Learn how to remove and replace the paper support home sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-46 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Paper support home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor (S12) 2639

 1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-201 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-202 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2640 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-203 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-204 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2641

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-205 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-206 Remove the pulley

2642 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-207 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2643

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2644 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-208 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-209 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2645

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-210 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-211 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2646 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2647

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-212 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-213 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2648 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-214 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-215 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2649

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-216 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-217 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2650 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-218 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2651

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-219 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-220 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2652 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-221 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-222 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2653

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-223 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-224 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2654 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-225 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-226 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2655

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-227 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-228 Remove four screws

2656 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-229 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-230 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2657

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-231 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-232 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the rear paper support

Follow these steps to remove the rear paper support.

2658 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-233 Remove one screw

2. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-234 Remove the shaft

Remove the rear paper support 2659

 3. Remove the rear paper support with attention for pinion.

Figure 6-235 Remove the rear paper support

17. Remove the paper support home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the paper support home sensor.

▲ Remove the sensor from the rear paper support.

Figure 6-236 Remove the paper support home sensor

18. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2660 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper support motor (M8)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper support motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Paper support motor (M8) 2661

 Table 6-47 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00802B (not orderable) Paper support motor assembly

JC31-00149A (not orderable) Paper support motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-237 Remove the front cover

2662 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-238 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-239 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the rear cover 2663

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-240 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-241 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2664 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-242 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-243 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2665

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

2666 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-244 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2667

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-245 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-246 Remove four screws

2668 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-247 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2669

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-248 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-249 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2670 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-250 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-251 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2671

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-252 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-253 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2672 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-254 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2673

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-255 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-256 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2674 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-257 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-258 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2675

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-259 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-260 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2676 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-261 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-262 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2677

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-263 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-264 Remove four screws

2678 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-265 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-266 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2679

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-267 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-268 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the paper support motor

Follow these steps to remove the paper support motor.

2680 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ▲ Remove two screws, disconnect one connect, and then remove the paper support motor.

Figure 6-269 Remove the paper support motor

17. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Paddle unit

Unpack the replacement assembly 2681

 Removal and replacement: Main paddle
Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-48 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01327A Main paddle

JC82-01038A Main paddle kit

JC63-04957A Main paddle A

JC63-04958A Main paddle B

JC81-07560A Main paddle holder

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

2682 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the main paddle

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle.

1. Open the top cover.

2. Rotate the main paddle shaft to see the lower side of the main paddle.

Figure 6-270 Rotate the main paddle shaft

Remove the main paddle 2683

 3. Remove the main paddle by pushing both sides.

Figure 6-271 Remove the main paddle

TIP: When reassembling the main paddle, check the pin position of the paddle and the hole position of the
shaft, and then assemble them.

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

2684 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle home sensor (S4)

Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle home sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-49 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Main paddle home sensor

Required tools

Removal and replacement: Main paddle home sensor (S4) 2685

 ● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-272 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the main paddle home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle home sensor.

2686 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove one screw. Open the clamp and unplug one connector, and then remove the main paddle home
sensor bracket.

Figure 6-273 Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket

2. Remove the main paddle home sensor from the bracket.

Figure 6-274 Remove the main paddle home sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2687

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle motor (M3)

Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

2688 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-50 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Main paddle motor assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-275 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the main paddle motor

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle motor.

Remove the front cover 2689

 1. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the main paddle motor bracket.

Figure 6-276 Remove the main paddle motor bracket

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor from the bracket.

Figure 6-277 Remove the main paddle motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2690 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle assembly.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Removal and replacement: Main paddle assembly 2691

 Table 6-51 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01327A (not orderable) Main paddle assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-278 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2692 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-279 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-280 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle home sensor bracket.

Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket 2693

 ▲ Remove one screw. Open the clamp and unplug one connector, and then remove the main paddle home
sensor bracket.

Figure 6-281 Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket

4. Remove the main paddle motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle motor bracket.

▲ Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the main paddle motor bracket.

Figure 6-282 Remove the main paddle motor bracket

5. Remove the main paddle

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle.

1. Open the top cover.

2694 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Rotate the main paddle shaft to see the lower side of the main paddle.

Figure 6-283 Rotate the main paddle shaft

3. Remove the main paddle by pushing both sides.

Figure 6-284 Remove the main paddle

TIP: When reassembling the main paddle, check the pin position of the paddle and the hole position of the
shaft, and then assemble them.

Remove the main paddle 2695

 6. Remove the main paddle assembly
Follow these steps to remove the main paddle assembly.

1. Remove the belt in the front.

Figure 6-285 Remove the belt

2696 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring and the main paddle CAM in the rear. And then remove the e-ring and the bushing.

Figure 6-286 Remove the e-ring, cam, and bushing

3. Push the shaft to remove the main paddle shaft.

Figure 6-287 Remove the main paddle shaft

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2697

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Sub paddle unit

Learn how to remove and replace the sub paddle unit.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-52 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01336A Sub paddle unit

Required tools

2698 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-288 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-289 Remove the rear cover

Remove the rear cover 2699

 2. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-290 Remove one screw

2700 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-291 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-292 Remove the sub paddle unit

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2701

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Tamper unit

Front tamper

Removal and replacement: Front tamper

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

2702 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-53 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00899A Front tamper

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2703

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-293 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-294 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2704 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-295 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-296 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2705

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-297 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-298 Remove the pulley

2706 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-299 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2707

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2708 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-300 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-301 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2709

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-302 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-303 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2710 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2711

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-304 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-305 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2712 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-306 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-307 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2713

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-308 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-309 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2714 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-310 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2715

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-311 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-312 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2716 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-313 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-314 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2717

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-315 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-316 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2718 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-317 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-318 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2719

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-319 Remove the front tamper

14. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S5)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

2720 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-54 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

Remove the front cover 2721

 2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-320 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-321 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2722 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-322 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-323 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2723

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-324 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-325 Remove the pulley

2724 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-326 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2725

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2726 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-327 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-328 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2727

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-329 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-330 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2728 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2729

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-331 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-332 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2730 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-333 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-334 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2731

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-335 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-336 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2732 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-337 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2733

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-338 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-339 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2734 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-340 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-341 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2735

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-342 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-343 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2736 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-344 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-345 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2737

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-346 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the front tamper home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper home sensor.

▲ Unplug the connector, and then remove the front tamper home sensor.

Figure 6-347 Remove the front tamper home sensor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2738 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M9)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M9) 2739

 Table 6-55 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Front tamper motor assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-348 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2740 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-349 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-350 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2741

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-351 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-352 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2742 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-353 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-354 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2743

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

2744 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-355 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2745

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-356 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-357 Remove four screws

2746 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-358 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2747

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-359 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-360 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2748 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-361 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-362 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2749

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-363 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-364 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2750 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-365 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2751

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-366 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-367 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2752 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-368 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-369 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2753

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-370 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-371 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2754 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-372 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-373 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2755

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-374 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the front tamper motor

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper motor.

▲ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-375 Remove the front tamper motor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2756 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Rear tamper

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Rear tamper 2757

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-56 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00900A Rear tamper

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-376 Remove the front cover

2758 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-377 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-378 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the rear cover 2759

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-379 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-380 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2760 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-381 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-382 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2761

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

2762 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-383 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2763

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-384 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-385 Remove four screws

2764 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-386 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2765

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-387 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-388 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2766 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-389 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-390 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2767

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-391 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-392 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2768 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-393 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2769

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-394 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-395 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2770 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-396 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-397 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2771

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-398 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-399 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2772 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-400 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-401 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2773

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-402 Remove the rear tamper

14. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S14)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

2774 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-57 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

Remove the front cover 2775

 2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-403 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-404 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2776 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-405 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-406 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2777

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-407 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-408 Remove the pulley

2778 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-409 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2779

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2780 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-410 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-411 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2781

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-412 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-413 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2782 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2783

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-414 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-415 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2784 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-416 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-417 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2785

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-418 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-419 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2786 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-420 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2787

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-421 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-422 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2788 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-423 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-424 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2789

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-425 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-426 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2790 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-427 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-428 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2791

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-429 Remove the rear tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper home sensor.

▲ Unplug the connector, and then remove the rear tamper home sensor.

Figure 6-430 Remove the rear tamper home sensor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

2792 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M5)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M5) 2793

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-58 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-431 Remove the front cover

2794 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-432 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-433 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the rear cover 2795

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-434 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-435 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2796 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-436 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-437 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2797

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

2798 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-438 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2799

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-439 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-440 Remove four screws

2800 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-441 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2801

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-442 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-443 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2802 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-444 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-445 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2803

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-446 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-447 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2804 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-448 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2805

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-449 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-450 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2806 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-451 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-452 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2807

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-453 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-454 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2808 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-455 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-456 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2809

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-457 Remove the rear tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper motor

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper motor.

▲ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-458 Remove the rear tamper motor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2810 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Stapler unit

Removal and replacement: Stapler

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Stapler unit 2811

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-59 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01342A Stapler assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-459 Remove the front cover

2812 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-460 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-461 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

Remove the rear cover 2813

 ▲ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 6-462 Remove the exit motor bracket

4. Remove the stapler

Follow these steps to remove the stapler.

1. Push the stapler from the rear-side to the front-side.

Figure 6-463 Push the stapler

2814 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove one screw, unplug two connectors, and then remove the stapler assembly.

Figure 6-464 Remove the stapler assembly

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the stapler.

Figure 6-465 Remove the stapler

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal

Unpack the replacement assembly 2815

 chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position sensor (S2)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-60 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler position sensor

2816 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-466 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the front cover 2817

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-467 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-468 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

2818 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-469 Open the front door and punch cover

2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by lifting off
the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-470 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-471 Remove the slide shaft

Remove the punch cover 2819

 2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-472 Open the punch cover

3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the punch
cover.

Figure 6-473 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

2820 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-474 Remove the e-ring and bushing

2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden from
view).

Figure 6-475 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2821

 3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-476 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-477 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2822 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-478 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

▲ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 6-479 Remove the exit motor bracket

8. Remove the end fence sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor bracket.

Remove the exit motor bracket 2823

 1. Remove three screws at the front of the inner finisher, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 6-480 Remove the bracket

2. Remove two screws at the front of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-481 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-482 Remove two screws

2824 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 4. Loosen three cable clamps. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the end fence sensor
bracket.

Figure 6-483 Remove the end fence sensor bracket

9. Remove the stapler position sensor

Follow these steps to remove the stapler position sensor.

1. Remove one screw from the front of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-484 Remove one screw

Remove the stapler position sensor 2825

 2. Remove one screw from the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-485 Remove one screw

3. Unplug four photo-sensor connectors. Open the six cable clamps.

Figure 6-486 Unplug connectors

4. Remove the assembly, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 6-487 Remove the stapler position sensor

2826 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

10. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor (M1)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2827

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-61 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00999A Stapler position motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2828 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-488 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-489 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2829

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-490 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-491 Open the front door and punch cover

2830 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by lifting off
the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-492 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-493 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-494 Open the punch cover

Remove the punch cover 2831

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the punch
cover.

Figure 6-495 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-496 Remove the e-ring and bushing

2832 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden from
view).

Figure 6-497 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-498 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

Remove the middle paper guide 2833

 1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-499 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-500 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the stapler position motor

Follow these steps to remove the stapler position motor.

2834 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove three screws, unplug the motor connector, and then remove the stapler position motor bracket.

Figure 6-501 Remove the stapler position motor bracket

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor from the bracket.

Figure 6-502 Remove the stapler position motor

TIP: Use the following steps when reinstalling the stapler position motor.

1. Release the spring tension screw.

Remove the stapler position motor 2835

 2. Apply tension to the spring by pulling the belt, and then tighten the spring tension screw. Tightening
the screw puts maximum slack in the belt.

3. Lower the stapler position motor while placing the belt on the motor pulley, and then secure the
bracket with three screws.

4. Release the spring tension screw to allow the spring to apply tension to the belt, and then tighten it
again

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

2836 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Ejector unit

Removal and replacement: Ejector & paper support assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector & paper support assembly.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-62 Part information

Part number Part description

SS456-61001 Ejector

JC90-01310A Front paper support

JC90-01311A Rear paper support

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

Ejector unit 2837

 ● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-503 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2838 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-504 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-505 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2839

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-506 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-507 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2840 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-508 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-509 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2841

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

2842 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-510 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2843

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-511 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-512 Remove four screws

2844 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-513 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2845

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-514 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-515 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2846 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-516 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-517 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2847

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-518 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-519 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2848 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-520 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2849

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-521 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-522 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2850 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-523 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-524 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2851

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-525 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-526 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2852 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-527 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-528 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2853

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-529 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-530 Remove four screws

2854 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-531 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-532 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2855

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-533 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-534 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

2856 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector motor assembly (S11/ M6/ M7)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector motor assembly.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-63 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01309A (not orderable) Ejector motor assembly

Required tools

Removal and replacement: Ejector motor assembly (S11/ M6/ M7) 2857
 ● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-535 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2858 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-536 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-537 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2859

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-538 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-539 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2860 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-540 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-541 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2861

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

2862 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-542 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2863

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-543 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-544 Remove four screws

2864 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-545 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2865

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-546 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-547 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2866 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-548 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-549 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2867

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-550 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-551 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2868 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-552 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2869

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-553 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-554 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2870 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-555 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-556 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2871

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-557 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-558 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2872 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-559 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-560 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2873

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-561 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-562 Remove four screws

2874 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-563 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-564 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2875

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-565 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-566 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support
Follow these steps to remove the front paper support and the rear paper support.

2876 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ▲ Remove two screws, and then pull the paper support assembly out of ejector assembly.

Figure 6-567 Remove paper support assembly

17. Remove the ejector motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector motor assembly.

1. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two timing belts, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-568 Remove e-ring, washer, belt, and screw

Remove the ejector motor assembly 2877

 2. Remove the timing belt, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-569 Remove the belt, screw

3. Remove the cable from clamp, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor connector.

Figure 6-570 Disconnect the motor and sensor connectors

2878 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 4. Remove the ejector motor assembly.

Figure 6-571 Remove the ejector motor assembly

18. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector assembly (include end fence, S10/ S16)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector assembly.

View videos on how to remove and reassemble the inner finisher below:

Unpack the replacement assembly 2879

 View a teardown video of the inner finisher .

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher .

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-64 Part information

Part number Part description

SS456-61001 Ejector

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2880 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-572 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-573 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2881

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-574 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-575 Remove four screws

2882 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-576 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-577 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2883

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-578 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2884 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2885

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-579 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-580 Remove two screws

2886 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-581 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-582 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2887

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

2888 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-583 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-584 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2889

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-585 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-586 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2890 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-587 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-588 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2891

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-589 Remove one screw

2892 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-590 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-591 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2893

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-592 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-593 Release the timing belt

2894 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-594 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-595 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2895

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-596 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-597 Remove four screws

2896 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-598 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-599 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2897

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-600 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-601 Disconnect one connector

2898 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-602 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-603 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support
Follow these steps to remove the front paper support and the rear paper support.

Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support 2899
 ▲ Remove two screws, and then pull the paper support assembly out of ejector assembly.

Figure 6-604 Remove paper support assembly

17. Remove the ejector motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector motor assembly.

1. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two timing belts, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-605 Remove e-ring, washer, belt, and screw

2900 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the timing belt, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-606 Remove the belt, screw

3. Remove the cable from clamp, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor connector.

Figure 6-607 Disconnect the motor and sensor connectors

Remove the ejector motor assembly 2901

 4. Remove the ejector motor assembly.

Figure 6-608 Remove the ejector motor assembly

18. Remove the ejector assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-609 Remove two screws

2902 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors, and then remove the ejector assembly.

Figure 6-610 Remove the ejector assembly

19. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

End fence unit

Unpack the replacement assembly 2903

 Removal and replacement: End fence sensor (S17)
Learn how to remove and replace the end fence sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-65 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 End fence sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

2904 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-611 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-612 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the front cover 2905

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-613 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-614 Open the front door and punch cover

2906 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by lifting off
the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-615 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-616 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-617 Open the punch cover

Remove the punch cover 2907

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the punch
cover.

Figure 6-618 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-619 Remove the e-ring and bushing

2908 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden from
view).

Figure 6-620 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-621 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

Remove the middle paper guide 2909

 1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-622 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-623 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

2910 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ▲ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 6-624 Remove the exit motor bracket

8. Remove the end fence sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor bracket.

1. Remove three screws at the front of the inner finisher, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 6-625 Remove the bracket

Remove the end fence sensor bracket 2911

 2. Remove two screws at the front of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-626 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-627 Remove two screws

4. Loosen three cable clamps. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the end fence sensor
bracket.

Figure 6-628 Remove the end fence sensor bracket

2912 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the end fence sensor
Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the end fence sensor.

Figure 6-629 Remove the end fence sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Output tray unit

Remove the end fence sensor 2913

 Removal and replacement: Output tray
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the links below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

To view a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray, click the link below.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-66 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01337B Output tray

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

2914 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-630 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-631 Open the top cover

Remove the front cover 2915

 2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-632 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-633 Remove four screws

2916 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-634 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-635 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2917

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-636 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2918 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2919

 5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray top of stack sensor (S8)

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray top of stack sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

2920 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-67 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A output tray top of stack sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2921

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-637 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-638 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2922 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-639 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-640 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2923

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-641 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-642 Remove the pulley

2924 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-643 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2925

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2926 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-644 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-645 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2927

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-646 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-647 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2928 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the output tray top of stack sensor
Follow these steps to Remove the output tray top of stack sensor.

▲ Remove two screws from both sides of the left cover. Remove the bracket, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 6-648 Remove the output tray top of stack sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

Remove the output tray top of stack sensor 2929

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray lower limit switch (S7)

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray lower limit switch.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-68 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

2930 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-649 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the front cover 2931

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-650 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-651 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

2932 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-652 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-653 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

Remove the output tray frame 2933

 1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-654 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-655 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

2934 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

Remove the output tray frame 2935

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-656 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

2936 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-657 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-658 Remove four screws

Remove the left cover 2937

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-659 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

2938 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-660 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray lower limit switch

Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2939

 ▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-661 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Output tray motor assembly

2940 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor assembly (M4)
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor assembly.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-69 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor assembly (M4) 2941

 1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-662 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-663 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2942 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-664 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-665 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2943

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-666 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-667 Remove the pulley

2944 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-668 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2945

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2946 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-669 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-670 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2947

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-671 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-672 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2948 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2949

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-673 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-674 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2950 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor sensor (S6)

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2951

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-70 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2952 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-675 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-676 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2953

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-677 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-678 Remove four screws

2954 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-679 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-680 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2955

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-681 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2956 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2957

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-682 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-683 Remove two screws

2958 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-684 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-685 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2959

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

2960 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-686 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-687 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2961

 9. Remove the output tray motor sensor
Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor sensor.

▲ Remove one screw, remove the shaft, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 6-688 Remove the output tray motor sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor.

2962 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-71 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00178B Output tray motor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

Remove the front cover 2963

 1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-689 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-690 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2964 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-691 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-692 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2965

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-693 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-694 Remove the pulley

2966 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-695 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2967

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2968 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-696 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-697 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2969

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-698 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-699 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2970 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2971

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-700 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-701 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2972 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray motor
Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor.

▲ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the output tray motor.

Figure 6-702 Remove the output tray motor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Remove the output tray motor 2973

 Paper holding unit

Removal and replacement: Paper holding

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-72 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

2974 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-703 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-704 Open the top cover

Remove the front cover 2975

 2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-705 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-706 Remove four screws

2976 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-707 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-708 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2977

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-709 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2978 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2979

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-710 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-711 Remove two screws

2980 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-712 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-713 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2981

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

2982 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-714 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-715 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2983

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-716 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-717 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2984 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-718 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-719 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2985

 11. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding sensor (S9)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

2986 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-73 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Paper holding sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2987

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-720 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-721 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2988 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-722 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-723 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2989

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-724 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-725 Remove the pulley

2990 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-726 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2991

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2992 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-727 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-728 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2993

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-729 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-730 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2994 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2995

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-731 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-732 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2996 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-733 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-734 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2997

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-735 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-736 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2998 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the paper holding sensor
Follow these steps to remove the paper holding sensor.

1. Unplug the connector.

2. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.

3. Remove the paper holding sensor.

Figure 6-737 Remove the paper holding sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Remove the paper holding sensor 2999

 Removal and replacement: Paper holding solenoid (SL1)
Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding solenoid.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-74 Part information

Part number Part description

JC33-00037A Paper holding solenoid

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

3000 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-738 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-739 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the front cover 3001

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-740 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-741 Remove four screws

3002 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-742 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-743 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 3003

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-744 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

3004 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 3005

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-745 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-746 Remove two screws

3006 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-747 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-748 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 3007

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

3008 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-749 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-750 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 3009

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-751 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-752 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

3010 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.

Figure 6-753 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-754 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 3011

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-755 Remove one screw

3012 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-756 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-757 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 3013

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-758 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-759 Release the timing belt

3014 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-760 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-761 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 3015

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-762 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-763 Remove four screws

3016 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-764 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the paper holding solenoid

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding solenoid.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-765 Remove two screws

Remove the paper holding solenoid 3017

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-766 Remove one screw

3. Disconnect two connectors and remove the solenoid assembly.

Figure 6-767 Remove the solenoid assembly

3018 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 4. Remove two screws, and then release the solenoid from the bracket.

Figure 6-768 Remove the paper holding solenoid

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Punch unit

Removal and replacement: Punch cover

Learn how to remove and replace the punch cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3019

 View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-75 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01343B Punch cover

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

3020 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-769 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-770 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

Remove the punch cover 3021

 1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-771 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-772 Open the punch cover

3022 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the punch
cover.

Figure 6-773 Remove the punch cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3023

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Punch waste full sensor (S19)

Learn how to remove and replace the punch waste full sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-76 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Punch waste full sensor

Required tools

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

3024 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

Figure 6-774 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the front cover 3025

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-775 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-776 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

3026 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-777 Open the front door and punch cover

2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by lifting off
the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-778 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-779 Remove the slide shaft

Remove the punch cover 3027

 2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-780 Open the punch cover

3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the punch
cover.

Figure 6-781 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

3028 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-782 Remove the e-ring and bushing

2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden from
view).

Figure 6-783 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 3029

 3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-784 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-785 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

3030 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-786 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the punch waste full sensor

Follow these steps to remove the punch waste full sensor.

1. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the punch waste full sensor bracket.

Figure 6-787 Remove the punch waste full sensor bracket

Remove the punch waste full sensor 3031

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the punch waste full sensor from the bracket.

Figure 6-788 Remove the punch waste full sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Problem solving
Learn about problem solving.

Control panel message document (CPMD)

Learn about the control panel message document (CPMD).

3032 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Refer to Error codes (types and structure) on page 983 for more details.

Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher)

Punch waste full sensor

Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher) 3033

 Figure 6-789 Punch waste full sensor

Punch waste full sensor (0604-001381)

5V
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B )
CN3, Rear joint I/F
1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
2 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
3 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
JC39-02173A 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
14 DGND
15 FRONT COVER OPEN
16 FRONT COVER SWITH
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
21 STAPLER PCA 5V

22 DGND
23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
5V 24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor

3034 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-790 Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
CN1, Rear sensor
5V 1 PUNCH WASTE BOX SENSOR 5V
2 DGND
3 PUNCH WASTE BOX SENSOR
4 FINISHER DOCKING SENSOR 5V
5 DGND
5V
6 FINISHER DOCKING SENSOR
7 DGND
JC39-02174A 8 ENTRANCE SENSOR
9 5V
Punch waste 10 OUT_PATH
box sensor 11 nDETECT_FAN
(0604-00139) 12 DGND

5V

5V
Finisher docking
sensor
(0604-00139)

Entrance motor

Entrance motor 3035

 Figure 6-791 Entrance motor

24V

Entrance motor (JC31-00169B)

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B )

Inner
CN3,Finisher PCA
Rear joint I/F
1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
2 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
3 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
JC39-02173A 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
14 DGND
15 FRONT COVER OPEN
16 FRONT COVER SWITH
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
24V 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
21 STAPLER PCA 5V
22 DGND
23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

Exit sensor

3036 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-792 Exit sensor

5V
Exit sensor Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
( 0604-001415 )
CN2, Rear
1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A

5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V

JC39-02176A
6 DGND
7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR

8 DGND
9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED

13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V
15 DGND
5V 16 EXIT SENSOR
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V
21 DGND
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A

Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and paper
holding solenoid

Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and paper holding solenoid 3037
 Figure 6-793 Exit motor, paddle motor&sensor, output tray lower limit sensor, and paper holding solenoid

Inner Finisher PCA

( JC92-02774B )

Exit motor CN7, Front

(JC31-00169B)
1 EXIT MOTOR B
24V 24V 2 EXIT MOTOR A
3 EXIT MOTOR nB
24V EXIT MOTOR nA
Main paddle 4
5 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR
motor
JC39-02168A 6 DGND
(JC93-01001A) 7 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR
8 MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR, 5V
5V 9 DGND
5V 10 MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR

Main paddle 11 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B

home sensor 12 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Nb
24V 13 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Na
(0604-001393) 14 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A

15 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1

16 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2
17 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B
18 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Nb
19 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Na
24V 20 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A
21 FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR, 5V
Paper holding 22
24V 5V DGND
sensor 23 FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR
(0604-001393) 24 PAPER HOLDING SENSOR, 5V
25 DGND
Output tray lower 5V 26 PAPER HOLDING SENSOR
Paper holding solenoid
limit switch
with harness (JC33-00037A) 27 DGND
with harness 28 OUTPUT TRAY
(JC39-02178A) TOP OF STACK SENSOR

CN6, Stacker limit switch

1 DGND
2 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER LIMIT SW NO/NC
24V 3 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER LIMIT SW NC

CN9, Paper holding solenoid

1 GND
24V 2 PAPER HOLDING SOLENOID

Paper support motor & home sensor

3038 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-794 Paper support sensor and motor

Paper support motor ( JC93-00802B)

Paper support home

sensor (0604-001393)

24V
5V

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
REAR TAMPER MOTOR B 1
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB 2
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA 3
REAR TAMPER MOTOR A 4

REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 5

DGND 6
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 7

DGND 8
TOP COVER 9
TOP COVER SWITCH 10
JC39-02176A
N.C 11

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 12

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED 13
EXIT SENSOR 5V 14
DGND 15
EXIT SENSOR 16
DGND 17
END FENCE SENSOR 18
END FENCE SENSOR 5V 19
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V 20
DGND 21 5V
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 22
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B 23
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB 24
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA 25 24V
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A 26

Front tamper motor and home sensor

Front tamper motor and home sensor 3039

 Figure 6-795 Front tamper sensor and motor

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN7, Front
EXIT MOTOR B 1
EXIT MOTOR A 2
EXIT MOTOR nB 3
EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5
DGND 6
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 10

MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11

MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nB 12
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nA 13
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14

OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1 15

Front tamper home sensor
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2 16
(0604-001393)
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17 5V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nB 18 24V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nA 19
20 Front tamper motor
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A JC39-02168A
21 (JC93-01001A)
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V
DGND 22 24V
5V
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
DGND 25
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26

DGND 27
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK 28
SENSOR RECEIVER

Rear tamper motor and home sensor

3040 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-796 Rear tamper sensor and motor

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B
24V 2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A

5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V

6 DGND
5V 7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR

8 DGND
JC39-02176A 9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED

13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED

Rear tamper 14 EXIT SENSOR 5V

home sensor 15 DGND
(0604-001393) 16 EXIT SENSOR
5V
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
24V
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V
Rear tamper motor 21 DGND
(JC93-01001A) 22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A

End fence sensor

End fence sensor 3041

 Figure 6-797 End fence sensor

End fence sensor (0604-001381)

5V Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A

5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V

6 DGND
JC39-02176A 7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR

8 DGND
9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED

13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V
15 DGND
16 EXIT SENSOR
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
5V 19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V
21 DGND
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A

Stapler position motor and sensor

3042 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-798 Stapler position sensor and motor
Inner Finisher PCA
(JC92-02774B)

CN3, Rear joint I/F

1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
2 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
3 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
24V 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
1.7v /
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
1.7v or 3.3v or 3.3v /
Stapler position home 12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
5v Vcc (pull up) 5v
rear sensor (0604-001393) 13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
1.7v / 14 DGND
3.3v / 15 FRONT COVER OPEN
5V Stapler position middle front 5v 16 FRONT COVER SWITH
sensor (0604-001393) 17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
5V 18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
Stapler position middle sensor (0604-001393) 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
Stapler position home 21 STAPLER PCA 5V
1.7v or front sensor
3.3v or (0604-001393) 22 DGND
5v Vcc (pull up) 23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
24 5V
24V 25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
Stapler position motor 28 DGND
(JC93-00999A) 29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
JC39-02173A 38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

CN10, Traverse sensor

5V 1 STAPLER POSITION MID FRONT 5V

2 DGND
3 STAPLER POSITION MID FRONT

5V 4 STAPLER POSITION MID REAR 5V

5 DGND
6 STAPLER POSITION MID REAR

Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor

Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor 3043
 Figure 6-799 Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor

Ejector1 home sensor (0604-001393)

5V

Ejector2 motor Ejector1 motor

(JC93-00998A) Ejector2 home sensor
24V (JC93-01168A) (0604-001393)
24V
5V
Ejector2 motor sensor
(0604-001393)
5V

JC39-02165A
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
CN4, Ejector
24V 1 EJECTOR2 MOTOR OUT2
2 EJECTOR2 MOTOR OUT1
3 EJECTOR1 MOTOR B
4 EJECTOR1 MOTOR nB
24V 5 EJECTOR1 MOTOR nA
6 EJECTOR1 MOTOR A

5V 7 EJECTOR2 MOTOR SENSOR 5V

8 DGND
9 EJECTOR2 MOTOR SENSOR
5V 10 EJECTOR2 HOME SENSOR 5V
11 DGND
12 EJECTOR2 HOME SENSOR

5V 13 EJECTOR1 HOME 5V
14 DGND
15 EJECTOR1 HOME

Output tray motor and sensor

3044 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-800 Output tray motor and sensor

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN7, Front
24V
EXIT MOTOR B 1
EXIT MOTOR A 2
EXIT MOTOR nB 3
EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5 5V
DGND 6
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9 JC39-02168A
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 10

MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11

Output tray motor
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Nb 12
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Na 13 (JC31-00178B)
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14

OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1 15

OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2 16
24V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Nb 18
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Na 19
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A 20 5V
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 21
Output tray motor sensor
DGND 22
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23 (0604-001393)
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
DGND 25
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26

DGND 27
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK 28
SENSOR RECEIVER

Output tray top of stack sensor

Output tray top of stack sensor 3045

 Figure 6-801 Output tray top of stack sensor

Output tray top of

stack sensor receiver
(0603-001309)
Output tray top of
stack sensor LED 3.3V
(0601-003440)

3.3V

JC39-02168A

JC39-02176A

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear CN7, Front

1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B EXIT MOTOR B 1
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB EXIT MOTOR A 2
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA EXIT MOTOR nB 3
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5
5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V DGND 6
6 DGND OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9
8 DGND
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 10
9 TOP COVER 24V
10 TOP COVER SWITCH MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11
11 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nB 12
N.C
3.3V MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nA 13
12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 3.3V MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14
13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1 15
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2 16
15 DGND
16 EXIT SENSOR FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17
17 DGND FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nB 18
18 END FENCE SENSOR FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nA 19
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A 20
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 21
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V DGND 22
21 DGND FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B DGND 25
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
DGND 27
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK 28
SENSOR RECEIVER 3.3V 3.3V

Top cover switch

3046 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-802 Top cover switch

Top cover switch (JC39-01610A)

24V

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
REAR TAMPER MOTOR B 1
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB 2
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA 3
REAR TAMPER MOTOR A 4
JC39-02176A
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 5
DGND 6
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 7

DGND 8
TOP COVER 24V 9
TOP COVER SWITCH 10 24V

N.C 11

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 12

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED 13
EXIT SENSOR 5V 14
DGND 15
EXIT SENSOR 16
DGND 17
END FENCE SENSOR 18
END FENCE SENSOR 5V 19
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V 20
DGND 21
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 22
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B 23
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB 24
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA 25
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A 26

Front cover switch

Front cover switch 3047

 Figure 6-803 Frame front

Stapler motor JC39-02177A Staple joint PCA

(JC59-00040A) 24V (JC41-00900A)
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
CN3, Rear joint I/F
JC39-02164A
1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
2 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
3 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
Rear joint PCA 24V 4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
(JC41-00905A) 5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
JC39-02173A 10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
14 DGND
24V
15 FRONT COVER OPEN 24V
24V
16 FRONT COVER SWITH
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
Front cover switch 18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
(JC39-01610A) 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
21 STAPLER PCA 5V

22 DGND
23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

3048 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

A Certificate of Volatility

Review the certificates of volatility for the printer.

Certificate of Volatility
Learn about the product certificate of volatility.

Certificate of Volatility 3049

 Figure A-1 Certificate of Volatility (E87640/50/60; 1 of 3)
Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Color LaserJet Managed Managed Hewlett Packard Company
MFP E876XXdn X3A87A= E87640dn 11311 Chinden Blvd
X3A90A= E87650dn Boise, ID 83714
HP Color LaserJet Managed X3A93A= E87660dn
Flow MFP E876XX z X3A86A= E87640z
X3A89A= E87650z
HP Color LaserJet Managed X3A92A= E87660z
MFP E876XXdu 5CM64A = E87640du
5CM65A = E87650du
5CM66A = E87660du
Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HP Formatter Yes No Operation system and When the printer is powered off
DDR3 - DRAM 3GB- Obsidian print/scan buffer the memory is erased.
1 GB –Accel
board
4 GB - Main
Formatter

Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data for There are no steps to clear
backup/restore this data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:

HP side: SPI Flash 4MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear
factory product configuration this data
data required for the device to
function. User modifications
are limited to downloading
digitally signed HP firmware
images.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Samsung MSOK : Yes No TPM NVRAM - stores HP- Drive lock password can be
MSOK – TPM NVRAM 2 KB signed immutable ID certificate changed through the
MSOK – EEProm 32 KB and associated RSA key pair device embedded web
MSOK – CRUM 32 KB in locked memory. server interface.
EEProm - stores device No other data stored on the
lifecycle data (e.g. device page MSOK can be cleared.
counts), copy of device speed
license, and SED (self-
encrypting drive) drive lock
password.
CRUM - stores device page
counts, consumables
information, device speed
information, and product serial
number.

3050 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Figure A-2 Certificate of Volatility (E87640/50/60; 2 of 3)
Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
2 – Hard Drives (1 – HP 320GB/ea Yes No Stores customer data, 1. Secure Storage Erase –
formatter & 1 – Main board) OS, applications, Areas temporary files and job
digitally signed firmware data by overwriting information
images, persistent data, overwriting information one or
and temporary data three times.
used for processing and 2. Secure Disk Erase – Erases
system functions. files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.
3. Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.

Optional Mass Storage

Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Optional Formatter HDD 500 500GB Yes No Stores customer data, 1. Erase and Unlock Encrypted
GB FIPS Encrypted HDD OS, applications, Disk – This changes the
digitally signed firmware Encryption keys rendering all
images, persistent data, data unreadable.
and temporary data 2. Secure Storage Erase –
used for processing and Areas temporary files and job
system functions. data by overwriting information
overwriting information one or
three times.
3. Secure Disk Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.
4. Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.

USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.

RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities

Certificate of Volatility 3051

 Figure A-3 Certificate of Volatility (E82540/50/60; 3 of 3)
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: WiFi Direct Print
Frequency: 2.4 GHz, 5GHz Bandwidth: 2401 - 2495 MHz; depending on selected
channel in 2.4GHz band.
5180 - 5825 MHz; depending on selected channel in 5GHz
band.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Device Beaconing, Secure Print Apps
Frequency: 2.4 GHz Bandwidth: 2400-2483.5 MHz; depending on selected
channel.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:

Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
John Mast Technical Marketing Engineer [email protected] IPG
Robert Mejia System Engineer [email protected] IPG
Date Prepared: 9/14/2018

3052 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Index

Symbols/Numerics parts and diagrams - pickup Booklet entrance unit 1326, 2183
LX 737 booklet entrance-presser motor
2000-sheet HCI
ADF pickup roller 791 parts and diagrams 1392
parts and diagrams -
ADF reverse roller 810 booklet exit
cassette 945
ADF sGX parts and diagrams 1397
parts and diagrams - drive 930
PCA-ADF sGX (dn models booklet exit unit
parts and diagrams - frame 946
only) 851 parts and diagrams 1395
parts and diagrams - main 929
after-service checklist 144, 146, Booklet exit unit 1343, 2429
parts and diagrams - pickup 952
148, 1272, 1351, 1353, 2482, booklet finisher
3000-sheet sHCI (department;
2525, 2527 booklet blade 2326
E82540/50/60 and
alienation motor 528 booklet blade home
E87640/50/60 only)
APS sensor 879 sensor 2344
parts and diagrams - frame 982
authorized service providers, booklet blade motor 2362
parts and diagrams - main 1 953
parts 145, 1354, 2528 booklet c-fold blade 2371
parts and diagrams - main 3 962
booklet c-fold blade home
parts and diagrams - main 5 978
B sensor 2385
parts and diagrams - main 6 979
booklet c-fold blade motor 2400
parts and diagrams - pickup cover backup error
booklet diverter 2407
unit 980 32.WX.YZ error 983, 984
booklet diverter home
reset error 983, 984
sensor 2423
A restore error 983, 984
booklet diverter motor 2426
booklet blade
accelerator board booklet end fence 2212
parts and diagrams 1403
remove the accelerator booklet end fence home
booklet blade motor
board 256 sensor 2228
parts and diagrams 1403
accelerator board (GX ADF only) 256 booklet end fence motor 2224
booklet c-fold blade
accessories booklet entrance motor 2183
parts and diagrams 1397
dimensions 1, 6, 13 booklet entrance sensor 2186
booklet c-fold motor
weight 1, 6, 13 booklet exit sensor 2429
parts and diagrams 1399
acoustic specifications 1, 6, 14 booklet fold motor 2366
booklet diverter
ACR frame assembly booklet front cover 1495
parts and diagrams 1397
parts and diagrams 480 booklet maker 2173
booklet diverter motor
ACR unit booklet maker PCA 2456
parts and diagrams 1399
electrical-mechanical relationships booklet output tray 2447
booklet diverter unit
diagram 1222 booklet paddle home
parts and diagrams 1395
ADF sensor 2203
Booklet diverter unit 1341, 2406
parts and diagrams - exterior booklet paddle motor 2200
booklet end fence unit
LX 737 booklet presser 2233
parts and diagrams 1406
parts and diagrams - lower image booklet presser home
Booklet end fence unit 1329, 2212
scanner 876 sensor 2248
booklet entrance
parts and diagrams - LX booklet presser motor 2251
parts and diagrams 1392
models 706, 737, 748 booklet stapler unit 2309
booklet entrance unit
parts and diagrams - main frame booklet tamper home
parts and diagrams 1391
assembly LX 748 sensor 2272

Index 3053
 booklet tamper motor 2290 paper holding home Booklet output tray unit 1344, 2447
booklet tamper unit 2254 sensor 2105 booklet paddle unit
bridge door sensor 1426 paper holding Motor 2146 parts and diagrams 1405
bridge entrance sensor 1409 paper holding solenoid 1355 Booklet paddle unit 1327, 2200
bridge exit sensor 1421 paper support 1355 booklet presser unit
bridge motor 1415 paper support home parts and diagrams 1391
buffer motor 2161 sensor 1355 Booklet presser unit 1331, 2233
buffer solenoid 2166 punch waste full 1355 booklet stapler unit
caster cover 1463 rear cover 1443 parts and diagrams 1393
dummy feed guide 1502 rear paper holding sensor 2133 Booklet stapler unit 1335
ejector assembly 1355 rear paper support 1355 booklet tamper unit
ejector motor 1355 rear tamper home sensor 1765 parts and diagrams 1394
ejector unit 1896 rear tamper motor 1791 Booklet tamper unit 1333, 2254
ejector1 1945 rear tamper unit 1741 bookletr finisher
ejector1 motor sensor 1920 right upper cover 1432 exit motor 1355
ejector2 home sensor 1971 sensor 1355 bottom high-capacity input tray (HCI)
ejector2 motor 2021 stacker lower limit switch 1355 unit
ejector2 motor sensor 1996 stacker motor 1355 bottom high-capacity input tray
end fence home 1355 stapler 1355 feed motor 931
end fence home sensor 1631 stapler front sensor 1827 bottom high-capacity input tray
end fence motor 1656 stapler mid-front sensor 1839 lift-up motor 937
entrance motor 1355 stapler mid-rear sensor 1851 bottom high-capacity input tray
entrance sensor 1355 stapler position motor 1884 pickup motor 935
exir roller 1355 stapler position sensor 1355 bottom high-capacity input tray feed
exit motor 1587 stapler rear sensor 1863 motor 931
exit sensor 1355 stapler unit 1817 bottom high-capacity input tray lift-
feed entrance motor 1497 switch 1355 up motor 937
front cover 1448 top cover 1434 bottom high-capacity input tray
front door 1437 top exit sensor 1547 pickup motor 935
front lower cover 1455 top jam cover assembly 1508 bridge entrance path sensor (SSBM)
front paper holding sensor 2120 top lower feed assembly 1535 electrical-mechanical relationships
front paper support 1355 top output tray 1561 diagram 1270
front tamper home sensor 1689 top output tray paper full bridge motor, bridge middle sensor,
front tamper motor 1715 sensor 1563 and bridge guide sensor (SSBM)
front tamper unit 1664 tray diverter 1518 electrical-mechanical relationships
left lower cover 1467 tray diverter home sensor 1525 diagram 1269
left upper cover 1480 booklet finisher diagrams 1355, bridge unit 317
main exit cam motor 1592 1389 parts and diagrams 1360, 1362
main exit sensor 1574 booklet finisher parts 1355, 1389 remove the bridge unit 317
main output tray lower limit booklet finisher remove and Bridge unit 1360, 1409
sensor 2077 replace 1355 buffer diverter
main output tray motor 2096 booklet finisher view 1272 parts and diagrams 1388
main output tray motor booklet fold motor buffer unit
sensor 2090 parts and diagrams 1399 parts and diagrams 1386
main output tray top of stack booklet fold roller Buffer unit 1322, 2160
sensor 2047 parts and diagrams 1401
main output tray top of stack booklet fold unit C
switch 2063 parts and diagrams 1395
Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control
main paddle 1355 Booklet fold unit 1337, 2326
panel 983, 999, 1020, 1122
main PCA 2450 booklet maker
card reader 291
manual staple sensor 1875 detailed specifications 1275
cartridge
motor 1355 parts and diagrams 1389
dynamic security 63
paddle 1600 Booklet maker 2173
cassette 1, 44, 50
paddle home sensor 1613 booklet maker baset
cassette lift drive 1, 73
paddle motor 1622 parts and diagrams 1408

3054 Index
Cassettes Tray 2/3 Settings menu 983, 999, 1020, DCF rear frame
parts and diagrams 413 1022 parts and diagrams 921
caution vi Supplies menu 983, 999, 1020, DCF second pickup
caution for moving the scanner 1, 1119 parts and diagrams - drive 928
81, 90 Trays menu 983, 999, 1020, decoding
CCDM PCA 1, 105, 131 1119 message 983
certificate of volatility 3049 troubleshooting menu 983, 999, defeating
CoV E87640/50/60 3049 1020, 1120 interlocks 983, 988, 996, 997
Channel partners USB Firmware Upgrade definitions and terms
WISE 144 menu 983, 999, 1020, 1122, glossary
Channel partners support 1124 determine problem source 983, 988
HP Channel Services Network control panel diagnostic developer fan 312
(CSN) 144 flowcharts 983, 988, 991 developer unit 1, 57, 58, 60, 173
checklists control panel menus 983, 999, diagnostics
after-service 144, 146, 148, 1020 adjustment 983, 1129, 1137,
1272, 1351, 1353, 2482, control panel messages 983 1166
2525, 2527 conventions used vi component 983, 988, 996, 998
preservice 144, 146, 147, 1272, Copy menu (MFP only), control engine 983, 988, 996, 997,
1351, 1353, 2482, 2525, 2527 panel 983, 999, 1020, 1064 1129, 1137
cleaning page 983, 999, 1020, copy specifications 1, 6, 22 fax 983, 1129, 1137, 1156
1122 CoV image management 983, 1129,
cleaning the paper dust stick 144, certificate of volatility 3049 1137, 1173
149 cover LED 983, 988, 996
cleaning the scan glass 144, 149 parts and diagrams 1356 print test patterns 983, 1129,
clear paper jams 1272, 2467, 3032 cover open sensor, cassette 1137, 1174
component test installation sensor, feed motor, scanner 983, 1129, 1137, 1162
special mode test 983, 988, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, and diagram
996, 998 shift motor (DCF/HCI) fuser 1205
components electrical-mechanical relationships HVPS/LVPS/FDB 1212
diagnostic tests 983, 988, 996, diagram 1243 laser scanner assembly 1207
998 Covers 1431, 2540 OPC 1210
scanning system 1, 81, 84 parts and diagrams 599 scanner 1206
connection, electrical-mechanical CPMD 983 side/MP/feed/registration/
diagrams 1205 CPMP pickup 1208
connector error WISE 985 diagram, electrical-mechanical
65.WX.YZ error 983, 984 CRUM connector 341 relationships
control panel 279 CST lock diagram 1210 ACR unit 1222
Backup/Restore menu 983, 999, curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert bridge entrance path sensor
1020, 1122 home sensor, and guide home (SSBM) 1270
Calibrate/Cleaning menu 983, sensor (SSBM) bridge motor, bridge middle
999, 1020, 1122 electrical-mechanical relationships sensor, and bridge guide
Copy menu (MFP only) 983, 999, diagram 1255 sensor (SSBM) 1269
1020, 1064 current settings pages 983, 999 cover open sensor, cassette
CPMD 983 installation sensor, feed motor,
Fax menu (fax models only) 983, D pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors,
999, 1020, 1115 and shift motor (DCF/
DC controller communication error
Print menu 983, 999, 1020, HCI) 1243
55.WX.YZ error 983, 984
1119 curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert
DC controller firmware error
remove the control panel 279 home sensor, and guide home
70.WX.YZ error 983, 985
remove the control panel sensor (SSBM) 1255
DCF 1, 132
bezel 279 entrance motors A/B, end fence
DCF frame
Reports menu 983, 999, 1020 motor, buffer motor and sensor,
parts and diagrams -
Scan menu 1072 and diverter close sensor
cassette 915
Scan menu (MFP only) 983, 999, (SSBM) 1253
1020

Index 3055
 exit cam home sensor, main press home sensor, tamper home E87640/50/60 only) main
paddle home sensor, paddle sensor, paper detect sensor, 1 953
motor, and exit motor tamper motor, press motor, and 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
(SSBM) 1264 feed motor (SSBM) 1258 E82540/50/60 and
exit unit 1222 registration drive 1224 E87640/50/60 only) main
feed drive 1225 registration unit 1220 3 962
feed entrance sensor right door guide 1231 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
(SSBM) 1256 right door output E82540/50/60 and
front unit 1235 takeaway 1233 E87640/50/60 only) main
front/rear home sensors and tray side unit 1229 5 978
open sensor (DCF/HCI) 1250 T1 drive 1214 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
front/rear tamper motors, front/ top door sensor, fold motor, and E82540/50/60 and
rear tamper home sensors, and knife home position sensor E87640/50/60 only) main
end-fence home sensor (SSBM) 1262 6 979
(SSBM) 1266 top-beam out sensor, stack motor, 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
fuser exit drive 1224 and SKU motor (SSBM) 1254 E82540/50/60 and
HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA top-exit path and compile-exit E87640/50/60 only) pickup
(HCI) 1241 path sensors (SSBM) 1260 cover unit 980
home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU ACR frame assembly 480
and empty sensor (DCF/ home detect sensor, and stack ADF (LX models) 706
HCI) 1247 beam in/out sensors ADF exterior and ADF pickup(LX
knife motor, stopper home sensor, (SSBM) 1268 models) 737
and stopper solenoid and upper/lower paper low sensors ADF lower image scanner 876
motor (SSBM) 1261 (DCF/HCI) 1249 ADF main frame assembly (LX
level-1/2 front/rear sensors, WTB drive 1216 models) 748
solenoid home sensor, and diagrams booklet blade 1403
solenoid (DCF/HCI) 1246 connection, electrical- booklet blade motor 1403
limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, mechanical 1205 booklet c-fold blade 1397
prefeed sensor, and paper covers-inner finisher 2532 booklet c-fold motor 1399
empty-1 sensor (DCF/ ejector unit-inner finisher 2540 booklet diverter 1397
HCI) 1248 electrical-mechanical 1205 booklet diverter motor 1399
limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed finisher system 1272, 2480 booklet diverter unit 1395
sensor, main limit and empty inner finisher 2530 booklet end fence unit 1406
sensors (DCF/HCI) 1245 paper support unit-inner booklet entrance 1392
main drive 1212 finisher 2535 booklet entrance unit 1391
main PCAs (SSBM) 1251 relationships, electrical- booklet entrance-presser
MP unit 1227 mechanical 1212 motor 1392
operational panel button PCA and sensor, motor, and roller-inner booklet exit 1397
entrance path sensor finisher 2533 booklet exit unit 1395
(SSBM) 1263 stapler unit-inner finisher 2539 booklet fold motor 1399
paper detection sensor tamper unit-inner finisher 2536, booklet fold roller 1401
(SSBM) 1252 2537 booklet fold unit 1395
paper empty , path, limit-1, and use parts lists and diagrams 146 booklet maker 1389
path sensors (DCF/HCI) 1240 Diagrams booklet maker base 1408
paper empty and limit-2 sensors 2000-sheet HCI cassette 945 booklet paddle unit 1405
(DCF/HCI) 1239 2000-sheet HCI drive 930 booklet presser unit 1391
paper size sensors (DCF/ 2000-sheet HCI frame 946 booklet stapler unit 1393
HCI) 1240 2000-sheet HCI main 929 booklet tamper unit 1394
pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and 2000-sheet HCI pickup 952 bridge unit 1360, 1362
feed motor (DCF/HCI) 1248 3000-sheet sHCI (department; buffer diverter 1388
pickup drive 1218, 1226 E82540/50/60 and buffer unit 1386
pickup lift motors, feed motor, and E87640/50/60 only) cassettes tray 2/3 413
cover open sensor (DCF/ frame 982 cover 1356
HCI) 1237 3000-sheet sHCI (department; covers 599
pickup unit 1220 E82540/50/60 and DCF frame 915

3056 Index
DCF rear frame 921 top lower cover 1372 dual cassette feeder (DCF) unit
DCF second pickup 928 top output tray unit 1370 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
drive system 499 tray 1 679 motor 899, 902
Dual cassette feeder DCF 891 Tray diverter CAM 1369 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
ejector unit 1377, 1380 tray diverter unit 1367 PCA 917
end fence unit 1374 tray jam cover 1369 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
entrance motor 1366 upper bridge 1360 units 904
entrance unit 1364, 1366 digital sending error (firmware) dual cassette feeder (DCF) right
exit assemblies 392 44.WX.YZ error 983, 984 door 892
exit motor 1372 dimensions Dual cassette feeder DCF)
flow ADF (GX/sGX) 762 accessories 1, 6, 13 parts and diagrams - Dual
flow ADF image scanner (GX/ printer 1, 6, 13 cassette feeder DCF 891
sGX) 861 diverter unit 2498 duplex 1 sensor 348
flow ADF main frame (GX/ document feeder duplexer error
sGX) 808 document feeder input tray 69.WX.YZ error 983, 985
flow ADF open cover (GX/ (LX) 715 dynamic security
sGX) 780 document feeder (LX) reverse toner cartridge 63
flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) 798 roller 750
flow ADF upper pickup (GX/ document feeder error E
sGX) 790 31.WX.YZ error 983, 984
each unit functions
front door 1359 document feeder pick roller (LX 738
finisher system 1272, 2482
front jam cover 1388 document feeder pickup 791
ejector home sensor 3043
hanress 1356 document feeder skew (LX du
ejector motor 3043
left lower cover 1384 models) 983
ejector unit 2514
left upper cover 1383 documentation, printer error codes
parts and diagrams 1377, 1380
lower bridge 1362 and messages
Ejector unit 1314, 1896, 2837
main assembly 154 WISE 985
Ejector1 1920
main exit CAM motor 1372 drive system 1, 73
ejector2 unit 1971
main exit unit 1370, 1374 cassette lift drive 1, 73
electrical parts layout
main frame assembly 416 drive motors 1, 73, 77
finisher system layout 1272,
main frame pickup 592 engage toner collection unit (TCU)
2482
main frame pickup 1 555 drive 81
electrical specifications 1, 6, 14
main frame pickup 2 555 engage transfer roller drive 80
electrical-mechanical
main output tray motor 1385 exit drive 1, 73, 76
diagrams 1205
main output tray unit 1381 feed drive 1, 73, 74
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 144,
main PCA 1377 fuser release drive 1, 73, 76
146, 1272, 1351, 1353, 2482,
opt feed drive 927 main drive unit motor 1, 73, 79
2525, 2527
paddle 1376 pickup drive 1, 73
Embedded Jetdirect error
paddle motor 1376 registration drive 1, 73, 75
80.WX.YZ error 983, 985
paddle unit 1374 toner reservoir drive 1, 73
end fence sensor 3041
paper holding motor 1385 toner supply drive 1, 73
end fence unit 2510
paper holding unit 1381 toner supply/reservoir drive 79
parts and diagrams 1374
rear frame assembly 494 Drive system
End fence unit 1306, 1630, 2903
right door 633 parts and diagrams 499
engine
right door exit 700 drivers, supported 1, 6
diagnostics 983, 988, 996, 997
right door guide 697 dual cassette feeder 1, 132
engine error (LaserJet)
right door takeaway 700 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
46.WX.YZ error 983, 984
right upper cover 1359 motor 899
63.WX.YZ error 983, 984
stapler unit 1377 dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA 917
engine error (PageWide)
T2 transfer assembly 703 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
61.WX.YZ error 983, 984
tamper unit 1377, 1378 motor 902
entrance motor 3035
toner reservoir (CMYK) 483 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
parts and diagrams 1366
top cover 1359 units 904
top door 1359 dual cassette feeder (DCF) right
top exit unit 1370 door 892

Index 3057
 entrance motors A/B, end fence feed drive unit or motor, Tray 1 534 flatbed scanner system
motor, buffer motor and sensor, feed entrance sensor, and guide overview 1, 81
and diverter close sensor (SSBM) home sensor (SSBM) flow ADF
electrical-mechanical relationships electrical-mechanical relationships contact image sensor (CIS) 815
diagram 1253 diagram 1256 contact image sensor (CIS)
entrance unit 2497 feed roller fan 840
parts and diagrams 1364, 1366 multipurpose 680 document feeder PCA fan 832
Entrance unit 1364, 1497, 2562 Tray 1 680 document feeder white
eraser PCA 1, 105, 127 feeding system 1, 44 backing 210
error cassette 1, 44, 50 front motor 836
fault 983 main components and input tray 799
ESD electrostatic discharge functions 1, 44, 45 jam access cover 781
(ESD) 144, 146, 1272, 1351, MP feeder assembly 1, 44, 52 rear motors 823
1353, 2482, 2525, 2527 overview 1, 44 scan in lower assembly 844
event log 983, 999, 1002 pickup assembly 51 ultrasonic sensor with PCA 770
clear using touchscreen control pickup unit 1, 44 Flow ADF (GX/sGX)
panel 983, 999, 1002 registration unit 1, 44, 51 parts and diagrams 762
event log error (firmware) rollers 1, 44, 45 Flow ADF image scanner (GX/sGX)
42.WX.YZ error 983, 984 sensor, motor, and solenoid 1, parts and diagrams 861
exit 1 bin full sensor 357 44, 45, 47 Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)
Exit assemblies feeding system information 1, 44 parts and diagrams 808
parts and diagrams 392 FIH Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX)
exit cam home sensor, main paddle HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) parts and diagrams 780
home sensor, paddle motor, and solution, install 289 flow ADF PCA 1, 105
exit motor (SSBM) finisher docking sensor 3034 flow ADF skew (LX du models) 983
electrical-mechanical relationships finisher sectional view 1272, 2482 Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)
diagram 1264 finisher system 1272, 1280, 2482, parts and diagrams 798
exit cover 613 2488 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)
exit drive 1, 73, 76 diagrams 1272, 2480 parts and diagrams 790
exit drive unit 521 each unit functions 1272, 2482 flow document feeder
exit gate solenoid/motors/ electrical parts layout 1272, document feeder whole unit 764
sensor 394 2482 flow document feeder PCA 129
exit motor finisher sectional view 1272, formatter
parts and diagrams 1372 2482 locating 1, 2
exit sensor 3036 paper path 1272, 2482 Formatter 275
exit unit 217, 2500 PCA connection Formatter (du models) 271
electrical-mechanical relationships information 1272, 2482 formatter hard disk drive 268
diagram 1222 finisher system diagram 1280, remove the hard disk drive 268
exit 1 bin full sensor 357 2488 formatter hard disk drive (du
exit gate solenoid/motors/ finisher system electrical models) 265
sensor 394 parts 1280, 2488 remove the hard disk drive (du
Exit unit 2577 finisher system paper path 1280, models) 265
exploded parts views, use parts lists 2488 formatter lights 983, 988, 996
and diagrams 146 finisher system PBA front cover 601
connection 1280, 2488 open sensor 418
F finisher system sectional front cover open sensor 418
view 1280, 2488 front cover switch 3047
fan error
firmware communication error front door
58.WX.YZ error 983, 984
49.WX.YZ error 983, 984 parts and diagrams 1359
Fax menu (fax models only), control
firmware install error front jam cover
panel 983, 999, 1020, 1115
99.WX.YZ error 983, 985 parts and diagrams 1388
feed 2 sensor 670
hard disk error 983, 985 front power cover 608
feed drive 1, 73, 74
remote firmware upgrade front power switch 298
electrical-mechanical relationships
error 983, 985 Front tamper 1664, 2702
diagram 1225
front tamper motor 3039

3058 Index
front tamper sensor 3039 CCDM PCA 1, 105, 131 I
front top inner cover 611 eraser PCA 1, 105, 127
image creation 1, 57
front unit flow ADF PCA 1, 105
imaging unit 1, 57, 58
electrical-mechanical relationships flow document feeder PCA 129
intermediate transfer belt
diagram 1235 fuser drive assembly 1, 105, 123
unit 64
front view 2482 fuser PCA 1, 105, 128
overview 1, 57
front/rear home sensors and tray high voltage power supply
paper transfer belt unit 1, 57, 58
open sensor (DCF/HCI) PCA 1, 105, 124
toner cartridge 1, 57, 58, 62
electrical-mechanical relationships low voltage power supply PCA
toner reservoir unit 66
diagram 1250 (Type 3R) 1, 105, 119
image quality
front/rear tamper motors, front/rear low voltage power supply PCA
black lines, vertical 983, 1176,
tamper home sensors, and end- (Type 4) 1, 105, 121
1181
fence home sensor (SSBM) low voltage power supply PCA
blurred image 983, 1176, 1188
electrical-mechanical relationships (Type 5H) 1, 105, 117
duplex blur, white spot blur on
diagram 1266 LVPS PCA (Type 3R) 1, 105, 119
color print-out 1194
fuser diagram 1205 LVPS PCA (Type 4) 1, 105, 121
flow ADF or ADF skew (LX du
fuser drive assembly 1, 105, 123 LVPS PCA (Type 5H) 1, 105, 117
models) 983
fuser drive board 233 main controller 1, 105, 107
foggy image 983, 1176, 1187
fuser error master system operation key 1,
incorrect color registration 1189
41.WX.YZ error 983, 984 105, 107, 113
jitter image 983, 1176, 1190
laser scanner error 983, 984 scan joint PCA 1, 105, 130
light image 983, 1176, 1188
paper path error 983, 984 WLED IF PCA 1, 105, 132
light lines, vertical 983, 1176,
fuser error (LaserJet) WLED PCA 1, 105, 132
1182
50.WX.YZ error 983, 984 hardware integration pocket (HIP) is
periodic black dots,
fuser exit drive not functioning 983, 988, 991,
horizontal 983, 1176, 1185
electrical-mechanical relationships 995
periodic black lines,
diagram 1224 HCI 1, 136
horizontal 983, 1176, 1185
fuser fan 240 HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI)
periodic light/dark dots,
fuser out sensor 664 electrical-mechanical relationships
horizontal 983, 1176, 1186
fuser PCA 1, 105, 128 diagram 1241
periodic light/dark lines,
fuser release drive 1, 73, 76 high capacity input tray 1, 136
horizontal 983, 1176, 1186
fuser unit 1, 53, 225 high voltage power supply (HVPS)
poor fusing 983, 1176, 1192
fuser unit drive 1, 53, 55 board 162
red/magenta hue printouts 1196
overview 1, 53 high voltage power supply PCA 1,
skewed image 983, 1176, 1191
temperature control 1, 53, 55 105, 124
stain on back side 983, 1176,
fuser unit drive 1, 53, 55 high-voltage rail assembly 460
1193
fuser unit temperature control 1, home button is unresponsive 983,
standard tone, setting 983,
53, 55 988, 991, 994
1176, 1194
fuser/exit drive unit 521 home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and
uneven pitch 983, 1176, 1190
empty sensor (DCF/HCI)
white lines, vertical 983, 1176,
G electrical-mechanical relationships
1182
diagram 1247
General Settings menu, control image scanner assembly 194
HP Channel Services Network (CSN)
panel 983, 999, 1020, 1022 imaging drum unit 287
Channel partners support 144
general specifications 1, 6, 15 imaging unit 1, 57, 58
HP Foreign interface harness (FIH),
glossary developer unit 1, 57, 58, 60
install 289
terms and definitions overview 1, 57, 58
HP internal users
individual component
H WISE 144
diagnostics 983, 988, 996
HP Jetdirect print server
hanress inductor unit 319
lights 983, 988, 996
parts and diagrams 1356 information
HVPS PCA 1, 105, 124
hard disk drive (HDD) 245 general 983, 1129, 1134
HVPS/LVPS/FDB diagram 1212
hard disk partition error print reports 983, 1129, 1134,
98.WX.YZ error 983, 985 1135
hardware configuration 1, 105

Index 3059
 software version 983, 1129, parts and diagrams - paper interpret control-panel messages and
1134, 1135 support unit 2535 event log entries 1272, 2467,
supply status 983, 1129, 1134, parts and diagrams - sensor, 2482, 3032
1135 motor, and roller 2533 Island of data (du bundles) 259
inner finisher parts and diagrams - stapler Island of Data (IOD) 262
block diagram 2482 unit 2539 ITB cleaner blade 181
detailed specifications 2483 parts and diagrams - tamper
ejector & paper support unit 2536, 2537 J
assembly 2837 PCA cover 2551
jam error (LaserJet)
ejector assembly 2529, 2879 punch cover 3019
13.WX.YZ error 983
ejector motor 2529 punch waste full 2529
jam error (PageWide)
ejector motor assembly 2857 punch waste full sensor 3024
13.WX.YZ error 983
end fence home 2529 rear cover 2543
jams
end fence sensor 2904 rear paper support 2529, 2617
locations 983, 1124
entrance motor 2529, 2568 rear tamper 2757, 2774
Jetdirect print server
entrance sensor 2529, 2562 rear tamper motor 2793
lights 983, 988, 996
exir roller 2529 sensor 2529
job accounting error (firmware)
exit motor 2529, 2593 stacker lower limit switch 2529
48.WX.YZ error 983, 984
exit roller 2578 stacker motor 2529
job management error
exit sensor 2529, 2584 stapler 2529, 2811
(firmware) 983, 984
front cover 2541 stapler position motor 2827
job pipeline error (firmware) 983,
front paper support 2529, 2596 stapler position sensor 2529,
984
front tamper 2702 2816
job parser error (firmware)
front tamper home sensor 2720 sub paddle unit 2698
47.WX.YZ error 983, 984
front tamper motor 2739 switch 2529
printer calibration error 983, 984
left cover 2554 top cover 2548
main paddle 2529, 2682 inner finisher detailed K
main paddle assembly 2691 specifications 2483
main paddle home sensor 2685 inner finisher diagrams 2529 keyboard (z bundles) 282
main paddle motor 2688 inner finisher parts 2529 remove the keyboard 282
middle cover 2545 inner finisher PCA 2522 knife motor, stopper home sensor,
motor 2529 inner finisher remove and and stopper solenoid and motor
output tray 2914 replace 2529 (SSBM)
output tray lower limit inner front cover 602 electrical-mechanical relationships
switch 2930 input accessory error diagram 1261
output tray motor 2962 67.WX.YZ error 983, 985
output tray motor input/output error L
assembly 2941 40.WX.YZ error 983, 984 laser scanner assembly 1, 165
output tray motor sensor 2951 install laser scanning optical path 1, 68
output tray top of stack HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) overview 1, 67
sensor 2920 solution 289 laser scanner assembly
paper holding 2974 interlocks diagram 1207
paper holding sensor 2986 defeating 983, 988, 996, 997 laser scanner assembly fan 170
paper holding solenoid 2529, intermediate transfer belt laser scanner error (LaserJet)
3000 overview 64 51.WX.YZ error 983, 984
paper support 2529 intermediate transfer belt (ITB) 52.WX.YZ error 983, 984
paper support home unit 185 laser scanner unit 67
sensor 2529, 2639 intermediate transfer belt unit 64 laser scanning optical path 67
paper support motor 2661 cleaning blade 64, 65 overview 67
parts and diagrams 2530 overview 64 LED lamp module 865
parts and diagrams - transfer belt drive 64, 65 LEDs
covers 2532 internal diagnostics error See lights
parts and diagrams - ejector 90.WX.YZ error 983, 985 left cover 626
unit 2540 video display error 983, 985

3060 Index
left lower cover cleaning the paper dust menus, control panel
parts and diagrams 1384 stick 144, 149 Calibrate/Cleaning 983, 999,
left rear corner cover 616 cleaning the scan glass 144, 149 1020, 1122
left upper cover main assembly Copy (MFP only) 983, 999, 1020,
parts and diagrams 1383 parts and diagrams 154 1064
level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid main board 249 Fax (fax models only) 983, 999,
home sensor, and solenoid (DCF/ main controller 1020, 1115
HCI) hardware configuration 1, 105, General Settings 983, 999,
electrical-mechanical relationships 107 1020, 1022
diagram 1246 new model (IR/UI) 1, 105, 107, Manage Trays 983, 999, 1020,
lights 110 1119
formatter 983, 988, 996 previous model 1, 105, 107 Print 983, 999, 1020, 1119
troubleshooting with 983, 988, main drive Reports 983, 999, 1020
996 electrical-mechanical relationships Scan 1072
limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, diagram 1212 Scan (MFP only) 983, 999, 1020
prefeed sensor, and paper main drive unit 501 Supplies 983, 999, 1020, 1119
empty-1 sensor (DCF/HCI) main exit CAM motor motor error (LaserJet)
electrical-mechanical relationships parts and diagrams 1372 59.WX.YZ error 983, 984
diagram 1248 main exit unit MP unit
limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed parts and diagrams 1370, 1374 electrical-mechanical relationships
sensor, main limit and empty Main exit unit 1302, 1574 diagram 1227
sensors (DCF/HCI) Main frame assembly MSOK 1, 105, 107, 113
electrical-mechanical relationships parts and diagrams 416 multipurpose feeder assembly 1,
diagram 1245 Main frame pickup 44, 52
low voltage power supply (LVPS) parts and diagrams 592
type 4 305 Main frame pickup 1 N
Type 5H 237 parts and diagrams 555
Near Field Communication error
low voltage power supply (LVPS) Main frame pickup 2
81.WX.YZ error 983, 985
fans 301 parts and diagrams 555
Bluetooth error 983, 985
low voltage power supply PCA (Type main output tray motor
external I/O card error 983, 985
3R) 1, 105, 119 parts and diagrams 1385
internal EIO error 983, 985
low voltage power supply PCA (Type main output tray unit
wireless error 983, 985
4) 1, 105, 121 parts and diagrams 1381
network and software
low voltage power supply PCA (Type Main output tray unit 1317, 2047
specifications 1, 6, 33
5H) 1, 105, 117 main parts 154
network interface 1, 6, 33
lower bridge main PCA
NFC kit 291
parts and diagrams 1362 parts and diagrams 1377
no control panel sound 983, 988,
lower rear cover 621 main PCAs (SSBM)
991, 993
lower tray connector 309 electrical-mechanical relationships
note vi
LVPS PCA (Type 3R) 1, 105, 119 diagram 1251
LVPS PCA (Type 4) 1, 105, 121 maintenance 144, 149 O
LVPS PCA (Type 5H) 1, 105, 117 machine cleaning for
LVPS type 4 305 maintenance 144, 149 OPC diagram 1210
LVPS Type 5H 237 preventive maintenance 149 OPE diagram 1207
maintenance counts operating systems, supported 1, 6
M part replacement count 983, operating-environment range
1129, 1136 printer 14
machine cleaning for
maintenance parts 1, 6, 25 operational panel button PCA and
maintenance 144, 149
master system operation key 1, entrance path sensor (SSBM)
cleaning the ADF) 149
105, 107, 113 electrical-mechanical relationships
cleaning the flow ADF white bar
memory error diagram 1263
and CIS (GX ADF) 144
82.WX.YZ error 983, 985 Opt feed drive
cleaning the flow ADF white bar
EMMC error 983, 985 parts and diagrams - drive 927
and CIS (LX/du model) 144
hard disk error 983, 985 option specifications 1, 6, 37, 40
menu map 983, 999 optional configurations 1, 6, 37

Index 3061
 options list 1, 6, 37, 38 paper holding motor ADF (LX models) 706
orderable parts 146, 1354, 2528 parts and diagrams 1385 ADF exterior and ADF pickup(LX
ordering 1272, 1351, 2482, 2525 paper holding unit 2518 models) 737
other errors parts and diagrams 1381 ADF lower image scanner 876
drive unit 983, 1176 Paper holding unit 1319, 2104, ADF main frame assembly (LX
electrical circuit 983, 1176 2974 models) 748
feeding system 983, 1176 paper jams booklet blade 1403
flow ADF 983, 1176 locations 983, 1124 booklet blade motor 1403
fuser 983, 1176 paper path booklet c-fold blade 1397
image system 983, 1176 finisher system 1272, 2482 booklet c-fold motor 1399
laser scanner assembly 983, paper size sensor 495, 922 booklet diverter 1397
1176 paper size sensors (DCF/HCI) booklet diverter motor 1399
scanner 983, 1176 electrical-mechanical relationships booklet diverter unit 1395
output accessory error diagram 1240 booklet end fence unit 1406
66.WX.YZ error 983, 985 paper support motor 3038 booklet entrance 1392
output tray 2518 paper support sensor 3038 booklet entrance unit 1391
output tray motor 3044 paper support unit 2503 booklet entrance-presser
Output tray motor assembly 2940 Paper support unit 2596 motor 1392
output tray motor sensor 3044 paper transfer belt unit 1, 57, 58 booklet exit 1397
Output tray top of stack cleaning blade 1, 57, 58 booklet exit unit 1395
sensor 3045 overview 1, 57, 58 booklet fold motor 1399
Output tray unit 2913 transfer belt drive 1, 57, 58 booklet fold roller 1401
output unit parts 145, 1354, 2528 booklet fold unit 1395
duplex 1 sensor 348 use parts lists and diagrams 146 booklet maker 1389
return sensor 403 Parts booklet maker base 1408
OXPd/Web kit error 2000-sheet HCI cassette 945 booklet paddle unit 1405
45.WX.YZ error 983, 984 2000-sheet HCI drive 930 booklet presser unit 1391
2000-sheet HCI frame 946 booklet stapler unit 1393
P 2000-sheet HCI main 929 booklet tamper unit 1394
2000-sheet HCI pickup 952 bridge unit 1360, 1362
paddle
3000-sheet sHCI (department; buffer diverter 1388
parts and diagrams 1376
E82540/50/60 and buffer unit 1386
paddle motor
E87640/50/60 only) cassettes tray 2/3 413
parts and diagrams 1376
frame 982 cover 1356
paddle unit 2504
3000-sheet sHCI (department; covers 599
parts and diagrams 1374
E82540/50/60 and covers-inner finisher 2532
Paddle unit 1305, 1599, 2681
E87640/50/60 only) main DCF frame 915
page error
1 953 DCF rear frame 921
21.WX.YZ error 983, 984
3000-sheet sHCI (department; DCF second pickup 928
paper detection sensor (SSBM)
E82540/50/60 and drive system 499
electrical-mechanical relationships
E87640/50/60 only) main Dual cassette feeder DCF 891
diagram 1252
3 962 ejector unit 1377, 1380
paper dust brush 178
3000-sheet sHCI (department; ejector unit-inner finisher 2540
paper empty , path, limit-1, and path
E82540/50/60 and end fence unit 1374
sensors (DCF/HCI)
E87640/50/60 only) main entrance motor 1366
electrical-mechanical relationships
5 978 entrance unit 1364, 1366
diagram 1240
3000-sheet sHCI (department; exit assemblies 392
paper empty and limit-2 sensors
E82540/50/60 and exit motor 1372
(DCF/HCI)
E87640/50/60 only) main flow ADF (GX/sGX) 762
electrical-mechanical relationships
6 979 flow ADF image scanner (GX/
diagram 1239
3000-sheet sHCI (department; sGX) 861
paper handling error (LaserJet)
E82540/50/60 and flow ADF main frame (GX/
56.WX.YZ error 983, 984
E87640/50/60 only) pickup sGX) 808
paper handling specifications 1, 6,
cover unit 980 flow ADF open cover (GX/
28
ACR frame assembly 480 sGX) 780

3062 Index
 flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) 798 parts and diagrams 144 power
flow ADF upper pickup (GX/ parts and diagrams, using 146 consumption 1, 6, 14
sGX) 790 parts list and diagrams, how to power subsystem 983, 988
front door 1359 use 146 power supply
front jam cover 1388 parts, main 154 troubleshooting 983, 988, 989
hanress 1356 parts, order by authorized service power-on troubleshooting
inner finisher 2530 providers 145, 1354, 2528 overview 983, 988, 989
left lower cover 1384 parts, orderable 146, 1354, 2528 pre-boot menu options 983, 999,
left upper cover 1383 parts, ordering 145, 1354, 2528 1002
lower bridge 1362 PCA 2450 precations
main assembly 154 PCA connection information 1347 information 1272, 1351, 2525
main exit CAM motor 1372 finisher system 1272, 2482 precautions
main exit unit 1370, 1374 PCA precautions 1272, 1351, 1352, replacing parts 146, 1351, 2525
main frame assembly 416 2525, 2526 prefeed sensor 1 376
main frame pickup 592 PCA-ADF sGX (dn models only) 851 prefeed sensor 2 368
main frame pickup 1 555 pick roller preservice checklist 144, 146, 147,
main frame pickup 2 555 document feeder (LX) 738 1272, 1351, 1353, 2482, 2525,
main output tray motor 1385 pick/feed separation roller 593 2527
main output tray unit 1381 pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and press home sensor, tamper home
main PCA 1377 feed motor (DCF/HCI) sensor, paper detect sensor,
opt feed drive 927 electrical-mechanical relationships tamper motor, press motor, and
paddle 1376 diagram 1248 feed motor (SSBM)
paddle motor 1376 pickup assembly 51 electrical-mechanical relationships
paddle unit 1374 pickup drive 1, 73 diagram 1258
paper holding motor 1385 electrical-mechanical relationships print bar error (PageWide)
paper holding unit 1381 diagram 1218, 1226 62.WX.YZ error 983, 984
paper support unit-inner pickup drive (Tray 2) 331 print drivers, supported 1, 6
finisher 2535 pickup drive Tray 3 or motor 537 Print menu, control panel 983, 999,
rear frame assembly 494 pickup lift motors, feed motor, and 1020, 1119
right door 633 cover open sensor (DCF/HCI) print quality
right door exit 700 electrical-mechanical relationships test 144, 146, 148, 1272, 1351,
right door guide 697 diagram 1237 1354, 2482, 2525, 2528
right door takeaway 700 pickup lifting and empty print quality troubleshooting 983,
right upper cover 1359 sensor 565, 582 1176
ssensor, motor, and roller-inner pickup roller flow ADF skew adjust 983
finisher 2533 ADF 791 image quality 983, 1176
stapler unit 1377 multipurpose 680 other errors 983, 1176
stapler unit-inner finisher 2539 Tray 1 680 print specifications 1, 6, 17
T2 transfer assembly 703 pickup unit 1, 44 Print Test Page 983, 999, 1020,
tamper unit 1377, 1378 electrical-mechanical relationships 1022
tamper unit-inner finisher 2536, diagram 1220 printer
2537 pickup unit 1 556 dimensions 1, 6, 13
toner reservoir (CMYK) 483 pickup lifting and empty operating-environment
top cover 1359 sensor 565 range 14
top door 1359 prefeed sensor 1 376 weight 1, 6, 13
top exit unit 1370 pickup unit 2 575 printer memory error
top lower cover 1372 pickup lifting and empty 20.WX.YZ error 983
top output tray unit 1370 sensor 582 Process Cleaning Page 983, 999,
tray 1 679 prefeed sensor 2 368 1020, 1122
Tray diverter CAM 1369 plastic latches information 1272, product number
tray diverter unit 1367 1351, 1353, 2525, 2527 locating 1, 2
tray jam cover 1369 post-service tests 144, 146, 148, punch unit 1295, 2495
upper bridge 1360 1272, 1351, 1354, 2482, 2525, Punch unit 1502, 3019
parts and accessories 1272, 1351, 2528 punch waste box sensor 3034
2482, 2525 Punch waste full sensor 3033

Index 3063
 R replacing the main toner reservoir motors 515
fuser fan 240 toner supply drive unit 508
real-time clock error
replacing the main SVC part 249 toner supply motors 515
11.WX.YZ error 983
alienation motor 528 top right cover 629
rear frame assembly
bridge unit 317 Tray 1 feed drive unit or
parts and diagrams 494
CRUM connector 341 motor 534
Rear paper support 2617
developer fan 312 tray closing unit 438
Rear tamper 1740, 2757
exit cover 613 upper rear cover 623
rear tamper motor 3040
exit drive unit 521 Reports menu, control panel 983,
rear tamper sensor 3040
exit unit 217 999, 1020
rear view 2482
feed 2 sensor 670 reservoir unit 484
registration assembly 432
feed drive unit or motor, Tray return sensor 403
registration drive 1, 73, 75
1 534 reverse roller
electrical-mechanical relationships
Formatter 275 ADF 810
diagram 1224
Formatter (du models) 271 document feeder (LX) 750
registration drive assembly 546
front cover 601 multipurpose 680
registration pickup diagram 1208
front power cover 608 Tray 1 680
registration sensor assembly 424
front power switch 298 revision history iii
registration unit 1, 44, 51
front top inner cover 611 right door 212
electrical-mechanical relationships
fuser drive board 233 fuser out sensor 664
diagram 1220
fuser/exit drive unit 521 open switch 323
relationships, electrical-mechanical
hard disk drive (HDD) 245 Tray 1 empty sensor 644
diagrams 1212
high voltage power supply (HVPS) Tray 1 paper length sensor 654
removal and replacement 144
board 162 Tray 1 solenoid 684
removal and replacement booklet
high-voltage rail assembly 460 Tray 1 unit 635
finisher 1355
inductor unit 319 Right door
removal and replacement inner
inner front cover 602 parts and diagrams 633
finisher 2529
Island of data (du bundles) 259 right door dampener 443
removal and replacement
Island of Data (IOD) 262 Right door exit
precautions 1272, 1351, 2525
laser scanner assembly 165 parts and diagrams 700
removal order
laser scanner assembly fan 170 right door guide
removing order 144, 146, 148,
left cover 626 electrical-mechanical relationships
1354, 2528
left rear corner cover 616 diagram 1231
removing parts
low voltage power supply (LVPS) Right door guide
checklists 144, 146, 147, 1272,
fans 301 parts and diagrams 697
1351, 1353, 2482, 2525, 2527
lower rear cover 621 right door open switch 323
replacement of maintenance parts
lower tray connector 309 right door output takeaway
developer unit 173
main drive unit 501 electrical-mechanical relationships
flow ADF pickup roller
paper dust brush 178 diagram 1233
assembly 791
pickup drive (Tray 2) 331 Right door takeaway
flow ADF separation roller
pickup drive Tray 3 or motor 537 parts and diagrams 700
assembly 810
pickup unit 1 556 right rear cover 619
fuser unit 225
pickup unit 2 575 right upper cover
image scanner assembly 194
registration assembly 432 parts and diagrams 1359
imaging drum unit 287
registration drive assembly 546
intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
registration sensor S
unit 185
assembly 424
ITB cleaner blade 181 scan glass 863
reservoir unit 484
multipurpose (Tray 1 pickup/ scan joint PCA 1, 105, 130
right door 212
reverse/feed roller 680 Scan menu (MFP only), control
right door dampener 443
pick/feed separation roller 593 panel 983, 999, 1020
right rear cover 619
toner collection unit 159 Scan menu, control panel 1072
toner collection unit (TCU)
replacing parts scan specifications 1, 6, 20
drive 540
precautions 146, 1351, 2525 scanner
toner collection unit (TCU)
caution for moving 1, 81, 90
sensors 335

3064 Index
 CDD and lens 878 side unit stapler-stacker finisher
scanner glass 863 electrical-mechanical relationships detailed specifications 1275
scanner assembly - CDD and diagram 1229 stapler-stacker finisher and booklet
lens 878 size sensor 922 maker
scanner diagram 1206 size sensor, paper 495 detailed specifications 1275
scanner error software and solutions 1, 6, 33, 35 stapler/stacker diagrams 1355
30.WX.YZ error 983, 984 solve problems stapler/stacker parts 1355
scanning system control panel messages 983 static, precautions for 144, 146,
components 1, 81, 84 CPMD 983 1272, 1351, 1353, 2482, 2525,
scanning system components 1, 81, specifications 1, 6 2527
84 copy specifications 1, 6, 22 supplies 1272, 1351, 2482, 2525
security error electrical and acoustic 1, 6, 14 supplies error (LaserJet)
33.WX.YZ error 983, 984 general specifications 1, 6, 15 10.WX.YZ error 983
sensor error maintenance parts 1, 6, 25 supplies error (PageWide)
54.WX.YZ error 983, 984 network interface 1, 6, 33 17.WX.YZ error 983
58.WX.YZ error 983, 984 network specifications 1, 6, 33 Supplies menu, control panel 983,
serial number options 1, 6, 37 999, 1020, 1119
locating 1, 2 options list 1, 6, 37, 38 system error (LaserJet)
service and support paper handling specifications 1, 62.WX.YZ error 983, 984
WISE 144 6, 28 system requirements
service and support information print specifications 1, 6, 17 minimum 1, 6
WISE and CSN 144 scan specifications 1, 6, 20
service approach 144, 146, 1272, software and solutions 1, 6, 33, T
1351, 2482, 2525 35
T1 drive
precautions 146, 1351, 2525 software specifications 1, 6, 33
electrical-mechanical relationships
service functions supplies 1, 6, 24
diagram 1214
capture log 983, 1129, 1174 stacker finisher 1272
T2 transfer assembly
debug log 983, 1129, 1174 Stacker finisher 1280
parts and diagrams 703
envelope rotate 983, 1129, standard (du bundles) document
tamper unit 2507
1174, 1176 feeder
parts and diagrams 1377, 1378
main memory clear 983, 1129, document feeder white
Tamper unit 1308, 1311, 1664,
1174 backing 207
2702
transfer assembly control 983, standard (LX models) document
terms and definitions
1129, 1174, 1175 feeder
glossary
service mode 983, 1129 document feeder whole unit 707
tests
diagnostics 983, 1129, 1137 standard (LX) document feeder
post-service 144, 146, 148,
entering service mode 983, document feeder (ADF) PCA 742
1272, 1351, 1354, 2482,
1129 document feeder feed
2525, 2528
information 983, 1129, 1134 motor 756
print-quality 144, 146, 148,
maintenance counts 983, 1129, standard (LX) document feeder (ADF)
1272, 1351, 1354, 2482,
1136 contact image sensor (CIS) 720
2525, 2528
mode menu tree 983, 1129, document feeder (ADF) jam access
tip vi
1130 cover (LX) 712
toner cartridge 1, 57, 58, 62
service functions 983, 1129, standard (LX/du model) document
dynamic security 63
1174 feeder
toner collection unit 159
sHCI 1, 140 document feeder main
toner collection unit (TCU) drive 540
side high capacity input (sHCI) motor 730
toner collection unit (TCU)
feed motor 967 stapler finisher 1272
sensors 335
lift-up motor 971 Stapler finisher 1280
toner reservoir (CMYK)
pickup motor 963 stapler position motor 3042
parts and diagrams 483
rear cover 954 stapler position sensor 3042
toner reservoir motors 515
sHCI PCA 957 stapler unit 2512
toner reservoir unit 66
side high capacity input tray 1, 140 parts and diagrams 1377
toner supply drive unit 508
Stapler unit 1816, 2811
toner supply motors 515
Stapler unit (booklet) 2308

Index 3065
 top cover tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU Web-based Interactive Search
parts and diagrams 1359 home detect sensor, and stack Engine 144
top cover switch 3046 beam in/out sensors (SSBM) WLED IF PCA 1, 105, 132
top door electrical-mechanical relationships WLED PCA 1, 105, 132
parts and diagrams 1359 diagram 1268 WTB diagram 1210
top door sensor, fold motor, and knife trays WTB drive
home position sensor (SSBM) jams, clearing 983, 1124 electrical-mechanical relationships
electrical-mechanical relationships Trays menu, control panel 983, diagram 1216
diagram 1262 999, 1020, 1119
top exit unit troubleshooting
parts and diagrams 1370 checklist 983, 999
Top exit unit 1300, 1535 control panel checks 983, 988,
top lower cover 991
parts and diagrams 1372 lights, using 983, 988, 996
Top output tray unit 1301, 1561 power 983, 988, 989
top output tray unitr process 983, 988
parts and diagrams 1370 troubleshooting tools
top right cover 629 control panel messages 983
top-beam out sensor, stack motor, CPMD 983
and SKU motor (SSBM)
electrical-mechanical relationships U
diagram 1254
understand lights on the formatter
top-exit path and compile-exit path
formatter lights 983, 988, 996
sensors (SSBM)
understand the lights on the
electrical-mechanical relationships
formatter
diagram 1260
HP Jetdirect LEDs 983, 988, 996
touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no
unit, bridge 317
image) 983, 988, 991, 992
upper bridge
touchscreen has an unresponsive
parts and diagrams 1360
zone 983, 988, 991, 992
upper rear cover 623
Tray 1
upper/lower paper low sensors (DCF/
jams, clearing 983, 1124
HCI)
parts and diagrams 679
electrical-mechanical relationships
Tray 1 empty sensor 644
diagram 1249
Tray 1 feed drive unit or motor 534
USB diagram 1207
Tray 1 paper length sensor 654
Use Requested Tray 983, 999,
Tray 1 solenoid 684
1020, 1022
Tray 1 unit 635
Tray 2 W
jams, clearing 983, 1124
Tray 3 warning vi
jams, clearing 983, 1124 Web-based Interactive Search Engine
tray closing unit 438 WISE 144
Tray diverter CAM Web-based Interactive Search Engine
parts and diagrams 1369 (WISE)
tray diverter unit HP internal users and Channel
parts and diagrams 1367 partners 144
Tray diverter unit 1298, 1367, 1508 weight
tray jam cover accessories 1, 6, 13
parts and diagrams 1369 printer 1, 6, 13
tray motor error (LaserJet) WISE
60.WX.YZ error 983, 984 CPMD 985
tray selection - use requested HP internal users and Channel
tray 983, 999, 1020, 1022 partners 144

3066 Index